Syn EUser Guide

USER GUIDE
SYNERGI ELECTRIC 6.0
January 2017
DNV GL - Software
SAFER, SMARTER, GREENER

About DNV GL
Driven by our purpose of safeguarding life, property and the environment, DNV GL enables
organizations to advance the safety and sustainability of their business. Operating in more
than 100 countries, our 16,000 professionals are dedicated to helping our customers in the
maritime, oil & gas, energy and other industries to make the world safer, smarter and
greener.
Software
DNV GL is the world-leading provider of software for managing risk and improving asset
performance in the energy, process and maritime industries. Our solutions support a variety
of business critical activities including design and engineering, risk assessment, asset
integrity and optimization, QHSE, and ship management. Our worldwide presence facilitates a
strong customer focus and efficient sharing of industry best practice and standards.
Edition
This edition applies to Synergi Electric 6.0 and to subsequent releases and modifications until
otherwise indicated in new editions.
Trademarks
All brands and product names are trademarks of the respective owner.
Restricted rights, warranties, and liabilities
The software discussed in this document is provided under a Software License Agreement and
may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.
All warranties given by DNV GL AS concerning DNV GL asset software are set forth in the
Software License Agreement between DNV GL AS and the licensee.
DNV GL assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. We
reserve the right to change our software and documentation without notice.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions defined as
“Rights specified in the license” as set forth in subdivisions (a) and (b) of the DFARS clause
227.7202-3 entitled Rights in Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer
Software Documentation.
Copyright notice
© 2017 DNV GL AS.
600 Bent Creek Blvd., Suite 100
Mechanicsburg, PA 17050 USA
www.dnvgl.com/software
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING STARTED
Starting Synergi 24
Getting help 25
Synergi documentation 25
Using the Online Help 26
Contacting technical support 28
Synergi Electric Yammer user community 28
Synergi Electric RSS feed 28
Viewing Synergi version information 29
Viewing session data 29
About DNV GL 30
Setting preferences 31
Synergi preferences 31
Unit preferences 34
Map preferences 37
Paths preferences 39
Database preferences 42
Modules preferences 44
Mining preferences 46
Triggers preferences 47
Spacing preferences 49
Categories preferences 51
Feature Locks preferences 53
Using settings groups 55
Creating and editing settings groups 55
Restoring the default startup settings 57
Settings files details 57
Managing data sources 58
Creating a DSA 58
Editing a DSA 59
Using the Data Source wizard 60
Validating DSAs 67
Saving DSAs 67
Deleting DSAs 68
Selecting feeders 68
Finding model data 71
Multi-year modeling 73
Enabling multi-year modeling 73
Setting the analysis year names 73
Setting the model year 74
Editing data in a multi-year environment 76
Configuring how data is copied to other years 77
Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 3

Table of Contents
Editing data for multiple years from the same editor 77

Copying data using the Multi-Year Editor 78
Editing energize and retire years 81
Printing 81
Function key shortcuts 82
Custom keyboard shortcuts 83
USING SYNERGI
Using the Synergi environment 85
Synergi windows 85
Model explorer 85
Ribbon 88
Quick access toolbar 89
Status bar 90
Context (right-click) menus 91
Editing data columns 92
Using the map display 92
Working in the map display 93
Zooming 93
Panning 94
Rotating the map 95
Measuring distances 95
Disabling node editing 96
Refreshing the map display 96
Toggling map details 96
Customizing the map display 97
Theme map settings 98
Style map settings 102
Text map settings 105
Facilities map settings 108
Color map settings 111
Symbols map settings 113
Zoom map settings 115
Background map settings 117
Areas of interest 119
Creating an area of interest 120
Editing an area of interest 121
Area tab – Area of Interest editor 122
Spec Load tab – Area of Interest editor 123
Dist Growth tab – Area of Interest editor 123
Spot Growth tab – Area of Interest editor 124
Reshaping and moving an area of interest 124
Associating an area of interest with a section 125
Deleting an area of interest 126
Location links 126
Creating a location link 126
Launching a location link 127

Table of Contents
Labels 128
Adding a label 128
Editing a label 129
Moving a label 130
Deleting a label 130
Mobile items 131
Legend 131
Views 133
Geographic view 134
Selecting which mapping source to use with the Geographic view 135
Obtaining a Basic key for Bing maps 135
Specifying a coordinate system projection file (PRJ file) 136
Viewing a model in the Geographic view 137
Enabling the Geographic view log window 137
Show Manager 138
Background image support 138
Synergi-supported image types 138
World files for raster images 139
Vector images and supplemental files 140
Working with model and equipment data 141
Loading model data 142
Loading equipment data 145
Saving model data 146
Saving equipment data 148
Sample databases 149
Comparing model data and equipment data 149
Backing up model and equipment data 150
Validating and cleaning up model data 151
Model cleanup scripts 151
Updating database schemas 151
Editing default values for model devices 152
Using subsets 153
Subset types 153
Creating a subset DSA 155
Saving a subset 156
Loading a subset 156
Using versions 157
Creating a version DSA 157
Saving a version 158
Loading a version 159
Deleting a version 159
Using the gallery 159
Using the Export/Import tool 161
Exporting a sample reliability outage file 161
Using the EA Automation wizard 162
Working with other Synergi data types 163
Synergi data types 163

Table of Contents
Supported data formats 166

Microsoft Access (personal database) 166
Microsoft Access (server/DBMS) 167
Binary data format (EDM) 167
MiddleLink 167
MultiSpeak 168
Oracle and SQL Server 168
PI Historian 168
MySQL 168
XML 168
Data mart 169
Partials 170
Data checking when using partials 170
Creating a partials DSA 171
Saving data to a partial 172
Loading data from a partial 172
Protection data 172
General information on protection data 173
Protection database and the TCC 173
Mechanical response times and the protection database 174
Importing GIS data using MiddleLink 174
Benefits of GIS extraction 175
General steps for a Synergi-MiddleLink import 175
Running a MiddleLink data import (model build) 176
The MiddleLink data source—Building a model from a GIS 176
Setting options for a MiddleLink data import 177
Detailed processing during a MiddleLink data import 178
Topology concerns and restrictions 178
Node identification—From/To versus Source/Load 178
Literal handling of empty records—MiddleLink data import 179
Feeder and subtran sources—MiddleLink data import 179
Capacitors—MiddleLink data import 180
Section spacing lookup—MiddleLink data import 180
Switch conversion—MiddleLink data import 180
General rules, messages, and warnings—MiddleLink data import 180
Browser file—MiddleLink data import 181
Automating MiddleLink model builds 182
Overview of MiddleLink automation tools 182
General steps for MiddleLink automation 183
Sample recipe for MiddleLink automation 183
Sample command line for MiddleLink automation 184
Using an enterprise database system 184
Advantages of an enterprise system 185
Setting up an enterprise database system 186
Using an enterprise system 186
Creating an enterprise model DSA 186
Oracle connections for Enterprise databases 187

Table of Contents
SQL Server connections for Enterprise databases 188

Creating a new model in an enterprise database 190
Loading and saving feeders in an enterprise system 190
Deleting feeders and models in the enterprise database 192
Feeder locks and lock IDs 192
Note to database administrators regarding Enterprise databases 193
Model locks for Enterprise databases 193
Word of caution regarding enterprise databases and data integrity 194
Enterprise models and analysis 194
Enterprise database schema 194
Importing real-time data 195
PI Historian 195
PI Messaging script 195
Tag value report 197
DBMS Real-Time Data 197
Automating messaging scripts 200
Working directly with database files 201
Data Source editor 201
Joiner 202
Steps for using the joiner 202
Joiner data sources and DSAs 202
Launching Synergi from the command line 203
Using the Synergi Maintenance Wizard 204
Synergi file summary 205
Using Synergi tools 209
Publishing Export 209
Setting Publishing export options 210
Running a Publishing export 211
Layer creation during a DXF Publishing export 211
SVG output information 213
Regression 213
General steps for using regression 214
Creating a regression file 214
Comparing two regression files 214
Deleting a regression file 215
PowerCalc 215
Starting PowerCalc 215
Understanding PowerCalc 215
Available PowerCalc functions 216
Loading and saving calculation scripts 216
Toolbox 216
Switch Manager 216
Feeder Overview 217
Capacitor Manager 217
Load Center Manager 218
Creating and editing a load center 219
Data Hammer 220

Table of Contents
Database Hammer 221

State Master 222
Media Viewer 222
Library 223
Synergi Remote 224
SQL Dashboard 224
Opening the SQL Dashboard 224
Using the SQL Dashboard 224
Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard 225
Writing a SQL query 226
Showing tables and fields in the SQL Dashboard 227
Running a SQL query and viewing the results 228
Mining in the SQL Dashboard 229
Feature locks and the SQL Dashboard 230
Common SQL commands 230
Sample SQL queries 232
Concepts view 234
Spreadsheet Importer 236
Importing curve data 236
Curve data input format 237
CalcSpy 238
Engineering Calculations 238
Running the Solver from within Synergi 239
EDITING A MODEL
Editing model data 241
Using the Synergi editor 241
Viewing data calculations in the Synergi editor 247
Viewing results in the Synergi editor 247
Undoing and redoing model edits 247
Tagging sections and devices 248
Using the query set 249
Creating a query set from the Synergi map display 250
Creating a query set using the Query Generator 251
Moving and copying sections that are in the query set 252
Removing a section from the query set 253
Clearing the query set 253
Using the Multiple Editor 253
Using the Bulk Editor 254
Using worksheets 255
Using feeder sets 257
Modeling weather conditions 258
An overview of weather modeling in Synergi 258
Defining weather conditions 259
Modeling weather based on set weather conditions 259
Modeling weather using weather profiles 260
Creating a weather profile 261

Table of Contents
Editing a weather profile 261

Configuring a model to use weather profiles 263
Deleting a weather profile 264
Adjusting loads based on weather conditions 264
Configuring seasonal weather modeling 267
Setting the season (summer or winter) for a Synergi model 267
Setting up conductors to use seasonal ratings 267
Setting up regulators to use seasonal ratings 268
Setting up transformers to use seasonal ratings 268
Using weather zones to model variations in weather conditions 269
Creating a weather zone 269
Editing a weather zone 269
Assigning a weather zone to a section 270
Deleting a weather zone 270
Modeling cables 271
General steps for Synergi cable analysis 271
Modeling cables 272
Overview of cable conductor data 272
Types of cable conductors 272
Simple impedance cable model 272
Separate neutral cable model 273
Concentric neutral cable model 273
Tape shield conductor model 274
Three-core cable model 275
Applying conductor types to sections 275
Detailed cable studies using scripts 275
Modeling duct banks 276
Creating a duct bank 276
Editing duct banks 276
Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor 277
Editing general data for a duct bank 277
Editing circuits for a duct bank 278
Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view 279
Opening the Cable Duct Bank view 280
Working in the Cable Duct Bank view 280
Zooming in the duct bank view 281
Duct bank view display properties 282
Direct buried cables in the duct bank view 282
Troubleshooting calculation errors shown in the duct bank legend 283
Duct bank ampacity report 283
Applying duct banks to sections 283
Duct bank evaluation 284
Setting up a duct bank evaluation 284
Performing a duct bank evaluation 285
About section derating 286
Editing time-based data 286
Load growth 286

Table of Contents
Defining load growth groups 287

Selecting the active load growth group 290
Using growth curves 290
Creating a growth curve 290
Editing a growth curve 291
Deleting a growth curve 291
Applying growth curves to sections 292
Configuring Synergi to use growth curves 292
Using growth curves in a multi-year environment 293
Using growth curves in a single-year environment 294
Customer load curves/time-of-day analysis 294
Getting started with load curves/time-of-day 294
Enabling load curves 295
Load curves and load allocation 295
Choosing the time to allocate load 296
Preparing the model for time-sensitive allocation 296
Understanding time-sensitive allocation results 296
Handling the model after time-sensitive allocation 297
Load curves and large customers 297
Load curve summary 298
Customer classes 298
Creating a customer class 298
Editing a customer class 299
Editing load curves for a customer class 299
Editing class information for a customer class 301
Editing coincidence factors for a customer class 302
Editing cold load pickup percentages for a customer class 303
Editing economic data for a customer class 304
Deleting a customer class 304
Customer zones 305
Creating a customer zone 305
Editing a customer zone 306
Applying customer zones to sections in the model 307
Deleting a customer zone 308
DER profiles 309
Viewing model data 310
Organizer 310
InfoPanel 312
Rap Sheets 314
Details rap sheet 314
Voltage Plot rap sheet 315
Arc Flashover rap sheet 316
Fault rap sheet 316
Feeder Browser 317
Importing customer data 318
The CMM process 319
Creating a CMM DSA 319

Table of Contents
Using the CMM wizard 320

Importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set 320
Processing CMM data set bills and loads 321
Updating model loads with a CMM data set 322
Automating the CMM process 323
Writing CMM scripts 323
Viewing CMM script commands 324
CMM script examples 327
Running a CMM script 328
Generating a CMM data set report 328
Creating and destroying data sets 329
Merging data sets 329
Using the model in memory to update data set connectivity 330
CMM and the SQL Dashboard 331
Loading AMI data 332
Editing feeders and subtrans 332
Converting a node into a feeder or a substation node 333
Editing a feeder 334
Feeder tab – Feeder editor 335
Volts/Ohms tab – Feeder editor 336
Node tab – Feeder editor 337
Rates tab – Feeder editor 337
Editing a subtran node 338
Source tab – Subtran editor 338
Volts/Ohms tab – Subtran editor 340
Node tab – Subtran editor 341
Rates tab – Subtran editor 341
Subtran details 342
Using the Substation Wizard 342
Loops and wandering laterals 343
Modeling loops 344
Loop tie switches 344
Analysis considerations for loops and wandering laterals 346
Editing sections 346
Sections 346
Adding a section 346
Editing a section 347
Section tab – Section editor 348
Construction tab – Section editor 349
Properties tab – Section editor 351
Load Dist tab – Section editor 352
Load Spot tab – Section editor 355
Load Proj tab – Section editor 357
Editing projects using the Section editor 358
Editing projects using the Project worksheet 359
Editing projects using the Project Manager 361
Load DTran tab – Section editor 362

Table of Contents
Gen Dist tab – Section editor 367

Zones tab – Section editor 368
Coordinates tab – Section editor 370
Moving and copying a section 370
Changing a section ID 371
Connecting and disconnecting sections 371
Reconductoring and rephasing a section 372
Splitting a section 373
Copying construction data from one section to another 373
Deleting a section 374
About force-unfed sections 374
Conductors 375
Creating a conductor type 375
Editing a conductor type 375
Ratings tab – Conductor Type editor 376
Cable tab – Conductor Type editor 377
Sorting conductor types 378
Deleting a conductor type 379
Conductor configuration and positions 379
Simple impedance 379
Conductor/equivalent spacing 380
Configuration types (detailed spacing) 380
About configuration types 380
Creating a configuration type 380
Editing a configuration type 380
Nodes 381
Viewing nodes in the map display 381
Editing a node 382
Changing a node ID 382
Moving a node 383
Converting nodes to other device types 383
Deleting a node 383
Reducing the number of nodes 384
Setting up a node reduction 384
Performing a node reduction 386
Node reduction methodology 387
Removing nodes 387
Eliminating a node completely 388
Replacing a node with a vertex 388
Detailed operation 389
Node reduction rules 389
Removing vertices 391
Breaking loops with elbows 393
Load handling 393
Graphic Points 393
Adding a graphic point 393
Moving a graphic point 394

Table of Contents
Deleting a graphic point 394

Editing devices 395
Creating and editing devices 395
Adding a device 395
Editing a device 396
Moving a device 396
Copying a device 396
Deleting a device 397
Creating and editing equipment types 397
Creating a device type 397
Editing a device type 398
Copying a device type 398
Deleting a device type 398
Breakers 399
Editing a breaker type 399
Editing a breaker 399
Breaker tab – Breaker editor 400
Relays tab – Breaker editor 402
Construction of the breaker model 403
Adding and removing relays 403
Relay groups 404
Breaker flexibility—A word of caution 404
Capacitors 404
The Synergi capacitor model 405
Fixed and switched capacitor units 405
Capacitor positioning relative to load 406
Capacitor kV rating 407
Controlling switched capacitor modules 407
Capacitor tripping and closing rules 408
Capacitor metering phase 409
Capacitor line-drop compensator 409
Capacitor voltage override 410
Manually turning on a capacitor switched module 410
Editing a capacitor 411
Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor 411
Settings tab – Capacitor editor 414
Motor analysis and capacitors 415
Fuses 415
Editing a fuse type 416
Editing a fuse 416
Fuse tab – Fuse editor 417
VFI tab – Fuse editor 419
Rates tab – Fuse editor 419
Generators 420
Editing a generator type 420
Ratings tab – Generator Type editor 421
Synch kvar tab – Generator Type editor 423

Table of Contents
Editing an inverter 423

Editing a generator 424
Generator tab – Generator editor 424
Details tab – Generator editor 426
Additional notes on generators 427
Large customers 428
Editing a large customer 428
Large Cust tab – Large Customer editor 429
Load tab – Large Customer editor 430
Generation tab – Large Customer editor 431
Customer load curves and large customers (scheduling) 433
Meters 433
Editing a meter 434
Meter tab – Meter editor 434
Demands tab – Meter editor 435
Profile tab – Meter editor 437
Dist Gen tab – Meter editor 438
Reliability tab – Meter editor 439
Zones tab – Meter editor 439
Metering points and load allocation 440
Motors 440
Editing a motor type 440
Ratings tab – Motor Type editor 441
Starting tab – Motor Type editor 442
Editing a motor curve type 443
Editing a motor 443
Motor tab – Motor editor 444
Service tab – Motor editor 445
Starter tab – Motor editor 446
Load tab – Motor editor 446
Motor analyses 447
Reclosers 447
Editing a recloser type 448
Editing a recloser 448
Recloser tab – Recloser editor 449
Setup tab – Recloser editor 450
Primary and Alternate tabs – Recloser editor 451
Rates tab – Recloser editor 452
Recloser mechanical response times 452
Regulators 452
Editing a regulator type 453
Editing a regulator 455
Regulator tab – Regulator editor 455
LTC/LDC tab – Regulator editor 457
Rates tab – Regulator editor 459
Sectionalizers 459
Editing a sectionalizer 459

Table of Contents
Sectionalizer tab – Sectionalizer editor 460

Rates tab – Sectionalizer editor 461
Switches 462
Switch configuration and connectivity 462
Special switch types and functions 464
Editing a switch type 465
Editing a switch 466
Switch tab – Switch editor 466
Rates tab – Switch editor 468
Modeling auto-transfer switches 468
Pad-mounted gear and elbows 469
Elbows 469
Pad-mounted switch gear 470
Converting a node to pad-mounted switch gear 470
Editing pad-mounted switch gear 471
Switch plans 471
Using the Switch Plan Manager 473
Transformers 474
Transformer model 475
Tertiary transformer windings 475
Basic steps for modeling a tertiary winding 475
Specifying secondary versus tertiary connections 476
Transformer connection models 478
Network protectors 480
Tripping and closing the network protectors 480
Sample model 480
Editing a transformer type 481
Ratings tab – Transformer Type editor 482
Taps/Tertiary tab – Transformer Type editor 483
Editing a transformer 484
Transformer tab – Transformer editor 484
LTC/LDC tab – Transformer editor 486
Settings tab – Transformer editor 487
Tertiary tab – Transformer editor 488
Net Protector tab – Transformer editor 488
Rates tab – Transformer editor 489
Editing loads 489
Setting up loads 489
Load types 490
Getting started with load modeling 490
Load %I, %Z, %PQ 491
Capacity factors 492
Projects (Load) 493
Effect of projects on the model 493
Adding, editing, and managing projects 494
Scale Manager 494

Table of Contents
ANALYZING A MODEL
Before you analyze a model 496
Setting a section for analysis 496
Setting model and analysis options 497
Exceptions (Loading) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 497
Exceptions (Other) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 498
Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 499
Start options tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 501
Analysis tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 503
Warnings tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 504
Fixes tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 504
Multi-Year tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 504
Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor 505
Editing time of day settings 506
Selecting a time range for time-based analyses 508
Setting analysis output options 508
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab 509
Using cost data 509
Cost file format 510
Editing a cost file 511
Using What-Ifs 511
Enabling What-Ifs for individual devices 511
Creating What-If scenarios 512
Enabling What-If scenarios 513
After you analyze a model 513
Re-running an analysis 514
Viewing analysis results 514
Using the Results Viewer 515
Using the Results box 515
Using the Broadcaster 516
Using the Voltage Plot 517
Importing and exporting analysis results 517
How results are handled by Synergi 517
Creating DSAs for results import and export 517
Importing results from a database 518
Exporting results to a database 518
Exporting results to Excel 519
Generating result set reports 520
Synergi reports 520
Generating analysis reports 521
Adding notes to reports 522
Printing reports 523
Options, errors, and warnings in reports 523
Dockable reports 524
Enabling dockable reports 525
Docking analysis reports 525
Using the auto-hide feature 529

Table of Contents
Using the auto-zoom feature 531

Grid-style reports 532
Editing the appearance of a grid-style report 532
Customizing the content of a grid-style report 534
Highlighting report data in the Synergi map display 536
Charting report data 537
Saving a grid-style report 537
Exporting a grid-style report to Microsoft Excel 539
Exporting report data to a database 539
Working with sections and devices in grid-style reports 541
HTML reports 541
Synergi charts 542
Creating custom charts 542
Modifying a chart 544
Exporting a chart image 545
Printing a chart 545
Common Synergi analysis types 546
Load-flow analysis 546
Network analysis 546
Network load-flow analysis 546
Network fault analysis 547
Network contingency analysis 548
Time-based analyses 548
Time-series analysis 548
Configuring an external data file for a time-series analysis 549
Setting up a time-series analysis 550
Performing a time-series analysis 551
Single-day analysis 551
Selecting the analysis day for a single-day analysis 552
Performing a single-day analysis 552
Single-year analysis 553
Setting up a single-year analysis 553
Performing a single-year analysis 553
Full-year (8760) analysis 553
Multi-year analysis 554
Setting up a multi-year analysis 554
Performing a multi-year analysis 555
Summer and Winter analysis 555
Batch analysis 556
Configuring an Excel file for a batch analysis 556
Setting up a batch analysis 557
Performing a batch analysis 558
Input and output codes for the Excel data format 558
Locked rotor analysis 561
Capacity 561
Switching 562
Throw-over analysis 562

Table of Contents
Optimal switching analysis 563

Setting up an optimal switching analysis 563
Performing an optimal switching analysis 564
Switch plan analysis 565
Load transfer analysis 565
Switchable load analysis 565
Auto-transfer switch analysis 566
Automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis 567
Substation bus transfer analysis 568
Time-dependent switching analysis 568
Contingency analysis 568
Selecting the contingency analysis method 569
Fast pickup contingency analysis 570
Load Transfer contingency analysis 572
Optimized Pickup contingency analysis 574
Performing a contingency analysis 577
Isolating sections 578
Incremental load analysis 578
Load at Risk analysis 579
Feeder Tie Path analysis 579
Planning 580
Loading analyses 580
Load allocation analysis 580
When to run load allocation 581
About load allocation demands and meters 581
Suggested approaches to load allocation 582
Demands format for load allocation 582
Regulator and capacitor options during load allocation 582
Load allocation calculations with customer load curves 583
Other load allocation considerations 583
Setting up a load allocation analysis 583
Performing a load allocation analysis 586
Forecasting analysis 587
Setting up a forecasting analysis 588
Selecting a forecasting agent 591
Performing a forecasting analysis 592
Dtran processing analysis 592
Setting up a dtran processing analysis 593
Performing a dtran processing analysis 593
Design analyses 594
Capacitor Placement analysis 594
Setting up a Capacitor Placement analysis 594
Performing a Capacitor Placement analysis 595
Phase Balancing and Load Balancing Improvement 597
Phase Balancing Improvement Analysis 597
Setting up a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis 598
Performing a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis 598

Table of Contents
Load balancing improvement 600

Setting up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis 600
Performing a Load Balancing Improvement analysis 601
Evaluation analyses 602
Model feeder analysis 602
Circuit screener analysis 604
Setting up a circuit screener analysis 604
Performing a circuit screener analysis 604
Renewables 604
PV Analysis 605
PV Saturation analysis 606
PV Impact analysis 607
PV Screener analysis 607
PV Hosting analysis 608
PV Studies analysis 611
PV Placement 611
Setting up a PV Placement analysis 612
Performing a PV Placement analysis 613
PV worksheet 614
Protection 615
Protective devices 615
Editing a classic protective device type 616
Editing a classic protective device 616
Prot Dev tab – Protective Device editor 617
Results tab – Protective Device editor 617
Check coordination analysis 618
General check coordination operation 618
Setting up a check coordination analysis 619
Editing analysis settings for a check coordination analysis 619
Setting time and percentage margins for a check coordination analysis 621
Selecting coordination rules for a check coordination analysis 622
Protection pairs and check coordinations 638
Sample feeder and pairs—Check coordination example 638
Pair types and rule prefixes—Check coordination 639
Running check coordination analysis 640
Coordination range of fault levels—Check coordination 640
Cases not checked—Check coordination 641
Ground curve tripping from the inrush of a single- phase transformer 641
Curve shifting through transformers 641
Coordination over non-overlapped ranges 641
Protection evaluation analysis 644
Arc flashover 644
Arc flashover overview 644
Disclaimer 645
Exceptions 645
Model requirements 645
Setting up an arc flashover analysis 645

Table of Contents
Configuring settings for an arc flashover analysis 646

Selection of PPE rating for clothing 646
Editing working distances 646
Creating an arc flashover label 647
Performing an arc flashover analysis 648
Protection curves 648
MiddleLink and the protection curve editor 650
Protection tools 650
Device Lab 650
Creating a Device Lab display 650
Editing a Device Lab display 651
Copying a Device Lab display 652
Renaming a Device Lab display 653
Deleting a Device Lab display 653
Protection Scheme Report 654
Min/max source Z analysis 654
Fault applications 655
Fault analysis 655
Fault analysis types 655
Fault analysis 655
Fault flow analysis 655
Fault voltage analysis 656
Including generators during fault analysis 656
Setting up a fault analysis 656
Performing a fault analysis 659
Fault analysis with wandering laterals 659
Fault sequence analysis 660
Setting up a fault sequence analysis 660
Performing a fault sequence analysis 660
Fault location analysis 661
Fault events 661
Adding a fault event 661
Editing a fault event 662
Deleting a fault event 662
Setting up a fault location analysis 663
Performing a fault location analysis 664
Time versus current coordination (TCC) graph 664
Opening the TCC view 665
Using the TCC explorer 665
Plotting curves on the TCC 665
Adding notes to the TCC 666
Working with breakers and relays in the TCC 666
Changing TCC view display properties 667
Editing curves in the TCC display 667
Editing reference shifting in the TCC display 669
Editing the graph in the TCC display 669
Editing the grid in the TCC display 670

Table of Contents
Editing print settings for the TCC display 670

Plotting conductor damage curves on the TCC 670
Using other TCC functions and features 670
Saving TCC views 672
Saving a TCC view as a TCC set 672
Saving a TCC view as an external file 672
Saving a TCC view as a JPEG or BMP image 673
Copying a TCC view 673
Reliability 673
Setting up a reliability analysis 673
Setup tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor 674
Settings tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor 675
Scalars tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor 677
Performing a reliability analysis 677
Exposure zones 677
Creating an exposure zone 678
Editing an exposure zone 678
Assigning an exposure zone to a section 679
Deleting an exposure zone 679
Mitigation zones 679
Creating a mitigation zone 680
Editing a mitigation zone 680
Assigning a mitigation zone to a section 681
Deleting a mitigation zone 681
Harmonic analysis 681
Harmonic 682
Preparing for a harmonic analysis 682
Creating and editing harmonic curves 682
Creating a harmonic curve 683
Editing a harmonic curve 683
Deleting a harmonic curve 685
Assigning a harmonic curve to a large customer 686
Designating sections for harmonic monitoring 686
Configuring options for a harmonic analysis 686
Harmonic load-flow analysis 687
Harmonic impedance frequency scan analysis 688
Harmonic impedance along path analysis 689
Unfused tap analysis 689
Device risk ranking analysis 690
Reliability Event Management Wizard 690
Performance 691
Motor start analysis 691
Performance comparison 692
Setting up a performance comparison analysis 692
Models tab – Performance Comparison editor 693
Costs tab – Performance Comparison editor 693
Analysis tab – Performance Comparison editor 693

Table of Contents
Running a performance comparison analysis 694

Voltage optimization analysis 695
LTC analysis 695
Determining an optimal regulator position 696
Regulator position processing 696
Setting up a regulator position analysis 696
Performing a regulator position analysis 697
Viewing the results of a regulator position analysis 697
Determining regulator R and X settings 697
Setting up a regulator R and X settings LTC analysis 698
Performing a regulator setting analysis 698
Regulator R and X settings LTC analysis examples 699
Capacitor flicker analysis 702
Conductor selection analysis 702
Conductor selection analysis processing 702
Setting up a conductor selection analysis 703
Performing a conductor selection analysis 704
Economic analysis 704
Managing cost zones 704
Performing an economic analysis 706
Model Inspector 706
Setting up the Model Inspector 707
Running the Model Inspector 708
System health analysis 708
Line Construction report 708
Uncertainty analysis 708
Setting up an uncertainty analysis 709
Performing an uncertainty analysis 709
Unit tests 710
Zones report 711
Power Tool applications 711
I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool 712
Setting up the I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool 712
Performing an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis 712
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 713
Setting up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 713
Generating a Ten-Year Growth Report 714
R&D Analysis 714
RIBBON REFERENCE
Model ribbon 716
Analysis ribbon 721
Capacity ribbon 725
Planning ribbon 729
Protection ribbon 733
Performance ribbon 737
Reliability ribbon 741

Table of Contents
Networks ribbon 743

Tools ribbon 744
Forge ribbon 746
Macros ribbon 749
Views ribbon 752
Support ribbon 757
Display ribbon 761
Navigate ribbon 766
Build ribbon 770
INDEX

Getting Started
GETTING STARTED
Synergi Electric is a software program developed by DNV GL that simulates, analyzes, and
plans power distribution feeders, networks, and substations. The package is a modular
collection of tools built on a by-phase simulation engine. The simulation engine is an object-
oriented design that consists of highly detailed models for power system devices such as
lines, transformer banks, regulator banks, switched capacitors, and active generators. The
models are built to reflect the actual construction of real power system equipment. The
usability and capability of Synergi demonstrates the level of commitment involved in
producing quality analysis software.
Synergi is user-friendly. The distribution system models can be constructed quickly and are
easy to maintain. The tools, utilities, and features were designed to get feeders modeled
quickly and accurately. Data requirements are clearly marked in dialog boxes and are kept to
a minimum so that the models can be specified with basic nameplate parameters.
The device models and calculations used within Synergi conform to the methods accepted and
depended upon by the power engineering community. DNV GL relies on books, manuals, and
technical papers describing algorithms that have been tested and well-proven. Furthermore,
DNV GL is advancing distribution analysis technology in many areas such as device modeling,
Delta-modeling, by-phase looped load-flow and fault analysis, and generator simulation.
Synergi supports an enhanced load model that allows the apportionment of loads into three
classifications. This model provides a better tool for you to create more accurate
representations of a distribution system by having control over the way that loads respond to
their voltage level. Loads can be connected between phases and to ground. A variety of tools
is supplied to allocate loads and simulate growth.
Hundreds of engineers and technicians at utilities around the world use Synergi Electric.
Synergi demonstrates DNV GL’s commitment to provide the most accurate, reliable, and
easy-to-use software designed to meet your engineering and operational needs.
Starting Synergi
Synergi runs a startup script every time you start the application. The script can be in either
the Python script format or in Synergi’s recipe script format.
Most startup scripts are relatively simple in nature and perform a few basic tasks, such as
loading a model and warehouse, selecting feeders, and applying a map display style.
However, being a script, you can modify the startup script to perform any tasks that are
supported by the appropriate script language.
Synergi must have a startup script when it begins. If you delete the startup script file, Synergi
will create a new file automatically. The only way to perform no tasks upon startup is to do
the following:
l Comment out all of the commands in the startup script file.
l Open a special startup editor when you run Synergi, by holding down the Ctrl key as
soon as you start the application. This editor will provide you with several options for
how you start Synergi, including starting Synergi without running the startup script.

Getting Started
The following procedures describe some of the basic tasks related to Synergi’s startup script.
Detailed information on startup scripts, as well as the Python and recipe script formats, is
provided in the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
To specify which script type to run at startup
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
2. In the Preferences editor, click the Synergi tab.
3. Select Use Python for startup script and case files and enable Python scripts
to run a Python script whenever you start Synergi.
—or—
Clear the check box to run a recipe script when you start Synergi.
To set up the current model as a startup recipe script
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Macros tab.

2. In the Tools group, select Startup Script > Startup On This Model.
3. Click Overwrite to overwrite the current startup script.
To access the Synergi Startup Options editor
1. Immediately after starting Synergi, press and hold the Ctrl button.
2. When the Synergi Startup Options editor appears, select from the available options to
determine how to start the application.
Getting help
Synergi Electric includes an extensive set of user documentation, as well as technical support,
training opportunities, and other types of user assistance. Refer to the topics listed below for
more information.
Synergi documentation
Synergi comes with an extensive documentation set. Many documents can be opened from the
Support tab on the Synergi ribbon, while others can be downloaded from the DNV GL
Customer Portal. The following list summarizes the main documents that are provided with
Synergi.
l Synergi Electric User Guide. The User Guide is the complete reference source for the
Synergi user. The User Guide contains the same information as the Online Help but is
formatted for easy reading and printing.
l Synergi Electric Script Guide. The Script Guide contains detailed information on recipe
commands and other scripts commands used with Synergi.
l Synergi Electric Technical Reference. The Technical Reference provides details on the
theory and methods behind the Synergi analyses.

Getting Started
l Synergi Electric Planning Guide. The Planning Guide focuses on procedures for
identifying and correcting problems resulting from the growth and changes in the
distribution system.
l Release Notes. The Release Notes describes the new enhancements, fixes, and updates
that are provided with the current Synergi release.
l Installation Guide. The Installation Guide provides installation procedures and system
requirements for your current Synergi version. It is available for download from the
DNV GL Customer Portal.
DNV GL’s Technical Communications staff welcomes your questions and comments on all
Synergi documentation. Please send your feedback to techcomm@dnvgl.com.
Using the Online Help

Synergi’s Online Help is an HTML-based system that is installed in your Synergi installation
directory. You can open the Online Help from the Windows Start menu as well as the Support
tab in the Synergi ribbon. You can also press F1 at any time while using Synergi to open the
Online Help.
If you are viewing the main Synergi window, the Online Help will open in your default internet
browser. If you are viewing an editor within Synergi, the Online Help will appear inside a
Synergi window that you can dock directly in the application or use as a free-floating window,
just like you can do for many Synergi reports.
Figure 1-1. Embedded help window within Synergi
The following list provides some tips and tricks for using the Online Help.

Getting Started
“Responsive” design
The Online Help will reformat automatically based on the width of your Help window. When
the Help window is wide enough, the Online Help will resemble a traditional Online Help file,
where you can see both the Contents area and the Topic area at the same time. But when you
reduce the width of the Help window, the Help system will reformat to more closely resemble
a mobile app. The Contents area will be accessible by clicking on the Menu button in the
upper-left corner, similar to how you use apps on a tablet or a phone.
Multiple Help guides
The Online Help system includes the full contents of both the User Guide and the Script Guide.
The HTML version of these guides are available in the Contents area of the Help system, while
the PDF versions of these guides can be opened from the Support tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Navigation links
The Online Help includes plenty of navigation links, including "parent topic" links at the top of
every topic and Previous topic/Next topic buttons on the toolbar. You can also press the
Backspace key on your keyboard, or right-click in the Help topic and select Back, to return to
the previously viewed topic. Finally, clicking on the DNV GL logo will bring you back to the
home page for the Online Help system.
Drop-down links
Many topics in the Online Help include headings that you can click to expand subsections,
procedures, and definitions. In the toolbar at the top of the help topic, click the “Expand All”
button to expand all drop-down links at once, and also collapse all drop-down links at once.
Thumbnail images
Many images in the Online Help are formatted as thumbnail images. Simply click on the image
to see it in full size. Other images are set to a maximum width of 100% of your help window
size. This allows the entire image to remain in view no matter how wide or narrow your help
window is.
Search functionality
The Search box is located in the upper-right corner of the Online Help window (or behind the
Menu button when you are viewing the help at the "tablet" or "phone" size).
l Since the Online Help system includes multiple user documents (for example, the User
Guide and also the Script Guide), you can use the Search filter to search through a
single document only or the entire Help system.
l When you search on an item, the searched term will be highlighted in the resulting help
topics. To clear the highlighting, click the “Remove highlights” button in the toolbar at
the top of the Online Help system.
l To search on an exact phrase, enclose the phrase in quotes. If you do not include the
quotes, the Help system will search on each individual word, regardless of whether the
words appear in the order that you typed them. For example, searching for “output
options” (including the quotes) will only return topics where the exact phrase “output
options” is used. However, searching for output options (with no quotes) will return any
topics where the words “output” and “options” are used anywhere in the topic,
irregardless of whether they are together or not.

Getting Started
Our Technical Communications staff welcomes your questions and comments on this help
system as well as all Synergi documentation. Please send your feedback to
techcomm@dnvgl.com.
Contacting technical support

Each Synergi license includes comprehensive technical support. To contact our support
engineers, select the Support tab in the Synergi ribbon and then, in the Help group, click Email
Technical Support. The email feature allows you to attach key files, including the currently
loaded model and warehouse, the current Synergi analysis settings, and a screen capture of
the map. You can send any of these items directly to DNV GL Technical Support for review. A
version report will be automatically attached to the support email as an *.HTML file.
Preparing a technical support email
Contact information is also provided at the bottom of every Online Help topic.
Synergi Electric Yammer user community

The Synergi Electric Yammer user community is a social network that helps you connect and
collaborate with other Synergi Electric users. You can access the Yammer community from
the Support tab in the Synergi ribbon, or by visiting the following link:
https://www.yammer.com/synergielectricusercommunity
Synergi Electric RSS feed

The Synergi Electric RSS feed is a tool that you can use to stay informed on all of the latest
updates from the Synergi Electric team at DNV GL. The RSS feed can include software tips,
new release announcements, and information on training classes, user conferences, and other
Synergi Electric events.

Getting Started
To view the RSS feed from within Synergi, click on the RSS Feed button, located in the upper-
right corner of the Synergi Electric window. Or, to view the feed directly, go to the following
site:
http://feeds.feedburner.com/SynergiElectricNews
Viewing Synergi version information

Perform either of the following procedures to view information on your version of Synergi.
You can view the version information in a traditional “About Synergi” dialog box, or you can
view the version information as a Synergi grid-style report. With the Version report, you can
use Synergi’s report controls to export the version information to an external file format, for
example if you need to send the information to DNV GL Technical Support.
To view Synergi version information
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Support tab.

2. In the Help group, click About Synergi.
To view the Synergi Version report

2. In the Help group, click the text label About Synergi and select Version.
Viewing session data

The Session viewer provides key information about the currently loaded model, warehouse,
and protection database. In addition to the names of the model DSA and the warehouse DSA,
the Session viewer shows the number of devices of each type that are currently in the model,
the number of curve definitions in the protection library, and the number of device types that
are currently available in the warehouse. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
To view session data
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.

2. In the Tools group, click Session.

Getting Started
Viewing session data
About DNV GL
DNV GL
Driven by our purpose of safeguarding life, property and the environment, DNV GL enables
organizations to advance the safety and sustainability of their business. Operating in more
than 100 countries, our 16,000 professionals are dedicated to helping our customers in the
maritime, oil & gas, energy and other industries to make the world safer, smarter and
greener.
Software
DNV GL is the world-leading provider of software for managing risk and improving asset
performance in the energy, process and maritime industries. Our solutions support a variety
of business critical activities including design and engineering, risk assessment, asset
integrity and optimization, QHSE, and ship management. Our worldwide presence facilitates a
strong customer focus and efficient sharing of industry best practice and standards.

Getting Started
Setting preferences
Synergi allows you to customize the overall environment through preference settings. These
settings include items such as the unit system, phase designations, and the voltage base.
Synergi preferences are global. They are saved in either the Synergi Defaults file
(SynDefaults.xml) or the system registry and therefore do not change between Synergi
sessions or models.
To set preferences
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available preference settings.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Synergi preferences" below
l "Unit preferences" on page 34
l "Map preferences" on page 37
l "Paths preferences" on page 39
l "Database preferences" on page 42
l "Modules preferences" on page 44
l "Mining preferences" on page 46
l "Triggers preferences" on page 47
l "Spacing preferences" on page 49
l "Categories preferences" on page 51
l "Feature Locks preferences" on page 53
3. Click OK to accept your changes and close the editor.
Synergi preferences
Use the Synergi tab in the Preferences editor to set general Synergi preferences. Key settings
in the Synergi tab include default naming patterns for new nodes and sections, options to
calculate the length of sections when nodes are inserted, and check boxes related to loop
creation, multiple sessions, and the floating legend window that displays when you start
Synergi.

Getting Started
Synergi preferences
The following list describes the options you can edit. For instructions on opening the editor,
see "Setting preferences" on the previous page.
Allow loop creation
Select this check box to allow loop creation without using any topological workarounds, such
as loop tie switches. For more information on modeling loops, see "Loops and wandering
laterals" on page 343.
Allow multiple sessions
Although you can run multiple sessions of Synergi simultaneously, it generally is not designed

Getting Started
for this sort of operation. The ways in which Synergi references a variety of external files is
well-suited for single session on a local computer, but not multiple sessions, especially on a
network server. These external files include information on analysis settings, analysis output,
and several other critical parameters. If you operate multiple sessions, they can conflict and
overwrite data belonging to one another.
The “Allow multiple sessions” check box can be used to allow multiple sessions, which does
provide some protection against accidental overwrite. When this check box is selected,
Synergi adds a unique identifier to each external file created and/or used by a particular
session. Thus, each individual session uses its own set of files and some data integrity is
maintained. However, be aware that when you close a Synergi session, it will delete all files
associated with that session, including report files and output databases. You will not have the
opportunity to browse your Synergi output after you end a session.
It should be emphasized that running multiple sessions, especially in a network environment,
is not recommended and can produce unpredictable results. If you must have multiple users
simultaneously, you should license individual copies for them and install the application on
their computers. Also, remember that multiple users should never work on the same model at
once, unless you are operating an enterprise database system. For more information on
enterprise databases, see "Using an enterprise database system" on page 184.
Company
Company name, as read from your license file. This field cannot be edited.
Default project name
Default project name.
Generate section ids
Select this check box to have Synergi generate a random section ID when a new section is
modeled. The random ID is generated from a time-based function to help ensure uniqueness.
Generally, this option should be used with enterprise database systems to prevent data
conflicts when saving newly modeled sections.
Lock name
User name that will be used when you check out feeders from an enterprise database.
Synergi’s locking feature prevents other users from saving data to the same feeders that you
are editing. For more information, see "Feeder locks and lock IDs" on page 192.
Node prefix and Section pattern
Default naming convention for new nodes and sections. The section default applies to isolated
(or orphan) new sections only. If you draw a new section attached to an existing one, Synergi
does one of two things:
l If the “Generate Section IDs” check box is selected, Synergi generates a random,
unique section ID.
l If the “Generate Section IDs” check box is not selected, Synergi attempts to maintain
the naming pattern of the section to which you attached the new one.
A pattern can be up to 31 characters long. New, default node IDs will consist of the prefix you
type here and an integer-based time stamp. The section ID pattern must contain at least 4
question marks (????) as a placeholder for the default number.

Getting Started
Prompt for section id

Select this check box to have Synergi prompt you to enter an ID name for each new section
that you create. A default ID name will be provided that you can accept or change. You cannot
edit the ID name once a section has been created.
Section length after node insert
Select an option to indicate whether Synergi should calculate the length of split sections based
on model coordinates, or determine lengths based on proportions of the original section
length.
Show the floating legend window at startup
Select this check box to display the Legend window when you start Synergi. For more
information on the Legend window, see "Legend" on page 131.
Use Python for startup script and case files and enable Python scripts
Select this check box to use the Python script format with Synergi’s startup script and case
files.
—or—
Clear the check box to use Synergi’s recipe script format with Synergi’s startup script and
case files.
User
Synergi user name.
Zoom percentage
Specify the increment of change during a zoom in or zoom out action.
Unit preferences
Use the Units tab in the Preferences editor to set options related to your default units of
measurement. Key settings in the Synergi tab include your units system, phase designations,
voltage base, and year descriptions and other options related to multi-year modeling.

Getting Started
Units preferences
see "Setting preferences" on page 31.
Enable multi-year modeling
Select this check box to fully enable Synergi’s multi-year modeling features. Although this
option has limited control over Synergi functionality, you still must enable it in order to
perform multi-year modeling.
For more information on multi-year modeling, see "Multi-year modeling" on page 73.

Getting Started
Frequency
Frequency to be used in your models. Available choices are:
l 60 Hz
l 50 Hz
Load density
Preferred kW density to be used in your models. Available choices are:
l kW / Square MI
l kW / Acre
Phase designations
Designations for phases 1, 2, and 3, as used in your organization. These designations appear
throughout Synergi, including in the device editors and in Synergi’s reports. The default
values are A, B, and C.
PT secondary
PT Secondary voltage to be used in your models. Available choices are:
l 120V
l 110V
l 100V
The PT secondary voltage option affects voltage and first house settings on regulators and
transformers. For more information, see "LTC/LDC tab – Regulator editor" on page 457 and
"LTC/LDC tab – Transformer editor" on page 486.
Rotation
Phase rotation to be used in your models. This setting can have an impact on line calculators
and rotating machines. Available choices are:
l Positive
l Negative
Unit system
Units of measurement to be used in your models. Available choices are:
l Metric
l English (KFt)
l English (Miles)
Update year descriptions from model
Select whether the years loaded into the “Year Descriptions” fields are loaded from the
Synergi preferences or from the model database.
l If the check box is not selected, the year descriptions are read from the Synergi
preferences. This is the default option. If the model year descriptions do not match the
Synergi year descriptions, you will be notified of the difference and given the

Getting Started
opportunity to cancel the operation. If you continue to load the model, the year
descriptions from the Synergi preferences will be used; the year descriptions from the
model will be ignored
l If the check box is selected, the year descriptions are read from the Synergi model
database. However, if a model is already in memory and additional feeders are loaded,
the check box will be ignored and the behavior described in the “unselected” option
above will be followed.
Voltage base
Voltage base to be used in your models.
Year descriptions
Specify a description for each year in multi-year modeling. These names are for identification
purposes only and do not affect how Synergi regards the time span between years. For more
information, see "Setting the analysis year names" on page 73.
Map preferences
Synergi’s Map preferences allow you to control which internet mapping software you use with
Synergi Electric’s Geographic view.

Getting Started
Map preferences
Clear cache
The Geographic view downloads individual image files, or tiles, that are used to show the
world details in the Synergi Geographic view. Caching image files allows you to view the map
faster as you pan around to different areas of your model.
Use the "Clear cache" button to delete the cache of downloaded image files. The cached image
files are saved in the GeoViewCache folder of your Synergi Documents directory.

Getting Started
After you clear the cache, Synergi will download new image files as needed as you continue to
use the Geographic view.
Geographic view projection
A coordinate system projection (PRJ) file matches the coordinates used in your model the with
real-world coordinates used by an internet mapping source. When you use Synergi's
Geography view, the projection file ensures that your model data aligns with the real-world
images provided by the selected mapping source.
The default projection file that is set up when you install Synergi is named "26753.prj". This
default projection file is associated with the default Synergi model. To use the Geography
view with your model, you must obtain the PRJ file that is associated with your model. You can
obtain this file from your own company or from the internet. (If you need to download a file
from the internet, one website to consider is http://spatialreference.org.) Once you have the
file, use the Map tab of the Preferences editor to use it with Synergi.
For more information, see "Specifying a coordinate system projection file (PRJ file)" on
page 136.
Geographic view source
Select the mapping source for Synergi's Geographic view. Detailed information is provided in
"Selecting which mapping source to use with the Geographic view" on page 135.
Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude
Specify the latitude, longitude, and altitude for your system. These values are used with a
feature on the irradiance profile editor where you can automatically generate irradiance
profiles for your model. For more information, see "Editing a weather profile" on page 261.
Paths preferences
In addition to model and equipment data files, you may interact with a number of different file
types as you use Synergi. Macros, scripts, output data, and settings data are just some of the
features in Synergi that save data in respective file types. The file directories for these file
types are specified in the Paths tab of the Preferences editor.

Getting Started
Paths preferences
By default, Synergi saves these files in two general locations, based on the operating system
that you are using. The default paths for these file locations are defined in the following table.
Directory type Default path (Windows 7)
Documents folder C:\Users\[User Name]\My Documents\DNVGL\Synergi Electric\6
Installation folder C:\Program Files (x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6

Getting Started
The default path for each specific file type is shown below, where [DocumentsDirectory] and
[InstallationDirectory] refer to the respective paths as listed above.
File Type Default Path
Calcs (calculations) [Documents folder]\Calcs
CMM [Documents folder]\Scripts
Events [Documents folder]\Scripts
Gallery [Documents folder]\Gallery
Layers [Installation folder]\GeoLayers
Macros [Documents folder]\Macros
Output [Documents folder]\Output
Device lab [Documents folder]\Device Lab
Scripts [Documents folder]\Scripts
Settings [Documents folder]\Settings
Unit [Documents folder]\Unit
What ifs [Documents folder]\Scripts
Geographic view [Documents folder]\GeoViewCache

cache
In the Preferences editor, you can use the Paths tab to change the target folders for the
various types of files that Synergi uses. You can define a specific location for each individual
file type, or you can define a new location for all files types.
Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To open the Preferences editor – Paths tab
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Paths tab.
To edit individual file paths
1. For each listed path category, type the full path to be used to save all files of the
selected file type, or click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory.

Getting Started
To edit all file paths
1. At the bottom of the Paths tab, select Set root folder for all subfolders.
2. In the text box at the bottom of the editor, type the full path to be used as the root
folder for all Synergi files types, or click the Browse button and navigate to the desired
directory. Once you select a target folder, Synergi will prompt you to create subfolders
in that directory to save each of the related file types.
NOTE: Synergi will not transfer files from the current file locations to the new file
locations. If you wish to continue using your files, you must manually copy the files
from the current location to the new one.
Database preferences
Use the Database tab in the Preferences editor to set options related to the use of Microsoft
Access with Synergi. Key settings in the Synergi tab include selecting which Access format will
be used with new databases.

Getting Started
Database preferences
Format for new databases
Specify the Access file format that will be used for any new databases that you create.
Existing databases will be maintained in their current file format.
The following options are available:

Getting Started
l Use Access 97 format for new databases

l Use Access 2002 - 2003 format for new databases
NOTE: If you install Office 2010 on your computer, the installation will include Microsoft
Access 2010 and thus remove any older versions of Microsoft Access, including Microsoft
Access 2007. When this occurs, you will not be able to work with Access model database
files in Synergi.
If you want to continue working with Microsoft Access model database files while Office
2010 is installed on your computer, you will need to download and install the latest
“Access Runtime” driver from Microsoft. You will need to review and accept Microsoft’s
licensing agreement for this driver before it can be installed.
Id field size in database tables
Specify the size of ID fields in an Access database. Enter a value from 32 and 100 characters.
Prompt if using more than X feeders from a DBMS
Specify a warning limit when loading feeders from a DBMS. If the threshold is exceeded,
Synergi will prompt you before loading additional feeders.
Modules preferences
Your license file determines what features of Synergi you can use, based on your contract
with DNV GL. The core license allows you to use basic modeling, load-flow, and fault analysis
features. More advanced features, including CMM, protection, and reliability, require
additional licensing.
While running Synergi, you can select which licenses are active at the current time. This
feature is designed for use with a network licensing system, where licenses are maintained on
a network server and issued to users on demand. For example, if you had five copies of
Synergi but only two Reliability licenses, then five users could use the basic Synergi
functionality at the same time, but only two users could use the Reliability features at the
same time. If a user attempts to check out a module that is not available, a message will
appear that lists who is currently using the module.

Getting Started
Modules preferences
To open the Preferences editor – Modules tab
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Modules tab.
To enable and disable licenses
1. In the Modules tab of the Preferences editor, in the list of module names, select and
clear check boxes to activate and deactivate licenses.

Getting Started
2. Select the Retain current configuration check box to use the current licensing
settings the next time you start Synergi. If you clear the check box, only the Core
license will be enabled when you restart Synergi.
It is recommended that network license users clear this check box, to help prevent
module licenses from being unnecessarily checked out.
3. Take note of the license expiration date at the bottom of the editor. Synergi will notify
you at startup when the license file’s expiration date is within 30 days of the current
date. Contact DNV GL if your license is about to expire.
The name and location of your license file(s) will also be shown in the lower half of the
editor. The default location for DNV GL license files is C:\ProgramData\DNVGL\License
Files.
Mining preferences
When used in conjunction with a SQL Dashboard query, the mining feature allows you to view
data in non-Synergi databases. A query should first be written in the SQL Dashboard. The
Preference editor can then be opened and the facility type selected from the list. The Name
and SQL Script fields will fill in automatically as an applicable facility type is chosen.

Getting Started
Mining preferences
Triggers preferences
Recipe scripts can be configured to run automatically at the following times:
l Any time you manually load a model.
l Any time you change the year in your Synergi model.
l At a specified time interval when you are using Synergi.

Getting Started
Triggers preferences

To open the Preferences editor – Triggers tab
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Triggers tab.
To run a recipe after a specific type of event
1. In the Triggers tab of the Preferences editor, in the Trigger Recipe section, select the

Getting Started
check box for each type of event that should trigger a recipe to run:
l After model load (manual only)
l After year changes
l Switch open (manual only)
l Switch close (manual only)
2. Next to each selected event, select the name of the recipe that you want to run.
To run a recipe at scheduled intervals
1. In the Triggers tab of the Preferences editor, select Enable automatic recipe runs.
2. Next to Recipe, select the name of the recipe that you want to run.
3. Next to Run every, specify the time interval to run the selected recipe.
4. Select Prompt before running if you want Synergi to prompt you before running the
selected recipe. This will give you the opportunity to cancel the recipe run, if desired.
5. Click Run now if you want to run the selected recipe right away.
Spacing preferences
The sections in your model can be edited to specify the phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
conductor spacing distances and also the distance from the conductor to the ground. In the
Section editor, you can only select from a set of pre-defined values for these options. These
values are defined in the Spacing tab of the Preferences editor.

Getting Started
Spacing preferences
Refer to the following procedure for more information on defining the conductor spacing and
height-above-ground values. For information on setting these values in the Section editor, see
"Construction tab – Section editor" on page 349.
To define conductor spacing and height above ground values
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Spacing tab.

Getting Started
3. To add a value, click the appropriate Insert button and then type the new value.
—or—
To delete a value, select the value that you want to delete and then click the appropriate
Delete button.
Categories preferences
Load categories are an optional Synergi feature that you can use to group common sections
for reporting and mapping purposes. For example, you can assign sections to a “Critical Load”
category. You can then use the load category to filter reports that support the load category
setting, or apply the load category color-by scheme in your Synergi map display. Load
categories have no effect on analysis and do not have any other impact on your model.

Getting Started
Categories preferences
Load categories are defined in the Categories tab of the Preferences editor. Refer to the
procedure below for more information. Load categories are then assigned to sections on the
Properties tab of the Section editor, as described in "Properties tab – Section editor" on
page 351.
To open the Preferences editor – Categories tab
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Categories tab.

Getting Started
To create a new load category
1. In the Categories tab of the Preferences editor, select the row for an empty category.
2. At the bottom of the Preferences tab, type a name and select a color to associate with
the category.
To edit an existing load category
1. In the Categories tab of the Preferences editor, select the row for the category that you
want to edit.
2. At the bottom of the Preferences tab, type a new name and select a new color for the
category.
To delete a load category
1. In the Categories tab of the Preferences editor, select the row for the category that you
want to delete.
2. At the bottom of the Preferences tab, clear the category name or replace it with an
asterisk (*).
Feature Locks preferences

Use the Feature Locks setting in the Preferences editor to prevent changes from being made
to specific aspects of Synergi. For example, if you set a feature lock for Save, you will not be
able to save any model data or warehouse data.

Getting Started
Feature Locks preferences
To set feature locks
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Feature Locks tab.
3. Select the check box for each Synergi feature that you want to lock out.

Getting Started
Using settings groups

Settings files can be used to reconfigure significant parts of Synergi with a single operation.
As a simple example, you can use a settings group to save a favorite configuration of map
display settings. Later, you can quickly restore those map display settings by re-loading the
saved settings group. In fact, you can use different settings groups to save different
configurations of map display settings and switch between them at any time.
In addition to map display settings, settings files can be used to save application settings and
preferences, geobackground settings, and feature lock settings. Available settings groups
include the following:
l Synergi settings. The Synergi settings group include the following categories:
o Applications. All settings that are associated with Synergi analyses and other
applications.
o Preferences. Settings that are associated with editors and printing options.
o Mining. Settings associated with Synergi data mining.
o Display. Map display associated with the Map Settings editor.
Note that the "Default" settings group is a special group that saves all Synergi settings
each time you close the application. When the Default group is selected as your settings
group, Synergi will open every time in the same state you left it.
l Geobackground. Geobackground settings are settings associated with background
images. A Geobackground settings group is essentially a set of images that you can
display at once by activating a single settings group.
l Feature Lock. A feature lock settings file saves your current feature lock
configuration, as set in the Preferences editor. Feature locks prevent changes from
being made to specific aspects of Synergi, by disabling the ability to edit selected
features or perform selected tasks.
NOTE: You can also load two legacy settings groups that were available in previous
versions of Synergi: Application settings and Map settings. Both of these settings groups
have been replaced by the Synergi settings group. To continue using your legacy settings,
load them and then save them to the Synergi settings group format.
Creating and editing settings groups

The Settings Manager is where you save, load, and manage your different settings files. You
can create as many different settings files as needed.
To open the Settings Manager
At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon and then select Settings.

Getting Started
Settings Manager
The following list describes the different options that are available in the Settings Manager.
Compare
Click the Compare button to launch a specified software program that supports XML file
comparisons. You can then use that program to set up the file comparison between two
different Synergi settings files, which are saved as XML files in the Settings folder in your
Synergi Documents directory.
NOTE: Synergi does not actually perform the file comparison; it only launches a tool that
allows such comparisons to be made. You can specify which comparison tool to use after
you click the Compare button, or you can simply launch the comparison tool directly.
Delete
Delete the selected settings file.
Edit
Edit the selected settings file in a specified XML editor.
NOTE: Settings groups are saved as XML files in the Settings folder in your Synergi
documents directory.
Load
Apply the selected settings file to your Synergi session.
TIP: You can also load a settings file by dragging the settings group file from your desktop
or computer and dropping it directly in the Synergi map display.
Save
After typing a new settings file name or selecting an existing settings file name, and also

Getting Started
selecting which settings you want to save in the "Settings contents" list, click Save to save the
settings file.
Settings group
Select which type of settings group you want to work with in the editor.
Startup settings
Specify the settings file that will be applied when you start Synergi. If you select the
"Default" settings file, Synergi will use whatever settings were in use when you last closed the
application.
Restoring the default startup settings

The “Default” settings group in each category is the group that is used when Synergi starts up.
If you save to it, you are effectively changing your startup defaults.
If a defaults file does not exist when Synergi shuts down, Synergi regenerates it with current
settings. Therefore, you can reset Synergi to use the default settings by deleting the defaults
file and restarting the application.
To restore startup settings to the default settings
1. Shut down Synergi.

2. Delete the defaults files that correspond to the settings groups you want to restore. For
more information on defaults files and their locations, see "Settings files details" below.
3. Start Synergi. Because the default settings group from the previous step does not exist,
Synergi will use internal defaults to configure the applicable settings.
4. Shut down Synergi again. In doing so, Synergi will now create the missing defaults file
(s) using the current Synergi settings, which also happen to be the internal default
settings.
Settings files details

Each settings group type is stored in its own file type. These files are maintained by default in
your Settings file directory, which is defined in the Paths tab of the Preferences editor. Some
settings group files (except for the Synergi settings) can be identified by their respective file
extensions, as defined below.
Settings group File extension Default file name
Synergi settings *.xml Default.xml
Geobackground settings *.GbTileSet Default.GbTileSet
Feature Lock settings *.FeatureLock Default.FeatureLock
Synergi maintains default files for each settings group in your Settings file directory. These
default file names are listed in the table above. The default files are read during startup to

Getting Started
retrieve initial settings. These files are never written to automatically, so your startup
defaults will not change unless you manually change them. If you delete a defaults file,
Synergi will regenerate it with current settings during the next shutdown. You can use this
method to restore the defaults file to the original Synergi settings, should you happen to
overwrite your Defaults file by mistake. For more information, see "Restoring the default
startup settings" on the previous page.
Settings files can be shared with other Synergi users to help maintain organizational
consistency. To share a settings file, copy and paste it from your Settings file directory to
another user’s Settings file directory.
For more information on editing path locations, see "Paths preferences" on page 39.
Managing data sources

A data source alias (DSA) provides an intelligent link to your Synergi data. With DSAs, you do
not have to remember where a source file is located, or even what it is named. All data in
Synergi is loaded, saved, and imported and exported by selecting the appropriate DSA.
A typical DSA contains the location and name of the data source file. Some DSAs may contain
additional information, depending on the DSA type or data type. For example, a MiddleLink
DSA contains settings that are required for a MiddleLink data import, while a DSA for an
enterprise database model contains information about the server, database, and user
permissions. All of this information is configured using Synergi’s Data Source wizard.
Creating a DSA
To create a DSA manually
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
2. In the Data Sources editor, click Add.
3. Use the pages in the Data Source wizard to configure the new DSA. The Data Source
wizard options are described in "Using the Data Source wizard" on page 60.
4. When you are finished configuring the new DSA, click Add.
To create a DSA automatically
Most Synergi editors where you can select a DSA (such as the Load Feeders/Stations editor
shown below) provide a Browse button where you can directly select the name of a file on
your network.
l If a DSA is already associated with the file you select, that DSA will be highlighted when
you return to the Synergi editor.
l If a DSA does not exist for the file you select, you will be prompted to specify the name
of a new DSA to be used with the file. You can then select the new DSA to work with the
file.

Getting Started
Browse button, Load Feeders/Stations editor
To create DSAs for all databases in a folder
2. In the Data Sources editor, next to Operation, select Create data sources for all
databases in a folder and then click Go.
3. Use the Select Folder editor to select the folder that contains the databases for which
you want to create Synergi DSAs.
4. Click Select Folder. The new DSAs will be included in the list of data sources when you
return to the Data Sources editor.
Editing a DSA
To edit a DSA
2. In the Data Sources editor, select the name of the DSA that you want to edit and then
click Edit.
3. Use the pages in the Data Source wizard to edit the new DSA. The Data Source wizard
options are described in "Using the Data Source wizard" on the next page.

Getting Started
Data Source wizard, Page 1
4. When you are finished editing the DSA, click Update.

5. Click OK to close the Data Sources editor.
Using the Data Source wizard

DSAs are edited using the Data Source wizard. You may only see some pages of the wizard,
depending on the type of DSA you are editing.
To edit a DSA using the Data Source wizard
2. In the Data Sources editor, select the DSA that you want to edit and then click Edit.
3. Use page 1 of the Data Source wizard to specify general information about the DSA,
including its name and data source format.

Getting Started
The following list describes the options you can edit on page 1 of the Data Source
wizard.
l Description. Name that will be used to identify the DSA in Synergi.

l Provider. Specifies the data source type, such as Access, Oracle, or MiddleLink.
l Source is read-only. Select this check box to mark the DSA as read-only. This
will prevent you from being able to save data to the DSA using Synergi.
Note that this check box does not set the read-only status on the file itself; you
can still edit the file using a database editor such as Microsoft Access. The check
box only impacts what actions you can perform in Synergi.
l Apply model lock to DBMS when reading (recommended). Select this
option to apply a model lock to a DBMS when reading model data. This prevents
one user from altering tables while another user is reading them. While this
option is recommended, it can be disabled if multiple users load feeders from the
same model.
l Notes. Use the Notes field to enter a description or provide other comments
regarding the DSA.
4. Use page 2 of the Data Source wizard to associate a file or database with the DSA.

Getting Started
Data Source wizard, page 2
wizard.
l Path. Specify the path to the data source. You can select an existing file to type
the name of a file that does not yet exist. In this case, the file will be created the
first time you save data to that DSA.
l User name. If required, specify a user name to connect to the data source.
l Password. If required, specify a password to connect to the data source.
l Worksheet. The Worksheet text box only appears when you are creating or
editing a Microsoft Excel DSA. Use this text box to specify the name of the
worksheet in the target Excel file from which your data will be imported or
exported.
l Test connection. Click this button to test the connection to the data source.
After testing the connection, Synergi will report “Success” or “Failure” in the
wizard.
l Execute SQL after connect. If desired, select this check box and then type SQL
commands that you want to execute immediately after Synergi connects to the
specified database. The SQL commands can be used to perform tasks such as
configuring the database or setting the version.
5. Use page 3 of the Data Source wizard to associate one or more data types with the DSA,
such as model data or equipment data. Synergi data types are described in "Synergi

Getting Started
data types" on page 163.
6. If you are creating an enterprise database DSA, use page 4 of the Data Source wizard to
specify enterprise-related options. A specific procedure for creating an enterprise DSA
is provided in "Creating an enterprise model DSA" on page 186.

Getting Started
NOTE: If you are creating a DBMS-type data source, a “No Model” button is included
on page 4 of the Data Sources wizard. Click this button if you want to set up a DSA
that has no assigned model. This feature allows you to set up a warehouse-only
DSA, with no associated model.
7. If you are creating a MiddleLink DSA, use page 5 of the Data Source wizard to specify
several options that are specifically related to MiddleLink imports.

Getting Started
wizard.
l Phases. Designates the letters assigned to phase positions in the database.
l Calculate length. Sets Synergi to calculate section lengths based on node
coordinates. If this option is set, all lengths of all imported sections are
calculated, regardless of any length values found in the data source file.
l Set neutral phase. Sets Synergi to add a neutral phase to any line read from
the data source without a neutral phase.
l Volt base. Voltage base used by your organization, used to configure the SAI_
Control table in the model data source.
l Length multiplier. Multiplier used for section lengths read from the data source.
The multiplier also applies to calculated lengths, if the “Calculate length” option is
selected.
8. If you are creating a partial DSA, use page 6 of the Data Source wizard to select which
data categories will be saved with the partial data set. A specific procedure for creating
a partial DSA is provided in "Creating a partials DSA" on page 171.

Getting Started
9. Use the last page of the Data Source wizard, page 7, to verify the settings that you
configured for the DSA. If you are satisfied with the settings, click Add or Update to
accept the changes and close the Edit Data Source wizard. Otherwise, click Back to
return to previous pages of the wizard and make further edits, as required.

Getting Started
Validating DSAs
Synergi’s data source validation tool can help you manage your list of DSAs by verifying the
accuracy of each one. An invalid DSA indicates that the associated file could be missing or
inaccessible, or an enterprise database connection could not be made.
To validate DSAs
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon.
2. Select Data Sources > Validate Sources.
Saving DSAs
When you add, edit, and delete DSAs using the Data Sources editor, those changes are not
saved to the SynDataSources.xml file until you exit Synergi. However, a Save button is
provided in the Data Sources editor to immediately save the changes that you have made.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.

Getting Started
To save DSAs
2. Click Save. A confirmation message will appear in the Synergi status bar when the save
has completed.
Deleting DSAs
To open the Data Sources editor
At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
To delete a single DSA
1. In the Data Sources editor, select the DSA that you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
To delete multiple DSAs
1. In the Data Sources editor, hold the Ctrl and Shift keys as you select the DSAs that you
want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.
To delete all DSAs
1. In the Data Sources editor, click the Delete All button.

Selecting feeders
You can have many feeders loaded in memory, but only “selected” feeders are generally
available for use with Synergi. For example, only selected feeders are shown in the map
display and the model explorer. Many analyses will only consider selected feeders.
To select feeders
1. Do one of the following to open the feeder selection editor:

l Press F2 on your keyboard.
l Right-click in the map display or model explorer and select Select Feeders.
l In the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab. Then, in the Select group, select
Select Feeders.
2. In the feeder selection editor, select the check box for each feeder and substation
transformer you want to be selected. From this editor, you can also do the following:
l Select multiple items in the list. Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select a range or
items, or click the Select All button to select all items in the list. When multiple

Getting Started
items are selected, you can click the Select, Clear, and Toggle buttons to
change the status of the selected items.
l Filter the list of feeders. Click in the filter area for the data column you want to
filter. Type the text to filter for, and then click the Filter button. Delete the text
you typed and click the Filter button again to remove the filter.
l Zoom to the selected feeders and substation transformers. Select the Zoom to
network bounds on selection check box.
l Include transmission models in the selection list. Select Include Transmission
Models.
3. Click OK.
To select feeders from the Synergi ribbon
The Model tab of the Synergi ribbon includes six buttons that provide a quick method to select
certain configurations of feeders and substation transformers. Refer to the following
procedure for more information.
2. In the Select group, next to the Select Feeders button, use the buttons listed below to
select and clear feeders and substation transformers in your model.
l Select Window. Select only the feeders that are currently visible in the Synergi
map window. All other feeders will be deselected.
Figure 1-2. Select Window button
l Select Region. Select feeders in the displayed region. Feeders not previously
showing on the map will be selected and displayed.
Figure 1-3. Select Region button
l Select Adjacents. Select non-selected feeders with ties to selected feeders.

Getting Started
Figure 1-4. Select Adjacents button
l Toggle Subs. Toggle the selection set of substation transformers.
Figure 1-5. Toggle Subs button
l Get Last Feeder Selection. Revert to the previous set of selected feeders.
Figure 1-6. Select Last button
l Select All. Select all feeders in the model.
Figure 1-7. Select All button
To select feeders from the map context menu

Do any of the following:
l To select a single feeder only
1. In the model explorer or the Synergi map display, locate the feeder that you want
to select.

Getting Started
2. Right-click on a section that is included in the feeder and select Select Feeders
> Select Only This Feeder.
l To deselect a single feeder
1. In the model explorer or the Synergi map display, locate the feeder that you want
to deselect.
2. Right-click on a section that is included in the feeder and select Select Feeders
> Toggle Feeder Selection.
l To repeat the last feeder selection
1. Right-click in the Synergi map display.
2. Select Select Feeders > Get Last Feeder Selection.
To configure feeders to be automatically selected when you load a model
1. Open the Feeder editor and select the Feeder tab.

—or—
Open the Subtrans editor and select the Subtrans tab.
2. Select the Display on Load check box.
NOTE: You can also create recipes that perform automated feeder selection. In
particular, if you have your startup recipe set to load model data, you might include
commands to select certain feeders as well. For more information, see the Synergi
Electric Script Guide.
To clear all feeder selections
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Display tab.

2. In the Tools group, click Clear.
Finding model data

Synergi provides a search tool that you can use to quickly locate sections, devices, and other
items in your model. This tool is located above the model explorer, next to the year indicator.
To search for an object in your model, click the “Search” text and then type the name or
partial name of the object you want to find. Wildcard characters may also be used as a part of
the search criteria, as described in the procedure below.

Getting Started
Figure 1-8. Search tool
The search tool searches the entire model in memory—not just the selected feeders, which is
what you can see in the map display and model explorer. If you select a model object that is
located on an unselected feeder, Synergi will prompt you to add the feeder to the selected set
so that the model object may be viewed.
To use the search feature
1. At the top of the Synergi model explorer, click Search ....

2. Type the object name or partial object name that you want to find. The results list will
update automatically with each character that you type. If desired, you can use the
following symbols to further filter the search results:
l ? is a wildcard character that represents a single unknown character.
l * is a wildcard character that represents multiple unknown characters.
l < or > will filter for items greater or less than the given value.
l != will filter for items that do not equal the given value.
To remove a filter, delete the text that you typed.
3. To narrow the search to a specific object type or a group of object types, right-click on
the search text and then select the check box for each object type that you want to
search. Available categories include Devices, Equipment, Feeders, Nodes,
Sections, and Text Labels. All categories are selected by default.

Getting Started
4. To see more details about a specific item in the search results list, click on the item’s
name. The object will be highlighted in the model explorer, and the map display will
zoom to the location of the object. You can then use standard model explorer or
mapping tools to edit the object or to perform other tasks.
5. Click anywhere outside the search results list to close the search window.
Multi-year modeling
A Synergi model contains base year data and can optionally include up to 10 additional years
worth of data. With this capability, you can avoid the need for multiple models or versions.
Synergi allows you to independently model 11 years of data in the same file.
Multi-year modeling is an optional feature in Synergi. If you use this functionality, you must
constantly be aware of which year is set in Synergi and how that impacts your data entry and
analysis tasks. For example, when you edit data for a section or facility, you are generally
editing the data for the display year. But your model settings control how those edits are
applied to future and past years. In addition, some sections and devices may not even be
shown in the map display or the model explorer, if the display year falls outside the range of
the energize and retire years for those sections and devices. Because of these issues, it may
be a good practice to browse through your model years and also review your multi-year
preferences and model settings before you begin to edit data and run analyses.
Enabling multi-year modeling

To fully take advantage of multi-year functionality in Synergi, you must enable the multi-year
modeling environment. Although the preference described below has only a small impact on
Synergi functionality, you must still enable it in order to perform multi-year modeling
successfully.
To enable multi-year modeling
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Units tab.
3. Select the Enable multi-year modeling check box.
For more information on the Units tab of the Preferences editor, see "Unit preferences" on
page 34.
Setting the analysis year names

Synergi’s multi-year environment includes a total of 11 years: the base year plus 10 future
years. The labels for all 11 years can be set in the Units tab of the Preferences editor. You can
name the analysis years as anything you want, within a six-character limit. The labels appear
in many places in Synergi, including the model explorer and analysis reports.
A key point to remember is that, with one exception, a Synergi year does not necessarily
represent a calendar year. All analysis and modeling activities treat the 11 years

Getting Started
independently, with no consideration of a time span from one “year” to the next. For example,
you could use one “year” in the model as a summer model, and the next “year” in the model
as the following winter model. In this case, the “years” in Synergi are more of a classification
type for two different versions of the same model than a literal representation of successive
calendar years.
The one exception to this rule is in regard to growth curves. Because growth curves define
yearly growth rates, the associated calculations are directly related to a time span of 365
days. For example, if you analyze “Year 5” of your model with growth curves, Synergi will
apply 5 years of growth based on your growth curve values. Therefore, if you use growth
curves, you must either adhere to actual yearly spans or extrapolate growth curve values that
reflect non-annual rates.
To rename years for a multi-year environment
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Units tab.
3. Under Year Descriptions, enter a new name for each year, as required.
NOTE: You can also enter a numerical value for the Base Year, such as “2016”, and
then click the “Fill in years (from base)” button to automatically populate the values
for the 10 future years, based on the base year value.
Setting the model year

Use the year indicator at the top of the Synergi model explorer to set the model year. As you
change the model year, Synergi will update dynamically to reflect the data for the selected
year. You can see these changes in many places, including the model explorer, map display,
and any open editor. This makes it easy to cycle through your model years and see the
differences in your model for each successive version.
Most modeling and analysis is performed on the selected year only. For example, if you run a
load-flow analysis while the interface is set to Year 1, the analysis uses Year 1 data and
ignores any other years. Therefore, it is always important to be aware of what year is set for
your model.
To set the model year
At the top of the model explorer, next to the year indicator, click the up arrow to increase the
analysis year, and click the down arrow to decrease the analysis year. The base year is shown
in a different color to distinguish it from other analysis years.

Getting Started
Selecting the analysis year
You can also right-click in the analysis year area to select from a list of all analysis years.

Getting Started
Selecting the analysis year by right-clicking
Editing data in a multi-year environment

For each year, a Synergi model can contain unique data for a number of different values,
including but not limited to the following:
l Distributed and spot loads
l Meter device values/demands
l Switch and protective device status (open/closed)
l Conductors and phasing
l Construction types and height
l Rephrasing, reconductoring, and burying of distribution lines
In general, when you edit data in Synergi, you are editing the data for the current model year.
Your model settings determine how those changes are applied to other model years. To edit
data for other years, you can also do any of the following:

Getting Started
l Change the model year and then edit the data as appropriate for that year. (Be aware
that your model settings may continue to apply your edits to other model years.)
l Use the multi-year editor to copy selected categories of data from any one model year
to any number of other model years.
l In some cases, you can edit data for multiple years directly in the Synergi editor,
without changing the model year.
Configuring how data is copied to other years

Your model settings determine how data that you edit in one year is applied to other years in a
multi-year modeling environment. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
To configure how data is copied to other years

2. In the Settings group, click Model.
3. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Multi-Year tab.
4. Use the Multi-Year tab to configure how edits made to one year are applied to other
years.
l Current year only. The new value is applied to only the current year.
l Copy forward. The new value is applied to the current year and copied ahead to
all future years. The values for previous years are not changed.
l Increment forward. The new value is applied to the current year. The delta
between the new value and the old value is added to the value for each successive
year.
l Proportion forward. The new value is applied to the current year. The new
value is divided by the old and that result is multiplied to the value on each
successive year.
l All years. The new value is applied to all years.
5. Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Editing data for multiple years from the same editor

Some data can be edited for multiple years from the same editor. The following list provides
some examples of the types of data you can edit:
l Fuse: Open/closed status
l Large Customer: load values
l Meter: Metered values and ratings
l Recloser: Open/closed status
l Sections: Load values, phasing, conductor types, configurations, and exposure factors
l Switch: Open/closed status

Getting Started
When you hover your mouse over one of these fields, an arrow will appear in the corner of the
editing area. (For some fields, the list will appear automatically after you momentarily hover
the mouse over the field.) Click on the arrow to open a list of the yearly values for the item,
and then edit the yearly values directly in the list.
The following figure shows an example of editing multi-year data for a large customer load.
Editing multi-year data for a large customer
Copying data using the Multi-Year Editor

The Multi-Year Editor is a tool that you can use to copy selected categories of data from any
model year to any number of other model years. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.

Getting Started
To copy data using the Multi-Year Editor
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Tools tab.

2. In the Model group, click Multiyear Editor.
3. On the first page of the Multi-Year Editor, select Copy from one year to other
years, and then click Next.
Multi-year editor, page 1
4. On the next page of the Multi-Year Editor, do the following:

a. Under Copy From, select the year that you want to copy data from.
b. Under Copy To, select the check boxes for each year that you want to copy data
to.
c. Under Categories, select the data categories that you want to copy to the
specified years.

Getting Started
5. Click Next to copy the data.

6. The final page of the Multi-Year Editor shows the results of the multi-year copy. Click
Finish to close the editor.

Getting Started
Editing energize and retire years

Energize and retire years are specified in the section and device editors. Sections and devices
will not be shown in the Synergi map display or model explorer when their Energize and Retire
years are outside the scope of the current model year. When you run an analysis on a year
when a section or device has not yet been energized or has already been retired, Synergi
regards those sections and devices as completely absent from the model.
In fact, if you are editing a section or device and you set the Energize or Retire year to a year
that is outside the scope of the current model year, the section or device will disappear as
soon as you click the Apply button. You will need to change the model year to a year when the
section or device is still active in order to see it again.
When you add a new section or device to your model, the energize year is automatically set to
the current model year, and the retire year is automatically set to “Never”.
Printing
You can print any Synergi view, including the map, charts, and TCC graphs. You can also view
a print preview before printing, to get an idea of what the output will look like. Note that print
preview is not always 100% reliable, especially with HTML reports. This is due to the
variations between file formats and printer types, of which Synergi, like any software
product, is unable to fully accommodate.

Getting Started
Before printing a Synergi view, you should make sure that your page setup options reflect the
type of printout you want. Page setup options control overall appearance features, including
margins and font styles. You can also configure page setup options for specific Synergi view
types, including the map display, report and chart windows, the Organizer, and the TCC.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on using the Page Setup editor.
To edit page setup options
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon. Hover the mouse over Print,
and then select Page Setup.
2. On the left side of the Page Setup editor, select from the following tab names to edit
page setup options for all Synergi printouts:
l Margins. Sets the page margins and unit of measurement (either inches or
centimeters).
l Options. Specifies whether you want to include the project name, current
date/time, title lines, and logo in your reports.
l Font sizes. Sets font sizes for the various text categories that may appear on the
printout.
3. In addition, select from the following tab names to edit page setup options for printouts
of specific Synergi views.
l Map. Sets the title, legend, and other options for map display printouts.
l TCC. Sets the title text for TCC view printouts.
l Chart. Sets the title text for chart view printouts.
l Cable. Sets the title text for Cable Duct Bank view printouts.
l Report. Sets the title text, alignment, and other options for any Synergi report
printouts.
l Joiner. Sets the title text, alignment, and other options for Joiner view printouts.
l Projects. Sets the title text for the Project Worksheet.
l Feeders. Sets the title text for printing the Feeder view in the model explorer.
l Organizer. Sets the title text for the Organizer view printouts.
l DTrans. Sets the title text for the DTrans view printouts.
l Facilities. Sets the title text for the model explorer's Facilities tab printouts.
l Protection Tree. Sets the title text for TCC's protection tree printouts.
4. Click OK to accept your changes and close the Page Setup editor.
Function key shortcuts

The following table describes the function key shortcuts that are available in Synergi.

Getting Started
Function key Action
F1 Opens the Online Help file. In most cases, a help topic will
display that corresponds to the currently displayed editor.
F2 Opens the Select Feeders editor.
F3 Toggles the map details. This will show or hide the device
symbols.
F4 Opens the Results Viewer.
F5 Switches to Default mode.
F6 Switches to Spatial Query mode.
F7 Opens the PowerCalc application.
F8 Closes all open reports.
F9 Opens the Map Settings editor.
F10 Displays hot-keys for the Synergi ribbon.
F11 Refreshes the map display.
F12 Re-runs the last analysis.
Custom keyboard shortcuts

Synergi includes a custom keyboard shortcut editor that you can use to assign any keyboard
shortcut to any available Synergi option.
To open the Customize Keyboard editor
1. Click the down arrow at the right end of the quick access toolbar and select More
Commands.

Getting Started
Figure 1-9. Customizing keyboard shortcuts
2. In the Customize editor, next to Keyboard shortcuts, click Customize.

To assign a keyboard shortcut
1. In the Customize Keyboard editor, use the Categories list and the Commands list to
locate and select the Synergi command that you want to set. The Categories list
corresponds to the tabs in the Synergi ribbon, and the Commands list correspond to
available options on the selected category.
2. Place the cursor in the Press new shortcut key text box.
3. Use the keyboard to press the keyboard shortcut that you want to assign to the selected
command. The key combination that you press will be displayed in the text box.
4. Click Assign.
To unassign a keyboard shortcut
1. In the Customize Keyboard editor, use the Categories list and the Commands list to
locate and select the Synergi command that you want to set. The Categories list
corresponds to the tabs in the Synergi ribbon, and the Commands list correspond to
available options on the selected category.
2. Place the cursor in the Press new shortcut key text box.
3. Click Remove.
To reset all keyboard shortcuts
1. In the Customize Keyboard editor, click Reset All.

2. Click Yes to confirm the action.

Using Synergi
USING SYNERGI
Synergi is designed to be intuitive and user-friendly, and a thorough knowledge of its
interface will significantly increase productivity. From little shortcuts to big time-savers, you
should take some time to learn about the features provided to optimize your Synergi usage.
Using the Synergi environment

Refer to the topics listed below for general information on working in Synergi.
Synergi windows
Synergi allows you to view the map, reports, and many other windows all at the same time.
Some windows, such as the map window and the Organizer, can only be opened once. Other
windows can be opened multiple times. For example, you can open multiple report windows to
view different reports at the same time. If you close the map window and all windows
associated with the model, the model will be closed.
To rename a window
In the tab for the Synergi window, double-click on the window name and then type a new
name. Renamed windows are a temporary change. If you close the window and then open it
again, the original window name will be restored.
To change between windows
Click on the tab names above the Synergi windows to view the open windows. You can also
press Ctrl+Tab or use your mouse side buttons to cycle through open windows.
To view a window in full screen mode
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Views tab.

2. In the Views group, select Full Screen.
In full screen mode, the Synergi ribbon, model explorer, and all windows except the
active window are hidden from view. The Windows task bar is also hidden from view.
You can use the right-click menu, keyboard shortcuts, and mouse buttons to perform
the same tasks you could perform in the traditional Synergi view. However, any tasks
that you can only access through the ribbon, model explorer, or other means will not be
available.
3. To exit full screen mode, press Esc or click the Exit button.
Model explorer
The model explorer organizes your model data in a tabbed area to the left of the map display,
providing you with quick and easy access to the feeders, sections, and devices in your model.
The model explorer also provides access to your equipment warehouse and to the legend for
your Synergi map display.

Using Synergi
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on the different tabs that are included in
the model explorer.
Model tab
The Model tab in the Synergi model explorer provides access to all sections, nodes, and
devices in the model, including feeder and subtran sources. The upper half of the Model tab
lists object categories, such as Network, Facilities, and Zones. The lower half of the Model tab
lists specific objects in the selected category, plus pertinent information for each listed object.
For example, switches include the section’s ID, open/closed status, and switch type.
Regulators, meanwhile, lists the regulator status (on or off), amp rating, and AMS link.
You can double-click any object name in the Model tab to open the editor for that object. You
can also right-click on the object name to open a context menu with a variety of editing and
navigational options.
The following list includes the major categories that are included in the Model tab:
l Network. The Network category includes lists of the feeders, nodes, sections, and
subtrans in the active feeders in your model.
l Facilities. The Facilities category includes lists of all of the devices in the active feeders
in your model. If no devices of a particular type exist in the active feeders, then that
device type will not be listed in the Facilities category.
l Locations/Groups. The Locations/Groups category includes lists of the labels, switch
plans, and TCC sets in the active feeders in your model.
l Section Lists. The Sections Lists category includes lists of sections that share common
features, such as contingency sections, sections with automatic switches, and sections
with notes. Devices with notes and devices with links are also included in the Section
Lists category. If no sections exist in the active feeders in the model that meet the
criteria for a specific category, then that list will be empty.
l Facility Lists. The Facility Lists category includes lists of facilities with any exceptions or
with loading exceptions only. If no facilities exist in the active feeders in the model that
meet the criteria for a specific category, then that list will be empty.
Warehouse tab
The Warehouse tab in the Synergi model explorer lists all equipment types that are available
for modeling, according to the equipment data that is currently in memory. You can quickly
add a device anywhere on the model by dragging an equipment type from the Warehouse tab
and dropping it onto a section or to another appropriate area in the Synergi map display. You
can also double-click on any equipment type name to open the editor for that item.
Some equipment type categories, including fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers, breakers, and
protective devices, are listed in the Warehouse tab as “General” items. This is because these
items are defined entirely by instance data and do not reference a device type in the
equipment dataset. Capacitors are also defined entirely by instance data, although they
appear to have “types” in the Warehouse tab. These types are not actual equipment types,
though, and have no corresponding record in the equipment dataset. They are intended only
as a more convenient way of modeling a certain size capacitor, without having to enter kvar
values following each drag and drop operation. Therefore, although they appear in the
Warehouse tab, capacitor types actually only represent “pre-populated” instance data.

Using Synergi
Facilities tab
The Facilities tab in the Synergi model explorer lists various categories of facilities and
devices in a hierarchical view, organized by feeders and sections. The options list at the top of
the tab can be used to select the facility category that you want to view. The following
categories are available:
l Conductors
l Devices
l Fault Devices
l Fused Taps
l Loads > 100 kVA
l Loads > 50 kVA
l Phasing
l Protective Devices
l Switches
Once you select a category, you can expand and collapse the feeder and section names in the
Facilities tab to see all devices of the selected type. The right-click menu includes many
options that you can use to work with a device, including zooming or panning to its location in
the map display, toggling its Query status, and opening the device editor.
Query tab
The Query tab in the Synergi model explorer provides access to the query set, which is a
temporary group of sections that you want to work with in Synergi. Multiple edits, for
example, are often performed on sections or devices associated with the sections that are
included in the query set. In addition, some Synergi analyses can only be run on sections in
the query set.
For more information, see "Using the query set" on page 249.
Feeders tab
The Feeders tab in the Synergi model explorer displays a topological tree view of any feeders
that are currently selected in the model as well as all of the sections that are associated with
those feeders. The sections in the Feeders tab are grouped in order starting with the feeder
source and cascading downstream throughout the feeder. Devices are not included in the
Feeders tab.
You can double-click any object name in the Feeders tab to open the editor for that object. You
can also right-click on the object name to open a context menu with a variety of editing and
navigational options.
Legend tab
The Legend tab in the Synergi model explorer displays a detailed legend for the Synergi map
display. The legend shows the current color and line options that are being used by the map,
as well as the device type symbols and the coordinates for the area that is currently visible in
the Synergi map display. The same legend you see in the Legend tab is included when you
print the Synergi map display.
For more information, see "Legend" on page 131.

Using Synergi
Toolbox tab
The Toolbox tab in the Synergi model explorer provides access to a several tools that allow
you to focus on specific aspects of your model and their effect on the model as a whole. The
following tools are included in the Toolbox tab:
l Switch Manager. The Switch Manager allows you to see certain switch pairs in the
selected feeders as well as general information about the feeders, such as connected
kVA, power factor, and low volts. Using the Switch Manager, you can toggle the status
of any switch pair and run a quick load-flow analysis to see the results. Only switches
that can transfer load from one selected feeder to another are listed. Therefore, you
must have more than one feeder selected for the tool to have value.
For more information, see "Switch Manager" on page 216.
l Feeder Overview. The Feeder Overview gives general information about selected
feeders, including minimum and maximum voltages, maximum loading, and some basic
equipment information. The Feeder Overview is designed to give you an overall view of
your feeders and provide quick access to some basic editing functions.
For more information, see "Feeder Overview" on page 217.
l Capacitor Manager. The Capacitor Manager displays all capacitors in the selected
feeders as well as general information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power
factor, and low volts. You can use the Capacitor Manager to toggle the on/off status of
any capacitor and run a quick load-flow analysis to see the results.
For more information, see "Capacitor Manager" on page 217.
l Load Center Manager. The Load Center Manager allows you to pinpoint an area of your
map and determine the amount of load within that area. This is an excellent means to
determine the placement of a substation or feeder.
For more information, see "Load Center Manager" on page 218.
Ribbon
The ribbon, which runs along the top of the Synergi window, provides quick access to all of
Synergi’s commands. The ribbon is a replacement for menu paths and toolbar buttons. Groups
of related functions are organized by tabs in the ribbon and then organized into functional
groups.
Many ribbon tabs are always visible in Synergi, no matter which type of window you are
viewing. Other ribbon tabs are only available with specific window types. When you are
viewing the map display, for example, ribbon tabs are available for building models,
navigating in the map display, and editing display settings. The report window, meanwhile,
has a ribbon tab that is dedicated to report-related tasks, such as printing and saving report
data.
You can double-click on any tab in the Synergi ribbon to minimize the ribbon, so that only the
tab names are visible. When minimized, the ribbon will appear when you click on any tab
name, and it will be hidden again after you click on a button in the ribbon or click in the main
Synergi window. Double-click again on any tab in the ribbon to maximize the ribbon.

Using Synergi
Quick access toolbar

The quick access toolbar is a small toolbar that by default appears in the top-left corner of the
Synergi window. During installation, the quick access toolbar is configured with the New
Model, Undo and Redo, and Re-run Analysis buttons. However, you can customize the toolbar
to include virtually any feature that is available in Synergi. This includes all options that are
available in the “permanent” ribbon tabs as well as those tabs that are available with specific
window types, such as the Map window and Report window. The quick access toolbar is an
easy way to customize Synergi to access the tasks you commonly perform.
To move the quick access toolbar
Click the arrow at the end of the quick access toolbar and select Show Below the Ribbon or
Show Above the Ribbon.
To customize the quick access toolbar
1. Click the arrow at the end of the quick access toolbar and select More Commands.
Figure 2-1. Customizing the quick access toolbar
2. Use the Customize editor to add and remove commands from the quick access toolbar.
The procedures below describe the different tasks that you can perform.
To add a command to the quick access toolbar
1. In the Customize editor, under Choose commands from, select the ribbon tab that
includes the command that you want to add.
2. Under Commands, select the command that you want to add to the quick access
toolbar.

Using Synergi
3. Click Add.
To remove a command from the quick access toolbar
1. On the right side of the Customize editor, select the command that you want to remove
from the quick access toolbar.
2. Click Remove.
To reorder commands in the quick access toolbar
1. On the right side of the Customize editor, select the command that you want to move.
2. Click the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the command.
To reset the quick access toolbar to its default settings
1. In the Customize editor, click Reset.

To customize keyboard shortcuts
In the Customize editor, click Customize. Refer to "Custom keyboard shortcuts" on page 83
for more information.
Status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the Synergi application. The status bar provides key
information about the model you are editing and in some cases even lets you change options
that are being used in your model.
The default fields that are shown in the status bar are as follows. You can right-click on the
status bar to remove any of these fields, if desired.
l Status area. The status area, located at the left end of the status bar, updates
dynamically as you move the mouse around Synergi. It can show geographical
coordinates of the mouse location in the Synergi map display, and the name and key
data for a section or device that the mouse is on top of. This area also shows feedback
messages for many Synergi actions.
l Data source. The names of the current model DSA is shown near the middle of the
status bar. When you hover the mouse over the DSA name, the model path, warehouse
DSA, and warehouse path are also shown.
l Model characteristic and application setting codes. The status bar displays two sets of
status codes enclosed in brackets (for example, < Z > and < DY >). The first status
code shows model characteristics, and the second status code shows application
settings. The meaning of these codes is discussed below.
l Time and weather data. Time and weather data is shown near the right end of the status
bar. This area includes the Time of Day Adjustment (specified in the Hour/Day tab of the
Time and Weather Options editor), the Seasonal Rating (specified in the Model tab of the
Model and Analysis Options editor), and the current temperature. You can double-click
this area of the status bar to open the Time and Weather Options editor.

Using Synergi
l Model and Analysis Options editor. A link to open the Model and Analysis Options editor
is provided near the right end of the status bar. Click the “M” to open the editor. For
more information on editing model and analysis options, see "Setting model and
analysis options" on page 497.
l What-if scenario. The current what-if scenario is shown near the right end of the status
bar. Clicking on the current scenario name will open an options list that you can use to
select a different scenario name. Clicking the “>” symbol next to the scenario name will
open the What-Ifs editor. For more information on working with what-if scenarios, see
"Using What-Ifs" on page 511.
l Growth group. The current growth group is shown at the right end of the status bar.
Clicking on the growth group name will open an options list that you can use to select a
different growth group name. Clicking the “>” symbol next to the growth group will
open the Growth Options editor. For more information on working with growth groups,
see "Selecting the active load growth group" on page 290.
Model characteristic codes

The model characteristic codes are the first set of codes that you will see enclosed in brackets
in the Synergi status bar. The meaning of these code letters is as follows:
l F – Forced unfed areas are in the model.
l L – Loops are in the selected feeders.
l U – Unfed areas exist in the model.
l X – External tie to non-loaded feeder exists in the model.
l XA – Auto-transfer tie to non-loaded feeder exists in the model.
l W – Wandering laterals are in the selected feeders.
l Z – Some sections are energized in years not being analyzed.
Application setting codes

The application setting codes are the second set of codes that you will see enclosed in
brackets in the Synergi status bar. The meaning of these code letters are as follows:
l D – Time of day modeling is activated.
l G – Growth is activated.
l Y – Year other than year 0 (base year) is being analyzed.
Context (right-click) menus

Context menus appear when you right-click in different locations in Synergi. The menu items
that you see will change based on where you right-click the mouse. Many of the options
available in the context menus are also available through the Synergi ribbon.

Using Synergi
Editing data columns

Data columns within Synergi’s windows and reports can be edited by resizing and moving the
columns. You can also sort and filter the data in the columns. The changes that you make will
be retained in future Synergi sessions. The model explorer, report results, and Organizer are
just some of the Synergi window types that can be organized, sorted, and filtered using these
methods.
To move a data column
Click on a filter header and drag the column to move it to a new location.
To resize a data column
Place the pointer between two column headers. Click and drag the mouse to resize the column
width.
You can also double-click the column divider to resize the column to the width of the longest
data value.
To add and remove data columns
In the Synergi model explorer, right-click on any column header. A list will appear showing all
available column headings. Select the check box for each data column that you want to show,
and clear the check box for each data column that you want to hide. Click OK to accept your
changes and close the data column list.
To sort a data column
Click on a column header to sort the data on that column. The data will be sorted
alphabetically or numerically, depending on the data that is contained in the column. Click the
column header again to reverse the sort order.
To filter a data column
Click in the filter area and type the text to filter for, and then click the Filter button. Delete the
text you typed and click the Filter button again to remove the filter. The filter field is not case-
sensitive.
l * is a wildcard character that represents multiple unknown characters.
l ? is a wildcard character that represents a single unknown character.
Using the map display

The Synergi map provides a geospatial representation of your model. The map is based on the
geography and scale of your system, as defined in your model data.
The Synergi map provides many more features than traditional maps, including the following:
l Extensive control over symbology, coloring, and line styles based on many different
possible parameters, including construction characteristics and analysis results.

Using Synergi
l A comprehensive set of navigational and zooming features, including the ability to

bookmark specific areas with views and points of interest.
l Quick editing of model data, by allowing you to produce an editor by double-clicking on
any object in the map display.
A thorough understanding of the map, especially coloring and annotation features, will
improve your productivity with Synergi.
Working in the map display

Refer to the topics listed below for general information on working in the map display.
Zooming
You can zoom in and out of the Synergi map display by using the mouse scroll wheel, as well
as by selecting options in the right-click menu and on the Navigate tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Since the many zoom options are self-explanatory, they are not described in detail here.
When you zoom in and out of the map display, certain features in the map may change based
on your Synergi settings. For example, you can use the Zoom tab of the Map Settings editor to
specify the scale at which different map display symbols are displayed. This allows you to
reduce map clutter when you zoom out from your model, but see detail when you zoom in to
your model.
To zoom using the mouse
Perform any of the following actions to zoom using the mouse:
l Move the mouse scroll wheel forward and backward to zoom in and out of the map
display.
NOTE: The specific zoom direction when you move the mouse scroll wheel can be
changed by an option in the Map tab of the Preferences editor. For more
information, see "Map preferences" on page 37.
l Press and hold the Shift key and then click the left mouse button one time to zoom out
of the map display.
l Press and hold the Ctrl key and then click and drag the left mouse button to create a
zoom box.
To zoom using the Synergi ribbon
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Navigate tab.

2. Use the buttons in the Zoom group to zoom to different areas of the Synergi map
display.
To zoom using the right-click menu
1. Right-click in any empty area in the Synergi map display.

2. Select Zoom and then select the zoom action that you want to perform.
To zoom from a Synergi report
Double-click in any row in a Synergi report. The map display will zoom to the location of the

Using Synergi
feeder or device from that table row.

If you double-click on a feeder or device name (which is indicated with blue text in the
report), the editor for that feeder or device will open.
To zoom from the Synergi editor
From a feeder or device editor, click the Locate button. The map display will zoom to the
location of that feeder or device.
Locate button in the Synergi editor
Panning
Panning allows you to move the map up, down, left, or right to view different areas of your
map display without changing the scale. You can use the mouse or the arrow keys to pan the
map display.
To pan using the mouse
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Display tab. In the Settings group, make sure the
Drag Panning button is selected (highlighted).
2. Select the Build tab. In the General group, select Default or press F5 to enter Default
mode.
3. Click and hold the mouse in the map display, and then drag the mouse to pan to a new
location.
To pan using the scroll wheel
l Hold Shift and scroll the mouse wheel to pan the map left and right.
l Hold Ctrl and scroll the mouse wheel to pan the map up and down.
To pan using the keyboard
1. Click anywhere in the map display to activate the map.

2. Using your keyboard, press the Up, Down, Left, or Right arrow key to pan the map
display in the selected direction.
TIP: Panning with the keyboard is particularly helpful when you are drawing
sections that extend beyond the current map bounds. You can pan with the keyboard
while you are drawing the section with the mouse.

Using Synergi
To pan using the map centering mode

2. In the Zoom group, click Pan Centering.
3. Click anywhere in the map display to center on that location.
4. Press F5 to exit pan centering mode.
Rotating the map

Perform one of the following procedures to rotate the map display. Note that raster images
cannot be rotated. The map rotation options will be disabled and the map rotation reset to
zero if you add a raster image to the map background.
To rotate the map using the Synergi ribbon

2. In the Zoom group, click Clockwise or Counterclockwise.
3. Click in the map display to rotate the map in the selected direction. Click again to
continue rotating the map. Each click of the mouse will rotate the map display by
15 degrees in the specified direction.
4. Press F5 to exit map rotation mode.
To rotate the map using the mouse scroll wheel
1. Press and hold the Ctrl key.

2. Scroll the mouse wheel forward and backward to rotate the Synergi map display. Each
movement of the mouse scroll wheel will rotate the map display by 15 degrees in the
specified direction.
Measuring distances
Perform the following procedure to measure the distance between different points in the
Synergi map display.
To measure distances in the Synergi map display
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Build tab.

2. In the General group, click the Map Measure button or press Ctrl+M to enter the map
measurement mode.
3. Click on the first point in the map display to begin the measurement. A dotted line will
appear as you move the mouse away from the point you clicked. The distance from the
starting point to the current mouse location is displayed in the status bar, in both feet
and miles.
4. Click the left mouse button to add a vertex point to the measurement. Each time the left
mouse button is clicked, another vertex point will be added. The distance shown in the
status bar will be the sum of your measurements, including the distance in each vertex
that you have created.

Using Synergi
5. Press Esc to end the current measurement.

6. Press F5 to exit map measurement mode.
Disabling node editing

Like any other Synergi object, you can double-click on nodes in the map display to launch the
Node editor. However, because nodes are rarely edited, you can disable the ability to open
the node editor from the map display. This can make it easier to edit devices and sections,
especially in a congested model.
To enable/disable node editing from the map

2. In the Settings group, click the Allow Node Selection button. When the option is
selected (highlighted), nodes are visible in the map display and can be edited by double-
clicking on them. When the option is not selected (not highlighted), nodes are not visible
and the node editor cannot be opened in this manner.
Figure 2-2. Allow Node Selection button
Refreshing the map display

Refer to the following procedure to refresh (redraw) the map display. Normally the map is
refreshed automatically after most edit actions, but it may sometimes be necessary to refresh
the map display manually.
To refresh (redraw) the map display
In the Synergi ribbon, select the Display tab. In the Tools group, click Refresh.
—or—
Press F11 on your keyboard.
Toggling map details

Synergi’s “toggle” feature can be used to quickly hide details on your Synergi map display,
including the equipment symbols and custom labels. When these details are hidden, only the
sections and a few key symbols, such as feeder and subtran symbols, will remain in view.
This feature is for display purposes only. All equipment is still considered during analysis.
To toggle the map details
In the Synergi ribbon, select the Display tab. In the Tools group, click Details.

Using Synergi
—or—
Press F3 on your keyboard.
—or—
From the Style tab of the Map Settings editor, click the Hide details check box.
Customizing the map display

The Map Settings editor provides control over a large number of map customization features,
including:
l Line styles and colors
l Equipment symbols, colors, and visibility
l Flow arrows and other annotations
l Tiles (background images)
The settings that you configure in the Map Settings editor can be saved as a map display style.
Map display styles allow you to switch quickly from one set of Map Settings options to
another. Even though the Styles options are found on the Theme tab, they control all of the
settings in the Map Settings editor. The Styles options are also located on the Display tab of
the Synergi ribbon.
To customize the map display
1. Open the Map Settings editor by using any of the following methods:
l In the Synergi ribbon, select the Display tab. Then, in lower-right corner of the
Settings group, click the Display Settings button.
Display Settings button in the Synergi ribbon
l Double-click in any empty location in the Synergi map display.

l Press the F9 key on your keyboard.
2. On the left side of the Map Settings editor, select from the different tab names to access
the available map display settings. Refer to the following topics for more information:
l "Theme map settings" on the next page
l "Style map settings" on page 102
l "Text map settings" on page 105
l "Facilities map settings" on page 108
l "Color map settings" on page 111

Using Synergi
l "Symbols map settings" on page 113

l "Zoom map settings" on page 115
l "Background map settings" on page 117
3. Once you have configured the map display as desired using the Map Settings editor, you
can use the Styles options on the Theme tab to save your settings as a map display
style. Map display styles allow you to quickly change from one preferred configuration
to another.
Theme map settings

Use the Theme tab in the Map Settings editor to customize section colors and sizes in the
Synergi map display. You can select color-by schemes that are based on your model data and
also by analysis results. The color definitions for the scheme you select will be shown in the
Legend tab of the Synergi model explorer.
l When coloring based on model data, you can select from a number of pre-defined color-
by schemes. These include the following:
o Conductor count. Applies section coloring based on the number of conductors in
each section.
o Exceptions. Applies unique colors for sections that produced exceptions during an
analysis.
o Feeders. Applies different colors for each selected feeder.
o Phases. Applies different colors for each type of phasing.
o Elbow. Applies unique colors to indicate whether there is no elbow on either end of
the section, an end is open, or an end is closed.
l To color by analysis results, you must first perform the desired analysis. The result sets
for that analysis will then be available in the Theme tab. You can set up six “results”
ranges with either automatic or custom values. Values that are out of the defined range
can also be shown with an optional color and custom line thickness.

Using Synergi
Theme map settings
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Theme tab of the Map Settings
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Customizing the map display" on page 97.
Apply line width
Select this check box to enable the Width options, where you can specify the line thickness for
each analysis results range. Select the “empty” line width option to hide that range in the map
display.

Using Synergi
Auto intervals
When you select this check box and click the Apply button, the Min and Max cells will
automatically be populated with the minimum and maximum values for the selected analysis
results type. The values in the remaining analysis results range cells will be evenly distributed
between the Min and Max values
Color by
Select a coloring scheme for the Synergi map display. The color schemes in this list are all
based on model data, such as Feeders, Phasing, and Conductor Count.
TIP: You can also select the color-by scheme from the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Clear results
Click to delete all current results sets.
Default colors
Click to reset the color options to the Synergi defaults.
Flow arrows
Select how flow arrows are shown in the Synergi map display. You can specify the size of the
flow arrows. The recommended size is 20.
Flow arrows can provide a helpful visual reference of power flow or model topology. For
example, “Real Power Flow” displays flow arrows pointing in the direction of the power flow
on the map.
NOTES: You can also select the flow arrow option from the Display tab of the Synergi
ribbon. To hide flow arrows, select the “No Arrows” option.
Invert colors
Click to reverse the order of the color choices.
TIP: You can also set the “Invert Colors” mode from the Display tab in the Synergi ribbon.
In the Tools group, click the Invert Colors button.
Max, Min, and Out-of-range
Specify a range of values and colors to be used by the selected results color-by choice. You
can enter the range of values manually, or you can use the “Setup max -> min” button to have
Synergi automatically fill in the values based on the selected results category.
Open in Excel
Click to open the selected results data set in Excel. For more information, see "Exporting
results to Excel" on page 519.
Results for thematic mapping
Select the analysis category that you want to use to color sections in the Synergi map display.
NOTE: If the options list is empty, then no analysis has been run and thus no results are
available to display.
Setup max -> min
Click this button to evenly distribute the intermediate range values based on the specified Max
and Min values.

Using Synergi
Show annotation
Select this check box to enable section and equipment annotation. Additional annotation
settings are found on the Text tab. For more information, see "Text map settings" on
page 105.
Show section results
Select this check box to enable result-based annotation. Additional annotation settings are
found on the Text tab. For more information, see "Text map settings" on page 105.
Styles
The settings that you configure in the Map Settings editor can be saved as a map display style.
Map display styles allow you to switch quickly from one set of Map Settings options to
another. Even though the Styles options are found on the Theme tab, they control all of the
settings in the Map Settings editor.
l To apply a style: Select the name of the style you want to apply from the options list.
l To create a style: Type the name of the new style and then click the Add button.
l To replace a style: Select the name of the style you want to replace, configure the new
settings for the style, and then click the Add button.
l To delete a style: Select the style that you want to delete and then click the Delete
button.
View mode
Select how feeders and sections are shown in the Synergi map display. This option works in
conjunction with the feeder selection set, as described in "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
The available view modes include the following:
l Adjacent feeders. Synergi displays selected feeders using the colors defined in the
Feeder editor. Unselected adjacent feeders in are shown in Synergi’s “non-selected”
color, which by default is gray. (This color can be changed in the Color tab of the Map
Settings editor.)
l All feeders. Synergi displays selected feeders and any unselected feeders from the
same substation(s) as selected feeders. Selected feeders are shown using the colors
defined in the Feeder editor, while unselected feeders are shown in Synergi’s “non-
selected” color.
l Regional. Synergi displays selected feeders using the colors defined in the Feeder
editor. Any other feeders in the region are shown in Synergi’s “non-selected” color.
l Selected feeders. Synergi displays selected feeders only, using the colors defined in
the Feeder editor.
l All switching. Synergi only displays sections that are along the paths from open
switches back to the feeders.
l Xfer switching. Synergi only displays sections that are along the paths from transfer
switches back to the feeders.
l Auto switching. Synergi only displays sections that are along the paths from
automatic switches back to the feeders.

Using Synergi
l Sub switching.
l Breaker zone 1. Synergi only displays sections that are within the first zone of a
breaker.
NOTE: You can also select the feeder view mode from the Display tab of the Synergi
ribbon.
Style map settings

The Style tab in the Map Settings editor allows you to set up a number of map customization
features. For example, you can set the background color, set the line style for one-, two-, and
three-phase lines, and configure settings that control how devices, queries, and text labels
are shown in the Synergi map display.

Using Synergi
Style map settings
The following lists describes the options you can edit from the Style tab of the Map Settings
Background color
Under Style, select the color that you want to apply to the background of your map display.
You can also select a second color under Master and then select and clear the Master check
box to specify which of the two colors is applied.

Using Synergi
TIP: You can also select a map background color from the Display tab in the Synergi
ribbon, in the Background group.
Black & white mode
Select this check box to remove all coloring from the map display. This mode is designed to
make the map display easy to print.
NOTE: You can also set the “black and white” mode from the Display tab in the Synergi
ribbon. In the Background group, click the Black & White Mode button.
Hide
Select any of the following options:
l Hide details. Hide device symbols, labels, and other details in the map display,
leaving only the line sections. You can perform this same function by pressing F3 or by
clicking the Details button in the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Synergi will also hide details automatically in some circumstances, such as when a
model is loaded that adds 30,000 or more sections to the set of selected sections. This is
done to improve the loading time of the model. When this occurs, you can re-enable the
map details through any of the methods described here.
l Hide sections fed by tap fuse. Hide all sections that are downstream from a tap
fuse.
l Hide all sections fed by any fuse. Hide all sections that are downstream from any
type of fuse.
l Hide sections rated < X amps. Hide all sections that are rated below a specified
amp value. Summer and winter continuous ratings are used.
Line styles
Select a style that you want to use to show the lines in your model, and also the specific line
styles for three different categories within the selected style.
l Phasing. Select this option to apply unique line styles for three-phase, two-phase, and
single-phase lines.
l Overhead/underground. Select this option to apply unique line styles for overhead,
underground, and underground lateral lines.
l Switch path. Select this option to apply unique line styles for transfer lines, feeder
only lines, and laterals.
l Feeder tier. Select this option to apply unique line styles for the first half of a feeder,
the second half of a feeder, and laterals.
Note that the selected line styles are not affected by the zoom level.
Show
l Section symbols. Expand the options list and then select the check box for each type
of section for which you want to show a symbol in the map display, such as sections

Using Synergi
with projects or sections with spot loads.

The symbol characteristics, including the symbol type, size, and color, are defined on
the Symbols tab of the Map Settings editor. For more information, see "Symbols map
settings" on page 113.
l Show only these facilities. Select specific device types that you want to show in the
map display. Unselected device types will not be shown.
You can also select the “Show Only” option from the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon.
l Text labels. Show text labels in the Synergi map display. Click the Font button to
select a font type, style, and size for the labels.
For more information on working with text labels, see "Labels" on page 128.
l Show feeder boxes. Show feeder boxes with a dotted outline in the Synergi map
display.
l Show selected section. Show the section that is selected for analysis with a thicker
line and a different color than the other sections in the map display. You can change the
color of the selected section in the Color tab of the Map Settings editor.
l Show queried area. Show sections that are in the query set using Synergi’s “query
set” color, which by default is gray. You can change the color of the queried sections in
the Color tab of the Map Settings editor.
Show polygons
In the Show polygons section, select the appropriate check boxes for each polygon type that
you want to display. Available choices are:
l Growth areas
l Speculative loads
l Areas of interest
Symbol size multiplier
Select a value from 1 to 10 to change the size of any symbols in the map display. The default
value is 1.
Unfed items
Select from one of the following options to specify how unfed items are shown:
l Show all. All unfed items will be shown.
l Selection extents. The display of unfed items will be restricted to those within the
extents of the selected feeders. Essentially, if you drew a box around all selected
feeders, only those items within that box would be shown (within a 10% buffer).
l Hide all. All unfed items will be hidden.
Text map settings

Use the Text tab in the Map Settings editor to configure annotation settings based on analysis
results and also for section and equipment types.

Using Synergi
l For results annotation, you can enable up to three annotation lines of analysis results
categories. You must perform the desired analysis first before you can select any result
annotation categories to display.
l For section and equipment annotation, you can enable one annotation line to display a
property such as the section ID or description, or the equipment name or type.
Text map settings

Using Synergi
For each annotation category, you can customize the font and color settings and also select to
apply annotation to only specific types of sections and devices. Refer to the following
To enable annotation
1. In the Map Settings editor, select the Theme tab.

2. Make sure that both the Show annotation and Show section results check boxes are
selected.
3. Click Apply to accept your changes.
To set up results annotation
1. In the Map Settings editor, select the Text tab.

2. Use the settings in the upper half of the Text tab to set up annotation for up to three
analysis results categories. The following list describes the options you can edit.
l Results. In the Results area, select from up to three check boxes to enable the
section results lines. For each line, select a results category from the options list,
and also a color for the corresponding text annotation in the map display. You can
also use the Rotation button to set the rotation of the text in the map display, and
the Font button to change the font type, style, and size.
If you select the Use Phasing check box, the three available results slots will be
phase-specific, meaning that the result is only displayed if the corresponding
phase exists on the respective section. If you use this setting, the phasing of the
selected analysis results type should correspond to the phasing of the respective
slot. For example, the results type that you select in the first slot should be a
phase A result.
l Limit result display. Show results at a specified distance interval only.
l Restrict to value interval. Specify a maximum and minimum value. Only
results that fall within the two values will be shown as annotation.
l Specify decimal places. Specify the number of decimal places to be shown in
annotation results, from 0 to 4. If you set the value to 0, the annotation will be
rounded to the nearest whole numbers. If the option is not selected, a default of 2
decimal places will be used.
l Hide 0.00’s. Hide all zero values and null values from the annotation.
l Only show tagged sections. Limit the results annotation to “tagged” sections
only. Tagging is a way to temporarily identify key sections and devices that you
want to work with. You can tag a section or facility by right-clicking on it in the
Synergi map display or model explorer and selecting the Tag option. For more
information, see "Tagging sections and devices" on page 248.
l Only annotate queried items. Only show result annotation for queried
sections.
l Just ends and junctions. Only show result annotation for sections that feed
more than one downstream section or feed no sections at all.

Using Synergi
To set up section and equipment annotation
1. In the Map Settings editor, select the Text tab.

2. Use the settings in the lower half of the Text tab to set up annotation for sections and
equipment. The following table describes the options that can set.
a. Only annotate sections with. Select this check box to limit section annotation
to only sections that include selected facility types, such as sections that include
breakers, capacitors, or fuses. You can select as many facility types as
necessary.
b. Only annotate equipment of type. Select this check box to limit equipment
annotation to only selected facility types, such as breakers, capacitors, and fuses.
You can select as many facility types as necessary.
c. Section information. Select this check box to show section annotation. Then,
select the property that you want to annotate (such as Section ID or Description)
and then select the rotational angle for the annotation.
d. Equipment information. Select this check box to show equipment annotation.
Then, select the property that you want to annotate (such as Section ID or
Equipment Type) and then select the rotational angle for the annotation.
e. Font. Click the Font button to select a font type, style, and size for section and
equipment annotation.
f. Use custom color. Select this check box to apply a single color to all section and
equipment annotation. Otherwise, the annotation color will be based on the parent
section or equipment color.
Facilities map settings

Use the Facilities tab in the Map Settings editor to customize device colors and sizes based on
analysis results. You can set up four “results” ranges with either automatic or custom values.
For each range, you can specify the map display color and size for the symbols of that result
type. You can also enable circles in the map display to further highlight the devices. Values
that are out of the defined range can also be shown with a unique custom color and symbol
size.

Using Synergi
Facilities map settings
Refer to the following procedure for more information on how to set up the device result
symbols. You must first perform the desired analysis before you can complete this procedure.
To customize device colors and sizes based on analysis results
1. Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
2. Select the Facilities tab.

Using Synergi
3. Select the Color By device results check box to enable the Color By Device Results
feature and to enable the remaining fields in the Facilities tab.
4. Use the options list under Color By device results to select which device results
category you want to use to add color and symbols to the map.
5. Refer to the following table for the different tasks that you can perform in the Facilities
tab.
To ... Do This ...
Set the device a. Select the Auto intervals check box.

range (Max to Min) b. Click the Apply button. The Min and Max cells will
with automatic automatically be populated with the minimum and
intervals maximum values for the selected device results
type. The values in the remaining device range cells
will be evenly distributed between the Min and Max
values.
Set the device a. Clear the Auto intervals check box.

range (Max to Min) b. Type the Max and Min values for the range that you
with custom want to display.
intervals
c. Click Setup max -> min. The values in the
remaining device range cells will be evenly
distributed between the Min and Max values that you
entered. If desired, you can skip this step and type in
the remaining values directly into the text boxes.
Set the device Use the Color options lists to select a color for each device
range colors range. If desired, you can click Invert colors to reverse
the order of the four color choices, or you can click the
Default colors button to reset the four color options to
the default choices as installed by Synergi. The Out-of-
Range color is not affected by these two buttons.
Enable symbol sizes Select the appropriate check box in the Symbol size
column and then set the size value as appropriate.
Enable circle Select the appropriate check box in the Circle diameter
coloring and size column and then set the diameter value as appropriate.
You can also use the Circle thickness option to change
the thickness of the circle symbols that will be applied by
this feature.

Using Synergi
Color map settings

Use the Color tab in the Map Settings editor to configure the colors that are used by most of
the “Color By” options in the Synergi map display. The Color By feature is used to color
sections and devices based on your data settings or analysis results. For example, in the
Theme tab, you can specify the map to be colored by Phases. In the Color tab, you can then
define which colors are used for which phases: AN, BN, CN, etc. Or, you can specify the map
to be colored by Energize Year and then define a color associated with each of the available
model years.
Note that some colors, such as feeder and zone colors, are specified in the respective editors,
not in the Color tab. For example, if you are coloring by customer zones, you must open the
respective Customer Zone editor to change the color that is used with the Color By scheme.
The Color tab is also used to set several standard colors in the Synergi map display, such as
the Selected color and the Query Set color.

Using Synergi
Color map settings
To define mapping style colors
2. Select the Color tab.

Using Synergi
3. In the Colors for mapping section, select the mapping category that you want to edit.
In the bottom of the editor, use the options list to select a new color for the selected
category.
Symbols map settings

All map display symbols are controlled from the Map Settings editor. For each device,
equipment, and node symbol category, you can edit which symbol is used in the Synergi map
display, and also the size and color of each symbol. You can also hide symbols from being
shown the Synergi map display.

Using Synergi
Symbols map settings
The following list describes the tasks you can perform from the Symbols tab of the Map
Settings editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Customizing the map display" on
page 97.
To select the device type that you want to edit
Select the device name in the Device Colors and Symbols section.

Using Synergi
To change the map display symbol

Use the Symbol options list to select a new map display symbol.
To change the symbol size
Use the Size options list to select a new symbol size.
To change the symbol color
Use the Color options list to select a new symbol color.
To hide the symbol in the map display
Select the Hide check box.
NOTE: Section symbols, including sections with spot loads and sections with projects, are
shown and hidden from the Style tab of the Map Settings editor. For more information, see
"Style map settings" on page 102.
To enclose the map display symbol in a circle
Select the Circle check box.
To copy the current settings to memory
The Copy to master and Copy from master buttons allow Synergi to “remember” and then
reapply the current symbol configuration. For example, assume that you want to apply a
temporary change to the map display symbols, and return those symbols to your current
settings when you are done. First, click Copy to master, before you make any changes. This
will save your original settings to memory. Then, make your changes as appropriate, apply
them to the model, and even close the Map Settings editor. Later, you can return to the
Symbols tab in the Map Settings editor and click Copy from master. The original settings,
before you made any edits, will be re-applied to your model.
Zoom map settings

In the Synergi map display, all symbols and text can be configured with independent zoom
visibility characteristics. Using this feature, you could specify that all capacitor symbols
appear at one specified zoom level, while all regulator symbols appear at another. You could
also configure nodes to appear only at a relatively high zoom level, to make the map display
“cleaner” and faster when you have zoomed out from the model.
These visibility levels are configured in the Zoom tab in the Map Settings editor. The Zoom tab
lists a number of categories for which visibility levels can be set, and also provides check
boxes to enable or disable the visibility feature for each category. When disabled, the
corresponding map display symbols will display at all zoom levels.

Using Synergi
Zoom map settings
The following list describes the tasks you can perform from the Zoom tab of the Map Settings
To set a visibility level
1. In the list of display symbol categories, select the display symbol category that you
want to edit.

Using Synergi
2. In the text box at the bottom of the Zoom tab of the Map Settings editor, type the new
zoom level at which map display symbols for the selected category will be visible. Or,
select the Set to Current Zoom button to set the zoom level equal to the current zoom
level in the map display.
Set to Current Zoom button
To enable and disable visibility levels
1. In the list of display symbols categories, select the map display category that you want
to edit.
2. Select the Enabled check box to enable the visibility level. Or, clear the check box to
disable the visibility level (meaning that the corresponding map display symbol will be
visible at all zoom levels).
To copy the current settings to memory
The Copy to master and Copy from master buttons allow Synergi to “remember” and then
reapply the current zoom configuration. For example, assume that you want to apply a
temporary change to the zoom settings, and return to your current settings when you are
done. First, click Copy to master, before you make any changes. This will save your original
settings to memory. Then, make your changes as appropriate, apply them to the model, and
even close the Map Settings editor. Later, you can return to the Zoom tab in the Map Settings
editor and click Copy from master. The original settings, before you made any edits, will be
re-applied to your model.
Background map settings

The following procedures describe the tasks you can perform from the Background tab of the
Map Settings editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Customizing the map display"
on page 97.

Using Synergi
Background map settings
To enable the map display grid
1. Select Show grid.

TIP: You can also show and hide the grid from the Display tab in the Synergi ribbon. In
the Settings group, click the Map Grid button to show and hide the grid, as appropriate.
2. Under Line, select the Style and Color for the map display grid.

Using Synergi
3. Click either the Tics or Lines button to set the grid display style.
4. Under Text color, select a color for the text labels that display beside the grid lines.
To enable background images
1. Under Currently recognized tiles, select the check box next to each image file that
you want to show in the Synergi map display.
TIPS: You can also use the Synergi ribbon to display and hide all background images at
once. Select the Display tab and in the Background group, click the Toggle button.
To view all enabled background images, select the Navigate tab. In the Zoom group,
click Background Bounds.
2. To add an image file, click Add and then navigate to and select the file you want to add.
TIPS: You can also use the Synergi ribbon to add background images. Select the
Display tab and in the Background group, click the Add Layer button.
For information on image file formats that are supported by Synergi, see "Background
image support" on page 138.
3. To remove an image file, select the image that you want to remove and then click
Remove.
Areas of interest
Areas of interest are two-dimensional geographic entities that you can draw on the Synergi
map display to represent areas of speculative or future load or simply to indicate locations of
interest, such as a lake or a restricted area. Areas of interest are always associated with a
specific section. Synergi chooses an initial section based on where you create the area of
interest in the map, but you can change the section association at any time, as described in
"Associating an area of interest with a section" on page 125.
If an area of interest represents a speculative load, load-flow-based analyses will consider
the speculative load component as a part of the associated section. The speculative load
component is defined in the area of interest editor.
Likewise, if an area of interest represents a future load, Synergi’s forecasting analysis will
consider the spot and distribution load components as a part of the associated section. The
spot and distribution load components are also defined in the area of interest editor.
If the area of interest is only being used to represent a geographical area, then the load
options are disabled and the area of interest is not factored into any Synergi analysis.
The following figure shows an example of how an area of interest might appear in the Synergi
map display. Synergi allows you to edit a number of settings for each area of interest,
including the shape, color, and fill pattern.

Using Synergi
Area of interest on the map
Creating an area of interest

Areas of interest are created like many other devices in your model, by selecting an area of
interest type in the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dragging-and-dropping it onto
your Synergi map display. You must drop the area of interest on a section in order for the
area to be created.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on creating an area of interest.
To create an area of interest
1. In the Synergi model explorer, select the Warehouse tab.

2. Under Area of Interest, select the name of the area of interest type that you want to
create (Growth Area, Speculative Load, or General) and drag it into the map
display. (Note that you can change the area of interest type after it has been added to
the model.)
3. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the mouse to the section where you want to
add the area of interest. When the cursor changes to a crosshair (shown below), you
can release the mouse button to add the area of interest. Click Yes to confirm the
action.

Using Synergi
Creating an area of interest
By default, the new area of interest is created as a simple square, as shown below.
New area of interest
4. To edit the shape of the area of interest, you must modify the graphic points or use the
right-click menu to redraw it. For more information, see "Reshaping and moving an
area of interest" on page 124.
5. To edit the settings for the area of interest, double-click the area to open the Area of
Interest editor. For more information, see "Editing an area of interest" below.
Editing an area of interest

The Area of Interest editor defines the type of area of interest that you have created. Growth
Areas, for example, are used during a Forecasting analysis to specify changes in distributed
load and/or spot load during multi-year modeling. Speculative Load areas allow load-based
analyses to consider speculative loads as defined by the area of interest. Or, an area of
interest can be used to mark a geographic region in your Synergi map display, without having
an impact on any Synergi analysis.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. Note that some options in the editor
will be disabled depending on the type of area of interest that you select.
To edit an area of interest
1. In the Synergi map display, double-click the area of interest to open the Area of
Interest editor.
2. On the left side of the Area of Interest editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available settings for the area of interest. Refer to the topics listed below for
more information.
l "Area tab – Area of Interest editor" on the next page
l "Spec Load tab – Area of Interest editor" on page 123
l "Dist Growth tab – Area of Interest editor" on page 123
l "Spot Growth tab – Area of Interest editor" on page 124

Using Synergi
Area tab – Area of Interest editor

Use the Area tab of the Area of Interest editor to select the area of interest type and set other
general options for the area of interest.
see "Editing an area of interest" on the previous page.
Associated section
Identifies the section associated with the area of interest. For more information on changing
the associated section, see "Associating an area of interest with a section" on page 125.
Description
Specifies an optional description for the area of interest.
Display
Specifies how the area of interest is shown in the Synergi map display.
l Show. Select this check box to show the area of interest in the Synergi map display. If
the check box is cleared, the area of interest will be hidden in the map display but it is
still present and used in the model. You can access the full list of areas of interest from
the Model tab of the model explorer.
l Color. Specifies the color that is used to show the area of interest in the Synergi map
display.
l Pattern. Specifies the fill pattern that is used to show the area of interest in the
Find and Edit button
Click the Find and Edit button to show a list of all similar section or device types in the model
in memory. Select any name to open that section or device in the editor.
Turn off
Select this check box to disable the area of interest for analysis purposes. The settings in the
editor will be retained, but any load and growth estimates will be ignored during Synergi
analyses.
Type
Specifies the area of interest type. The option that you select here will enable/disable fields in
other tabs in the Area of Interest editor. The following options are available:
l Growth area. Growth area specifies that during a Forecasting analysis, all sections
underneath the area of interest will grow over the years in distributed load and/or spot
load, as specified in the Dist Growth and Spot Growth tabs.
l Speculative load. Speculative load specifies that load-flow-based analyses will
consider the speculative load component as specified in the Spec. Load tab.
l Area of interest. Area of interest specifies that the area of interest is being used only
to represent a geographical area on the map display, such as a lake or a restricted area.

Using Synergi
With this option selected, the area of interest will have no impact on any Synergi
analyses.
Year
Specifies the Energize year and the Retire year for the area of interest.
Spec Load tab – Area of Interest editor

Use the Spec Load tab of the Area of Interest editor to set the speculative load for the area of
interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected “Speculative load” as the
area of interest type in the Area tab.
see "Editing an area of interest" on page 121.
Area
Read-only information regarding the size of the area of interest.
Demand
Specifies the speculative demand that you expect for each year. The multi-year values only
apply if you are actively using multi-year modeling and analysis. If you are not, specify your
load data in the first year listed and leave the remaining values at zero.
Demand type
Specifies the type of demand (Distributed kW, Connected kVA, or Connected kWh) for the
speculative load. Any demand values that you enter will be assigned to the section associated
with the area of interest for any load-flow studies.
Load pf
Specifies the load power factor, which is applied to all demand years.
Reference
Specifies how the speculative load will be applied to the section. The following options are
available:
l Absolute. When this option is selected, the specified values are added directly to the
distributed load components of the associated section, thus treating it like a spot load.
l kW / kVA / kWh per sq. mile / feet / meter. When this option is selected,
Synergi first determines the total load components based on the area within the
polygonal area of interest, and then applies the calculated values to the parent section.
Note that load values are applied to the area of interest’s parent section only, regardless of
how they are ultimately determined. For this reason, the area of interest’s section association
can be important. For more information, see "Associating an area of interest with a section"
on page 125.
Dist Growth tab – Area of Interest editor

Use the Dist Growth tab of the Area of Interest editor to set distributed growth options for the
area of interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected “Growth area” as
the area of interest type in the Area tab.

Using Synergi
The following list describes the tasks you can perform from this tab. For instructions on
opening the editor, see "Editing an area of interest" on page 121.
To specify distributed load growth by yearly percentages
Select Distributed growth and then use the text boxes to specify the percentage of
distributed load growth for each year. As an alternative, you can select the Growth curve
check box to use a growth curve from your model to specify that the distributed load growth
percentages are determined by a pre-defined growth curve in your model. For more
information on working with growth curves, see "Using growth curves" on page 290.
To specify distributed load growth by yearly distributed load
Select Distributed new load and then use the text boxes to specify the spot load growth for
each year.
Spot Growth tab – Area of Interest editor

Use the Spot Growth tab of the Area of Interest editor to set spot growth options for the area
of interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected “Growth area” as the
area of interest type in the Area tab.
The following list describes the tasks you can perform from this tab. For instructions on
opening the editor, see "Editing an area of interest" on page 121.
To specify spot load growth by yearly percentages
Select Spot growth and then use the text boxes to specify the percentage of spot load growth
for each year. As an alternative, you can select the Growth curve check box to use a growth
curve from your model to specify that the spot load growth percentages are determined by a
pre-defined growth curve in your model. For more information on working with growth
curves, see "Using growth curves" on page 290.
To specify spot load growth by yearly distributed load
Select Spot new load and then use the text boxes to specify the spot load growth for each
year.
Reshaping and moving an area of interest

A new area of interest is added as a simple square at a selected point in your Synergi map
display. You will likely need to modify the area of interest’s shape and also move it to the
proper location in your map before you can use it effectively with your model.
From a mapping perspective, the area of interest is a series of connected vertices with a
shaded interior. These vertices can be manipulated like any other map vertices. In the Build
tab of the Synergi ribbon, you can use the Add Graphic Point, Move Graphic Point, and Delete
Graphic Point buttons to modify the area of interest’s shape. However, you may find it easier
to use the right-click menu to simply redraw the area of interest. In addition, Synergi’s Move
Device mode can be used to move the entire area of interest from one location to another.
Refer to the following procedures for more information on redrawing, reshaping, and moving
an area of interest.

Using Synergi
To redraw an area of interest
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the area of interest that you want to edit and
then select Reshape.
2. Click the left mouse button to create the vertex points that will define the new boundary
of the area of interest.
3. Click the right-mouse button to complete the redraw.
4. Press Esc to exit Reshape mode and return to Default mode.
To reshape an area of interest
1. In the Build tab of the Synergi ribbon, click the Add Graphic Point, Move Graphic
Point, or Delete Graphic Point buttons, as appropriate.
l If you are adding a graphic point, click and hold the mouse in the position along
the area of interest where you are adding a graphic point, and then drag the point
to the new location.
l If you are moving a graphic point, click and hold the mouse over the graphic point
that you want to move, and then drag the point to a new location.
l If you are deleting a graphic point, click the mouse over the graphic point that you
want to delete.
2. When you are finished, press F5 to return to Default mode.
To move an area of interest

2. In the Devices group, click Move.
3. Click on the area of interest and drag it to a new location.
4. Press F5 to exit Move Device mode and return to Default mode.
Associating an area of interest with a section

Areas of interest are always associated with a section on the model. The association is
important because it impacts how load data specified on the area of interest is considered
during load flow-based analyses.
Perform the following procedure to change the section that is associated with an area of
interest.
To change the section association of an area of interest
1. Locate the section that you want to associate with an area of interest.
2. Right-click on the section and select Set for Analysis.
3. Double-click the area of interest that you want to associate with the section.
4. In the Area tab of the Area of Interest editor, click Selected Section. Once clicked, the
section that you set for analysis will be listed under Associated Section.

Using Synergi
Deleting an area of interest
To delete an area of interest
In the Synergi map display, right-click on the area of interest that you want to delete, and
then select Delete.
Location links
Location links allow you to link specific labels and devices to external files and websites.
When you activate a link, the file or website is opened directly within the Synergi workspace,
either in a window or a dialog box. Links can be launched via the right-click menu on the
particular label or device.
Location links are for general purpose and reference use only. They do not have any
interactive capabilities with your Synergi model data.
There are three types of links that you can create:
l Links to external files. You can link a map element to certain popular file formats,
including DOC, XLS, JPG, and BMP. When you activate a document link, such as DOC and
XLS, the document opens in the Synergi window and can be edited from there. Some
image links open the image in a separate Synergi window. You could use this type of
link to attach an image file to a Synergi model element, or you could attach a
spreadsheet file that shows other data, such as maintenance history.
l Links to websites. When you activate a website link, Synergi connects to the Internet
using your company network and opens that site in a separate Synergi window. For
example, you could link a device to its manufacturer’s homepage for quick access to
technical data.
l Links to Internet mapping software. With this type of link, you specify an address or
latitude and longitude coordinates for the device, and Synergi uses Internet mapping
software, such as MapQuest, Google Earth, Google Maps, or Microsoft Live Search Maps
to produce a map marking its location.
Creating a location link

See the procedures below for information on creating location links for labels and devices in
your model. Take note that the location link syntax must be exactly correct. If a link contains
a syntax error, the command that you would use to launch the link in the applicable right-click
menu will be disabled.
Before you perform these procedures, open the editor for the label or device where you want
to create a location link, and find the Location Link field.
To add a link to an external file (such as a Word, Excel, or image file)
In the Location Link field, type the path to the file in the following format:
<FI>{path}
For example:

Using Synergi
<FI>C:\Data\R141.jpg
To add a link to a website

In the Location Link field, type the website address or URL in the following format:
<FI>{URL}
For example:
<FI>www.dnvgl.com\software
To add a link to Internet mapping software (such as MapQuest, Google Earth,

Google Maps, or Microsoft Live Search Maps)
In the Location Link field, type the address or latitude and longitude coordinates of the device
or section in the following format:
<MQ>{street},{city},{state},{zip code}
<GE>{latitude},{longitude}
For example:
<MQ>1170 Harrisburg Pike,Carlisle,PA,17013
<GE>40.259882,-77.03147800000001
Keep the following tips in mind:

l The zip code is optional.
l The code to link to Google Earth is <GE>.
l The code to link to Google Maps is <GM>.
l The code to link to MapQuest is <MQ>.
l The code to link to Microsoft Live Search Maps is <MM>.
Launching a location link

Perform the following procedure to launch a location link. The linked file or website will open
within Synergi in a separate window.
To launch a location link
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on a label or device where you have created a
location link.
2. Select Link. A separate Synergi window opens containing the linked file or website. If
the Link option is disabled on the context menu, either there is no link established for
that device, or the link format is incorrect. For more information on establishing a
location link, see "Creating a location link" on the previous page.

Using Synergi
Labels
Standard and customized labels can be added anywhere in the map display. Each label may
contain up to three lines and include text, analysis results, or a combination of both. You can
select from one of several predefined “quick” label formats or you can define your own label
format by selecting from more than 20 results categories for each of the three label lines.
Each label line can be assigned an individual color, and you can select from several other
options for each label line, including whether to display units of measurement and whether to
display data by phase or as a total for the results category type.
The following figure shows an example of a label in the Synergi map display.
Custom label in the Synergi map display
A label is always associated with a section, and each section can only have one label
associated with it. You can move the label anywhere you want in the map display, but the
label and label data will always be associated with the parent section, regardless of label
location. You start the process of adding a label by right-clicking on a section and selecting
from the Text Label options.
Adding a label
Perform one of the following procedures to add a label to the Synergi map display. The
predefined “quick” labels can be added directly from the right-click menu in the Synergi map
display, while custom labels require you to use the Text Label editor to set up the data for
your label.
Labels are always associated with sections, and each section can only have one label. If the
add label menu option is disabled for a section, then the section already has a label associated
with it.
Label display (on or off) is controlled globally in the Style tab of the Map Settings editor, as
described in "Style map settings" on page 102. If you add a label but it does not appear in the
map display, then the label display preference is most likely disabled for your model.
To add a predefined label
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the label.
2. Select Text Label and then select the “quick” label type that you want to add.

Using Synergi
Synergi assigns the selected label to the section. Once you have added the label, you
must use the Text Label editor to change the label options or select a different “quick”
label type. For more information, see "Editing a label" below.
To add a custom label
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the label.
2. Select Text Label > Add.
Synergi assigns a default label to the section and displays the Text Label editor. For
information on editing the label, see "Editing a label" below.
Editing a label
The Label editor allows you to provide up to three lines of text or analysis results for each
label. You can display data values and units of measurement, and also configure the text color
for each line. The label editor also allows you to specify text justification, a location link, and
energize and retire years for the label.
Refer to the following list for tasks that you can perform to edit a label. For information on
editing the font type, size, and style for all labels, see "Style map settings" on page 102.
To open the Label editor
In the Synergi map display, double-click on the label you wish to edit.
TIP: With a multi-line label, you must double-click on the first line of the label to open the
Label editor.
To configure up to three lines of label text
In the Enable column of the Text Label editor, select the check box next to each label line that
you want to enable. In addition, the following options are available for each label line:
l Auto label. Select the Auto label check box to have Synergi automatically insert a label
for the display value that you have selected. For example, if you selected “Volts Out” as
your display value, the auto label will be “V =”. Synergi will change the auto label as
appropriate each time you change the display value.
l Label text. If you do not select the “Auto label” check box, use the “Label text” text
box to specify a custom label for the associated label line. The label text will appear
before the display value in your label.
l Display values. Use the Display values option to select an analysis results category
that you want to display in the label line.
l By phase. Select the By phase check box to display the results of each phase for the
selected display value. If this check box is cleared, an average or total value will be
shown, as appropriate for the display value type.
l Display units. Select the Display units check box to display the units of measurement
for the selected display value.
l Color. Use the Color option to select the color for the associated label line.
To select a predefined “quick” label style
In the Text Label editor, next to Quick setup, select from one of the predefined label

Using Synergi
formats. Note that as soon as you select a quick label style, the current settings in the editor
will be replaced by the settings for the selected label style.
To change the text justification for the label
In the Text Label editor, under Text justification, select Left, Center, or Right.
To set the energize and retire years for the label
In the Text Label editor, select values next to Energize and Retire, as appropriate. For more
information, see "Editing energize and retire years" on page 81.
To set up a location link for the label
In the Text Label editor, under Location link, type the appropriate syntax to link the label to
an external source, such as a file or website. For more information, see "Location links" on
page 126.
To save the label with your model
In the Text Label editor, select the Store in database check box. If this check box is cleared,
the label will be discarded when the model is closed.
Moving a label
You can move labels in the map display at any time. Unlike moving other objects in the map
display, you do not need to enter Build mode before moving the label, nor do you have to
return to Default mode when you are done. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
To move a label
1. Move the cursor over the label you want to move.

2. Click the label and drag it to a new location, releasing the mouse button when you are
done. Note that the associated section is highlighted in the map display as you click and
drag the label.
TIP: With a multi-line label, you will want to click on the first line of the label in
order to perform this procedure.
Deleting a label
Perform the following procedure to delete a label from your map display. Note that if you
delete a section that has an associated label, the label will also be deleted.
To delete a label
1. In the map display, right-click on the label that you want to delete.
2. Select Text Label > Delete.

Using Synergi
Mobile items
Mobile items are unique symbols that you can add to the map display to mark locations of
interest in your model. Mobile items can be placed anywhere in the Synergi map display.
When editing a mobile item, you can select from a number of symbol types and also
customize the color and size of the symbol.
Note that mobile items are not saved with your Synergi model. They can, however, be saved
as a part of a subset.
To add a mobile item

2. Expand Mobile Items and then select General Mobile Item. Drag it onto the map
display and drop it onto the desired location.
To edit a mobile item
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the mobile item that you
want to edit.
2. Use the Mobile Item editor to edit the following properties for the mobile item:
l Description
l Symbol
l Size
l X Coordinate
l Y Coordinate
If desired, you can also select the Hide check box to hide the mobile item from the
Synergi map display. (You can still locate and edit the mobile item from the model
explorer.)
To delete a mobile item
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, locate the mobile item that you want to
delete.
2. Right-click on the mobile item and select Delete.
Legend
The Legend tab in the Synergi model explorer displays a detailed legend for the Synergi map
display. The legend shows the current color and line options that are being used in the map
display, as well as the device type symbols and the coordinates for the area that is currently
visible. The same legend you see in the Legend tab is included when you print the map
display.

Using Synergi
The Legend window provides another way to view a legend for the Synergi map display. The
Legend window is a free-floating window that displays the current map display coloring
scheme in both pie chart and bar chart form. The size of the area in the respective chart is
based on the total number of miles for all sections in that area.
As you hover the mouse over each area of the chart, the Legend window will display the total
number of sections in the corresponding area, the total length in miles for all sections in that
area, and the range of values for the sections in that area. You can use the toolbar buttons in
the upper-right corner of the Legend window to change the map coloring scheme based on
different results sets, and also to invert the coloring scheme.
The Legend window can be configured to display automatically when you start Synergi. If you
close the Legend window, you can re-open it from the model explorer and also the Display tab
of the Synergi ribbon.
To show the Legend window
Perform any of the following tasks to show and hide the Legend window:
l To display the Legend window from the Synergi ribbon:
2. In the Show area, click Legend Window.
l To display the Legend window from the model explorer:
1. On the upper-right side of the model explorer, click the Legend button. The
Legend button will be gold when the legend is displayed.

Using Synergi
Legend button
2. Click the Legend button again to hide the Legend window. The Legend button will
be gray when the legend is hidden.
To use the Legend window
l Click the Pie and Bar options to change the chart type in the Legend window.
l Hover the mouse over each area of the chart to view the total number of sections in the
corresponding area, the total length in miles for all sections in that area, and the range
of values for the sections in that area.
l Click the Toggle auto intervals for results button to select or clear the Auto-
intervals feature, which can also be found in the Theme tab of the Map Settings editor.
When enabled, the auto-intervals feature will evenly distribute the results range
between the minimum and maximum values for the selected analysis results type. For
more information, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
l Click the Color by a results set button to change the results set that is currently
displayed in the Synergi map display.
l Click the Invert the colors for results coloring button to reverse the order of colors
that are used in the current results set.
To display the Legend window automatically when you start Synergi
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Synergi tab.
3. Select Show the floating legend window at startup.
Views
A view is a specified geographical region of the map that you can jump to quickly using the
Navigate tab in the Synergi ribbon. You can use views to set up frequently visited areas of
your map and return to those areas any time with just a click of the mouse.
Views are stored with your model data, and are therefore available between different Synergi
sessions. You can create as many different views of your map as necessary.
Refer to the following procedures for more information on creating, viewing, and deleting
views.
To create a view
1. Pan and zoom the map to the location you want to become a view.
3. In the Favorites group, next to Views, type a new name for the view you are creating.
4. Click the Add View button to save the view.

Using Synergi
To view a view

2. In the Favorites group, next to Views, select the name of the view that you want to
view. If the name of the view is already showing, click the Go To View button to view
the view.
To replace a view

replace. Note that the map display will jump to the location of the view that you
selected.
3. Pan and zoom the map to the new location you want to become a view.
4. Click the Add View button to replace the existing view.
To delete a view

delete.
3. Click the Delete View button.
Geographic view
The Geographic view provides a geographic-based view of your model based on several
common internet mapping sources, including Google maps, Bing maps, and ThinkGeo. The
Geographic view matches your model’s coordinates with real-world coordinates based on a
selected projection file. This allows you to view your Synergi model along with geographic
information, road networks, and any other features that are displayed in the selected mapping
source.
Although the Geographic view is a separate window in Synergi, you can perform many of the
same functions in the Geographic view as you can in the map display. For example, you can
pan and zoom in the Geographic view and you can double click objects such as sections and
facilities to open the respective editors.
Before you use the Geographic view, you will need to select which mapping source you want
to use. This is done in the Map tab of the Preferences editor. No matter which mapping source
you use, you must also obtain a coordinate system projection file (PRJ file). The data in this
file helps align the coordinates in your model with the real-world coordinates used by the
internet mapping sources. Use the Geography tab in the Map Settings editor to identify the PRJ
file that you want to use. The PRJ file must be saved in the Settings folder in your Synergi
documents directory.

Using Synergi
Selecting which mapping source to use with the Geographic view

You can select from several different mapping sources when using the Geographic view. This
option is provided on the Map tab of the Preferences editor.
Available mapping sources include the following:
l Online map suite. The online map suite option uses an internet-based mapping
service to provide the Geographic view background in a roads format, satellite format,
or hybrid format (both roads and satellite). This mapping option is provided for free
with Synergi and only requires an internet connection.
l Local map suite. If you do not have internet connectivity, you can use the local map
suite option to provide the map background for the Geographic view. Due to its size, this
mapping file is not provided with Synergi. Contact DNV GL technical support for
assistance on setting up this mapping option.
l Bing. The Bing mapping option requires an ID to be used with Synergi. If you do not
already have an ID through your organization, you can obtain an ID for free from
Microsoft. See "Obtaining a Basic key for Bing maps" below for instructions.
l Google. The Google mapping option can be used with or without supplying a Client ID
and Private key. If your company already has a Google mapping account, you can
provide those values to fully use Google maps as the Geographic view background. If
you do not have a Google mapping account, you can still use Google maps for free in a
limited manner. For example, a Google banner will appear across the Geographic view
background. You will also be limited in the number of map "tiles" that can be
downloaded.
To select an internet mapping source
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Map tab.
3. In the Map tab, under Geographic view source, select one of the following options:
l Online map suite
l Local map suite
l Bing
l Google
4. Click Apply to accept your changes and then click X to close the editor.
For more information on the Map tab in the Preferences editor, see "Map preferences" on
page 37.
Obtaining a Basic key for Bing maps

To use Bing maps with Synergi Electric’s Geographic view, you must first obtain a key from
the Bing maps internet site. You may already have a key available for use through your
organization. If not, the following procedure will guide you through the steps to obtain a free
Basic key.

Using Synergi
To complete this procedure, you must have or register for a Microsoft account as well as a
Bing maps account.
To obtain a Basic key for Bing maps
1. Navigate to https://www.bingmapsportal.com/.
2. Under “First Time Bing Maps Developer?”, click Sign In.
3. Use your Microsoft account to log in to the Bing maps portal. (If you do not have a
Microsoft account, click on the Sign up now link to create a new account.)
4. Follow the prompts to set up your Bing maps account.
5. Once you have created your account and reached the Bing maps Dev center page, select
My account > My keys.
6. Use the “Click here to create a new key” link to create a new application key.
7. Use the “Create key” screen to enter the following information:
l Application name: Synergi Electric
l Application URL: [you may leave this field blank]
l Key type: Basic
l Application type: Universal Windows App
8. Click Create.
9. Once the key has been created, it will be listed at the bottom of the screen. Click Copy
key to copy the new key to the clipboard.
10. In Synergi Electric, open the Preferences editor and then select the Map tab.
11. Under Geographic view source, select Bing and then paste the key value that you
previously copied to the clipboard.
13. Open the Geographic view following the instructions provided in "Viewing a model in the
Geographic view" on the facing page. The Geographic view will display using Bing maps
as the background mapping software.
Specifying a coordinate system projection file (PRJ file)

A coordinate system projection (PRJ) file matches the coordinates used in your model the with
real-world coordinates used by an internet mapping source. When you use Synergi's
Geography view, the projection file ensures that your model data aligns with the real-world
images provided by the selected mapping source.
The default projection file that is set up when you install Synergi is named "26753.prj". This
default projection file is associated with the default Synergi model. To use the Geography
view with your model, you must obtain the PRJ file that is associated with your model. You can
obtain this file from your own company or from the internet. (If you need to download a file
from the internet, one website to consider is http://spatialreference.org.) Once you have the
file, use the Map tab of the Preferences editor to use it with Synergi.

Using Synergi
To specify a coordinate system projection file (PRJ file)
1. Locate the PRJ file that you want to use with your Synergi model.
3. In the Preferences editor, select the Map tab.
4. In the Map tab, next to Geographic view projection, click the Browse button. Navigate
to the PRJ file that you want to use with Synergi and then click Open.
5. Click Apply to accept your changes and then click X to close the editor.
For more information on the Map tab in the Preferences editor, see "Map preferences" on
page 37.
Viewing a model in the Geographic view

In the Synergi map display, right-click and select Geographic View. After a few moments
the Geographic view will open, displaying the model in the selected internet mapping
software.
NOTE: You can also open the Geographic view by clicking the Geographic View button in
the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon.
You can use the options the upper-right corer of the Geographic view window to do the
following:
l Change the Geographic view between roads, satellite, and hybrid (when using the
"Online map suite" mapping option).
l Print the Geographic view.
l Run a load-flow analysis.
l Synchronize the Geographic view with the Synergi map display.
From the Display tab in the Synergi ribbon, click the text label Sync to Geographic View
and then select Always Synchronize to have Synergi always synchronize the Geographic
view with the Synergi map display as you pan and zoom in either window. If you do not have
this option enabled, you can pan and zoom independently in each view and do the following at
any time to manually synchronize one view with the other:
l Click the Sync to Geographic View button in the Synergi ribbon to update the Synergi
map display to match the Geographic view.
l Click the Sync button in the upper-right corner of the Geographic view to update the
Geographic view to match the Synergi map display.
Enabling the Geographic view log window

The Geographic view log provides detailed feedback on the data that is passed back and forth
between Synergi and the Geographic view window. The log window is enabled from the
CalcSpy button, which is located in the Performance ribbon in Synergi.

Using Synergi
To enable the Geographic view log window
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Performance tab.

2. In the Model QA group, click the text label CalcSpy and then select Geographic View
Log Window.
Show Manager
The Show Manager can be used to highlight selected types of sections and devices in the
Synergi map display. Selected section and facility types will be marked with circles in the map
display, and they will also be listed in the Show Manager window. You can use the options in
the Show Manager to zoom to a selected section or device and also to open the respective
section or device editor.
The section and device types that you can highlight using the Show Manager include
photovoltaic devices, throwover and automatic switches, and sections that include projects,
spot loads, and elbows.
To use the Show Manager

2. In the Browsers group, click Show Manager.
3. On the left side of the Show Manager, select the check box for each section or device
category that you want to highlight in the Synergi map display. Any sections or devices
that meet the criteria in the selected check boxes will also be listed on the right side of
the Show Manager.
4. Use the list area in the Show Manager to perform the following tasks:
l To edit a section or device: Select the section or device that you want to edit and
then click Edit.
l To zoom to a section or device: Select the section or device that you want to view
in the Synergi map display and then click Zoom.
5. Click Hide or press F4 to close the Show Manager.
Background image support

Synergi allows you to display raster and vector images in a wide range of popular formats
“underneath” the map of your model. This feature is useful during the development and
maintenance of distribution system models, especially for those situations when you need to
be able to quickly relate your distribution system to real-world features or when presenting
model results to a general audience.
Your imported background images must conform to a Synergi-supported file format. Many
image types require a supplemental file for Synergi to display them.
Synergi-supported image types

Synergi supports the following types:

Using Synergi
AutoCAD DXF (DXF) AutoCAD 2000 and earlier supported.
AutoCAD DWG (DWG) AutoCAD 2000 and earlier supported.
Esri Shape (SHP) —
MapInfo Vector (MIF) —
MicroStation DGN (DGN) —
Tagged Image File TIF Specification 5.0 files supported.

Format (TIFF)
Compression types supported: no compression,
packbits, Modified Huffman encoding, CCITT Group 3 1D,
CCITT Group 3 2D, and CCITT Group 4.
Color formats supported: monochrome, 256 color,
grayscale, and 24-bit.
Windows Bitmap (BMP, 1-, 4-, 8-, and 24-bit images in Windows or OS/2 format
DIB) supported. Run length encoded files not supported.
Joint Photographics JFIF-compliant files supported.

Experts Group (JPG)
World files for raster images

A raster image, including BMP, TIFF, and JPG format, requires an accompanying “world file”
for display in Synergi. A world file is a simple text file that contains coordinate and scaling
information so Synergi knows how and where to display the image. Vector formats, such as
DXF, already contain this information and do not need world files.
A world file uses the same name as its associated image file, with a different extension as
follows:
Image File World File
JPG JGW
TIF TFW
BMP WLD
For example, the world file for the image MyPicture.jpg would be MyPicture.jgw.
A world file contains six numbers in a specific order, as follows:
x-scale The width of a single pixel in map units. For example, if your

Using Synergi
map units are in feet, and the x-scale is 1.5, each pixel of the
image will horizontally occupy 1.5 feet. In other words, this
number controls the width of the displayed image.
rotation term 1 Not supported by Synergi. This number should always be zero
(0).
rotation term 2 Not supported by Synergi. This number should always be zero
(0).
y-scale The height of a single pixel in map units. For example, if your
map units are in feet, and the y-scale is -1.5, each pixel of the
image will vertically occupy 1.5 feet. In other words, this
number controls the width of the displayed image.
The y-scale is always negative, because map coordinates are
projected “upwards” from a 0,0 point. The functionality is
identical to the x-scale, however. Normally, the y-scale is the
negative value of the x-scale, unless stretching of the image is
desired.
X coordinate The X coordinate for the upper left pixel of the image, in map
units.
TIP: When you move the mouse pointer across the map,
you can see the current coordinates displayed in the status
bar.
Y coordinate The Y coordinate for the upper left pixel of the image, in map
units.
The following is an example of the actual world file ortho1.jgw, found in the Sample
Data\Backgrounds folder in your Synergi install area:
1.34718265515579
0.00000000000000
0.00000000000000
-1.34718265515579
439130.54764475720000
89805.63249184121000
The precise numbers allow the image to align and scale perfectly with the New - Springfield
feeder in the sample model database.
Vector images and supplemental files

Vector images may require supplemental files, as follows:

Using Synergi
l A SHP file requires a corresponding SHX supplemental file.

l An MIF file requires an accompanying MID file.
Synergi looks for the supplemental file in the same folder as the image file. These files are
normally generated by the originating application, such as a GIS product.
For AutoCAD files, you may need to perform the following steps to ensure that all text is
preserved during the import.
1. Before importing the file into Synergi, open it in AutoCAD.

2. From the AutoCAD main menu, select Express > Block > Explode Attribute to
Text.
3. Select the object(s) that will be a part of the import.
4. Save the file in AutoCAD and proceed with the import to Synergi.
Working with model and equipment data

Model data includes the instance data associated with the spatial construction of your model.
All data for the topology and structure of your model is found in model data. The map of your
model is generated solely from this data. Model data can include:
l Section data, including length, loading, and phasing
l Node coordinates
l Equipment location and type
Equipment data contains “nameplate” factory data, such as ratings and physical construction,
for specific device types. By maintaining equipment data as a separate data type, Synergi
allows you to reuse common equipment data from the many device instances in your model
data.
Equipment data and model data share a close relationship and must be loaded together. For
example, assume that you have a 600LB13 switch type in your equipment data. This switch
type contains nameplate current and voltage ratings. Instead of repeating the same data for
each instance in your model data, the model data contains a reference to the 600LB13 switch
type record in the equipment data. This relationship can be seen in the figure below. If the
equipment data is not loaded at the same time as the model data, then the device instances in
Synergi will not have access to the nameplate data, and critical errors will likely occur.

Using Synergi
Switch instance editor (model data) and Switch type editor (equipment data)
Several of the data formats that are supported by Synergi, including Microsoft Access files
and binary files, allow you to store model data in the same file as other types of Synergi data,
including equipment data. However, model data and equipment data must be loaded and
saved independently.
Since equipment data is an independent type of Synergi data, it must be loaded, saved, and
managed accordingly. When you load model data, you do have the option to load equipment
data at the same time, if that data is available in the same data source. However, in many
cases you will need to load and save equipment data independently from loading and saving
model data.
Loading model data

Synergi provides two options when loading model data. You can:
l Clear all model data from memory before you load new model data; or
l Merge the model data you are loading with the model data in memory.
In most cases, you will load model data as a “new” model. However, Synergi’s “merge”
functionality highlights some of the power of Synergi’s data management tools. For example,
you could load one set of feeders from an Access database and then a different set of feeders
from a binary file. The resulting model in memory will include the combined feeders from
both models, which you can then save to a third data source of any supported data format, if
desired.
Both approaches to loading model data are described in the following procedure.

Using Synergi
To load model data
1. Before you begin, if needed, make sure you have saved the current model data in
memory. See "Saving model data" on page 146 for more information.
3. To replace the model data in memory with the model data you are loading: In the Model
group, click New.
—or—
To merge the model data in memory with the model data you are loading: In the Model
group, click Load.
4. On the first page of the Load Feeders/Stations wizard, select the DSA for the model data
file you want to load. Additional options that you can select from this page of the wizard
Select feeders to Select this check box to only load selected feeders from
load the model data source. (You will select which feeders to
load on the next page of the wizard.)
Run check data Select this check box to run Synergi’s Check Data report
before merge before loading the model data. The Check Data report
performs a comprehensive evaluation of model data to
check for topological errors and data mismatches. The
results will be presented on the third page of the Load
Feeders/Stations wizard. After viewing the results, you
can select to continue loading the model data or cancel
the process and return to Synergi.
The Check Data report is a part of the Synergi InfoPanel.

For more information, see "InfoPanel" on page 312.
Load adjacents Select this check box to automatically load any feeders
that have ties to the feeders you select to load.
Load substations Select this check box to automatically load any

substations that have ties to the feeders you select to
load.
Load substations Select this check box to automatically load any feeders
and their feeders and/or substations that have ties to the feeders and
substations you select to load.
Load warehouse Select this check box to load warehouse data from the
from same data same DSA that you are loading model data. The check
source box is only enabled when the selected DSA is configured

Using Synergi
for both Model and Equipment data.
To load equipment data manually, see "Loading

equipment data" on the facing page.
Edit the selected After selecting a DSA, click the “Edit the selected data
data source button source” button to edit the DSA using Synergi’s Data
Source wizard. For more information, see "Editing a DSA"
on page 59.
Browse button Click the Browse button to navigate directly to the model
data file that you want to load.
l If a DSA is already associated with the model data

file, that DSA will be highlighted when you return to
the wizard.
l If no DSA is associated with the model data file,
you will be prompted to create a new DSA for the
selected file. The new DSA will then be highlighted
when you return to the wizard.
Cancel button Click Cancel to return to Synergi without loading new

model data.
l If you clicked the “Load” button to start this

procedure, you will return to Synergi with the
previously loaded model data still in memory.
l If you clicked the "New" button to start this
procedure, you will return to Synergi with no model
data loaded in memory (since the previous model
data was cleared from memory when you opened
the wizard).
Click Next to continue.

5. If you selected the “Select feeders to load” check box on the first page of the wizard,
use the second and third pages of the wizard to select the specific feeders that you want
to load.
a. The second page of the wizard provides a tree control where you can select the
check box next to each feeder and subtran that you want to load. You can also use
the Grouping check boxes to organize the list of feeders and subtrans based on
region, planning area, and substation names.
In addition, after selecting feeders and subtrans from the list, you can use the
Select buttons to select any associated feeders and substations to those you have
already selected in the list.

Using Synergi
b. The third page of the wizard provides a list control where you can verify or change
the feeder selections that you have made.
Click Next on each page of the wizard to continue.
6. The final page of the wizard provides a summary of the model data you have selected to
load, such as the number of feeders, nodes, and devices. If you are merging the model
data, the wizard also shows any conflicts that were detected in the model data you are
loading and the model data that is already in memory, as well as the resolution for each
conflict.
If you are satisfied with the results, click Merge. Or, you can also click Back to return
to previous pages of the wizard, or click Cancel to cancel loading the data and return to
Synergi.
Loading equipment data

Like model data, you can load equipment data in two different ways. You can:
l Clear all equipment data from memory before you load new equipment data; or
l Merge the equipment data you are loading with the equipment data in memory.
Most Synergi users keep a single warehouse database or file that represents the collective set
of equipment, zone, and curve data for their organizations. A consolidated equipment data file
promotes consistency and allows users to easily promulgate the data to anyone who needs it.
To load equipment data
1. Before you begin, if applicable, make sure you have saved the current equipment data
in memory. See "Saving equipment data" on page 148 for more information.
3. To replace the equipment data in memory with the equipment data you are loading: In
the Warehouse group, click New.
—or—
To merge the equipment data in memory with the equipment data you are loading: In
the Warehouse group, click Load.
4. On the first page of the Load Warehouse wizard, select the DSA that is associated with
the equipment data file you want to load. The following table describes additional
options that you can select from this page of the wizard.
Load categories Use this option to select whether to load all equipment
data in the target DSA (“All”) or only selected categories
(“Selected”). You will select which categories to load on
the next page of the wizard.

Using Synergi
on page 59.
Browse button Click the Browse button to navigate directly to the

equipment data file that you want to load.

the wizard.
l If no DSA is associated with the model data file, you
will be prompted to create a new DSA for the
Cancel button Click Cancel to return to Synergi without loading new

equipment data.
l If you clicked the “Load” button to start this

procedure, you will return to Synergi with the
previously loaded equipment data still in memory.
l If you clicked the New button to start this
procedure, you will return to Synergi with no
equipment data loaded in memory (since the
previous equipment data was cleared from memory
when you opened the wizard).
5. If you have selected to save selected categories only, click Next. On the second page of
the Load Warehouse wizard, select the check box next to each equipment category that
you want to load.
6. The third and final page of the wizard provides a summary of the equipment data you
have selected to load, such as the number of instances of each equipment type that was
loaded. If you are merging the equipment data, the wizard also shows any conflicts that
were detected in the equipment data you are loading and the equipment data that is
already in memory, as well as the resolution for each conflict.
If you are satisfied with the results, click Merge. Or, you can also click Back to return
to previous pages of the wizard, or click Cancel to cancel loading the data and return to
Synergi.
Saving model data

When you save model data, you can choose whether to save the entire dataset in memory, or
selected feeders only. If you save selected feeders only, Synergi replaces existing feeders
with the feeders to be saved. If you save all feeders in memory, Synergi merges the data into
the target as follows:

Using Synergi
l If the target data file is a database, Synergi merges the saved data with the data
currently in the database.
l If the target data file is a binary file or a “flat” file such as XML or MiddleLink, the
original data file is completely replaced.
To save model data

2. In the Model group, click Save.
3. Use the Save Model Wizard to select the DSA where you want to save the data. The
options that you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
4. Click Save.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Save Model Wizard.
Save all feeders
Select this option to save all feeders that are currently loaded in memory, regardless of which
feeders have been selected for use in Synergi.
Save selected feeders
Select this option to save only the feeders that are currently selected in Synergi. Note that
this option will remove all existing feeders from the target file, and only save the feeders that
you currently have selected in Synergi.
Multi-year values in database
Select this check box to save all multi-year data. If the check box is cleared, only base-year
data will be saved.
Generate reports after save
Select this check box to generate a summary report of the save actions after the save is
complete.
Edit the selected data source
After selecting a DSA, click the “Edit the selected data source” button to edit the DSA using
Synergi’s Data Source wizard. For more information, see "Editing a DSA" on page 59.
Browse
Click the Browse button to navigate directly to the model data file that you want to save.
l If a DSA is already associated with the model data file, that DSA will be highlighted
l If no DSA is associated with the model data file, you will be prompted to create a new
DSA for the selected file. The new DSA will then be highlighted when you return to the
wizard.
Cancel
Click Cancel to return to Synergi without saving the model data.

Using Synergi
Saving equipment data

When you save equipment data, you can choose whether to save all equipment categories that
are currently in memory, or selected categories only. If you save selected equipment
categories only, Synergi replaces existing equipment with the equipment to be saved. If you
save all equipment in memory, Synergi merges the data into the target as follows:
l If the target data file is a database, Synergi merges the saved data with the data
currently in the database.
l If the target data file is a binary file or a “flat” file such as XML or MiddleLink, the
original data file is completely replaced.
To save equipment data

2. In the Warehouse group, click Save.
3. Use the first page of the Save Warehouse wizard to select the DSA where you want to
save the data. The following table describes additional options that you can select from
this page of the wizard.
Save categories Use this option to select whether to save all equipment
data in memory (“All”) or only selected categories
(“Selected”). You will select which categories to save on
the next page of the wizard.
on page 59.
Browse button Click the Browse button to navigate directly to the

equipment data file that you want to save.

the wizard.
Cancel button Click Cancel to return to Synergi without saving the

equipment data.

Using Synergi
4. If you have selected to save selected categories only, click Next. On the second page of
the Save Warehouse wizard, select the check box next to each equipment category that
you want to save.
5. Click Save.
Sample databases
Your Synergi installation includes a sample model database and also a sample equipment
database. Both are Microsoft Access files and can be found in the Sample Data folder in your
Synergi documents directory.
These two files contain sample datasets that you may find useful as you experiment with and
learn how to use Synergi. DNV GL makes no claims regarding the accuracy of the
manufacturer data contained within the sample equipment database.
Before you use either database, it is recommended that you create backup copies of the
original files, in the event that you make changes that impact their integrity.
Comparing model data and equipment data

Synergi includes data comparison tools that you can use to compare the model in memory
with a model data source (specified as a model data DSA), and also the equipment in memory
with an equipment data source (specified as an equipment data DSA). Using these tools,
Synergi will evaluate every comparable data item and generate a report listing the total
number of comparisons made followed by any differences found. These differences may
l Data elements in memory but not in the data source.
l Data elements in the data source but not in memory.
l Data elements shared by both the data source and the model/equipment in memory but
with different field values.
Model data comparison is particularly useful if you extract model data directly from a GIS. In
this situation, you may monitor disparities between your Synergi model and the GIS,
especially as updates are made to the GIS. As such, you are able to determine more easily
when your Synergi model needs to be updated (or re-extracted).
Keep in mind that the comparison tool is only useful if you are comparing a complete dataset
with another complete dataset. Therefore, you should have an entire dataset loaded into
memory before making the comparison. Otherwise a lengthy list of messages for all entities
not loaded could be generated.
To perform a data comparison

2. In the Tools group, click Compare and then select Model to compare model data.
—or—
Click Compare and then select Warehouse to compare equipment data.

Using Synergi
3. In the Compare editor, select the DSA whose data you want to compare against the data
in memory. The following table describes additional options that you can select from
this editor.
data source source” button to edit the DSA using Synergi’s Data Source
button wizard. For more information, see "Editing a DSA" on
page 59.
Browse button Click the Browse button to navigate directly to the model
data file that you want to compare.

the Compare editor.
when you return to the Compare editor.
4. Click Finish.
NOTE: The comparison report lists results from the context of the Access database
schema. However, you can perform comparisons of model data in any format. The
Access schema simply provides a convenient means of identifying specific data
items.
Backing up model and equipment data

Synergi’s file backup feature can help prevent data loss in the event of an unexpected system
shutdown. Backups do not update your source files. Instead, the data is saved to a binary
backup file named SynBackup.edm in your Synergi documents directory. Each new backup
overwrites the previous one.
You can save backup files manually from the Model tab in the Synergi ribbon, or you can
configure Synergi’s preferences to automatically back up your data at a user-defined interval.
Backup files can be restored from the Model tab of the Synergi ribbon.
To configure automatic backups
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Backup tab.
3. Click Enable backup to enable Synergi’s automatic backup feature. You can also
configure the backup interval (the default value is 60 minutes) and specify whether
Synergi will prompt you before backing up your files.

Using Synergi
To manually back up your Synergi data

2. In the Tools group, click Backup and then select Save.
To restore data from the Synergi backup file

2. In the Tools group, click Backup and then select Load. Click Recover to confirm the
action. The recovered data will replace the model that is currently in memory.
Validating and cleaning up model data

Synergi has several tools to help you manage the integrity of your data. Although some tools
may overlap in functionality, each tool has a specific purpose. Some tools are intended for
reporting only, while others have the ability to correct data problems as they are found.
These tools include the following:
l Model cleanup scripts. Model cleanup scripts can be written to correct specific data
issues. For more information, see "Model cleanup scripts" below.
l Model Inspector. The Model Inspector is a collection of reports that are designed to find
problems demonstrated by the model or with model data. For more information, see
"Model Inspector" on page 706.
Model cleanup scripts

Model cleanup scripts can be written to find and fix model data problems, such as deleting
duplicate nodes or replacing phase or neutral conductors. Detailed information on the
available model cleanup commands is provided in the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
A model cleanup script is a text file that follows the MiddleLink format. Model cleanup runs on
the model data in memory, on selected feeders only. Source files on disk are not affected
unless you manually save the data afterwards.
For more information on working with model cleanup scripts, see the Synergi Electric Script
Guide.
Updating database schemas

If you are using an older database, Synergi’s Check and Repair Schema wizard can perform a
complete schema update, ensuring that the database is compatible with the most recent
version of Synergi. Both model and equipment data can be updated.
To check and repair a database schema
2. To check and repair a database schema: In the Tools group, click Check and then select
Model.

Using Synergi
—or—
To check and repair an equipment schema: In the Tools group, click Check and then
select Warehouse.
3. On the first page of the Check and Repair Schema wizard, select the DSA for the data
source you want to evaluate. Click Next to continue.
4. On the second page of the wizard, select the check boxes for each data correction task
that you want to perform. The following tasks are available:
l Add missing tables
l Add missing fields
l Add missing table indices
l Set capacity factor (in “Loads” table) to 1.0 if it is 0.0
l Set project load multiplier to 1.0 if it is 0.0 or NULL
l Set multi-ground neutral on sections where value is NULL
l Set switch withstand rating equal to the current rating
l Set missing winter ratings equal to summer ratings
l Set exposure factors to 1.0 if they are 0.0
l Set nominal voltage multipliers to 1.0
l Update feeder ties on switch records
l Clean up orphan nodes
5. Click Finish. Synergi will display a second editor showing the results of its findings.
Click Commit to commit the changes to the data source, or click Cancel to abort the
repair.
Editing default values for model devices

The Defaults file is an XML file, named SynDefaults.xml, that provides Synergi with default
values for a number of devices, including facilities, sections, and feeders. Synergi will
automatically apply the default values from this file in the following circumstances:
l When external data is imported, such as from a MiddleLink data source.
l When new sections are modeled that are not connected to existing sections.
l When new equipment is modeled that is created from a “general” equipment type in the
equipment warehouse (including breakers, fuses, motors, reclosers, and
sectionalizers).
You can edit the default values from the Model tab of the Synergi ribbon. Refer to the
following procedure for more information.

Using Synergi
To edit default values for Synergi devices

2. In the Edit group, click Defaults and then select the name of the device that you want
to edit.
3. Use the Synergi editor to edit default values for any option that is enabled. For
descriptions of the individual fields, press F1 to open the Online Help topic for the
device and editor tab that you are viewing. If an option is disabled, then it is not a
default that can be saved to the SynDefaults.xml file.
Note that any changes you make will not be saved to the SynDefaults.xml file until after
you exit Synergi.
Using subsets
A subset, as the name implies, is a subset of model data, often stored in the same data source
from which it originated. The data in a subset represents a collection of related information
that can be used to quickly reconfigure your model, according to the specific subset type.
Subsets can serve any variety of purposes. For example, you can use subsets instead of
separate model files to save winter and summer load data. Or, you can save different switch
configurations as different subsets, allowing you to change configurations quicker than if you
used versions or separate models.
Note that subsets include data from a single year only. When you load a subset, data is only
loaded into the current year, regardless of the year from which the data it was saved.
Therefore, you could use a subset to transfer data from one year to another.
Subsets are supported for all database formats, including Access, Oracle, and SQL server.
Subset types
The following table lists the subset types that are available in Synergi. A subset DSA can be
configured to save any combination of these subset types.
You should always remain aware of the subset scope. Some subsets save data from the entire
model in memory, while others save data from selected feeders only. When loading a subset,
however, the entire model is updated with any applicable data. Feeder selection is irrelevant
when loading a subset.
Subset type Contents Scope (when

saving)
Capacitors On/off status and trip/close settings for Selected feeders

switched modules 1 and 2.
Distributed kW, kvar, cKVA, KWH, and number of Selected feeders

loads customers for distributed loads of all sections,

Using Synergi

saving)
all phases
Distributed and kW, kvar, cKVA, KWH, and number of Selected feeders
spot loads customers for all loads of all sections, all
phases.
Elbows Elbow open/close status for all sections with Whole model
elbows. Because pad-mounted switch gear
uses elbows from a data standpoint, it is also
included in this subset. For more information
on pad-mounted gear, see "Pad-mounted
switch gear" on page 470.
Large Distributed generators, co-generators, and Selected feeders

Customers large customers. A large customer may also
be used to model manholes and vaults
because they use their own map symbols and
separate editors.
Meters For all sections with a meter: Selected feeders

l Enabled/disabled status of the meter
l Type of meter, for example, amp or
kVA.
l Metered values for all three phases.
Each phase has two values. For
example, an amp meter includes an
amperage and a power factor value.
Mobile items Enable/disable status, symbology, and Whole model

location of mobile items
Projects Places multiple, itemized spot loads on a Selected feeders

single section. On/off status, customer load
curves, and I,Z,PQ assigned to specific
sections.
Queried List of sections in the current query set, at the Selected feeders
sections time the subset was saved
Regulators On/Off status, tap position, tap direction. Selected feeders
Source demands Source voltages, and individual flags for each Whole model
indicating whether to apply the voltage during

Using Synergi

saving)
import.
Source node This subset allows you to transfer the Whole model
flow demands of a primary system, such as a
feeder/subtran system, to an independently
modeled feeding system, such as a
subtransmission system. Unlike most subsets,
you generally would save it from one model
(subtran/feeder) and load it into another
(subtransmission) to transfer subtran/feeder
demands to the subtransmission system. For
example, it may be used to simulate the
demands of a primary feeder/subtran system
on a subtransmission system, such that the
subtransmission system can be accurately
analyzed without the entire primary system in
memory.
Spot loads kW, kvar, KWH, and number of customers for Selected feeders
spot loads of all sections, all phases
Switches and Open/closed status for all switchable devices Whole model
elbows in the model, including fuses, breakers,
reclosers, sectionalizers, and elbows.
Creating a subset DSA

Before you can use subsets, you must first create a Synergi DSA to identify which file is
associated with the subsets. This file can be the same database from which you loaded your
model data, or it can be in a completely separate database. In either case, Synergi requires
that you specifically configure the DSA for use with the subset feature.
The following procedure provides a summary of creating a subset DSA. For additional
information on working with DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on page 58.
To create a subset DSA
2. In the Data Sources editor, select whether to edit an existing DSA or create a new DSA.
l To edit an existing DSA: Select the name of the DSA and then click Edit.
l To create a new DSA: Click Add.

Using Synergi
3. On page 1 of the Add Data Source wizard, edit a Description for the DSA and select a
Provider type. The only Provider types that are compatible with subsets are Access
(personal), Access (server), Oracle, and SQL Server.
4. On page 2 of the wizard, select the Path (for an Access database) or Server (for an
Oracle or SQL Server database) that will be associated with your subset data. You may
also specify a User Name and Password, if required for your selected Provider type.
5. On page 3 of the wizard, select “Subset” as the content type for the data source.
(Additional content types may also be selected, such as “Model” or “Equipment.”)
6. On page 7 of the wizard, review the summary information for the new or updated DSA.
Click Add to create the new DSA (or Update to update an existing DSA), or click Back
to return to the wizard to continue editing the DSA.
Saving a subset
Perform the following procedure to save model data to a subset. Note that saving a subset
acts as an update process rather than a replacement process. For example, when you save a
switch subset, Synergi will update all applicable switches in the current subset, while ignoring
any other records.
To save a subset
1. Before you perform this procedure, make sure you have configured at least one DSA in
Synergi as a subset DSA. See "Creating a subset DSA" on the previous page for more
information.
3. In the Parts group, expand Subsets and then select Save.
4. Use page 1 of the Save Subset wizard to do the following:
a. Under Subset data source, select the name of the subset DSA to which you
want to save the subset data.
b. Use the Subset option list to select the type of subset data that you want to save.
Subset types are described in "Subset types" on page 153.
c. Click Next to continue.
5. On page 2 of the Save Subset wizard, under Subset Name, type a name to identify the
subset of data you are saving. Spaces are not allowed in subset names. If subset data
already exists in the target data source for the data type you selected on page 1 of the
wizard, you can also select an existing name from the list.
6. Click Finish to save the subset data.
Loading a subset
Perform the following procedure to load a subset.

Using Synergi
To load a subset
Synergi as a subset DSA and that you have saved subset data to that DSA. For more
information, see "Creating a subset DSA" on page 155 and "Saving a subset" on the
previous page.
3. In the Parts group, expand Subsets and then select Load.
4. Use page 1 of the Load Subset wizard to do the following:
a. Under Subset data source, select the name of the DSA that contains the data
you want to load.
b. Use the Subset option list to select the type of subset data that you want to load.
Subset types are described in "Subset types" on page 153.
c. Click Next to continue.
5. On page 2 of the Save Subset wizard, under Subset Name, select the name of the
subset that you want to load. If the subset name list is blank, then no subsets exist for
the subset data type you selected on page 1 of the wizard.
6. Click Finish to load the subset data.
Using versions
Versions can be used to save only the changes to a base model, without saving the base
model itself. Versions can be saved in any supported database format, provided that it has
been configured as a Synergi DSA. The version DSA can be the same model database as your
base model, or a completely separate database.
Synergi generates versions based on a comparison of the model in memory with a database
on disk. Differences are stored in special version instance tables in the specified version
database. Versions are identified by name and description, allowing you to store an unlimited
number of versions in the version data source.
Creating a version DSA

Before you can use versions, you must first create a Synergi DSA to identify the database
where the version data will be saved. This can be the same database from which you loaded
your model data, or it can be in a completely separate database. Either way, the version will
only save data that has changed when the model in memory is compared to a model database
on disk.
The following procedure provides a summary of creating a version DSA. For additional

Using Synergi
To create a version DSA
Provider type. The only Provider types that are compatible with versions are Access
Oracle or SQL Server database) that will be associated with your version data. You may
also specify a User Name and Password, if required for your selected Provider type.
5. On page 3 of the wizard, select “Version” as the content type for the data source.
Saving a version
When you save a version, Synergi compares the data in memory with a base model on disk.
Only changes between the model in memory and the base model are saved to the version data
source.
NOTE: Do not save your model data before or after you save the version data. Because
Synergi compares the model data in memory to a model database on disk when saving
version data, saving the model in memory first would result in no differences to save to
the version database.
To save a version
Synergi as a version DSA. See "Creating a version DSA" on the previous page for more
information.
3. In the Parts group, expand Versions and then select Save.
4. On page 1 of the Save Version wizard, select the DSA for the base model that you want
to compare to the model in memory. Click Next to continue.
5. On page 2 of the Save Version wizard, select the DSA for the target model to which you
want to save the version data. Click Next to continue.
6. On page 3 of the Save Version wizard, type a Name and Description for the version
you want to save. Or, to replace an existing version, select the version name from the
provided list.
7. Click Finish to save the version data.

Using Synergi
Loading a version
Before you load a version, make sure that you load the base model from which the version
data was saved. Remember that the version database only stores differences that were
identified from the base model on disk and the model data in memory when the version was
saved. Therefore, it would make no sense to load the version data only, without loading the
base model first.
To load a version
1. Load the base model that the version data was saved from.
3. In the Parts group, expand Versions and then select Load.
4. On page 1 of the Load Version wizard, select the DSA for the model from which you
want to load the version data. Click Next to continue.
5. On page 2 of the Save Version wizard, select the Name of the version you want to load.
6. Click Finish to load the version data.
Deleting a version
Perform the following procedure to delete a version from a database that is identified through
a Synergi version DSA.
To delete a version

2. In the Parts group, expand Versions and then select Manage.
3. On page 1 of the Manage Versions wizard, select the DSA for the model from which you
want to delete a version. Click Next to continue.
4. On page 2 of the Manage Versions wizard, select the check box for the version or
versions that you want to delete.
5. Click Delete to delete the selected version data.
6. Click Yes and then Yes to confirm the deletion.
Using the gallery

The Synergi gallery is a repository where you can store frequently used models. Any currently
loaded model can be saved to the gallery. You can save all feeders in memory, or only those
that are selected for use.
Gallery models are stored in Synergi’s binary EDM format in the Gallery subfolder of your
Synergi documents directory. When you load a model from the gallery, it will replace all
model data that is currently in memory—no merging of model data will take place. After

Using Synergi
loading a model, you can save it back to the gallery or save it to any supported Synergi
format, just like you would save a regular Synergi model.
Although equipment data is also saved to the gallery’s EDM file format, you cannot load
equipment data using the gallery. To load equipment data from a model stored in the gallery,
you must create an equipment DSA for the associated EDM file and then load the data using
the DSA.
To save the current model to the gallery

2. In the Model group, click Gallery and then select Save.
3. In the Gallery Save editor, under Model Name, type the name of the model as you
want to save it in the gallery.
—or—
In the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery model that you want to
replace.
4. Use the option buttons at the bottom of the editor to select whether you want to save All
feeders/subtrans to the gallery model, or only the Selected feeders/subtrans.
5. Click Save.
To load a model from the gallery

2. In the Model group, click Gallery and then select Load.
3. In the Gallery Load editor, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery
model that you want to load.
4. Click Load.
To delete a gallery model

2. In the Model group, click Gallery and then select Manage.
3. In the Gallery Manager, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery
model that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
—or—
Click Delete All to delete all models from the gallery.
4. Click Close to close the Gallery Manager.
To rename a gallery model

2. In the Model group, click Gallery and then select Manage.
3. In the Gallery Manager, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery
model that you want to rename, and then click Rename.

Using Synergi
4. In the Rename Gallery Model editor, type the new name for the gallery model and then
click OK.
5. Click Close to close the Gallery Manager.
Using the Export/Import tool

The Export/Import tool provides the ability to export and import model data to or from
several different file formats. You can:
l Export a sample CMM file
l Export a sample reliability outage file
l Export an OpenDSS file
l Import a Cyme model (format 4.7)
l Import a Milsoft model
Exporting a sample reliability outage file

You can use the Export/Import tool to export a sample reliability outage file. Random outage
events will be generated on random sections for a 5-year period. The categories and
subcategories of the events are gathered from the ReliCauseMeta.txt file, which is saved in
the Settings folder of your Synergi documents directory.
The exported outage file will be saved in the Scripts folder in your Synergi documents
directory with an *.OutSet file extension, and it will be formatted according to Synergi’s
outage file schema. The outage file can then be run through Synergi’s reliability event
manager to create sample exposure zones for the model.
To export a sample reliability outage file
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Forge tab.

2. In the Model Forge group, click Export/Import.
3. In the Export/Import editor, under Select Export/Import action, select Export
Reliability Sample.
4. Under Filename, specify the name of the file to be exported. You do not need to specify
a path or file extension; the file will be saved by default in the Scripts folder in your
Synergi documents directory.
5. Under Reliability Failures, specify the number of failures per miles for each year for
the exported data.
6. Click Finish.
NOTE: After you have exported a sample outage file, you can use the Reliability
Event Management wizard to import the sample outage data to create sample
exposure zones in your model. For more information, see "Reliability Event
Management Wizard" on page 690.
To view the outage file schema

Using Synergi
2. In the Tools group, select Schemas > Supporting Data > Outage.
Using the EA Automation wizard

The EA (Engineering Analysis) Automation wizard automates the process of loading model
data and then running multiple analyses for multiple analysis years. The settings that you
select in the wizard are saved as a standard Synergi text-based recipe that you can then run
using the Solver or from the Macros tab of the Synergi ribbon.
To use the EA Automation wizard
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

2. In the Automation group, click EA Automation.
3. On page 1 of the EA Automation wizard, select the DSA from which you want to load
model data. In addition, you can do any of the following:
l Select the Analyze Entire Database check box if you want to analyze the entire
model database. If selected, you will proceed directly to page 5 of the wizard,
where you can select which analysis types to run. Otherwise, you will proceed to
page 4 of the wizard, where you can select which substations you want to load and
analyze.
l Select the Load Adjacents check box to automatically load any feeders that have
ties to the feeders you directly select to load.
l Select the Load Substations check box to automatically load any substations
that have ties to the feeders that you directly select to load.
l Select the Load Substations and their feeders check box to automatically
load any substations and/or feeders that have ties to the substations that you
directly select to load.
NOTE: Because the EA Automation wizard shares common code with other wizards
in Synergi, pages 2 and 3 of the wizard are not used.
4. On page 4 of the wizard, use the tree view select which substations you want to analyze.
5. On page 5 of the wizard, do the following:
a. On the left side of the wizard, use the tree view to select which analysis types you
want to perform on the loaded substations.
b. In the center of the wizard, select the analysis years that you want to analyze.
c. On the right side of the wizard, select whether you want to generate analysis
reports and save results to a results database. (The results database must be
previously configured as a results DSA to be available for use here.)
6. On the last page of the wizard, do the following:
l To save the current settings as a recipe script: Under Recipe Name, type the
name of the recipe you want to save, or select the name of an existing recipe to
replace it with the new settings. Then, click Save.

Using Synergi
l To edit a recipe script: Select the name of the recipe that you want to edit, and
then click Edit. The script will open in a text editor, where you can edit the script
as necessary.
l To run a recipe script: Click Run Now.
7. Click Finish to close the wizard.
Working with other Synergi data types

Synergi can use data from many different sources and many different data formats. To help
you manage your data, Synergi uses the concept of data source aliases (DSAs) to load,
merge, and save data. A DSA functions as an intelligent link to your source files, freeing you
from the burden of remembering file names, types, and locations.
The topics listed below describe the data management features that are available in Synergi.
Synergi data types

Synergi data types identify what kind of data is included in the source file that is associated
with a DSA. A typical DSA may be associated with model data or equipment data. Other DSAs
can include both model and equipment data, plus subset, partial, and version data. Data type
associations help Synergi present the appropriate DSAs at the appropriate time when using
the program.
Many data types can be associated with different source file formats. For example, model
data can be imported from several format types, including an Access database, an Oracle
database, and a MiddleLink text file. Other data types are only associated with one file format.
In most cases, however, you can import and merge data into Synergi from multiple data
formats.
The following table describes the data types that are used in Synergi.
Data source Description Supported formats

type
Custom A custom data type is used to import Access (personal)

custom content for use with tools like the
Enterprise DBs
Synergi Joiner (see "Joiner" on page 202)
and results import (see "Importing and
exporting analysis results" on page 517).
The data source referenced by a Custom
DSA can be any database that has a table
with a “SectionId” column.
Data mart The Synergi data mart is a database of Enterprise DBs

client-related data that can provide useful
information for model building,
distribution, and analysis.

Using Synergi

type
For more information, see "Data mart" on

page 169.
Equipment Equipment data refers to the nameplate Access (personal)

equipment that is referenced by most
Enterprise DBs
devices in your model. Equipment data
also includes “zone” data, such as the MiddleLink
definitions of customer zones. Binary (EDM)
For more information, see "Working with XML
model and equipment data" on page 141.
Excel An Excel DSA refers to data that can be Excel

used to support a time series analysis. A
specific worksheet must be specified as a
part of the DSA configuration.
The input format for Excel files used to
support a time series analysis is described
in "Configuring an external data file for a
time-series analysis" on page 549. The
time series analysis is described in "Time-
series analysis" on page 548.
Historian Messaging scripts for PI, SQL Server, —

MySQL, and Oracle databases that contain
semi-real time data.
For more information, see "Importing
real-time data" on page 195 or "DBMS
Real-Time Data" on page 197.
Model Model data includes information on Access (personal)

sections, nodes, and equipment locations,
Enterprise DBs
and is largely responsible for the map you
see when a model is loaded. MiddleLink
For more information, see "Working with Binary (EDM)

model and equipment data" on page 141. XML
Protection data Protective device curve data resides in a Access (personal)

special, standalone Access database that
is shipped with Synergi. It is required for
certain analyses and protection work,
including the Synergi TCC view.

Using Synergi

type
For more information, see "Protection

data" on page 172.
Partials Conceptually similar to subsets, partials MiddleLink

allow you to import a customizable subset
of data into your model.
For more information, see "Partials" on
page 170.
Results Synergi results, including a wide variety of Access (personal)

analysis results, can be imported and
Enterprise DBs
exported to a supported database format.
During the export process, the target is
considered a results-type source, and the
DSA for the transaction must be specified
as such. For more information on this
process, see "Importing and exporting
analysis results" on page 517.
Subset Subsets allow you to save and load related Access (personal)
subsets of model data. Subsets are used
Enterprise DBs
to quickly reconfigure a model, such as for
summer and winter loading.
For more information, see "Using subsets"
on page 153.
Text (csv) A Text (csv) DSA refers to data that can be CSV
used to support a time series analysis. A
specific CSV file must be specified as a
part of the DSA configuration.
The input format for CSV files used to
support a time series analysis is described
in "Configuring an external data file for a
time-series analysis" on page 549. The
time series analysis is described in "Time-
series analysis" on page 548.
Version Versions allow you to store different Access (personal)

versions of the same model, for
Enterprise DBs
conducting planning studies and other
“what-if” scenarios. For example, you
could model a proposed new subdivision

Using Synergi

type
and save it as a version, rather than

making the change permanently to your
base model.
For more information, see "Using
versions" on page 157.
Supported data formats

Synergi supports a variety of formats for importing and exporting data. Each data format has
advantages and disadvantages, and you should make an informed choice of which format to
use, based on your workflow and organizational needs.
Microsoft Access (personal database)

Microsoft Access is the most common means of storing Synergi data. Microsoft Access is an
open database and generally easy to manage, which makes it a popular format for storing
model and equipment data in Synergi. Advanced users can use Access directly, as well as
other third party tools, to perform advanced data population and manipulation through custom
querying and other methods.
Synergi supports password-protected Access databases. When you create a DSA to a
protected database, you must specify the password information as a part of the DSA. This is
described in more detail in "Managing data sources" on page 58.
Data truncation when saving to an Access database

A new database created by Synergi establishes a maximum text string length, in most cases,
of 32 characters. Some older versions of Synergi used a maximum string length of 15
characters. Regardless of the which maximum is used, if you edit text strings to exceed the
maximum limit allowed by the database, Synergi will need to truncate the data in order to
save it.
Before this occurs, Synergi will prompt you with a warning message in the “Conflicts writing
to database” editor. This editor allows you to decide whether to accept the conflicts and write
the data to the database. Doing so would result in the data being truncated as necessary.
TIP: If you are using a model saved with an older version of Synergi where the maximum
text string length is 15 characters, save the model as a new database. This action will
reset the maximum text string length to 32 characters.
In rare circumstances, truncation can result in a loss of uniqueness between identifiers, if the
strings differ only past the point of truncation. If you need longer strings, you can use
Microsoft Access to manually extend the maximum field length and then resave the database
in Synergi.

Using Synergi
Microsoft Access (server/DBMS)

Synergi’s enterprise database tools support Access in a server/DBMS environment. For more
information on enterprise databases, see "Using an enterprise database system" on page 184.
Binary data format (EDM)

Synergi supports a proprietary binary file format with an EDM extension. This format is not an
open or flexible file format, like Access or XML. Synergi EDM files can only be used by
Synergi, and only model data and equipment data types can be saved to the binary EDM file
format.
The primary advantage of binary files is speed. Loading and saving data in binary files takes a
fraction of the time that it would take with databases and XML files. In addition, the file size
for binary files is much smaller, making it easier to copy and store your files.
However, it is critical that you do not rely on binary files for long-term data storage. Binary
files are best-suited for short-term use only. Databases should always be used when model
and equipment data is migrated to a new Synergi release In addition, if you want to perform
data management directly in the source files, then another file format, such as the Access
database or XML, would be required.
MiddleLink
Middlelink is a command-based language used to represent model data in Synergi macros.
Many features in Synergi rely on source data in the MiddleLink format.
MiddleLink commands are stored in comma-separated value (CSV) files. Each command
begins with a MiddleLink number that identifies the purpose of the command. The number
may be followed by additional parameters that are needed to complete the command. For
example, the 201 MiddleLink command is used to import a section.
201, Sect_01, Node_A, Node_B
The input format for the 201 command is as follows. The full MiddleLink schema is available
from the Support tab in the Synergi ribbon.
201, Section_ID, From_Node, To_Node
The following list provides some additional notes on the MiddleLink file format:
l Each command must be on its own line.
l Commands may appear in any order in a MiddleLink file. For example, if the command
to place a switch on a section appears before the command that actually creates the
section, Synergi will be able to process those commands in the correct order. However,
a logically written MiddleLink file will make the commands much easier to understand.
l Any line in a MiddleLink file can be made into a comment by proceeding the line with an
apostrophe ('). Commented lines are ignored by Synergi.

Using Synergi
MultiSpeak
MultiSpeak is an emerging specification for electrical distribution data, the result of a
collaborative effort of the National Rural Electric Cooperative Association (NRECA) along with
other software providers and consultants. Based in XML, MultiSpeak is intended as a common
format by which different applications, systems, and organizations can share data. For more
information on the MultiSpeak initiative, including the progress, history, and goals, visit
www.multispeak.org.
To import MultiSpeak data, you must have a DSA with MultiSpeak specified as the provider
type. For more information on DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on page 58.
Oracle and SQL Server

Oracle and SQL Server are database formats supported by Synergi’s enterprise database
tools. These formats apply to model and equipment data, including subsets and versions. For
more information on enterprise databases, see "Using an enterprise database system" on
page 184.
PI Historian
If you have access to a PI Historian database, DSAs can be linked through the DSA wizard. It
is not necessary to specify the contents of the data source as you would with model data or
equipment data, as Synergi will automatically recognize the PI format. For more information,
see "Importing real-time data" on page 195.
PI system data can be mined in the SQL dashboard. Select PI from the list of supported DSA
types and then select a query from the list, or write it in the dashboard window. For more
information, see "SQL Dashboard" on page 224.
MySQL
MySQL is a supported database type in Synergi. This format can support the same data found
in any typical database type such as Access or Oracle. Like other formats, MySQL can handle
most model and equipment-related tasks.
XML
Synergi can import and export model data and equipment data in XML format. This format has
three primary uses:
l External data import. XML can be used as an alternative to the MiddleLink format to
bring in model data from external sources, such as CIS, OMS, and SCADA systems.
l Exporting usable data. If you need to export and transport Synergi data in a non-
database format, XML may be a good choice.
l Saving program settings. Program settings such as growth options, fault location,
design evaluation, check coordination, model options, contingency, and publishing
settings are saved in XML format.

Using Synergi
The Synergi XML schema is designed with a simple structure and intuitive tag names so that
data is easily recognized and managed. To view the entire schema within Synergi, select the
Support tab in the Synergi ribbon. In the Tools group, select Schemas > Model > XML.
Data mart
The Synergi data mart is essentially a federation of our clients’ related data that can be
logically grouped to provide information useful to model building, distribution, and analysis.
The resulting engine is a custom application created through a close collaboration between
Synergi engineers and the utility engineers. The more engineers take advantage of building
and maintaining the data mart, the more it can grow in its maturity.
Because a true data mart may vary through utilities based on the type of data available, this
section will attempt to outline a typical, but not definitive, data mart extraction process.
The figure below represents a general approach to model building where data is gathered and
built within the GIS. The relevant model data is collected and pushed out into text files in a
MiddleLink format. Synergi reads the resulting text files and constructs the network models.
Synergi then corrects modeling problems and cleans up issues. The power distribution model
is ready for analysis and can be retained in Synergi or saved to Oracle for later use. Typically,
this gathering and extract process is done on a per-feeder basis with each feeder taking 2 to 5
minutes to extract.
The following figure shows extraction of data directly from the AMS database, known as the
model forge method. DataPrep and MiddleLink files are no longer part of the extraction
process or architecture. With the model forge method, models are built by region instead of
by feeder, causing build times to be dramatically reduced. Synergi builds models from the
client’s data mart, which can include databases from various locations defined by the client.

Using Synergi
Partials
Partials can be used to import and export subsets of model data using the MiddleLink format.
Partials can be used to import data from any source, such as a GIS, SCADA, or any type of
external system, as long as the data is in the MiddleLink format. The import process is similar
to loading model data. Synergi accepts and rejects items as necessary to maintain data
integrity, and provides a report after the data has been loaded.
Before you can use partials, you must configure a partial DSA. In this DSA, you specify the
name of the CSV file where you will load and save the partial data, and also which categories
of model data you will associate with the partial.
Data checking when using partials

When you load model data, Synergi performs extensive data checks within the data source
and can prohibit faulty data from being loaded into the model. For partials, however, the rule
base is less stringent, and a greater potential exists for data corruption.
Consider the following MiddleLink record to create a capacitor:

Using Synergi
701, Section_1, MyCapacitor, 6, OD34, 600
If you import this record from a model data source, Synergi will create a 600 kvar/phase
capacitor. However, if you import this record from a partial data source, the results are less
predictable. If the capacitor does not currently exist, Synergi will create a 600 kvar capacitor.
But if the capacitor does exist, Synergi will add a 600 kvar/phase to the existing capacitor.
Use care when designing a workflow that includes partials. Test the partials thoroughly to be
sure they are performing the actions you expect.
Creating a partials DSA

Before using partials, you must first create a Synergi DSA that identifies which CSV file you
will be working with and which data categories will be associated with the partial. Refer to the
following procedure for more information. For general information on working with DSAs, see
"Managing data sources" on page 58.
To create a partials DSA
1. Make sure that you have created a CSV file for use with the partial DSA.
3. In the Data Sources editor, click Add.
4. Use page 1 of the Add Data Source wizard to do the following:
a. Next to Description, type a name to identify your DSA in Synergi.
b. Click the Provider options list and select Middlelink (file).
c. If necessary, use the Notes text box to enter additional information about the
DSA. This information is for reference purposes only.
5. On page 2 of the Add Data Source wizard, use the Path field to select the name of the
CSV file that will be associated with your partial. Click Next to continue.
6. On page 3 of the Add Data Source wizard, expand the options list under Contents of
data source and select Partial. Click Next to continue.
7. Page 5 of the Add Data Source wizard contains several options that are associated with
MiddleLink data imports. These options are not related to the partials feature, so you
can accept the default values and click Next to continue.
NOTE: If you do want more information on these MiddleLink import options, see
"Setting options for a MiddleLink data import" on page 177.
8. On page 6 of the Add Data Source wizard, use the check boxes to select which data
categories you want to associate with the partial. When you are finished, click Next to
continue.
9. On page 7 of the Add Data Source wizard, review the summary information and then
click Add to create the partial DSA.
10. Click Close to close the Data Sources editor.

Using Synergi
Saving data to a partial

Perform the following procedure to save Synergi data in the Middlelink format to a CSV file
that has been configured as a partial DSA.
To save data to a partial
Synergi as a partial DSA. See "Creating a partials DSA" on the previous page for more
information.
3. In the Parts group, expand Partials and then select Save.
4. In the Save Partial editor, select the name of the partial DSA to which you want to save
the partial data.
5. Click Finish.
Loading data from a partial

Perform the following procedure to load Middlelink-formatted data from a CSV file that has
been configured as a partial DSA.
To load data from a partial
Synergi as a partial DSA and that you have saved data to that partial DSA. See
"Creating a partials DSA" on the previous page and "Saving data to a partial" above for
more information.
3. In the Parts group, expand Partials and then select Load.
4. In the Load Partial editor, select the name of the partial DSA from which you want to
load partial data.
5. Click Finish.
Protection data
Synergi ships with a protection database in Access that contains the extensive Synergi
protective device curve library, used for protection coordination studies. Because of the
essential information it contains, you should generally load the protection database when you
load a model and equipment data.
To load the protection database
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Protection tab.

2. In the Protection Curves group, click Library.

Using Synergi
3. The name and path of the protection library is shown in the Load Protection Db editor. If
you wish to change the file, click Browse and navigate to the location of the new file.
4. Click Finish to load the protection database.
General information on protection data

When you load the protection database, only the CurveDefinitions table is loaded. This table
provides enough data to run the Synergi editors, but does not contain the actual point data for
plotting curves on a TCC graph. To plot curves, Synergi load points as needed from the
protection database.
The protection database is read-only within the Synergi interface. However, you can open it in
Access and make changes if desired. For example, the CurveDefinitions table allows you to
selectively enable or disable individual curves. If you disable a curve, it is not loaded into
Synergi when you load the protection database.
It is recommended that you edit the protection database with caution. Also, keep in mind that
DNV GL continues to update this database with new devices and welcomes your suggestions
for additions.
Protection database and the TCC

The protection database contains all the point data necessary to plot a curve on the TCC
graph. However, this point data is not loaded when a protection database is loaded. Synergi
loads only the enabled curve definitions from the CurveDefinitions table. These definitions
represent curve definitions, but do not contain the actual mathematical points needed to plot a
curve on the graph.
To retrieve the data to plot a curve on the TCC graph, Synergi uses a special key in the curve
definition, known as the internal curve number (ICN). The ICN is used as a reference to look
up the actual points in the CurvePoints table, which remains in the protection database file.
The CurvePoints table should contain the entire set of actual points for each ICN found in the
CurveDefinitions table.
If a protective device fails to display in the TCC, check to make sure the protection database
has been loaded. If so, view the “rap sheet” for the device in question and check the ICN,
listed as the “Database ID.” With the CurveDefinitions table loaded, Synergi should at least be
able to produce the ICN. Once you have the ICN, you can open the CurvePoints table in Access
in an attempt to track down points associated with the ICN and locate the problem. For more
information on rap sheets, see "Rap Sheets" on page 314.
Keep in mind that individual curve definitions can be enabled or disabled within the
CurveDefinitions table using Access. If a curve does not display, ensure that the appropriate
record(s) in the CurveDefinitions table has not been disabled. If a definition is disabled, it will
not be loaded, and any device requiring that definition will not display on the TCC (because
Synergi will not be able to find the ICN to reference the CurvePoints table).

Using Synergi
Part of a rap sheet for a breaker, with some of the associated points in the CurvePoints
table
Mechanical response times and the protection database

Often, a device with a particular set of contacts or breakers has a response time listed in
standard tables. Synergi has a MechResponseTimes table in the protection database for
storing mechanical response times by device ID. Like all protection data, this data cannot be
edited with Synergi. New entries must be made to the table in the protection database.
Response curves represent the operation time of the controller for electronic reclosers,
electronic relays, and mechanical relays. Mechanical response times represent the delay
between the controller trip signal and the actual tripping of the mechanical contacts.
Mechanical response times are used to shift the curves of electronic reclosers and all breaker
relay models by a constant time value (adder). In the TCC window, you have the option of
displaying response curves, control curves, or both for these devices. For more information
on setting this option, see "Changing TCC view display properties" on page 667.
Mechanical response times typically range from 0.015 to 0.055 seconds.
Importing GIS data using MiddleLink

The MiddleLink format is the most common means of preparing GIS and other external data
for import into Synergi, in order to build a model. Keep in mind, however, that the MiddleLink
format is very flexible and can be used in many other ways. Also, Synergi supports several
other data formats for importing model data, though MiddleLink is by far the most common
for bringing in GIS-originated data.

Using Synergi
To conduct a full-scale model build in this manner, you must have your GIS data formatted in
one or more text files, adhering to the MiddleLink schema. Typically, these files are produced
from a GIS extraction by a customized DataPrep software solution from DNV GL. However,
you do not need DataPrep to build a model from GIS data, provided that your imported data
adheres to the MiddleLink schema.
Building a model from GIS data can involve a host of data issues that are unique to your
situation. This User Guide does not attempt to cover every possible data issue that might
arise. Rather, it attempts to present a higher-level overview of the import process, so that
you can understand the tools well enough to customize an extraction/model build system that
works for you.
Benefits of GIS extraction

By using GIS data to automatically build models, you can enjoy a host of benefits, including:
l Significant time and cost savings. By eliminating the manual process of model building,
you will immediately realize a significant reduction in time and expenses.
l Consistency throughout the organization. When your Synergi models are generated
from GIS data, everyone is looking at the same data.
l Regular updates to Synergi models. GIS extraction allows you to quickly update your
Synergi models automatically when updates are made in the GIS.
l Two-way data validation. When you bring GIS-based data into Synergi, you can use the
import tool’s native validation features to find and fix data problems, and later use
Synergi data management tools as well. After you correct a problem, the change can be
implemented in the GIS source, providing benefit to all parties. Many organizations find
that data import validation by Synergi has played a significant role in improving their
GIS data.
To create the data source files used by the import tool, you need a GIS extraction process in
place. You can build this process yourself, adhering to the MiddleLink schema. Or, DNV GL can
create a customized, turnkey extraction process for you, known as DataPrep. The DNV GL
approach is comprehensive and does not end until your models are validated and working in
Synergi. For more information on customized DataPrep systems, contact DNV GL. For more
information on source files, see "The MiddleLink data source—Building a model from a GIS" on
the next page.
General steps for a Synergi-MiddleLink import

If you choose to use Synergi to build your models from a MiddleLink data source, the following
are the general steps you should take.
1. Extract the data from your GIS and format it as a MiddleLink data source, adhering to
the established schema. For more information on the data source schema, see "The
MiddleLink data source—Building a model from a GIS" on the next page.
2. Create a DSA to the MiddleLink data source, configuring your MiddleLink import options
as appropriate. For more information on these options, see "Setting options for a

Using Synergi
MiddleLink data import" on page 177. For more information on DSAs, see "Managing
data sources" on page 58.
3. Import the data source into Synergi. For more information, see "Running a MiddleLink
data import (model build)" below.
4. In the map display, select feeders as desired to view the model that you imported.
5. As necessary, run the model cleanup tool without applying any changes, and review the
report. For more information on using the tool, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
6. If proposed changes (if any) are acceptable, run model cleanup a second time and
implement the changes.
7. Run the Check Data report to track down and resolve any lingering issues. The Check
Data report is a part of the Synergi InfoPanel. For more information, see "InfoPanel" on
page 312.
8. Save the model.
9. Perform studies as normal.
Running a MiddleLink data import (model build)

The procedure for importing MiddleLink model data is similar to importing any model data.
The only difference is that you are generally doing it for the express purpose of building a
model. During an import, all source data is imported and merged with any data in memory.
For more information on importing model data, see "Loading model data" on page 142.
The MiddleLink data source—Building a model from a GIS

The MiddleLink format combines the entire data source into one, comma-delimited text file.
The file is broken into individual records, using a standard numbering system and unique
record IDs to sort the data. As an example, the following is an excerpt from the MiddleLink
schema:
Description Code Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5
Basic switch 401 Section Switch ID Switch Near Is open

data ID (s) (s) type (s) from (b)
node (b)
Automatic / 402 Section Is auto- — — —

Autotransfer ID (s) transfer
switch (b)
Loop tie 403 Section — — — —

switch ID (s)
Wandering 404 Section — — — —

lateral tie ID (s)
switch

Using Synergi
In the data source, for example, you might see the following entries, which would create an
auto-transfer switch:
401, SEC_0110, Switch_32A, 1200LB13, 1, 0

402, SEC_0110
The first line uses code 401 to indicate that a switch should be created on section SEC_0110
named Switch_32A, on the from-node end of the section, using switch type 1200LB13, and
should be closed. The second line uses code 402 to indicate that the switch on SEC_0110
should be marked as an autotransfer switch. Because code 402 applies only to switches, and
because only one switch can exist on a section, no further identifying information is needed
for this line.
All device types have their own numerical category, based on a multiple of 100. In this
example, you can see that the 400s are reserved for switch data. If you look at the full
schema, you will see that node data is in the 100s, section data in the 200s, feeder data in the
300s, and so on. Within categories, each numerical code groups up to eight pieces of related
data items for easier management. Using these codes, you can logically sort your source as
needed to manage your data.
Because data is identified by numerical codes, lines can exist in the source file in any order.
Quotation marks should not be used in the new MiddleLink data source.
To view and print the MiddleLink schema

2. In the Tools group, select Schemas > Model > MiddleLink.
Setting options for a MiddleLink data import

Synergi provides several options that control how a model is built when it imports MiddleLink
files. These options can have a significant impact on how the data is handled. You should take
care to set them correctly.
These options are specified on page 5 of the Edit Data Source wizard when you are creating or
editing the DSA used to import the data. For more information on editing a DSA, see "Editing a
DSA" on page 59.
Option Description
Phases Designates the letters assigned to phase positions in the

database.
Calculate length Sets Synergi to calculate section lengths based on node

coordinates. If this option is set, all lengths of all imported
sections are calculated, regardless of any length values found
in the data source file.
Set neutral phase Sets Synergi to add a neutral phase to any line read from the

Using Synergi
Option Description
data source without a neutral phase.
Volt base Voltage base used by your organization, used to configure the
SAI_Control table in the model data source.
Length multiplier Multiplier used for section lengths read from the data source.
The multiplier also applies to calculated lengths, if the
“Calculate length” option is selected.
Detailed processing during a MiddleLink data import

The import/export tool performs a variety of tasks while building a model by importing
MiddleLink data. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Topology concerns and restrictions

Because Synergi’s topology validation engine is fairly strict, it must resolve any
unsupportable topology violations at the time of a MiddleLink import. For example, if two
different sections share the same pair of nodes, one of those sections must be eliminated at
the time of import. Often, topology violations are resolved by simply discarding the
component that caused the original problem. In the previous example, Synergi may attempt
to preserve the section that contains any equipment, but this is not guaranteed and the simple
order of source file data may be more of a determining factor.
While efforts have been made to cover these situations in the data import report, not all can
be accurately tracked. If your source files contain an unusual amount of unsupportable
topology data, you may find that data is altered and/or removed during import without your
knowing. Therefore, it is important to keep your source file data as compliant with Synergi as
possible, before attempting to import it.
Node identification—From/To versus Source/Load

In the MiddleLink standard, nodes are always referenced using the From/To designation,
which is different than the Source/Load distinction. The From/To convention operates from a
strict data standpoint and has no inherent relation to which nodes ultimately become source or
load nodes.
The differences between From/To and Source/Load can be explained follows:
l From/To. In a data source, every section has a literal from-node and to-node. When this
nomenclature is used in the interface, it is referring directly to the nodes as they are
listed in the respective section data record.
l Source/Load. When this nomenclature is used, Synergi uses actual power flow to
determine which node is which. Synergi does not necessarily follow the same direction
as the from/to designations in the data source. Because the source/load concept is less

Using Synergi
applicable in a meshed network model, the source/load terminology is only used in the
interface when you have your preferences set to disallow loop creation.
The source/load method is a mostly an interface convenience, using Synergi’s topology engine
to determine whether a node is a source or load node, shielding you from the added
complexity of from-nodes versus to-nodes. Synergi can use this method when working with a
full model within the map display, with all topology tools running. However, Synergi
MiddleLink must always use the literal from/to node designations, because the topology
engine cannot operate fully on a partial model as it is being built.
Many MiddleLink records use the from/to node terminology to indicate equipment location and
orientation. For example, a 1301 record to create a primary transformer uses node
designations to determine the direction of the high-side winding. When creating your data
extraction/model build process, use and designate from- and to-nodes as they literally appear
in your data source, not as they may relate to the actual power flow in the final model. During
a MiddleLink data import, Synergi has no concern for whether a node will ultimately come to
represent a source or load node.
Other records that include from/to node data and adhere to this concept include 401, 801, 901,
1001, and 1201.
Literal handling of empty records—MiddleLink data import

When Synergi imports MiddleLink data, it imports the data exactly as it is found in the source
file, and makes no assumptions about the data. For example, if you have an empty field in the
source file, this empty “value” will replace any value currently in the model, or in effect,
delete it. Consider the following record based on the MiddleLink schema:
203, Sect_01, 7, 357, ,
This record is intended to supply conductor data for section Section_01, but the conductor
fields are blank. When the section was originally created with a 201 record, Synergi applied
defaults from SynDefaults.xml, but this 203 record would come behind and delete that default
conductor data.
Although situations such as this may not be common, it remains your responsibility to manage
your data in a fashion that supports your needs. Synergi does provide several tools for finding
and correcting data issues, which may be your best approach for ensuring that your final
model is what you expected. These tools include "InfoPanel" on page 312 and "Editing default
values for model devices" on page 152, and also Model Cleanup Scripts, which are
documented in the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Feeder and subtran sources—MiddleLink data import

In Synergi, a feeder or subtran record must be associated with a node. This association is
described in detail in "Editing feeders and subtrans" on page 332.
If a feeder or subtran in the data source has the same ID as a valid node in the same data
source, establishing the feeder or subtran is relatively straightforward. The feeder or subtran
record is created using its respective data, and the node is created using its respective data.
Any coordinate data found with the feeder or subtran is disregarded, as well as any section
references. This method of establishing a feeder is valid for all versions of MiddleLink data.

Using Synergi
Capacitors—MiddleLink data import

If the import tool encounters multiple 702 records (kvar data) in a MiddleLink data source for
a single capacitor, the kvar values are summed for that capacitor.
Section spacing lookup—MiddleLink data import

The standalone MiddleLink product used a special lookup table to supply conductor spacing
information that might not be supplied from a GIS. This functionality has been discontinued
and replaced by the Synergi model cleanup application. For general information on model
cleanup, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Switch conversion—MiddleLink data import

The standalone MiddleLink product had a feature to convert node-type switches to compatible
Synergi switches, through an option called “Collapse Open Switches.” This option has become
obsolete and is no longer available for a MiddleLink data import.
General rules, messages, and warnings—MiddleLink data import

Synergi uses a limited rule-base when importing MiddleLink data. If any of the rules are
violated during the import, Synergi reports it and performs the applicable remedy. For
example, if a piece of equipment does not reference a valid section, it is rejected from the
import and Synergi reports this action.
The following table lists the messages that may appear in a report, based on rule usage:
Code Message Description
Syn_01 Bad node information Each section record must reference two valid
on section. Section nodes. If not, the section is not imported.
WILL BE DROPPED.
Syn_02 Referenced section Each device record must reference a valid section.
could not be found. If not, the device is not imported.
Syn_03 Duplicate record Duplicate records in any source file are ignored. A
found. record is considered a duplicate if the item ID is
the same as the ID of a comparable item in a
previously read record.
Syn_04 Unknown protective If an error in a PDV file record prevents Synergi

device category. from recognizing the protective device category,
such as fuse or breaker, the record is ignored.
Syn_05 Critical error reading Any severe data problem, especially one that
data. violates the Synergi data structure, will cause a
record to be ignored.

Using Synergi
Code Message Description
Syn_06 Classic protective Classic protective devices must be converted to

device converted. newer, detailed device types. If a conversion
occurs, this message is presented, along with
information about the new device.
Syn_07 Lookup table error. Synergi attempted to convert a classic protective

device, but found no corresponding information in
the protective device lookup table. This error
applies to the legacy MiddleLink 3.4 data import
only, because Synergi performs automatic
conversions and relies on the model cleanup tool
afterwards to complete the process.
Syn_08 General syntax error. Synergi encountered an irreconcilable syntax error

and did not process the offending line.
Browser file—MiddleLink data import

As part of validation during a model build, Synergi creates a browser file that contains build
messages and validation results. This browser file is identical to the browser file produced by
the standalone MiddleLink product. It is produced in the original data source folder with a BRS
extension.
The browser file is a CSV file that contains messages found in the MiddleLink import report,
along with the X and Y coordinates of the associated nodes and elements. As such, you may
find it useful for “browsing” your GIS maps to find the original problem spots. Some
MiddleLink users employ a custom application within their GIS that reads the browser file and
automatically zooms to the locations contained therein.
The following table shows the data format for the browser file, for a facility. Field descriptions
for a node are similar, except a node’s from-node and to-node coordinates are identical. The
comment character for the file is a semi-colon “;”.
Field Description Data Type
1. Data source name located in the map file. Text
2. ID of the component with the problem. Text
3. X coordinate of the from-node of the element. Real number
4. Y coordinate of the from-node of the element. Real number
5. X coordinate of the to-node of the element. Real number

Using Synergi
Field Description Data Type
6. Y coordinate of the to-node of the element. Real number
7. Code indicating the error type. Integer
8. Error message. Text
The following is three sample lines from a browser file
;"*8/24/1999 9:44:47 AM Data Source Name", "Data Source ID", x1, y1, x2, y2, "Error
Code", "Message"
"Mle6Sample", "R216 K",5567.794, -6023.306, 5567.794, -6023.306, 13590,"Protective

Device with ID R216 K, has an invalid value, 0, for attribute Minimum Pickup
Multiplier (Setting); used default, 1."
"Mle6Sample", "F228",2411, 4693, 2411, 4693, 13590,"Protective Device with ID F228,

has an invalid value, 0, for attribute Minimum Pickup Multiplier (Setting); used
default, 1."
Automating MiddleLink model builds

Many users prefer to automate the process of importing MiddleLink data, perhaps through a
system of daily or overnight builds. This type of automation helps ensure accurate, up-to-date
model data, while leaving more time for users to perform engineering work, rather than data
management tasks.
The topics listed below present a suggested, general approach towards automation. It is
mainly intended to introduce the tools available for this task. Your process may have unique
aspects that require any number of variations.
Overview of MiddleLink automation tools

Synergi provides two main tools for automation:
l Recipes. Recipes are custom scripts that can perform a variety of tasks within Synergi,
including the import of data. For detailed information on recipes, see the Synergi
l Command line arguments. When you launch Synergi from a command line, you can
specify certain arguments that initiate processing tasks after startup. One of these
arguments allows you to run a recipe as soon as Synergi starts up. For detailed
information on command line arguments, see "Launching Synergi from the command
line" on page 203.
Briefly stated, to automate a MiddleLink build, you should create a command line setup which
launches a recipe, which in turn runs a model build process. For a more detailed examination
of this process, see "General steps for MiddleLink automation" on the facing page.

Using Synergi
General steps for MiddleLink automation

The following general steps illustrate a suggested approach towards automating MiddleLink
builds. Your situation may require variations according to your normal workflow and data
setup.
1. Write and test a recipe that builds the model from your MiddleLink data source and
saves the results.
With DataIO recipe commands, you can fully automate the task of importing and saving
feeders. You should write this recipe and test it fully within Synergi before adding it to
any automated and/or unattended process. For an example of this type of recipe, see
"Sample recipe for MiddleLink automation" below.
2. Create and test a command line configuration that launches the model build recipe. For
a sample command line, see "Sample command line for MiddleLink automation" on the
next page.
3. Implement some sort of scheduled launch for the command line, perhaps nightly at a
certain time.
You may use any variety of external tools to schedule a regular application launch, via a
command line. One of the common means is through Windows Scheduler, accessed
through the Windows Control Panel. For more information on Windows Scheduler, see
your Windows documentation.
In summary, with this configuration in place, Windows Scheduler will start Synergi at the
prescribed time, and command line arguments will launch a recipe that initiates and
completes the model build. Note that this process does not include preparation of the
MiddleLink data source itself. Naturally, for a regular model build to have value, the data
source must also be updated regularly from the original source, usually a GIS database. As
data extraction methods vary widely between organizations and networks, this document
does not attempt to address this task. For assistance and ideas, you may consider contacting
your IT department or DNV GL.
Sample recipe for MiddleLink automation

A recipe that performs a MiddleLink build will likely consist of DataIO recipe commands.
DataIO commands allow tasks such as data loading and saving, the primary tasks involved
with MiddleLink model builds. The recipe may also contain commands to automatically run the
model cleanup application, if you typically use the application to validate data following a
MiddleLink build. For more information on model cleanup, see the Synergi Electric Script
Guide.
As an example, assume that you have the following:
l A DSA to a MiddleLink data source called MyMiddleLinkSource.
l A DSA to an Access model database called MyNewModel.
l A model cleanup script called PostMiddleLinkCleanup.
With these items, you could write the following recipe to automate building, validating, and
saving:

Using Synergi
Recipe DataIO
'Load the MiddleLink data, using the DSA "MyMiddleLinkSource"

DIO_04, MyMiddleLinkSource
'Save the completed model to an Access database, using the DSA "MyNewModel"
DIO_05, MyNewModel
End Recipe
Recipe Analysis
'Run model cleanup to correct and supplement data. Skip the reporting.
ANL_02, PostMiddleLinkCleanup, False
'Shut down Synergi. Normally, this command would only apply if this
'recipe were run as an unattended process. You probably don't want
'Synergi to shut down on you while testing this recipe.
GEN_02
End Recipe
Depending on your needs, you could further expand this recipe to perform other functions,
such as running analyses. Note that this recipe assumes that you already have DSAs created
for your files. You could have the recipe generate the DSAs automatically as well, although
DSA creation is normally a one-time task and not applicable to a regularly occurring process.
For more information on DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on page 58.
For general information on recipes, as well as detailed information on the available recipe
commands, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Sample command line for MiddleLink automation

The following command line would launch Synergi and run a recipe called
MyOvernightBuildRecipe. This example assumes that Synergi is installed in the default folder
on Windows 7, and the recipe is already created and tested:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\Synergi.exe" -r

"MyOvernightBuildRecipe"
This command line might be used to launch a recipe such as the one described in "Sample
recipe for MiddleLink automation" on the previous page. You could put this command line
anywhere that accepts command lines, including Windows Scheduler settings and the Run
dialog box, accessed by selecting Start > Run from the Windows desktop.
Using an enterprise database system

An enterprise database refers to one that is stored and managed on a network server by a
resident management system. In an enterprise system, no user actually “owns” the data
source files. Instead, multiple users essentially check feeders in and out of a central database

Using Synergi
that remains permanently on the server. In this respect, an enterprise database serves as a
central, protected data repository that multiple users can use simultaneously.
Only model, equipment, and associated data, such as subsets, can be managed within an
enterprise database system. All other data types must be managed with personal data
management tools.
Within an enterprise database system, your models reside on a network server, often in an
Oracle or SQL Server database. When you want to work on a model, you check out the feeders
that you need, which loads the feeders into your computer’s memory. When you are finished
with those feeders, you can save them back to the database, which replaces the feeders you
originally checked out. You can also create a new enterprise model with the feeders that you
checked out. Because the feeders are in your computer’s memory, you can also save them to
any other personal data format, such as an Access database on your computer for local use.
Note that the Synergi application itself is always installed on your computer. Synergi is not
designed to function in a client/server environment, even when using an enterprise database
system. When you load feeders from an enterprise system, a copy of the entire dataset is
loaded into your computer’s memory. When you run analyses and work in the editors, this is
the data you are using and/or changing. You cannot directly manipulate data on the server,
other than saving whole feeders back with data changes.
Advantages of an enterprise system

If you have large models and/or multiple Synergi users, an enterprise database system could
have significant advantages, including the following:
l Consistency. Because all users are working from the same set of models, all users are
looking at the same data. The chance of two or more versions of the same model being
used is greatly reduced.
l Data security. When your models are managed by a central enterprise system, they are
not subject to the inadvertent corruption or misplacement that can occur when
individual users maintain their own files. And, since the models normally reside on a
network server, they are naturally included in any network backup systems that your
company may have in place.
l Better workflow. The Synergi enterprise manager only allows one user to work on any
given feeder at a time. Therefore, you do not need to worry about redundancy and
inconsistency that can result when two people are working on the same system at once.
l Management of large models. If you have large models with hundreds of feeders, a
personal database may be too unwieldy to manage. An enterprise system allows you to
work with just the feeders you need, which minimizes the amount of actual data that
you must handle at any given time.
When you use an enterprise database system, you can still enjoy the traditional flexibility of
data management offered by Synergi. Once you check out feeders, the data is in your
computer’s memory and you can use it with any Synergi data management tool. For example,
you can create a new enterprise model, or you can create a personal data source from it so
that you have a backup or a working copy. You can use it for any sort of data comparison,
model merging, or version work. Or, you can use any of Synergi’s import and export
functions, including XML, subset, and MiddleLink features.

Using Synergi
Setting up an enterprise database system

The following steps illustrate the general process of establishing the enterprise database and
models. This process will not apply if your system is already established and you are only
connecting as a user.
1. Set up your enterprise database table space and user permissions. IT personnel
generally handle this process.
2. Install the appropriate client application on your computer to communicate with the
database. Again, IT personnel can assist with this step.
3. In Synergi, create at least one enterprise model to contain your data. Generally, the
number of models you can maintain in an enterprise environment is only limited by your
available disk space. While creating the model, you will also be ensuring that your
connection to the enterprise database is working. For more information, see "Creating a
new model in an enterprise database" on page 190.
4. In Synergi, create a DSA to the model. For more information, see "Creating an
enterprise model DSA" below.
5. In Synergi, save your data to the model with the DSA. If this is a new model, you must
first load the data from somewhere else, such as a local model file. For more
information, see "Loading and saving feeders in an enterprise system" on page 190.
After this, your model data is saved in the enterprise database system, and the model is
ready for multiple-user use.
Using an enterprise system

To use an enterprise database system, you must first set up your connection to the enterprise
database where your models reside, using a DSA. The DSA must reflect the data format, such
as Oracle or SQL Server, and the particular model involved. After your DSA is established,
you can begin normal enterprise database functions, including feeder loading and saving and
database management.
To create a new enterprise model, you must do so manually before you can save any feeders
to it. This requirement is different from local files, which can be created “on-the-fly” during a
save action, if they do not already exist.
When you save to an enterprise database, like any model data save, you can save all feeders
or just selected feeders. If you are moving model data from a local file into an enterprise
database model, you must first load it into Synergi from the local file and then save it to a
new enterprise model. For example, if you have a local Access file that you want transferred
to Oracle, you should load the data from Access with Synergi and then save it to the Oracle
model.
Creating an enterprise model DSA

To connect to your server database and access a model, Synergi uses settings within a DSA.
These settings include information such as the provider type, server name, and user
identification.

Using Synergi
Remember that before you can make a connection, the database tables must be set up
properly and you must have the appropriate database client application on your computer.
Your database administrator or IT representative can help with client installation. If you are a
database administrator, see "Note to database administrators regarding Enterprise
databases" on page 193.
When creating a DSA to an enterprise database, note the following:
1. A DSA points to a specific model within an enterprise database system. Therefore, you
must be sure to pick the appropriate model during DSA creation. If the model does not
exist yet, you can create it within the DSA wizard. Or, you can create it with the DBMS
model manager before starting DSA creation. For more information, see "Creating a
new model in an enterprise database" on page 190.
2. Be sure to enter server information correctly. An IT representative may be able to
assist with server naming and user permissions.
3. The Test Connection button in the DSA wizard is a good means of testing for a solid
connection.
4. The feeders themselves are not relevant to the DSA, only the model. The particular
feeders are chosen during load and save actions.
For an overview of DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on page 58. For specific steps on
creating a DSA, see "Using the Data Source wizard" on page 60.
Oracle connections for Enterprise databases
When connecting to Oracle, you are connecting to a table space with access to certain tables,
based on your login profile as set by a database administrator. Within the contexts of Synergi
DSAs, you do not necessarily need to be concerned with selecting a database, because the
specified server name essentially represents the only database. Once connected, the
particular model should be the only concern.

Using Synergi
Edit Data Source wizard, showing connection information to an Oracle table space
SQL Server connections for Enterprise databases
Unlike Oracle, SQL Server does have the concept of different databases, and if you are an SQL
Server user, this concept may or may not affect you. Like a master Oracle database, each
individual SQL Server database can contain any number of Synergi models. If you keep all
your models in a single database, the particular database should not be of concern. Your
database administrator can set up your Synergi model database as your default database, to
which you automatically connect when you access SQL Server through Synergi. However, if
you store data in multiple databases, you may need to specify a database name during
connection.
If you do not have multiple SQL Server databases, the connection parameters are basic,
identical to those described in "Oracle connections for Enterprise databases" on the previous
page. When you connect, you will automatically connect to your default database, as
established by a database administrator. However, if you need to connect directly to a specific
database, you can add the database name to the server name, separated by a semicolon. For
example:

Using Synergi
Connecting to a specific SQL Server database
Also, if your SQL Server setup supports Windows Authentication, you can leave the User
Name and Password blank, whether or not you have specified a particular database. For
example:

Using Synergi
Using Windows Authentication to connect to SQL Server
Windows Authentication uses your Windows login information to connect, and must be set up
at the database level by a database administrator.
Creating a new model in an enterprise database

An enterprise database can contain any number of models, and a model must exist previously
before you can save data to it. Synergi cannot generate the model automatically during a save
action, as it can do with local files like Access databases.
There are two ways to create a new model:
l During DSA creation
l In the DBMS model manager
Once a model is created, you can save data to it and all users can begin to check feeders in
and out. Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To create a new enterprise model with the Edit Data Source wizard
Follow the directions provided in "Creating a DSA" on page 58 and "Using the Data Source
wizard" on page 60 to create or edit an enterprise database DSA. On the fourth page of the
wizard, type the name of the new model and then click the Create New Model button to
create and reserve the model name within the assigned table space. The new model will be
added to the list of models that are provided on this page.
NOTE: If you are working with an Oracle database, the Model ID cannot start with a
numeric character. This is due to naming restrictions within Oracle.
To create a new enterprise model with the DBMS model manager
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Forge tab.

2. In the Tools group, click DBMS Manager.
3. Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click
OK.
4. In the Model to Manage wizard, select the Create option. Type a Model ID and
Description, and then click the Create button.
NOTE: If you are working with an Oracle database, the Model ID cannot start with a
numeric character. This is due to naming restrictions within Oracle.
Loading and saving feeders in an enterprise system

You can load feeders from the enterprise database at any time. You can also save feeders
back to the original model if they are locked under your lock ID. If you do not have them
locked, you can still save them back, provided that you create a new enterprise model, or you
manually reset the locks in your name. For more information on locks and lock IDs, see
"Feeder locks and lock IDs" on page 192.
Always remain aware of the type of data you are managing with an enterprise database. For
example, if your database contains model data only, you will need to load your equipment
(and most likely protection) data from a personal data source before running any analyses.

Using Synergi
Due to database resource issues, Synergi limits load and save operations to 300 feeders or
less. Also, you must have at least one feeder or subtransformer source in the model to save it
to an enterprise database. You cannot save a model that is completely unfed.
Use caution when renaming or moving feeder sources in an enterprise model. A feeder source
is an integral data item within a model dataset, referenced in many other places. Altering a
feeder ID and/or location can cause conflicts when data is saved back to the enterprise
database. Unlike with personal data sources, Synergi is unable to scan an entire enterprise
model prior to a save, and thus cannot fix data issues resulting from fundamental feeder
changes. In most cases, conflict issues from feeder source alterations will prevent you from
saving that feeder back to the enterprise database altogether. If this occurs and you are in a
hurry to save your feeders, remember that you can always save the current feeders to a
personal data source and take the time later to resolve the conflict issues.
To load feeders from an enterprise database model

2. In the Model group, click Load.
3. In the Load Feeders/Stations wizard, follow the instructions in the wizard to load the
desired feeders, noting the following:
l If you want to save the feeders back later, be sure to set the wizard to lock them
in your name. This will appear as an option in the feeder selection page. For more
information on locks, see "Feeder locks and lock IDs" on the next page.
l Following the load, the feeders may be unselected and thus do not appear on the
screen. If so, you can select them and do work as usual. For more information on
selecting feeders, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
l Remember that once the feeders are in memory, you can save them to a local file
if you want a backup or a working copy.
To save feeders back to an existing model
As with any model data save, you have the choice whether to save all feeders or just selected
feeders. Saving selected feeders will delete all other feeders from of the target. Therefore,
you should use extreme caution when saving only selected feeders back to an enterprise
model. If you are not careful, you could potentially lose a significant amount of data.

2. In the Model group, click Save.
3. In the Save Model wizard, select a model from the list and follow the instructions in the
wizard, noting the following:
l In the enterprise database, you must have feeders locked in your name to save
back to them. If you did not lock them when you loaded them, you can still set the
lock manually and redo the save later. Click Cancel to exit the wizard and see
"Feeder locks and lock IDs" on the next page.
l If you save a feeder that does not currently exist in the model, it will be added.
l Any unfed sections in memory are assigned to a feeder based on a topology trace
and proximity.

Using Synergi
Deleting feeders and models in the enterprise database

You can delete any feeder or whole model within the enterprise database system. Refer to the
following procedures for more information.
To delete feeders from an enterprise model

OK.
4. In the Model to Manage wizard, select Manage Feeders.
5. Select the model that you want to delete feeders from and then click Next.
6. On the next page of the wizard, select the feeders that you want to delete from the list
of available choices and then click Delete.
To delete an entire enterprise model

OK.
4. In the Model to Manage wizard, select Delete.
5. Select the model that you want to delete from the list of available models and then click
Delete.
Feeder locks and lock IDs

When you load feeders from an enterprise database, you have the option of “locking” those
feeders with your personal lock ID (which is set in the User tab of the Preferences editor).
This lock, with your personal lock ID, is required if you want to save the feeders back later.
No other user can save data to feeders that you have locked, and you cannot save data to a
feeder that is unlocked.
This feature is designed to prevent two users from making different changes to the same
facilities and then saving back to the same server. When you do save feeders back to the
enterprise database, you have the option of removing or keeping the lock.
This locking system is not intended to be a rigid security feature that enforces usage rules.
Instead, it is designed as a general measure to prevent data errors. If necessary, locks can be
easily reset or removed manually through Synergi’s enterprise management tools. For
example, if you load feeders without locking them and still want to save them back later, you
can use the tools to add your lock to those feeders and then save them as normal. Or,
consider the case where another user loads and locks feeders but does not save them back,
and then goes on vacation. If you must save data to those feeders, you can manually remove
those locks and proceed with your work.
If used as intended, the locking system should serve as an overall safety net that helps
prevent data conflicts in a multiple-user environment. For more information on setting and

Using Synergi
resetting locks manually, see the following procedure. For more information on setting your
lock ID, see "Database preferences" on page 42.
Generally, it is preferable that you allow locking and unlocking to take place during loading
and saving actions. However, tools are provided for cases where you must manually apply or
remove locks, if required. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
To lock or unlock enterprise model feeders

OK.
4. In the wizard, select Manage Feeders.
5. In the Model to Manage wizard, select the model that contains the feeders to be locked
or unlocked.
6. Click Next.
7. On the next page of the wizard, select the feeders to be locked or unlocked from the list
of available choices.
8. Click Lock to lock the feeders with your lock ID.
—or—
Click Unlock to clear any existing lock, regardless of who created the lock originally.
Note to database administrators regarding Enterprise databases

A Synergi enterprise database system first requires an administrator to perform preliminary
steps to prepare the database. Users may also need client software installed and configured
on their workstation computers.
If you are using Oracle, the following general steps are recommended:
1. Prepare the table space.

2. Create a user account to own the data, with Connect and Resources roles.
3. Ensure that users have Oracle installed with the OLE/DB driver.
Additional steps may be required, depending on your system and organizational protocol. For
more information on preparing the database, contact DNV GL Technical Support.
Model locks for Enterprise databases

In addition to the concept of feeder locks, as described in "Feeder locks and lock IDs" on the
previous page, the Synergi database manager also temporarily locks a whole model while
feeders are being loaded or saved. This feature helps prevent data corruption during a save
action, because the conflicts between two users, especially with regards to switching changes,
could be severe. When the feeder load or save is complete, this temporary lock is
automatically removed.

Using Synergi
If you attempt to load feeders from a locked model, you may have the option to continue with
the load anyway. You should choose this option only if you are sure that no one is currently
saving data to those feeders.
If the save action is interrupted before it completes, perhaps due to a power outage, network
failure, or Synergi abort, the model lock will not be removed and the model will be rendered
inaccessible to any user. If this occurs, you can manually remove a whole-model lock in the
DSA manager. For more information on producing the DSA manager, see "Using the Data
Source wizard" on page 60.
Word of caution regarding enterprise databases and data integrity

Alterations to model data, especially switching actions, can cause significant changes to a
distribution model. When you alter the topological path of electricity, you may alter the
perceived feeder “ownership” of sections, and thus alter the foundations of how Synergi
categorizes and stores data. Synergi has a number of safeguards in place to help prevent data
corruption and anomalies which can occur in a multiple-user environment, but none are 100%
effective. Because Synergi cannot anticipate the actions of any user on a dynamic and flexible
distribution model, it is incumbent on all users to remain vigilant of their actions, especially in
respect to other users and the data repository itself. Before performing switching actions and
saving data back, take a look at the changes that may have occurred and try to gauge what
impact it might have on your data integrity.
Enterprise models and analysis

When you have feeders loaded into memory from an enterprise database, you can run any
Synergi analysis as normal, provided that you have also loaded equipment data and perhaps
protection data from some data source. In some cases, you may notice slight differences in
analysis results between feeders retrieved from an enterprise database and the same feeders
from a local data source. These differences are due to the different standards of rounding
numbers between different database packages, such as Access versus Oracle. Any differences
that do occur should be very small and inconsequential.
Enterprise database schema

The enterprise database schema is very similar to the Access personal database schema,
except that each table name is preceded by the model ID. For example, if your model ID is
MyModel, the section table in the enterprise model would be MyModel_InstSection. There are
also some slight differences at the field level between the personal and enterprise database
schemas.
The model ID is specified when the model is created. For more information on creating a
model within an enterprise database, see "Creating a new model in an enterprise database"
on page 190.
To view the enterprise database schema

2. In the Tools group, click Schemas > Model > DBMS.

Using Synergi
To view the enterprise database indices

OK.
4. In the Model to Manage wizard, select the Create option. Type a Model ID and
Description, and then select the Generate SQL report, do not create tables check
box.
5. Click the Create button. Because you selected the “Generate SQL report, do not create
tables” option, Synergi will generate a report that lists the queries that are used to
create tables in a report. This report will include the required indices for the enterprise
database schema.
Importing real-time data

Semi real-time data can be brought into the simulation environment using Messaging scripts.
This data typically comes from database systems or data warehouses tied to real-time data
hubs. In the Synergi environment, the information can affect switch status, metered
demands, load values and more.
PI Historian
Messaging scripts are used to connect to a PI Historian database through a PI OleDb driver
configured on the current machine. Once connected to the database, Synergi retrieves values
for the tags specified in the script. The values are then associated with parameters for various
facilities within the Synergi model.
The script can also be configured to have Synergi write calculated values into the historian.
This results in tags with calculated values or virtual SCADA points.
PI Messaging script
A Messaging script is used to specify connection information as well as the desired
relationships between tags in the PI system and parameters within Synergi facilities. The
15205 record is used to connect to a PI Historian data source through ADO.
15205, Server, Username, Password
Note that the PI OleDB component must be installed.

The status of the connection can be checked with a 15206 record. Testing the connection is
recommended but the 15206 record should not be a part of the final working script.
Tags from the PI system are mapped to Synergi facilities with the following records:

Using Synergi
Script Record Description

Number
15210 Capacitor on / off.
15215 Switch open / closed.
15220 Metered kW.
15221 Metered amps.
15222 Metered kvar.
15223 Metered pf.
15225 Recloser open / closed.
15230 Breaker open / closed.
15240 Substation LTC tap value.
15241 Regulator tap value.
15242 Feeder volts.
15243 Feeder kV.
15250 Volts > Tag.
Records 15220, 15221, 15222, 15223, and 15242 are equipped with an optional multiplication
factor. This allows you to scale the value between the PI Historian and Synergi.
The 15207 record generates a validation report for all tags in the script file. If this record is
used, Synergi will not read data from the PI system. It will only validate the tags.
The following is an example of a working script:
' ***** Start of code sample

'Log into the Pi server
15205,localhost,piadmin,
'Indicate connection succeeded

15206
'Retrieve 3Ph kW demands for meters

15220,79520,7,MT-001
15220,79521,7,MT-002
'Get switch open / closed status

15215,22630,SW-011

Using Synergi
15215,79530,SW-012
15215,33564,SW-021
'Get capacitor on/off status

15210,Dkn_00053,CAP-001
15210,53515,CAP-002
'Connect the model

15002
'Run load allocation

15003,alloc
'Write voltage
15250,52536,VOLT-001
'Refresh the map

15001
' ***** End of code sample
Notice that this script is writing calculated voltage values back into the PI Historian with the
15250 record.
The following script commands are general to all of Synergi’s messaging platforms.
l 15001 – Refresh Synergi map after retrieval
l 15002 – Reconnect the model after switching
l 15003 – Run an engineering analysis application and generate an analysis report.
l 15004 – Post a message in a message box
These commands can be mixed into a messaging script to support user interaction.
Tag value report

Synergi generates a tag usage report when the 15202 record is used in your Messaging script.
This report lists tags, values, and related facilities that Synergi brings in from a PI system and
applies to the model. Running the script on an interval causes the report to update or reopen
at each interaction with PI. Each time the script is run, you can retrieve the most recent data
from the tag usage report. For more information on using scripts with a PI system, see "PI
Messaging script" on page 195.
DBMS Real-Time Data

Synergi uses a messaging script based interface for real-time data stored in a DBMS to update
values for meter kW and kvar, feeder voltage, and substation voltage. This real-time data
functions much in the same way as the PI Historian system and pulls its records from the
same type of data hub.

Using Synergi
The figure below charts a typical interface between Synergi and a DBMS. Because each
utility’s database system acts differently, the way Synergi interacts with a system will vary.
The DBMS messaging script works in three steps:
1. Synergi connects to the DBMS through a DSA.

2. Synergi presents prompts and reports when necessary.
3. Synergi matches tags in the tables that contain real time data to appropriate facilities.
Tags in the DBMS are mapped to Synergi facilities with the following records:

Using Synergi
Script Record Description

Number
15102 Connects DBMS to a DSA
15104 Retrieves values
15106 Prompts for the date and time
15107 Prompts connection status
15108 Generates tag validation report
15114 Sets feeder voltage
15120 Sets metered kW
15122 Sets metered kvar
When the 15108 command is used, Synergi will issue a report that lists tags found in the
database with the latest read and read value, as well as limit violations. Tags in the DBMS are
associated with the model using records that are typically structured as follows:
FacilityID, Phase, TagID, Min, Max, Multiplier
The Min and Max values are used to check for violations against the unmultiplied value. The
multiplied value is applied to the model.
The 15104 command retrieves values from the DBMS. The query must contain these columns:
l SynDate – The field holding the tag that Synergi will use to associate the date and time.
l SynValue – The field holding the tag that Synergi will use to associate sections.
l SynTag – The field holding value that Synergi will use to set up the model.
The query can return other fields; however, these must be a subset of these fields.
Below is a sample working model of the script:
‘**Specify DSA holding the real-time reads

15102,My SCADA
‘**Query to gather the reads. The query must have these fields in its return
‘** SynTag -- Field holding the tag that Synergi will use to associate sections
‘** SynValue -- Field holding value that Synergi will use to set up the model
‘**
‘**
15104,select timeline.DateTimeLocal as SynDate, param.name as SynTag, timeline.value
as SynValue from timeline, param, device where timeline.paramid = param.id and
timeline.deviceid = device.id and device.Active = ‘true’ order by
timeline.DateTimeLocal desc;

Using Synergi
‘**Put up prompt for connection status

15107
‘**Tag validation report

15108
‘**Prompt for date/time

15106
‘**Metered kW values
‘** Section ID, phase, tag, multiplier
15120,79520,5,EJT42010.KWTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
15122,79520,5,EJT42010.KVARTOT,-5e3,5e4,1.0
15120,79521,5,OXD42010.KWTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
15122,79521,5,OXD42010.KVARTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
‘**Metered kV values
‘**Source ID, phase, tag, multiplier 13.8 -> 120
15114,Ship sub 1,4,OAP42010.VPROM,11e3,15e3,0.00869565
15114,Ship sub 2,4,SFo42015.VPROM,11e3,15e3,0.00869565
Messaging scripts can be run at any time from the Macros tab of the Synergi ribbon. Synergi
can also be configured to run a Messaging script on a scheduled basis. For more information,
see "Automating messaging scripts" below.
Automating messaging scripts

Messaging scripts can be run at any time from the Macros tab of the Synergi ribbon. Synergi
can also be configured to run a Messaging script on a scheduled basis.
Once the interval option is selected and the script is running, the Run button becomes a Stop
button. Click the Stop button to cease running the script.
To run an automated messaging script

2. In the Other Scripts group, next to Type, select Messaging. A list of all current scripts
will appear in the Script options list.
3. Next to Scripts, select the name of the script that you want to run.
4. Select the check box next to Intervals and then enter the time lapse in seconds for the
script run.
5. Click Run to start the script.
6. Click Stop to end the running of the script.

Using Synergi
Working directly with database files

Synergi includes several tools that you can use to view and edit tables directly from the
source file. These include the following:
l Data Source editor. The Data Source editor is a native database editor that you launch
from within Synergi. It allows you to directly view and edit the tables and fields of any
model, equipment, or customer database. All edits are saved directly to the source file
on your network, just like if you were working in a dedicated database application such
as Access.
l Joiner. The joiner is a special database table editor that allows you to match external
data with current memory data, using section ID associations. The joiner does not edit
model data in memory. It is a viewer/editor for external database tables, which can
contain any type of data, provided that they have a SectionId column.
Data Source editor

The Data Source editor allows you to view and edit the tables and fields of any model,
equipment, or customer database that has been configured as a Synergi DSA. Edits are saved
directly to the source file, just like if you were using a database application such as Microsoft
Access.
The Data Source editor provides only limited control over data and is not intended to replace a
dedicated database application. For complex data management, you should work directly with
the source using an application designed for that purpose.
Note that individual DSAs, and even all DSAs, can be “locked out” from editing in the Data
Source editor. You can still view the data, but the ability to edit the data will be disabled. To
lock out an individual DSA from editing, select the “Source is read-only” check box on the first
page of the Edit Data Source wizard. To lock out all DSAs from editing, select the “Read-Only
Data Source Editor” option in the Feature Locks tab of the Preferences editor.
To edit a data source using the Data Source editor
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon.
2. Select Data Sources > Data Source Editor.
3. In the Database Editor window, click Data Sources.
4. Use the Select Data Source editor to select the Source Type for the database that you
want to view (Model, Equipment, and Customer) and also to select a Source, which
corresponds to a Synergi DSA. Only DSAs for the selected Source Type will be made
available for selection.
5. Click OK.
6. Use the Database Editor window to view and edit the data source as required. Any edits
that you make in the Data Source editor are automatically written to the source file, as
soon as you move to another record. There is no undo. When you are finished, close the
Database Editor window to end the editing session.

Using Synergi
Joiner
The Joiner is a special database table editor that allows you to match external data with
current memory data, using section ID associations. The joiner does not edit model data in
memory. It is a viewer/editor for external database tables, which can contain any type of
data, provided that they have a SectionId column.
To use the joiner, the following requirements must be met:
l The external database table you want to associate must have a SectionId column.
l When you launch the joiner, you must have established a section query set that matches
the set of model data you want to associate.
l The external data must be in a supported format, such as Access, Oracle, or SQL
Server.
When the joiner runs, it looks for section IDs in the external database that match section IDs
in the current query set. For any records that match, the entire external record is displayed in
Synergi for viewing and editing.
The joiner is different from other database editors because it allows you to access data that
has a specific relationship to your model.
Steps for using the joiner

The following steps illustrate the general procedure for using the joiner.
1. Determine and locate the external database table you wish to edit.
2. Ensure that the database table has a SectionId column.
3. In Synergi, create a DSA to the external database table.
4. In Synergi, create a query set that represents the section IDs you want to match with
the external data.
5. Perform the following steps to launch the joiner:
a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Forge tab.
b. In the Database group, click Joiner.
c. Click Join.
6. When the joiner runs, it brings in all records whose SectionId field matches a section ID
in the query set. You can view and edit this data as needed.
Joiner data sources and DSAs

To join with an external database table, the table must have a SectionId column. This name is
not case-sensitive. For example, SectionID is acceptable.
To access the external table from the joiner, you must also have a DSA to it. When creating a
DSA for the joiner, note the following:
l The joiner can join with any database format that Synergi supports, including Access,
Oracle, and SQL Server. Therefore, the DSA must accurately represent the source file

Using Synergi
format.
l On the second page of the Edit Data Source wizard, you must specify a path to the
database that contains the desired table.
l On the third page of the Edit Data Source wizard, you must select “Custom” as the data
type and then type the name of the specific table in the Table field. This table name
must be spelled correctly, although case is not important.
For additional information on working with DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on page 58.
Launching Synergi from the command line

Like most Windows applications, you can start Synergi from a command line by typing the full
path of the associated EXE. For example, to start Synergi from the default installation folder
on Windows 7, you can enter the following with a command line:
C:\Program Files (x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\Synergi.exe
Command lines are used in several places within the Windows environment. One common
way is selecting Start > Run from the Windows desktop. You can also create a batch file that
contains one or even multiple command lines.
When launching Synergi from a command line, you can also use certain autostart commands
to perform specialized functions. For example, you can load a specified database
automatically, or you can have Synergi automatically run a specified recipe after loading the
database.
All Synergi autostart commands begin with a hyphen, followed by a single letter and then any
additional parameters that Synergi might need. The following autostart commands are
available. Several examples of these commands are provided after the table.
Command Description
-m path Loads a model database, where “path” is the path name of the
model database file. If the path contains any spaces, you must
enclose the entire path in quotes.
-e path Loads an equipment database, where “path” is the path name of

the equipment database file. If the path contains any spaces, you
must enclose the entire path in quotes.
-p path Loads a protection database, where “path” is the path name of the
protection database file. If the path contains any spaces, you must
enclose the entire path in quotes.
-r name Runs a recipe, where “name” is the recipe name. If the name
contains any spaces, you must enclose it in quotes.
-b Starts Synergi with no map. This option is provided as a support

tool in the case that DNV GL Software Support needs to help users
diagnose the cause of a crash.

Using Synergi
Command line example 1

The following command line starts Synergi and loads the model database Example1.mdb from
the same directory as the Synergi exe file:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\Synergi.exe" -m Example1.mdb
Command line example 2

The following command line starts Synergi, loads the model database Example1.mdb from the
My Data folder, loads equipment data from the same file, and then runs a recipe called
RunLoadFlow:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\Synergi.exe" -m "C:\Program Files

(x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\My Data\Example1.mdb" -e "C:\Program Files
(x86)\DNVGL\Synergi Electric 6\My Data\Example1.mdb" -r "RunLoadFlow"
Using the Synergi Maintenance Wizard

The Synergi Maintenance Wizard allows you to perform the following tasks:
l Clear the Synergi registry. Select this option to clear all settings related to Synergi
Electric from your computer’s registry. Note that Synergi will automatically shut down
as a part of this process. You must make sure that you manually save any unsaved
model data before you perform this procedure.
l Set the maximum number of locks in an Access database. When saving a large model to
Access, locks are placed on records while they are read from or written to the database.
If the number of locks exceeds the default maximum value of 9,500, a message will
display and the model will not be saved. Select the “Set the maximum number of locks”
option in the Synergi Maintenance Wizard to edit the registry to change the maximum
number of locks to 100,000, which is sufficient to save a large Synergi model.
l Reset the location of the InfoPanel, legend window, help viewer, and remote. Some of
Synergi’s free-floating windows, including the InfoPanel and Legend, can end up off-
screen and thus become inaccessible when you use and re-start the application. Select
this option to reset the location of these windows to their default positions the next time
you start Synergi.
To use the Synergi maintenance wizard

2. In the Tools group, select Maintenance Wizard.
3. Select the appropriate check boxes to perform the following tasks:
l Clear Synergi settings from the registry
l Set max number of locks for Access db to 100,000

Using Synergi
l Reset the location of the InfoPanel, legend window, help viewer, and
remote
4. Click Finish. Note that if you select the “Clear Synergi settings from the registry”
option, Synergi will immediately shut down, after which you can start a new Synergi
session.
Synergi file summary

Synergi uses a wide variety of files for a host of different purposes. Some files store data and
settings, while others are used to import data. The following table lists several Synergi-
related files and their descriptions. If a file you are looking for does not appear on this list, it
may be an application file that should not be moved or otherwise altered.
Common Ext. File name Description

name
Access MDB (varies) Can contain a variety of

database Synergi data, including
—or—
model, equipment, results,
ACCDB subset, customer, and
version data. You should
create a DSA to access data
from a database. For more
information, see "Managing
Extensible XML (varies) File format that can be used

markup for the import and export of
language file model and equipment data.
For more information, see
"XML" on page 168.
Synergi EDM (varies) Proprietary binary format

binary file file used to import and
export data, as well as save
backups and models for the
gallery. For more
information on binary files,
see "Binary data format
(EDM)" on page 167.
Synergi EXE Synergi.exe Main file that runs Synergi.

main
application
file

Using Synergi

name
Outage TXT ReliCauseMeta.txt Contains customizable root

cause data cause data used by Synergi
file Reliability. For more
information, see the Synergi
Electric Technical Reference.
Defaults file XML SynDefaults.xml Contains defaults values for

Synergi devices, including
facilities, sections, and
feeders. These default
values are used during
external data imports and, in
some cases, for newly
modeled sections and
devices. For more
information, see "Editing
default values for model
devices" on page 152.
Backup file EDM SynBackup.edm Backup model and

equipment data file, from the
most recent backup. For
more information, see
"Backing up model and
equipment data" on
page 150.
Help file CHM SynE Online Help/ Synergi Online Help file.
default.htm
User Guide PDF SynEUserGuide.pdf Synergi User Guide.
Technical PDF SynETechRef.pdf The Synergi Electric

Reference Technical Reference.
Describes the theory and
processes behind many
Synergi analyses and
functions.
Release PDF SynEReleaseNotes.pdf Documents the latest

Notes updates and fixes to your
current version of Synergi.
License file DAT License.dat Contains all your Synergi

Using Synergi

name
licensing information. This

file should never be moved
or altered.
Recipe SRF (varies) Recipe file. For more

information, see the Synergi
Startup SRF Startup.srf Recipe run when Synergi

recipe starts up. If the recipe does
not exist, Synergi creates it.
For more information, see
the Synergi Electric Script
Guide.
Log file SLF {pref}SynLog.slf A general log of Synergi

activity for the current
session. You can access the
log from within Synergi by
selecting the Support tab in
the Synergi ribbon and, in
the Tools group, clicking Log.
TCC file SPV (varies) A saved TCC view. For more

information, see "Saving a
TCC view as an external file"
on page 672.
Sample MDB SampleModel.mdb A multi-feeder sample

radial database with which you can
model, in experiment to learn about
Access Synergi. This database
includes equipment data.
Sample XML SampleDb.xml A multi-feeder sample model

radial with which you can
model, in experiment to learn about
XML Synergi. This XML file
includes equipment data, and
contains data identical to
SampleDb.mdb.
Sample MDB NetworkDb.mdb A multi-feeder sample

network network database with which

Using Synergi

name
model you can experiment to learn

about Synergi. This database
includes equipment data.
Data source MDB SynDataSources.mdb Stores all information

library related to DSAs. For more
information, see "Managing
PowerCalc SPC (varies) Stored PowerCalc script. For

script more information, see
"PowerCalc" on page 215.
Model MODCLEAN (varies) Stored model cleanup script.

cleanup For more information, see
script the Synergi Electric Script
Guide.
Report XML (varies) Data templates for grid-style

template reports. Most of these files
represent individual chapter
templates. For more
information, see "Grid-style
reports" on page 532.
Application APPSET (varies) Data for an applications

settings settings file. For more
group file information, see "Using
settings groups" on page 55.
Map settings DISPSET (varies) Data for a map settings file.

group file For more information, see
"Using settings groups" on
page 55.
Background GBTILESET (varies) Data for a background image

image settings file. For more
settings information, see "Using
group file settings groups" on page 55.
Interface INTERSET (varies) Data for a Synergi interface

settings file settings file.
Model EXPSET (varies) Data for a model explorer

Using Synergi

name
explorer settings file.

settings file
State STATE Synergi.state.xml Data for a Synergi state file.

settings file
General SYNSET (varies) Data for a general settings

Synergi file.
settings file
Feature lock FEATURELOCK (varies) Data for a feature lock

settings file settings file. For more
information, see "Feeder
locks and lock IDs" on
page 192.
CMM data in CMM (varies) CMM data in Synergi’s

MiddleLink MiddleLink format. For more
format information, see "Importing
customer data" on page 318.
PI Server MESS (varies) Script file for

messaging communications with PI
script server. For more
information, see "PI
Historian" on page 168.
SQL SYNSQL (varies) SQL dashboard script file.

dashboard For more information, see
script "SQL Dashboard" on
page 224.
Using Synergi tools

Synergi provides a variety of specialized tools for performing calculations, evaluating your
model, and conducting focused analyses. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information.
Publishing Export
The Publishing export provides a means of exporting your model image to a variety of vector
image formats, including the following:

Using Synergi
l AutoCAD DXF. DXF is a layered vector format developed by Autodesk, Inc.® for use
with its AutoCAD® drafting software. For more information on the DXF format, visit
www.autodesk.com.
l SVG. The scalable vector graphics (SVG) format is XML-based image format, designed
to be portable across applications. Along with vector image components, it also
supports internal scripting for dynamic effects, such as the labels that automatically
appear when you move the mouse over items in a Synergi-generated SVG. The SVG
format is maintained as a W3 Consortium recommendation (www.w3.org). For more
information, see "SVG output information" on page 213.
l Model Viewer. This output is a special database designed specifically for use with
DNV GL’s Model Viewer application. Model Viewer is an Internet Explorer-based viewing
application for models, intended to allow users to view the maps of models in
customizable configurations. It functions like a simplified version of the Synergi map,
without the analytical capabilities of Synergi. For more information, please contact
DNV GL.
l KML. KML (Keyhole Markup Language) files can be imported and viewed in Google
Earth. The KML file needs to contain section IDs and the longitude and latitude
coordinates, which the Publisher converts to a script. Google Earth will read and import
the script into its satellite mapping system.
Setting Publishing export options

To open the Publishing Options editor

2. In the Publish group, select Publishing > Settings.
To set up a DXF export
1. In the Publishing Options editor, under Type, select DXF.

2. Next to Path, type the full path and name of the file you want to export, or click the
Browse button and navigate to the desired directory and file.
3. Under Results, select up to three annotation categories to include in the exported DXF
file. The annotation takes the form of a label that includes up to three lines, with each
line containing a results parameter that you specify here. Select None to leave a
category blank.
4. If desired, select the Output every check box to place the annotation labels at defined
intervals along sections in the exported DXF file. If this option is selected, then only
section results are exported; device results are not included. If this option is not
selected, then device results are included and each section gets one results label, as
designated in the Results options described above.
5. If desired, select the Generate equipment symbols check box to include equipment
symbols in the exported DXF file.

Using Synergi
6. Under Text, select whether to convert Synergi text labels to AutoCAD labels and/or
have labels generated for conductor type names. You can also select size and rotation
attributes for these labels.
To set up an SVG export
1. In the Publishing Options editor, under Type, select SVG.

To set up a Model Viewer export
1. In the Publishing Options editor, under Type, select Model Viewer.

3. Under Model Viewer Settings, enter a title that will be saved with the Model Viewer
file.
To set up a KML export
1. In the Publishing Options editor, under Type, select KML.

Running a Publishing export

Perform the following procedure to run a Publishing export. The generated image file will
show all currently selected feeders, zoomed to the bounds of the image. The current zoom of
the Synergi map is not considered.
To run a Publishing export
1. If you have not already done so, use the Publishing Options editor to configure the file
type that you want to export. For more information, see "Setting Publishing export
options" on the previous page.
3. In the Publish group, click the Publishing icon.
Layer creation during a DXF Publishing export

When you use the Publishing wizard to export a map to the DXF format, Synergi automatically
separates your model into layers during the export. This layering scheme cannot be altered
within Synergi.
Nodes and vertices

During export, a separate layer is created for:

Using Synergi
l Nodes
l Vertices
Equipment
A separate layer is created for each of the following device types:
l Switches
l Capacitors
l Regulators
l Fuses
l Reclosers
l Sectionalizers
l Breakers
l Motors
l Generators
l Transformers
Each device type gets its own layer, regardless of feeder. In other words, all switches from all
feeders will go on one layer, all regulators on another, and so on. Equipment layers are
usually named with the DEV prefix, followed by the equipment type. For example, the switch
layer is named DEV_SWITCHES. Results, labels, and conductors go on separate layers.
Sections
Sections are placed on different layers according to configuration type. During the export,
Synergi recognizes the following six configurations, and creates six layers per feeder for
each, as applicable:
Configuration Abbreviation
Three-phase overhead O3
Two-phase overhead O2
Single-phase overhead O1
Three-phase underground U3
Two-phase underground U2
Single-phase underground U1
Afterwards, these layers are named according to the following convention, using the feeder ID
and the abbreviation as a suffix:
FeederID_ConfigAbbreviation

Using Synergi
For example, the following suffix is for overhead two-phase sections for a feeder with the ID
Fairfield:
Fairfield_O2
Likewise, the following suffix is for underground single-phase sections for a feeder with the ID
FDR_011:
FDR_011_U1
Because AutoCAD allows a maximum of 31 characters for a layer name, your feeder ID will be
truncated at 28 characters if necessary, to leave room for the three-character suffix. If you
have two feeders with identical characters through the first 28 characters of the IDs, their
configurations will be placed on the same layers. This is, however, an unlikely occurrence.
Line styles and colors are set to default values by Synergi during the export. Afterward, you
may change colors and line styles using AutoCAD.
SVG output information

Through Publishing Export, you can export a map to the SVG image format. SVG is well-suited
for an external representation of the map display because it is:
l Non-proprietary. The SVG standard is maintained by the W3 Consortium
(www.w3.org) and has no corporate copyright.
l XML-based. Because it is an XML file, it is easily extensible by DNV GL or the end user,
and can be modified or managed through automation technologies such as XSLT. Also, it
can be directly edited in any text editor.
l Vector-based. Unlike raster image formats such as BMP, a vector file is normally
much smaller in size, yet the image itself is crisp in detail at any zoom level.
l Scripting-enabled. The SVG format supports a certain level of scripting for dynamic
effects. For example, in a Synergi-generated SVG, you can hover the mouse over a
device or section to see the ID appear in the lower corner.
Regression
Regression is a tool for making specific topological and analytical comparisons between two
models. You can compare any two models, and even use recipes to do it automatically.
To use regression, you must first create regression files from the active models that you wish
to compare. Then, the actual comparison is performed on the regression files, producing a
report of key differences in topology and analysis results.
Regression is useful for examining key differences between two different models, especially if
a full data comparison is not warranted. In particular, if you regularly update your models
from a GIS or other data source, regression can help pinpoint differences between updates,
including analytical changes.

Using Synergi
General steps for using regression

To use regression, you should follow the general steps listed below. Take note that these
steps illustrate a general start-to-finish process only.
1. Load the first model for comparison, and run any applicable analyses necessary to
populate results.
TIP: Regression can compare load-flow, fault, and reliability results. A lack of
results prior to comparison will not prevent you from running regression, but you
will not be able to compare those specific items.
2. Create a regression file for the first model. For more information, see "Creating a
regression file" below.
3. Close the model and load the second for comparison.
4. Again, run any analyses as applicable.
5. Create a regression file for the second model.
6. Compare the two regression files. For more information, see "Comparing two
regression files" below.
Because regression compares two files, and not data in memory, you can create the
regression files at any time, and likewise compare them at any time in the future. For
example, you may want to create one or more regression files and store them as a “baseline”
representation of your model, to which you can repeatedly compare newer or updated
versions of the model.
Creating a regression file

Perform the following procedure to create a regression file.
To create a regression file
1. In the Synergi ribbon, click the Performance tab.

2. In the Model QA group, click Regression and then select Save.
3. In the Regression Create editor, type the name of the regression file that you want to
create, and enter an optional note, if desired.
4. Click Create to create the regression file and close the editor.
Comparing two regression files

Perform the following procedure to compare two regression files.
To compare two regression files

2. In the Model QA group, click Regression and then select Compare.

Using Synergi
3. In the Regression Compare editor, press and hold the Ctrl key and select the names of
the two regression files that you want to compare.
4. Click Compare.
Deleting a regression file

Perform the following procedure to delete a regression file.
To delete a regression file

2. In the Model QA group, click Regression and then select Save.
3. In the Regression Create editor, select the name of the regression file that you want to
delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click X to close the editor.
PowerCalc
PowerCalc is a general-purpose engineering calculator built into Synergi that can perform a
variety of calculations geared toward electrical theory. In particular, PowerCalc provides the
following features:
l Basic conversion utilities such as rectangular to polar, and trigonometric functions such
as sin and cos
l Support for imaginary numbers with all functions
l Step-by-step stack-based operation similar to advanced scientific calculators
l Ability to load and save calculation scripts
With its ability to load and save scripts, you may find PowerCalc to be a convenient means of
conveying mathematical information between peers or between your organization and
DNV GL.
Starting PowerCalc
Perform the following procedure to start the PowerCalc application.
To start PowerCalc

2. In the Calculators group, click the PowerCalc icon.
Understanding PowerCalc
PowerCalc operates with a stack-based concept, where you specify a series of arguments that
act progressively on the active stack at their respective moments. After you specify
arguments in the Entries area of the PowerCalc window, you can move the insertion point up

Using Synergi
and down your list of arguments and watch the stack change in the Stack area with each step.
In this way, calculations are never a single, absolute action. Rather, they are like a script that
you can step into at any point to see the precise calculations at that moment.
The PowerCalc script is color-coded and automatically formatted according to the data
entered.
l Constants such as ‘e’ or ‘pi’ will appear as lowercase and in green.
l Mathematical symbols (+ and =) will appear in red.
l Keywords such as logarithms and exponents will appear in blue and in all caps.
Note that several sample scripts are provided with your Synergi installation. These scripts are
saved in the Calcs folder in your Synergi documents directory. The Calcs folder is the default
location for saving and loading calculation scripts.
Available PowerCalc functions

When you select a Command group in the upper-right corner of the PowerCalc window, the
available commands for that group are listed in the lower-right corner. Double-click any
command to add it to the Entries area.
A complete list of PowerCalc functions can be viewed by selecting the Tools tab in the Synergi
ribbon and then selecting PowerCalc > Functions.
You can also add comments to your script by preceding the comment with an apostrophe ( ' ).
Generally, you should put comments on their own lines.
Loading and saving calculation scripts

Use the Load and Save buttons in the PowerCalc editor to load and save your calculation
scripts. You can also click the Clear button to remove the current script from the editor.
Toolbox
The toolbox provides a group of tools that allow you to focus on specific aspects of your model
and their effect on the model as a whole. For example, the Capacitor manager provides an
overall view of your capacitors and general model parameters. With this tool, you can make
quick changes to the capacitors and run a load-flow analysis to watch the general effect on the
model. Another tool, the Switch manager, performs a similar function with switches. You can
find these tools in the Toolbox tab of the model explorer.
Switch Manager
The Switch Manager allows you to see certain switch pairs in the selected feeders as well as
general information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low volts.
Using the Switch Manager, you can toggle the status of any switch pair and run a load-flow
analysis to see the results. Only switches that can transfer load from one selected feeder to
another are listed. Therefore, you must have more than one feeder selected for the tool to
have value.

Using Synergi
To access the Switch Manager, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then select
Switch Manager from the Tool options menu. Two tables will display in the Toolbox tab:
l Switch pairs. The switch pairs table displays a list of all switch pairs in the selected
feeders.
l Feeders. The Feeders table displays a list of all selected feeders.
The following options are associated with the switch pairs table in the Switch Manager. Note
that you can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple switch pairs, if desired.
l Only show transfer switches. Select this check box to only show transfer switches
in the switch pairs table.
l Load-flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis.
l Toggle. Click this button to toggle the open/closed status of the switch pair that is
selected in the switch pairs table.
l Highlight. Click this button to add the sections between the selected switches to the
query set, and also highlight those sections in the Synergi map display.
l Clear highlight. Click this button to clear the current highlight and the query set. You
must clear one highlight before you can enable another.
l Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the section that contains the first
switch in the selected switch pair.
You can also double-click any feeder in the Feeders list to produce the Feeder editor.
Feeder Overview
The Feeder Overview provides a tree list that gives general information about selected
feeders, including minimum and maximum voltages, maximum loading, and voltage drops.
To access the Feeder Overview, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then select
Feeder Overview from the Tool options menu. The following options are available in the
Feeder Overview:
l Load-flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis. No report is generated.
However, results can be seen in the Feeder Diagnostics list or through map annotations.
l Edit. Click this button to open the editor for the item selected in the Feeder Diagnostics
list. If the item selected is a parameter, such as “Min. Volts,” Synergi opens the editor
for the section or device that is producing that parameter. You can also double-click a
feeder to open the Feeder editor.
l Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the selected item. If the item
selected is a parameter, such as “Min. Volts,” Synergi zooms to the section or device
that is producing that parameter.
Capacitor Manager
The Capacitor Manager displays all capacitors in the selected feeders as well as general
information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low volts. Using the
Capacitor Manager, you can toggle the on/off status of any capacitor and run a load-flow
analysis to see the results.

Using Synergi
To access the Capacitor Manager, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then
select Capacitor Manager from the Tool options menu. Two tables will display in the Toolbox
tab:
l Capacitors. The Capacitors list displays a list of all capacitors in the selected feeders.
l Feeders. The Feeders list displays a list of all selected feeders.
The following options are available in the Capacitor Manager:

l Load-flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis.
l Toggle. Click this button to toggle the on/off status of the capacitor that is selected in
the Capacitors list.
l Edit. Click this button to open the editor for the selected capacitor. You can also double-
click a capacitor to open the editor, or double-click a feeder in the Feeders list to open
the Feeder editor.
l Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the section that contains the
capacitor.
Load Center Manager

The Load Center Manager allows you to pinpoint an area of your map and determine the
amount of load within that area. This is an excellent means to determine the placement of a
substation or feeder.
To access the Load Center Manager, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then
select Load Center Manager from the Tool options menu. Three tables will display in the
Toolbox tab:
l Feeders. The Feeders table includes all feeder(s) that are featured on the map. If a
feeder is affected by a load center, then the kW, customer, and miles values will change
both in the Feeder window and the Load Center window. Feeder values decrease when
sections from that feeder are included in a load center. If a load center is moved or
decreased in radius, then the Feeder window will reflect these changes, most likely by
increasing, according to the action.
l Load centers. The Load Center table displays the name of the load center(s) you
created as well as the kW, customer, and mile values. These values increase or
decrease depending on the location and radius of your load center. This window also
contains all of the commands you need to create and manipulate your load centers.
l Substations. The Substations table operates much in the same way as the Feeders
table. In this table, substation values are affected by the placement and size of a load
center.
The following options are available in the Load Center Manager:

l Include these load types. Select the appropriate check boxes to include Spot,
Distributed, Large Customer, and Project loads in the load center. The load types that
you include or exclude will affect the kW and customer values in the Feeder, Load
Center, and Substation tables.

Using Synergi
l Save. Click this button to save the details of the load center(s) you have created,
including the name, radius, and shape, as a SynLC file. The Save command will not save
the entire scenario with the feeders and substations that are managed by the load
center at the time of the save. These must be loaded separately.
l Load. Click this button to load a saved load center into your model. The name, radius,
and shape will appear as the same size, and in the same location, as they were at the
time of the save.
l Name. Use the Name text box to specify the name of a load center. More than one load
center may be managed at a time.
l Radius. Use the Radius text box to configure the size of a load center, measured in
feet.
l Add circle. Click this button to add a new load center to the Load Center table and to
the Synergi map display. The load center will be represented by a circle in the map
display.
l Add square. Click this button to add a new load center to the Load Center table and to
the Synergi map display. The load center will be represented by a square in the map
display.
l Update. Click this button to apply changes that were made to the Name and Radius of
an existing load center.
l Re-center. Use the Re-Center button to change the location of a load center in the
Synergi map display. First, select a load center in the Load Center table. Then, click the
spot on the map where you want to relocate the load center, and then click the Re-
center button. The load center will reposition itself, centered on the location where you
clicked the mouse in the map display.
l Delete. Click this button to delete a selected load center from the Load center table and
also the Synergi map display.
l Clear all. Click this button to delete all load centers from your model.
l Re-calculate values. Click this button to reconfigure kW, customers, and miles after
changes are made to a load center. For example, after changing the radius for a load
center, click the Update button and then the Re-calculate values button to add or
subtract the appropriate amounts from the kW, customer and miles fields.
If you create more than one load center at a time, they will be shown on the map together.
The active load center (that is, the load center that is selected in the Load Centers list) is
always shown in red, and any inactive (that is, currently unselected) load centers are shown
in blue.
Creating and editing a load center

The Load Center Manager is a unique tool that can be used several different ways. The
following procedure describes one possible scenario for creating and editing load centers.

Using Synergi
To create and edit a load center
1. In the Synergi model explorer, select the Toolbox tab.

2. From the Tool options menu, select Load Center Manager. The load center tools will
appear. If necessary, adjust the size of the model explorer panel so that you can see all
of the tools.
3. Next to Name, type the name of the load center you want to create.
4. Next to Radius, type the radius (in feet) of the load center you want to create.
5. Click a spot in the map display where you want the load center to be centered.
6. Click Add square or Add circle, as desired. The selected shape will appear at the spot
you clicked in the map display, indicating the location of the new load center. The new
load center will also appear in the Load Centers table in the Toolbox tab.
7. Click Re-calculate values. Values for kW, customer and miles will be added to the
load center in the Load Centers table.
8. Now that you have created a load center, there are several ways you can edit it. Some
of the typical actions are as follows:
l Select a load center from the Load Centers table, and then click a new spot on the
map and click Re-center. The circle or square will relocate to the new point.
l Select a load center from the Load Centers table, and then use the Radius text
box to change the radius of the selected load center. Click Update to apply the
change to the map display, and then click Re-calculate values to update the
load center data.
l Click Save to save any changes you have made to the load center.
l Select or clear the Spot, Distributed, Large Customer, or Project check
boxes to enable or disable different load types. Then, click the Re-calculate
values button to see the changes in the feeders.
Data Hammer
Data Hammer is a tool that can help you overcome low-level data problems, such as missing
warehouse equipment types. This will allow you to get your model in working order so that
you can troubleshoot bigger problems using other Synergi tools.
The Data Hammer works on the model in memory; it does not change the source database
unless you choose to save the data. You may want to save the model to a temporary location
after running the Data Hammer, until you are sure you want to permanently save the updated
data.
Some of the actions that can be performed by the Data Hammer include the following:
l Add missing equipment types to the warehouse, including conductor types, switch
types, and configuration types. Equipment types that are created in this manner will
include “Created by Data Hammer” in the equipment type’s description, thus making
them easy to identify.
l Apply a height value of 10 to any section that has a height value of 0.

Using Synergi
l Apply descriptions to relays that do not have a description. The new descriptions will be
named after the relay’s parent section IDs and include an incremental counter suffix to
ensure uniqueness.
l Rephrase laterals so that there is a good balance among the phases. This is useful in
cases where phasing information is not available for a model. Meaningful analysis and
studies can be performed on the model, but the laterals need to be distributed to phase
A, B, and C.
To use the Data Hammer
1. Perform the following steps to open the Data Hammer editor:

b. In the Model Forge group, click Hammer.
2. In the Data Hammer editor, select the check box for each action that you want to
perform.
3. Click Finish.
4. A message box will appear, showing you the results of the Data Hammer actions. When
you are finished reviewing the results, click OK to close the message box.
Database Hammer
The Database Hammer runs pre-defined queries on a model database. Unlike the Data
Hammer, which updates the model data in memory, the Database Hammer directly modifies
the specified database file. The Database Hammer performs more specialized tasks than the
Data Hammer, and you are given the opportunity to review and even edit the SQL commands
before the operation is run.
To use the Database Hammer
1. Perform the following steps to open the Database Hammer editor:

b. In the Tools group, click Database Hammer.
2. On the first page of the Database Hammer wizard, select the DSA that represents the
database file you want to update. Click Next to continue.
3. On the second page of the Database Hammer wizard, select the tasks that you want to
perform on the specified database file. Click Next to continue.
4. On the third page of the Database Hammer wizard, review the SQL commands that will
be run based on the tasks that you selected to perform. You can use this page of the
wizard to edit the SQL commands, if necessary.
5. When you are satisfied with the commands, click OK to Run, and then click Next.
6. The last page of the wizard will show a summary of the SQL commands that you ran.
Click Finish to close the wizard, or click Back to return to previous pages of the wizard
to perform other tasks.

Using Synergi
State Master
The State Master will appear during some Synergi analyses, such as the throw-over analysis,
allowing you to temporarily view the results of different model states created by the analysis.
You view a state by selecting it from the list of options in the State Master window. The map
display will update to reflect the current state, and it will update again each time you select a
different state from the list.
You must restore the model to its original condition before you can close the State Master
window. However, if you edited to the model while viewing an analysis state, those edits will
remain even after the State Master is closed.
To use the State Master
1. Perform an analysis that will create the State Master window, such as the throw-over
analysis described in "Throw-over analysis" on page 562.
Note that even though you can open the State Master from the Tools tab of the Synergi
ribbon, the State Master can only be used after performing an applicable analysis.
2. In the State Master window, click on an available states to view that state as applied to
the Synergi model. Select other states to apply those states to the model. The following
list describes additional tasks that you can perform.
a. Clear. Click the Clear button to clear all states from the State Master. Note that
clearing the State Master will also restore the model to its original state, and that
you must repeat the original analysis run to bring back the states that you
cleared.
b. Restore Model. Click Restore Model to restore the model to its original state.
The states in the State Master window will remain, however, and can be re-
applied by selecting them from the list.
c. Restore and Close. Click Restore and Close to restore the model to its original
state and also close the State Master window. This is the only way to close the
State Master window.
Media Viewer
The Synergi Media Viewer allows you to view documents, images, and videos from within
Synergi. In order to be viewed in the Media Viewer, these files must be saved in the “Doc”
folder in your Synergi installation directory. The Doc folder is the default folder where all
Synergi’s help files are installed, including the Synergi Electric User Guide and the Synergi
To use the Media Viewer, open it from the Support tab of the Synergi ribbon and then select
the name of the file you want to view. The Media Viewer will display the file in the Media
Viewer window.

Using Synergi
To open the Media Viewer
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Support tab.

2. In the Documents group, click Media Viewer.
Library
Use the library to create links to external documents, which you can then open and view from
within Synergi. Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To open the Library editor

2. In the Tools group, click Library.
To add a document to the library
1. In the Library editor, perform the following steps to identify the document that you want
to add to the library:
a. Next to Name, type the name of the document as you want it to be identified in
the Synergi library.
b. Next to Path, type the path of the document file, or click Browse to search for the
file.
c. Under Open In, select Dialog or Window to specify where the file will be
opened.
2. Click New. The document is added to the library.
To view a document in the library
1. In the Library editor, locate the name of the document that you want to view.
2. Double click on the document name or select the document name and click Open.
To update a document in the library
1. In the Library editor, select the document that you want to edit from the list of available
choices.
2. Use the Name, Path, and Open In options to update the document, as appropriate.
3. Click Update.
To delete a document from the library
1. In the Library editor, select the document that you want to delete from the list of
available choices.
2. Click Delete. Note that there is no confirmation of the document’s deletion.

Using Synergi
Synergi Remote
Synergi Remote is a stand-alone window that provides simplified access to basic Synergi
tasks, such as loading a model or running an analysis.
To use Synergi remote
1. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole icon and then select Remote.
2. Double-click on any task that you want to perform.
SQL Dashboard
The SQL Dashboard can be used to run queries directly against the tables in any database
represented by a DSA. With this tool, you can write and run views, joins, updates, and any
other query types directly from Synergi. Your queries can be run against models, customer
tables, and any other data stored in the database.
You can also use the SQL Dashboard to write and save scripts containing any number of
queries, as long as each query is separated by a semi-colon. These scripts are saved with a
*.SynSQL file extension in the Scripts folder in your Synergi Documents directory.
Depending on the type of database you rely on (Access, SQL Server, or Oracle) and the
complexity of the query, the SQL language may vary slightly. It is recommended that you
become familiar with the language most applicable to your needs.
Opening the SQL Dashboard

Perform the following procedure to open the SQL Dashboard and to open or close tabs within
the SQL Dashboard window. These tabs are located on the right side of the SQL Dashboard
window and allow you to view multiple queries and query results.
To open the SQL Dashboard

2. In the Database group, click SQL Dashboard.
3. If desired, perform the following steps to open and close individual tabs within the SQL
Dashboard window:
l To add a SQL Dashboard tab: From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click
Add.
l To close a SQL Dashboard tab: Select the tab that you want to close. Then, from
the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click Remove.
Using the SQL Dashboard

The SQL Dashboard includes three main areas. The left side of the SQL Dashboard includes the
controls that you use to select the data type and data source, and also to select existing SQL
queries that have been saved as script files (*.SynSQL files). The upper half of the SQL
Dashboard is where you write and edit the queries and view tables and fields from the

Using Synergi
selected data source. The lower half of the SQL Dashboard displays the results of the queries
that you run.
SQL Dashboard
Detailed procedures for working with the different areas of the SQL Dashboard are provided in
the following sections:
l "Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard" below
l "Writing a SQL query" on the next page
l "Showing tables and fields in the SQL Dashboard" on page 227
l "Running a SQL query and viewing the results" on page 228
Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard
In the SQL Dashboard window, the data type option is where you select the type of Synergi
data that you want to query. These data types correspond with the Synergi DSA types,
including Model, Equipment, and CMM. Once a data type is selected, you may select a data
source alias (DSA) against which the query will be run.
To select a data type and data source for the SQL Dashboard
1. On the left side of the SQL Dashboard window, use the options list to select one of the
supported Synergi data types.

Using Synergi
2. Under DSA, use the options list or click the ... button to select a data source against
which the query will be run.
TIPS: If you selected Model or Equipment as the data type, you can also click the
“Use Model/Equipment in Memory” check box to use the model or equipment data
source that is currently loaded in Synergi.
You can also edit the selected DSA by clicking the Edit DSA button.
3. If you selected an Oracle or SQL Server DSA as the data source, then you may also
select a data set from the Data Set options list.
Writing a SQL query

In the SQL Dashboard, you can write a new query directly in the SQL Dashboard window, or
you can select an existing query to work with from the list of query script files in the lower-
left corner of the SQL Dashboard.
A standard query consists of a series of commands and a series of tables and/or database
fields. The specific actions that a query can take are completely up to you and can comprise
almost countless combinations. The two primary types of queries are SELECT, which retrieves
data from a database table, and UPDATE, which modifies data in a database table. Be very
careful when running UPDATE queries—after changes are committed, they cannot be undone.
Typical query commands and examples of their usage are provided in "Common SQL
commands" on page 230 and "Sample SQL queries" on page 232.
To write a query
1. In the data source area of the SQL Dashboard window, select a database to run the
query against. For more information, see "Selecting a data type and data source for use
with the SQL Dashboard" on the previous page.
2. To create a new query, type a query name in the Name text box and a query group in
the Group text box. Both the Name and the Group are required if you want to save the
query.
—or—
To edit an existing query, select a saved query that you want to work with from the list
of queries in the lower-left corner of the SQL Dashboard window.
3. Write the query text in the in the SQL area, near the top of the SQL Dashboard window.
TIP: You can also use the Template button in the middle of the SQL Dashboard
window to insert pre-configured query statements into your query.
To save a query
1. Write a query following the instructions provided above. Make sure that you have
specified a Name and a Group.
2. Click Save. The query and the group, if applicable, will be added to the list of saved
queries in the lower-left corner of the SQL Dashboard window.

Using Synergi
To delete a query
1. In the lower-left corner of the SQL Dashboard window, select the name of the query that
you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
Showing tables and fields in the SQL Dashboard

You can use the SQL Dashboard to show the names of the database tables and fields that are
included in the selected data source. You can also insert these table and field names directly
into your query by double-clicking on the table or field name.
To show tables and fields in the SQL Dashboard
1. In the data source area of the SQL Dashboard window, select the database that you
want to work with. For more information, see "Selecting a data type and data source for
use with the SQL Dashboard" on page 225.
2. On the right-side of the SQL Dashboard window, click the Show Tables check box. A
list of tables within the selected database will appear underneath the check box, and the
Show Fields check box will display.
3. Select the table whose fields you want to view, and then click the Show Fields check
box. A list of data fields within the selected table will appear underneath the check box.
4. If desired, the following table describes additional tasks that you can perform from the
Table and Fields lists.
To ... Do This ...
Add a table name Under Show Tables or Show Fields, double-click the table
or a field name to or field name. The table or field name will be inserted at
the current query the cursor position in the query-writing area.
View the record a. Under Show Tables, select the table that you want to
count for a selected work with.
table b. Right-click and select Get Record Count. Synergi
will show the number of records in the selected table
in the Results area.
View a complete a. Under Show Tables, select the table that you want to
table in the Results work with.
area b. Right-click and select Open Table. Synergi will
automatically run a “Select * from <table>” query on
the selected table. The fields and corresponding data
for the selected table will display in the Results area.

Using Synergi
To ... Do This ...
View the number of a. Under Show Tables, select the table that you want to
records for a table work with.
b. Right-click and select Get Record Count. The
number of records for the selected table will display
in the Results area.
View selected fields a. Under Show Fields, select the field(s) that you want
in the Results area to work with. Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select
multiple fields.
b. Right-click and select Open and Sort By
[FieldName] (Asc) or Open and Sort By
[FieldName] (Desc). Synergi will display the
selected fields and corresponding data in the Results
area. The results will be sorted by the field name
where you right-clicked, in either ascending or
descending order.
Running a SQL query and viewing the results

When a query is run, the results are displayed in the lower-half of the SQL Dashboard window.
The results appear just as though they would in the database. You can manipulate the data if
you select the Allow Edits in Recordset option (located in the Controls tab of the Synergi
ribbon). The results can also be printed, saved as a CSV file, or opened directly in Excel.
To run a query and view the results
1. In the SQL Dashboard window, write or load the query that you want to run.
2. Click Run to run the query against the selected database. If you wrote more than one
query and only want to run one of those queries, select the SQL code that you want to
run (from the area where you wrote the query) and click Run Selection. Synergi will
automatically highlight the query that is run.
The query results are displayed in the lower-half of the SQL Dashboard window.
3. If desired, the following table describes additional tasks that you can perform in the
Results area.
To ... Do This ...
Save the query a. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click
results as a CSV file Export to CSV.
b. Use the Save CSV File dialog box to specify the
name and location of the file you are saving, and

Using Synergi
To ... Do This ...
then click Save.
Open the query From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click Open in
results directly in Excel. The query results will automatically open in an
Excel Excel window.
Print the query a. At the left end of the Synergi ribbon, click the Pole
results icon and then select Print.
b. Use the Print dialog box to select the settings for
your print job, and then click Print.
Graph query results a. From the SQL Dashboard results area, select the
cells that you want to view in a graph.
b. Right-click and select Graph Selected Cells.
Manipulate the a. In the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, make sure
query results that Allow Edits in Recordset option is selected
(highlighted).
b. In the Results area, select any cell that you want to
edit and type new values, as appropriate. You can
also use the right-click menu to perform Copy,
Paste, and Undo operations.
Mining in the SQL Dashboard

The mining feature allows you to view data from non-Synergi tables directly within Synergi.
The SQL Dashboard is used to launch a SQL query that retrieves the information from the
database that does not reside within the Synergi model or data. This external data can be in
Access, SQL Server, or Oracle, and may include records pertaining to outage information,
equipment failure history, device control settings, and notes about a device.
To use the mining feature
1. Create a DSA that links to the external database. Be sure to check the Mining box during
setup. For more information on creating a DSA, see "Managing data sources" on
page 58.
2. Use the Mining tab in the Preferences editor to map the external data source to both the
Synergi device and SQL query that controls what is brought over into Synergi.
3. Create a query in the SQL dashboard. The following sample query uses the a_deviceid
constant:
SELECT *
FROM InstCapacitors

Using Synergi
WHERE UniqueDeviceId = @a_deviceid@;
4. Once the query is set up, return to the Mining tab in the Preferences editor. Select the
Facility Type from the list, which will automatically fill in the Name field. Map the rest of
the information to the data and SQL Script.
5. Click OK to run the query. The dataset will be filled in with the mining constant used in
the query.
6. Right-click on the type of device on the map that was queried. A link to the external
database appears in the context menu. This link will launch the SQL Dashboard, which
will retrieve the control settings that reside on the server containing the database.
Feature locks and the SQL Dashboard

For security purposes, a Feature Lock may be applied to the SQL Dashboard. This is especially
important when working in a shared database. To restrict query runs for select users, open
the Preferences editor and in the Feature Locks tab, select “Select Queries Only (SQL
Dashboard)”. For more information on Feature Locks, see "Unit preferences" on page 34.
Common SQL commands

The following two tables list sample SQL code commands and examples of these SQL
commands. The information in these two tables can help you get started writing queries in
SQL Dashboard.
SQL commands
Command Type Definition
SELECT Clause Selects data from a table
FROM Clause Specifies which table
WHERE Clause Specify a selection criterion
UPDATE Clause Modify the data in a table
SET Clause Update a column with a new value
ORDER BY Clause Displays columns in ascending or descending

order
ALTER Clause Modifies an existing object, such as adding a

column to a table.
NOT Operator Displays a row for all values not equal to

condition

Using Synergi
Command Type Definition
OR Operator Displays a row if any of the conditions listed are

true
AND Operator Displays rows if all conditions listed are true
IN Operator Return exact value for at least one of the columns
BETWEEN Operator Selects a range of data between two values
UNION Operator Select related information from two tables with

the same data type
INTERSECT Operator Returns only the rows found by both queries
MINUS Operator Returns rows from first query that are not present
in second query
+ Operator Add
- Operator Subtract
/ Operator Divide
* Operator Multiple
= Operator Equal to
< Operator Less than
> Operator Greater than
!= Operator Not equal to
<= Operator Less than or equal to
>= Operator Greater than or equal to
_ Operator Wild card
|| Operator Concatenates two strings
SQL examples

Using Synergi
Example Syntax
Querying all data from a table. SELECT*

FROM table_name
Querying column data from a SELECT column_name(s)

table.
FROM table_name
Querying specific column data SELECT column_name(s)

from a table.
FROM table_name
WHERE condition
Querying table data and re- SELECT column_name(s)

ordering the columns.
FROM table_name
ORDER BY column_name [ASC|DESC]
Querying table data using the AND SELECT column_name(s)

or OR operators
FROM table_name
WHERE condition
AND|OR condition
Querying table data using the SELECT column_name

BETWEEN operator.
FROM table_name
WHERE column_name
BETWEEN value1 AND value2
Querying table data using the IN SELECT column_names(s)

operator.
FROM table_name
WHERE column_name
IN (value1, value2...)
Updating column data in a table. UPDATE table_name

SET column_name=new_value
WHERE column_name=some_value
Sample SQL queries
Selecting distribution transformers

Using Synergi
The following query selects all distribution transformers from a CMM table that have a
utilization factor of greater than 100%. For this problem, the DSA target (Oracle) will be the
CMM DistTrans table which stores the calculated customer transformer utilization factor (part
of the CMM process).
SELECT DTranId, SectionId, RatedKVA, UtilFAC

FROM @CMM@DistTrans
WHERE UtilFac > 1.0
ORDER BY UtilFac DESC;
Selecting customers
The following query selects all customers that are fed from the most utilized distribution
transformer as reported in the first example. This time the DSA target will be the CMM
Customer’s table (Oracle).
SELECT CustomerId, LastName, Address, City, CustClassId, DTranId

FROM @CMM@Customer
WHERE DtranId = ‘F;
ORDER BY Last Name ASC:
Updating three-phase sections

The following query updates all three-phase sections that have a phase conductor of 336 ACSR
to have a neutral conductor of 1/0 AAC. However, all single-phase and two-phase 336 ACSR
phase conductors are not to have their neutral conductors modified.
SELECT SectionId, SectionPhases, PhaseConductorId, NeutralConductorId

FROM InstSection
WHERE PhaseConductorId = “336 ACSR”
The following SELECT query displays these results, proving that only the three-phase
conductors were modified. The DSA type for this will be Model (Access), which represents a
Synergi Model Database.
UPDATE InstSection
SET NeutralConductorId = “1/0 AAC”
WHERE PhaseConductorId = “336 ACSR” AND SectionPhases = “ABCN”;
Selecting sections that match a queried section

Using the keyword SYN_QUERY_SECTS_ID will results in a reference to the IDs of sections in
the query set. The following query will select all sections in the InstSection table that match
Synergi’s queried sections:
SELECT *
FROM InstSection
WHERE SectionId IN (@SYN_QUERY_SECTS_ID@);
Associating a data source with a query

Using Synergi
The following commands will automatically associate a data source with a query. This can be
used in lieu of the options list to manually select a DSA. This should be written immediately
before a regular query.
@SYN_SET@@d_datasource@ = Access Database (Sample Model);
Eliminating unused nodes

Over time, unused nodes may accumulate in a database and will not be deleted by Synergi
during normal loading and saving activities. The following SQL Dashboard script can be used
to eliminate nodes in a database.
Uncomment these queries and run to look at Synergi tables:
‘SELECT COUNT(*) FROM @MOD@Node;

‘SELECT * FROM @MOD@Node WHERE lIsUsed=0;
‘SELECT * FROM @MOD@Node;
Comment out the queries above and run the queries below as a process:
ALTER TABLE @MOD@Node ADD lIsUsed long;

UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 0
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT FromNodeId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT ToNodeId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT FeederId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
DELETE FROM @MOD@Node WHERE lIsUsed = 0
ALTER TABLE @MOD@Node DROP COLUMN lIsUsed;
Concepts view
The Concepts view supports the demonstration of fundamental Synergi modeling calculations.
It acts as a window into the analysis engine so that engineers are better able to understand
how Synergi determines analysis results.
This tool is not connected in any way to your Synergi model or database. Therefore, any
experimental calculations or adjustments to the components of the Concepts view will not
affect the model or any other function of Synergi.
The Concepts view can be opened from the Tools tab of the Synergi ribbon, as described
below.
To open the Concepts view

2. In the Calculators group, click Concepts.
On the left side of the Concepts view window, select from the available tabs to view the
different Concepts view applications. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.

Using Synergi
DC Offset
The DC Offset concept view shows the symmetric, DC, and resulting asymmetric fault current.
You can use the slider controls at the bottom of the view to adjust the X/R ratio and the
clearing angle for the fault location.
Note that the DC Offset concept view is not tied to fault analysis studies that you may run.
Fault analysis has a clearing time setting that you can edit in the Fault Analysis Options editor,
as described in "Setting up a fault analysis" on page 656. Synergi typically uses a 1/4 cycle
clearing angle during fault analysis.
Harmonic
The Harmonic tab of the Concepts view can help provide an understanding of how Synergi
considers harmonic calculations.
You will find two charts that show primary and secondary harmonic curves. The curves can be
adjusted by changing the amp levels on phases and harmonic levels on the 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th,
or 11th. These troublesome harmonics are called triplens because they are all in phase with
each other. Triplens add, rather than cancel, on the neutral conductor of a three-phase, four-
wire system. On a shared neutral, it may carry twice the phase current. Most neutral
conductors are the same or smaller than the phase conductor.
Triplens also cause circulating currents on the delta winding of a delta-wye transformer
configuration. When triplen harmonics on the neutral of a three-phase, four-wire system
reach the transformer, they are reflected to the delta connected primary where they circulate.
The result is transformer heating similar to that produced by unbalanced three-phase current.
For more information on harmonics and how Synergi considers it during analysis, see
"Harmonic analysis" on page 681.
Impedance
The Impedance tab of the Concepts view provides a basic utility pole diagram with movable
phases. You can click and drag a phase anywhere on the “pole” while seeing a change on a
particular phase’s impedance and admittance values, as well as on the phase’s voltage
values. The Impedance tab of the Concepts View also contains the following features:
l Earth Resistivity. Sets the resistivity of earth in ohm-meters.
l Length. Adjusting the cable length will cause a change in the voltage values on the
phases in the pole diagram as well as in the impedance and admittance calculations.
l Volts. Allows a specific value, based on a 120 volt base. This value affects the voltage
values on the phases in the pole diagram.
l Amps. Adjusting the slides on the amp values affects the voltage values on the phases
in the pole diagram.
l Conductors. You can select the conductor type for each phase which (most likely)
yields a change in the voltage values, as well as the impedance and admittance
calculations.
l Impedance. Shows the calculations used by Synergi to arrive at the impedance value
for each phase. These calculations are affected by changes made elsewhere in the
Concepts View.

Using Synergi
l Admittance. Shows the calculations used by Synergi to arrive at the admittance value
for each phase. These calculations are affected by changes made elsewhere in the
Concepts View.
V, I, P, Q
The V, I, P, Q tab of the Concepts view provides a visual aid for demonstrating lagging and
leading power factor. Most of the Concept View display is dedicated to kW, amp, and power
curves. A slider control allows you to change the power factor from 0 through 100% lagging or
leading. As you move the slider, the waveforms will change so that you can see the
relationship between voltage and current and the impact on power. A pie chart shows the
relative levels of real and reactive power.
Irradiance
The Irradiance tab of the Concepts view provides irradiance levels as you adjust the month
(January to December), latitude (0 to 90 degrees), and longitude (-180 to 180 degrees).
Spreadsheet Importer
The Spreadsheet Importer can be used to import curve data from an Excel file and apply the
resulting curves to the warehouse or protection database. The following types of curves can
be imported:
l PV generation data
l Protection curves (expulsion fuses and current limiting fuses)
l Customer class profiles
l Wind profiles
l Temperature profiles
l Irradiance profiles
l Humidity profiles
Importing curve data

Perform the following procedure to import curve data using the Spreadsheet Importer. Before
you begin, see "Curve data input format" on the facing page for information on formatting
requirements for the curve data import files.
To import curve data
1. Before you begin, make sure you have properly configured the data in the Excel file that
you want to import. See "Curve data input format" on the facing page for more
information.
3. In the Model Forge group, click Spreadsheet Importer.
4. On the first page of the Import Spreadsheet wizard, select the type of curve data that
you want to import. The following choices are available:

Using Synergi
l PV generation
l Protection curves
l Customer class profiles
l Weather profiles - wind
l Weather profiles - temperature
l Weather profiles - irradiance
l Weather profiles - humidity
5. If you selected to import Protection curves, use the second page of the wizard to select
the fuse type that you are importing (Fuse or Current limiting fuse). Then, use the
third page of the Import Curves wizard to select the Manufacturer, Model, and Volt
Rating of the curves to be imported into the protection curve database.
6. Use the fourth page of the wizard to select the Excel file and worksheet(s) from which
the curve data will be imported.
7. Use the final page of the wizard to verify the curve data you will be importing. Click
Finish to begin the import.
Curve data input format
PV data input format

PV capacity values can be imported from a Excel spreadsheet into a model in memory. To set
up the spreadsheet, use the first worksheet (first tab) in the file. In that worksheet, row 1
must have the following column headings:
l Section_ID — Section ID for standalone or large customer based generators.
l Transformer_ID — In the case of section distributed generation, the section ID may be
left blank and a value may be put into the Transformer_ID column instead. Synergi will
find the matching distribution transformer in the model and apply the generation to it
and to the section DGen values.
l Type — Type of generator that Synergi will create or supplement using the imported
data. Use one of the following codes:
o DGen — Section distributed generation.
o Large Cust PV — Large customer generation.
o PV Gen — Standalone generator facility.
l WH Type — Warehouse equipment type ID. Generator types need to be in the
warehouse when the spreadsheet importer is run.
l Connected kW — kW level of the generator.
Any other columns in the worksheet will be ignored. Also, Synergi will only import generators
that correspond to the model in memory.
For additional information on importing PV generation data from an Excel spreadsheet, see
the Synergi Electric Handbook.
Fuse curve data input format

Using Synergi
When importing fuse curve data using the Import Spreadsheet wizard, the Excel file that
contains the data must be formatted with three columns for time, min melt, and max clear
data. The Excel file can have multiple worksheets that contain data for one rating of the fuse.
Weather profile curve data input format

When importing weather data using the Import Spreadsheet wizard, the Excel file that
contains the data must be formatted with an hour column (where the hours are numbered 0 -
23) and separate columns for each month of data (labeled January, February, March, and so
on). Each worksheet in the spreadsheet will be imported as a separate weather profile.
Customer class curve data input format

When importing customer class data using the Import Spreadsheet wizard, the Excel file that
contains the data must be formatted with four worksheets named "Minday", “Peakday”,
“Weekday”, and “Weekend”. Each worksheet must have an hour column (where the hours are
numbered 0 - 23) and separate columns for each month of data (labeled January, February,
March, and so on).
CalcSpy
CalcSpy displays internal calculation values and other internal information that is generated
during an analysis. To use CalcSpy, simply open it before you perform an analysis.
To open CalcSpy

2. In the Model QA group, click CalcSpy.
The CalcSpy button can also be used to enable a logging window for the Synergi Geographic
View. For more information, see XXX.
Engineering Calculations
Synergi’s Calculations tool uses PTC Mathcad Prime to show some of the technical calculations
that are used by Synergi. If you have do not have a license for Mathcad, you can download a
free version of Mathcad Express at www.mathcad.com. The paid version of Mathcad is not
required to use this Synergi tool.
To use the Synergi Calculations tool

2. In the Documents group, click Calculations.
3. In the Calculations window, select the engineering calculation that you want to view and
then click Open Mathcad.

Using Synergi
Synergi Calculations tool
Running the Solver from within Synergi

Synergi provides a special feature that you can use to launch Solver-based applications from
within Synergi. To set up a Solver instance within Synergi, you need to provide the program
ID for the application you want to run. Synergi will create the Solver, pass it to a COM DLL
created by a user, and then clean up after the DLL completes its tasks.
The Synergi Electric installation includes two examples for Solver Tools, named
SolverCOMCPP and SolverCOMVB. The example files are located in the Sample Data folder in
your Synergi documents directory, which is in the following location by default (Windows 7),
where “[User Name]” is the name of your Windows login:
l C:\Users\[User Name]\Documents\DNVGL\Synergi Electric\6\Sample Data\
SolverCOMCPP. (The program ID for this Solver example is SolverCPPSample.1.)
l C:\Users\[User Name]\Documents\DNVGL\Synergi Electric\6\Sample Data\
SolverCOMVB. (The program ID for this Solver example is SolverCOMVB.SolverClass.)
Take note that you must first build these examples in your own Visual Studio environment
before you can use them with the Sample Model. If you already build applications for Solver
Tools, you typically will have your own Visual Studio environment installed on your computer
and likely already have prior coding experience. Once you build a Solver example, you can
distribute the application to other users who do not have Visual Studio. Those users will be

Using Synergi
able to run the Solver application, but each user must register the Solver Tool DLL before it
can be run in Synergi.
For more information on working with the Solver, see the Electric Solver Getting Started
Guide and the Electric Solver Developer’s Reference.
To open the Solver Tools editor

2. In the Tools group, click Solver Tools.
To add a Solver instance
1. Click New.
2. In the New Solver Tool editor, next to Name, type a unique name that identifies the
Solver instance you are creating. This name is only used to identify the Solver instance
in Synergi; it does not need to have any direct association with the Solver COM file.)
3. Next to ProgID, type the Program ID that is associated with the COM dll that you have
created to work with the Solver.
4. Click OK to close the New Solver Tool editor.
To edit a Solver instance
1. Select the Solver instance that you want to edit.

2. Click Edit.
3. Use the New Solver Tool editor to edit the Name and ProgID, as required. Descriptions
for these two fields are provided in the previous procedure.
4. Click OK to close the New Solver Tool editor.
To run a Solver instance
1. Select the Solver instance that you want to run.

2. Click Run.
To delete a Solver instance
1. Select the Solver instance that you want to delete.

2. Click Delete.

Editing a Model
EDITING A MODEL
Synergi provides a user-friendly modeling interface designed to make modeling convenient
and easy. Using simple drag-and-drop functionality, Synergi allows you to quickly create
models that accurately depict your actual distribution system.
When you model new sections and equipment, Synergi assigns default values to certain
parameters, such as section phasing and equipment settings. Some of these default values
are customizable and can be edited directly from Synergi, which then saves the values in the
Defaults file, named SynDefaults.xml. For more information, see "Editing default values for
model devices" on page 152.
Editing model data

The topics listed below provide general information on editing data in Synergi, such as using
the Synergi editor, using the Multiple Editor, and undoing and redoing model edits. For
information on editing specific sections and devices, see "Editing sections" on page 346 and
"Editing devices" on page 395.
Using the Synergi editor

The Synergi editor is the primary tool for editing model and equipment data. All devices and
equipment types use the same basic editor, customized with the appropriate contents. The
following image shows an example of the Switch editor:

Editing a Model
The Synergi editor
The following subsections describe some key features of the Synergi editor.
Tabs
In Synergi Electric, “tabs” are positioned on the left side of the editor. The following example
shows a portion of the Switch editor, which has three tabs: Switch, Rates, and Results. The
Switch tab is the selected tab.

Editing a Model
Switch editor tab names
Toolbar buttons
A series of toolbar buttons in the upper left-corner of the Synergi editor allow you to easily
browse to previously viewed editors and zoom to the location of an object in the Synergi map
display. Analysis setup editors also contain a button to allow you to run the current analysis.
Previous and Next Click the Previous and Next buttons to browse through recently
viewed Synergi editors. You can navigate to any object that you
viewed since you most recently opened the editor. Once you
close the editor, the navigation history is reset.
Previous and Next buttons
History Click the History button to quickly jump to any recently viewed
Synergi editor. You can jump to any object that you viewed
since you most recently opened the editor. Once you close the
editor, the navigation history is reset.

Editing a Model
History button
Lock Click the Lock button to lock the Synergi editor so that it will
only show the current model object. This feature is useful if you
want to leave a specific model object open in the Synergi editor
and then click around in the map display without opening a new
object in the Synergi editor with each model object that you
select.
When the editor is in locked mode, the navigational buttons will
be hidden so that you cannot navigate to other recently viewed
editors. Also, if you close the editor while it is in locked mode
and you then attempt to open the editor for a different object in
your model, the “locked” model object will display instead. You
must click the Lock button again to “unlock” the editor before
you can open the editor for other objects in your model.
Lock button (unlocked mode)
Lock button (locked mode)

Editing a Model
Locate In facility and section editors, click the Locate button to zoom
the Synergi map display to the location of the object that you
are currently viewing in the editor. If you are viewing an
equipment type editor, the Locate button will zoom on
successive clicks to the locations of each section where the
equipment type is used. If the equipment type is not used in the
currently selected feeders, then the Locate button will do
nothing. If the equipment type is not used anywhere in the
model, then the Locate button will not be present in the
equipment type editor.
Locate button
Run In analysis setup editors, click the Run button to run the current
analysis.
Auto-hide and Roll-up buttons

The Auto-hide and Roll-up buttons, located in the upper-right corner of the Synergi editor,
control the display on the Synergi editor and how the editor responds when you click the Apply
button.
Refer to the following table for more information.
Roll-up Click the Roll-up button to “minimize” the editor so that just the
title bar is displayed. You can use this feature to see more of the
screen while not completely closing the editor.

Editing a Model
Roll-up button
Auto-Hide When the Auto-Hide feature is disabled, the Synergi editor will
remain open when you click the Apply button. When the Auto-
Hide feature is disabled, the button appears as follows:
Auto-Hide button (auto-hide feature is disabled)
When the Auto-Hide feature is enabled, the Synergi editor will

close when you click the Apply button. The button will appear as
shown below. Click the button to toggle the Auto-Hide feature on
and off.
Auto-hide button (auto-hide feature is enabled)

Located near the Name or ID field in every section and device editor, click the Find and Edit
button to show a list of all sections/devices of the same type in the model in memory. You can
click any name in this list to open that section/device. The list includes the same filter controls

Editing a Model
that are described in "Editing data columns" on page 92.
Viewing data calculations in the Synergi editor

The Info tab provides key information for the sections and devices in your model. For
example, the Info tab on the Section editor shows the calculated by-phase impedance for the
section, as well as the PU impedance for the section. The Info tab on the Fuse editor,
meanwhile, shows the manufacturer, model, and protection curves for the fuse.
Viewing results in the Synergi editor

The Results tab lists pertinent analysis results for the that sections and devices in your model.
The Results tab can be very helpful if you are running multiple analyses and focusing on a
particular device. Since the settings update automatically with each analysis, you can run an
analysis and watch the results change in real time.
Note that you can configure which results categories are shown by clicking the “R” button in
the top of the editor. Select the check box for each category that you want to view, and clear
the check box for each category that you want to hide. The selections you make here will
apply to all Results tabs in Synergi.
You can also configure the available results categories, and even specific result types, by
using the Editor Results tab in the Output Options editor. The Output Options editor is
described in more detail in "Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab" on
page 509.
Undoing and redoing model edits

Synergi supports a limited undo/redo feature, applicable mostly to modeling and device
editing functions. You can use this feature to undo and redo the following actions:
l Any graphical operation (such as deleting a section or moving a node)
l Any device edit (such as changing phasing or copying a device)

Editing a Model
l Any change made in the device editor before clicking Apply

l Node conversions (such as node to feeder or subtran to node)
Synergi stores up to 100 previous actions in a “stack” which is undone or redone sequentially.
The stack is “emptied” when certain operations are performed, including (but not limited to)
the following:
l Loading and merging data of any type
l Using the Multiple Editor
l Creating a new model

To undo a model edit

2. In the Edit group, click Undo.
TIP: You can also press Ctrl+Z on your keyboard or click the Undo button on the
quick access toolbar.
To redo a model edit

2. In the Edit group, click Redo.
TIP: You can also press Ctrl+Y on your keyboard or click the Redo button on the
quick access toolbar.
Tagging sections and devices

Tagging is a way to temporarily identify key sections and devices that you want to work with.
You can tag a section or device by right-clicking on it in the Synergi map display or model
explorer and selecting the Tag option. You can view the list of tagged sections and devices in
the Model tab of the model explorer. From this list, you can perform a number of actions from
the right-click menu, such as opening the Synergi editor or zooming to the location of the
tagged section or device. From the Navigate tab of the Synergi ribbon, you can click the Next
Tag button to zoom to the location of each tagged device.
Tagging is a temporary condition. Tagging cannot be saved, and once you close your model or
exit Synergi, the list of tagged devices will be cleared. You can also use the Synergi ribbon or
the appropriate right-click menu to remove tags for one or all tagged sections and devices.
To tag a section or device
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, right-click on the device or section that
you want to tag.
2. Select Tag.
To view the list of tagged sections and devices
1. In the Synergi model explorer, select the Model tab.

Editing a Model
2. Expand Locations/Groups and select Tagged.

NOTE: If no devices have been tagged in the model, then the Tagged group will not
appear.
To view tagged sections and devices in the Synergi map display
1. Open the Synergi editor.

3. In the Tools group, click Next Tag. The Synergi map display will zoom to the location of
the next tagged device each time you click the Next Tag button.
To remove a tag from a section or device
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, right-click on the device or section that
you want to un-tag.
2. Select Remove Tag.
To remove tagging from all sections and devices

2. In the Tools group, click Remove Tags.
NOTE: The list of tagged devices will also be cleared each time you exit Synergi or
close the current model.
Using the query set

The query set is a temporary group of sections and associated devices that you want to work
with in Synergi. Synergi uses the query set in the following ways:
l When you have sections in the query set and you use the multiple editor, only those
sections that are included in the query set, or devices that are on the sections in the
query set, will be edited. (If the query set is empty, the multiple editor will edit all
sections and devices in the model.)
l Some Synergi analyses work on queried sections only, including the fault analysis and
network fault analysis. The Joiner is another Synergi tool that only works with the query
set.
l When using scripts, some script commands can be used to apply edits to the query set
only. For example, the 4106 command can be used to apply some Model Cleanup script
commands to the query set only. In addition, several individual model cleanup scripts
commands, including 4013, 4014, 4074, and 4078, can be applied individually to either
model cleanup scripts or to the entire model.
l When using annotation on the Synergi map display, you can configure the annotation to
only be shown for sections in the query set, or for devices that are on the queried
sections. This option can be selected in the Text tab of the Map Settings editor.
The Query tab of the model explorer shows which sections are currently included in the query
set. In addition, sections in the query set appear in a different color on the map, according to

Editing a Model
your map display settings. The default color for queried sections is gray, but you can change
this color from the Color tab in the Map Settings editor.
Creating a query set from the Synergi map display

The quickest way to add sections to the query set is to use the context menus in the Synergi
map display. Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To add sections to the query set
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section that you want to add to the query
set.
2. Select Toggle Query. The section will be added to the query set, which you can view
from the Query tab in the model explorer. If the section is already in the query set, this
command will remove it.
To add sections to the query set using spatial query mode

2. In the Query group, click the Query button. The cursor changes to include a plus sign
and a question mark.
TIP: You can also press F6 to enter spatial query mode.
3. Once in the Spatial Query mode, use the following mouse and key combinations to add
sections to the query set:
l Click and drag a box over a region of the map. All sections inside of or touching
the box are added to the query set. (Note that this click-and-drag process will
delete the existing query set and replace it with a new one.)
l Click on an individual section to add it. (Note that this single-click option will
delete the existing query set and replace it with a new one.)
l Press Ctrl and click to add multiple sections to the existing query set.
l Press Shift and click on a section to add that section and all sections downstream,
including all branches, to the existing query set.
l Press Ctrl+Shift and click on a section to add that section and all sections on a
direct path back to the feeder (or subtran) source to the existing query set.
l Click in any empty space in the Synergi map display to clear the query set.
4. Press F5 to return to Default mode.
To modify sections in the query set using the query path tool
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section that you want to work with using
the Query Path tool.
2. Select Query Path.
3. Use the Query Path editor to set up the condition for your query. The following table
describes the options you can edit.

Editing a Model
Query Set Select whether you want to use the current query set or
clear the query set and replace it with a new one.
Action Select the action that you want to perform when modifying
the query set.
Sections Select which sections you want to use to modify the query
set.
Highlight Queried Select whether you want to highlight the queried sections
Area in Map in the Synergi map display using Synergi’s “query set”
Display color, which by default is gray. (This color can be changed
in the Color tab of the Map Settings editor.)
TIP: This check box is also available in the Style tab of

the Map Settings editor.
4. Click Finish to accept your settings and modify the query set accordingly.
Creating a query set using the Query Generator

You can use the Query Generator to create and modify the query set by specifying selected
data parameters. You can use the results to generate a new query set, append the existing
set, or remove items from the existing set. The wizard steps will vary depending on the
options that you select, but the following procedure provides a general overview of how to use
the Query Generator.
To use the Query Generator

2. In the Query group, click Generator.
3. On the first page of the Query Generator, select what data type you want to query.
Available choices are:
l Section Parameters
l Equipment
l Results
l Zone
4. On the second page of the wizard, specify the criteria by which you want to query your
data. The options on this page will vary depending on what you selected on the first
page of the wizard. For example, if you selected “Zone” on the first page, then on the
second page you can select a specific zone type to query—Customer, Exposure,
Mitigation, or Growth.
5. On the third page of the wizard, select which portion of the model you are querying.

Editing a Model
l Selected Feeders
l Whole Model
l Existing Query Set
6. On the fourth page of the wizard, select how you want to apply the queried results.
l Generate New Query Set
l Add to Existing Query Set
l Remove from Existing Query Set
7. On the last page of the wizard, review the sections that will be used to create or modify
the query set. You can remove individual sections from the query set at this point by
right-clicking on a query set name and selecting Remove.
8. Click Finish to complete the query and close the Query Generator. The query set, as
reflected on the Query tab of the model explorer, will be updated according to the
choices that you made.
Instead of clicking Finish, you can also click Launch Multiple Editor on the last page
of the wizard. This will also accept the new query set and also launch Synergi’s Multiple
Editor.
To exit the Query Generator without committing any changes, click Cancel.
Moving and copying sections that are in the query set

To move sections that are in the query set
1. Add the section or sections that you want to move or copy to the query set. See
"Creating a query set from the Synergi map display" on page 250 or "Creating a query
set using the Query Generator" on the previous page for more information.
2. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Build tab. In the Query group, click Move.
3. Click anywhere in the map display and then drag the mouse to move the queried
sections to a new location. The existing query set will be highlighted in the map as you
perform this action.
4. The Move mode will remain active when you complete this action, in case you need to
move the queried sections again. Press F5 to return to Default mode.
To create a copy of sections that are in the query set
1. Add the section or sections that you want to move or copy to the query set. See
"Creating a query set from the Synergi map display" on page 250 or "Creating a query
set using the Query Generator" on the previous page for more information.
2. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Build tab. In the Query group, click Copy.
3. Click anywhere in the map display and then drag the mouse to move the queried
sections to a new location. The existing query set will be highlighted in the map as you
perform this action.
When you complete this action, Synergi will automatically return to Default mode.

Editing a Model
Removing a section from the query set
To remove a section from the query set
1. Right-click on the section in the Query tab of the model explorer or in the Synergi map
display.
2. Select Toggle Query.
Clearing the query set
To clear the query set

2. In the Query group, click Clear.
TIP: You can also press Ctrl+Q to clear the query set.
Using the Multiple Editor

Synergi’s Multiple Editor allows you to edit multiple sections or devices at one time. If you
have an active query set, the actions performed with the Multiple Editor will only affect the
items within the query set. If the query set is empty, then actions performed with the Multiple
Editor will affect all selected feeders in the model.
To use the Multiple Editor
1. Determine which sections and devices you want to edit.

l To use the Multiple Editor on all selected feeders, make sure that the query set is
empty.
—or—
l To use the Multiple Editor on selected sections and devices only, build a query set
that includes the sections and devices that you want to edit. You can also right-
click on a section in the model and select Multiple Edit > Current Section or
Multiple Edit > Downstream.
For more information on using the query set, see "Using the query set" on
page 249.
2. Open the Multiple Editor.
a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Build tab.
b. In the Query group, click Multiple Editor.
3. Set up the multiple edit criteria.
a. At the top of the editor, click the category button for the data you want to edit.
b. On the left side of the editor, select the subcategory for the data you want to edit.
For example, if you clicked the Devices button at the top of the editor, select from

Editing a Model
the subcategories to edit Capacitors, Motors, Regulators, Switches, or

Transformers.
c. On the right side of the editor, configure the specific edit that you want to make.
4. Review the proposed changes.
a. Click the >> button to open a panel at the bottom of the Multiple Editor that
shows list of the proposed changes.
b. To remove a proposed change from the list (and therefore remove it from the
edit), right-click on the change and select Exclude from Multiple Edit. Right-
click again and select Restore All Excluded Items to return the list to its
original settings.
c. To save a backup copy of your current model and warehouse before applying any
changes, click the Back up model button. Note that this button uses Synergi’s
backup feature, as described in "Backing up model and equipment data" on
page 150. It does not save the model to the original data source.
d. To save the proposed changes to a report file, click the Save a report of the
listed changes button.
5. Complete the multiple edit.
l When you are satisfied with the list of proposed changes, click Apply to complete
the edit and also leave the Multiple Editor open. Or, click OK to complete the edit
and close the Multiple Editor.
Using the Bulk Editor

The Bulk Editor provides a convenient area where you can view and edit loads of several
different types, including capacitors, meters, large customers, and section spot loads.
To use the Bulk Editor

2. In the Edit group, click the text Bulk Editor and then select the type of load that you
want to edit. Available choices are:
l Capacitors
l Large Customers
l Meters
l Spot Loads
3. The Bulk Editor lists all of the applicable load values for each section or device of the
selected type in your model. You can perform several tasks directly from the Bulk
Editor, as described in the following table.

Editing a Model
To ... Do This ...
Open the Synergi In the Description column, click the name of any section or
editor for a section device to open the applicable Synergi editor.
or device
Edit loads for the Select any cell in the Bulk Editor and then type a new value
section or device for the selected load. If both the Synergi editor and the
Bulk Editor are open at the same time, you will see your
edits applied automatically as you edit loads in either
editor.
Filter the list of Click in the filter area and type the text to filter for, and
sections or devices then click the Filter button. Delete the text you typed and
click the Filter button again to remove the filter. The filter
field is not case-sensitive.
Several special characters are available for use with the

Synergi filter. For example, < or > will filter for items
greater or less than the given value. In addition, != will
filter for items that do not equal the given value. And, * is
a wildcard filter that will filter for results that contain the
given syntax anywhere in its name or value.
Apply custom Use the grid at the top of the Synergi editor to create
coloring to the custom rules that will apply different colors to load values
values in the Bulk that are greater than, less than, or equal to a specified
Editor value.
Using worksheets
The worksheet is a special Synergi window that lists devices of a single type in one location.
The worksheet shows basic data for each device of the applicable type, including the section,
description, and on/off status. You can perform a number of simple tasks from the worksheet,
including zooming to the location of devices and turning devices on and off.
The following figure shows an example of the Capacitor Worksheet. Worksheets are available
for many other device types, including regulators, switches, and transformers.

Editing a Model
Capacitor worksheet
To open the worksheet

2. In the Worksheets group, click the button for the worksheet that you want to open.
The following list describes the options that are available in the worksheet.
Auto Zoom
Automatically zoom to each device as you select it in the worksheet list.

Edit
Open the device editor for the device that is selected in the worksheet list.
Just items in map view
Only include items that are currently visible in the Synergi map display.
Open in Excel
Send the list of devices from the worksheet to Excel.

Editing a Model
Refresh
Refresh the list of devices. Note that the worksheet will update automatically as you edit
devices and run analyses. However, you may need to click the Refresh button from time to
time to update the data in the worksheet.
Turn on/Turn off
Turn on or off the device that is selected in the worksheet list.

Zoom
Zoom to the device that is selected in the worksheet list.
Using feeder sets

Feeder sets allow you to create and save specific groupings of feeders. Feeder sets can only
be configured through the Navigate tab in the Synergi ribbon.
To create a feeder set
1. Configure Synergi to select the feeders that you want to save in the feeder set. For
more information on selecting feeder sets, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
3. In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, type a name for the new feeder set that
you are creating.
4. Click the Add Feeder Set button.
To select a feeder set

2. In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, use the options list to select the name of
the feeder set you want to load. Synergi will automatically select the feeders in the
selected feeder set.
To delete a feeder set

the feeder set you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete feeder set from list button.
To replace a feeder set
1. Configure Synergi to select the feeders that you want to save in the feeder set. For
more information on selecting feeder sets, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
the feeder set that you want to replace.

Editing a Model
4. Click the Add Feeder Set button.

Modeling weather conditions

Weather can have a variety of impacts on a distribution model. For example, temperature,
wind speed, and relative humidity can each have an impact on load. Temperature can also
impact overhead conductor resistance, and conductors can have summer and winter rating
load limits that need to be considered.
Synergi’s weather modeling features allow you to realistically model the behavior that occurs
in the grid as weather changes occur over the course of a year. This chapter summarizes the
edits that you will need to make to model the effects of weather on your system. A more
detailed discussion on weather modeling in Synergi is provided in the Synergi Electric
Technical Reference.
An overview of weather modeling in Synergi

Weather modeling is set up using a number of different editors in Synergi. The following list
discusses many of the options that you can configure in Synergi.
l Weather conditions. Weather conditions are defined using the Weather tab of the Time
and Weather Options editor. Several options are available. For example, you can use a
simple set of weather set points to define constant values for humidity, irradiance,
temperature, and wind speed. You can also select to use more advanced weather
profiles, which allow you to vary these four weather conditions on both an hourly and a
monthly basis.
For more information on defining the weather conditions for your model, see "Defining
weather conditions" on the facing page.
l Weather-based impacts on loads. Synergi provides two ways to adjust distributed and
spot loads based on changes in weather conditions. In the Time and Weather Options
editor, you can define global settings for weather factors and latency effects. These
global settings can be enabled for spot loads, distributed loads, or both spot and
distributed loads for both summer and winter months. As a second option, instead of the
global settings, you can configure Synergi to consider these same inputs but on a more
regional basis through the use of customer zones and customer classes.
For more information on configuring a model to simulate the impact of changing
weather conditions on loads, see "Adjusting loads based on weather conditions" on
page 264.
l Seasonal ratings. Conductors, regulators, and transformers can be set up with summer
ratings and winter ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps. The continuous
amps ratings are used in Synergi analyses to calculate the percent loading and to
display overload exceptions. The emergency amps rating is used in balanced and by-
phase analyses and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display
regulator overload exceptions. The season that is used by the Synergi model is selected

Editing a Model
on the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor.

For more information on using seasonal ratings in Synergi, see "Configuring seasonal
weather modeling" on page 267.
l Weather profiles. Weather profiles allow you to supply more detailed information about
weather conditions over the course of a year. Weather profiles are often used to model
variations for different weather conditions. For example, you can create weather
profiles for a mild summer and also a severe summer, and then run an analysis on each
profile so you can compare the results. Each weather profile specifies hourly
temperature averages for each month of the year, and also average monthly values for
wind speed, relative humidity, and number of latent days.
For more information on using weather profiles in Synergi, see "Modeling weather using
weather profiles" on the next page.
l Weather zones. Weather zones are used to model the variation in weather conditions in
different parts of a system. Solar plants in one section of a model, for example, may
experience significant differences in cloud cover from solar plants in another section of
the model. This could result in a large MVA input from one plant and a substantial MVA
drop in another, and the resulting power swing will affect flow and regulator and LTC
tapping. Weather zones can be used to help simulate the impact on cloud conditions and
also different types of weather profiles (humidity, irradiance, temperature, and wind)
on your model.
For more information on using weather zones in Synergi, see "Using weather zones to
model variations in weather conditions" on page 269.
Defining weather conditions

Before you can simulate the impact of changing weather conditions—temperature, wind,
humidity, and irradiance—on your model, you must first define what those weather conditions
are. Synergi provides a couple different ways to do this, all of which are enabled in the
Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.
l Weather set points. The simplest approach to defining weather conditions is to specify a
set of fixed weather conditions. This approach assumes that the same weather
conditions exist at all hours of the day and for all months of the year.
l Weather profiles. A more detailed approach to defining weather conditions is to use
weather profiles. Weather profiles allow you to apply a percentage-based adjust to a
defined maximum weather value on an hourly basis for each month in the year.
Different weather profiles can be created to define different weather patterns—for
example, a cold year for temperatures versus a warmer year for temperatures. By
changing which weather profile is applied to the model before you run an analysis, you
can evaluate the impact that these different weather conditions will have on your
model.
Modeling weather based on set weather conditions

Synergi’s weather modeling set points allow you to set a single value for temperature, wind,
humidity, and irradiance. These four values define the weather condition that will be applied

Editing a Model
throughout your model. If you are running a time-based analysis, the weather conditions will
not change due to the time of day or the month in the year.
To model weather based on set weather conditions

2. In the Settings group, click Time and Weather.
3. In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
4. In the Weather tab, under Weather Modeling, select Weather Set Points.
5. Under Set Points, specify values to apply to your model for each of the following
categories:
l Temperature
l Wind
l Humidity
l Irradiance
6. Next to Cloud Cover, specify a value from 0 to 100 to represent the percentage of
cloud cover for the model.
7. In the upper-right corner of the editor, use the Load response options to configure how
Synergi will adjust distributed and spot loads based on changes in weather conditions.
l No load response to weather. Select this option to disable any impact of
weather conditions on your loads.
l Load response: global settings. Select this option to define global settings for
weather factors and latency effects. (These values are specified on the
Load/Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.) The global settings
can be enabled for spot loads, distributed loads, or both spot and distributed loads
for both summer and winter months.
l Load response: class based. Select this option to consider the same inputs as
the global settings option but on a more regional basis through the use of
customer zones and customer classes.
For more information on these options, see "Adjusting loads based on weather
conditions" on page 264.
Modeling weather using weather profiles

Weather profiles contain hourly weather patterns for each month during a year. You can
create weather profiles in Synergi to model the impact of humidity, irradiance, temperature,
and wind.
It is important to note that a weather profile does not define a specific weather value.
Instead, the weather profile specifies a percentage that is applied to a “maximum” weather
value (which is defined in the Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor) to
calculate the actual value. For example, if a temperature profile has a value of 80 for a

Editing a Model
particular hour in a particular month, that does not mean the temperature for that hour of that
month is 80°C. Instead, the temperature is 80% of whatever “maximum” value is defined in
the Time and Weather Options editor. If the maximum temperature is 35°C, then the profile-
adjusted temperature is 28°C. If the maximum temperature is 30°C, then the profile-adjust
temperature is 24°C.
Weather profiles allow you to quickly and easily run different studies on your model to
consider the impact of different weather patterns. For example, you can create a “moderate
summer” temperature profile and also a “severe summer” temperature profile, and then run a
contingency study using each profile. Weather profiles eliminate the need to manually edit
weather values each time an analysis is run.
Weather modeling based on weather profiles is enabled on the Weather tab of the Time and
Weather Options editor. In addition, all four weather profile types (humidity, irradiance,
temperature, and wind) are created from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer.
Creating a weather profile
To create a weather profile
1. From the Synergi model explorer, select the Warehouse tab.

2. In the Warehouse tab, right-click on Weather profiles and select New Device >
Weather Profile.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type the name of the weather profile, and then click
OK.
4. Use Weather Profile editor to select the weather profile type and to edit the settings for
the new weather profile. For information on the options that you can set, see "Editing a
weather profile" below.
Editing a weather profile
To edit a weather profile
1. From the Synergi model explorer, select the Warehouse tab and then expand the
category for the weather profile type that you want to edit.
l Weather - Humidity
l Weather - Irradiance
l Weather - Temperature
l Weather - Wind
2. Double-click the name of the weather profile that you want to edit.
3. In the Weather Profile editor, under Profile Type, select the type of weather profile
you are creating or editing. Available choices are:
l Humidity
l Irradiance

Editing a Model
l Temperature
l Wind
4. In the list of months, select the month for the weather data that you want to edit.
5. The graph in the Weather Profile editor provides hourly percentage values for the
selected month. As described in "Modeling weather using weather profiles" on page 260,
these hourly percentages are applied to a defined “maximum” weather value to
determine the actual temperature for a given hour in a given month. To edit a value,
click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location. The current value is shown in a
text popup that appears next to the graph, and the average value for the entire month is
listed in the upper-right corner of the editor.
You can also do any of the following:
l Click the Toggle button to change the graph to a table that you can also use to
enter the hourly weather percentages.
Toggle button
l Click the Add and Subtract buttons to shift the hourly weather percentages by
one percent in either direction.
Add and Subtract buttons
l Click the Copy button to copy the percentages from the current month to all other
months in the profile.
Copy button
l If you are editing an irradiance profile, click the Generate Irradiance Curves
button to generate curves automatically for the entire year, including all months,
based on the Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude values that are specified on the Map
tab of the Preferences editor. Although this button is enabled for all weather
profiles type, it is only intended for use with Irradiance profiles.
Generate Irradiance Curves button

Editing a Model
6. If you are editing a Temperature profile, use the Rel. Humidity and Latent Days text
boxes to enter the average relative humidity and number of latent days for the selected
month.
7. Repeat these steps to edit the percentages for each month in the profile.
Configuring a model to use weather profiles
Once you have created the weather profiles for your model, you can apply them to the model
using the Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.
To apply weather profiles to a model
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.

2. In the Settings group, select Time and Weather.
4. Under Weather Modeling, select Weather profiles: time of day. This option will
calculate separate hourly values for each month based on the values that are defined in
the applied weather profiles.
5. In the Maximums column, specify the maximum weather value for Temperature
(degrees C), Wind (feet per second), and Humidity.
NOTE: Remember that the percentages defined in the weather profiles will be
applied to the maximum weather values you define here to determine the actual
weather values that will be used by the Synergi model.)
6. If you want to override the weather zones that are specified on the section level with
global weather zones, do the following:
a. Select the Override section weather zones check box.
b. Select the names of the Temperature, Wind, Humidity, and Irradiance
weather profiles that you want to apply to all sections.
NOTE: For information on creating and editing weather profiles, see "Creating
a weather profile" on page 261 and "Editing a weather profile" on page 261.
7. Next to Cloud Cover, specify a value from 0 to 100 to represent the percentage of
cloud cover.
8. In the upper-right corner of the editor, use the Load response options to configure how
Synergi will adjust distributed and spot loads based on changes in weather conditions.
l No load response to weather. Select this option to disable any impact of
weather conditions on your loads.
l Load response: global settings. Select this option to define global settings for
weather factors and latency effects. (These values are specified on the
Load/Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.) The global settings
can be enabled for spot loads, distributed loads, or both spot and distributed loads
for both summer and winter months.

Editing a Model
l Load response: class based. Select this option to consider the same inputs as
the global settings option but on a more regional basis through the use of
customer zones and customer classes.
For more information on these options, see "Adjusting loads based on weather
conditions" below.
Deleting a weather profile
Perform the following procedure to delete a weather profile from your equipment warehouse.
If you delete the weather profile that is currently applied to your model in the Weather tab of
the Time and Weather Options editor, the current weather profile will be changed to
“Unknown”.
To delete a weather profile

2. Select Weather Profiles and then select the name of the weather profile that you want
to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete.
Adjusting loads based on weather conditions

Synergi provides two different ways to adjust distributed and spot loads based on changes in
weather conditions. In the Time and Weather Options editor, you can define global settings for
weather factors and latency effects. These global settings can be enabled for spot loads,
distributed loads, or both spot and distributed loads for both summer and winter months. As a
second option, instead of the global settings, you can configure Synergi to consider these
same inputs but on a more regional basis through the use of customer zones and customer
classes. A third option is to disable any impact of weather conditions on your loads.
Whether you use the global settings or class-based settings, the inputs that you must provide
are the same. (For customer classes, however, you can input different values on a month-by-
month basis, whereas with the global settings you can only use one set of values for all
months in the year). Each input consists of a factor that is applied to the customer load based
on the change in a certain weather condition. For example, the first factor is labeled “%kW /
C”. The value that you enter will be a factor that is applied to the load for every degree change
in the temperature. For example, if the factor that you provide is 1.1, then the load will be
increased by a factor of 1.1 for each degree-rise in temperature.
The six weather factors that you can apply for both summer and winter months (and
individually for each of the 12 months if you are applying the factors based on customer
classes) are as follows:
l %kW / C
l %kvar / C

Editing a Model
l %kW / ft/s
l %kvar / ft/s
l %kW / %RH
l %kvar / %RH
In addition to these six weather factors, you can also configure latency factors for
temperature, wind speed, and relative humidity. Latency assumes that successive days of
unusual weather will result in higher loads than single days of such weather. The three latency
factors are expressed in percent per day. A temperature latency factor of 1.5% per day, for
example, will increase the impact of temperature variation on load by 1.5% for each latent
day. Following this example, if an extended heat wave kept temperatures above normal for 7
days, the temperature impact on load would increase by 10.5% (7 days x 1.5% latency factor
= 10.5%). It is very important to note that this is not a 10.5% increase in load. It is a 10.5%
increase in the temperature factor applied to the load. Additional information on latency and
the impact of weather on loads in general is provided in the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
The following procedures discuss how to configure Synergi to adjust loads either globally or
on a class-based approach, or to disable weather load modeling, if desired.
To enable global-based weather load modeling

4. Select Load Response: Global Settings.
5. Select the Load/Weather tab.
6. In the Load/Weather tab, use the Spot and Distributed check boxes to specify whether
the weather factors and latency effects will be applied to spot loads, distributed loads,
or both spot and distributed loads.
7. Under Weather factors, specify summer and winter values for the following
categories:
l %kW / C. Change in kW loads (as a percentage value) per change in
temperature.
l %kvar / C. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in
temperature.
l %kW / ft/s. Change in kW loads (as a percentage value) per change in wind
speed.
l %kvar / ft/s. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in wind
speed.
l %kW / %RH. Change in kW loads (as a percentage value) per change in
relative humidity.
l %kvar / %RH. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in
relative humidity.

Editing a Model
8. Under Latency effects, specify summer and winter values for the following categories
for latent days:
l Temp % / day. Change in temperature (as a percentage value) per day (for
latent days).
l Wind % / day. Change in wind speed (as a percentage value) per day (for
latent days).
l RH % / day. Change in relative humidity (as a percentage value) per day (for
latent days).
To enable class-based weather load modeling

4. Select Load Response: Class based.
5. Under Loads Normalized At, specify values to apply to your model for each of the
following categories:
l Temperature
l Wind
l Humidity
7. Configure the sections in your model so that the spot loads and distributed loads, as
appropriate, are linked to customer zones, which in turn are linked to customer classes.
l Customer classes. A customer class stores basic load curve data. A customer
class consists of at least 36 curves, including a percent kW curve for a weekday,
weekend, and peak day for each of the 12 months in a year. In addition, you can
optionally specify another 36 curves for percent kvar. If you are not using time-
of-day modeling, you can also specify factors for % peak kW and % peak kvar for
each customer class. This allows you to take advantage of weather modeling
using customer classes without having to set up or use the actual load curves.
Some of the customer classes that are included in the sample model that is
provided with Synergi include Apartments, Industrial, Municipal, and Residential.
For more information on working with customer classes, see "Customer classes"
on page 298.
l Customer zones. Customer zones combine up to three customer classes in
specified proportions to determine how much of a section’s spot and distributed
load pertain to each class. A heavy industrial customer zone, for example, might
be configured to include 80% Industrial customers (whose loads are defined in the
“Industrial” customer class described above) and 20% of up to two other classes.
A light industrial zone, however, might be configured to include only 40%
Industrial customers and 60% of up to two other classes. Customer zones are

Editing a Model
applied to the sections of your model using the Load - Dist and Load - Spot tabs of
the Section editor.
To disable weather load modeling

4. Select No load response to weather.
Configuring seasonal weather modeling

Conductors, regulators, and transformers can be set up with summer ratings and winter
ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps. The continuous amps ratings are used in
Synergi analyses to calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions. The
emergency amps rating is used in balanced and by-phase analyses and capacitor placement to
flag overloaded sections and to display regulator overload exceptions. The season that is used
by the Synergi model is selected on the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor.
Setting the season (summer or winter) for a Synergi model

Use the Model tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to set the model to apply summer
rating or winter ratings. The season that is currently enabled is shown in the Synergi status
bar. It is also shown in the Run Summary chapter for many Synergi analysis reports.
To set the season for a Synergi model
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.

3. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Model tab.
4. Under Seasonal Ratings, select Summer ratings, Winter ratings. You can also select
an option to use winter ratings when the temperature is less than a defined temperature
value, or to base the ratings on the analysis time.
Setting up conductors to use seasonal ratings

Summer and winter ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps are available for both
bare and underground conductors. These ratings are configured on conductor types in the
equipment warehouse, which in turn are linked to individual conductors in your model.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on setting up conductors to use
seasonal ratings. For more information on working with conductors, see "Conductors" on
page 375.

Editing a Model
To set up conductors to use seasonal ratings

2. In the Warehouse tab, expand Conductors (Bare) or Conductors (Cable). Double-
click the name of the conductor that you want to edit.
3. In the Conductor editor, select the Ratings tab.
4. In the Ratings section, specify Summer and Winter values for the following:
l Continuous Amp Rating. The continuous amp rating is used during Synergi
analyses to calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
l Emergency Amp Rating. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and
by-phase analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to
display overload exceptions.
Setting up regulators to use seasonal ratings

Summer and winter ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps are available for
regulators. These ratings are configured on regulator types in the equipment warehouse,
which in turn are linked to individual regulators in your model.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on setting up regulators to use seasonal
ratings. For more information on working with regulators, see "Regulators" on page 452.
To set up regulators to use seasonal ratings

2. In the Warehouse tab, expand Regulator Types. Double-click the name of the
regulator type that you want to edit.
3. In the Regulator Type editor, select the Ratings tab.
4. In the Regulator Type editor, under Summer Ratings (Amps) and Winter Ratings
(Amps), specify summer and winter values for the following:
l Continuous. The continuous amp rating is used during Synergi analyses to
calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
l Emergency. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and by-phase
analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display
overload exceptions.
Setting up transformers to use seasonal ratings

Summer and winter ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps are available for
transformers. These ratings are configured on transformer types in the equipment
warehouse, which in turn are linked to individual transformers in your model.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on setting up transformers to use
seasonal ratings. For more information on working with transformers, see "Transformers" on
page 474.

Editing a Model
To set up transformers to use seasonal ratings

2. In the Warehouse tab, expand Transformer Types. Double-click the name of the
transformer type that you want to edit.
3. In the Transformer Type editor, select the Ratings tab.
4. In the Summer KVA Ratings and Winter KVA Ratings sections, specify summer and
winter values for the following:
l Continuous. The continuous amp rating is used during Synergi analyses to
calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
l Emergency. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and by-phase
analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display
overload exceptions.
Using weather zones to model variations in weather conditions

Weather zones are used to model the variation in weather conditions in different parts of a
system. Solar plants in one section of a model, for example, may experience significant
differences in cloud cover from solar plants in another section of the model. This could result
in a large MVA input from one plant and a substantial MVA drop in another, and the resulting
power swing will affect flow and regulator and LTC tapping. Weather zones can be used to help
simulate the impact on cloud conditions and also different types of weather profiles (humidity,
irradiance, temperature, and wind) on your model.
Weather zones, like any other type of zone, are created and edited from the model
warehouse. You then apply a weather zone to a specific section by editing the Zones tab of the
Section editor.
Creating a weather zone
To create a weather zone

2. Right-click and select New Device > Weather Zone.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new weather zone and then click
OK.
4. Use the Weather Zone editor to edit the settings for the weather zone. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a weather zone" below.
Editing a weather zone

To edit a weather zone, double-click the weather zone name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Zones tab in the Section editor, you can also click the edit
button that is located next to the name of the weather zone that has been selected for that
particular section.

Editing a Model
To edit a weather zone

2. Expand Zones - Weather and then double-click the name of the weather zone that you
want to edit.
3. In the Weather Zone editor, use the Cloud cover area to set summer and winter values
for the following parameters related to cloud cover in the weather zone:
l Apply above (percent irradiance)
l Average cloud duration (seconds)
l Average gap duration (seconds)
l Cloud ramp rate (percent/second)
l Full cloud cover (percent)
l Overcast cover (percent)
l Cloud volatility (percent)
l Duty volatility (percent)
4. Use the Weather profiles area to select the following types of weather profiles to
associate with the weather zone. For detailed information on weather profiles, see
"Modeling weather using weather profiles" on page 260.
l Irradiance
l Wind
l Temperature
l Humidity
5. Use the Color field to select a color to represent sections that have been assigned to
this weather zone when you color the map by weather zones settings. For more
information on coloring the map, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
Assigning a weather zone to a section
To assign a weather zone to a section
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want
to edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Zones tab.
3. Next to Weather Zones, select the name of the weather zone that you want to assign
to the section.
Deleting a weather zone

Perform the following procedure to delete a weather zone from your model. If the zone has
been applied to a section in your model, that section will revert back to an “Unknown”
selection for the weather zone option.

Editing a Model
To delete a weather zone

2. Expand Zones - Weather and then select the name of the weather zone that you want
to delete.
Modeling cables
Cables should be loaded so that their operating temperature is within the standard or
manufacturer stated limits. As such, Synergi includes a cable ampacity tool that you can use
to calculate amperage derating due to burial and duct bank configuration. The tool can be used
as a standalone calculator or it can integrate directly within Synergi’s modeling and analysis
environment. In other words, you can build duct banks just to find derated values for your
duct bank cables, or you can go as far as applying duct banks to your model for use in
exception flagging during analysis.
With the cable ampacity tool, you can model direct buried cables with or without conduit and
cables within encased duct banks. Cable modeling is circuit-based and a maximum amp value
can be specified by circuit. If a circuit has no specified amp value, Synergi calculates the
maximum current allowed to avoid thermal overloading of the cable. Other features of
Synergi cable analysis include:
l Realistic duct bank simulation, with a simple graphic editor to help create them.
l Consideration of duct size, soil type, spacing, depth, and mutual heating.
l Immediate, on-screen derating values.
l Option to apply duct banks to sections, for automatic application of derated values.
General steps for Synergi cable analysis

To use Synergi cable analysis, you should follow these general steps:
1. Define your cable conductors in your equipment data source and enable them for
ampacity studies. If you are an established Synergi user, you may already have your
conductors defined, but you may still need to enable them for ampacity studies. For
more information on modeling cables, see "Modeling cables" on the next page.
2. Create duct banks, using the duct bank editing features and your cable types.
3. Apply duct banks to the applicable sections in the model.
4. Run the section derating update power tool to apply derated values to those sections.
5. Run Synergi analyses as normal, noting that exceptions are now flagged based on the
derated values.
These steps may vary slightly, depending on the makeup of your data and the depth of your
ampacity studies. If you only wish to calculate basic derated values without integrating them
into your model, only steps 1 and 2 apply.

Editing a Model
Modeling cables
As with any analysis, the results of cable studies depend on the quality of your model data,
especially your cable conductor models. When you work with cable conductors, you should be
aware that the associated data can serve two distinct purposes:
l Ampacity studies
l Impedance calculations
Ampacity studies refer to Synergi Cable, a licensed module that allows you to model cable
duct banks and calculate derated amperage for the associated cables. Impedance
calculations, on the other hand, are an integral part of any load-flow study. Therefore, your
impedance-related data must be accurate for all cable conductors, but ampacity-related data
is only applicable if you plan to use Synergi Cable.
For more information on Synergi Cable, see "Modeling cables" on the previous page.
Overview of cable conductor data

Cable conductor data is considered equipment data, like all conductor data. When you create
and manage conductors, you generally work in the Warehouse tab of the model explorer. In
the Warehouse tab, conductor types are created and managed like any other equipment type.
For more information, see "Creating a device type" on page 397 and "Editing a device type" on
page 398.
In the Warehouse tab, Synergi separates bare and cable conductors into two different groups.
It makes this determination by the conductor model specified in the Conductor editor. All
conductors specified as “bare conductors” are listed as bare conductors, and all others are
considered cables.
After making changes to conductor data, you must save your equipment data set to preserve
those changes. For more information on working with equipment data, see "Working with
TIP: Explanations of the various fields in the Conductor editor, including those applicable
to cables, can be found under "Editing a conductor type" on page 375.
Types of cable conductors

Synergi supports several different types of cables. These cable types are discussed in the
topics listed below.
Simple impedance cable model
As the name implies, the simple impedance model is the most basic, requiring only the
positive and zero sequence impedance and conductance. For sections that use simple
impedance conductors, Synergi ignores any neutral phasing and/or spacing data, assuming
that the effects of these parameters are included in the specified impedance.
Because simple impedance conductors lack information such as spacing and construction
materials, they cannot be used for cable ampacity studies.

Editing a Model
Separate neutral cable model
From a data perspective, the separate neutral model is similar to the simple impedance
model, except that you can allow Synergi to calculate GMR and zero-sequence impedances
based on core R/core GMR and spacing/neutral conductor data at the respective section.
Therefore, the use of this model generally requires that your section spacing data is accurate.
For other parameters that are not available, Synergi makes assumptions as appropriate. Note
that the conductor diameter in this case is not relevant.
Because spacing data is assumed to be available, separate neutral cables are available for
cable ampacity studies.
Concentric neutral cable model
The concentric neutral model is a more detailed model, requiring the conductor, insulation,
and outside diameters for impedance calculations. For ampacity studies, it also requires the
core resistance, core GMR, strand diameters, strand resistance, and strand count. When you
apply a concentric neutral conductor to a section, you should generally specify “same as
phase” (or the same conductor type) for the neutral. If you do, Synergi assumes that all
return current passes through the neutral strands. If you specify a different conductor type for
the neutral, Synergi assumes a separate neutral return.

Editing a Model
Outside diameter
Insulation diameter
Conductor
diameter
Insulation
Jacket
Sheath
Neutral strand
Core strand
diameter
diameter
Diameter to
strand ring
Concentric neutral components
If you are using a concentric neutral cable for ampacity studies, you may need to contact the
respective cable manufacturer to obtain all the necessary data. In many cases, cable catalogs
do not provide all the attributes that Synergi requires.
Tape shield conductor model
The tape shield model is very similar to the concentric neutral, without the concentric
stranding. The data requirements are nearly the same, with the same importance on
diameters and section spacing data. For tape shield conductors, the neutral conductor
specified at the section level is an important factor and should accurately reflect your actual
configuration.

Editing a Model
Outside diameter
Insulation diameter
Conductor
diameter
Insulation
Core strand
diameter Sheath
Shield
Jacket
Tape shield cable components
Three-core cable model
A three-core cable model contains three individual conductors bound into a single round cable.
Modeling this type of cable with Synergi is a fairly simple process. All Conductor editors have
a check box in the Cable tab. When the box is checked, Synergi assumes a three-core cable
model. As a result, you will see a larger single circle on duct bank displays and a slight
increase in ampacity. This increase is due to the netting of less thermal insulation from the
jacket compared to three single-phase cables held close together.
Applying conductor types to sections

Conductors are assigned to sections in the Construction tab of the Section editor. You can also
make broad conductor assignments with the Multiple Editor. For more information on the
Multiple Editor, see "Using the Multiple Editor" on page 253.
When assigning cable conductors, it is important to note your spacing values, especially if you
are not using equivalent spacing. For example, if you are modeling triplexed cable, you should
be sure to use small spacing values that represent the actual spacing of phase conductors
within the cable. To help ensure consistent and accurate spacing, you may consider using
configuration types. For more information, see "Configuration types (detailed spacing)" on
page 380.
Detailed cable studies using scripts

As an alternative to modeling duct banks, you can use a “study script” to perform derating
calculations. A study script has no interaction with the map or the model, and is strictly a
calculation engine designed to handle complex configurations that would be difficult to model.

Editing a Model
Scripts should be used whenever you have a duct configuration that is too complex to model
with the standard interface tools. Synergi’s calculation engine can handle detailed
configurations, well beyond what can be modeled with the duct bank view and associated
tools. Because these tools were designed for simplicity, the script approach was implemented
to allow detailed studies, while maintaining a friendly and intuitive interface.
Note that the use of scripts has no interaction with the interface, other than the steps required
to launch the script and report the results. If you want to implement the results in your model,
it will be your responsibility afterwards to do so.
For more information on cable study scripts, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Modeling duct banks

Refer to the topics listed below for information on modeling duct banks in Synergi.
Creating a duct bank

Perform the following procedure to create a new duct bank.
To create a duct bank

2. Right-click and select New Device > Duct Bank.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new duct bank and then click OK.
4. Use the Duct Bank editor and the Duct Bank view to edit the duct bank. For more
information, see "Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view" on page 279 and
"Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor" on the facing page.
Editing duct banks

Duct banks are a Synergi equipment type, with data stored in the DevDuctBank and
DevDuctBankCircuit tables. Referential integrity rules are in place such that if you delete a
duct bank record from the DevDuctBank table, all associated DevDuctBankCircuit records are
also deleted.
Synergi provides two different tools for editing duct banks. Both tools configure the same data
and therefore perform analogous functions. These tools are:
l The standard Synergi editor. For more information on the editor, see "Using the Synergi
editor" on page 241.
l The Cable Duct Bank graphic view. For more information on this window, see "Editing a
duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view" on page 279.
In most cases, you will probably use both tools together, since each has its own advantages.
If you have both the editor and a Cable Duct Bank view open, the two are fully interactive.
That is, any changes you make in the editor are automatically reflected in the graphic view,
and vice-versa. Also, certain settings can only be configured in the editor, not the graphic
view.

Editing a Model
A duct bank can include any number of three-phase circuits. Each circuit is configured
independently of the rest, and the mutual effects of all circuits are considered during
amperage calculations. You can add new circuits to a duct bank using the editor or the Cable
Duct Bank view. If and when you apply a duct bank to a section, you apply one specific circuit
only.
Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor

The duct bank editor contains all the settings needed to configure a duct bank for ampacity
calculations. These settings include all those that can be manipulated in the Cable Duct Bank
view, as well as certain additional, important items. For more information on the Cable Duct
Bank view, see "Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view" on page 279.
To edit a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor

2. Expand Duct Banks and then double-click the name of the duct bank that you want to
edit.
3. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the duct
bank. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Editing general data for a duct bank
To edit general data for a duct bank
1. In the Warehouse tab of the Synergi model explorer, expand Duct Banks and double-
click on the duct bank that you want to edit.
2. In the Duct Bank editor, select the Duct Bank tab. The options that you can edit are
described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Duct Bank tab of the Duct Bank
editor.
Circuit loading
Specify the loading levels among circuits in a duct bank. The following options are available:
Equal loading, Proportional to AC resistance, and Proportional to loading constant.
This option is ideal for running studies on duct banks with different types of cables.
Construction
Use the Construction area to edit the following settings:
l Type. Select the construction type for the duct bank. Available choices are Direct
Buried and Duct Bank.
l Bank Material. If you selected Duct Bank as the Type, use this options list to select
the construction material for the duct bank.

Editing a Model
l Configuration. Select the configuration for the duct bank.

l Ambient Earth. Specify the ambient ground temperature at the duct bank.
If you select Direct Buried, the Cable Duct Bank view will still show an outline of a duct bank,
according to the configuration specified below. For more information on modeling direct
buried cables, see "Direct buried cables in the duct bank view" on page 282.
Description
Optional description for the duct bank.

Dimensions
Enter the Height, Width, and Depth of the duct bank. In the Cable Duct Bank view, you can
change these dimensions by clicking and dragging the duct bank walls.
Ducts
If you selected Duct Bank as the construction type, select the duct Material and specify the
Diameter and Thickness of the material. If you selected Direct Buried as the construction
type, you only need to specify the Thickness of the duct.
Note that these values cannot be changed in the Cable Duct Bank view.
Soil
Select a Soil Type for the duct bank. If you selected Direct Buried as the construction type,
then you can also select the Fill/Backfill type.
Editing circuits for a duct bank
To edit circuits for a duct bank
1. In the Warehouse tab of the Synergi model explorer, expand Duct Banks and double-
click on the duct bank that you want to edit.
2. In the Duct Bank editor, select the Circuits tab.
3. In the list of circuits at the top of the editor, select the circuit that you want to edit.
From this list, you can also click Add to add a new circuit to the duct bank, and Delete
to delete the selected circuit.
4. Once you have selected a circuit, use the remaining fields in the Duct Bank editor to edit
the data for the circuit. The options that you can edit are described at the end of this
procedure. Select other circuits and repeat this step to edit additional circuits, as
desired.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Circuits tab of the Duct Bank
editor.
Nominal KV
Specify the nominal KV for the circuit.
Load Factor
Specify a multiplier used to determine the level of conductor loading, according to the

Editing a Model
conductor maximum capacity. A load factor of 1 indicates that the conductors are 100%
loaded.
Click the Copy button to copy the load factor to all other circuits in the duct bank.
Max. Neutral Loading
Specify the maximum percentage of load assigned to the neutral phase.
Click the Copy button to copy the max neutral load values to all other circuits in the duct bank.
Use Max Amp Rating
Select this check box to set a manually applied maximum amp rating for the circuit. When this
option is selected (checked), the specified Rating value is assigned as the circuit’s amp rating
and no derating calculations are performed for the circuit. In turn, this value, rather than a
calculated value, is used during derating calculations for other duct bank circuits, as
applicable.
Loading Constant
Specify the loading constant for the circuit.
Cables
Use this area to select the conductor type for the Phase and Neutral conductors. Cable
ampacity does not support different conductors by phase. For a conductor to appear in the list,
it must be present in your equipment data source and enabled for ampacity studies. For more
information on enabling a conductor, see "Editing a conductor type" on page 375.
Color
Select a color to represent the circuit conductor in the Cable Duct Bank view.
Phasing
Use this area to enable phasing and specify the location of the conductors within the bank. The
Row and Col fields determine which duct contains each phase, and the X and Y fields
determine precise positioning within the duct.
You can also edit these values by dragging conductors in the Cable Duct Bank view.
In a duct bank, the phase positions are represented by numerical values. When you apply a
duct bank to a section, you must also specify a transposition value that assigns your current
phase designations to these positions. For more information on assigning duct banks to
sections, see "Applying duct banks to sections" on page 283.
Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view

The Cable Duct Bank view is a visual tool that you can use to configure your duct banks. It
displays a simulated duct bank cross-section that enables simple drag-and-drop tools to
arrange conductors, establish spacings, and specify depth. It also shows actual derated values
in the legend, which update automatically when a change is made to a bank.

Editing a Model
Cable Duct Bank view graphic window
When you are making changes to a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view, you will notice
that the accompanying values in the bank editor update automatically to reflect the changes
you are making.
Opening the Cable Duct Bank view
Perform the following procedure to open the Cable Duct Bank view.
To open the Cable Duct Bank view
In the Synergi ribbon, select the Capacity tab. In the Ducts group, click Cable Duct Bank.
—or—
In the Warehouse tab of the Synergi model explorer, expand Duct Banks. Right-click on the
duct bank that you want to view and select Duct Bank View.
Working in the Cable Duct Bank view
The Cable Duct Bank view is a graphical interface that simplifies the process of configuring
your conductors, duct spacing, and bank dimensions. Any change you make in the view is

Editing a Model
immediately applied to the duct bank record in memory and the duct bank editor, if you have
it open.
The following list describes the actions that you can perform within the Cable Duct Bank view.
To create a new duct bank
In the Duct Warehouse tab, under Configurations, drag one of the configuration types and
drop it on the view.
To add an existing duct bank to the view
In the Duct Banks tab, drag the desired bank and drop it on the view.
To add a circuit to the bank
In the Duct Banks tab, under Cables, drag the desired conductor type and drop it in a duct. The
Cables list represents all cable conductors in your equipment data source that are enabled for
ampacity studies. If one of your cables is not showing up, it may not be properly enabled in
the Conductor editor. For more information on editing a conductor, see "Editing a conductor
type" on page 375.
To move a conductor to a different duct
With the mouse, click and drag the conductor to the desired duct. Note that Synergi does not
allow accidental overlapping.
To resize the bank
Click on the appropriate bank boundary and drag it to the desired dimension.
To change the bank depth
Click somewhere in the bank (but not on a duct) and drag it to the desired depth. Note that
horizontal dragging is provided for interface convenience and has no effect on ampacity
calculations.
To change duct positions in the bank, as a group
Click on any duct (except the lower right) and drag the ducts to the desired position.
To change duct spacing
Click on the lower right duct and drag it, which alters all spacings proportionally.
To find the derated amperage(s) within the current configuration
Look at the legend. Calculations are performed automatically whenever you make changes. If
the legend shows errors instead of values, you may have some minor configuration problems.
For more information on correcting duct bank configuration problems, see "Troubleshooting
calculation errors shown in the duct bank legend" on page 283.
Zooming in the duct bank view
The easiest means of zooming in and out of the duct bank view is by using a wheel mouse. As
an alternative, you can click the following buttons on the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon.

Editing a Model
Button Function
In Puts the mouse in “zoom in” mode. Click anywhere in the view to
zoom in.
Out Puts the mouse in “zoom out” mode. Click anywhere in the view
to zoom out.
Bounds Zooms the view to the edges of the bank.
Duct bank view display properties
With the display properties, you have control over the coloring, fonts, and patterns of a duct
bank view. To open the display properties editor, you can either:
l In the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click Properties.
—or—
l Double-click in the view somewhere outside of the bank.
If you want any changes to be applied by default to future duct bank views, be sure to check
Save As Defaults before clicking OK.
Direct buried cables in the duct bank view
Cable ampacity studies can include direct buried cables, which can be configured and applied
to sections much like duct banks. The “Direct Buried” setting is found in the Duct Bank tab of
the duct bank editor, as described in "Editing general data for a duct bank" on page 277.
When you are configuring direct buried cables, the Cable Duct Bank view still shows an outline
of a duct bank, using dashed lines. And, Synergi still enforces “duct bank rules,” such as
disallowing the placement of cables outside the “ducts.”
Direct buried cable in the Cable Duct Bank view
Clearly, the concept of a duct bank is not applicable to direct buried cables. However, Synergi
maintains the framework of the duct bank modeling environment to preserve relationships
between the conductors, thereby facilitating ampacity calculations. If you are modeling direct

Editing a Model
buried cables using the Cable Duct Bank view, it is recommended that you place one
conductor per “duct” in a configuration that matches phasing and burial style. For example, if
you want to model a direct buried three-phase cable set, you might use a one-by-three “duct
bank” as shown above.
If you wish to model direct buried cable with conduit, you should create duct banks with the
bank material specified as “Native Ground,” or soil. You should not specify the bank as direct
buried, because Synergi will assume that there is no conduit, and will not permit you to select
a conduit material or thickness.
Troubleshooting calculation errors shown in the duct bank legend
Synergi automatically displays derated amperage values in the legend for each circuit in the
bank. However, certain configuration problems may cause Synergi to display error messages
instead. If you are getting errors, check for the following problems:
l Overlapping conductors. If any conductors overlap, Synergi cannot perform the
calculations. Check your conductor spacing carefully, noting that it is possible for one
conductor to be completely hidden behind another in the view.
l Missing conductor types. If the phase and ground conductors of a circuit are not
assigned a valid conductor type from your equipment data source, Synergi cannot
perform the calculations. In the duct bank editor, check each circuit to ensure that
conductor types are assigned. For more information on the duct bank editor, see
"Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor" on page 277.
Duct bank ampacity report
From the duct bank graphic view, you can produce a duct bank ampacity report by clicking
Ampacity Report on the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon. The report lists all circuits in the
bank with their derated values, as well as detailed information on duct construction and
conductor spacing.
Applying duct banks to sections

Duct banks are applied to sections using the Construction settings in the Section editor. Each
section can only use one particular circuit from a duct bank.
When you apply a duct bank circuit to a section, Synergi uses the cable conductors from that
circuit for impedance calculations, rather than any conductors shown in the Construction tab
of the Section editor. The only part of the Construction tab that remains applicable after
applying a duct bank circuit is the Transposition setting, which is used to assign your phase
designations to the phases 1, 2, and 3 of the duct bank circuit. Be sure to create a name for
the instance field and apply it to all associated sections. Once an instance is created, it is
stored and can be accessed through an options menu. This feature manages data and ties
individual sections together to prepare for the duct bank evaluation. For more information,
see "Duct bank evaluation" on the next page.
When you apply a duct bank to a section, derated amp values are not applied automatically.
To apply the derated values associated with the bank, you must run the duct bank evaluation.
The duct bank evaluation incorporates section derating and has the ability to update section

Editing a Model
ratings from thermal ampacity calculations. It also looks at the thermal loading capacity
based on the current flows in model cables.
Once you have the derated amp value specified in the section record and Synergi set to use it,
you have successfully derated a section using a duct bank. Exceptions related to amperage
will now be based on that derated value. Keep in mind that the derated amp values are not
updated unless you manually run the duct bank evaluation. Therefore, if you make any
changes to your duct bank configurations, you must run the evaluation if you want to update
section derating values in your model.
To apply a duct bank to a section
to edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Construction tab.
3. Under Construction Model, select Duct bank.
4. In the Duct Bank area at the bottom of the editor, use the second option list next to
Instance to select a duct bank from your equipment warehouse that you want to apply
to the section.
5. In the first option list next to Instance, specify an instance name that will be used to tie
individual sections together in preparation for a duct bank evaluation. You can select an
existing instance name or type a new name in the list.
For more information on duct bank instances, see "Duct bank evaluation" below.
6. Next to Ckt, specify the circuit number from the selected duct bank that you want to
apply to the section. Only one circuit from the duct bank can be used on a section.
7. Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Duct bank evaluation

The duct bank evaluation uses loading values from the load-flow analysis on the current
model as ampacity values within a duct bank. The evaluation calculates temperatures at the
core of the hottest cable for each section and finds available capacity on each cable so that a
load increase will not create a thermal overload.
The duct bank evaluation analyzes duct bank instances, which are created in the Construction
tab of the Section editor. When you associate sections with a particular instance, the same
duct bank type, and independent circuit numbers, Synergi constructs duct banks from these
sections and runs the necessary ampacity studies.
Section derating and the duct bank evaluation work together to allow you to update section
ratings from thermal ampacity calculations. You can also look at the thermal loading and
capacity based on the current flows in model cables. For more information, see "About section
derating" on page 286.
Setting up a duct bank evaluation

Certain steps must be taken to properly apply duct banks to your model and perform duct
bank analysis. For more information, see "General steps for Synergi cable analysis" on

Editing a Model
page 271.
Once a duct bank is applied and all components are set up for evaluation, perform the
following procedure to set up the duct bank evaluation.
To set up a duct bank evaluation

2. In the Fundamentals group, select Duct Bank Studies > Settings.
3. Use the Duct Bank Evaluation editor to set up the following options:
l Type of analysis. Select the type of analysis that you want to perform.
l Amps on assigned circuits. Select whether to use maximum or average phase
amps on assigned circuits.
l Amps on unassigned circuits. Select whether to use duct bank or zero loading
on unspecified circuits.
l Neutral loading. Select whether to use neutral loading from the model or from
the duct bank type.
l Updating duct banks. Select how the duct bank type will be updated.
Performing a duct bank evaluation

Perform the following procedure to run a duct bank evaluation. When the evaluation is
complete, the duct bank evaluation report is displayed. This report contains a Run Summary,
a Duct Bank Summary, and a separate chapter for each duct bank. Each duct bank chapter, in
turn, contains the following reports:
l Model loading. This report provides a thermal profile of the duct bank when using the
loading from load-flow analysis.
l Max loading. This report provides the maximum loading that each circuit can reach
without creating a thermal overload.
l Warehouse only. This report provides the ampacity of the duct bank as it exists in the
warehouse.
If a section is unfed during a duct bank evaluation, then the thermal rating from the stand
alone duct bank is used for the results.
To run a duct bank evaluation
1. If you have not already done so, use the Duct Bank Evaluation editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a duct bank
evaluation" on the previous page.
3. In the Fundamentals group, click the Duct Bank Studies icon.

Editing a Model
About section derating

This function of the duct bank evaluation runs automatically with the evaluation and derates
section amperage ratings based on applied cable duct banks, using Synergi cable. It searches
the model for any section with a duct bank applied and updates the amperage rating based on
that bank. For any section with a duct bank applied, section derating populates the Amp Rating
text box in the Properties tab of the Section editor.
In order for this function to apply the amperage rating, these two conditions must be met:
l The section must have a duct bank applied, as described in "Applying duct banks to
sections" on page 283.
l The section must be set to use the amp rating from the duct bank.
If the section has an applied duct bank but the second condition is not met, then the duct bank
evaluation will produce an error message and a value will not be applied to the amp rating.
Editing time-based data

Synergi provides a set of time-related features and tools that have a variety of uses and allow
you to move beyond traditional static, peak-day studies. You can use these tools alone, in
combination, or not at all, depending on your specific needs. As an advanced user of Synergi
time-related features, you will be able to perform detailed time-related studies and multi-
year planning, all with a single model.
Load growth
Load growth acts as a simple multiplier against load. You can specify growth rates at many
levels in Synergi, including sections, feeders, customer zones, and growth curves. Before you
run an analysis, you can select which set of growth rates, if any, you would like to use.
Specific areas where you can set up growth rates in Synergi include the following:
l Feeders. In the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor, feeder growth rates are specified as the
“Load Multiplier”. When enabled, feeder-based growth rates are applied to all sections
owned by the respective feeder.
l Sections. In the Properties tab of the Section editor, section growth rates are specified
as the “% Growth rate/year” value. When enabled, section-based growth rates are
applied to their respective sections only. For more information on the actual multiplier
calculations, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
l Customer zones. In the Customer Zone editor, customer zone growth rates are
specified as the “Zone Growth Rate”. When enabled, customer zone growth rates are
applied to any sections that are within the respective zones. For more information on
the actual multiplier calculations, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
l Growth curves. Growth curves are a collection of annual growth rates that are mostly
used in the multi-year modeling environment. Growth rates may be either positive or
negative, to simulate both growing and declining demand. For more information, see
"Using growth curves" on page 290.

Editing a Model
l Growth Options editor. In the Growth Options editor, you may specify load multipliers
for distributed loads, spot loads, large customers, projects, and speculative loads. Use
a value of zero to simulate the removal of load altogether.
Once you have set up growth rates, you can set up growth groups that configure different
options for applying growth rates to your model. The actual growth rate that is applied can be
selected in the Growth Options editor as well as in the Synergi status bar.
Defining load growth groups

Growth groups allow you to configure different growth rate options that you can apply to your
model. The specific growth group that is used can be selected in both the Growth Options
editor and also the Synergi status bar.
Growth groups allow you to set up the following types of load growth options for your model:
l Load/generation multiplier. This option applies summer and winter multipliers for load
and generation. These multipliers are specified directly in the Growth Options editor.
l Feeder multiplier. This option applies growth rate multipliers that are specified on the
Feeder tab of the Feeder editor.
l Section growth rates. This option applies growth rate multipliers that are specified on
the Properties tab of the Section editor. The growth rate will be applied for the length of
time that is specified in the “Years of growth” area of the Growth Options editor.
l Customer zone growth rates. This option applies growth rate multipliers that are
specified on the customer zones in your model. The growth rate will be applied for the
length of time that is specified in the “Years of growth” area.
l Growth curve growth rates. This option applies the growth rate percentages that are
configured in the growth curves in your model. Growth rates will be applied for the
length of time that is specified in the “Years of growth” area.
l No growth. This option applies no growth rate changes to your model.
To define load growth groups

2. In the Settings group, click Growth.
3. In the Growth Options editor, use the Groups list to define different growth rate options
that can be applied to your model. The group that is selected with a check box will be
the group that is applied when you run a Synergi analysis. The group that is selected by
highlighting the group name is the current group whose settings you can view and edit in
the editor.
4. Perform any of the following tasks to add and delete growth groups:
l To add a group to the list, click the + button.
l To remove a group from the list, select the group (by highlighting the group
name) and click the - button.
5. To edit the settings for a growth group, select the group by highlighting the group name.

Editing a Model
The group settings, which are described in the following table, are displayed on the right
side of the editor. After editing a group, click Apply to apply the changes to the group.
Note that some options described in this table only appear or are only enabled when
specific Growth options are selected.
Description Name of the growth group.
Growth options Select from one of the following options:
l No growth rate. No load growth is applied.

l Apply load/generation multiplier. Applies
specified summer and winter load multipliers for
Load (distributed loads, large customers, projects,
speculative loads, and spot loads) and generation
(batteries, distributed generation/PV, large
customer generation, PQ, PV, and wind).
l Model factors. Applies growth rate using specified
model data, as described in the table rows below.
Model factors Select one of the following options. These options, as well
as other options in this dialog box, will not appear until the
Model Factors option is selected.
l Apply multiplier in feeder record. Applies the

growth rate multipliers that are specified on the
Feeder tab of the Feeder editor.
l Apply yearly growth rate in section records.
Applies the growth rate multipliers that are specified
on the Properties tab of the Section editor. The
growth rate will be applied for the length of time
that is specified in the “Years of growth” area.
l Apply yearly growth rate in customer zone.
Applies the growth rate multipliers that are specified
in the Customer Zone editor for each customer
zone. The growth rate will be applied for the length
of time that is specified in the “Years of growth”
area.
l Apply yearly growth curves with multi-year
model. Applies the growth rate percentages that
are configured in the growth curves in your model.
Growth rates will be applied for the length of time
that is specified in the “Years of growth” area.
For more information on working with growth

Editing a Model
curves, see "Using growth curves" on the next page.
Affected loads Choose the types of load you wish to have affected by the
growth rate. Available choices are follows:
l Grow distributed loads only

l Grow spot loads only
l Grow distributed and spot loads
Years of growth Specifies the number of years that growth rates will be
applied when you select one of the three “Apply yearly
growth” options. Available choices are:
l Grow to analysis year. Growth rates will be

applied from the base year to the current analysis
year.
l Specify years to grow. Growth rates will be
applied starting at the base year and continuing for
the specified number of model years.
Years of growth Select one or both check boxes to apply capacity factors
(multiply kW, for distributed loads and spot loads, respectively, to the
kvar by capacity growth load. For each option, the capacity factor value
factor) that corresponds to the analysis year will be applied.
Cold load pickup Select which cold load pickup values will be applied to
your model. The following options are available:
l Inactive
l 15 minutes
l 30 minutes
l 1 hour
l 2 hours
l 4 hours
l 8 hours
NOTE: Cold load pickup values are created using
customer classes, which in turn are applied to sections in
your model. For more information, see"Editing cold load
pickup percentages for a customer class" on page 303 .
6. Click Apply to apply the changes to the group.

7. Repeat the steps in this procedure to edit additional groups, as required.

Editing a Model
Selecting the active load growth group

The active load growth group can be set from the Growth Options editor and also from the
Synergi status bar. Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To set the active load growth group from the Synergi status bar
On the right-side of the Synergi status bar, expand the list of growth groups and select the
group that you want to apply to your model.
You can also click the > button to edit the currently selected growth group.
To set the active load grown group from the Growth Options editor

3. In the list of growth groups, select the check box next to the growth group that you want
to apply to your model. The change will be applied immediately, as reflected in the
Synergi status bar; you do not need to click the Apply button.
Using growth curves

A growth curve is a set of annual growth rates that you can assign to sections as a zone. Each
year has an independent growth rate, so you can use a growth curve in multi-year modeling to
simulate trends such as an area that may grow quickly for the next few years and then
saturate.
Use the following process to set up and apply growth curves to your model:
1. Use the Growth Curves editor to create various growth curves for your model. For more
information, see "Creating a growth curve" below and "Editing a growth curve" on the
facing page.
2. Use the Zones tab of the Section editor to apply growth curves to the sections in your
model. For more information, see "Applying growth curves to sections" on page 292.
3. Use the Growth Options editor to use growth curves with your model analyses. For more
information, see "Configuring Synergi to use growth curves" on page 292.
Growth curves have the most value when used in a multi-year modeling environment, but you
can also use them to apply growth spatially in a single-year modeling environment. For more
information, see "Using growth curves in a multi-year environment" on page 293 and "Using
growth curves in a single-year environment" on page 294.
Creating a growth curve

Perform the following procedure to create a new growth curve in your model.
To create a growth curve

2. Right-click and select New Device > Growth Curve.

Editing a Model
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new growth curve and then click
OK.
4. Use the Growth Curve editor to edit the settings for the growth curve. For more
information, see "Editing a growth curve" below.
Editing a growth curve

To edit a growth curve, double-click the growth curve name in the Warehouse tab of the
button that is located next to the name of the selected growth curve.
To edit a growth curve

2. Expand Growth Curves and then double-click the name of the growth curve that you
want to edit.
3. Use the Growth Curve editor to edit the following options:
Description Optional description for the growth curve.
Color Select a color to represent sections that have been

assigned to this growth curve when you color the map by
growth curves settings. For more information on coloring
the map, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
Growth Rate Use the growth rate chart to specify a growth rate for
each analysis year. If desired, you can click the Toggle
button to change the graph to a table that you can also
use to enter the yearly growth rates.
Keep in mind that you are specifying percentages, and

not flat multipliers like other growth rates in Synergi. For
example, a value of 2.0 signifies a 2% growth rate. You
can enter a value from -5 to 10 for each growth rate
year.
Deleting a growth curve

Perform the following procedure to delete a growth curve from your model.
To delete a growth curve

2. Expand Growth Curves and then select the name of the growth curve that you want to
delete.

Editing a Model

Applying growth curves to sections

To use growth curves in your model, you must apply them to sections. Refer to the following
To apply a growth curve to a section
to edit.
3. Next to Growth Curve, select the name of the growth curve that you want to assign to
the section.
TIP: If you have multiple sections to assign, you may find it more convenient to use
the Multiple Editor. For more information, see "Using the Multiple Editor" on
page 253.
Configuring Synergi to use growth curves

After you have created growth curves and assigned those growth curves to the sections in
your model, you must configure Synergi to use the growth curves. This is done in the Growth
Options editor.
To configure Synergi to use growth curves

3. On the left side of the Growth Options editor, select the check box next to the name of
the Growth group that you want to apply to the model. To use a new Growth group, click
the + button and then select the check box for the new Growth group.
4. In addition to selecting the check box, you must also highlight the name of the Growth
group. The selected check box specifies which Growth group is applied to the model; the
highlighted Growth group name specifies which Growth group you are editing in the
Growth Options editor.
5. With the Growth group selected and highlighted, select Apply load/generation
multiplier, and then Model factors, and then Apply yearly growth curves with
multi-year model.
6. Under Years of growth, set the number of years over which to apply the growth
curve.
7. Refer to "Selecting the active load growth group" on page 290 for information on
additional fields that you can set in the Growth Options editor.

Editing a Model
Using growth curves in a multi-year environment

Growth rates in a growth curve function as flat multipliers against load. For example, if you
have Synergi operating in “Year 4,” analyses will use the Year 4 load multiplied by the Year 4
growth rate.
Growth curves also support a non-linear projection of future growth. Synergi applies future
growth rates in a cumulative fashion, according to the “Years of growth” that is configured in
the Growth Options editor. To illustrate this concept, consider a scenario where the growth
rates are set to the following percentages for a particular growth curve:
Year Growth rate
2014 5%
2015 10%
2016 15%
2017 10%
2018 5%
2019 2%
2020 1%
To demonstrate how these rates would work, assume that you have this growth curve applied
to a section and the interface is set to 2017. The following table demonstrates how different
growth years could affect growth rate application:
Number of Effect on section load

years
0 No growth applied.
1 Growth rate for 2017 only, applied to 2017 load (10%).
2 Growth rates for 2017 and 2018 progressively applied to 2017 load
(10%, and then 5%).
3 Growth rates for 2017, 2018, and 2019 progressively applied to 2017
load (10%, and then 5%, and then 2%)
If multiple years of growth are applied, the rates are applied in progression. For example, if
the three rates 10%, 5%, and 2% were applied to a load, the general formula would be:
(load) * 1.1 * 1.05 * 1.02
Equation 3-1.

Editing a Model
Synergi never looks backward for load or rate information. It always starts with the current
year’s load and the current rate, and may apply future rates depending on the “Years of
growth” setting. For example, in the previous example, growth rates for the years prior to
2017 would not be used.
Using growth curves in a single-year environment

Growth curves have the most value in a multi-year modeling environment, but they can still
be used in a single-year environment. For example, you could do the following:
1. Define your growth curves with only the first year (base year) rate specified.
2. Apply growth curves to sections.
3. Configure the Growth Options editor to use growth curves, specifying the “Years of
growth” as 1.
In this scenario, the growth curve functions like a section-level growth rate.
Customer load curves/time-of-day analysis

Synergi supports the modeling of loads using 24-hour daily load curves. By creating and
applying load curves, you can conduct much more comprehensive analyses than with
traditional peak loading alone. With daily load curves, you can study your system on- or off-
peak, at a chosen hour, day, and month. For example, you could study your system at peak
loading or at minimum loading for an upcoming season. Or, you could study the trends in load
movement across or between feeders during the daylight hours of a weekday in July.
Load curves are optional. If you do not specifically use them, by default your studies will be
traditional peak load in nature, and load curves will be non-applicable and largely invisible.
However, if you do use load curves, be aware that they integrate at a fundamental level. Most
Synergi applications will consider load curves and the time-of-day that you select for analysis.
For more information on enabling load curves and setting the time-of-day for analysis, see
"Enabling load curves" on the facing page.
If you use load curves, you should first have a properly allocated model. While you can model
your loads on your sections the “normal” way, through load allocation of peak values, it is
preferable to allocate with consideration of time-of-day instead. For more information, see
"Load curves and load allocation" on the facing page.
For more information on load curve calculations, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Getting started with load curves/time-of-day

Implementing load curves requires multiple steps, due to the tier fashion in which the data is
organized. To fully implement load curves, you should follow these basic steps:
1. Decide how you are going to create your curves, in regards to a data source. You have a
variety of options, including the following:
l Use existing curve or usage data. If you have existing data that represents 24-
hour usage trends, you might use this to create your Synergi load curves. This
data could be input manually in Synergi, or you could construct a method of

Editing a Model
importing the data directly into your equipment data source. Your methods would
depend on the amount of data you have and your level of IT support and/or data
management resources.
l Use traditional or hypothetical load shapes. By making educated judgment of your
system and its demands, you could use Synergi to create load curves that follow
common usage trends, perhaps found in other reference material.
l Build curves from scratch. If you have a good idea of specific usage trends in your
system, you could build your own customized curves directly in Synergi.
However, this process could be time-consuming, depending on how many curves
you need to create. Synergi does provide some tools to make the process quicker,
including curve copy/paste and automatic curve extrapolation. You can find these
tools in the Customer Class editor, as described in "Editing a customer class" on
page 299.
2. In Synergi, establish your load curves by creating customer classes, which are stored
as equipment data. For more information, see "Customer classes" on page 298.
3. With customer classes established, combine them to create customer zones, which are
also stored as equipment data. For more information, see "Customer zones" on
page 305.
4. Apply customer zones to sections. For more information, see "Applying customer zones
to sections in the model" on page 307.
5. Allocate load with consideration of time-of-day. For more information, see "Load curves
and load allocation" below.
6. Establish a time-of-day for analysis and run analyses. For more information, see
"Enabling load curves" below.
Enabling load curves

To enable load curves, you only need to specify a time-of-day for analysis. Time-of-day
specification is done on the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, as
described in "Editing time of day settings" on page 506.
When you specify a time-of-day, you have the option of selecting a specific date, which can
include a year. Note that this year is not applicable to multi-year modeling/analysis. If you
are performing analyses in a multi-year environment, the only year that affects multi-year
data is the year that the interface is set to. For more information on multi-year modeling, see
"Multi-year modeling" on page 73.
The current time-of-day is not conspicuous anywhere in the interface, other than in the Time
and Weather Options editor. Analysis reports do indicate if a current time-of-day is active, but
you should always remain aware of the current setting because the usage of load curves can
have a significant impact on results.
Load curves and load allocation

If you intend to perform time-of-day analyses, you should first properly allocate load.
Synergi’s load allocation engine can fully consider time-of-day and can be an important step
toward accurate time-related analysis. While you can perform time-of-day studies on a model
allocated at traditional peak load values, the results may be less realistic.

Editing a Model
For more information on load allocation, see "Load allocation analysis" on page 580. For
information on the results produced during time-sensitive allocation, see "Understanding
time-sensitive allocation results" below.
Choosing the time to allocate load
In theory, you can choose to allocate load at any time, provided that the following are true:
l You have accurate metered demands information for that time.
l Your curves are accurate and properly applied.
When you allocate, Synergi uses curve values at that particular time point to calculate peak
distributed load. This distributed load, then, should be appropriate for any other time-of-day
as well. For more information on how these calculations are performed, see "Understanding
time-sensitive allocation results" below.
If possible, it is generally recommended to select a time of peak loading for allocation, based
on your judgment. That is, you should determine a day and hour of overall peak loading, and
specify that time in the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, as described in
"Editing time of day settings" on page 506. You should not use the automatic “Peak load time
on peak day” option, because this option refers to analyses conducted after allocation and
evaluates existing distributed load only.
It is important to understand that no method is absolutely correct for every situation. When
you use load curves, many layers of data and mathematics are working simultaneously and
you must employ your best judgment to use them responsibly. It may take several iterations
of allocation and test analyses to ensure that your setup is appropriate. For example, if you
allocate at a self-determined time of peak load, you might run load-flow analyses afterward
to see if Synergi agrees with the time you selected and produces reasonable numbers. To do
so, in the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, select the “Peak load time on
peak day” option, run a load-flow analysis, and observe the time indicated on the report.
Preparing the model for time-sensitive allocation
In general, you should not need to perform any major preparations for time-sensitive
allocations. Before allocating, though, be sure that:
l All load curves/classes/zones are fully established and assigned as appropriate.
l Metered demands at sources and elsewhere accurately reflect the particular time-of-
day you choose for allocation.
Depending on your workflow, you may find demands subsets much more convenient for
configuring demands, rather than manual work in the Synergi editors. For more information,
see "Using subsets" on page 153.
Understanding time-sensitive allocation results
One of the primary challenges of time-sensitive allocation is understanding the results. To

perform effective time-sensitive allocation, you should have a good understanding of the
Synergi methodology behind it.

Editing a Model
When you allocate at a certain time-of-day, Synergi still attempts to allocate peak load
through extrapolation of the current load curve settings and demands. In essence, Synergi
regards the specified demands as specific to the current load curve percentages and attempts
to derive a peak load from them, section by section. For this reason, allocation results may
initially appear significantly higher when performing time-sensitive allocations, and this is
normally correct.
For example, assume that you have a feeder with a total of 1000 kVA in specified demands at
the source via meter, and an equal 1000 ckVA in transformer load. If you allocate without a
time-of-day setting, that is, traditional peak load/demand, you would probably see close to
1000 kVA of total allocation, minus line loss and other factors. However, if you allocate using
a time-of-day when the average usage is around 50%, you could expect to see twice the
amount allocated. This is because Synergi extrapolates the peak load by using the load curve
percentages “in reverse,” and assigns those values to sections. In this manner, allocated load
should be appropriate then for any time-of-day, while allocated more accurately than through
a time-insensitive peak load/demand allocation. Also, this is why it is important that your
demands are accurate for the particular time-of-day. In the previous example, if 1000 kVA
represents peak demand, your specified demands for time-sensitive allocation at 50% should
be closer to 500 kVA, which will keep your results more realistic in comparison to peak-load,
time-insensitive allocation.
When viewing time-sensitive allocation results, you must always keep in mind that the
numbers are somewhat meaningless outside of the context of applied load curves. When
evaluating the numbers, look at them from the perspective of curve percentages when the
allocation was performed, and recognize that in the end, you are still looking at peak loading
that was calculated based on those percentages. If the numbers are still too high, you likely
have data problems, either with your curve data, or perhaps your demands are too high for
the specified time.
For detailed information on the calculations performed during time-sensitive allocation, see
the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Handling the model after time-sensitive allocation
After you have allocated, you should be able to run time-sensitive analyses at will, using the
Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor to configure the time-of-day as desired.
If the allocation was performed correctly, you should not need to allocate again unless your
model is updated with new load or demand data.
As noted elsewhere, however, be sure that you do not use the model for traditional, time-
insensitive studies unless you reallocate with that method. That is, before performing an
analysis with the “Ignore time of day” option selected, you should reallocate with that option,
using peak feeder/subtran demands.
Load curves and large customers

With a large customer, you can specify a separate customer zone for the load component and
the generation component. In the Large Customer editor, the zone is referred to as
“scheduling.” When you apply a customer zone to the generation component of a large
customer, it functions similarly to a load, except that it controls the percentage of generation

Editing a Model
capacity, rather than a load. For more information on large customers, see "Large customers"
on page 428.
Load curve summary

Customer load curves, zones, and so on are analytically straightforward in Synergi. Their
handling and the data used to generate them can have tremendous impacts on engineering
studies. Their use can provide valuable insight into the best overall operation of a distribution
system.
In summary:
l The use of load curves is optional. By default, they are not used. For more information
on enabling the use of load curves, see "Enabling load curves" on page 295.
l Loads should be allocated once using known demands at a known time point. After
allocating, applications such as load-flow can be run at different time points. The quality
of the load models at other time points depends on the quality of the customer load
curves and the formulation of customer zones. For more information, see "Load curves
and load allocation" on page 295.
l Billing data is important to the formulation of load curves and the formulation of zones.
For advanced users, it is possible to construct load data completely outside of Synergi
without the use of load allocation at all. External load data can then be imported into
Synergi, perhaps by use of subsets. For more information on subsets, see "Using
subsets" on page 153.
Customer classes
A customer class stores your basic load curve data. A customer class consists of at least 36
curves, including a percent kW curve for a weekday, weekend, and peak day for each of the
twelve months in a year. In addition, you can optionally specify another 36 curves for percent
kvar.
Synergi’s Customer Class editor can help you create, view, copy, and modify curves in a
customer class. Customer classes are stored in your equipment data source and can be
managed through the Warehouse tab of the model explorer.
Creating a customer class

Perform the following procedure to create a new customer class in your model.
To create a customer class

2. Right-click and select New Device > Customer Class.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new customer class and then
click OK.
4. Use the Customer Class editor to edit the settings for the customer class. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a customer class" on the facing
page.

Editing a Model
Creating a customer class is identical to creating any zone or equipment type. For more
information, see "Creating a device type" on page 397.
Editing a customer class

To edit a customer class, double-click the customer class name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Customer Zone editor, you can also click the edit button
that is located next to the name of a selected customer class.
To edit a customer class

2. Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that
you want to edit.
3. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the
customer class. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Editing load curves for a customer class" below
l "Editing class information for a customer class" on page 301
l "Editing coincidence factors for a customer class" on page 302
l "Editing cold load pickup percentages for a customer class" on page 303
l "Editing economic data for a customer class" on page 304
Editing load curves for a customer class
A customer class can have up to 96 individual load curves associated with it, including Minday,
Peakday, Weekday, and Weekend load curves for each month in the year for both kW and
kvar load curves, depending on how your options are set. All of these load curves are created
in the Load Curves tab of the Customer Class editor. A customer class load curve can be
associated for use with either customer zones or with generators, large customer generators,
and section distribution transformer generators.
You can create and edit each curve individually, by selecting the appropriate Day Type and
Month and then editing the hourly load percentage values in either a graph or a table-based
format. You can also create a curve and then use the Copy and Paste buttons to copy that
curve to other Day Types and Months, as appropriate.
To edit customer class load curves

you want to edit.
3. In the Customer Class editor, select the Load Curves tab.
4. Use the Load and Gen option buttons to select which type of Synergi feature you want
the customer class load curve to be associated with.

Editing a Model
l Load. The load curve will be available for use with customer zones.
l Gen. The load curve will be available for use with generators, large customer
generators, and section distribution transformer generators.
5. Select the month and day type for the first load curve that you want to edit. If enabled,
select the kW or kvar option button to specify whether you are creating a curve for real
or reactive power. (These two option buttons are enabled only when you have selected
the “Customer load based on kW and kvar curves” option on the Information tab of the
editor.)
6. The graph in the Customer Class editor provides average hourly load percentages for
the selected day type and month. Click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location
to set the new value. The current value is shown in a text popup that appears over top of
the graph.
l Use the Pf (%) text box to set the Pf percentage for the selected Day Type and
Month. (This text box is enabled only when you have selected the “Customer load
based on kW and pf curves” option on the Information tab of the editor.)
enter the hourly load percentage values.
Toggle button
l Click the Shift Left and Shift Right buttons to shift the hourly load percentage
values for every curve in the customer class by one hour in either direction. Note
that these two buttons affect all curves, and not just the one curve that you are
currently viewing.
Shift Left and Shirt Right buttons
l Click the Copy button to copy the values from the current curve that you are
viewing. You can then select a different Day Type or Month and then click the
Paste button to apply the copied load curve to the newly selected day type and
month.
Copy and Paste buttons
l Click the Create Scaled Load Curves button to generate curves for the entire

Editing a Model
year, including all months and all day types, based on the curve you are currently
viewing. In the Customer Class Curve Manager editor, adjust the chart to provide
a multiplier value to adjust the curves for each of the remaining 11 months. Set
the multiplier at 1.0 to create an exact duplicate of the current curve for each
specified month.
Created Scaled Load Curves button
7. Repeat these steps to edit the load curve data for each Day Type and Month in your
profile.
Editing class information for a customer class
Perform the following procedure to edit class information for a customer class.
To edit class information for a customer class

you want to edit.
3. In the Customer Class editor, select the Information tab. The options that you can edit
are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Information tab of the Customer
Class editor.
Description
Optional description for the customer class.
Curve Basis
Species the criteria on which the load curves are based. The following options are available:
l Customer load based on kW and kvar curves. If you select this option, you will
need to specify individual curves for real and reactive power demand in the Load Curves
tab of the Customer Class editor.
l Customer load based on kW and pf curves. If you select this option, the Pf (%)
text box in the Load Curves tab of the Customer Class editor is activated, and you must
specify curves for the real component only.
For more information on editing customer load curves, see "Editing load curves for a
customer class" on page 299.
Calculate peaks from load curves
Select this check box to have Synergi summer and winter peak values from the load curves

Editing a Model
defined for the customer curve. If the check box is cleared, Synergi will use the factors that
you define here for summer and winter months.
Non-Time of day load multipliers
Use these fields to set kW Load and kvar Load factors based on a percentage of the peak
load. These values are used when time of day modeling is turned off.
Weather settings
Use these fields to set monthly weather load factors. For more information on these weather-
related options, see "Modeling weather using weather profiles" on page 260.
Load model
Use these fields to set the Current, Impedance, and Power values for the load.
Editing coincidence factors for a customer class
The demand created by two or more customers is normally less than the sum of their
individual demands because the peak demand for each customer occurs at a different time.
For example, one customer’s peak demand may occur in the early morning and another
customer’s peak may occur in the early evening. Peak load (demand) per customer drops as
more customers are added to the group.
In Synergi, the coincidence factor is a function of the number of customers in the customer
class, and is specified on the Coincidence tab of the Customer Class editor. You can specify
the coincidence factor for the following numbers of customers:
l 2
l 4
l 6
l 8
l 10
l 15
l 20
l 30
l 50
l 100
l 1000
l 10000
Further details are provided in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
To edit coincidence factors for a customer class

you want to edit.

Editing a Model
3. In the Customer Class editor, select the Coincidence tab. Use the graph to specify the
coincidence factor for each specified number of customers. Click any bar in the graph
and drag it to a new location to set the new value. The current value is shown in a text
popup that appears next to the graph when you hover over a bar. You can also click the
Toggle button to change the graph to a table that you can also use to enter the
coincidence factors.
Toggle button, Customer Class editor
Editing cold load pickup percentages for a customer class
Cold load pickup refers to the increased currents encountered when re-energizing a circuit
after an extended outage. The short-term increase in currents, due to loss of load diversity
and feeder inrush, can require accommodation in the protective relay settings, or affect
performance of the protection scheme.
In Synergi, you can edit cold load settings on the Cold Load tab of the Customer Class editor.
You can specify summer and winter percentages for the following time intervals:
l 15 minutes
l 30 minutes
l 1 hour
l 2 hours
l 4 hours
l 8 hours
For each time interval, specify the percentage of current that is encountered after an outage
event occurs. For example, specify 115% if the current has increased by 15% at a specified
time interval. Enter 100% if there is no change in the current.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on editing the cold load pickup
percentages. Once you have configured these values, you can apply them to Synergi in the
Growth Options editor. For more information, see "Selecting the active load growth group" on
page 290.
To edit cold load pickup percentages for a customer class

you want to edit.
3. In the Customer Class editor, select the Cold Load tab. The two graphs provide cold
load pickup percentages at specified time periods for summer and winter months. Click
any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location to set the new value. The current

Editing a Model
value is shown in a text popup that appears next to the graph when you hover over a
bar.You can also click the Toggle button to change the graph to a table that you can also
use to enter the summer and winter cold load pickup percentages.
Toggle button, Customer Class editor
Editing economic data for a customer class
Perform the following procedure to edit economic data for a customer class.
To edit economic data for a customer class

you want to edit.
3. In the Customer Class editor, select the Economics tab. The options that you can edit
are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Economics tab of the Customer
Class editor.
Outage costs
Use the following fields to set outage costs for when service is interrupted:
l Outage Cost
l Sustained Interrupt Cost
l Momentary Interrupt Cost
Deleting a customer class

Perform the following procedure to delete a customer class from your model.
To delete a customer class

2. Expand Customer Classes and then select the name of the customer class that you
want to delete.

Editing a Model
Customer zones
Once you have set up customer classes, as described in "Customer classes" on page 298, you
are ready to define customer zones. Customer zones are essentially a mixture of up to three
customer classes in specified proportions that determine how much of a section’s spot and
distributed load pertain to each class. Once established, customer zones can be applied to the
sections in a model using the Section editor.
Customer zones serve as an intermediary between the raw load curve data and the model.
This intermediate step is necessary to avoid detailed and granular curve data at the section
level. It would be burdensome to apply customer classes and percentages at the section level
for an entire model. The concept of customer zones makes the process much simpler,
consolidating load curves into a single data item that can be applied at the section level. And,
because proximal distribution loads tend to have a similar customer makeup, customer zones
make it convenient to populate the same curve data to large regions of your model. Consider
the following diagram, with three hypothetical zones sketched on it.
Customer zones sketched on a sample model
Ideally, a system should be divided into zones based on the approximate demand or usage of
various customer types. For example, the zone on the left may be a mixture of approximately
30% all-electric customers and 70% gas heat customers, while the zone on the right may be
100% all-electric customers.
Customer zone assignments are optional and can be assigned independently to sections for
spot loads and distributed loads. If a customer zone is not specified on a section for either or
both load types, then nominal kW and kvar is used, as applicable.
Creating a customer zone

Perform the following procedure to create a new customer zone in your model.

Editing a Model
To create a customer zone

2. Right-click and select New Device > Customer Zone.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new customer zone and then
click OK.
4. Use the Customer Zone editor to edit the settings for the customer zone. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a customer zone" below.
Editing a customer zone

To edit a customer zone, double-click the customer zone name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Load - Dist and Load - Spot tabs of the Section editor, you
can also click the edit button that is located next to the name of the selected customer zones,
if applied.
To edit a customer zone

2. Expand Zones - Customer and then double-click the name of the customer zone that
you want to edit.
3. Use the Customer Zone editor to edit the settings for the customer zone. The options
that you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options that you can edit from the Customer Zone editor.
Description
Optional description for the customer zone.
Customer Class
Select up to three customer classes to apply to the customer zone, and specify a percentage
of that class that will be applied to the zone. As you change the percentage for one class, the
percentages of the other classes will be modified automatically be modified to always total
100%.
For more information on customer classes, see "Customer classes" on page 298.
Composite Load Curve (read-only)
Displays a read-only view of the combined customer class load curves for the selected Day
Type and Month. The curve in this read-only view will change as you apply different customer
zones and change the percentages that are applied to each zone.
Zone Growth Rate
Specify a load growth rate for the customer zone, which can be enabled for your analyses
using the Growth Options editor. For more information, see "Selecting the active load growth
group" on page 290.

Editing a Model
Color
Select a color to represent sections that have been assigned to this customer zone when you
color the map by customer zones settings. For more information on coloring the map, see
"Theme map settings" on page 98.
Applying customer zones to sections in the model

Customer zones can be applied to sections directly by using the Section editor or in bulk by
using the Multiple Editor. Refer to the following procedures for more information.
To apply customer zones to sections using the Section editor
to edit.
2. Perform the following steps to apply customer zones to your model:
To ... Do This ...
Apply a customer a. In the Section editor, select the Load - Dist tab.
zone to distributed b. Select the Use Customer Zone check box.
loads
c. Use the customer zone options list to select the
name of the customer zone that you want to apply to
the section for distributed loads.
For more information on working in the Load - Dist tab,

see "Load Dist tab – Section editor" on page 352.
Apply a customer a. In the Section editor, select the Load - Spot tab.
zone to spot loads b. Select the Use Customer Zone check box.
c. Use the customer zone options list to select the
name of the customer zone that you want to apply to
the section for spot loads.
For more information on working in the Load - Spot tab,

see "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on page 357.
To apply a global customer zone to all sections in your model

3. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Model tab.
4. Under Default global customer zone, select the corresponding check boxes to apply
a default customer zone for distributed loads and spot loads in your model. The selected
global customer zone will be used for any section where the “Use customer zone” check

Editing a Model
box (in the Load - Dist and Load - Spot tabs of the Section editor) is selected but a
specific customer zone name is not selected.
To apply customer zones to sections using the Multiple Editor
1. To use the Multiple Editor on a subset of your model data only, build a query set that
includes the sections and equipment that you want to edit. For more information, see
"Using the query set" on page 249.
—or—
To use the Multiple Editor on the entire model, make sure that the query set is empty.

3. In the Query group, click Multiple Editor.
4. Along the top of the Multiple Editor, click the Zones button.
5. On the left side of the Multiple Editor, select Customer.
6. Use the check boxes on the right side of the Multiple Editor to select the actions that you
want to perform for both distributed and spot load modeling.
The available actions are as follows:
l Change Zone Usage Status. Select this check box to enable, disable, or toggle
the status of the “Use Customer Zone” check box for the queried sections.
l Change Customer Zones. Select this check box to apply a selected customer
zone to the queried sections.
l Change I, Z, PQ Status. Select this check box to enable, disable, or toggle the
status of the “Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes” check box for the
queried sections.
7. Click OK to apply the changes to the model and close the Multiple Editor.
For additional information on working in the Multiple Editor, see "Using the Multiple
Editor" on page 253.
Deleting a customer zone

Perform the following procedure to delete a customer zone from your model.
To delete a customer zone

2. Expand Zones - Customer and then select the name of the exposure zone that you
want to delete.

Editing a Model
DER profiles
A DER profile allows you to set hourly, percentage-based generation output levels for each
month in the year. Positive profile values can be used to represent PV generation, while
negative values can be used to represent battery charging and storage.
DER profiles can be used to represent the generator output on generator instances, large
customers, and section-based distributed generation.
To edit a DER profile
1. From the Synergi model explorer, select the Warehouse tab and then expand
DER Profiles.
2. Double-click the name of the DER profile that you want to edit.
3. In the DER Profile editor,in the list of months, select the month for the profile data that
you want to edit.
NOTE: To have all months use the same profile, select the All months are the
same check box.
4. The graph in the DER Profile editor provides hourly generation values for the selected
month. To edit a value, click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location. The
current value is shown in a text popup that appears next to the graph, and the average
value for the entire month is listed in the upper-right corner of the editor.
enter the hourly weather percentages.
Toggle button
l Click the Add and Subtract buttons to shift the hourly weather percentages by
one percent in either direction.
Add and Subtract buttons
l Click the Copy button to copy the percentages from the current month to all other
months in the profile.
Copy button

Editing a Model
l If you are editing an irradiance profile, click the Generate Irradiance Curves
button to generate curves automatically for the entire year, including all months,
based on the Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude values that are specified on the Map
tab of the Preferences editor.
Generate Irradiance Curves button
Viewing model data

Synergi provides several specialized tools that you can use to view model data. Refer to the
topics listed below for more information.
Organizer
The Organizer provides access to all of the data in your model and all of Synergi’s functions
without the graphic “overhead” of a map display. The Organizer is essentially an alternate
way to work with your model, allowing you to view more data at one time, thus saving you
time as you view attributes and edit model properties.
All Synergi users have access to the Organizer, but users with an especially large model and
database may find it most helpful when running more complex analyses that tend to take
longer to generate. All ribbon tabs and analysis options can be used in the exact same way as
the map display. You can double-click on any device name in the Organizer window to open
the associated device editor. Organizer columns can be sorted and filtered to show only the
data that you need to see.
The Organizer includes three subtabs that are located to the left side of the Organizer window:
l Model Wide. The Model Wide tab allows you to view all feeders and equipment in your
model, regardless of whether they are selected. You can view a summary of your model
data by selecting the “Model wide metrics” and “Settings” branches of the Model Wide
tab’s tree view. Specific details can be viewed by selecting the Network, Paths,
Facilities, Section Lists, Facility Lists, and Zones branches.
l Selection. The Selection tab shows the feeders and equipment that are currently
selected in the standard model. Specific details can be viewed by selecting the Network,
Facilities, Section Lists, Paths, and Facility Lists branches.
l Issues. The Issues tab shows potential data problems in your model. Specific details
can be viewed by selecting the Issues, Connectivity, Bad Types, Loads, and Exceptions
branches.
In addition, you can open additional Organizer tabs within the main Organizer view, in case
you want to toggle quickly between different views of the data in your model. These Organizer
tabs are located along the right side of the Organizer view. You can add tabs and remove tabs
by clicking the respective buttons in the Synergi ribbon.

Editing a Model
To work in the Organizer view

2. In the Views group, click Organizer.
3. On the left side of the Organizer window, select the Model Wide, Selection, and
Issues subtabs, and then associated options in the Organizer tree view, to view
different categories of data in your model.
4. Use the right-click menu to access shortcuts for interacting with the devices and
sections in your model. The following table describes many of the options that are
available.
Right-Click Description
Option
Delete Deletes the device or section.
Pan To Pans to the location of a device or section in the map

display.
Zoom To Zooms to the location of a device or section in the map

display.
Zoom Feeder Zooms to the location of a device’s or section’s feeder in

the map display.
Toggle Query Toggles the status of the associated section in the Query
tab.
Edit Opens the Synergi editor for the device or section. (You can
also double-click a device or section name to open the
Synergi editor.)
Turn On/Off Turns the associated device on or off.
Open/Close Opens or closes the associated device.

Device
Add to TCC Sends the associated device to the TCC window.
Link Open the location link that is associated with a device. (If
no location link is set up for the device, the Link option will
be disabled.)
Change ID Changes the ID of a section.
Set for Analysis Sets the section for analysis.

Editing a Model
Right-Click Description
Option
Charts/Reports Sends the section to a chart or report, such as the Rap

Sheet or a Voltage Plot.
Open in Excel Sends the current Organizer window data to an Excel

spreadsheet.
InfoPanel
The Synergi InfoPanel is a comprehensive reporting mechanism for topology, construction,
and data issues in your model. The InfoPanel is divided into three subreports, which are
indicated by tabs at the bottom of the report explorer area, on the left side of the InfoPanel
window. Each subreport is divided into different report chapters, which are represented by the
tree view in the report explorer area.

Editing a Model
InfoPanel
The InfoPanel report also includes some standard tools that you will be familiar with from the
Synergi model explorer. As shown above, you can change the analysis year and also turn on
or off the auto-generation of reports. Toolbar buttons at the bottom of the report allow you to
perform tasks such as printing reports and exporting report data to Excel.
To view the InfoPanel report

2. In the Views group, click InfoPanel.
Check Data report

The Check Data report includes the following report chapters:
l Totals. The Totals chapter lists the total number of errors, warnings, fixes, and
messages that were found for the model data in memory. These data categories are
described in the “Problems” report below.
l Problems. The Problems chapter evaluates the model data in memory for topological
errors and data mismatches. Errors that are found are grouped into the following
categories:
o Errors. Errors are problems that are severe enough to prevent certain analyses
from running.
o Warnings. Warnings are problems that may affect the accuracy of analyses, but
probably will not prohibit you from performing an analysis.
o Fixes. Fixes are temporary fixes that Synergi would assign if an analysis were run
with the model in its current condition. These fixes are for reference use only.
They are not actually applied to the model in memory or on disk during the check
data process.
o Messages. Messages provide information that you should be aware of, but will not
necessarily affect the accuracy of analyses.
l Warehouse (missing items). The Warehouse report provides a summary of any
equipment types that are referenced by the model data in memory but missing from the
currently loaded equipment data.
Facilities report
The Facilities report includes the following report chapters:
l Inventory. The Inventory chapter provides a complete inventory of the facilities in the
model, including certain key data about each facility.
l Loads. The Loads chapter provides a summary of the model’s loads, including
distributed loads, spot loads, large customer loads, and project loads.
l Prot. Curve Defs. The Protection Curve Definitions chapter provides a detailed view of
all curves contained in the Synergi protection database. The report includes items such
as model numbers, ratings, and curve types for each item in the database.

Editing a Model
Topology report
The Topology report provides a comprehensive look at your model from a topology and
connectivity standpoint.
Rap Sheets
Rap sheets provide simple information on specific devices or sections in the model. You can
open the Rap Sheet editor from the Tools tab in the Synergi ribbon. However, in most cases
you will want to display a rap sheet directly from a specific device or section. You can do this
by right-clicking on the device or section name and selecting the desired rap sheet type. Each
rap sheet (with the exception of Voltage Plots) is added to the list area in the Rap Sheet
editor. You can use the Rap Sheet editor to zoom to a selected device or section, remove a
single rap sheet from the list, or clear all rap sheets from the list. You can also open a
selected rap sheet in WordPad.
The topics listed below provide more information on the different rap sheets that are available
in Synergi.
Details rap sheet

The Details rap sheet provides a brief report on a specific device or section in the model.
Details rap sheet

Editing a Model
To create a Details rap sheet
In the Synergi map display, right-click on the device or section and select Rap Sheet >
Details.
—or—
In the TCC explorer or TCC graph, right-click on the device ID or curve and select Rap Sheet.
Voltage Plot rap sheet

The Voltage Plot rap sheet provides a voltage plot chart for a given section or piece of
equipment.
Voltage Plot rap sheet
To create a Voltage Plot rap sheet
Voltage Plot.

Editing a Model
Arc Flashover rap sheet

The Arc Flashover rap sheet provides a quick look at Arc Flashover data in a more condensed
format than the Arc Flashover analysis. The rap sheet data only covers the selected section,
rather than the entire map as covered in the Arc Flashover analysis.
Information on Synergi’s Arc Flashover analysis feature is provided in "Arc flashover" on
page 644.
Arc Flashover rap sheet
To create an Arc Flashover rap sheet
In the Synergi map display, right-click on the device or section and select Rap Sheet > Arc
Flashover.
Fault rap sheet

The Fault rap sheet provides Fault Analysis data for a device or section in your model.

Editing a Model
Fault rap sheet
To create a Fault rap sheet
Fault.
Feeder Browser
The Feeder Browser is a stand-alone Synergi window that shows selected device types for
individual feeders in your model. To use the Feeder Browser, you first select the feeder that
you want to view, and then you select the device category that you want to view for the
selected feeder, such as All switches, Large customers, or PV generators. Other options are
available from the Feeder Browser to zoom to and edit selected facilities.
To use the Feeder Browser

2. In the Browsers group, click Feeder Browser.
3. Use the options list in the upper-left side of the Feeder Browser to select the feeder that
you want to view. Then, use the options list on the right side of the browser to select the
device types that you want to view—for example, All switches, Large customers, or PV
generators.

Editing a Model
4. The following table describes additional options that are available in the Feeder
Browser.
Just items in Select this check box to only list facilities that are visible in
map view the map display. The list of facilities in the Feeder Browser
will update automatically as you zoom and pan in the map
display.
Show circles Select this check box to highlight facilities that are listed in
the Feeder Browser with circles in the map display.
Edit Click to edit the selected facility.
Zoom Click to zoom to the selected facility.
Auto Select this check box to automatically zoom to each facility

as you select it in the Feeder Browser.
5. Click Hide or press F4 to close the Feeder Browser.
Importing customer data

Synergi’s Customer Management Module (CMM) allows you to use your customer information
in Synergi models. CMM takes customer information from a CSV file (including distribution
transformers, poles, monthly billing records, hourly load records, and diversity, load, and
power factors), processes the data, and uses it to update the Synergi model. The CSV file
contains data taken out of your Customer Information System (CIS database). Synergi can
process these CSV files through the CMM wizard or a batch process using a CMM script.
CMM assigns customers to distribution transformers and sections in the model, calculates
transformer utilization, creates and assigns customer zones and classes, and performs other
related tasks. Having this data in a Synergi model allows a variety of functions, including the
following:
l Calculating the demand on specific distribution transformers to prevent overload
damage or inefficient operation.
l Determining the customer makeup of a poorly performing area.
l Testing the feasibility of system changes, based on the number/type of customers
affected.
l Validating the accuracy of your current load models and load allocation methods.
l Keeping track of customers and transformers in the model. Each customer can have its
own connection ID and be tied to the same transformer.
l Writing Error tables if MiddleLink or processing problems occur.

Editing a Model
l Checking customer phasing against a feeding distribution transformer. Phasing can

differ from the distribution transformer; phasing is set by the customer and retained in
the CMM dataset.
l Associating multiple projects with the same section. Each customer that is configured to
a project-type load will result in a separate project item on the Section editor.
Take note that customer data is never a permanent part of a model, but load data is updated
in the model. CMM uses tools to generate reports from the customer data and updates load
data, as necessary.
The CMM process

The basic CMM process can be accomplished in four major steps. These steps are a general
outline of how to process your own CMM data. If you feel your CMM process may be different,
our Technical Support staff is available to assist you.
1. Save CSV file(s) containing CMM data to the Scripts folder. This type of data can include
billing records, customer information (name, address, class, and so on), distribution
transformers, and poles. The CSV file must contain data in MiddleLink format, a series
of codes and commands that point to, and gather data from, your Access, Oracle, or
other databases. For more information on the CMM MiddleLink commands, see "Viewing
CMM script commands" on page 324.
2. Create a Data Source Alias (DSA) for the database target that will store CMM data. Add
a CMM DSA using the DSA wizard. For more information on creating a DSA, see
"Creating a CMM DSA" below.
3. Use the CMM wizard to import MiddleLink files, process data, and update the model. You
can use either the typical or automated process to accomplish these tasks, although the
automatic process requires more up-front configuration on your part. For more
information, see "Using the CMM wizard" on the next page and "Automating the CMM
process" on page 323.
4. Use the SQL Dashboard to run queries on the CMM database tables. For more
information on the SQL Dashboard, see "CMM and the SQL Dashboard" on page 331.
Creating a CMM DSA

Before you can use CMM, you must first create a Synergi DSA to identify which file is
associated with your customer data.
The following procedure provides a summary of creating a CMM DSA. For additional
To create a CMM DSA

Editing a Model
Provider type. The only Provider types that are compatible with CMM are Access
Oracle or SQL Server database) that will be associated with your imported customer
data. You may also specify a User Name and Password, if required for your selected
Provider type.
5. On page 3 of the wizard, select “CMM” as the content type for the data source.
Using the CMM wizard

The CMM wizard is the starting point for performing customer management tasks. A typical
CMM process, for example, includes importing the CMM data, processing the CMM data set,
and updating model loads with the CMM data set. The CMM wizard guides you through
performing each of these tasks.
You can also use the CMM wizard to run a CMM script and perform various maintenance tasks,
including generating reports and merging CMM data sets.
To open the CMM wizard

2. In the Model Forge group, click Customers & Billing.
3. The options in the CMM wizard are separated into three categories: Typical CMM
Process, Automation, and Maintenance. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information on the available tasks.
l "Importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set" below
l "Processing CMM data set bills and loads" on the facing page
l "Updating model loads with a CMM data set" on page 322
l "Automating the CMM process" on page 323
l "Generating a CMM data set report" on page 328
l "Creating and destroying data sets" on page 329
l "Merging data sets" on page 329
l "Using the model in memory to update data set connectivity" on page 330
Importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set

The first step in a typical CMM process is to load data from the MiddleLink-format text file into
a data set in the CMM database. This process will read data from the MiddleLink text files,
consolidate it, and write it into the appropriate CMM tables. You should perform this step
whenever new billing sets are available.

Editing a Model
You may skip this step if the data is written directly to the data set from other systems.
To import MiddleLink file(s) into a CMM data set

3. On the first page of the Customer Management Module wizard, under Typical CMM
Process, select Import MiddleLink file(s) into a CMM data set and then click
Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the Source MiddleLink file (the file you will
import data from) and the Target database (the file you will import the data to). Click
Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, select a data set within your target database where the
imported data will be saved. You can also create and delete data sets from this page of
the wizard.
a. To create a data set: Type a Name and Description for the new data set, and
then click Add. Click Yes to confirm the addition.
b. To delete a data set: Select the name of the data set that you want to delete, and
then click Delete. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Once you have selected the data set where you want to save the imported data, click
Next.
6. On the next page of the wizard, confirm that the source database and the target data set
are correct. You can also select from the following options:
l Import customer records
l Import billing records
l Abort save if there are errors importing the data
l Generate error records for customers that have no bills
7. Click Finish to begin importing the data. When the import is complete, the CMM
Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were
performed. After reviewing this report, click OK to close the window and return to the
CMM wizard.
After importing the customer data, the next step in a typical CMM process is to process
the CMM data set. See "Processing CMM data set bills and loads" below.
Processing CMM data set bills and loads

The second step in a typical CMM process is to calculate load values from billing data and
connectivity. This step is used only when adjustments are needed in calculations or when new
billing data is imported.

Editing a Model
To process CMM data set bills, loads, etc.

Process, select Process CMM data set bills, loads, etc. and then click Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the Source database and Data set that
contains the data you want to process. Click Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, confirm your selection of the Data set that contains the
billing records that you want to process. You may also do the following:
l Process all billing records. Select this check box to process all records within
the data set. Or, you can clear the check box and select a specific date range for
the records you want to process.
l Usage and demand. Select whether you want to process demand bills, usage
bills, or both.
Click Next.
6. On the next page of the wizard, under Coincidence calculations, select from one of
the following options:
l No coincidence. Synergi will not use curves, but will sum up customer load and
ignore customers of common class.
l Coincidence by transformer. Synergi will look for customers belonging to the
same class who are attached to the same transformer, and apply the coincidence
factor for each group of customers.
l Coincidence by data set. Synergi will calculate customer count by class for all
customers in the data set and apply coincidence for the customer totals.
In addition, the following options are available:
l Undesignated load types.
l Use thresholds for customers with designated load types.
7. Click Finish to begin processing the data. When the data processing is complete, the
CMM Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that
were performed. After reviewing this report, click OK to close the window and return to
the CMM wizard.
After processing the CMM data set, the next step in a typical CMM process is to update
the model loads. See "Updating model loads with a CMM data set" below.
Updating model loads with a CMM data set

The final step in a typical CMM process is used whenever a different load profile is needed. If
there are many data sets for a model, this option will be used most frequently. Prior to this
step, all processing was done with data files and data sets. This final step is performed with a
model loaded. The wizard will ultimately copy load values from the CMM tables and update or
create loads in Synergi.

Editing a Model
To update model loads with a CMM data set

Process, select Update model loads with a CMM data set and then click Next.
contains the data you want to use to update your model. Click Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, select from a series of options that will instruct Synergi
on how to update the model. The following categories are available:
l Add to model loads. Use this set of options to select which load types will be
used to update the model. Available choices are Distributed loads, Spot loads,
Large customers, and Projects.
l Initialize. Use this set of options to specify which, if any, loads you would like to
zero out or delete. Available choices are distributed loads, spot loads, large
customer loads, large customer generation, and projects. Your selections do not
need to correspond to the options you selected in the “Add to model loads”
category.
l Values to modify. Use this set of options to specify which, if any, values you
would like to update. Typically, kW, kvar will be among your selections. There are
certain situations in which only connected values need to be updated.
l Model DTrans. Use this set of options to specify whether to initialize (remove)
and import distribution transformer data. These check boxes perform the same
function for distribution transformers that is performed for other device types
under the “Initialize” and “Add to model loads” options.
6. Click Finish to begin updating the data. When the update is complete, the CMM
Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were
performed. After reviewing this report, click OK to close the window.
Automating the CMM process

CMM scripts can be used to automate a lengthy or complex set of CMM options. You can edit
the scripts through Synergi’s script editor or directly in Notepad. CMM scripts are then run
from the Automation option in the CMM wizard.
Writing CMM scripts

Synergi scripts can be used to automate the CMM process. For example, you can use a script
to load customer data, assign relationships, and perform billing calculations. CMM scripts, like
all Synergi scripts, are text files and must be saved with a *.CMM file extension in you Scripts
folder (or another designated folder, as assigned in the Paths tab of the Preferences editor).
CMM scripts are formatted in the MiddleLink style, where each script line begins with a record
number that indicates the task that will be performed. A CMM interacts with a CMM database,
which must exist and have a DSA associated with it. The DSA is identified in the CMM script
with a 10100 command.

Editing a Model
While a CMM process can be written entirely in a single script file, it can also be broken up
across multiple files so that the process can be performed in multiple steps. In addition, a
CMM process can include a combination of manual steps (performed with the CMM wizard) and
script-based steps.
Viewing CMM script commands

A complete list of the CMM script commands can be viewed within Synergi. You will likely
need to reference this information as you write CMM scripts.
To view CMM script commands

2. In the Tools group, select Schemas > Supporting Data > Customer (CMM).
The list of CMM commands and field parameters appears in a new Synergi window. Use
this list as a reference when you write CMM scripts. The following table summarizes the
CMM commands that are available in Synergi:
Command Purpose
10100 Specify which DSA is to be used to store data set.
10101 Import a CMM data file into a data set. Synergi will create the
data set if it does not already exist.
10102 Create/initialize a data set.
10103 Delete a data set.
10104 Merge one data set (A) into another (B).
10107 Process a data set and calculate load values.
10108 Specify start and end dates for bill processing. If this record is
not indicated in the script, Synergi will process all bills in the
data set.
10109 Process a coincidence.
10110 Update the current model with a data set.
10111 Initialize (remove existing) and import distribution

transformer data. Each option is a Boolean yes/no value.
10112 Initialize loads in the model. Specify categories of loads.
10113 Specify the load categories to update.

Editing a Model
Command Purpose
10114 Specify the load values to update.
10117 Indicate if customer class or capacity factor should be

updated.
10118 Specify whether error records will be generated for customers

that have no bills.
10120 Set the default percent power factor for demand customer.
10130 Define usage loads if type intervals are unspecified.
10131 Define demand loads if type intervals are unspecified.
10132 Indicate that a load type must always be used.
10190 Create a DSA for a CMM database.
10201 Create and define a customer.
10202 Assign a class ID to a customer.
10203 Assign a phase to a customer.
10204 Define a customer’s X and Y coordinates.
10205 Specify a customer’s load type.
10208 Specify a customer’s name.
10209 Specify a customer’s address.
10212 Assign a customer to a transformer.
10213 Assign a customer to a section ID.
10214 Assign a customer a connection ID.
10215 Assign a customer to a feeder.
10220 Define a customer’s usage and days within a billing period.
10221 Define a customer’s usage without a billing period.

Editing a Model
Command Purpose
10230 Define a customer’s demand using kW and kvar.
10231 Define a customer’s demand using kW only.
10232 Define a customer’s demand using kW and the percent power

factor.
10233 Define a customer’s demand using kVA only.
10241 Process AMI load data. This script command will run the same
functionality as the AMI Processor, as described in "Loading
AMI data" on page 332.
10301 Define a transformer ID.
10302 Define a transformer rating. Single-phase transformers listed

in 10302 records are combined to form transformer banks.
10303 Define the location of a transformer.
10304 Define a transformer’s X and Y coordinates.
10306 Define a transformer’s primary meter.
10312 Tie a transformer to a section ID.
10314 Assign a transformer a connection ID.
10315 Assign a transformer to a feeder.
10317 Allow kVA and pf values to be specified directly on

transformers.
10318 Allow customer class values to be specified directly on

transformers.
10501 Define a customer class.
10505 Define a class percent power factor.
10507 Define a class load factor.
10510 Define a class coincidence curve.
10515 Define hourly meter data within a customer class.

Editing a Model
Command Purpose
10517 Define the maximum kWh within a customer class.
10518 Define the maximum kW within a customer class.
CMM script examples

The following sections provide several examples of CMM scripts.
Example 1: A typical CMM script

The following CMM script is a record that represents customer Fred Johnson and his address,
class, transformer, and billing information. The order of these script commands does not
matter and they can even be spread out over different CMM text files if doing so is more
suitable.
10201, 99832331, Res 2

10208, 99832331, Johnson, Fred
10209, 99832331, 1602, Brook St., Newville
10301, DT3984621
10312, DT3984621, Cstr_32231
10212, 99832331, DT3984621
10220, 99832331, 03/09/2007, 945, 30
10220, 99832331, 04/08/2007, 1100, 29
Example 2: Seasonal data set script

The following example shows a portion of a script that is used to create summer and winter
data sets for District 2 of a utility. In this script, data sets have been created for two different
seasons: Dist2Sum07 and Dist2Fall07. Multiple files with *.CSV extensions are used to
populate each data set.
10101, Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\CustomerConnectivity.csv

10101, Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\June07.csv
10101, Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\July07.csv
10101, Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\August07.csv
10101, Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\September07.csv
10101, Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\CustomerConnectivity.csv
10101, Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\October07.csv
10101, Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\November07.csv
10101, Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\December07.csv
10101, Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\January08.csv
Example 3: Determine the nearest model node to a transformer

Synergi contains an algorithm that pinpoints the closest model nodes to a given distribution
transformer’s X,Y coordinates. The following script represents distribution transformer data

Editing a Model
for dtran #443501. A section will be selected for transformer connection only if the section is
the closest and contains all the phases and neutral that the transformer needs.
10301, 443501
10302, 443501, 37, 2
10304, 443501, 1843349.34007978, 518279.446046565
Running a CMM script
To run a CMM script

3. From the first page of the Customer Management Module wizard, under Automation,
select Run CMM Script and then click Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the name of the script you want to run. This page
of the wizard includes several options that allow you to create and edit CMM scripts, as
described below.
l To edit a script in Synergi: Select the script name and then click Edit. The Synergi
script window opens, where you can add and delete commands from the script.
For more information on working in the script editor, see the Synergi Electric
Script Guide.
l To edit a script in Notepad: Select the script name and then click Notepad. The
CMM script in MiddleLink format will open in the Notepad application. Once you
have edited the script, select File > Save in Notepad to save the modified script.
l To create a new script: Type the script name in the text box in the wizard and then
click Edit (to write the script in Synergi) or Notepad (to write the script in
Notepad).
Click Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, confirm that you have selected the script you want to
run and then click Finish.
Generating a CMM data set report

Perform the following procedure to generate a report for a selected CMM data set. CMM is
designed to process very large and data-intensive customer data sets. Because of this, the
reporting is general and high-level, and has no effect on the model itself. With the exception
of the “Queried section customer assignments” report chapter, customer information does not
need to be loaded into the model in order to run this report.
To generate a CMM data set report


Editing a Model
3. On the first page of the Customer Management Module wizard, under Maintenance,
select Report on CMM data set. Click Next to continue.
contains the data you want to report. Click Next to continue.
5. On the next page of the wizard, select the report chapters that you want to generate.
l Distribution transformer summary information
l Customer class summary information
l Load summary results
l Queried section customer assignments
6. Click Finish to generate the report. The report will be created as a separate Synergi
window and include the report chapters that you selected in the wizard.
Creating and destroying data sets

Perform the following procedure to create and delete data sets in a CMM database. This option
will also generate the CMM data set report that is described in "Generating a CMM data set
report" on the previous page.
To create and destroy data sets

select Create/destroy data sets and then click Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the database that you want to work with. Click
Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, perform the following tasks to create or destroy data
sets:
a. To create a data set, type a Name and Description for the new data set, and
then click Add. Click Yes to confirm the addition.
b. To delete a data set, select the name of the data set that you want to delete, and
then click Delete. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
6. Click Finish to exit the CMM wizard. A CMM report window will open in Synergi,
displaying all available report chapters from the “Report on CMM data set” option in the
CMM wizard.
TIP: If you do not want to view the report, you can click Back to return to the first
page of the CMM wizard. The edits you made to the data sets will be saved.
Merging data sets

Perform the following procedure to combine two data sets from the same database. This
process can be used in instances when it is more reasonable to create a new record and

Editing a Model
merge it into an existing one, rather than edit an extensive data set containing a large amount
of data.
To merge data sets

select Merge data sets and then click Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the database that you want to work with. Click
Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, do the following:
a. On the upper half of the page, select the data set that you want to merge data
into.
b. On the lower half of the page, select the data set that you want to copy data out
of.
Click Next.
6. On the next page of the wizard, confirm that the database, the target data set, and the
source data set are correct.
7. Click Finish to merge the data sets. When the merge is complete, the CMM Operations
Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed.
After reviewing this report, click OK to close the window and return to the CMM wizard.
Using the model in memory to update data set connectivity

Perform the following procedure to update a CMM data set with the data that is already stored
in a model.
To use model in memory to update data set connectivity

select Use model in memory to update data set connectivity and then click
Next.
4. On the next page of the wizard, select the database and data set that you want to work
with. Click Next.
5. On the next page of the wizard, confirm the options you have selected on the previous
page of the wizard, and then click Finish to perform the update. When the update is
complete, the CMM Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the
actions that were performed. After reviewing this report, click OK to close the window
and return to the CMM wizard.

Editing a Model
CMM and the SQL Dashboard

The SQL Dashboard is a Synergi tool that allows you to run queries directly against the tables
in any database that has a DSA. Queries can be written and run against models, customer
tables, and other Synergi data stored in the database for countless views, joins, updates, and
overviews. You can write a query once and run it against any database by selecting the
appropriate DSA.
To access the SQL Dashboard, select the Forge tab in the Synergi ribbon, and in the Database
group, click SQL Dashboard. Detailed information on using the SQL Dashboard is provided in
"SQL Dashboard" on page 224.
The following is an example of how the SQL Dashboard can be used to query CMM data. This
series of three query commands can be used to verify that all customers are accounted for in
the generated spot and distributed loads.
1. The first query determines the number of customers in the customer table:
SELECT COUNT (*) FROM @CMM@Customers;
This query results in 316,917 customers.

2. A second query determines the number of customers assigned to spot loads:
SELECT SUM(Ph1Cust+Ph2Cust+Ph3Cust) FROM @CMM@ResSpot;
This query results in 106,322 customers.

3. A third query determines the number of customers assigned to distributed loads:
SELECT SUM(Ph1Cust+Ph2Cust+Ph3Cust) FROM @CMM@ResDist;
This query results in 210,595 customers. The total of spot and distributed load
customers is 316,917, the same as the number of customers in the customer table.
The following list provides additional CMM queries that can be modified based on your needs:
l List all customers tied to a particular distribution transformer:
SELECT LastName AS “Name”, Address, City, CustClassId AS “Class ID”

DRanId AS “Transformer” FROM @CMM@Customers WHERE DTranID = “N0027EG4100”
ORDER BY LastName ASC;
l List distribution transformers with utilization factors over 70%:
SELECT DTranId, SectionID, UtilFac FROM @CMM@DISTTRANS WHERE UtilFac > 0.7
l List transformers, customers, and utilization:
SELECT DTranId AS “Transformer”, Section Id AS “Section”, DemCustCount AS

“Customers”, ROUND(UtilFac,2) AS “Utilization” FROM CMM_COT_DistTrans WHERE
UtilFac > 1 ORDER BY UtilFac;

Editing a Model
Loading AMI data

Synergi’s AMI Processor can take load values based on AMI reads and apply them to the
distributed loads in your model. Before you can use this tool, you must first import the AMI
load values, along with the date and time stamps, using CMM. Then, you can use the AMI
Processor to identify the CMM data source, the desired data set, and the date and time for the
AMI data you want to process. Synergi will replace existing distributed loads on sections with
the AMI load values. Those sections will be marked as “Set with AMI” (on the Load - Dist tab
of the Section editor) to help identify where AMI loads are present in your model.
To process AMI data

2. In the Model Forge group, click AMI Processing.
3. In the AMI Processor editor, select the CMM data source, the desired data set, and the
date and time for the AMI data that you want to process.
4. Click Finish.
Editing feeders and subtrans

In Synergi, a feeder has a starting point (swing bus) or voltage source. The feeder
corresponds to a point of known voltage and source impedance. Typically, this is at the feeder
breaker or recloser. There is no limit to the number of feeders in a distribution system model.
You can tie feeders to substation models and analyze substations in Synergi. Substation
calculations start at the subtran node and branch out to all associated feeders. A subtran node
represents a topological source only, and does not contain any transformer data or
components. However, you can use a separate transformer device to model a substation
transformer if desired. This is described in more detail in "Subtran details" on page 342.
When modeling feeders and substations, it is important to be aware of how these two facilities
interact when they are selected, or not selected, for analysis. If a feeder is not connected to a
substation, then the feeder will always act like a source. When a feeder and a substation are
connected and both the feeder and substation are selected for analysis, then the load will pass
through the feeder, just as it would pass through a closed switch. If only the feeder is selected
for analysis, then the feeder will act like a source. If only the substation is selected, then its
dependent feeders will still be considered during an analysis, even though the feeders are not
displayed. Any switchable device, such as a breaker, switch, meter, or transformer, that is
placed between a substation and a feeder will determine whether a feeder is fed or unfed. An
open device will cause the feeder to be unfed. This type of interaction imitates real world
feeder/substation interaction.
A feeder or subtran node is created in a model by converting a node, but it is important to
note that the node record is never eliminated, even though the feeder or subtran symbol
replaces the node symbol. For example, in the case of a feeder in Access, a record is created
in the InstFeeders table, with the same ID as the original node, while the node record is also
preserved. The two records maintain an association, because the node record contains
important topological information, such as coordinates, that does not get copied to the new

Editing a Model
feeder record. The association is based on IDs, so the node and feeder IDs must always
remain the same. As such, when you change the ID of a feeder or subtran, the ID of the
original node is changed as well. In the event that you convert a feeder back to a node, the
feeder data is removed, and the node data remains.
Because feeders are always associated with a node, they must adhere to node naming
conventions, which dictate that all node IDs must be unique.
It is important to keep in mind that although it is called a “subtran” in Synergi, a subtran
record does not contain data on the transformer itself. The actual transformer is handled as a
separate device entity, if at all, as shown below. The subtran record only contains information
such as voltage and source impedance, much like a feeder record. This configuration allows
Synergi to analyze high-side protection coordination.
Substation model with connecting feeders
Converting a node into a feeder or a substation node

Perform the following procedure to convert a node into a feeder or a substation node. Before
you can begin this procedure, you must be sure that node symbols are visible in your Synergi
map display. Node symbols could be hidden for a number of different reasons, as described
in"Nodes" on page 381 .
If loop creation is disallowed, you can convert any node to a feeder source, provided it would
not feed an existing feeder. On the other hand, you can convert a node fed by a subtran to a
feeder, regardless of settings. To create a substation, you must start with an unfed node and
section. For more information on allowing loop creation, see "Loops and wandering laterals"
on page 343.
To convert a node into a feeder or a substation node
1. In the Synergi map display, locate the node that you want to convert.
2. Right-click on the node and select either Convert to Feeder or Convert to
Substation Node.
—or—
Perform the following steps to convert the node from the Synergi ribbon:

Editing a Model

b. In the Node group, click either Feeder or Substation.
c. Hover the mouse over the node that you want to convert. If the node is eligible to
be converted, the cursor symbol will change from a crosshair to a target symbol.
Click the mouse to complete the action.
3. In the Confirm Operation dialog box, click Yes.
To convert a source node or PM gear to a node
1. In the Synergi map display, locate the node that you want to convert.
2. Right-click on the node and select Convert to Node.
—or—
b. In the Node group, click Node.
3. In the Confirm Operation dialog box, click Yes.
Editing a feeder
Perform the following procedure to edit a feeder.
To edit a feeder
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the feeder that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the feeder.
l "Feeder tab – Feeder editor" on the facing page
l "Volts/Ohms tab – Feeder editor" on page 336
l "Node tab – Feeder editor" on page 337
l "Rates tab – Feeder editor" on page 337
In addition, the Info tab and the Results tab are common to all section and device
editors. For information on those tabs, see "Viewing data calculations in the Synergi
editor" on page 247 and "Viewing results in the Synergi editor" on page 247,
respectively.

Editing a Model
Feeder tab – Feeder editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a feeder" on the previous page.
Connection
Specify the following:
l Nominal KV. Rated high-side line-to-line voltage for the feeder at the connecting bus.
l Connection. Connection type.
l Color. Color used to represent the feeder in the Synergi map display.
l Display on load. Automatically adds the feeder to the selection set when the model is
loaded into Synergi. Feeders that do not have this check box selected will not be
selected when the model is loaded, and thus will not be immediately visible to the user,
until the feeder is manually selected. For more information on feeder selection, see
"Selecting feeders" on page 68.
Growth
l Growth curve. Sets the growth curve for the feeder. Select a curve from the options
menu if you check the growth curve box. The curves are used in Forecasting. See
"Forecasting analysis" on page 587 for more information.
l Load multiplier. Multiplier value used to simulate load growth on the feeder for
analysis purposes. Changing this number does not change any actual load information in
the model data, and it is not used unless your growth options specifically designate as
such. For more information on load growth and growth options, see "Load growth" on
page 286.
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to provide.
NOTE: Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text. For more information,
see "Text map settings" on page 105.
Properties
l This is a hardened feeder. Set the feeder as a hardened feeder. This option is for
reference purposes only. It is not used during any Synergi analysis.
l This is a CVR feeder. Set the feeder as a CVR feeder. When this option is selected, a
special CVR voltage limit will be used to monitor for high voltage exceptions for the
meter. The CVR voltage limit is set on the Exceptions tab of the Model and Analysis
Options editor.

Editing a Model
PV Distributed Generation
The Feeder is saturated, Hosting capacity, and Remaining capacity fields are set
automatically by Synergi when you run a PV Hosting analysis with either the “Feeder rating”
or “Feeder maximum demand” approaches and you also select the “Update feeder/sub hosting
capacity values” option. You can also edit these values manually, if desired.
For information on the PV Hosting analysis, see "PV Hosting analysis" on page 608.
Ratings
l Cont. amp rating. Continuous amp rating for the feeder, for exception reporting only.
This value does not affect load-flow calculations. Exceptions are only reported if this
value is greater than zero.
If the feeder is missing a rating value or the value is 0, the ratings from the fed meter,
transformer, or first line conductor will be used. With transformers, the transformer
windings are used to get the high side ratings that are then applied to the feeder.
l Emer. amp rating. Emergency loading level for the feeder.
If the feeder is missing a rating value or the value is 0, the ratings from the fed meter,
transformer, or first line conductor will be used. With transformers, the transformer
windings are used to get the high side ratings that are then applied to the feeder.
L-G fault ohms. Assumed line-to-ground fault resistance in ohms. This value is used
during a fault analysis when the line-to-ground resistance value (“Fault resistance for
min L-G fault”) in the Fault Analysis Options editor is set to 0. See "Setting up a fault
analysis" on page 656 for information on editing fault analysis setup options.
Region, Planning Area, and Substation
Optional names of regions, planning areas, and substations that are associated with the
feeder. These fields exist for reference purposes only; they are not used during any Synergi
analysis. However, they can be used when loading model data using Synergi’s EA Automation
wizard.
To specify a new name, type the name in the appropriate text box, or expand the options list
to select from any name that has already been created. When you specify a new name, that
name becomes available for selection at all other feeders.
Volts/Ohms tab – Feeder editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Volts/Ohms tab of the Feeder
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a feeder" on page 334.
Source impedance
Source impedance is used in fault analysis and motor start analysis. It represents the system
beyond the substation. This subtransmission system usually has transformer tap changers and
other voltage controls that keep the voltage into the substation at some predictable range of
values. The voltage drop during faults and motor starts are fast and the subtransmission
system equipment will not have time to respond, so the source impedance values are used to
account for the drop.

Editing a Model
In the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, you can select whether to use
Minimum or Maximum source impedance values or whether to leave the selection up to each
individual feeder and subtran. The values you can setin the Volts/Ohms tab depends on which
option you select in the Model and Analysis Options editor:
l Minimum. Only minimum source impedance values can be edited at each feeder and
subtran editor.
l Maximum. Only maximum source impedance values can be edited at each feeder and
subtran editor.
l Source selection. Both minimum and maximum source impedance values can be edited
at each feeder and subtran editor. The "Use minimum" and "Use maximum" options are
used to determine which set of values are used for each feeder and subtran.
Voltage levels
Select Use Balanced Voltage Level or Use By-Phase Voltage Level and then specify the
voltage levels as required. Synergi limits voltages to between 60 and 180 volts on a 120-volt
base.
If you choose the “Use by-phase” option, Synergi verifies that positive rotation exists. Also,
be sure to check the angular settings, which significantly affect power flow. The default angles
for phases A/AB, B/BC, and C/CA are 0,-120, and 120, respectively.
Node tab – Feeder editor

Use the Node tab in the Feeder editor to edit the feeder’s “node” data. You can edit the X and Y
coordinates of the node that is associated with the feeder, and you can also view a list of all
sections that connect to the node. These fields correspond to the fields that you see in the
Node tab in the Node editor.
Although feeders are created by converting nodes in your model, it is important to note that
the node data is never eliminated. The feeder will share the same ID as the original node, and
the feeder will also retain the X and Y coordinates of the original node. In the event that you
convert a feeder back into a node, the feeder data is removed but and the node data remains.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Node tab of the Feeder editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a feeder" on page 334.
X coordinate
X coordinate location of the feeder.
Y coordinate
Y coordinate location of the feeder.
Rates tab – Feeder editor

Use the Rates tab in the Feeder editor to specify failure rate, cost, and time parameters for
reliability analyses. Generally, these numbers represent averages and estimates, because it
is unlikely that you will have exact figures for each individual device. The Rates tab can also
be used to define a location link for the feeder.

Editing a Model
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Feeder editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a feeder" on page 334. For more
information failure rates and reliability analyses, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Failure repair time
Failure repair time for the feeder.
Location link
Syntax to link the device to an external source, such as a file or website. For more
information, see "Location links" on page 126.
Sustained failure rate
Sustained failure rate for the feeder.
Temporary failure rate
Temporary failure rate for the feeder.
Editing a subtran node

Perform the following procedure to edit a subtran node.
To edit a subtran node
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the subtran node that you
want to edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the subtran
node. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Source tab – Subtran editor" below
l "Volts/Ohms tab – Subtran editor" on page 340
l "Node tab – Subtran editor" on page 341
l "Rates tab – Subtran editor" on page 341
respectively.
Source tab – Subtran editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Source tab of the Subtran editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a subtran node" above.
AMS link
Syntax to link the device to an Asset Management System.

Editing a Model
Color
Color of the subtran.
Connection
Connection type.
Cont. Amp Rating
Continuous amp rating, for exception reporting only. This value does not affect load-flow
calculations. Exceptions are only reported if this value is greater than zero.
If the subtran is missing a rating value or the value is 0, the ratings from the fed meter,
transformer, or first line conductor will be used. With transformers, the transformer windings
are used to get the high side ratings that are then applied to the subtran.
Display on Load
Sets Synergi to add the subtran to the selection set automatically when the model is loaded
from disk, such that it appears on the map. Any subtrans in the model that do not have this
setting checked will not be visible when the model is loaded, until manually selected. For
more information on feeder and subtran selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
Emer. Amp Rating
The emergency amp rating allows the setting of a continuous and emergency loading level for
subtrans.
If the subtran is missing a rating value or the value is 0, the ratings from the fed meter,
transformer, or first line conductor will be used. With transformers, the transformer windings
are used to get the high side ratings that are then applied to the subtran.
Growth Curve
Sets the growth curve for the subtran. Select a curve from the options menu if you check the
growth curve box. The curves are used in Forecasting. See "Forecasting analysis" on page 587
L-G Fault Ohms (R)
The assumed line-to-ground fault resistance in ohms. This value is used for fault analysis if
the line-to-ground resistance is specified as zero in the fault analysis setup options. For more
information on fault analysis setup options, see "Setting up a fault analysis" on page 656.
Load Multiplier
Multiplier value used to simulate load growth on the subtran for analysis purposes. Changing
this number does not change any actual load information in the model data, and it is not used
unless your growth options specifically designate as such. For more information on load
growth and growth options, see "Load growth" on page 286.
Nominal KV
The rated high-side line-to-line voltage for the subtran at the connecting bus.

Editing a Model
Note
Region, Planning Area, and Substation
Optional names of regions, planning areas, and substations that are associated with the
subtran. These fields exist for reference purposes only; they are not used during any Synergi
analysis. However, they can be used when loading model data using Synergi’s EA Automation
wizard.
To specify a new name, type the name in the appropriate text box, or expand the options list
to select from any name that has already been created. When you specify a new name, that
name becomes available for selection at all other subtrans.
Tie to transmission bus
Select this check box to tie the subtran node to a selected transmission bus. This option is
available for subtran nodes only.
Volts/Ohms tab – Subtran editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Volts/Ohm tab of the Subtran
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a subtran node" on page 338.
Source impedance
system equipment will not have time to respond, so the source impedance values are used to
account for the drop.
In the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, you can select whether to use
Minimum or Maximum source impedance values or whether to leave the selection up to each
individual feeder and subtran. The values you can setin the Volts/Ohms tab depends on which
option you select in the Model and Analysis Options editor:
l Minimum. Only minimum source impedance values can be edited at each feeder and
subtran editor.
l Maximum. Only maximum source impedance values can be edited at each feeder and
subtran editor.
l Source selection. Both minimum and maximum source impedance values can be edited
at each feeder and subtran editor. The "Use minimum" and "Use maximum" options are
used to determine which set of values are used for each feeder and subtran.
Voltage levels
Select Use Balanced Voltage Level or Use By-Phase Voltage Level and then specify the
voltage levels as required. Synergi limits voltages to between 60 and 180 volts on a 120-volt
base.

Editing a Model
If you choose the “Use by-phase” option, Synergi verifies that positive rotation exists. Also,
be sure to check the angular settings, which significantly affect power flow. The default angles
for phases A/AB, B/BC, and C/CA are 0,-120, and 120, respectively.
Node tab – Subtran editor

Use the Node tab in the Subtran editor to edit the subtran’s “node” data. You can edit the X
and Y coordinates of the node that is associated with the subtran, and you can also view a list
of all sections that connect to the node. These fields correspond to the fields that you see in
the Node tab in the Node editor.
Although subtran nodes are created by converting nodes in your model, it is important to note
that the node data is never eliminated. The subtran will share the same ID as the original
node, and the subtran will also retain the X and Y coordinates of the original node. In the
event that you convert a subtran back into a node, the subtran data is removed but and the
node data remains.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Node tab of the Subtran editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a subtran node" on page 338.
Incident Sections
Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the subtran. This list is for informational
purposes only and cannot be edited.
X Coordinate
X coordinate location of the subtran.
Y Coordinate
Y coordinate location of the subtran.
Rates tab – Subtran editor

Use the Rates tab in the Subtran editor to specify failure rate, cost, and time parameters for
reliability analyses. Generally, these numbers represent averages and estimates, because it
is unlikely that you will have exact figures for each individual device. The Rates tab can also
be used to define a location link for the subtran.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Subtran editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a subtran node" on page 338. For more
information failure rates and reliability analyses, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Failure Repair Time
Failure repair time for the subtran.
Location link
Sustained Failure Rate
Sustained failure rate for the subtran.

Editing a Model
Temporary Failure Rate

Temporary failure rate for the subtran.
Subtran details
From a data perspective, a subtran instance is basically identical to a feeder source. It
contains important source data for fault and load-flow-based studies, including voltage and
impedance. A subtran instance, despite the name, does not contain any actual transformer
data. If you wish to include the primary transformer component in your model, you must add
it as a separate device, usually just downstream from the subtran node. If you do model a
transformer, the nominal voltage and impedance in the subtran record should represent the
high-side. Otherwise, source data should represent the transformer low-side.
The primary reason for subtrans, therefore, is topological and categorical convenience. If you
have substations modeled during analysis, Synergi will use the subtran data for load-flow
propagations and largely bypass any feeder source data. At the culmination of analyses, the
results are categorized and summarized by feeder, but the model was analyzed as a
substation network, not as independent feeders. Also, modeling of substations and associated
devices is necessary if you want to perform high-side protection coordination with primary
transformers.
In general, subtrans and substations may or may not be appropriate for your situation. They
do add a significant layer of complexity to the topology of your model and may make analysis
results less intuitive. By analyzing independent feeders with reliable source data, it may be
easier to keep your results concise and organized, facilitating better planning.
Using the Substation Wizard

A substation can be added to Synergi using the Substation Wizard. Refer to the following
To use the Substation Wizard

2. In the Build group, click Substation Wizard.
3. On the first page of the Substation Wizard, next to Sub Node ID, type a name for the
new substation node. Click Next to continue.
4. On the second page of the wizard, select the feeders that will be added to the new
substation. Click Next to continue.
5. On the third page of the wizard, select which device types will be included on the new
substation. You must include a transformer and busbar, and you can optionally include a
switch and breaker for the substation. Click Next to continue.
6. On the last page of the wizard, select whether to add a capacitor to the new substation
and then click Finish. The new substation is added to Synergi.

Editing a Model
Loops and wandering laterals

In general, Synergi is oriented for use with radial distribution systems. However, it has a
variety of features in place to handle looped situations, including transmission-style network
analysis tools.
Analytically, Synergi can model three general types of loops:
l Basic loop. A basic loop is generally a simple loop without any phase changes.
Basic three-phase loop
l Wandering lateral. A wandering lateral is generally a single- or two-phase branch that

leaves a three-phase trunk, serves some load, and then rejoins the trunk downstream
to serve further load.
Wandering lateral example
l Meshed network. A meshed network model is a densely looped configuration that has
little or no radial qualities at all, such as those found in some urban feeders.

Editing a Model
Meshed network model
Modeling loops
You must set up your Synergi preferences to allow you to model loops. Otherwise, Synergi
will recognize when you are creating a looped situation and prevent you from doing so. In
addition, Synergi will not let you close a switch that would form a loop.
After selecting the Allow Loop Creation option, it is up to your discretion to determine what
types of loops you need. In general, if you can maintain a radial model with isolated loops, it
is preferable to use radial analyses and avoid network analyses designed for densely meshed
models.
Always keep in mind that certain analysis types, such as the contingency analysis, cannot
operate on looped systems. Prior to Synergi Electric 3.6, this situation was overcome by the
concept of loop tie switches, which is described in "Loop tie switches" below. However, loop
tie switches are no longer the recommended approach to loop creation and you should make
other provisions if you intend to run analyses that do not support loops.
To allow loop creation in a model
2. In the Preferences editor, select the Synergi tab.
3. Select the Allow Loop Creation check box.
Loop tie switches

In Synergi Electric versions 3.5 and earlier, the recommended approach to loop creation was
to use a loop tie switch or a wandering lateral tie switch. This approach worked as follows:

Editing a Model
1. Draw a section that would form the loop, but leave one end unconnected.
2. Add any switch from the warehouse to the section, open it, and designate it as a tie
switch.
3. Connect the open end of the section, forming the loop, with the connectivity “broken” by
the open tie switch.
In this manner, you could maintain a radial model according to map topologically, while
Synergi could simulate loops by considering tie switches as closed during loop-supporting
analyses.
While loop tie switches are still supported, you are encouraged to avoid them if possible.
Synergi now automatically recognizes looped situations and performs calculations properly.
During an analysis, when a loop or wandering lateral is detected without a tie switch, Synergi
automatically creates an internal break and performs identical calculations at that point. This
functionality can help keep your model less cluttered. For more information on analysis and
internal breaks, see "Analysis considerations for loops and wandering laterals" on the next
page.
TIP: Synergi has a special coloring scheme for identifying loops and internal break points.
For more information, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
For more information on designating a switch as a tie switch, see "Editing a switch" on
page 466. For more information on switches in general, see "Editing devices" on page 395.
To model a loop with a loop tie switch
1. Model the sections in your loop, as described in "Editing sections" on the next page.
Leave one section disconnected to break connectivity.
2. Drag any switch from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and place it on the
disconnected section, next to the disconnected node.
3. Double-click the switch to open the Switch editor, and then do the following:
a. Select the Switch tab.
b. Under Status, select Open to open the switch.
c. Select the Loop Tie switch check box.
d. Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
4. Use the Reconnect Section tool, as described in "Connecting and disconnecting sections"
on page 371, to complete the loop.
To model a wandering lateral with a tie switch
1. Model the sections in your wandering lateral, as described in "Editing sections" on the
next page. Leave the last section disconnected from the trunk to break connectivity.
2. Drag any switch from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and place it on the
disconnected section, next to the disconnected node.
3. Double-click the switch to open the Switch editor, and then do the following:
a. Select the Switch tab.
b. Under Status, select Open to open the switch.

Editing a Model
c. Select the Wandering Lateral Tie check box.

4. Use the Reconnect Section tool, as described in "Connecting and disconnecting sections"
on page 371, to rejoin the lateral with the trunk to complete the loop.
Analysis considerations for loops and wandering laterals

Synergi’s radial analysis engines require a topologically radial model. Internally, during radial
analysis, Synergi must break a loop somewhere to complete its calculations. The final results
should be reliable for the looped configuration; however, Synergi must break the loop to get
those results. For an example of how Synergi performs calculations across a break point to
derive looped results, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
If you have tie switches in your model, these become the break point. If you do not, Synergi
attempts to select the most appropriate section for an internal break. Once established,
internal breaks remain in place during the current session. If the location of the internal break
is not appropriate, you can override it by placing a tie switch where you want the loop to be
broken during analysis.
TIP: Synergi has a special coloring scheme for identifying loops and internal break points.
For more information, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
If you have loops in your model, whether directly modeled or by using tie switches, they will
be automatically considered by any applicable analysis. All tie switches are automatically
considered closed if the analysis supports loops.
Editing sections
Sections are the basic building blocks of the distribution system model. A section represents
an electrical path between two end points (nodes), and can use vertices to form the
geographic path of the line. Each section is composed of an overhead or underground
conductor segment and perhaps a group of devices and/or loads. There are no limits to the
length of a section, or to the number of sections in a system.
Sections
Adding a section
New sections are added to your model by entering the “Add section” mode and clicking on the
node and vertex positions that define the new section. When a section is added, the section
length is calculated based on the map display’s current unit of measurement setting. If the
new section connects to an existing section, the new section inherits a number of attributes
from the existing section, including the phase configuration, conductor type, phase spacing,
load connection value, and equivalent height above ground. Synergi sets the neutral conductor
to “same as phase” rather than to the same conductor as the phase conductor.

Editing a Model
To add a section

2. In the Model group, click the Add Section button.
NOTE: If the Add Section button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button
becomes enabled.
3. Click once in the map display to begin drawing the new section. You can start the section
by clicking in any empty space in the map, or by clicking on an existing node if you want
to attach the new section to an existing section in your model.
4. Move the mouse in the desired direction for the new section. As you move the mouse,
you can do any of the following:
l Hold the Ctrl key as you drag the mouse to force vertical or horizontal lines.
l Click the left mouse button to create vertex points, as needed.
l Press the arrow keys to pan to different areas of the map display, as needed.
l Press Esc to cancel the current section and return to the Add Section mode.
5. Click the right mouse button to end the new section. You can end the new section in any
empty space in the map, or you can end the section on top of an existing node in your
model. Synergi will prevent you from creating any type of section that is not allowed,
such as a loop.
6. In the Enter section ID dialog box, click OK to accept the default section name that has
been created by Synergi, or type a new name for the section and then click OK.
7. Press F5 to return to Default mode. You will probably want to edit the new section you
have created. For more information, see "Editing a section" below.
Editing a section
To edit a section
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the section that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the section.
l "Section tab – Section editor" on the next page
l "Construction tab – Section editor" on page 349
l "Properties tab – Section editor" on page 351
l "Load Dist tab – Section editor" on page 352
l "Load Spot tab – Section editor" on page 355
l "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on page 357
l "Load DTran tab – Section editor" on page 362
l "Gen Dist tab – Section editor" on page 367

Editing a Model
l "Zones tab – Section editor" on page 368

l "Coordinates tab – Section editor" on page 370
respectively.
Section tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Section tab of the Section editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a section" on the previous page.
AMS link
Broadcast
Select this check box to include the section in the list of “Marked Facilities” in Synergi’s
Broadcaster window. For more information on the Broadcaster window, see "Using the
Broadcaster" on page 516.
Can host PV
Select this check box to consider the section as a potential host for PV devices in Synergi’s PV
analysis types. For more information on PV analyses, see "Renewables" on page 604.
Conductor length
Specifies the section length used for analyses. It does not have to match the calculated length
based on map coordinates, so it does not have to be to scale with the map. You can also use
the Multiple Editor to assign calculated conductor lengths to sections.
Contingency
Select this check box to mark the section as a contingency section that can be analyzed during
a contingency analysis. To perform a contingency analysis on “contingency” sections, do the
following:
1. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab.

2. Under Batch run, select Section and then select Contingency.
For more information, see "Contingency analysis" on page 568.

Critical
Select this check box to mark the section as a critical section that can be analyzed during a
contingency analysis. To perform a contingency analysis on “critical” sections, do the
following:
1. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab.

2. Under Batch run, select Section and then select Critical.
For more information, see "Contingency analysis" on page 568.

Editing a Model
Description
Optional description for the section.
Hide map results
If selected, results for the section will not appear on the map.
Location link
Monitor harmonic
Select this check box to include the section in a harmonic analysis. For more information on
harmonics, see "Harmonic analysis" on page 681.
Note
Phasing
Section phasing.
Switch block ID
A switchable block is the smallest group of sections that can be switched together from one
feed direction to another. A switchable block includes sections along a switch path (feeder or
sub).
When an analysis is run, the first section fed by the closed switch feeding the block will be
considered the “owner” section. All sections in that block will have their switch block ID set to
the switch block ID of the owner section. You can set the switch block IDs yourself or leave
the values blank, in which case the section ID will be used.
Once switch block ID values have been set, they should only change when new switches are
added to the model.
What-ifs
Specify a name to represent the device when setting up What-If scenarios. For more
information, see "Enabling What-Ifs for individual devices" on page 511.
Construction tab – Section editor

Use the Construction tab in the Section editor to edit construction data for a section. You can
also copy all data on the Construction tab from one editor to another, by using Synergi’s “Copy
Construction” tool. This process is described in "Copying construction data from one section to
another" on page 373.

Editing a Model
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Construction tab of the Section
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a section" on page 347.
Conductor types
Conductor or duct bank types for the different phases. Available conductor types are stored in
your equipment data source. For more information on conductor types, see "Conductors" on
page 375.
Construction model
Select from one of the following options to handle conductor spacing for impedance and
admittance calculations:
l Equivalent spacing. Synergi uses a simple spacing model based on phase-to-phase
and phase-to-neutral distances specified below in the editor. All phases are assumed to
have the same conductor type, unless a detailed construction is setup in the base year.
l Detailed spacing. Using configuration types, Synergi can perform complex analyses
on detailed conductor configurations. To use detailed spacing, you must have
configurations defined in your equipment data source. For more information on detailed
spacing and configuration types, see "Conductor configuration and positions" on
page 379.
l Duct bank. Configures the section to use a duct bank and its associated conductor
types for impedance calculations. After selecting this option, use the Duct Bank options
at the bottom of the editor to select which duct bank to use (from the equipment data
that is loaded with your model) and which circuit number from the selected duct bank
that you want to apply to the section. See the “Duct bank” description at the end of this
table for more information on these settings.
Detailed spacing
The “Detailed spacing” fields are enabled when you set the Construction model type to
“Detailed spacing”. Use these fields to set the configuration type and phase positions.
For more information on configuration types and detailed spacing, see "Conductor
configuration and positions" on page 379.
Duct bank
The “Duct bank” fields are enabled when you set the Construction model type to “Duct bank”.
l Instance. Use the first option list to specify an instance name that will be used to tie
individual sections together in preparation for a duct bank evaluation. You can select an
existing instance name or type a new name in the list.
Use the second option list to select the name of a duct bank from your equipment
warehouse that you want to apply to the section.
For more information on duct bank instances, see "Duct bank evaluation" on page 284.
l Ckt. Specify the circuit number from the selected duct bank that you want to apply to
the section. Only one circuit from the duct bank can be used on a section.
Equivalent spacing and height
The “Equivalent spacing and height” fields are enabled when you set the Construction model

Editing a Model
type to either “Equivalent spacing” or “Detailed spacing”.

l When “Equivalent spacing” is selected, set values as appropriate for Phase to phase
spacing, Phase to neutral spacing, and Height.
l When “Detailed spacing” is selected, set the Height value to serve as a reference point
for the specified configuration type.
The available spacing and height values are set in the Spacing tab in the Preferences editor.
For more information, see "Spacing preferences" on page 49.
Line grounding options
Synergi provides four options for line grounding:
l No neutral. Clear the Neutral (“N”) check box to specify a delta or ungrounded
connection. The other grounding options are disabled when the neutral check box is
cleared.
l Multi-ground. Select the Neutral (“N”) check box and the “Multi-Gnd” option to specify a
pole or bonded ground at regular intervals.
l Single-ground. Select the Neutral (“N”) check box and the “Single-Gnd” option to specify
grounding at the sub, feeder, or transformer.
l Earth return. Select the Neutral (“N”) check box and the “Earth Ret” option to specify a
grounded load with earth return and no ground wire.
For more information on the effects of grounds and earth resistivity, see the Synergi Electric
Properties tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Properties tab of the Section
Amp rating for loading calculations
Designates whether Synergi uses amperage ratings associated with assigned conductor(s), or
a manual override value that you specify here. Conductor types are assigned in the
Construction tab of the Section editor. For more information on conductor types, see
"Conductors" on page 375.
A specified amp rating is a key indicator for circuit loading. If you have this option activated,
Synergi will not consider a specified amp rating during node reduction. For more information,
see "Reducing the number of nodes" on page 384.
If you have this option set to use amperage from the duct bank, the duct bank derated amps
are used as the override value, in place a manual override. If you specify From Duct Bank,
you will notice that the Amp Rating text box is disabled and can only be changed using the duct
bank evaluation. Essentially, the derated amperage value from a duct bank works identically
to a specified manual override, except that you do not edit the value directly. When From Duct
Bank is selected, only the duct bank evaluation can update the override value. For more
information, see "Duct bank evaluation" on page 284.

Editing a Model
If you have this option set to From Conductor and also have a duct bank applied, Synergi will
ignore the duct bank conductors for amperage ratings, using the conductors specified in the
section record instead. This situation will produce a warning on analysis reports.
Distributed and spot loads
Set the following options in regard to distributed and spot loads on the section:
l % Growth rate/year. Section growth rate. For more information on growth rates,
see "Load growth" on page 286.
l Connection. Load connection for the section. The load connection also applies to the
generation component of a large customer, if modeled on the section.
l Load category. Load categories are an optional Synergi setting that you can use to
group common sections for reporting and mapping (color-by) purposes. Load categories
have no effect on analysis and do not have any other impact on your model.
The available categories are defined in your Synergi preferences. For more information,
see "Categories preferences" on page 51.
Elbows/switch gear
Settings to model an elbow at either or both section ends. For more information on modeling
elbows, see "Elbows" on page 469.
Link to facilities attached to this section
If any facilities are placed on the section you are editing, click on the “Go To” buttons located
in this area to open the appropriate device editor. Any device types that are not present on the
current section will be disabled.
Load Dist tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Load - Dist tab of the Section
Capacity factor
Factor that allows you to simulate under-utilized transformers in your system. The factor,
which can be from 0 (0%) to 1 (100%) or greater, is applied as a flat multiplier to connected
kVA on all phases during load allocation. For more information, see "Capacity factors" on
page 492.
conn kVA
Total kVA capacity of the transformers on each phase for the section, excluding spot load
connected kVA. This information is required for load allocation analysis if you are allocating
loads based on connected kVA. If you do not have by-phase load information, apply the load
equally among the phases.
conn kWh
Total peak-month kWh usage in each phase of the section, excluding spot load connected
kWh. This information is required if you wish to allocate loads based on kWh with load
allocation analysis. If you do not have by-phase load information, apply the load equally
among the phases.

Editing a Model
Customers
Total number of customers per phase for the section. A single three-phase customer is
represented by 0.3 in each phase. Customer information is required if you are allocating loads
based on the RUS method with load allocation analysis. If you do not have by-phase customer
totals, apply the customers equally among the phases.
Description
Optional description for the distributed load. This field has no effect on any Synergi analysis.
You can use it to store any pertinent data you may want to reference later.
Distributed constant percent load
Use the %I, %Z, and %PQ text boxes to specify the percentage of the distributed load that
is constant current, constant impedance, and constant power, as appropriate. Since loads are
never truly 100% constant power, you can use these check boxes to more accurately define
the characteristics of the load, thus leading to more accurate analysis results.
These fields will be disabled when the “Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes”
check box is selected.
For more information on I, Z, PQ, see "Load %I, %Z, %PQ" on page 491.
Distributed load/phase
Actual load values for the distributed load.
l Use the A, B, and C columns specify the load values for each phase. The values that you
enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals column.
l If you enter a value in the Totals column instead, that value will be distributed
proportionally among the three phases based on the current values for each phase.
Synergi provides several other methods that you can use to edit load values. For example,
you can:
l Click the Balance button to divide the loads equally among all three phases.
l Click the Load Graph button to edit load values using a graphical display. Click the Year
button at the top of the display to select a specific year to edit; select “All” to edit load
values for all years at once. Click anywhere outside of the Load Graph editor to close
the window.

Editing a Model
Load Graph button
l Use the load allocation analysis to populate values for KW and kvar. For more
information on load allocation analysis, see "Load allocation analysis" on page 580.
kvar
Distributed kvar load on the section. The kvar demand does not include the section’s
capacitors or cable capacitance.
kW
Distributed kW load on the section.
Set with AMI
This check box identifies that the section’s distributed loads are AMI loads. Synergi will select
this check box automatically when you import and process AMI loads using CMM and the AMI
Processor. You can also select and clear the check box manually, if desired.
During a load allocation analysis, you can select an option to not update AMI loads. That
option will effectively ignore any sections where the “Set with AMI” check box is selected. If
any of your AMI loads have bad data or large loads that you want to allocate, you can clear
the “Set with AMI” check box for the sections you want to allocate, while leaving it selected
for the sections you do not want to allocate.
For more information on AMI load processing, see "Loading AMI data" on page 332. For more
information on load allocation, see "Load allocation analysis" on page 580.
Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes
Select this check box to use the I, Z, and PQ values that are defined in a selected customer
zone. When you select this check box, the text boxes to edit the I, Z, and PQ values for the
distributed load will be disabled.

Editing a Model
Use customer zone

Select this check box to assign customer zone load curves to the distributed load. Use the
Customer Zone option list to select the name of the customer zone that you want to apply.
In the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, you can optionally configure a
global customer zone. This global zone will be used when you select the “Use customer zone”
check box but you do not select a specific customer zone name. This option is described in
"Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 499.
Additional information on customer zones and load curves is provided in "Customer load
curves/time-of-day analysis" on page 294.
Load Spot tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Load - Spot tab of the Section
Capacity factor
page 492.
conn. kVA and conn. kWh
Total transformer connected KVA and connected kWh. These values are optional and for
reference purposes only, and may be particularly useful if you generate your models directly
from a GIS. Synergi does not use it for any analysis. However, it may appear in reports, such
as the inventory report.
Customers
Total customer load per phase in the spot load.
Description
Optional description for the spot load. This field has no effect on any Synergi analysis. You can
use it to store any pertinent data you may want to reference later.
Distributed constant percent load
Use the %I, %Z, and %PQ text boxes to specify the percentage of the spot load that is
constant current, constant impedance, and constant power, as appropriate. Since loads are
never truly 100% constant power, you can use these check boxes to more accurately define
the characteristics of the load, thus leading to more accurate analysis results.
These fields will be disabled when the “Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes”
check box is selected.
For more information on I, Z, PQ, see "Load %I, %Z, %PQ" on page 491.
kW
Total metered kW per phase for the spot load. If you do not have by-phase load information,
apply the load equally among the phases.
kvar
Total kvar per phase for the spot load.

Editing a Model
Spot load/phase
Actual load values for the spot load.
l Use the A, B, and C columns specify the load values for each phase. The values that you
enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals column.
l If you enter a value in the Totals column instead, that value will be distributed
proportionally among the three phases based on the current values for each phase.
Synergi provides several other methods that you can use to edit load values. For example,
you can:
l Click the Balance button to divide the loads equally among all three phases.
l Click the Load Graph button to edit load values using a graphical display. Click the Year
the window.
Balance and Load Graph buttons
l Use the Synergi Bulk Editor to edit spot loads for all sections at once. For more
information, see "Using the Bulk Editor" on page 254.
Spot load status and location
l Is On. Select to enable the spot load.
l From Node, Center, and To Node. Select the option that reflects the location of the
spot load relative to the section.
Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes
Select this check box to use the I, Z, and PQ values that are defined in a selected customer
zone. When you select this check box, the text boxes to edit the I, Z, and PQ values for the

Editing a Model
spot load will be disabled.

Use customer zone
Select this check box to assign customer zone load curves to the spot load. Then, use the
Customer Zone option list to select the name of the customer zone that you want to apply.
In the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, you can optionally configure a
global customer zone. This global zone will be used when you select the “Use customer zone”
check box but you do not select a specific customer zone name. This option is described in
"Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 499.
Additional information on customer zones and load curves is provided in "Customer load
Load Proj tab – Section editor

Projects allow you to set up multiple spot loads on a single section. Their use is optional, and
they can be used in conjunction with traditional spot loads, which are specified on the Load -
Spot tab in the Section editor. Projects allow you to selectively enable and disable individual
loads on a single section, and separately energize and retire individual loads during multi-
year modeling.
You can use the Load - Proj tab in the Section editor to add, edit, and delete projects for
individual sections. You can also use the Project worksheet to add, edit, and delete projects
for all sections in your model at one time.
Refer to the sections listed below for information on setting up project loads for a section.
Additional information on projects is provided in "Projects (Load)" on page 493.
l "Editing projects using the Section editor" on the next page
l "Editing projects using the Project worksheet" on page 359
l "Editing projects using the Project Manager" on page 361
The following list describes the fields that you can edit for each project. These fields are
available from both the Load - Proj tab in the Section editor and the Project worksheet.
A, B, and C
Phases over which the total load is distributed. The total project load is divided equally among
all selected phases that are configured for the respective section.
Code
A second field for organizational use. The code is intended for smaller, categorical identifiers
that may be particularly useful for sorting and organizing projects in the Project View window.
The code is not used by Synergi.
Description
Any description for organizational use only. The description is not used by Synergi.
Energize and Retire
Energize and retire years, used for multi-year modeling and analysis. For more information,
see "Editing energize and retire years" on page 81.

Editing a Model
kW/kvar
Total project load value, for all phases. This value is always the total load applied, whether to
a single phase, or balanced between multiple phases.
Multiplier
Multiplier value for the project years.
Name
Project name, which must be unique for data storage and identification purposes.
Use the Manager to transfer project to another section
This field is used on conjunction with the Project Manager to move a project from one section
to another. For specific information, see "Editing projects using the Project Manager" on
page 361.
Editing projects using the Section editor
The Load - Proj tab of the Section editor can be used to edit the projects that are associated
with a single section. The changes you make here are reflected in the Project worksheet for
the respective project.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on working in the Section editor. For
other methods of editing projects, see "Editing projects using the Project worksheet" on the
facing page and "Editing projects using the Project Manager" on page 361.
To open the Section editor (Load - Proj tab)
to edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Load - Proj tab.
The following list describes the different tasks that you can perform from the Load - Proj tab
of the Section editor.
To add a project
In the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor, click Add. A new project is added to the end of the
existing list.
To edit a project
1. In the list of projects in the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor, select the project that
you want to edit.
2. Use the fields in the lower half of the Load - Proj tab to edit the settings for the project.
The individual fields are described in "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on the previous
page.
To enable a project
1. In the list of projects, select the project that you want to enable.
2. Select (check) the check box in the Enable column of the projects list.

Editing a Model
To disable a project
you want to disable.
2. Clear (uncheck) the check box in the Enable column of the projects list.
To copy a project
you want to copy.
2. Click Copy. A copy of the selected project is added to the end of the existing list.
To delete a project
you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
To open the Project worksheet
In the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor, click Worksheet. The Project worksheet opens,
where you can add, edit, and delete projects for the current section as well as all other
sections in your model. For more information on using the Project worksheet, see "Editing
projects using the Project worksheet" below.
To move the project to another section
In the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor, click Manager. The Project Manager opens, where
you can move projects from one section to another. For more information on using the Project
Manager, see "Editing projects using the Project Manager" on page 361.
Editing projects using the Project worksheet
The Project worksheet provides a convenient method to edit all projects for the selected
feeders in your model. The changes you make here are reflected in the Load - Proj tab of the
Section editor for each respective project.
The upper half of the Project worksheet shows each project in the selected feeders in your
model. The worksheet includes fields such as the project’s name, phasing, and energize and
retire years. The lower half of the Project worksheet includes data fields that you can use to
edit the settings for a selected project, plus toolbar buttons that you can use perform tasks
such as adding, editing, and deleting projects. This area also includes a table that shows
multi-year data for the selected project, including kW and kVAR for each year. The current
year is highlighted in the multi-year table, and inactive years for the project are grayed out.
The propagation method is shown below the table, and summary data for all projects (such as
the number of projects and the number of active projects) is shown to the right of the table.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on working in the Project worksheet.
For other methods of editing projects, see "Editing projects using the Section editor" on the
previous page and "Editing projects using the Project Manager" on page 361.

Editing a Model
To open the Project worksheet

2. In the Worksheets group, click Projects.
The following list describes the different tasks that you can perform from the Project
worksheet.
To add a project
1. In the Project worksheet, click Add.

2. In the Sections editor, select the section where the new project will be located.
3. Click OK to accept the selection. The new project is added to the worksheet.
To edit a project
1. In the list of projects in the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to edit.
2. Double-click the project, or right-click and select Edit.
3. Use the fields in the lower half of the Project worksheet to edit the settings for the
project. The individual fields are described in "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on
page 357.
4. Click Update to accept the changes and display them in the worksheet.
To enable a project
1. In the list of projects in the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to
enable.
2. Click Enable, or select (check) the check box in the Enable column of the worksheet.
To disable a project
1. In the list of projects in the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to
disable.
2. Click Disable, or clear (uncheck) the check box in the Enable column of the worksheet.
To copy a project
1. In the list of projects in the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to copy.
2. Click Copy. A copy of the selected project is added to the worksheet.
To delete a project
1. In the list of projects, select the project that you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
To work with sections for a project
1. In the list of projects in the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to work
with.

Editing a Model
2. Right-click and select from one of the following options:

l Edit Section to open the Section editor for the associated section
l Zoom to zoom the map display to the location of the associated section
l Add to Query to send the associated section to the Query tab
To move a project from one section to another
1. In the Project worksheet, select the project that you want to move. Use the Shift or Ctrl
keys to select multiple projects.
2. Select the Map window.
3. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section that you want to move the project
to and select Move Project. The project is moved to the new section
To edit the list of projects
In the Project worksheet, the data columns in the Projects window can be edited, just like the
data columns in many Synergi views. You can resize and move the data columns, and can also
sort and filter the data in the columns. Information on the different tasks that you can perform
is provided in "Editing data columns" on page 92.
Editing projects using the Project Manager
The Project Manager provides a convenient method to move projects from one section to
another. The left side of the Project Manager shows each project in the selected feeders in
your model. The project list includes the project name, section name, feeder name, and load.
The lower-right side of the Project Manager is a buffer area. You can use this area to identify
the projects that you want to move from one section to another. The upper-right area shows
the projects that are assigned to the most recently selected section.
To move a project from one section to another, you would to use the Project Manager to
identify the project that you want to move, and then move that project to the project buffer.
Then, you would select the section that you want to move the project to; this section appears
in the upper-right corner of the Project Manager. When you click the Apply button, the
selected project in the buffer area will be transferred from the original section to the selected
target section.
The Project Manager includes several toolbar buttons that you can use to interact with your
sections. For example, you can zoom to a selected section, and also open the Section editor
for a selected section. Refer to the following procedure for more information on working in the
Project Manager. For other methods of editing projects, see "Editing projects using the
Section editor" on page 358 and "Editing projects using the Project worksheet" on page 359.
To open the Project Manager

2. In the Managers group, click Projects.
The following list describes the different tasks that you can perform using the Project
Manager.

Editing a Model
To move a project from one section to another
1. In any area of the Project Manager, locate the name of the project that you want to
move.
2. Click Buffer. The project name will move from the “All Projects” area of the Project
Manager to the “Buffer” area.
3. Use the Synergi map display to select the section that you want to move the project to.
That section will be listed in the “Section” area of the Project Manager. If any other
projects are associated with that section, those projects will also be listed in the Section
area.
4. In the Buffer area, select the name of the project that you want to move, and then click
Apply. The project will be removed from its original section and added to the section
that is listed in the Section area.
To edit a project
1. In any area of the Project Manager, select the name of the project that you want to edit.
2. Click Edit. This will open the Section editor for the section that is associated with the
project.
3. Use the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor to edit the settings for the project. For
information on the fields you can edit, see "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on page 357.
To zoom to the location of a project
1. In any area of the Project Manager, select the name of the project that you want to
view.
2. Click Zoom. The Synergi map display window will zoom to the location of the section
that is associated with the project.
Load DTran tab – Section editor

Use the Load - DTran tab in the Section editor you to add, edit, and delete distribution
transformers for individual sections. You can also use the DTrans worksheet to add, edit, and
delete distribution transformers for any section in your model.
The following table describes the fields that you can edit for each distribution transformer.
These fields are available from both the Load - DTran tab and the DTrans worksheet.
To edit distribution transformers using the Section editor
to edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Load - DTran tab. The following table describes the

Editing a Model
different tasks that you can perform.
To ... Do This ...
Add a distribution Click Add. A new distribution transformer is added to the

transformer end of the existing list.
Edit a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer distribution transformer that you want to edit.
b. Use the tabs in the lower half of the Load - DTran
tab to edit the settings for the distribution
transformer. The individual fields are described
later in this help topic.
Copy a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer transformer that you want to copy.
b. Click Copy. A copy of the selected distribution
transformer is added to the end of the existing list.
Delete a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer transformer that you want to delete.
b. Click Delete.
Open the Click Worksheet. The DTrans worksheet opens, where

Distribution you can add, edit, and delete distribution transformers for
Transformer the current section as well as any other section in your
worksheet model. For more information, see the following
procedure.
To edit distribution transformers using the DTran worksheet

2. In the Worksheets group, click DTrans.

Editing a Model
3. Use the options in the DTrans worksheet to perform the following tasks.
To ... Do This ...
Add a distribution a. Click Add.

transformer b. In the Sections editor, select the section where the
new distribution transformer will be located.
c. Click OK to accept the selection. The new
distribution transformer is added to the worksheet.
Edit a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer distribution transformer that you want to edit.
b. Double-click the distribution transformer, or right-
click and select Edit.
c. Use the fields in the lower half of the DTrans
worksheet to edit the settings for the distribution
transformer. The individual fields are described
later in this help topic.
d. Click Update to accept the changes and display
them in the worksheet.
Copy a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer transformer that you want to copy.
b. Click Copy. A copy of the selected distribution
transformer is added to the worksheet.
Delete a distribution a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

transformer transformer that you want to delete.
b. Click Delete.
c. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Work with sections a. In the list of distribution transformers, select the

for a distribution distribution transformer that you want to work with.
transformer b. Right-click and select from one of the following
options:
l Edit Section to open the Section editor for
the associated section.
l Zoom to zoom the map display to the location
of the associated section.
l Send to Query to send the associated section
to the Query tab.
4. Right-click on the DTrans Worksheet tab and select Close to close the worksheet.
Desc tab

Editing a Model
The following table describes the options that appear on the Desc tab of the Section editor’s
Load - DTran tab. These options also appear in the DTran worksheet.
Tran id Name of the distribution transformer.
Desc Description of the distribution transformer. This field is optional

and has no effect on any analysis.
Energize and Retire Energize and retire years, used for multi-year modeling and
analysis. For more information, see "Editing energize and
retire years" on page 81.
A, B, and C Phases to which the distribution transformer will be applied.
Demand tab
The following table describes the options that appear on the Demand tab of the Section
editor’s Load - DTran tab. These options also appear in the DTran worksheet.
kVA kVA value for the distribution transformer. When you are
updating your model loads from a CMM data set, kVA is
calculated from the kW and kvar values using the following
formula:
The kW and kvar values are shown on the Load - Dist tab of the
Section editor.
pf % Power factor for the distribution transformer.
c.kWh Total peak-month kWh usage for the distribution transformer,

excluding spot load kWh. This is required if you wish to allocate
loads based on kWh with load allocation analysis.
c.Cust Total number of customers for the distribution transformer.

Customer information is required if you are allocating loads
based on the RUS method with load allocation analysis.
Gen kW Generated power kW for all customers connected to the

distribution transformer.
Gen pf % Generated power factor for all customers connected to the

c.G Cust Total number of generation customers for the distribution

transformer.

Editing a Model
Tran tab
The following table describes the options that appear on the Tran tab of the Section editor’s
Tran Specifies a transformer type from the equipment warehouse. A

transformer type must have the “This is a distribution
transformer” check box selected on the Ratings tab of the
Transformer Type editor to be available for use with a section
If the referenced transformer type does not exist in the
currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the transformer
type will be displayed as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails
because of a missing equipment type, the resulting report will
specifically indicate the offending device(s). The transformer
type association will be restored once a matching equipment
warehouse is opened.
For more information on transformer types, see "Editing a
transformer type" on page 481.
Hi/Low Transformer connection type for high-side and low-side voltage

settings.
c.kVA Total kVA capacity of the distribution transformer, excluding

spot load connected kVA. This information is required for load
allocation analysis if you are allocating loads based on
connected kVA.
%Z Nameplate value expressed as a percent using the rated kVA as

a base. For more information on impedance, see the Synergi
X/R Nameplate X/R. For more information on impedance, see the

Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Service tab
The following table describes the options that appear on the Service tab of the Section editor’s
Line Main and tap conductor or duct bank types for the distribution
transformer. Available conductor types are stored in your
equipment data source. For more information on conductor
types, see "Conductors" on page 375.

Editing a Model
Length Main and tap conductor lengths.
X and Y Transformer coordinates from the CMM import file.
Gen Dist tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Gen - Dist tab of the Section
Description
Optional description for the section’s distributed generator. This field has no effect on any
analysis.
Generation is on
Enables the distributed generator on the section.
Generator output
Select from one of the following options:
l Rated kW output.
l Specify Output %. Select this option to specify the percentage of steady-state
contribution of the generator. The value is the percent of the capacity of the generating
unit that is contributing toward the kW and kvar loading requirements of the feeder.
l Weather based performance.
l DER profile. Select this option to specify that the generator’s output is defined by the
generation curves in a DER profile. For more information, see "DER profiles" on
page 309.
l Specify pf. Select this check box to specify a power factor percentage specific to this
section’s distributed generator. If the check box is cleared, the rated power factor
percentage for the associated generator type will be used.
Inverter
Equipment type that defines the voltage and frequency trips for the generator. Inverters
provide a convenient way to re-use common generator settings in your model.
For more information on the inverter equipment type, see "Editing an inverter" on page 423.
Location
Location of the distributed generator on the section. Available options are as follows:
l From node
l Center
l To node
Specify rated output
Overrides rated output values from the selected generator type with the values you specify
here.

Editing a Model
l Rated kW and Pf%. Peak generation capacity for the Distributed generator. Use the
A, B, and C columns to specify the peak values for phases A, B, and C. The values that
you enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals/Average column for Rated kW,
and averaged in the Totals/Average column for Pf %.
o If you enter a value in the “Rated kW” Totals/Average column, that value will be
distributed proportionally among the first three phases based on the current
values for each phase.
o If you enter a value in the “Pf%” Totals/Average column, that value will be set as
the value for each active phase. It will not be applied proportionally as is done
with the Rated kW values.
These values can be specified over multiple years for a multi-year analysis. To specify a
value for a specific year, select the desired year in Synergi and then set the peak
values, as appropriate. As you change the modeling year, the values will change in the
dialog box according to the values you have already set.
l Capacity factor. Factor that relates the average output of the generator to the rated
output of the generator.
You can also click the Balance button to divide the loads equally among all three phases, and
the Graph button to edit load values using a graphical display.
Type
Select a generator type from your equipment warehouse to apply to the distributed generator
on the section. Take note of the following:
l Only generator types that have been configured for use with section distributed
generation will be available for selection from this list. (This is done by selecting the
“Section Dist Gen” option on the Ratings tab of the Generator Type editor.)
l Some options on this tab will be enabled or disabled based on which generator type you
select.
l If the referenced generator type does not exist in the currently loaded equipment
warehouse, then the generator type will be displayed as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails
because of a missing equipment type, the resulting report will specifically indicate the
offending device(s). The generator type association will be restored once a matching
equipment warehouse is opened.
For more information on generator types, see "Editing a generator type" on page 420.
Zones tab – Section editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Zones tab of the Section editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a section" on page 347.
Cost zone
Cost zone that is associated with the section. Cost zones provide valuable information
relevant to the Economic analysis module. The cost zone editor includes maintenance cost
information for feeders and substations as well as cost multipliers for fuses, equipment,
distribution transformers, and customers. These values are combined with performance
metrics such as load factor, utilization, and efficiency to determine the cost per MW or MWHr.

Editing a Model
For more information on cost zones, see "Managing cost zones" on page 704.
Energize and Retire
Exposure factors
Exposure factors for the section’s exposure zone:
l Permanent failures
l Temporary failure rates
l Repair times
For more information on exposure factors, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Exposure zone
Name of an exposure zone that is associated with the section for reliability analyses. An
exposure zone represents a preset collection of failure data that can be applied directly to
multiple sections, so that you do not have to configure identical data for each section. All
sections assigned to a particular exposure zone share common values for that zone.
For more information on exposure zones and reliability analyses, see "Exposure zones" on
page 677.
Gen response zone
Growth curve
Growth curve that is associated with the section for single-year and multi-year modeling.
Growth curves are collections of annual growth rates that you can assign to sections as a
zone. All sections assigned to a particular growth curve share common values for that zone.
For more information on growth curves, see "Using growth curves" on page 290.
Load response zone
Mitigation zone
Name of a mitigation zone that is associated with the section for reliability analyses. A
mitigation zone is a collection of root failure causes in your system, with a percentage of
mitigation effectiveness assigned to each. When you assign a mitigation zone to a section,
root causes are considered mitigated according to the respective percentages. All sections
assigned to a particular mitigation zone share common values for that zone.
For more information on mitigation zones and reliability analyses, see "Mitigation zones" on
page 679.
Weather zone
Weather zone that is associated with the section. Weather zones allow you to model the
variation in cloud cover in different parts of a system. For example, solar plants in different
sections may experience significant differences in cloud cover. This could result in a large
MVA input from one plant and a substantial MVA drop in another. This power swing will affect

Editing a Model
flow and regulator and LTC tapping.

For more information on weather zones, see "Using weather zones to model variations in
weather conditions" on page 269.
Coordinates tab – Section editor

The Coordinates tab in the Section editor lists the XY coordinates for all nodes and graphic
points that are associated with the section. The node coordinates cannot be edited from this
list, but you can add, edit, and delete any of the graphics points.
The following list describes the tasks you can perform from the Coordinates tab of the Section
To add a graphic point
1. If desired, select an existing graphic point in the current list of graphic points. (The new
graphic point will be inserted before the selected point.)
2. Click Insert New. A new graphic point is inserted with a default position of 0.000,0.000.
To edit a graphic point coordinate
1. Double-click the coordinate that you want to edit.

2. Type a new value and then press Enter.
To change the order of graphic points in the list
1. Select the graphic point that you want to move.

2. Click Move Up or Move Down, as appropriate, to rearrange the order of the point.
Note that this action does not physically move the point—that is, it does not change the
XY coordinates. It only moves the position of the graphic point in the current list in the
Coordinates tab.
To delete a graphic point
1. Select the graphic point that you want to delete.

2. Click Delete.
Moving and copying a section

Synergi provides several ways you can move and copy sections.
l You can move a section by moving the nodes and vertices associated with the section.
For more information, see "Moving a node" on page 383 and "Moving a graphic point" on
page 394.
l You can use the Move tool to move and copy sections and devices that have been copied
to the query set. For more information, see "Moving and copying sections that are in the
query set" on page 252.

Editing a Model
Changing a section ID
Section IDs within a model must be unique. Synergi produces a default ID for each new
section, based on preferences that you set in the Synergi tab of the Preferences editor. Your
can have Synergi attempt to follow existing ID patterns or generate random unique IDs. In
either case, Synergi first searches the model in memory to ensure that the new ID is unique.
However, be aware that if you do not have the entire model in memory, this validation
process will not be complete.
Since unique IDs are critical, you should set your preferences to generate random IDs if you
are have only loaded a portion of the model into memory. For more information on setting the
section ID preference, see "Synergi preferences" on page 31.
To change a section ID
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, locate the section whose ID you want to
edit.
2. Right-click on the section and select Change ID.
3. In the ID Changing Utility editor, type the new ID for the section.
4. Click OK to accept the new section ID and close the editor.
Connecting and disconnecting sections

Once a section is created, you can connect it to or disconnect it from another section using the
Reconnect Section tool. Once you enable this tool, you can select the section you want to edit,
select a node, and drag it to a new location on the map. If you drop the node over top of an
existing node, the sections become connected. If you drag a node away from an existing
connection, those sections become disconnected and a new node is created.
Synergi allows sections to be connected only if there are no loop violations and if your
preferences are set to not allow loop violations. For more information on loops and loop
creation, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on page 343. For more information on disabling
the “Allow Loop Creation” option in your Synergi preferences, see "Synergi preferences" on
page 31.
To disconnect or reconnect a section

2. In the Model group, click the Reconnect Section button.
NOTE: If the Reconnect Section button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the
button becomes enabled.
3. In the Synergi map display, click on the section that you want to disconnect or connect.
A valid section will turn red when you click on it.
4. Click on one of the nodes for the section and then drag it to a new location in the map
display. Release the mouse button to complete the move.

Editing a Model
Reconductoring and rephasing a section

Use the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor to change conductors, add new phases, and
change phasing for a section and its downstream sections. With the Reconductor option, you
can change both the Phase and Neutral conductors for the current section and all downstream
sections, or only downstream sections with the same phasing, or only downstream sections
with the same phase conductor. With the Rephasing and Add Phase options, all downstream
sections will inherit the same change, provided that those sections first meet the criteria for
the Add Phase option. For example, if the selected section and all downstream sections
already use three phases, then the Add Phase option is disabled since there is nothing you can
add.
To change section conductors
1. In the Synergi map display, locate the section that you want to work with.
2. Right-click on the section and select Rephase and Reconductor.
3. In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Reconductor check box.
4. Under Downstream Sections, select from one of the following options to indicate which
sections you want to edit:
l All
l Sections with same phasing
l Sections with same phase conductor
5. Under New Conductors, select a conductor from your warehouse to apply as the new
Phase conductor and also the new Neutral conductor. Clear the appropriate check box
if you do not want to apply a change to one of the conductor categories.
6. Click Finish to apply your changes to the model and close the editor.
To add a new phase
3. In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Add Phase check box and
then select the phase you want to add (A, B, or C). Note that the phase that you select
will be applied to the current section and all downstream sections, as applicable.
To change section phasing
3. In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Rephase check box.
4. Under the Rephase check box, change the section phasing as appropriate for the A, B,
and C phases. Note that the phase that you select will be applied to the current section
and all downstream sections, as applicable.

Editing a Model
Splitting a section
You can split an existing section into two separate sections by inserting a node in the middle.
The original section will be located on the source end and existing devices located on the
original section will remain with the original section. Synergi will recalculate the line lengths
of both the existing section and the newly created section.
The new node will be named according to the preferences that you have set in the Synergi tab
of the Preferences editor, as described in "Synergi preferences" on page 31.
To split an existing section

2. In the Model group, click the Add Node button.
NOTE: If the Add Node button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button
becomes enabled.
3. Move the cursor over any section in your model. The cursor will change to a cross
symbol when you are over a section. Use this change in cursor type to locate where in
the section you want to insert the node.
4. Click the left mouse button to insert the node.
5. In the Enter section ID dialog box, click OK to accept the default name for the new
section that is being created by Synergi as a result or your node insert action, or type a
new name for the new section and then click OK.
Copying construction data from one section to another

Synergi’s “Copy Construction” tool provides an easy method to copy all construction data from
one section to another. This is the data that appears on the Construction tab of the Section
editor, as described in "Construction tab – Section editor" on page 349.
To copy construction data from one section to another

2. In the Model group, click the Copy Construction button.
Copy Construction button
3. In the Synergi map display, click on the section that you want to copy construction data
from. The selected section will turn red.

Editing a Model
4. Click on the section that you want to copy construction data to.
Deleting a section
Perform one of the following procedures to delete a section from your model.
To delete a section from the model
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, locate the section that you want to
delete.
2. Right-click on the section and select Delete.
To delete a section using Delete Section mode

2. In the Model group, click the Delete Section button.
Delete Section Mode button
3. In the Synergi map display, click on the section that you want to delete.
About force-unfed sections

In a Synergi model, sections with unfed phases are generally considered completely unfed, a
condition known as “force-unfed.” For analysis purposes, force-unfed sections are regarded
the same as any unfed section, normally dropped from the analysis altogether. The following
figure shows a two-phase section that is force-unfed because the feeding section is single-
phase.
A force-unfed section

Editing a Model
Force-unfed sections are regarded as unfed until the source problem is fixed. Synergi
analyses do not attempt any temporary fixes for the purposes of completing analysis, because
such actions would encourage unreliable results due to inaccurate models.
The model cleanup application has a special command for fixing force-unfed situations in a
model, 4012. For more information, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Conductors
Synergi provides a detailed conductor model. In Synergi, conductor type records are stored in
your equipment data source and treated similar to equipment types.
The sample equipment database provided with your copy of Synergi contains a conductor
table with many of the commonly used conductors. Most values were taken from the
Transmission and Distribution Reference Book. You may use the information in the table or
customize your own conductor models.
Creating a conductor type

Perform the following procedure to create a new conductor type in your equipment
warehouse.
To create a conductor type

2. Right-click and select New Device > Conductor.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click
OK.
4. Use the Conductor Type editor to edit the settings for the conductor type. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a conductor type" below.
Editing a conductor type

To edit a conductor type, double-click the conductor type name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Construction tab in the Section editor, you can also click the
edit button that is located next to the name of a conductor that is selected in the Conductor
Types area.
To edit a conductor type

2. Expand Conductor (Base) or Conductors (Cable) and then double-click the name of
the conductor type that you want to edit.
conductor type. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Ratings tab – Conductor Type editor" on the next page
l "Cable tab – Conductor Type editor" on page 377

Editing a Model
NOTE: For general information on working with equipment types, including adding and
deleting equipment types, see "Creating and editing equipment types" on page 397.
Ratings tab – Conductor Type editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Ratings tab of the Conductor
Type editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a conductor type" on the
previous page.
Calculate impedance
Sets Synergi to calculate its own values for impedance. Any values that are specified in the
Conductor editor will be ignored.
Color
Specifies the color that is used to represent the conductor in the Synergi map display when
your display settings are set to color the map by conductor. For more information on the
display settings, see "Customizing the map display" on page 97.
Conductor model
Specifies the type of conductor. The option that you select here will enable and disable other
options in the Conductor editor.
The available conductor model types are described in "Types of cable conductors" on
page 272.
Continuous amp rating
Continuous current rating. This value is used in analyses to calculate the percent loading and
for displaying regulator overload exceptions. The value can be set for summer and winter,
which is then used in weather modeling.
For more information on conductors and weather modeling, see "Setting up conductors to use
seasonal ratings" on page 267.
Damage factor
Key factor in the conductor damage curve equation. This parameter is only used for plotting
conductor damage curves on the TCC. For more information on conductor damage curves, see
Description
Optional description for the conductor type.
Emergency amp rating
Emergency current rating. This value is used in balanced and by-phase analysis and capacitor
placement to flag overloaded sections and to display regulator overload exceptions. The value
can be set for summer and winter, which is then used in weather modeling.
For more information on conductors and weather modeling, see "Setting up conductors to use
seasonal ratings" on page 267.
Impedance values
User-specified conductor impedance and diameter. Some of these fields may be disabled

Editing a Model
depending on your selections for “Conductor Model” and “Use specified impedance”.
Use specified impedance
Sets Synergi to use the user-specified impedance values. Values are entered in the
Impedance area of the Conductor editor.
Cable tab – Conductor Type editor

The Cable tab of the Conductor Type editor provides information that applies to cable
conductor types only. The options on this tab will be enabled when you have selected a cable-
type conductor in the Ratings tab. In addition, much of the data in this tab only applies to
ampacity studies, and will be enabled only if you have selected the “Use in ampacity studies”
check box, which is located on the Cable tab.
The following list describes the options you can edit on the Cable tab of the Conductor Type
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a conductor type" on page 375. For
diagrams that display many of the parameters you can set in this tab, see "Concentric neutral
cable model" on page 273 and "Tape shield conductor model" on page 274.
Cable data
Use the options in the Cable data area to specify the following:
l Conductor diameter.
l Insulation diameter.
l Outside diameter.
l Sheath thickness. For a “Concentric neutral” conductor type, this option specifies the
thickness of the sheath between the insulation and the concentric neutral ring.
For a “Tape shield” conductor type, this option specifies the thickness of the sheath
between the insulation and the shielding.
l Jacket thickness. Thickness of the outer cable jacket.
l Core strand diameter. Diameter of one strand of the main conductor.
l Core strand count. Number of strands in the main conductor.
l Maximum temperature. Maximum rated temperature of the main conductor.
Cable is three-core type
Specifies that the conductor is a three-core cable type. For more information, see "Three-core
cable model" on page 275.
Cable material
Important data for impedance calculations, if you have chosen Synergi to calculate impedance
in the Ratings tab. For more information on impedance calculations, see the Synergi Electric
l Conductor Material
l Insulation Type
l Jacket Material

Editing a Model
Concentric neutral types

The following options only apply when you have selected “Concentric Neutral” as your
conductor model.
l Strand Diameter. For concentric neutral cables, the diameter of a single neutral
strand.
l Strand R. For concentric neutral cables, the resistance of a single neutral strand.
l Strand Count. Total number of strands in the concentric neutral ring.
l Diam to strand ring. The diameter of the concentric neutral ring, measured from the
center of the strands. This value should be less than the outside diameter of the cable,
but greater than the insulation diameter.
l Lay factor. For concentric neutral cables, a multiplier used to compensate for neutral
strands longer than the actual cable length, due to lay. For example, a factor of 1.2
indicates that for every unit of cable length, there are 1.2 units of strand length within.
Typical lay factor values range from 1.1 to 1.2.
Data for impedance calculations
Additional data for impedance calculations. Synergi only calculates impedance if Calculate
impedance is selected in the Ratings tab.
For more information on impedance calculations, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Relative permittivity
Relative permittivity value for the cable. This value acts as a relative multiplier against the
permittivity of air. The default value is 2.3.
Use in ampacity studies
Allows you to enable the conductor for ampacity studies. This option must be selected to
enable the other options in the tab, including the conductor material, insulation type, and
jacket material.
Sorting conductor types

In the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, the list of conductor types can be sorted
alphabetically or by amp rating size in either ascending or descending order. Refer to the
following procedure for more information.
To sort conductor types

2. Select either Conductors (Bare) or Conductors (Cable).
3. Right-click and select one of the following options:
l Sort Order > Alphabetical
l Sort Order > Size (Ascending)
l Sort Order > Size (Descending)

Editing a Model
Deleting a conductor type

Perform the following procedure to delete a conductor type from your equipment warehouse.
To delete a conductor type

2. Expand Conductors (Bare) or Conductors (Cable) and then select the name of the
conductor that you want to delete.
Conductor configuration and positions

Synergi provides detailed modeling for the line portion of a section and lets you model both
overhead conductors and underground cables. There are three methods for representing line
configuration within Synergi, allowing you to choose how detailed your model should be. The
three methods are discussed in the following sections:
l "Simple impedance" below
l "Conductor/equivalent spacing" on the next page
l "Configuration types (detailed spacing)" on the next page
The first two rely on solely on settings within the section and conductor type records. The third
requires one or more configuration type records, which are stored in the DevConfig table (in
Access) in your equipment data source, and referenced in the Section editor. For more
information on configuration types, see "Configuration types (detailed spacing)" on the next
page.
Simple impedance
To use the simple impedance method on a section, you should first specify a conductor type as
a simple impedance conductor and then apply that conductor to a section. The simple
impedance setting is found in the Conductor Type editor. For more information on editing a
conductor, see "Editing a conductor type" on page 375.
For a simple impedance conductor, Synergi uses specified impedance values and does not
perform impedance calculations. In the Conductor Type editor, you can set positive and zero
sequence values in per-length units for a simple impedance conductor. Afterward, appropriate
rows and columns of the three-by-three impedance and admittance matrices are eliminated,
as applicable.
If you are using a simple impedance conductor on a section, you should have the “equivalent
spacing” option selected in the Section editor. Detailed spacing and configuration methods are
inherently part of a calculated impedance, which makes them incompatible with a simple
impedance conductor model. If you inadvertently combine a simple impedance conductor with
a detailed spacing method, Synergi will produce an error on analysis reports and use the
specified simple impedance. For more information on editing a section, see "Editing a section"
on page 347.

Editing a Model
Conductor/equivalent spacing
This method uses conductor information from the conductor table (DevConductors) and the
equivalent spacing values of an individual section to calculate the section impedance and
admittance. You can specify both the conductor type and the spacing by editing a section’s
characteristics. This method is most applicable to overhead lines.
For more information on line impedance calculations and cable impedance calculations, see
Configuration types (detailed spacing)

With this method, each section references a configuration type record in the spacings table
(DevConfig), which contains coordinate information about conductor positions for that
configuration. With these positions, Synergi determines the precise spacing of the phase and
neutral conductors.
Keep in mind that configuration types are inherently incompatible with simple impedance
conductors, since simple impedance conductors are not intended for impedance calculations.
For more information on simple impedance conductors, see "Simple impedance" on the
previous page.
About configuration types
A configuration type is essentially a set of coordinates that specify the positions of the
different phase conductors. These positions, labeled 1, 2, 3, and N, are relative to a reference
point. When you apply a configuration to a section, you can specify which phase occupies
which position. Then, during analysis, Synergi transposes section phasing as specified and
determines spacing based on the position coordinates.
Creating a configuration type
Perform the following procedure to create a new configuration type.
To create a configuration type

2. Right-click and select New Device > Configuration.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click
OK.
4. Use the Configuration Type editor to edit the settings for the configuration type. For
more information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a configuration type" below.
Editing a configuration type
To edit a configuration type, double-click the configuration type name in the Warehouse tab of
the Synergi model explorer. From the Construction tab in the Section editor, you can also click
the edit button that is located next to the name of the selected configuration type.

Editing a Model
To edit a configuration type

2. Expand Configurations and then double-click the name of the configuration type that
you want to edit.
3. Use the Configuration Type editor to enter X and Y cross-sectional coordinates for
conductor positions. The unit value of the coordinates is either feet or meters, based on
the measurement system specified in the Units tab of the Preferences editor. An
illustration in the dialog shows you the general positions of the conductors as you adjust
the coordinates.
A more detailed discussion of the values you can enter in the Configuration Type editor
is provided in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Nodes
Nodes define the start and end points of a line section. Each section has two nodes, known as
the from-node and the to-node. In a radial model, these nodes can also be referred to as the
source and load nodes.
In most cases, nodes are created automatically when you add sections to your Synergi model,
as described in "Adding a section" on page 346. If a section is created in isolation, then two
nodes are created. If a line is created between two existing nodes, then no nodes are created.
You can also create a node by inserting a node into an existing section in your model, splitting
the existing section into two sections. This feature is described in "Splitting a section" on
page 373.
Viewing nodes in the map display

Nodes, like other symbols, can be hidden from the map display through several different
methods, including those listed below.
l Node symbols, along with most other display symbols, are hidden when you select to
hide details in the Synergi map display. You can hide map display symbols by clicking
the Details button in the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon. (The Details button is the
same option as the “Hide Details” check box in the Style tab of the Map Settings editor.)
l Nodes can also be hidden as an individual symbol category. You can toggle the node
symbols by clicking the Nodes button in the Display tab of the Synergi ribbon, or by
right-clicking in the map display and selecting Toggle Nodes. You can also edit your
map display symbol settings, as described in "Symbols map settings" on page 113.
Take note that this option will be disabled, and thus nodes will be hidden, automatically
each time you start Synergi.
l Nodes can be hidden based on your current zoom level. Zoom settings are often
configured to hide symbols when you are viewing your map display at a relatively high
zoom level, thus reducing “clutter” that may appear in the map display. Display

Editing a Model
symbols, including node symbols, will become visible as you zoom in closer to the map
display. For more information on this feature, see "Zoom map settings" on page 115.
These options may sometimes override each other, particularly in the case of the Toggle
Nodes button. For example, when your map display is zoomed out to a level where node
symbols are not displayed, clicking on the Toggle Nodes button will have no effect. The nodes
will be hidden regardless of the status of the Toggle Nodes button. This is also true when the
map details are hidden. If the Details button is disabled, the nodes will remain hidden even
when the Nodes button is enabled.
Editing a node
Perform the following procedure to edit a node in your model. Before you can begin this
procedure, make sure that node symbols are visible in your Synergi map display. Node
symbols could be hidden for a number of different reasons, as described in "Viewing nodes in
the map display" on the previous page.
To edit a node
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the node that you want to
edit.
2. In the Node editor, select the Node tab. The following list describes the options you can
edit.
l Description. Optional description for the node.
l X coordinate. X coordinate location of the node.
l Y coordinate. Y coordinate location of the node.
l Incident sections. Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the node.
This list is for informational purposes only and cannot be edited.
3. Select the Results tab. The Results tab lists key analysis results for the node. For more
information, see "Viewing results in the Synergi editor" on page 247.
Changing a node ID
Node IDs are created automatically by Synergi when each node is created, based on
preferences you have set in the Synergi tab of the Preferences editor (as described in
"Synergi preferences" on page 31). After a node has been created, you can change the ID by
right-clicking on the node in the model explorer or the Synergi map display. Each node ID
must be unique, and Synergi will prevent you from creating duplicate ID names.
To change a node ID
1. In the model explorer or the Synergi map display, right-click on the node that you want
to edit.
2. Select Change ID.

Editing a Model
3. In the ID Changing Utility editor, type the new ID for the section.
4. Click OK to accept the new node ID and close the editor.
Moving a node
Perform the following procedure to move a node in your model. Before you can begin this
procedure, make sure that node symbols are visible in your Synergi map display. Node
symbols could be hidden for a number of different reasons, as described in "Viewing nodes in
the map display" on page 381.
To move a node

2. In the Model group, click the Move Node button.
Move Node button
3. In the Synergi map display, click on the node that you want to move and then drag it to
a new location in the map. Repeat this step to move additional nodes, if desired.
Converting nodes to other device types

In the Synergi map display, you can right-click on a node and convert it to any of the following
device types:
l Feeder. For more information, see "Converting a node into a feeder or a substation
node" on page 333.
l Substation Node. For more information, see "Converting a node into a feeder or a
substation node" on page 333.
l Pad Mount Gear. For more information, see "Pad-mounted switch gear" on page 470.
Deleting a node
Synergi does not allow you to delete nodes as an individual component of a Synergi model. In
many cases, the deletion of a node will result in the combination of two sections, which
involves a serious consideration of data issues. For example, loading levels and locations
must be reconsidered, and any associated equipment must be relocated and reconfigured.
To delete a node, you must delete an incident section and reconnect the remaining section, if
required. Before doing so, be sure that you configure the remaining section properly to
prevent data loss.

Editing a Model
Synergi also provides a node reduction tool that can scan your model and eliminate
unnecessary nodes. For more information, see "Reducing the number of nodes" below.
Reducing the number of nodes

Models often include more nodes and vertices than are necessary for engineering analyses.
Excessive nodes in a model can lead to a variety of problems, including:
l Data clutter
l Slow analysis
l Unwieldy reports
l Difficulty spotting trends in voltage and loading
l Hard-to-read results annotations on the map
Synergi’s node reduction tool can reduce the number of nodes, vertices, and laterals in a
model. The node reduction options are highly flexible, allowing you to decide how closely the
reduced model will match the original. For example, you can reduce nodes only and set very
tight constraints, resulting in a model that is geo-spatially identical to the original full model
with power flow, voltage, and fault values that nearly match the values in the original model.
Or, you can loosen the constraints if warranted by data issues, although perhaps resulting in a
model that is slightly different than the original.
Node reduction provides the following major features. Each of these features is either optional
or flexible according to your node reduction options:
l Node and/or vertex reduction
l Lateral and wandering lateral reduction or elimination
l Loop detection and breaking
l Pre-reduction model and data validation
l User constraints and voltage limit checking
l Topologically identical model before and after reduction
Setting up a node reduction

Use the Node Reduction Options editor to set up a Synergi node reduction.
To open the Node Reduction Options editor

2. In the Model Forge group, select Node Reduction> Settings.
The following list describes the node reduction options that you can edit.
General operation
l Reduce nodes. Select this option to have Synergi remove nodes during the analysis.
The “Node Reduction Settings” options will be enabled when this check box is selected.

Editing a Model
For more information on this setting, see "Removing nodes" on page 387.
l Reduce vertices. Select this option to have Synergi remove vertices during the
analysis. The “Vertex Options” settings will be enabled when this check box is selected.
For more information on this setting, see "Removing vertices" on page 391.
l Open loops using elbows. Select this option to have Synergi break topological loops
by creating open elbows. For more information, see "Breaking loops with elbows" on
page 393.
l Bypass analysis-grade data checking. Select this option to have Synergi ignore the
standard data-checking process performed by Synergi analyses. With this option
selected, reduction will be performed regardless of any data errors, no matter how
severe. In addition, you will not receive any data warnings on the analysis report.
l Rollup wandering laterals (improved). Select this option to roll up wandering
laterals to the point where there are no more upstream wandering laterals. Spot and
distributed loads within the wandering lateral areas are accumulated on the first section
feeding the wandering lateral area.
l Rollup laterals. Select this option to have Synergi reduce all laterals or just reduce
wandering laterals. The “Lateral Roll-Up Options” settings will be enabled when this
check box is selected. A lateral is any non-three phase section. Loads, large customers,
capacitors, and projects from laterals are added to the three-phase section at the take-
off point. Lateral rollup will not reduce sections that feed a closed switch.
Lateral must have upstream fuse
This option is enabled when you select the Rollup Laterals check box. Select this option to
require that laterals have upstream fuses. When selected, only paths downstream from a fuse
can be rolled up with the lateral rollup option.
Lateral roll-up options
The Lateral Roll-up Options are enabled when you select the Rollup Laterals check box. Select
from one of the following:
l Rollup 1Ph and 2Ph laterals
l Rollup All laterals (including wandering laterals). Select this option to set the c.kVA
into values below your threshold.
l Rollup wandering laterals and dependents. Select this option to only reduce
wandering laterals and dependents.
Node reduction settings
The following options are enabled when you select the Reduce Nodes check box:
l Allow combining of unlike sections. Select this check box to allow nodes to be
removed between two sections with different conductor, zones, and/or growth rate
settings.
l Use limits on combined sections. Select this check box to enable maximum limits
for combined sections. When this option is selected, a node will not be deleted if the
resulting section violates any of the following user-defined limits:

Editing a Model
o Total length. Maximum section length allowed following a combination.

o Connected kVA. Total connected load on a combined section.
o Connected kWH. Total connected load on a combined section.
o Combined nodes. Maximum number of nodes that can be eliminated on a
combined section.
l Limit node reduction by voltage drop. Select this option to limit the number of
sections that can be combined based on the maximum total voltage drop allowable on a
combined section.
Reduce to switch path
Select this check box to reduce the model to only the sections that are along the paths from
transfer switches back to the feeders.
Reporting
The Reporting options determine whether Synergi will provide you with the opportunity to
implement the recommended node reduction edits or simply report the node reduction
findings. Select from one of the following options:
l Ask before reducing model. When this option is selected, Synergi will prompt you to
implement the edits recommended by the node reduction. If you decline, Synergi will
provide a report of the analysis findings only.
l Report only (no reduction). Select this option to have Synergi produce a report on
the analysis findings. You will not be prompted to implement the edits recommended by
the analysis.
If you choose to produce a report only, note that the proposals contained therein are
estimations only. Since some changes are dependent on previous changes, Synergi is unable
to know the exact details of the reduction until after it is performed. To find out all of the
specific reductions that node reduction recommends, you must allow the changes to be made.
TIPS: As long as you close the model without saving changes, you can safely experiment
with different node reduction scenarios without affecting your original model. Also, you
may find it helpful to create a backup copy of your original model before performing a
node reduction.
Vertex options
This option is enabled when the Reduce Vertices check box is selected. Use this option to set
the percentage by which Synergi judges whether a vertex should be removed. For more
information on this setting, see "Removing vertices" on page 391.
Performing a node reduction

Perform the following procedure to run a node reduction on your model. Node reduction runs
according to the options you have configured in the Node Reduction Options editor. It is very
important for you to carefully consider which options to set in order to produce the desired
results.
One key option to consider in the Node Reduction Options editor is the Reporting option. You
can use this option to have Synergi produce a report on the impact of the node reduction
settings, without actually committing the edits to the model. While the reporting option will

Editing a Model
only provide you with an estimate of the impact of the node reduction settings, it can provide
you with a preview of what changes you can expect in your model. Of course, you can create a
backup of your model first, or perform the node reduction but not save the model if you are
not comfortable with the results.
For more information on node reduction options, see "Setting up a node reduction" on
page 384.
To perform a node reduction

2. In the Model Forge group, click the Node Reduction icon.
3. If you have selected the “Rollup Laterals” option in the Node Reduction Settings editor,
as described in "Setting up a node reduction" on page 384, then you will be prompted to
reduce laterals before you continue with the analysis. These changes will be permanent,
regardless of whether you select to make the rest of the node reduction permanent, and
must be committed before you can perform other node reduction tasks. Select Yes to
commit the lateral reduction changes and continue with the analysis, or click No to
cancel the analysis.
4. If you have selected the “Ask Before Reducing Model” option in the Node Reduction
Settings editor, as described in "Setting up a node reduction" on page 384, then you will
be prompted to make the node reduction changes permanent. Click Yes to commit the
changes to the model, or click No to simply report on the analysis findings.
When the node reduction is complete, the Model Reduction report displays, summarizing
the node reduction results. The report includes a section titled “Rule Summary,” which
explains why nodes were not reduced in the model. A more detailed description of each
rule that is listed in the Rule Summary is provided in "Node reduction rules" on
page 389.
Node reduction methodology

Node reduction is designed to reduce the number of sections by combination, moving from the
smallest sections to the largest. The resulting reduced model should have less clutter and the
important areas should be maintained.
Removing nodes
When a node is removed, the two adjoining sections are combined. When this occurs, Synergi
can do one of two things, according to how your analysis options are set (as described in
"Setting up a node reduction" on page 384).
If your options are Then Synergi:

set to:
Reduce vertices Eliminates the node completely and redraws the section
between the two nearest incident nodes and/or vertices. For
more information, see "Eliminating a node completely" on

Editing a Model
If your options are Then Synergi:

set to:
the next page.
Not reduce vertices Eliminates the node and replaces it with a vertex. For more
information, see "Replacing a node with a vertex" below.
Eliminating a node completely
To illustrate the complete elimination of a node without a vertex substitution, consider the
following two sections:
Node
Section 2
Vertex
Section 1
Figure 3-1. Two sections, candidates for combination
Assume that no other vertices are eliminated from the model during the reduction. If the node
separating the sections is eliminated, the combined section appears as follows:
Node
Vertex
Section 1
Figure 3-2. One section resulting from the reduction
Replacing a node with a vertex
To illustrate the replacement of a node with a vertex, consider the following two sections:
Node
Section 2
Vertex
Section 1
Figure 3-3. Two sections, candidates for combination
If the node separating the sections is replaced with a vertex, the combined section appears as
follows:

Editing a Model
Node
Vertex
Section 1
Figure 3-4. One section resulting from the reduction
The result is one section with the same shape as the original two.
Detailed operation
When reducing nodes, node reduction performs the following steps.
1. Check model data.

2. Run load-flow.
3. Evaluate all nodes against rules.
4. Find shortest section incident to a reducible node.
5. Evaluate reducible node.
6. If node can be reduced, combine sections and loads, eliminate the node.
7. Repeat from step 4 until no more reduction is possible.
This algorithm is very simple and effective. The existing rule base is set up to be conservative
in the reduction, and reductions of 10% to 60% are normal. If you experience a reduction of
more than 60%, you may consider making your constraints more restrictive.
Node reduction rules
Node reduction is a rule-based application. When the application starts, all nodes are
reduction candidates. According to how your analysis options are set, some or all of the
following rules may evaluated for each node. If the node violates any of the applicable rules,
it cannot be eliminated. Node reduction rules are summarized in the “Rule Summary” section
of the Model Reduction report.
Rule Description Notes
NRR_01 Miscellaneous reduction Synergi was unable to eliminate the node for
constraint. some unspecified reason.
NRR_02 Node incidence exceeds Nodes with more than two connected sections
2. cannot be eliminated. Only nodes with two
incident sections can be eliminated.
NRR_03 Node forms an edge. Nodes tied to just one section cannot be
eliminated.
NRR_04 Configuration change. If the two sections connected by a node have

Editing a Model
different phasing, spacing values, conductor

names, or height, the node is not eliminated.
NRR_05 Length limit of [value] If elimination of the node would form a

would be exceeded. combined section whose total length exceeds
your specified constraint, the node cannot be
eliminated.
NRR_06 Connected kVA limit of If elimination of the node would form a

[value] kVA limit would combined section whose total kVA exceeds
be exceeded. your specified constraint, the node cannot be
eliminated.
NRR_07 Connected kWh limit of If elimination of the node would form a

[value] kWh limit would combined section whose total kWh exceeds
be exceeded. your specified constraint, the node cannot be
eliminated.
NRR_08 Voltage drop limit of If elimination of the node would form a

[value] V would be combined section having a scalar voltage drop
exceeded. total that exceeds your specified constraint,
the node cannot be eliminated.
NRR_09 Node combination limit The number of eliminated nodes used to form
of [value] nodes would combined sections is tracked. If the elimination
be exceeded. of the node would cause the count for the
combined section to exceed your specified
constraint, the node cannot be eliminated.
NRR_10 Topology error. Topology error prevents the elimination of the

node.
NRR_11 Source nodes (feeders —

and substation
transformers) cannot be
reduced.
NRR_12 Nodes on sections with If either section incident to the node holds
equipment will not be devices, the node is not eliminated.
reduced.
NRR_13 Node ties multiple If the node forms a tie point between multiple
feeders. feeders, it is not eliminated.
NRR_14 Percent I,Z,PQ values Load model I, Z, and PQ values are checked on

Editing a Model
are different. each side of the node. If values vary by more

than a fixed 1.5%, the node is not eliminated.
NRR_15 Load growth rates are If the load growth rate on either of the incident
different. sections differs by more than a fixed 0.15%,
the node is not eliminated.
NRR_16 Node along loop path. —
NRR_17 Elbow adjacent to node. —
NRR_18 Pad-mounted gear —

node.
NRR_19 Two sections sharing Synergi does not eliminate nodes with potential
nodes. problems with node sharing. There are
situations where deleting a node may cause a
new compound section to share the same two
nodes with an existing section. As a result, the
topology engine eliminates one of the two
sections sharing nodes. This rule looks for this
potential problem and prevents occurrence.
NRR_20 Area of interest —

adjacent to node.
NRR_21 Nodes on sections with —

areas of interest will not
be reduced.
NRR_22 Nodes on sections with Prevents the deletion of nodes that are tied to
specified amp ratings an amp-rated section. For more information,
will not be reduced. see "Properties tab – Section editor" on
page 351.
NRR_90 Don’t allow any node —

removal.
NRR_99 Unknown problem. —
Removing vertices
Synergi removes vertices based on a length percentage specified in your analysis options.
This percentage represents the following ratio:

Editing a Model
Equation 3-2.
If the specified percentage is greater than this ratio for any given vertex, the vertex is
removed. To determine the numerator, “Length of segment created by vertex,” Synergi first
performs a length trace from the vertex towards the from-node end of the section. When it
encounters the from-node or another vertex, the trace stops and this length value is used in
the calculations. In the following example, in a trace towards the from-node, the length
created by vertex “A” is 150 feet, and the length created by vertex “B” is 40 feet:
Node Total section length: 450 ft
Vertex A
D
20 ft
40 ft B C
150 ft
Figure 3-5. Section showing vertices
Therefore, if the total section length were 450 feet, you would need to specify a percentage of
34 or higher in order for Synergi to eliminate vertex “A.” A percentage of 9 would be sufficient
to eliminate vertex “B,” but not “A.” Consider the following equation for vertex “B”:
Equation 3-3.
After the from-node trace and removal of any qualifying vertices, the same process is
repeated using a trace towards the to-node. Note that any vertices removed during the from-
node trace are no longer considered. As an example, assume that vertices “B” and “C” were
eliminated from the previous example during the from-node trace. In this case, a percentage
of 5 or higher would be sufficient to eliminate vertex “D” during the to-node trace:
Node Total section length: 450 ft
Vertex A
D
20 ft
150 ft
Figure 3-6. Section with vertices “B” and “C” eliminated during the first trace
Equation 3-4.
Note that regardless of whether or not vertices are eliminated, total section length is never
recalculated.

Editing a Model
Breaking loops with elbows

Node reduction can also break loops by automatically modeling an open elbow on one of the
looped sections. Synergi selects the section with the least amount of phasing for the elbow.
After placing one elbow, Synergi re-performs the trace and continues to place elbows as
needed until all loops are broken.
Loop breaking is optional and can be controlled in the Node Reduction Options editor by
selecting the “Open Loops Using Elbows” option, as described in "Setting up a node reduction"
on page 384. For more information on elbows, see "Elbows" on page 469.
Load handling
When a section is eliminated in the process of reducing a node, the load, length, and other
data for that section is added to the combined section.
The following figure shows a group of sections with load values indicated:
20 kW 15 kW 10 kW 25 kW
Sections with individual loads
If the three center nodes are eliminated, the combined section yields:
70 kW
Combined sections with combined load
Distributed loads are modeled in the center of the section. Therefore, reduction can cause
minor changes to the model due to the combination of load and shifting of location.
Nonetheless, extensive testing has shown that loading and losses are nearly identical between
the full and reduced models. The minimum and maximum voltages on the feeder are also
nearly identical between the full and reduced models.
Ideal models with evenly distributed constant current loads tend to have higher loss values in
the reduced model. However, the voltage drop to the end of the last line is the same after the
reduction. The issue becomes more complex when I, Z, PQ load models are introduced and
when detailed by-phase analysis is performed with coupling. If you use Synergi in this
manner, you should do further research before using node reduction.
Graphic Points
Graphic points (also known as vertices or intermediate points) are used to show the
geographic contour of a section. They have no effect on any Synergi analysis. Their purpose is
solely to add shape to sections for a more intuitive map display. There is no limit to the
number of graphic points a section or a model can contain.
Adding a graphic point

Perform the following procedure to add a graphic point.

Editing a Model
To add a graphic point

2. In the Model group, click the Add Graphic Point button.
3. Move the cursor over any section in your model, in the location where you want to add
the graphic point. (The cursor will change to a crosshair symbol when you are over a
section.)
4. Click the left mouse button to create a graphic point. Or, click and hold the left mouse
button to add a graphic point and also move the point to a new location in the map, thus
reshaping the section line. Repeat this step to add additional graphic points, as needed.
Moving a graphic point

Perform the following procedure to move a graphic point.
To move a graphic point

2. In the Model group, click the Move Graphic Point button.
Move Graphic Point button
3. Move the cursor over any graphic point in your model. (The cursor will change to a
crosshair symbol when you are over a graphic point.)
4. Click and hold the left mouse button to select the graphic point, and then drag it to a
new location and release the mouse button. Repeat this step to move additional graphic
points, as needed.
Deleting a graphic point

Perform the following procedure to delete a graphic point.
To delete a graphic point

2. In the Model group, click the Delete Graphic Point button.

Editing a Model
Delete Graphic Point button
3. Move the cursor over the graphic point that you want to delete. (The cursor will change
to a crosshair symbol when you are over a graphic point.)
4. Click the left mouse button to delete the graphic point. Repeat this step to delete
additional graphic points, as needed.
Editing devices
Refer to the topics listed below for information on working with devices in Synergi.
Creating and editing devices

You can add devices to your Synergi model by dragging equipment types from the Warehouse
tab of the model explorer and dropping them onto sections in your model. Many equipment
types include the initial settings for the devices in your model, and the model devices also
reference back to the equipment type. Once a device has been placed, you can move, edit,
copy, and delete it as needed.
Adding a device
Perform the following procedure to add a device to your model.
To add a device
1. From the Warehouse tab in the Synergi model explorer, locate the device type that
you want to add to the model.
2. Drag the device from the model explorer and drop it onto the desired section, noting the
following:
a. As you drag the device, the cursor symbol changes to indicate where you can or
cannot drop the device.
b. In some cases, if you drop the device on a section already containing that type of
device, the new device replaces the old one. In other cases, Synergi will prevent
you from adding a device to a section that already has a device of that type.
c. Your map display settings will determine what symbol is used once the device has
been placed in the model. For more information on equipment display settings,
see "Symbols map settings" on page 113.

Editing a Model
Editing a device
Devices can be edited using the device editor, which is described in "Using the Synergi editor"
on page 241. Multiple devices can be edited at one time by using the Multiple Editor, which is
described in "Using the Multiple Editor" on page 253.
Information on editing specific devices is provided in the device sections of this User Guide.
Moving a device
Perform the following procedure to move a device in your model. In some cases, you can
move a device from one location on a section to another. You can also move a device from
one section to another, if such an action is permitted by Synergi. For example, you cannot
move a device from one section to another if a device of that type already exists on the target
section. You must first delete the device on the existing section before you can move another
device of the same type to that section.
To move a device

2. In the Devices group, click Move.
3. Move the cursor over any existing device in the Synergi map display. The mouse cursor
will change symbols when you hover the mouse over a device that you can move.
4. Click and drag the device to a new location, either on the other end of the current
section or to another section altogether.
NOTE: If you drop the device in an empty spot in the Synergi mouse display, the
device will be deleted from the original section and no longer exist in the model.
Copying a device
Perform the following procedure to copy a device from one section and place it on another
section. An exact copy of the original device will be created on the new section, while the
original device will not edited or modified in any way.
To copy a device from one section to another

2. In the Devices group, click Copy.
3. In the map display, click on the device that you want to copy. The mouse cursor will
change to a cross symbol when it is over a device that you can copy.
4. Click again on the section where you want to copy the device.
5. Click Yes to confirm the creation of a new device. An exact copy of the device is created
on the new section, while the original device is not edited or modified in any way.

Editing a Model
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional copies of the device on other sections, if
desired.
Deleting a device
Perform the following procedure to delete a device from the model.
To delete a device from the model
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, locate the device that you want to delete.
2. Right-click on the device and select Delete.
3. Click Remove to confirm the deletion.
TIP: You can also delete a device in “Move Device” mode by dragging and dropping
the device somewhere in empty space. For more information, see "Moving a device"
on the previous page.
Creating and editing equipment types

In Synergi, an equipment type refers to a device type or property record stored as equipment
data in your equipment data source. These records contain nameplate and other static
information about devices on the model, and in many cases represent the inventory of device
types available for modeling. For example, a regulator on the model (stored in model data as
an instance record) must reference a regulator type record in the equipment data. Therefore,
you can only model regulators that are included in your equipment data inventory.
As such, you should be sure that your equipment data contains all the device types that you
might need to model to accurately simulate your actual system. Synergi is installed with a
sample equipment database in Access that contains a variety of common device types that
you are welcome to use. However, it is likely that you will want to customize your equipment
data to suit your specific modeling needs.
Keep in mind that equipment data also contains records on certain property sets that are also
referenced by instance records and sometimes from within the equipment data itself. These
property sets include items such as customer zones and line configurations. For more
information on the equipment data and its relationship to the model data, see "Working with
Also keep in mind that any time you modify your equipment data, you must save the
equipment data source before your edits will be permanent. Synergi does not save equipment
data automatically. For more information on saving equipment data, see "Saving equipment
data" on page 148.
Creating a device type

The following procedure provides a general overview of how to create a device type.
Information on creating specific device types is provided in the device sections of this User
Guide.

Editing a Model
To create a device type

2. Right-click and select New Device > {device type}.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type, and then click
OK.
4. Use the device type editor to edit the settings for the device type. Press F1 from the
editor to view Online Help for the device type you are editing.
Editing a device type

The following procedure provides a general overview of how to edit a device type.
Information on editing specific device types is provided in the device sections of this User
Guide.
To edit a device type
1. In the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, double-click on the device type name that
you want to edit.
2. When the editor appears, edit the device type as desired.
Copying a device type

Perform the following procedure to create a duplicate copy of a device type in your equipment
data source.
To copy a device type

2. Select the name of the device type that you want to copy.
3. Right-click and select Copy As.
4. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device and click OK.
Deleting a device type

Perform the following procedure to create a delete a device type from your equipment data
source.
To delete a device type

2. Select the name of the device type that you want to delete.

Editing a Model
Breakers
Synergi provides a sophisticated breaker/relay model which supports mechanical and multi-
stage electro-mechanical relays. The breaker device itself is similar to any device, which has
a map symbol, ID, and parent section. The device itself, however, can contain a virtually
unlimited number of individual actuating relays, all of which are fully integrated into Synergi’s
TCC and protection coordination tools.
Editing a breaker type

Equipment types allow you to create a number of basic configurations that are used to create
and update devices in your model. The breaker type defines a number of key options for the
breakers in your model, including the mechanical response and breaker rating.
Like other equipment types, breaker types are used to add new breakers to your model. From
the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the breaker type that you want to add, drag it
into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Breaker types can also be used to
update current settings for any existing breaker in your model, using the same drag-and-drop
method.
To open the Breaker Type editor
To edit a breaker type, double-click the breaker type name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a breaker type.
Breaker rating
Amp rating for load-flow exception flagging.
Description
Description for the breaker type. This field is for informational purposes only and is not
applied to any breakers that you create or edit.
Mech. resp.
The time required for breaker contacts to open in a current-interrupting capacity following a
trip signal from one of its relays. Check coordination analysis normally considers this factor,
depending on the type of coordination being considered and the coordination direction. The
TCC only considers this factor if your TCC display options are set to display “response” curves,
versus “control” curves. For more information, see "Changing TCC view display properties" on
page 667.
Editing a breaker
To edit a breaker
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the breaker that you want to
edit.

Editing a Model
breaker. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.

l "Breaker tab – Breaker editor" below
l "Relays tab – Breaker editor" on page 402
respectively.
Breaker tab – Breaker editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Breaker tab of the Breaker
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a breaker" on the previous page.
AMS link
Breaker rating
Amp rating for load-flow exception flagging.
Bypass
Select this check box to ignore the operational capability of the breaker during check
coordination analysis, reliability analysis, and other applications.
Don’t allow operation from analysis
Certain types of analyses, such as optimal switching, contingency, and reliability, simulate the
operation of switches and protective devices to accomplish the analysis objective. Select this
option to exclude the breaker from being controlled in this way during these analysis types. If
selected, this restriction only applies to the current breaker in the editor.
Energize and Retire
Group
Active relay group for the breaker. Each relay can be assigned to one of six relay group on the
Relays tab of the Breaker editor. Only the relays that have been assigned to the same group
that is “active” are considered in the operation of the breaker.
For more information on groups, see "Relay groups" on page 404.
Interrupt rating
Value that fault analysis compares to the maximum fault level seen by the breaker.

Editing a Model
Location link
Mech. resp.
The time required for breaker contacts to open in a current-interrupting capacity following a
trip signal from one of its relays. Check coordination analysis normally considers this factor,
depending on the type of coordination being considered and the coordination direction. The
TCC only considers this factor if your TCC display options are set to display “response” curves,
versus “control” curves. For more information, see "Changing TCC view display properties" on
page 667.
Name
Breaker name or ID. This ID does not need to be unique.
Note
Phase relay and Ground relay
Edit the following settings for both phase relays and ground relays:
l Disable phase/ground relay(s). Select this check box to disables all relays,
including all stages of all groups, for the respective relay type. This setting is applicable
to coordination studies only and does not affect load-flow-based analysis.
l Cutoff amps. Specify the maximum fault value for coordinating the breaker for phase
relays and ground relays, respectively.
This value is considered by check coordination analysis only if your check coordination
options are set to consider “user-defined cutoffs.” For more information, see "Setting up
a check coordination analysis" on page 619.
l TCC color. Select the color of the respective curve for phase relays and ground relays,
if plotted on the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time versus current
coordination (TCC) graph" on page 664.
Phasing
Phasing associated with the breaker.
Rates
Failure rate, cost, and time parameters for reliability analysis. Generally, these numbers
represent averages and estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device. For more information on these items and reliability analysis, the
Status
Breaker open/closed state.
What-ifs

Editing a Model
Relays tab – Breaker editor

The following list describes the tasks you can perform from the Relays tab of the Breaker
editor. Note that by default, the Relays tab opens in a “minimized” view where only two
stages are visible. To view all four stages, click the Expand button in the upper-right corner of
the editor.
Figure 3-7. Expand button in the Breaker editor
For instructions on opening the Breaker editor, see "Editing a breaker" on page 399.
To add a relay
Underneath the list of relays, click the + button. A new relay is added to the end of the current
list.
To delete a relay
1. In the list of relays, select (highlight) the relay that you want to delete.
2. Underneath the list of relays, click the X button. The selected relay is removed from the
list.
To enable a relay
In the list of relays, select the check box next to the relay that you want to enable.
To edit basic settings for a relay
In the list of relays, select (highlight) the relay that you want to work with and then edit any of
the following fields:
l Type. Specify the relay type for the selected relay.
l Description. Type an optional identifier for the selected relay. This ID is for user
convenience only and has no impact on data storage or model topology. It does not
need to be unique.
l Manufacturer and Model. For the selected relay, select whether the relay is electro-
mechanical or electronic, which affects the settings available for configuring the stages.
These fields and associated data come directly from protection data in memory, hence
the importance of having protection data loaded while editing breakers. For more
information, see "Protection data" on page 172.
To assign a relay to a relay group
1. In the list of relays, select (highlight) the relay that you want to edit.
2. Under Relay’s group, select the relay group to which the selected relay belongs.
If the relay is not a part of the active relay group (which is selected on the Breaker tab of the
Breaker editor), then it will be completely removed from the operation of the breaker. For
more information on working with relay groups, see "Relay groups" on page 404.

Editing a Model
To enable a relay stage
1. In the list of relays, select (highlight) the relay that you want to work with.
2. On the right-side of the editor, select the check box next to each relay stage that you
want to enable.
To edit stage data for a relay
In the list of relays, select (highlight) the relay that you want to work with and then use the
Stages area to edit data for each relay stage. The available fields that you can edit are based
on the Manufacturer and Model names that you selected.
l Operation (rec). Operation type for the respective stage. If Synergi finds
instantaneous curves for the selected relay (based on manufacturer/model),
Instantaneous Curve type is available. Many mechanical relays, and some electronic
relays, have instantaneous curves. For electronic relays, Instantaneous type operation
is also available.
The check box to the right indicates whether the stage is reclosing or not. A recloser
that is set for a single operation will not reclose on downstream temporary faults. It will
effectively operate like a fuse.
l Curve family. Curve family, for electronic breakers.
l Inst curve. Instantaneous curve, for mechanical relays with instantaneous interrupt
capabilities.
l Pickup type. Select one of the following pickup types:
o Prim I. Primary amps. Synergi evaluates the curve information and attempts to
establish a pickup point to match this setting.
o Sec I. Secondary amps, requiring primary and secondary CT amp ratings and a
tap value.
o I(n). Requires CT turns ratio and a tap value.
l Time/Amp multipliers and adders. Independent adders and multipliers by stage,
applied directly to the curve. Units are in seconds and amps, respectively.
l Min. response time. Minimum time in seconds for the control curve to operate during
a stage. Curve values normally below this value will flatten out at the minimum
response time. This value can usually be left at 0, especially for inst curves.
Construction of the breaker model

Much like a real breaker device, a Synergi breaker is a collection of relays that can operate
and contribute individually to the applicable protection scheme. You can set certain
parameters at the breaker level, such as amp ratings and cutoff amps. However, most of the
information that contributes to coordination studies and TCC curves is normally found in the
detailed data at the relay level.
Adding and removing relays

A breaker can contain any number of relays, all of which are managed within the Relays tab of
the Breaker editor. In the Relays tab, you can add and remove relays with the “+” and “-”

Editing a Model
buttons, as described in "Relays tab – Breaker editor" on page 402. Normally, a new relay is
created as a duplicate of the relay currently in the view.
Relays have their own table in a data source, and the Relays tab in the editor is your access
point to that data. All relay data is considered model (or instance) data and has no inherent
association with equipment data or the equipment data source.
Relay groups
Within a breaker model, you can organize relays in groups. These groups operate similarly to
an actual relay group, which can be switched in and out as needed. Up to six groups are
permitted.
In Synergi, a single group is active for each breaker at any given time. To specify the active
group, select the group number on the Breaker tab of the Breaker editor. To specify which
group is associated with each relay, use the Relays tab of the Breaker editor. Relays in groups
that are not active are completely removed from the operation of the breaker.
If you have no need for relay groups, define all your relays within group 1 and keep that group
active at all times.
For more information, see "Breaker tab – Breaker editor" on page 400 and "Relays tab –
Breaker editor" on page 402.
Breaker flexibility—A word of caution

In Synergi, you are free to configure relays with a high degree of flexibility, which adds
responsibility on you to keep your device models realistic. You could potentially create device
models which have no counterpart in the real world, which may cause unexpected results
during coordination studies. Therefore, always use sound engineering judgment when
modeling these devices in Synergi, as if you would design and configure actual devices in your
distribution system.
Capacitors
Capacitors are widely used in distribution systems for voltage regulation and power factor
correction. Capacitor banks are usually placed near a load to provide reactive power locally so
the current for the reactive load does not have to be sent through the distribution system. The
reduced amount of reactive power flowing on the distribution lines between the source and
capacitor bank allows a lower current flow and improves the power factor. Line losses are
smaller and thus the voltage becomes higher at the load.
Capacitor compensation is useful for fixed loads. Switched capacitors can be used to meet the
demand of time-varying loads. The switching of banks may cause considerable system
transients. The level and duration of these transients depends on the time constant associated
with the line and capacitor. It should also be noted that an operating capacitor bank makes a
power system more sensitive to transients since a large di/dt through the capacitor causes a
large voltage spike.
Synergi supports section capacitor installations that consist of fixed units and up to three
switched modules. The installations can be connected in Wye, Delta, or Wye-Gnd
configurations. The capacitors are modeled as fixed impedance devices in the middle of

Editing a Model
sections. They are specified by their nominal kvar value per phase. You can turn capacitors on
or off using various operations in Synergi. You can place switched units into manual or
automatic modes.
Unlike most other equipment models in Synergi, specifications for capacitor installations are
made entirely within the Capacitor editor and stored in the model data. No equipment types
exist in the equipment data source for capacitors.
The Synergi capacitor model

The Synergi capacitor model consists of up to four “modules.” One module is a fixed unit and
the other three are switched units. This is illustrated in the following figure.
Source end
PT and CT at load end
Fixed unit
Switched modules, with

individual trip and close settings
Diagram of a switched capacitor model
Capacitor installations can be connected in Wye, Delta, or Wye-Gnd configurations. The

diagram above shows a Wye-Gnd configuration.
A module refers to a by-phase bank of capacitor units. The kvar values for the fixed module
are specified per phase. For the switched modules, you can specify an overall kvar value for a
set of selected phases. You can also activate or deactivate the individual switched modules as
needed. Therefore, to model a fixed capacitor only, you can leave the three switched modules
deactivated, essentially making them non-existent.
The three switched modules are composed of identically rated capacitors, connected to each
phase you specify. Switches connect and disconnect the switched modules from the line
section (close and trip, respectively). You can control the switching yourself if the installation
is in manual mode. Or you can choose automatic mode, in which Synergi controls the
switching based on the results of balanced or by-phase analysis, or time of day. For analysis
results, automatic mode can consider a variety of different criteria, such as current, voltage,
and kvar limits.
In summary:
l The fixed kvar module is always connected to all of the phases of a section. If you want
a particular phase to have no fixed kvar applied, specify zero (0) for that phase.
l When a switched module is closed, all applicable phases are connected. These phases
are set in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. The applicable phases set in the
Settings tab apply to all active switched modules.
Fixed and switched capacitor units

Capacitor installation models in Synergi consist of two parts—the fixed or base unit and three
switched modules. The following figure shows a Wye-Gnd installation with the fixed unit and
one switched module:

Editing a Model
Fixed capacitor Switched unit

A a
B b
C c
N n
KA
K1
KB K1
KC K1
Fixed and switched units in an installation
Notice that three distinct kvar values can be specified for the fixed portion of the installation.
On the other hand, each of the switched modules is made up of identical capacitor units. Open
connections can be achieved by specifying zero values for the fixed module or by deselecting
switched phases for the switched modules.
Switched and fixed units are defined in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. For more
information, see "Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor" on page 411.
Capacitor positioning relative to load

Capacitor installations are always placed at the center of a section with the distributed and
possibly spot loads. The following figure shows a diagram of a model section with a capacitor.
Point “A” Point “B”
Source end Load end
Spot load Spot load

Capacitor Spot Dist.
load load
Section model with a capacitor
Note that this figure shows three spot loads, for demonstration purposes only. Synergi allows
only one spot load per section, at the source end, load end, or center of a section.
The capacitor kvar injection occurs at the same location as the distributed load and a spot load
placed at the center of the section. Capacitor metering is always at the center of the section.
However, for flows metered with the CT, metering is either right before or right after the
capacitor and load terminals.
Type of control Metering location
Kvar Point “A”—before capacitor installation
Amp Point “B”—after capacitor installation
Pf Point “A”—before capacitor installation
Voltage Does not matter. An LDC meters after the

installation.
Time Does not matter. Time is used.

Editing a Model
Capacitor kV rating
You can specify the rated kV of a capacitor in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. If this
value is not zero, then before an analysis, Synergi will compare it to the section nominal
voltage according to the voltage mismatch tolerance, which is set in the Model tab of the
Model and Analysis Options editor, as described in "Analysis tab – Model and Analysis Options
editor" on page 503. If the voltage mismatch tolerance is violated, the analysis will not
proceed.
If the specified value is zero, Synergi uses the section nominal voltage as the rated kV
instead. As such, if you are applying a capacitor that is rated at a voltage other than the
section voltage, you can either:
l Specify the appropriate kV in the Capacitor editor to override the use of the section
voltage
—or—
l Allow Synergi to still use the section voltage, if you derate the kvar value of the
capacitor as follows:
For more information on setting the rated kV for a capacitor, see "Capacitor tab – Capacitor
editor" on page 411.
Controlling switched capacitor modules

Each of the three available modules of a switched capacitor has uniformly sized kvar/phase
values. For example, selecting 100 kvar/phase for module 1 of a switched installation
indicates that when that module is on, each phase nominally injects 100 kvar into the system.
Remember that the kvar value of the fixed part of the installation is specified by phase and
always connected (unless the capacitor is turned off).
The following represents a sample capacitor:
Fixed kvar A=150, B=150, C=150
Metering phase A
Active switch phases A, C
Primary control Voltage, Automatic
Module 1 (on) 75 kvar/ph, Close 118V, Trip 125V
PT Ratio 208.0
As such, the following values represent the capacitor kvar layout for the section, between 118
and 125 volts:

Editing a Model
Phase A Phase B Phase C
150+75 = 225 kvar 150 kvar 150+75 = 225 kvar
Phase B does not get the 75 kvar of switched capacitance because the B is not checked in the
Active Switch Phase area. The Active Switch Phase check boxes affect all switched modules in
the same way. The value of fixed kvar is always applied regardless of the Active Switch Phase
settings. A value of zero can be specified into the fixed kvar field for those phases not having
fixed capacitors.
Capacitor tripping and closing rules

Balanced and by-phase load-flow analyses open or close switched units based on the section
conditions and the settings of the switched capacitor. This action occurs for switched
capacitors that are both on and in automatic mode. Synergi never alters the switch state of
switched capacitors in manual mode.
A module is turned on (the close setting is satisfied) by balanced or by-phase analysis if the
following criteria have been met:
l The Control option is set to Var or Current, and the metered value of kvar or current
exceeds the close setting.
l The Control option is set to Voltage or Power Factor, and the metered value of voltage
or power factor is less than the close setting.
l The Control option is set to Temperature, and the temperature in Synergi rises above
the close setting in the Capacitor editor. The temperature values must be set in the
Weather tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. For more information, see
"Defining weather conditions" on page 259.
l Installation is in Automatic Mode.
l Voltage Override settings are not violated.
A module is turned off (trip setting is satisfied) by balanced or by-phase analysis if the
following criteria have been met:
l The Control option is set to Var or Current, and the metered value of kvar or current is
less than the trip setting.
l The Control option is set to Voltage or Power Factor, and the metered value of voltage
or power factor exceeds trip setting.
l The Control option is set to Temperature and the temperature in Synergi falls below the
trip setting in the Capacitor editor. The temperature values must be set in the Weather
tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. For more information, see "Defining
l Installation is in Automatic Mode.
l Voltage Override is set to be used and voltage is outside of bandwidth.
The following table summarizes the rules and operation ranges for a switched unit.

Editing a Model
Switched capacitor operation rules
(g = metered value; ts = trip setting; cs = close setting)
Control Metering Verify Close No Trip

operation
kvar g = kvar cs > ts g > cs cs > g > ts g < ts
amp g = amps cs > ts g > cs cs > g > ts g < ts
voltage g = volts cs < ts g < cs cs < g < ts g > ts
power g = pf cs < ts g < cs cs < g < ts g > ts

factor
Time g = time cs > ts g > cs cs > g g > ts
Capacitor metering phase

You should select metering phase used by capacitor installation when you select switch
modules for use. This metering applies to module switch controls and to the voltage override
mechanism. The chart below gives the meter phase options for various capacitor installation
connections.
Connection Voltage control Current control PF or kvar

control
Delta or Wye A/B, B/C, or C/A A, B, or C Total of all phases.
Wye-Gnd A, B, or C A, B, or C A, B, or C
The metering phase is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more
information on editing a capacitor, see "Settings tab – Capacitor editor" on page 414.
Capacitor line-drop compensator

Synergi uses the line-drop compensator (LDC) mechanism to alter the line voltage (as seen by
the module switch controllers) by dropping the line voltage through a user-specified
impedance by the line current. The LDC option is only available for voltage-controlled units.
Voltage override does not utilize the LDC mechanism. The controller for module switches is
120V based. The voltage seen by the voltage controller when the LDC option is selected is as
follows:
Equation 3-5.

Editing a Model
where:
PT = PT Ratio
CT = CT Rating
R, XLDC = User-specified LDC drop values
kVLine = Line voltage
I Line = Line current
VCont = Controller voltage
LDC information is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information,
see "Settings tab – Capacitor editor" on page 414.
Capacitor voltage override

The voltage override controller uses the voltage directly on the low-side of the installation’s
PT. The voltage override mechanism does not use the CT and R and X settings. If the capacitor
installation is connected as a Wye or Delta, the phase voltage is measured between the lines
specified by the metering phase options and passed through the PT. Voltage is measured from
line to ground if the installation is connected Wye-Gnd. If voltage override is used, the
installation voltage is within its voltage override bandwidth when the following relationship
holds:
Equation 3-6.
If the installation is outside of its bandwidth, modules are tripped, one at a time, in the order
of module 3 to module 1.
Note that the voltage override switches modules on or off. If an installation’s voltage is below
bandwidth, modules are switched on by the voltage override mechanism (if the installation is
in automatic mode). It should also be noted that the line-drop compensations R and X are not
contained in the voltage override mechanism.
Voltage override information is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more
information on editing a capacitor, see "Settings tab – Capacitor editor" on page 414.
Manually turning on a capacitor switched module

The capacitance of a switched module is applied to a section when the following criteria are
satisfied.
l The section capacitor’s Turn Off check box is not checked.
l The Mod 1, 2, or 3 check box is checked.

Editing a Model
l The module 1, 2, or 3 On check box is checked.
These options are set in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information, see
"Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor" below.
Editing a capacitor
To edit a capacitor
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the capacitor that you want
to edit.
capacitor. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor" below
l "Settings tab – Capacitor editor" on page 414
respectively.
Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a capacitor" above.
Connection
Use the Connection option to specify the capacitor’s connection type as Wye-Gnd, Delta, or
Wye.
Control
The following control options are available:
l Control. Use the “Control” option to indicate the type of metering used in the capacitor
installation. The same type of metering is used for all switched modules for the
capacitor.
l Off on weekends. When you select “Time of day” as the Control option, select the Off
on weekends check box to turn off the switched capacitors over the weekends. Clear the
check box to allow the switched capacitors to operate during the weekends as well as
during weekdays.
l Seq #. Radio-controlled feeder capacitors are controlled through a controller at the
substation and operated via radio. The Seq # option allows you to mimic that type of
setup. Capacitors will be operated in order from the lowest sequence number to the
highest.

Editing a Model
Fixed kvar
Use the columns in the Fixed kvar area to set up the fixed capacitor. The values that you enter
for each phase will be summed in the Totals column. If you enter a value in the Totals column
instead, that value will be distributed proportionally among the three phases based on the
current values for each phase.
The capacitance of these fields will be supplied to a section regardless of the state of the
switched modules. Valid values are between 0 and 10,000. The Operation option (Automatic or
Manual) does not affect the Fixed kvar values.
You can also use the Synergi Bulk Editor to edit the fixed kvar values for all capacitors at
once. For more information, see "Using the Bulk Editor" on page 254.
NOTE: You can disable the fixed capacitor installation by entering 0.0 in the Fixed kvar
text boxes. This allows you to use the three switched capacitor modules, if desired, while
not using the fixed capacitor.
Name
Specify the name or ID for the capacitor.
Operation
Use the Operation option to select whether Synergi should automatically simulate the
switching of switched modules, or allow you to do so as a manual process. If you select
Automatic, Synergi controls the switching based on the results of balanced or by-phase
analysis, or time of day. For analysis results, Automatic mode can consider a variety of
different criteria, such as current, voltage, and kvar limits. These settings are configured
through the Control, Close, and Trip options, as described later in this table.
Rated kV
Use the Rated kV text box to specify the Capacitor’s rated kV value. If this value is 0, Synergi
uses the section nominal voltage as the rated kV. If this value is not zero, then before an
analysis, Synergi will compare the capacitor rated kV to the section nominal voltage according
to the voltage mismatch tolerance, which is set in the Model tab of the Model and Analysis
Options editor (as described in "Analysis tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on
page 503). If the voltage mismatch tolerance is violated, the analysis will not proceed.
For more information on capacitor rated kV, see "Capacitor kV rating" on page 407.
Switched modules
Use the options in the Switched Modules area to configure up to three switched capacitors.
Select the check box next to the module name to edit settings for the module; select the check
box in the "On" column to turn on that capacitor for analysis.
The following options are available for each switched module.
l kvar/ph. Specify the nominal kvar rating per phase. Each phase selected in the Active
Switch Phase area on the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor is connected to the kvar
specified in this field.

Editing a Model
For more information on the Active Switch Phase option, see "Settings tab – Capacitor
editor" on the next page.
l Close. Specify a value that determines when the module automatically closes, or
switches on. This value must be a six-digit decimal number. With the exception of Time
of Day control, the units that you will use—amps, volts (120V base), kvar, or percent
power factor—are based on the option that you selected as the Control type, as
described later in this table. This Close value will be compared against a metered value
to determine if the respective switched capacitor module is to be switched on.
If the capacitor switching is based on time (Time of Day control), this field refers to the
time when the capacitor closes and enters the system. Enter the time in 24-hour
decimal format (for example, 1:00 p.m. = 13.000).
l Trip. Specify a value that determines when the module automatically trips or switches
off. This value must be a six-digit decimal number. With the exception of Time of Day
control, the units that you will use—amps, volts (120V base), kvar, or percent power
factor—are based on the option that you selected as the Control type, as described
previously in this topic. This Trip value will be compared against a metered value to
determine if the respective switched capacitor module is to be switched off.
If the capacitor switching is based on time (Time of Day control), this field refers to the
time when the capacitor trips and isolates from the system. Enter the time in 24-hour
decimal format (for example, 1:00 p.m. = 13.000).
l Nm/O. Select this check box to specify that the switched capacitor is normally in an
open state. Capacitors where this check box has been selected can be held in the
normally open state by selecting the "Hold normal state" option in the Start options tab
of the Model and Analysis Options editor.
Turn off
Select the Turn Off check box to disable the capacitor’s effect on the model. If the capacitor is
disabled, you can still edit the available settings but they will not have any impact on the
model or any analysis.
You can also disable capacitors directly from the model explorer or Synergi map display.
Right-click on the capacitor or capacitor name and select Turn On or Turn Off, as appropriate.
When you perform this action, the Turn Off check box will be selected or cleared to reflect the
current status.
Use STATCOM
Select the Use STATCOM check box to specify that the capacitor is being modeled as a
STATCOM (static compensator) device. This device can be used in steady-state modeling by
configuring the device with a set point, ramp rate, and maximum capacitive and inductive
rates. These options are configured on the Settings tab of the capacitor editor, as described in
"Settings tab – Capacitor editor" on the next page.
What-ifs

Editing a Model
Settings tab – Capacitor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Settings tab of the Capacitor
editor. The Settings tab allows you to establish further settings for switched capacitors. The
switched capacitor options may or may not be enabled, based on how you have configured the
switched capacitor modules in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor, as described in
"Capacitor tab – Capacitor editor" on page 411. Additional information on controlling switched
modules is provided in "Controlling switched capacitor modules" on page 407.
For instructions on opening the Capacitor editor, see "Editing a capacitor" on page 411.
Active switch phase
Use the three “Active switch phase” check boxes (A, B, and C) to select the phase connection
of switched modules. Fixed units are not affected by these settings.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
LDC
The LDC section specifies line-drop compensator values for switched capacitor modules.
Synergi uses the LDC mechanism to alter the line voltage (as seen by the module switch
controllers) by dropping the line voltage through a user-specified impedance by the line
current.
The LDC options are enabled when the capacitor’s Control option is set to Voltage. LDC is
never applied to the voltage override controller.
The following LDC options are available:
l R dial. Line-drop compensation R setting in volts.
l X dial. Line-drop compensation X setting in volts.
For more information on line-drop compensators, see "Capacitor line-drop compensator" on

page 409.
Location link
Metering
Specify the following settings:
l PT ratio. Determines metered voltage for voltage override and voltage for primary
control. This can be a six-digit decimal number.
l CT rating. Used if line-drop compensation is used for voltage-controlled modules.
Metering phase
Use this option to select the phase used for primary control of the switched capacitor

Editing a Model
modules. The Metering phase option is enabled when the capacitor’s Operation type is set to
Automatic.
Note
STATCOM model
Use the options in the STATCOM Model area to set the following values:
l Setpoint
l Rate
l Max capacitive
l Max inductive
Voltage override
Select the Voltage Override check box to specify that voltage override should be used. This
option allows modules to be switched on or off if the capacitor installation terminal voltage is
too high or low.
After selecting the Voltage Override check box, specify the following values:
l Settings. Specifies the upper limit of acceptable voltage.
l B.W. Specifies a bandwidth range where the voltage control begins overriding the
selected control type. For example, if you have set the voltage override of 124 and a
bandwidth of 2, the voltage range will be from 123 to 125.
For more information on voltage override, see "Capacitor voltage override" on page 410.
Motor analysis and capacitors

Synergi never switches switched modules in manual mode. Automatic modules are set up in
the base run of motor start analysis (MSA) or locked rotor analysis (LRA). In MSA, the state of
switched capacitors is not changed until the 100% speed point. In LRA, the state of switched
capacitors is not changed until its Running case.
For more information on motor start analysis, see "Motor start analysis" on page 691. For
more information on locked rotor analysis, see "Locked rotor analysis" on page 561.
Fuses
Synergi supports a wide range of fuse types. Fuses are specified by manufacturer, model, and
amp rating. Current limiting fuses also require a voltage rating value. This information allows
Synergi to find the minimum-melt and the maximum-clear curves from the protection
database. These curves are used for TCC graphs and for coordination checking.

Editing a Model
Editing a fuse type

and update devices in your model. The fuse type defines a number of key options for the fuses
in your model, including the manufacturer name and model name for the fuse.
Like other equipment types, fuse types are used to add new fuses to your model. From the
Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the fuse type that you want to add, drag it into the
map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Fuse types can also be used to update
current settings for any existing fuse in your model, using the same drag-and-drop method.
To open the Fuse Type editor
To edit a fuse type, double-click the fuse type name in the Warehouse tab of the Synergi
model explorer.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a fuse type.
Amp rating and Volt rating
Fuse ratings.
Description
Description for the fuse type. This field is for informational purposes only and is not applied to
any fuses that you create or edit.
Manufacturer and Model
Fuse manufacturer and model. These lists are populated based on information in the
protection database. For more information on the protection database, see "Protection data"
on page 172.
Editing a fuse
To edit a fuse
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the fuse that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the fuse.
l "Fuse tab – Fuse editor" on the facing page
l "Rates tab – Fuse editor" on page 419
respectively.

Editing a Model
Fuse tab – Fuse editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Fuse tab of the Fuse editor. For
instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a fuse" on the previous page.
Add to TCC
Adds the fuse to the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time versus current
Amp rating
Maximum amp rating.
Amp rating and Volt rating
Fuse ratings.
Amp X and Amp +
The amperage multiplier and adder factors shift a fuse curve left or right on the graph,
changing the amount of amperage it requires to blow for any given amount of time. The
default value for each factor is 1.0, but you can adjust them lower to make coordination more
conservative, perhaps to compensate for older equipment. Any value less than one shifts the
curve left, indicating a derated fuse.
For example, an Amp X multiplier factor of 0.75 would reduce the amp axis to 75% of the
original on the graph. Likewise, 0.5 would indicate that for any given amount of time, the fuse
would blow at only half the normal time requirement.
Use caution when derating fuses in this fashion, as the process will likely involve a significant
amount of personal experience with your system and perhaps some guesswork. Synergi also
allows the factors to be greater than one, essentially uprating a fuse. This feature is not
associated with real-world situations of aging and derating. Rather, it is provided to allow you
flexibility with managing fuse curves.
Bypass
Select this check box to ignore the operational capability of the fuse during check coordination
analysis, reliability analysis, and other applications.
option to exclude the fuse from being controlled in this way during these analysis types. If
selected, this restriction only applies to the current fuse in the editor.
Edit protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the fuse.
Fault amps (cutoff)
Cutoff amps.

Editing a Model
Fuse saving scheme
When the “Fuse saving scheme” check box is selected and your reliability analysis options
have been configured to use individual fuse settings for fuse/recloser coordination, then an
event downstream from the fuse will result in the operation of the nearest upstream recloser.
If a recloser or reclosing breaker or feeder does not exist upstream, then the fuse will blow.
When the “Fuse saving scheme” check box is cleared, then the fuse will always blow for an
event directly downstream despite any upstream reclosing capabilities.
The “Fuse saving scheme” check box will be ignored when your reliability analysis options
have been configured to use either “Global fuse saving” or “Global fuse blowing”. For more
information on the reliability analysis settings and the “Fuse/Recloser Coordination” option,
see "Settings tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor" on page 675.
Manufacturer and Model
Fuse manufacturer and model. These lists are populated based on information in the
on page 172.
Name
Fuse name or ID.
Note
Phasing
Fuse phasing.
Status
Fuse open/closed state.
TCC color
Color of the fuse curve if plotted on the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time
versus current coordination (TCC) graph" on page 664.
Time X and Time +
The Time multiplier and adder factors shift a fuse curve upward or downward on the graph,
changing the amount of time it requires to blow at any given amperage. The default value for
each factor is 1.0, but you can adjust them lower to make coordination more conservative,
perhaps to compensate for older equipment. Any value less than one shifts the curve
downward, indicating a derated fuse.
For example, a Time X multiplier factor of 0.9 would reduce the time axis to 90% of the
original on the graph. Likewise, 0.25 would indicate that at any given amperage, the fuse
would blow at only 25% of the normal time requirement.

Editing a Model
Use caution when derating fuses in this fashion, as the process will likely involve a significant
amount of personal experience with your system and perhaps some guesswork. Synergi also
allows the factors to be greater than one, essentially uprating a fuse. This feature is not
associated with real-world situations of aging and derating. Rather, it is provided to allow you
flexibility with managing fuse curves.
What-ifs
VFI tab – Fuse editor

Use the VFI tab of the Fuse editor to set up fuses that need to be modeled as electronic
devices. The settings on this tab are used to define instantaneous, delay, and minimum trip
values.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a fuse" on page 416.
Rates tab – Fuse editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Fuse editor. For
instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a fuse" on page 416.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
In the respective fields, enter values for the following parameters:
l Sustained failure rate
l Temporary failure rate
l Failure repair time
l Failure repair cost
l Crew oper./reset
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and estimates, because it is
unlikely that you will have exact figures for each individual device.
Location link

Editing a Model
Generators
Synergi supports detailed by-phase models of generators. The following model types are
available:
l Conventional Synchronous. Series winding impedances and a back EMF are used to
represent the machine’s behavior. The machine responds to the voltage and output
power settings in percent. For more information on synchronous machines, see the
l Conventional Induction. The machine is modeled with passive components. A variable
resistance represents the electro-mechanical coupling through the notion of slip. The
output power in kW can be specified. For more information on induction machines, see
l Photovoltaic (Inverter) PQ. The Inverter PQ model behaves just like a negative constant
power load and does not generate fault current contributions. For more information on
PQ models, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
l Constant PQ. The Constant PQ model behaves just like a negative constant power load
and does not generate fault current contributions. For more information on PQ models,
see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
The Conventional Synchronous and Conventional Induction models are referred to as active
models because they respond to the by-phase conditions of the distribution system as seen
through their terminals. Depending on the distribution system and other active devices, they
may or may not be able to achieve the output values you specified. Because the generator
models were designed with real machines in mind, attention should be paid to the operated or
planned machine in cases when the Synergi model does not meet your kW or voltage settings.
PQ models do not actively respond to distribution system conditions. Their output power value
will be the user-specified value following a successful load-flow run.
Generators are always placed at the center of a section. Their terminals are driven from the
voltage at the center of the line and they inject current into the center of the line.
Editing a generator type

Equipment types allow you to create a number of basic configurations that are referenced by
the devices in your model. The generator type defines a number of key options for the
generators in your model, such as whether the generator is single phase or three phase, and
also the generator ratings.
Like other equipment types, generator types are used to add new generators to your model.
From the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the generator type that you want to add,
drag it into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Once a generator has been
created, you can change the associated generator type from the Generator tab in the
Generator editor. Some options in the Generator editor may enable and disable automatically
based on the options you have selected in the referenced generator type.
To edit a generator type, double-click the generator type name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Generator tab in the Generator editor, you can also click
the edit button that is located next to the name of the selected generator type.

Editing a Model
To edit a generator type

2. Expand Generator Types and then double-click the name of the generator type that
you want to edit.
generator type. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Ratings tab – Generator Type editor" below
l "Synch kvar tab – Generator Type editor" on page 423
Ratings tab – Generator Type editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Ratings tab of the Generator
Type editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a generator type" on the
previous page.
Construction
Specifies whether the generator type is single-phase or three-phase.
Description
Optional description for the generator type.
Exciter
Specifies the ratio of the PT connected to the exciter. Available for synchronous generators
only.
Impedance
Specifies the winding impedances that are used in unbalanced load-flow calculations specified
in percent, based on the machine’s rating. Xd" and X" are the subtransient reactances of
synchronous and induction machines respectively. These are the impedances seen looking
into the machine at the instance of a fault.
Induction generators
The Induction Generators fields are used with Conventional Induction and Wind generator
types. The following values may be entered:
l Fault factor
Inverter interface
Some generator types, including the PV and Battery generators, automatically use an inverter
interface. For other generator types, including Convention Synchronous and Conventional
Induction, select this check box to include an inverter interface.
Inverter performance
The Inverter Performance fields are automatically enabled for some generator types, and
optionally enabled for others when you select the “Inverter interface” check box. When
enabled, the following values may be entered:

Editing a Model
l Fault amps. Specifies PV fault current as a percentage of load current. For example, a
value of 120 indicates that during a fault, the generator fault current must be limited to
120% of the pre-fault generation current.
Ratings
Specify the rated kW, kV, and %pf nameplate values for the generator type. The rated pf is
the power factor output of the machine at rated kW and kV. Generators require a power factor
range between 20% and 100%.
The Battery generator type has additional ratings for Energy (capacity of the battery in kWHr)
and Efficiency (discharge and charge efficiency).
Type
Select one of the following as the generator type:
l PV (Photovoltaic)
l Conventional Synchronous
l Conventional Induction
l Wind
l Battery
l Fuel Cell
l Hybrid
l Constant PQ
For more information on the supported generator types, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Usage for this type
Select which type of device the generator type can be used with. Available choices are:
l Generator and Large Customer
l Section Dist Gen
For example, if you select the option for “Generator and Large Customer”, the generator type
can be used with both generator instances (specified on the Generator tab of the Generator
editor) and large customer instances (specified on the Generation tab of the Large Customer
editor), but it cannot be used for a distributed generator on a section (specified on the Gen -
Dist tab of the Section editor).
Wind performance
The Wind Performance fields are used with Wind generator types. The following values may
be entered:
l Cut-in speed. Minimum wind speed at which the turbine will generate usable power.
l Rated speed. Minimum wind speed at which the turbine will generate its designated
rated power, which typically is its maximum power output.
l Furling speed. Wind speed at which the turbine will shut down to avoid damage. Also
known as the cut-out speed.

Editing a Model
Synch kvar tab – Generator Type editor

The Synch kvar tab in the Generator Type editor includes two graphs that allow you to set the
minimum and maximum kvar output from the generator. This defines the amount of power
that a generator can deliver. You can set values in the range of 0 to 60% for the maximum
kvar output, and 0 to -60% for the minimum. To set a value, click in the chart area for the
value you want to set. The precise values will appear as pop-up text as you hover your mouse
over the graphs.
For instructions on opening the Generator Type editor, see "Editing a generator type" on
page 420.
Editing an inverter
The inverter defines voltage and frequency trips that can be referenced by the generators in
your model. Although they are included in your equipment warehouse, inverters vary from
other equipment types in that they cannot be used to create devices in your model. Instead,
the inverter is referenced from the generators and large customers that exist in your model.
To edit an inverter

2. Expand Inverters and then double-click the name of the inverter that you want to edit.
3. Use the Inverter editor to enable voltage limits and frequency limits that can be used
with generators in your model. The options that you can set are described at the end of
this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Inverter editor. For general
information on working with equipment types, including adding and deleting equipment types,
see "Creating and editing equipment types" on page 397.
Description
Type an optional description for the inverter.
Volt trip
Select the “Volt trip” check box to enable a High and Low voltage trip that you can reference
from the generators and large customers in your model.
Frequency trip
Select the “Frequency trip” check box to enable a High and Low frequency trip that you can
reference from the generators and large customers in your model.
Volt/watt function
Select the Volt/watt function check box and then specify the following values:
l Generation mode start volts and max volts. These two values define the range at
which output will be curtailed and eventually impeded.

Editing a Model
l Storage mode start volts and max volts. These two values define the range at
which a battery storage power will be suppressed and eventually allowed to draw full
power.
Volt/var function
The volt/var volts specify the points along the operation curve for the inverter. There will be
no var generation in the deadband. 100% input or output will occur at the min and max volts
settings.
Other settings
The "other settings" options are not enabled at this time. They will not have any effect on any
Synergi analyses.
Editing a generator
To edit a generator
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the generator that you want
to edit.
generator. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Generator tab – Generator editor" below
l "Details tab – Generator editor" on page 426
respectively.
Generator tab – Generator editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Generator tab of the Generator
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a generator" above.
DERP
This option is not enabled in this release. It does not have any effect on any analysis.
Generator output

Editing a Model
l Rated kW output. Select this option to use the rated values as specified on the
associated Generator Type editor for the generator’s output.
contribution of the generator for the active section. The value is the percent of the
capacity of the generating unit that is contributing toward the kW and kvar loading
requirements of the feeder.
l DER profile. Select this option to specify that the generator’s output is defined by the
generation curves in a DER profile. For more information, see "DER profiles" on
page 309.
Grnd ohms
The grounding impedance is used for active generator models in both load-flow and fault
studies. Residue from unbalanced load current and/or fault current has a direct effect on
generator terminal voltage. The grounding impedance also has the effect of reducing this
current.
Inveter
The inverter specifies a special equipment type that defines the voltage and frequency trips
for the generator. Inverters provide a convenient way to re-use common generator settings in
your model.
Mobile
Indicates that the generator is a mobile device. This check box is for information purposes
only and does not affect any analysis results.
Name
Generator name or ID.
Review status
Optional review status for the generator. This field is for informational purposes only and does
not have any impact on any Synergi analysis.
Single phs
If the referenced Generator type is configured as a single-phase generator, use the “Single
phs” area to select the phase for the generator instance.
Select the Specify rated output check box to override rated output values from the selected
generator type with the values you specify here.
Use the A, B, and C columns to specify the peak values for phases A, B, and C. The values that
you enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals/Average column for Rated kW, and
averaged in the Totals/Average column for Pf %.
l If you enter a value in the “Rated kW” Totals/Average column, that value will be
distributed proportionally among the first three phases based on the current values for

Editing a Model
each phase.
l If you enter a value in the “Pf%” Totals/Average column, that value will be set as the
value for each active phase. It will not be applied proportionally as is done with the
Rated kW values.
These values can be specified over multiple years for a multi-year analysis. To specify a value
for a specific year, select the desired year in Synergi and then set the peak values, as
appropriate. As you change the modeling year, the values will change in the dialog box
according to the values you have already set.
This area of the editor also includes the following settings:
l Inverter. Specify the inverter rating for the generator as a percentage of the PV rated
power.
Turn on
Select this check box to enable the generator. When a generator is disabled, it will not have
any effect on the model.
You can also enable and disable the generator by right-clicking on the generator symbol in the
Synergi map display, or on the generator name in the Model tab of the Synergi model
explorer, and selecting Turn On or Turn Off, as appropriate.
Type
Select a generator type from your equipment warehouse to apply to the generator. Take note
of the following:
l Only generator types that have been configured for use with generator instances will be
available for selection from this list. (This is done by selecting the “Generator and Large
Customer” option on the Ratings tab of the Generator Type editor.)
select. For example, the “Battery” options at the bottom of the Generator tab will only
be enabled when the selected Generator type is a Battery type generator.
What-ifs
Details tab – Generator editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Details tab of the Generator
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a generator" on page 424.

Editing a Model
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Location link
Note
Additional notes on generators

The following items pertain to generators and the Synergi model.
Scheduled, distributed generation

Using the large customer feature, you can set up scheduled, distributed generation and co-
generation in your model. For more information, see "Large customers" on the next page.
Fault analysis and generators

During fault analysis, induction and synchronous machines are seen as reactances tied to
ground through their grounding impedances. PQ generators do not contribute fault current
during fault analysis. For more information on fault analysis, see"Fault analysis" on page 655
.
Multiple generators
Synergi is a steady-state simulation tool. Because of this, there are no limits to the number of
active generators that can be modeled, with the exception that only one generator can be
placed on a section. Keep in mind that Synergi does not support frequency controls and
complex exciter models.
Delta-connected generators
Although it is theoretically possible to build a generator with Delta-connected windings, it is
not practical. This type of generator would promote a high level of circulating current. Also,
the windings would have to be insulated to a much higher level with respect to the Wye-
connected equivalent. This insulation would lead to cooling problems.
Synergi does support ungrounded Wye connections.

Editing a Model
Large customers
Synergi provides a special load model to handle distributed generators, co-generators, and
large customers, known collectively as the “large customer.” A large customer may also be
used to model manholes and vaults.
On the map, large customers are similar to devices because they use their own map symbols
and separate editors. On a functional level, a large customer is similar to a spot load and/or a
modeled generator. Large customers provide the following features, which may determine
whether you use them or a different load model:
l Identifiable map entity with a symbol. At its simplest level, a large customer may be
functionally identical to a spot load. However, the large customer provides a symbol on
the map, a listing in the Synergi model explorer, and easier management through tools
such as reports.
l Combined generation/load. With a large customer, you can combine the generation and
load aspects of a customer into a single entity. In addition, you can apply the simple
“negative PQ” generation component without the overhead of a normal generator
device, with its required equipment type.
l Better integration of load curves. A large customer can incorporate 24-hour load curves
into its load component, similar to a normal spot load. However, a large customer can
extend the curve functionality to the generation side as well, allowing two independent
curve sets for each. In this manner, you can set up precise 24-hour scheduling for the
load and generation components, at a granular percentage level.
Synergi provides a detailed load model that can be configured in a variety of different ways,
with a variety of options. In addition, Synergi can apply distributed loads throughout your
model automatically, using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and load
allocation analysis.
Editing a large customer
To edit a large customer
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the large customer that you
want to edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the large
customer. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
a. "Large Cust tab – Large Customer editor" on the facing page
b. "Load tab – Large Customer editor" on page 430
c. "Generation tab – Large Customer editor" on page 431
respectively.

Editing a Model
Large Cust tab – Large Customer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Large Cust tab of the Large
Customer editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a large customer" on the
previous page.
AMS link
Category
For categorical purposes, Synergi allows you to select between different types of large
customer devices. The category selection affects map symbology and model explorer listing
only, and any type can be configured in any manner. In general, though, it is assumed that the
different types mean the following:
l Large customer load. Similar to a spot loads, a device with a load component only.
l Co-Generator. A device with both a load and generation component.
l Distributed generator. A device with a generation component only.
l Vault. Vault, possibly with a load component.
l Manhole. Manhole, possibly with a load component.
l Handhole. Handhole, possibly with a load component.
Energize and Retire
Location
Location of the large customer on the section. Available options are From End, Center, or To
End.
Location link
Name
Name of the large customer.
Note
Turn off
Select this check box to disable the large customer’s effect on the model. If the large

Editing a Model
customer is disabled, you can still edit the available settings but it will not have any impact on
the model or any analysis.
You can also disable large customers directly from the model explorer or Synergi map
display. Right-click on the large customer or large customer name and select Turn On or Turn
Off, as appropriate. When you perform this action, the Turn Off check box will be selected or
cleared to reflect the current status.
What-ifs
Load tab – Large Customer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Load tab of the Large Customer
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a large customer" on page 428.
Balance the loads button
When load data is entered into any of the fields, click the Balance button to distribute the data
evenly across the A, B, and C columns.
Capacity factor
page 492.
Harmonic profile
Contains all of your harmonic profiles which you can associate with a large customer. Click
the Edit button to open the Harmonic Curve editor.
kW, kvar, Customers, conn. KVA, conn. kWh, and Connection
Actual load data, generally representing peak loads for the large customer. Use the A, B, and
C columns in the loads area to specify the load values for phases A, B, and C. The values that
you enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals column. If you enter a value in the
Totals column instead, that value will be distributed proportionally among the first three
phases based on the current values for each phase.
for a specific year, select the desired year in Synergi and then set the load values, as
according to the loads you have already set.
Synergi provides several other methods that you can use to edit load values. For example:
l You can use the Synergi Bulk Editor to edit spot loads for all sections at once. For more
information, see "Using the Bulk Editor" on page 254.
l Click the Graph button to edit load values using a graphical display. Click the Year
the window.

Editing a Model
On/Off/Scheduled
Controls whether the large customer load component is active. If it is on a scheduled basis, a
customer class must be selected to control its effect. For more information, see "Customer
load curves and large customers (scheduling)" on page 433.
If the large customer is set to On, use the % of rated text box to specify the percentage
effect of the specified load component.
Generation tab – Large Customer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Generation tab of the Large
Customer editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a large customer" on
page 428.
Generation on
Select this check box to enable the distributed generator on the large customer.
Generator output
l Rated kW output.
contribution of the generator for the active section. The value is the percent of the
capacity of the generating unit that is contributing toward the kW and kvar loading
requirements of the feeder.
l DER profile. Select this option to specify that the large customer’s output is defined by
the generation curves in a DER profile. For more information, see "DER profiles" on
page 309.
Inverter
for the generator. Inverters provide a convenient way to re-use common generator settings in
your model.
Specify pf
Select this check box to specify a power factor percentage specific to this large customer. If
the check box is cleared, the rated power factor percentage for the associated generator type
will be used.
Select this check box to override rated output values from the selected generator type with
the values you specify here.
l Rated kW and Pf%. Peak generation capacity for the large customer. Use the A, B,
and C columns to specify the peak values for phases A, B, and C. The values that you

Editing a Model
enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals/Average column for Rated kW, and
averaged in the Totals/Average column for Pf %.
o If you enter a value in the “Rated kW” Totals/Average column, that value will be
o If you enter a value in the “Pf%” Totals/Average column, that value will be set as
the value for each active phase. It will not be applied proportionally as is done
You can also use the Synergi Bulk Editor to edit the rated kw values for all large
customer generators at once. For more information, see "Using the Bulk Editor" on
page 254.
Capacity Factor. Factor that relates the average output of the generator to the rated
output of the generator.
Type
Select a generator type from your equipment warehouse to apply to the large customer. Take
note of the following:
l Only generator types that have been configured for use with large customer instances
will be available for selection from this list. (This is done by selecting the “Generator
and Large Customer” option on the Ratings tab of the Generator Type editor.)
select.
l If the generation is set to “Specify Rating”, then a generator type goes not have to be
specified.
Voltage setting
Desired output voltage based on the PT Ratio value for the associated Generator Type.
Required for synchronous generators only.

Editing a Model
Customer load curves and large customers (scheduling)

In the Large Customer editor, you can assign independent customer classes to the load and
generation components, known as scheduling. For more information on editing a large
customer, see "Editing a large customer" on page 428.
When applied to the load component, the load curves in the customer class control the load
much like a customer zone would control a section’s load. When applied to the generation
component, the functional effect is similar, with a reverse effect on perceived model load.
That is, Synergi uses the percentages in the class to determine how much of the generator’s
capacity is currently engaged, much like a “generation curve.”
You can specify different classes for the load and generation components, and they will be
handled independently. In addition, you can configure them to simulate any manner of
cogeneration, from simple on/off timing of each, to detailed percentages of each at any given
time. In any case, when you select a time-of-day for analysis, Synergi will find and use the
respective percentage for each and perform its calculations appropriately.
The use of customer classes to control generation capacity is somewhat different than the
traditional application to loads, but the functional makeup of the curves is identical. You build
these curves and classes like you would any other, specifying percentage curves on a 24-hour
basis. To use curves with distributed generators, you may find that you need to develop a
special set of curves just for them, based on known load/generation scheduling of your large
customer devices. For more information on load curves and customer classes, see "Customer
load curves/time-of-day analysis" on page 294.
Meters
Meter devices are simple data points that you can place anywhere in your model to represent
demands or metered values. From a modeling perspective, you interact with meters in the
same way that you interact with any other device. Their analytical effect, however, is
somewhat different, in that they serve primarily as points of data for load allocation analysis.
They do not contribute to load flow-based system parameters, such as voltage and losses.
Because meters are modeled as section devices, it is possible to put metered values on every
section. However, too many meters will likely cause non-convergence of load allocation due
to the granular load groups between them. For best allocation results, you should use a
limited number of metering points that accurately represent demand data at strategic points,
such as feeder sources. For more information on how load allocation handles meters
throughout a model, versus “source demand” meters, see "About load allocation demands and
meters" on page 581.
Meter data is multi-year compliant. Data can be specified on a yearly basis, according to the
current year to which the interface is set. Because section loads are also multi-year
compliant, meters can facilitate multiple annual load setups all within the same model,
including independent load allocation by year.

Editing a Model
Editing a meter
To edit a meter
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the meter that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the meter.
l "Meter tab – Meter editor" below
l "Demands tab – Meter editor" on the facing page
l "Profile tab – Meter editor" on page 437
l "Dist Gen tab – Meter editor" on page 438
l "Reliability tab – Meter editor" on page 439
l "Zones tab – Meter editor" on page 439
respectively.
Meter tab – Meter editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Meter tab of the Meter editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a meter" above.
AMS link
Color and Use with “color by meter”
When the map display’s Color By option has been set to Meters, you can select this check box
to color all downstream sections with the specified color. The color will be applied to all
downstream sections until another meter is encountered with this same option enabled, at
which point the section coloring will change to the new meter’s designated color.
Color by options are set up in the Theme tab of the Map Settings editor. For more information,
see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
Energize and Retire

Editing a Model
Location link
Name
Meter name or ID.
Note
Rating
Specifies Continuous and Emergency current ratings for exception reporting during load
flow-based analyses. The editor also shows the MVA emergency and continuous ratings for the
meter, based on the amp ratings and nominal kV seen by the meter.
The Continuous and Emergency current rating values can be specified over multiple years for
a multi-year analysis. To specify a value for a specific year, select the desired year in Synergi
and then set the Continuous and Emergency values, as appropriate. As you change the
modeling year, the values will change in the dialog box according to the ratings you have
already set.
For more information, see "Multi-year modeling" on page 73.
Status
Specifies whether the meter is Open or Closed.
Use demand as load out of meter
If you set the meter’s status as Open, select this check box to have the meter represent
downstream load when the meter is at the outward end of a section.
What-ifs
Demands tab – Meter editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Demands tab of the Meter editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a meter" on the previous page.
Allocation scaling
Use the two text boxes in the Allocation scaling area to specify a minimum and maximum
percentage for the demand at the meter. These values specify the range of demands that you
would expect to see at the meter. During a Load Allocation analysis, you can use an option in
the Load Allocation Options editor to adjust the demands toward these minimum or maximum
values.
For more information, see "Setting up a load allocation analysis" on page 583.
Apply hourly profile
Select this check box to create diurnal meter demand curves for the meter. This is done on

Editing a Model
the Profiles tab of the Meter editor; you must select the "Apply hourly profile" check box to
enable the options on the Profiles tab.
For more information, see "Profile tab – Meter editor" on the facing page.
Balance the loads button
Click the Balance button to balance the specified demands across all phases.
Do not use demands
Select this check box if you will not be using demands on this meter. Many demand-related
options in the Demands tab will be disabled when this check box is selected.
Growth curve
Select this check box to specify a growth curve for the meter. Growth curves are used to
perform forecasting analyses, as described in "Forecasting analysis" on page 587.
Lock downstream loads
Select this check box to prevent the updating of downstream loads during a load allocation
analysis. For more information on how load allocation handles this setting, see "About load
allocation demands and meters" on page 581.
Metered values
Use the A, B, and C columns in the Metered Values area to specify the actual demand values
for phases A, B, and C.
l If the meter Type is Amp, then the fourth column will show the average of the Amp and
% pf values from the A, B, and C columns. If you enter a value in the Average column,
the value will be distributed proportionally among the first three phases, based on the
current values for each phase.
l If the meter Type is kVA and the Units is kw kvar, then the fourth column will show the
total of the kw and kvar values from the A, B, and C columns. If you enter a value in the
Total column, the value will be distributed proportionally among the first three phases,
based on the current values for each phase.
l If the meter Type is kVA and the Units is kva %pf, then the fourth column will show the
total of the kVA values and the average of the % pf values from the A, B, and C
columns. If you enter a value in the Total & Average column, the value will be
distributed proportionally among the first three phases, based on the current values for
each phase.
for a specific year, select the desired year in Synergi and then set the demand values, as
according to the demands you have already set.
You can also enter negative values for meter demands, for use with Load Allocation analysis.
Overridden by upstream meters
Select this check box to ignore the specified meter demands if there is an active meter
upstream from this one.

Editing a Model
This option may be useful if you plan to allocate load by subtran demands but still want to
model feeder demands and perhaps use them at other times. It also allows you to reset the
specified demands by using calculated demands from upstream meters. For more information
on how load allocation handles this setting in consideration of subtran versus feeder demands,
see "About load allocation demands and meters" on page 581.
Replace with results
After running a load allocation analysis, click this button to replace the current demand values
with the demand results from the analysis.
Type
Specifies whether the meter is Amps or kVA. Note that no automatic conversion takes place
when you switch between the two options.
Units
Specifies the units of measurement for non-amp meter values. Conversion between these
units is automatic.
Profile tab – Meter editor

Use the Profile tab in the Meter editor to create meter demand curves for a meter. You can
create and edit each curve individually, by selecting a month and then editing the curve values
as appropriate. You can also create a curve and then use the Copy and Paste buttons to copy
that curve to other months.
NOTE: You must select one of the Profile options on the Demands tab of the Meter editor
to enable the options on the Profile tab.
To edit meter demands
1. Open the Profile tab of the Meter editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see
"Editing a meter" on page 434.
2. Select the month for the first curve that you want to edit. Also, select kW or kvar to
specify whether you are creating a curve for real or reactive power.
3. The graph in the Profile tab provides average hourly load percentages for the selected
month. Click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location to set the new value. The
current value is shown in a text popup that appears on top of the graph.
l Click the Shift Left and Shift Right buttons to shift the hourly load percentage
values for every curve in the customer class by one hour in either direction. Note
that these two buttons affect all curves, and not just the one curve that you are
currently viewing.
Shift Left and Shirt Right buttons

Editing a Model
l Click the Copy button to copy the values from the current curve that you are
viewing. You can then select a different month and then click the Paste button to
apply the copied load curve to the newly selected month.
Copy and Paste buttons, Customer Class editor
4. Repeat these steps to edit the curve data for each month in your profile.
Dist Gen tab – Meter editor

Use the Dist Gen tab of the Meter editor to enter distributed generation levels that will be
allocated to sections downstream from the meter during a Load Allocation analysis. When
these values are specified and the “Allocate section dist gen values” option is selected in the
Load Allocation Options editor, the Load Allocation analysis will spread the distributed
generation values downstream from the meter. The Load Allocation analysis will set up
section distributed generation in proportion to the c.kVA on the section. A meter will only
allocate distributed generation on the sections between it and the next downstream meter that
is set up for distributed generation.
To specify distributed generation allocation for a meter
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want
to edit.
2. In the Meter editor, select the Dist Gen tab.
3. Select the Targets are active check box to enable the distributed generation
allocation for the meter.
4. In the Distributed Generation Targets areas, specify the peak generation capacity for
the Distributed generator. Use the A, B, and C columns to specify the peak values for
phases A, B, and C. The values that you enter for each phase will be summed in the
Totals/Average column for kW, and averaged in the Totals/Average column for Pct Pf.
l If you enter a value in the “kW” Totals/Average column, that value will be
l If you enter a value in the “Pct Pf” Totals/Average column, that value will be set
as the value for each active phase. It will not be applied proportionally as is done
If desired, you can also click the Load Graph button to edit load values using a graphical
display. Click the Year button at the top of the display to select a specific year to edit;
select “All” to edit load values for all years at once. Click anywhere outside of the Load
Graph editor to close the window.

Editing a Model
You can also click the Balance the loads button to balance the specified demands across
all phases.
Reliability tab – Meter editor

Use the Reliability tab in the Meter editor to specify expected reliability indices for SAIFI,
SAIDI, and MAIFI. These values work with exposure factors during the reliability analysis to
calibrate target values for SAIDI, SAIFI, and MAIFI. When these targets are set, Synergi will
adjust the section-based exposure factors to achieve these specified indices.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on specifying reliability targets for a
meter. For additional information, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
To specify reliability targets for a meter
to edit.
2. In the Meter editor, select the Reliability tab.
3. Select the Active Targets check box to enable the reliability targets for the meter.
4. Specify reliability targets as appropriate for the following options:
l SAIFI
l SAIDI
l MAIFI
Zones tab – Meter editor

Use the Zones tab in the Meter editor to apply customer zones to a meter. Different customer
zones can be set as the default zones for any distributed or spot loads that are downstream
from the meter. This default zone will be used for any downstream loads used unless a
downstream section is specifically set up for a particular customer zone. In this case, the
section-based zone will override the meter-specified default.
To assign default customer zones to a meter
to edit.
2. In the Meter editor, select the Zones tab.

Editing a Model
3. Select the Default for distributed loads and/or Default for spot loads check
boxes, as appropriate, to enable default customer zones for the meter. For each option,
select a zone name from the related options list.
Metering points and load allocation

Load allocation can consider metering points during the allocation process to accurately apply
the distributed load. During load allocation, Synergi adjusts the downstream load to meet the
specified amp flow on metered sections. Loads on all sections directly fed through a metering
point are adjusted. If a metering point feeds a second metering point, the load between the
two points is adjusted to meet the flow through the first point, and all downstream load is
adjusted to meet the flow through the second point.
Because metering point values are assigned at the section level, it is possible to put metered
values on every section. However, too many metering points may result in non-convergence
of load allocation due to the granular load groups between metering points. For best allocation
results, you should use a limited number of metering points in conjunction with realistic
feeder demands.
If you allocate load using substation models, metering points may be necessary to properly
configure your source demands. Because the subtran source and the actual transformer are
two different entities, the demands that you specify in the source generally represent those on
the primary of the transformer, not the secondary. If your known demands values represent
secondary demands, you should place them in a metering point directly following the
transformer to circumvent the effects of transformer loss.
TIP: Metering points are considered by load allocation only if you have your load
allocation options set to consider them. For more information, see "Setting up a load
allocation analysis" on page 583.
Motors
Synergi supports a detailed motor model, which is fully considered by analyses such as load-
flow and any load-flow based applications. In addition, if you have motors modeled, Synergi
provides two motor-specific analyses: locked rotor analysis (LRA) and motor start analysis
(MSA).
Like all model equipment, motors are attached to sections. Once modeled, the motor and
motor service loads are considered to be at the center of a section, similar to an equivalent
constant impedance spot load. Only one motor may be placed per section, and the section ID
serves as the unique identifier. Motors can be modeled on substation buses.
For detailed information on motor start analysis, see "Motor start analysis" on page 691. For
detailed information on locked rotor analysis, see "Locked rotor analysis" on page 561.
Editing a motor type

the devices in your model. The motor type defines a number of key options for the motors in

Editing a Model
your model, such as whether the motor is single phase or three phase, and also the rated
horsepower, rated voltage, and full load efficiency for the motor.
Like other equipment types, motor types are used to add new motors to your model. From the
Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the motor type that you want to add, drag it into
the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Once a motor has been created, you can
change the associated motor type from the Motor tab in the Motor editor. Some options in the
Motor editor may enable and disable automatically based on the options you have selected in
the referenced motor type.
To edit a motor type, double-click the motor type name in the Warehouse tab of the Synergi
model explorer. From the Motor tab in the Motor editor, you can also click the edit button that
is located next to the name of the selected motor type.
To edit a motor type

2. Expand Motor Types and then double-click the name of the motor type that you want
to edit.
3. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the motor
type. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Ratings tab – Motor Type editor" below
l "Starting tab – Motor Type editor" on the next page
Ratings tab – Motor Type editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Ratings tab of the Motor Type
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor type" on the previous page.
Characteristics
Specifies whether you will enter Nameplate Data or specify Motor Amp and Pf Curves
for the motor type. Refer to the options described below for more information.
Description
Optional description for the motor type.
Full load efficiency
Maximum efficiency for the motor type. For more information, see the Synergi Electric
Full load power factor
Motor power factor at full speed, rated load, and rated voltage. This option is enabled when
you have selected “Nameplate Data” as the Characteristic type.
Locked rotor Kva/HP
kVA per horsepower under locked rotor conditions. This option is enabled when you have
selected “Nameplate Data” as the Characteristic type.

Editing a Model
Motor amp curve

Motor amp curve, as referenced from the equipment data in your equipment warehouse. This
option is enabled when you have selected “Motor Amp and PF Curves” as the Characteristic
type. For more information on motor curves, see "Editing a motor curve type" on the facing
page.
Motor Pf curve
Motor performance curve, as referenced from the equipment data in your equipment
warehouse. This option is enabled when you have selected “Motor Amp and PF Curves” as the
Characteristic type. For more information on motor curves, see "Editing a motor curve type"
on the facing page.
Rated horsepower
Maximum horsepower for the motor type. For more information, see the Synergi Electric
Rated voltage
Maximum voltage for the motor type. For more information, see the Synergi Electric
Starting power factor
Power factor of the motor during starting conditions. This option is enabled when you have
selected “Nameplate Data” as the Characteristic type.
Type
Specifies whether the motor type is single-phase or three-phase.
Starting tab – Motor Type editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Starting tab of the Motor Type
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor type" on page 440.
Full load speed
Rated full load speed of the motor.
Motor inertia
Motor inertia is the “weight” of the motor and has a direct bearing on the starting time
calculated within a motor start analysis. It is the machine inertia constant which includes the
Wk2 of the motor with the Wk2 of the mechanical coupling or any gearing included. If total
Wk2 values are not available, the motor Wk2 value can be used by itself.
Motor inertia is combined with the load inertia (which is specified in the motor editor) during a
motor start analysis. A non-zero value is required.
Motor inertia can be entered directly or calculated by Synergi, as follows:
l Have Synergi calculate Motor Inertia. Select this check box to have Synergi
calculate an approximate value using an equation published in the Synergi Electric

Editing a Model
l Motor Inertia. Use the motor inertia text box to directly specify the motor inertia for
the motor type. The maximum allowable value is 500,000,000 lb-ft2.
Motor torque curve

Motor torque curve, as referenced from the equipment data in your equipment warehouse.
For more information on motor curves, see "Editing a motor curve type" below.
Synchronous speed
Speed at which an induction motor rotating field and rotor have no relative motion or the
speed at which the motor stops producing torque.
Editing a motor curve type

All motors in your model reference a motor curve type. Motor types in the equipment
warehouse also reference at least one, and often several, motor curve types. Motor curve
types are stored in the equipment warehouse, which allows you to reuse motor curves with
multiple motors and motor types.
To open the Motor Curve Type editor

2. Expand Motor Curves and then double-click the name of the motor curve type that you
want to edit.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a motor curve type.
Curve type
Select the type of curve you are editing. Available choices are Torque, Amp, Pf, and Load.
For more information on these options, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Data points
Specify the data points for the motor curve. Double-click an existing value in the Point column
to enter a new value. Curve information should generally be available in your manufacturer
data sheets.
Description
Type an optional description for the motor curve.
Editing a motor
To edit a motor
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the motor that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the motor.

Editing a Model
l "Motor tab – Motor editor" below

l "Service tab – Motor editor" on the facing page
l "Starter tab – Motor editor" on page 446
l "Load tab – Motor editor" on page 446
respectively.
Motor tab – Motor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Motor tab of the Motor editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor" on the previous page.
AMS link
Connection
Specifies whether windings are connected in a star or delta configuration.
Energize and Retire
Location link
Name
Motor name or ID.
Note
Phasing at service tie
Phases associated with the tie points. This setting is used for optimization studies.
Single phase motor connection
Phase connection for single-phase motor.

Editing a Model
Status
Specifies the motor state. Available choices are Off, Starting, and Running. For more
information on motor states and analysis, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Type
Reference to a motor type in your equipment warehouse. If the referenced motor type does
not exist in the currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the motor type will be displayed
as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails because of a missing equipment type, the resulting report
will specifically indicate the offending device(s). The motor type association will be restored
once a matching equipment warehouse is opened.
For more information on motor types, see "Editing a motor type" on page 440.
What-ifs
Service tab – Motor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Service tab of the Motor editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor" on page 443.
Line from section to transformer
Use the following options to set up a conductor that spans from the section to the optional
distribution transformer serving the motor.
l Conductor. Select the name of a conductor type from your equipment warehouse.
l Spacing. Specify the equivalent conductor spacing. The values that you can select from
are defined in the Spacing tab of the Preferences editor, as described in "Spacing
preferences" on page 49.
l Length. Specify the conductor length. The default value is 1 foot.
For more information on conductor types and the equipment warehouse, see "Conductors" on
page 375.
Line from transformer to starter
Use the following options to set up a conductor that spans from the optional distribution
transformer to the motor.
l Conductor. Select the name of a conductor type from your equipment warehouse.
l Spacing. Specify the equivalent conductor spacing. The values that you can select from
are defined in the Spacing tab of the Preferences editor, as described in "Spacing
l Length. Specify the conductor length. The default value is 1 foot.
For more information on conductor types and the equipment warehouse, see "Conductors" on
page 375.
Use transformer
Select this check box to set up an optional transformer on the motor. Once selected, the

Editing a Model
following options become enabled:

l Type. Select the name of a transformer type from your equipment warehouse.
l High connect and Low connect. Specify the high-side and low-side transformer
connection types. If you have selected a three-phase transformer type, the option will
be disabled (since the connection type is specified in the Transformer Type editor). If
you have selected a single-phase transformer type, then you can set the connection
types here.
l High side near section. Select this check box to orient the high-side winding near the
section, meaning that the low-side winding feeds the motor. If this option is not
selected, then the low-side winding is near the section, meaning that the high-side feeds
the motor. Note that this setting is not related to the physical location of the
transformer.
Starter tab – Motor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Starter tab of the Motor editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor" on page 443.
Settings
Specify additional settings that are related to some of the starting method that are available
under Starting Methods. The Settings options that appear, if any, depend on the Starting
Method that you selected.
Start delay
Specify the motor starting delay.
Starting method
Select a starting method for the motor. The following choices are available. Each option is
described in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
l Full voltage
l Autotransfer
l Capacitor
l Series resistance
l Series reactance
l Partial winding
l Wye/Delta
l Solid state red. volt
Load tab – Motor editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Load tab of the Motor editor. For
instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a motor" on page 443.
Load inertia
Load inertia is the “weight” of the load driven by the motor. It is combined with the motor
inertia (which is specified in the motor type editor) during a motor start analysis. Load inertia

Editing a Model
is modeled independently of motor inertia so that common motors can drive various loads like
pumps, impellers, or fans.
Load inertia can be entered directly or calculated by Synergi, as follows:
l Have Synergi calculate load inertia. Select this check box to have Synergi
calculate an approximate value using an equation published in the Synergi Electric
l Load inertia. Use the load inertia text box to directly specify the load inertia for the
motor.
Load torque curve
Reference to a motor load curve in your equipment warehouse. If the referenced motor curve
does not exist in the currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the motor curve type will be
displayed as “Unknown”. The motor curve type association will be restored once a matching
equipment data source is opened.
For more information on motor curves, see "Editing a motor curve type" on page 443.
Motor analyses
Synergi includes two motor analysis types: Locked rotor analysis (LRA) and motor start
analysis (MSA). LRA is typically used to determine starting or worst-case effects of a starting
motor on the entire feeder. MSA is designed to study a specific motor or motors in detail. You
can use MSA to set up a motor’s starter or to set up the minimum delay time between the
sequenced starting of two motors.
For more information, see "Locked rotor analysis" on page 561 and "Motor start analysis" on
page 691.
Reclosers
Synergi distinguishes between hydraulic and electronic reclosers. Hydraulic reclosers are
defined by manufacturer, model, and coil rating. Electronic reclosers are defined by
manufacturer, model, and pickup. Electronic reclosers typically have a phase and ground unit,
whereas hydraulic reclosers have a phase or ground unit.
Phase and ground units each have two available response curves.
l Fast
l Time delay (or slow)
The operation count or number of “shots” for each response curve can be specified. The sum
of the fast and time delay shots must be four or less.
Adders and multipliers can be used to independently modify the fast and time delay response
curves for electronic reclosers. These values should come from settings on your recloser
controller. Mechanical recloser response curves cannot be modified with adders and
multipliers.

Editing a Model
Editing a recloser type

and update devices in your model. The recloser type defines a number of key options for the
reclosers in your model, including the manufacturer name and model name for the recloser.
Like other equipment types, recloser types are used to add new reclosers to your model.
From the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the recloser type that you want to add,
drag it into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Recloser types can also be
used to update current settings for any existing recloser in your model, using the same drag-
and-drop method.
To open the Recloser Type editor
To edit a recloser type, double-click the recloser type name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a recloser type.
Description
Description for the recloser type. This field is for informational purposes only and is not
applied to any reclosers that you create or edit.
Manufacturer, Model, and Amp Rating
Recloser identification data. The list of available choices is based on information in the
on page 172.
Mech.
Mechanical response time for electronic reclosers. Defaults to “Unknown”.
Editing a recloser
To edit a recloser
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the recloser that you want to
edit.
recloser. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Recloser tab – Recloser editor" on the facing page
l "Setup tab – Recloser editor" on page 450
l "Primary and Alternate tabs – Recloser editor" on page 451
l "Rates tab – Recloser editor" on page 452

Editing a Model
respectively.
Recloser tab – Recloser editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Recloser tab of the Recloser
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a recloser" on the previous page.
Add to TCC
Click this button to add the recloser to the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time
Bypass
Select this check box to ignore the operational capability of the recloser during check
Dropout style
Dropout style recloser.
Electronic fuse
Select this check box to configure the recloser as an electronic fuse.

Interrupt rating
Interrupt rating for the recloser.
Manufacturer, Model, and Amp Rating
Recloser identification data. The list of available choices is based on information in the
on page 172.
Mech. response time
Sets the mechanical response time for electronic reclosers. Defaults to “Unknown”.
Name
Recloser name or ID.
Note
Phasing
Recloser phasing.

Editing a Model
Operation
The following options are grouped in the Operation area:
l Disable ground. Select this check box to prevent the display of ground curves in the
TCC view and curve legend. Selecting this option will also disable the “Ground” settings
on the Primary and Alternate tabs of the Recloser editor.
l Single phase operation. Specifies single-phase operation for the recloser.
l Don’t operate with analysis. Certain types of analyses, such as optimal switching,
contingency, and reliability, simulate the operation of switches and protective devices
to accomplish the analysis objective. Select this option to exclude the recloser from
being controlled in this way during these analysis types. If selected, this restriction only
applies to the current recloser in the editor.
l Is VFI type. Select this check box to set the recloser as a VFI type recloser. Doing so
will simplify the model to a single phase and ground curve.
Protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the recloser.
Single phase operation
Single-phase operation.
Status
Recloser open/closed state.
What-ifs
Setup tab – Recloser editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Setup tab of the Recloser editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a recloser" on page 448.
Color
Color of the phase curve if plotted on the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time
K factors
Values to account for cumulative heating of fuse links associated with coordination of
reclosers and fuses.
Safety/hot work
Specify the Safety interrupt and Safety pickup for both Phase and Ground.
Settings
Select an option to determine whether the recloser will use the settings that you have
configured on the Primary tab of the editor or the Alternate tab of the editor, or whether the
settings will be selected automatically based on the feeder direction (for example, for a mid-
point recloser). The available options are as follows:

Editing a Model
l Primary
l Alternate
l Auto (From -> To)
l Auto (To -> From)
l Safety / hot work
Transfer scheme
l Non-transfer
l Sectionalizing
l Mid-point
l Tie
Use the Delay field to set the time that the recloser will wait before closing to pick up a
de-energized side.
If you select the Mid-point or Tie transfer schemes, you also have the option of selecting a
Switching Group. Switching groups are used to identify switches and reclosers that work
together during an automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis. Each recloser may only belong
to one switching group at a time.
For more information on the automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis, see "Automatic
feeder switching (AFS) analysis" on page 567.
Primary and Alternate tabs – Recloser editor

Use the Primary tab and the Alternate tab to set up a group of primary and alternate phase
and ground settings for the recloser. Whether the primary or alternate settings are used is
determined by your selection for the “Settings” option on the Setup tab of the Recloser editor.
For more information on the Settings option, see "Setup tab – Recloser editor" on the previous
page.
In addition, the “Ground” settings will be disabled if you have selected the “Disable Ground”
check box on the Recloser tab of the editor. For more information on this option, see
"Recloser tab – Recloser editor" on page 449.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the Primary tab and also the
Alternate tab of the Recloser editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a
recloser" on page 448.
Curve
Specifies the curve type for phase or ground. See your manufacturer documentation for more
information.
Electronic recloser
Specifies electronic settings from the recloser controller. See your manufacturer
documentation for more information on these fields.
Shots
Specifies the shot number for phase or ground. See your manufacturer documentation for

Editing a Model
more information.
Rates tab – Recloser editor

The following list describes the tasks you can perform from the Rates tab of the Recloser
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a recloser" on page 448.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
l Crew oper./reset
Location link
Recloser mechanical response times

Mechanical response times can be added to the fast, slow, and accumulated response time.
For the accumulated response, the fast and slow control curves are determined first and then
the mechanical delays are added. Thus, the accumulated time has the delay added only once.
Regulators
Regulators are used to step-up or step-down the voltage at or downstream of the voltage
regulator so that the customer voltage levels are within limits. They are designed to raise or
lower the voltage magnitude at and beyond some remote location. Regulators are very
common and useful devices within power distribution systems.
To help you determine regulator settings, Synergi provides a special analysis tool called the
regulator setting tool. Use of the tool is optional. For more information on this tool, see
"Determining regulator R and X settings" on page 697.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with regulators in Synergi.
More detailed information on regulators is provided in the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference. The Technical Reference includes a discussion of the basic regulator model and the
more detailed model with shunt and series impedance values. The Technical Reference also

Editing a Model
describes how regulator tap positions are analytically changed and how voltage drop and
losses are determined following the load-flow convergence.
Editing a regulator type

the devices in your model. The regulator type defines a number of key options for the
regulators in your model, such as whether the regulator is single-phase or three-phase, and
also the rated KVA and rated voltage of the regulator.
Like other equipment types, regulator types are used to add new regulators to your model.
From the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the regulator type that you want to add,
drag it into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Once a regulator has been
created, you can change the associated regulator type from the Regulator tab in the Regulator
editor. Some options in the Regulator editor may enable and disable automatically based on
the options you have selected in the referenced regulator type.
To open the Regulator Type editor
To edit a regulator type, double-click the regulator type name in the Warehouse tab of the
Synergi model explorer. From the Regulator tab in the Regulator editor, you can also click the
edit button that is located next to the name of the selected regulator type.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a regulator type.
Connection
Regulator connection type for three-phase units. Available choices are Wye-Gnd, Delta, Wye,
and Zig Zag.
Note that most fields on this editor will be disabled when the selected connection type is a zig
zag regulator.
For single-phase units, the connection type is specified at the regulator instance using the
Regulator editor, as described in "Regulator tab – Regulator editor" on page 455.
CT rating
CT rating of the device. The regulator output current is reflected through the CT to supply a
current on a 0.2A base to the line-drop compensator portion of the regulator controller.
Note that the CT Rating that you specify at the regulator type can be overridden at individual
regulator instances. This override is an option on the LTC/LDC tab of the regulator editor.
Factory unit
Regulator phase capacity.
No-load losses
Losses that are used along with the regulator’s ratings to determine the value of shunt
conductance which simulate core loss. The loss is for either a three-phase unit or a single-
phase regulator depending on the factory connection setting. Zero is acceptable.
Range
Range of regulation. This is a positive value and represents the maximum buck or boost of the

Editing a Model
device. For example, you would use 10 for regulators having +/-10% regulation. Standard
regulators have a regulation range of +/- 10% divided into 32 (5/8%) or 16 (11/4%) steps.
Zero is acceptable.
Rated KVA
Nameplate rating of the regulator in kVA. It is the product of the rated load amps and the
rated range of regulation. This product is multiplied by three for three-phase regulators. For
more information on regulator kVA handling in Synergi, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Rated voltage
If the regulator is a three-phase unit, this is the rated line-to-line voltage of the regulator.
Otherwise, this is the voltage rating of the shunt winding for a single-phase regulator.
Ref link
Syntax to link the warehouse device to an external data source.
Summer Rating (Amps) and Winter Rating (Amps)
Continuous and emergency values can be set for typical summer and winter conditions and
then used in the model with the Weather feature, which models based on seasonal changes,
as described in "Configuring seasonal weather modeling" on page 267.
l Continuous. The Continuous value is used in analyses to calculate the percent loading
and for displaying regulator overload exceptions.
l Emergency. The Emergency value is used in balanced and by-phase analyses and
capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display regulator overload
exceptions.
Total # steps
Total number of steps for a regulator. For example, a value of 32 is used for a +/- 10%
regulator with a 5/8% step size since the regulator has 16 buck and 16 boost steps.
Type A or Type B
Regulator type. Detailed information on the differences between Type A and Type B regulators
are provided in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
X/R ratio
Ratio of the series reactance to resistance of the regulator. Zero is acceptable.
Z on reg. base
Regulator impedance based on its rated kVA and voltage. Zero is acceptable.
PT ratio
PT ratio of the device. The regulator output voltage is reflected through the turns ratio of the
PT to supply a voltage signal on a 120V base to the regulator controller.

Editing a Model
Editing a regulator
To edit a regulator
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the regulator that you want
to edit.
regulator. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Regulator tab – Regulator editor" below
l "LTC/LDC tab – Regulator editor" on page 457
l "Rates tab – Regulator editor" on page 459
respectively.
Regulator tab – Regulator editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Regulator tab of the Regulator
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a regulator" above.
Note that most fields on this tab will be disabled when the selected regular equipment type is
a zig zag regulator.
Connection
Regulator connection for single-phase units. For three-phase units, the connection type is
defined in the equipment warehouse using the Regulator Type editor, as described in "Editing
a regulator type" on page 453.
First house (volts)
Select the Active check box to enable First House protection for the regulator. Once enabled,
you can edit the following settings:
l High. Upper voltage limit (120V based) at the regulator output terminal with First
House protection turned on.
l Low. Low voltage limit (120V based) at the regulator output terminal with First House
protection turned on.
Name
Regulator name or ID.

Editing a Model
Nominal voltage multiplier

Specifies a forward-direction multiplier that will be applied to the nominal voltage. If the
regulator is back-fed, then the multiplier inverse will be used.
Note
Operation time
Specify the following values:
l Time delay. This value is used when the regulator control is out of bandwidth. When
this occurs, the regulator will wait for the specified number of seconds before operating.
If the regulator moves into bandwidth, then the time delay is reset.
l Intra-tap. Specifies a pause issued between tap changes while the regulator remains
out of bandwidth.
Output end is near
Location of the regulator taps, either near the section source or load end (or from-node or to-
node in network models).
Status
Specifies whether the regulator is Open, Closed, or Bypassed. When the regulator is
bypassed, a set of switches will open to isolate the regulator and another set of switches will
close to feed around the device.
Tap limits (taps)
Select the Active check box to enable tap movement limits for the regulator. Once enabled,
you can edit the following settings:
l High. Upper limit of tap movement during regulation. The value can be positive,
negative, or zero. The numerical absolute value of the tap position cannot be greater
than half the number of tap positions specified in the Regulator tab.
l Low. Lower limit of tap movement during regulation. The value can be positive,
negative, or zero. The numerical absolute value of the tap position cannot be greater
than half the number of tap positions specified in the Regulator tab.
By default, when you enter a High value, Synergi will automatically add a symmetrical Low
value. If you want to enter non-symmetrical values, enter the Low value first, click Apply, and
then enter the High value.
Turn off
Select this check box to disable the regulator’s effect on the model. If the regulator is
disabled, you can still edit the available settings but it will not have any impact on the model
or any analysis.
You can also disable regulators directly from the model explorer or Synergi map display.
Right-click on the regulator or regulator name and select Turn On or Turn Off, as appropriate.

Editing a Model
When you perform this action, the Turn Off check box will be selected or cleared to reflect the
current status.
Type
Reference to a regulator type in your equipment warehouse. If the referenced regulator type
does not exist in the currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the regulator type will be
displayed as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails because of a missing equipment type, the
resulting report will specifically indicate the offending device(s). The regulator type
association will be restored once a matching equipment warehouse is opened.
For more information on regulator types, see "Editing a regulator type" on page 453.
What-ifs
LTC/LDC tab – Regulator editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the LTC/LDC tab of the Regulator
editor. To apply LDC settings, you must first select the Automatic Operation option in the
Regulator tab, as described in "Regulator tab – Regulator editor" on page 455. The specific
forward and reverse settings that are available for edit are based on you selections for the
Reverse Mode option and the Gang Metering Phase option.
For instructions on opening the Regulator editor, see "Editing a regulator" on page 455.
Additional information on line-drop compensation is provided in the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Note that the fields on this tab will be disabled when the selected regular equipment type is a
zig zag regulator.
CT from warehouse
Select the Override check box to set a CT Rating value for this specific regulator instance.
Otherwise, the CT rating value that is specified on the selected regulator type will be used.
Forward/Reverse settings
Specify the following values. The specific forward and reverse settings that are available for
edit are based on your selections for the Reverse Mode option and the Gang Metering Phase
option, as described later in this table.
l Voltage. Specifies the voltage set point.
l R dial. Specifies the line-drop compensation R setting in volts.
l X dial. Specifies the line-drop compensation X setting in volts.
l B.W. dial. Specifies the bandwidth of the voltage set point. For example, if you have
set the voltage set point to 124 and a bandwidth of 2, then voltage range will be from
123 to 125.
The voltage base (100V or 120V) for the forward and reverse set points and LDC settings is set
as the “PT Secondary” option on the Units tab of the Preferences editor. For more information,
see "Unit preferences" on page 34.

Editing a Model
Gang metering phase

Configures gang operation. When a regulator is set for gang operation, all units move to the
same tap. The metering phase indicates the regulator unit that meters voltage and current
flow. The regulator on the metering phase raises or lowers its tap in response to its metered
conditions. Taps on the other regulator units move to match the tap of the regulator on the
metered phase.
Reverse mode
Mode that governs the behavior of the regulator while experiencing reverse power flow. The
following choices are available:
l No reverse mode. The regulator responds to voltage at terminals with no regard for
power flow direction.
l Locked forward. The regulator operates normally when power flow direction is
forward. Any reverse power flow causes regulator to lock at last tap.
l Locked reverse. The regulator operates in reverse when power flow direction is
reverse. Any forward power flow causes regulator to lock at last tap.
l Reverse idle. This mode is the same as the Locked Forward mode, except that reverse
power flow has no effect when regulator current is below the Threshold Percent. This
mode allows small (typically 2 to 5%) reverse flow current.
l Bi-directional. Forward or reverse power flow through the regulator with a current
magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the regulator. Otherwise, forward
power flow puts the regulator into forward operation and reverse power flow puts the
regulator into reverse operation.
l Neutral idle. Forward or reverse power flow through the regulator with a current
magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the regulator. Forward current above
the threshold allows the regulator to operate normally. Reverse current above the
threshold causes the regulator to park (move to neutral).
l Co-generational. Forward or reverse power flow through the regulator with a current
magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the regulator. Otherwise, the regulator
operates normally except that reverse LDC values are used with reverse power flow.
For more information, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.

Tap operation
l Automatic. Synergi is permitted to change tap positions during analysis in response to
system conditions, simulating the actual behavior of the regulator component.
l Manual. The specified taps are maintained.
Tap positions
Tap position for each phase of the regulator bank or unit. Values can be positive, negative, or
zero. The numerical absolute value of the tap position cannot be greater than half the number
of taps specified in the regulator’s table record.

Editing a Model
Rates tab – Regulator editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Regulator
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a regulator" on page 455.
Note that the fields on this tab will be disabled when the selected regular equipment type is a
zig zag regulator.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
l Crew oper./reset
Location link
Sectionalizers
A sectionalizer is specified through an actuating current and a count number, mimicking the
operation of a real device. Typically, the sectionalizer should have at least one recloser
upstream (Synergi does not yet support reclosing relays). Also, the minimum fault current
through the sectionalizer should exceed the actuating current. The amp rating of a
sectionalizer is used to calculate a value for “percent loading” and to find overload exceptions.
Sectionalizers have no curves in the protection database. As such, coordination analysis
checks their settings against reclosers paired to the sectionalizer.
Editing a sectionalizer
To edit a sectionalizer
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the sectionalizer that you
want to edit.

Editing a Model
sectionalizer. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.

l "Sectionalizer tab – Sectionalizer editor" below
l "Rates tab – Sectionalizer editor" on the facing page
respectively.
Sectionalizer tab – Sectionalizer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Sectionalizer tab of the
Sectionalizer editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a sectionalizer" on the
previous page.
Actuating current/Number counts
Sectionalizer actuating criteria.
Add to TCC
Adds the sectionalizer to the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see "Time versus current
Amp rating
Maximum amp rating.
Bypass
Select this check box to ignore the operational capability of the sectionalizer during check
option to exclude the sectionalizer from being controlled in this way during these analysis
types. If selected, this restriction only applies to the current sectionalizer in the editor.
Model
Sectionalizer model (or “mode”). The following options are available:
l “Sectionalizer” mode uses an actuating current and a count number, which is used in
check coordination analysis. The sectionalizer curves are drawn as straight lines at the
actuating current.

Editing a Model
l “Fault indicator” mode uses a trip value and a trip response time. The device is
displayed on a TCC graph as a vertical line at the trip value and a horizontal line at the
trip response time.
Name
Sectionalizer name or ID.
Phasing
Sectionalizer phasing.
Protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the sectionalizer.
Status
Sectionalizer open/closed state.
TCC color
Color of the sectionalizer curve if plotted on the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see
"Time versus current coordination (TCC) graph" on page 664.
Rates tab – Sectionalizer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Sectionalizer
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a sectionalizer" on page 459.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
l Crew oper./reset
Location link

Editing a Model
Switches
Synergi allows you to model switches within your feeder models. These switches can be used
to reconfigure your feeder connectivity.
The following rules apply when you are modeling switches in Synergi:
l Switches are located on line sections. There can be only one switch per section.
l Switches are always located closest to the node, before any other loads or equipment.
They can be located at either the source end or the load end of the section.
l With the exception of network models, a switch cannot be closed to form a loop. You
must use a tie switch, which is an open switch with tie calculation capability.
l Switches only connect those phases that are present on both sides of the switch. This is
the case for balanced and by-phase looped analyses.
l During balanced or by-phase analysis, the current through a switch is compared with
the amp rating listed in the equipment data for that switch. If the current is too high, an
exception will be indicated in the Results tab in the Section editor. For more information
on the Results tab, see "Viewing results in the Synergi editor" on page 247.
In Synergi, network topology is governed solely with nodes and sections. Topology as well as
the position and status of switches govern connectivity, or electrical flow.
Current (in amps) through switches is displayed on reports, along with the name of the switch
type. Sections with switches have a special area in the Results tab in the Section editor that
displays either the balanced or by-phase current flow. The color of the switch numbers in the
listing may reflect an overloaded switch. For more information on the Results tab, see
"Viewing results in the Synergi editor" on page 247.
Switch configuration and connectivity

Synergi allows one switch to be placed on every section, either at the inward end or the
outward end. Complex switch gears can be effectively modeled by placing and operating these
switches. The examples that follow show different switch configurations and how they affect
connectivity.
Switch connectivity example 1

In example 1, the open switch is located on the outward end of Section 1. All of the devices
and load on Section 1 are fed, but the open switch leaves Sections 2 and 3 as unfed islands.
Sections 2 and 3 may be fed if another feed path can be established to those sections or to the
node at the outward end of Section 1.
Section 2
Section 1
F
Section 3
Figure 3-8. Example 1—Open switch on outward end of section

Editing a Model

In example 2, the switch is on the inward end of Section 1. Because the switch is open, no
loads or devices on Sections 1, 2, or 3 will be included in the analysis. All sections are
completely unfed.
Section 2
Section 1
F
Section 3
Figure 3-9. Example 2—Open switch on inward end of a section
Sections 1, 2, and 3 would all be fed if the outward end of Section 3 or Section 2 were
connected to a fed section. This is shown below as Section 4.
Section 2
Section 1
F
F
Section 3
Section 4
Figure 3-10. Example 2—Connecting a new feed path
In this case, all sections are fed. However, device feed directions and the load-flow reference
directions on Sections 1 and Section 3 are reversed. Other than voltage level changes, devices
on Section 2 would see no change in the modified feed direction.

In example 3, the switch on Section 3 isolates the section while allowing Section 1 to feed
Section 2. No devices on Section 3 receive power.
Section 2
Section 1
F
Section 3
Figure 3-11. Example 3—Inward switch isolating a branch

In example 4, the switch at the end of Section 2 has no effect on the model. The switch opens
the section at its outward end, but there are no loads or devices past that point. All loads and
devices on Sections 1, 2, and 3 receive power.

Editing a Model
Section 2
Section 1
F
Section 3
Figure 3-12. Example 4—Inward switch isolating an outward end
Special switch types and functions

Switches can perform several different functions in a Synergi model. All switches are initially
added as manual (“basic”) switches. Once in the model, you can change a switch to any of the
following types:
l Basic switch. The basic switch is the “normal” switch. Opening the switch creates an
island, and closing the switch restores connectivity and typically picks up load.
l Loop tie switch. The loop tie switch can be used to model loops in a radial network. It
resides on the model as an open switch, but Synergi considers it closed during analysis.
Loop tie switches are optional and Synergi can consider loops without them. For more
information, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on page 343.
l Wandering lateral tie switch. The wandering lateral tie switch can be used to reconnect
branching single-phase lines back to a three-phase trunk, serving three-phase loads
downstream. It resides on the model as an open switch, but Synergi considers it closed
during analysis. Wandering lateral tie switches are optional and Synergi can consider
wandering laterals without them. For more information, see "Loops and wandering
laterals" on page 343.
l Automatic switch. The automatic switch simulates real devices that automatically close
to pick up load in the event of an outage or a drop in voltage. You can set your
contingency analysis options to “Prefer Auto Switches”, in which case automatic
switches are operated first, regardless of the switching objective. Also, automatic
switches may have a reduced operation time in reliability analysis. For more
information on contingency analysis options, see "Contingency analysis" on page 568.
For more information on reliability analysis options, see "Setting up a reliability
analysis" on page 673.
l Auto-transfer switch. Auto-transfer switches simulate real devices that automatically
transfer a critical load to an alternate feed path in the event of an outage. In Synergi,
these switches are modeled as a pair of regular switches located on either side of the
node that serves a critical load. Both switches are set as “Auto-Transfer” switches in the
Switch editor. For more information on modeling an auto-transfer switch pair, see
"Modeling auto-transfer switches" on page 468.
l Pad-mounted switch gear and elbows. Synergi supports the modeling of elbows and
pad-mounted switch gear. For more information on these items, see "Pad-mounted gear
and elbows" on page 469.

Editing a Model
Editing a switch type

the devices in your model. The switch type defines a number of key options for the switches in
your model, including the current ratings and voltage rating.
Like other equipment types, switch types are used to add new switches to your model. From
the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the switch type that you want to add, drag it
into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Once a switch has been created,
you can change the associated switch type from the Switch tab in the Switch editor. Some
options in the Switch editor may enable and disable automatically based on the options you
have selected in the referenced switch type.
To open the Switch Type editor
To edit a switch type, double-click the switch type name in the Warehouse tab of the Synergi
model explorer. From the Switch tab in the Switch editor, you can also click the edit button
that is located next to the name of the selected switch type.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a switch type.
Allowed for contingency switching
Select this check box to include switches that reference this switch type in a contingency
analyses. If the check box is cleared, all referenced switches will be ignored during a
contingency analysis.
Continuous current rating
Continuous current rating. This value is used in analyses to calculate the percent loading and
for displaying switch overload exceptions.
Emergency current rating
Emergency current rating. This value is used in balanced and by-phase analysis and capacitor
placement to flag overloaded sections and to display switch overload exceptions.
Gang operated
Select this check box to set up the switch type as a gang-operated switch. Note that this field
is not currently used by any Synergi analysis.
Load break
Select this check box to set up the switch type as a load break switch. Note that this field is
not currently used by any Synergi analysis.
Voltage rating
Switch voltage rating.
Withstand rating
Fault carrying capability. While the switch does not interrupt fault current, it is important to
know that the mechanical device can handle high levels of fault current.

Editing a Model
Editing a switch
To edit a switch
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the switch that you want to
edit.
2. Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the switch.
a. "Switch tab – Switch editor" below
b. "Rates tab – Switch editor" on page 468
respectively.
Switch tab – Switch editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Switch tab of the Switch editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a switch" above.
option to exclude the switch from being controlled in this way during these analysis types.
Name
Switch name or ID.
Normally open
Select this check box to indicate that the switch is open in the standard configuration of the
network. Some Synergi reports will show switches that differ from their normal state.
Note
Status
Specifies the Open or Closed status of the switch. If Open, you can also specify whether the
switch is a Loop Tie switch or Wandering Lateral Tie.

Editing a Model
l Loop tie switch. A loop tie switch can be used to model loops in a radial network. It
resides on the model as an open switch, but Synergi considers it closed during analysis.
l Wandering lateral tie switch. A wandering lateral tie switch can be used to
reconnect branching single-phase lines back to a three-phase trunk, serving three-
phase loads downstream. It resides on the model as an open switch, but Synergi
considers it closed during analysis.
For more information, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on page 343.
Switching model
Specifies whether the switch is operated manually, automatically, or as an automatic
transfer.
l Manual. Manual switch refers to the “normal” switch operation where you manually
open and close the switch using the Switch editor. Opening a switch creates an island,
and closing a switch restores connectivity and typically picks up load.
l Automatic. An automatic switch simulates a real device that automatically closes to
pick up load in the event of an outage or a drop in voltage. If you select the “Prefer Auto
Switches’ option in the Contingency Analysis Options editor, automatic switches will be
operated first during a contingency analysis, regardless of the switching objective. Also,
during a reliability analysis, automatic switches may have a reduced operation time.
If you select the Automatic switching model, you also have the option of selecting a
Switching group id. This switching group is used to identify switches and reclosers
that work together during an automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis. Each switch
may only belong to one switching group at a time.
For more information on the automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis, see "Automatic
feeder switching (AFS) analysis" on page 567.
l Auto-transfer. An auto-transfer switch simulates a real device that automatically
transfers a critical load to an alternate feed path in the event of an outage. In Synergi,
these switches are modeled as a pair of regular switches, marked as Auto-Transfer, and
located on either side of the node that serves a critical load. For more information on
setting up auto-transfer switches, see "Modeling auto-transfer switches" on the next
page.
Type
Reference to a switch type in your equipment warehouse. If the referenced switch type does
not exist in the currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the switch type will be displayed
as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails because of a missing equipment type, the resulting report
will specifically indicate the offending device(s). The switch type association will be restored
once a matching equipment warehouse is opened.
For more information on switch types, see "Editing a switch type" on page 465.
What-ifs

Editing a Model
Rates tab – Switch editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Rates tab of the Switch editor.
For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a switch" on page 466.
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
l Crew oper./reset
Location link
Modeling auto-transfer switches

Auto-transfer switches simulate real devices that automatically transfer a critical load to an
alternate feed path in the event of an outage. In Synergi, these switches are modeled as a
pair of regular switches, marked as Auto-Transfer, and located on either side of the node that
serves a critical load. The Auto-Transfer status is an option you can set in the Switch tab of
the Switch editor, as described in "Switch tab – Switch editor" on page 466.
To create a valid auto-transfer switch pair, one switch must be open and the other switch
must closed, such that the node only receives power from one source (the load can be placed
on a third section connected to that node). Once modeled, you can toggle the switches as a
pair to alternate the feed source. Contingency analysis operates the switches together, and
reliability analysis may use the switches to reduce a sustained interruption to a momentary
one for load served by the auto-transfer switch pair.

Editing a Model
Figure 3-13. Auto-transfer switch pair
To be valid, both auto-transfer switches must be placed on fed sections. In addition, they
cannot be separated by a feeder source.
To toggle an auto-transfer switch pair
Right-click on a valid auto-transfer switch pair and select Toggle ATS.
Pad-mounted gear and elbows

Synergi supports the modeling of elbows and pad-mounted switch gear. The switching of
these devices is manual only, and they are not considered by any analysis type.
Elbows
Elbows are modeled through the Section editor. There is not a specific equipment type for
elbows in your model, nor is there an elbow symbol that appears on the map. An elbow
remains “assigned” to a particular section due to the fact that it is created as a part of the
section.
Topologically in Synergi, elbows act just like switches. They are considered to be modeled at
the end of a section. When opened, they isolate the parent section from all downstream
sections. In a radial model, all loop creation rules that apply to switches also apply to elbows.
To model an elbow
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the section that you want to
edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Properties tab.
3. Under Elbows/Switchgear, select an elbow status for both the to-node end and the
from-node end of the section. Available status options are No Elbow, Open, and
Closed.

Editing a Model
Pad-mounted switch gear

Pad-mounted switch gear is switching equipment that controls a junction of multiple line
sections. In Synergi, you model this type of equipment by converting a node to pad-mounted
gear. Once converted, each adjoining section is assigned a bay that can be independently
opened or closed. In a radial model, all loop creation rules that apply to switches also apply to
pad-mounted gear.
At the data level, Synergi sees pad-mounted gear as a collection of elbows. Consider the
following example, where a node has been converted to a pad-mounted switch gear:
Figure 3-14. Sample pad-mounted gear
From a data perspective, Synergi sees the following:
Figure 3-15. Pad-mounted gear from a data perspective
When you open and close bays within the switch gear editor, you are actually opening and
closing elbows on the respective sections. If you open the bay to a particular section in the PM
Gear editor, you can open the Section editor for that section and see that the appropriate
elbow has been marked as Open. Likewise, if you change an elbow setting within a Section
editor, an identical change will be reflected in any attached pad-mounted gear.
Converting a node to pad-mounted switch gear
To convert a node to pad-mounted switch gear
1. In the Synergi map display, locate the node you would like to convert to pad-mounted
switch gear.
2. Right-click on the node and select Convert to Pad Mount Gear.
—or—

Editing a Model
b. In the Node group, click PM Gear.
Editing pad-mounted switch gear
In the PM Gear editor, you can open and/or close individual switch gear bays, as well as
assign an amperage limit for each individual bay. Since the pad-mounted switch gear is a type
of node, you can also edit the same data you can edit for a node, including the X and Y
coordinates.
To edit pad-mounted switch gear
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the pad-mounted switch
gear that you want to edit.
2. In the PM Gear editor, select the PMG tab. The following list describes the options you
can edit.
l Amp Rating. Amp rating for the elbow at each section. Any changes that you make
here will be updated automatically in the Properties tab of the Section editor, and
vice-versa.
l Bay. Identifies the Section ID for each section that is attached to the pad-mounted
gear. You cannot edit this field.
l Description. Optional description for the pad-mounted gear.
l Status. Status for the elbow at each section. Set the status to Open or Closed, as
desired. Any changes that you make here will be updated automatically in the
Properties tab of the Section editor, and vice-versa.
3. Select the Node tab. The following list describes the options you can edit.
l Incident sections. Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the pad-
mounted switch gear. This list is for informational purposes only and cannot be
edited.
l X coordinate. X coordinate location of the pad-mounted switch gear.
l Y coordinate. Y coordinate location of the pad-mounted switch gear.
Switch plans
A switch plan is a Synergi tool that systematically opens and closes switches in a specific
order and then analyzes the plan with a load flow analysis. You can create and save numerous
plans and then recall and load them at any time. Changes to the model can be made
permanent or unapplied.

Editing a Model
Switch plans are controlled by the Switch Plan editor. The editor allows you to create a switch
plan by recording your actions of opening and closing switches in the model. You can then
rearrange the switching order, change the type of plan, open a Switch editor, and apply
changes.
To create a switch plan
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on a section where you wish to create a switch
plan.
2. Select Add Item > Switch Plan.
NOTE: You can also create a switch plan by clicking the Add Switch Plan button in
the Build tab of the Synergi ribbon and then clicking on the section where you with to
create a switch plan.
3. Use the Switch Plan editor to configure the switch plan. Refer to the procedures listed
below for more information on the specific tasks you can perform.
To open the Switch Plan editor for an existing switch plan

2. Expand Locations/Groups and select Switch Plans. Double-click on the name of the
switch plan that you want to edit.
3. Use the Switch Plan editor to configure the switch plan. Refer to the procedures listed
below for more information on the specific tasks you can perform.
To edit the name and description for the switch plan
1. In the Switch Plan editor, next to Description, type the name of the switch plan. By
default, the switch plan name uses the name of the feeder where the switch plan was
created.
2. Next to Note, type an optional description for the switch plan.
To record switching actions for a switch plan
1. In the Switch Plan editor, click Record.

2. In the Synergi map display, locate the switch that you want to add to the switch plan.
Right-click on the switch and select Open Device or Close Device, as appropriate.
The action is added to the end of the list of switch actions in the Switch Plan editor.
3. Repeat the previous step to add additional switch actions to the switch plan.
4. Click Stop to end the recording of switch actions.
To manually add switching actions to a switch plan
1. In the Switch Plan editor, under “Add a switch”, select the Feeder that contains the
switch you want to add, and then select the specific Switch you want to add.
2. Click Add. The switch is added to the end of the list of switch actions.
To edit switch actions in a switch plan
In the list of switch actions, select the specific action that you want to edit and then do any of
the following:

Editing a Model
l To disable the action: Clear the corresponding check box.

l To change the order of the action: Click the Up or Down arrow buttons, as appropriate.
l To change the switching action: Next to Plan, change the switch operation to Open ->
Closed or Closed -> Open, as appropriate.
You can also use the toolbar buttons at the bottom of the editor to do the following:
l Edit the selected switch.
l Toggle the switch’s current status (from open to closed, or closed to open—the current
status is shown in the Status text box).
l Zoom to the location of the selected switch.
l Remove the selected switch from the plan.
To analyze a switch plan
In the Switch Plan editor, click the Analyze button. This will run a load-flow analysis on your
model using the proposed switch plan. When the analysis is complete, Synergi will display a
Switch Plan Summary report, which shows information on the impact the switch plan will have
on your model.
To delete a switch plan

2. Expand Locations/Groups and select Switch Plans. Select the name of the switch
plan that you want to delete.
Using the Switch Plan Manager

The Switch Plan Manager provides a single location where you can view your switch plans and
perform a variety of management tasks, including editing, analyzing, and deleting individual
switch plans. As you select different plans and switches in the Switch Plan Manager, the
Synergi map display will update to show the impact that the selected plan or switch operation
will have on the model.
The Switch Plan Manager includes the switch plans that you have created directly in Synergi
as well as any switch plans that have been generated by a contingency analysis. After
performing a contingency analysis, you can use the Switch Plan Manager to select the switch
plan that is most appropriate for your model and then save that plan as a part of the model.
To use the Switch Plan Manager

2. In the Managers group, click Switch Plan.
NOTE: The Switch Plan Manager can also be opened automatically following a
contingency analysis. For more information, see "Contingency analysis" on page 568.

Editing a Model
3. In the Source area of the Switch Plan Manager, select the source of the switch plans
that you want to work with. For example, a source of “Model” indicates that the switch
plans were created manually for a model following the instructions provided in "Switch
plans" on page 471. “Cntgcy” indicates switch plans that were created as a result of a
contingency analysis, as described in "Contingency analysis" on page 568.
4. In the Plan area, select the specific switch plan that you want to work with, and then
perform any of the following tasks:
To ... Do This ...
Edit the selected Select the switch plan that you want to edit, and then click
switch plan Edit.
For more information on editing a switch plan, see

"Switch plans" on page 471.
Run a load-flow Select the switch plan that you want to analyze, and then
analysis using the click Analyze. Synergi will run a load-flow analysis
selected switch plan based on the proposed switch plan and then display a
Switch Plan Summary report, showing more detailed
information on the impact the selected switch plan will
have on your model.
Delete the selected Select the switch plan that you want to delete, and then
switch plan click Delete.
Zoom to a switch In the Switch steps area, select the step that includes
location the switch that you want to view, and then click Zoom.
Save a contingency Select the switch plan that you want to save to the model,
analysis switch plan and then click -> Model.
to the model
Remove all switch Click Clear non-model plans.

plans that are not
saved with the model
from the Switch Plan
Manager
Restore the model Click Restore model.
5. Click Close to close the Switch Plan Manager.
Transformers
Primary transformers are modeled in Synergi to be an accurate representation of real
transformer banks and units operating in a three-phase unbalanced distribution system.

Editing a Model
Transformer model
Transformers can be modeled in detail within an unbalanced load-flow package by considering
the winding-to-winding relationships between those transformer windings on the primary and
secondary sides of the bank or unit. The method used in this modeling schema breaks up the
transformer bank into three parts, as shown below.
Inward winding Outward winding
Connection Connection
Figure 3-16. Three parts of a transformer bank model
The center portion of the model consists of three ideal transformer models. The relationship
between the voltage and current across these windings is academic:
Equation 3-7.
where:
I In, I Out, VIn, and

= inward and outward currents and voltages
VOut
aww = winding-winding turns ratio of transformers
The point of using this type of modeling is to modularize the very complicated behavior of
transformers associated with the various transformer connections. The effects of transformer
impedance, grounding, and no-load losses upon the unbalanced voltages and currents of the
bank are modeled. These effects, as well as the essential effects of the transformer
connection, are included in the inward winding connection and outward winding connection
portion of the model. The method for handling these transformer connections is described in
detail in the topics listed below.
Tertiary transformer windings

As an option, you can model tertiary windings and connections. A single transformer can have
only one tertiary winding, but you can make multiple connections to it, and specify different
connection types for single-phase units.
Basic steps for modeling a tertiary winding
Modeling a tertiary winding requires a few basic steps:

Editing a Model
1. Create or edit a transformer equipment type that has the tertiary winding feature
enabled. This setting is specified in the Taps/Tertiary tab of the Transformer Type
editor, as described in "Editing a transformer type" on page 481.
2. Add a transformer to the model using the transformer type that was enabled for tertiary
winding.
3. Specify where the secondary and tertiary windings should be connected. These options
are set on the Tertiary tab of the Transformer editor, as described in "Tertiary tab –
Transformer editor" on page 488.
Specifying secondary versus tertiary connections
Transformer tertiary connections are specified in the Transformer editor, but are not visible
on the model. Connections are specified by section, and eligible sections for connection are
determined by the closest node.
To help illustrate this concept, consider the following example:
The transformer is closest to the node with incident sections Sect_02, Sect_03, and Sect_04.
Therefore, these three sections will be available for secondary and/or tertiary connections in
the Transformer editor. In the Tertiary tab of the editor for this transformer, you might see
the following:

Editing a Model
Each section connected to the closest node is listed, along with its specified connection type.
To change between secondary and tertiary, click the down arrow; the connection type will
change automatically. Once this option has been set, the entire section is considered to be
attached to the specified transformer connection. In the example shown above, Sect_04 is
specified as the tertiary connection, while Sect_02 and Sect_03 are secondary connections. By
default, all connections are set as secondary until manually changed.
While modeling tertiaries, be aware of the following:
l Tertiary connections must be enabled in the applicable transformer equipment type
before the options in the Tertiary tab shown above will become enabled. In addition, all
nameplate data associated with tertiary windings is specified in the equipment type.
Transformer equipment types are discussed in "Editing a transformer type" on

Editing a Model
page 481.
l The parent section of a transformer is always considered the primary connection and
cannot be specified otherwise.
l On the model, a tertiary connection must always be facing “out” of the section. That is,
you must specify that the high side is away from the node where the tertiary
connections will be made. In the example shown above, if the junction node were the
“to-node,” the transformer must be specified with the high-side near the “from-node.”
Transformer connection models

Synergi models transformers and their connections in great detail. Three-phase transformer
units and banks of single-phase transformers are constructed from connections of the single
winding transformer model shown below.
Iin I out
a:1
+ Zs +
Vin Gc V
out
- -
Figure 3-17. Single-winding transformer
The model has a series or winding impedance and a conductance representing the core losses.
In Synergi, the transformer impedance values are actually spread across on the source and
load side windings. The source side can be connected into one of the four general schemes
shown below.
B
A Zw
1 + 2
V Zw
Gw2 w
1 I w2
Gw1 - +
V w2
Y -
I -
+ Vw 3 -
N Zn
+
-
N
Gw3
Zw3
+
I
C
C
Figure 3-18. Wye-Gnd source side connection
A Zw
1
+ 2
V Zw
Gw2
w1 I w2
Gw1 -
+
2
Vw
Y -
+ Vw 3 -
-
Gw3
Zw3
+
I
C
C
Figure 3-19. Wye source side connection
I
A
A
Zw
1
Gw1
Gw3
3
I
Zw
C
C Zw2
Gw2
I
B
B
Figure 3-20. Delta source side connection

Editing a Model
I
A
A
Zw
3
1
w
+
+ V
Gw1
Vw
Gw3
1
3
I
-
Zw
C
C
I
B
B
Figure 3-21. Open-Delta source side connection
A number of other connections are related to these. Open-Delta AB and CA connections are
available. Open-Wye connections can also be formed by eliminating windings from the Wye-
Gnd connection.
These same connections are available for the load side of transformer banks.
a
+ b
V
w
1 I w2
- +
V w2
-
Z tn + Vw 3 -
Ic
c
Figure 3-22. Wye-gnd load side connection
+ b
V
w
1 I w2
- +
V w2
-
+ Vw 3 -
Ic
c
Figure 3-23. Wye load side connection
a
-
+
3
Vw
w
+ V
1
-
b
- Vw 2 +
c
Figure 3-24. Delta load side connection
a
-
+
3
Vw
w
+ V
1
-
Figure 3-25. Open-Delta BC
The source and load side connections are used together to form the high- and low-side
connections of the transformer bank or three-phase unit. For example, choosing a Wye-Gnd
connection for the source side and a Delta connection for the load side of a transformer bank
or unit would result in the following model.

Editing a Model
A
+
V
w
1 I w2 a
-
-
+
+
2
Vw
Y -
-
I -
+ Vw 3 -
N b
+
-
N - +
c
+
I
C
C
Figure 3-26. Model resulting from Wye-Gnd/Delta connection
Currents and voltages within the windings and at the transformer terminals are consistent
with the transformer model presented above and Kirchhoff’s laws. These banks can be built
using the equipment tables and the section records.
Network protectors
Network protectors are an essential part of the secondary network systems. They open and
isolate the primary feeder from the network in the event of a fault, avoiding a service outage
for the load at the secondary network. In addition, if the primary feeder is de-energized when
the feeder breaker opens, the network protector will also open to protect the load.
A short circuit on any one of the primary feeders will cause all the network protectors on that
feeder to open on reverse energy, provided the total power on the three-phase feeder is in the
reverse direction. The other primary feeders carry the load until the faulted cable is repaired
and returned to service. When the feeder is clear of all faults and the transformer voltage is
greater than that of the network, the network protectors close.
In a secondary network system, the system is looped or meshed and is supplied by several
primary feeders. These systems are often used in metropolitan areas or other areas with high
load density and provide a better continuity of service as compared to a radial distribution
system. Other advantages include less voltage sagging (since each load is supplied from at
least two directions) and a possible reduction in transformer capacity because the demand is
diversified across large number of circuits.
Tripping and closing the network protectors
Synergi will apply the tripping and closing characteristics to the network protector if it is in
Automatic mode and Network load flow or Network fault analysis is run.
l The network protector trips automatically if the net three-phase power flow goes from
the transformer to the network.
l The network protector will close automatically if the net three-phase watt flows into the
network from the transformer and remains the same after the network protector closes.
Sample model
All the primary sections are shown as red (using Color by Results and selecting nominal kV)
and the distribution network sections are shown as blue. All the transformers have network
protectors that are enabled and automatic. Synergi determines and sets the appropriate
status of the network protectors when network load flow is run.

Editing a Model
Editing a transformer type

the devices in your model. The transformer type defines a number of key options for the
transformers in your model, such as whether the transformer is single-phase or three-phase,
and also the high-side and low-side voltage for the transformer. The transformer type is also
used to enable tertiary winding and load-tap changer for any transformers that are associated
with the equipment type.
Like other equipment types, transformer types are used to add new transformers to your
model. From the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, find the transformer type that you
want to add, drag it into the map display, and drop it onto the desired section. Once a
transformer has been created, you can change the associated transformer type from the
Transformer tab in the Transformer editor. Some options in the Transformer editor may
enable and disable automatically based on the options you have selected in the referenced
transformer type.

Editing a Model
To edit a transformer type
To edit a transformer type, double-click the transformer type name in the Warehouse tab of
the Synergi model explorer. From the Transformer tab in the Transformer editor, you can also
click the edit button that is located next to the name of the selected transformer type.
Use the tabs on the left side of the editor to access the available settings for the transformer
type. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Ratings tab – Transformer Type editor" below
l "Taps/Tertiary tab – Transformer Type editor" on the facing page
Ratings tab – Transformer Type editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Ratings tab of the Transformer
Type editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a transformer type" on the
previous page.
Center tapped secondary
Select this check box to indicate that the transformer type has a secondary center tap. This
option is enabled when the transformer type is Single Phase and the “This is a distribution
transformer” check box has been selected.
Description
Optional description for the transformer type.
Factory unit
Transformer phase capacity. Specify whether the transformer type is Single Phase or Three
Phase.
High-side settings and Low-side settings
High-side and low-side voltage settings for the transformer type. Specify the following
values:
l KV. Rated kV.
l Connection. Transformer connection type. For three-phase transformers, the
connection type is specified here, in the transformer equipment type editor. For single-
phase transformers, the type is specified in the transformer or substation editor. For
more information on the Transformer editor, see "Editing a transformer" on page 484.
For more information on the Substation editor, see "Editing a feeder" on page 334.
l Optional Nominal Voltage. For low-side settings, specifies a nominal voltage that
can be optionally applied to the transformer type. This value is applied to a transformer
when the Low-Side Nominal Voltage option is set to From Type in the Transformer tab of
the respective Transformer editor.
Name plate ratings
Name plate ratings for the transformer type. Specify the following values:
l Rated KVA. Operating rating of the transformer. For single-phase transformers,
specify the transformer single-phase nameplate rating. For three-phase transformers,

Editing a Model
specify the total three-phase nameplate rating.

l Impedance. The series or winding impedance is the nameplate value expressed as a
percent using the rated kVA as a base. For more information on impedance, see the
l Resistance. The resistance is the nameplate value expressed as a percent using the
rated kVA base of the transformer. Zero is acceptable.
l No Load Losses.
Ref link
Syntax to link the warehouse device to an external data source.
Summer KVA ratings and Winter KVA ratings
Specify Continuous and Emergency ratings for typical summer and winter ratings. These
values are used with Synergi’s weather-based modeling, as described in "Configuring
seasonal weather modeling" on page 267.
The Continuous and Emergency rating is also used for exception coloring in the map display.
For more information on coloring the map display, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
This is a distribution transformer
Select this check box to specify that the transformer type is a distribution transformer. When
this check box is selected, the transformer type will only be available for use with section
distribution transformers. Otherwise, the transformer type will only be available for use with
primary transformer instances. Distribution transformer types are also listed separately from
primary transformer types in the Warehouse tab of the Synergi model explorer.
Taps/Tertiary tab – Transformer Type editor

Use the Taps/Tertiary tab of the Transformer Type editor to enable load-tap changer and
tertiary windings for the transformer type. Enabling these features for the transformer type
will enable the corresponding features for any transformer instance that references the
transformer type.
The following procedures describe the tasks you can perform from the Taps/Tertiary tab of
the Transformer Type editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a
transformer type" on page 481.
To enable load-tap changer (LTC)
1. Select the Enable Load-Tap Changer check box.

2. Select the On-load tap changer on primary windings check box to enable the tap
changers on the primary windings. Leave the check box cleared to enable the tap
changers on the secondary windings.
3. Enter LTC nameplate data for the following values: Tap size, Min tap, Neutral tap,
Max tap, PT Ratio, and CT Rating.
Note that the CT Rating that you specify at the transformer type can be overridden at
individual transformer instances. This override is an option on the LTC/LDC tab of the
transformer editor.

Editing a Model
To enable tertiary windings
1. Select the Enable Tertiary Winding check box.

2. Enter tertiary winding nameplate data for the following values: Rated KVA and
Impedance.
3. Next to KV, enter the tertiary output voltage for the transformer type.
4. Next to Connection, select a connection type for three-phase units. This option will be
disabled if you have set the transformer type to Single Phase in the Ratings tab of the
editor. (The connection for single-phase units is specified in the Tertiary tab of the
Transformer editor.)
Editing a transformer
To edit a transformer
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the transformer that you
want to edit.
transformer. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
l "Transformer tab – Transformer editor" below
l "LTC/LDC tab – Transformer editor" on page 486
l "Settings tab – Transformer editor" on page 487
l "Tertiary tab – Transformer editor" on page 488
l "Net Protector tab – Transformer editor" on page 488
l "Rates tab – Transformer editor" on page 489
respectively.
Transformer tab – Transformer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Transformer tab of the
Transformer editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a transformer" above.
High-side settings and Low-side settings
High-side and low-side voltage settings for the transformer. Values that are disabled are
specified in the referenced transformer type.

Editing a Model
l Near Source / Near Load. Specify the direction of the primary transformer’s high-
side winding. The transformer can be a step-up transformer with the high-side winding
on the load side of the section, or a step-down transformer with the high-side winding
on the source side of the section. The high-side direction is not related to the actual
location of the transformer on the section.
l Connection. Transformer connection type. For single-phase transformers, the
connection type is specified here, in the Transformer editor. For three-phase
transformers, the type is specified in the referenced transformer type.
l Nominal Voltage. Nominal voltage for the transformer, as specified in the referenced
transformer type.
l Gnd Ohms. For Wye-Gnd connections, specify the grounding resistance and reactance
for the high side and low side of the transformer bank.
Impedance from warehouse type
Select the Override check box if you want to apply custom Impedance and Resistance
values to the transformer. If the check box is cleared, then the Impedance and Resistance
values from the transformer’s warehouse type will be used.
For information on editing these values in the warehouse, see "Editing a transformer type" on
page 481.
Low-side nominal voltage
Use this option to specify how output nominal voltage is determined for the transformer.
l Calculate. The nominal voltage is calculated by Synergi based on transformer
windings, primary tap, etc.
l Specify. The nominal voltage is specified at the transformer by the user.
l From Type. The nominal voltage will use the “Optional Nominal Voltage” as specified
at the transformer’s warehouse type. The warehouse nominal kV is listed in this field
(for example, “13.2 kV from type”).
Name
Transformer name or ID.
Note
Mobile
Indicates that the transformer is a mobile device. This check box is for information purposes
only and does not affect any analysis results.
Tap setting (PU)
Value that allows for transformers set on fixed taps above or below the rated voltage. Synergi
multiplies this value by the rated high voltage when calculating transformer turns ratios. If
transformer taps are not used, enter 1.0, which indicates that the transformer is operating at
nameplate value.

Editing a Model
Type
Specifies a transformer type from the equipment warehouse, and indicates whether the
transformer type is a single-phase or three-phase unit. If the referenced transformer type
does not exist in the currently loaded equipment warehouse, then the transformer type will be
displayed as “Unknown”. If an analysis fails because of a missing equipment type, the
resulting report will specifically indicate the offending device(s). The transformer type
association will be restored once a matching equipment warehouse is opened.
For more information on transformer types, see "Editing a transformer type" on page 481.
What-ifs
LTC/LDC tab – Transformer editor

Use the LTC/LDC tab of the Regulator editor to specify load tap changer (LTC) and line-drop
compensation (LDC) settings.
Transformers, especially primary transformers, may include a regulator LTC component. To
set up an LTC for a transformer, you must first enable the LTC option for the transformer type
that is associated with your transformer. If the LTC option is not enabled in the transformer
type, as described in "Editing a transformer type" on page 481, then the LTC options will be
disabled in the LTC/LDC tab of the Transformer editor.
The following list describes the options you can edit from the LTC/LDC tab of the Transformer
editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a transformer" on page 484.
CT from warehouse
Select the Override check box to set a CT Rating value for this specific transformer instance.
Otherwise, the CT rating value that is specified on the selected transformer type will be used.
Gang metered phase
Activates and configures gang operation. When the Gang Operated check box is selected, all
phase units move to the same tap during tap changes, according to the metering phase.
Forward/Reverse volt and LDC
Specify the following values. The specific forward and reverse settings that are available for
edit are based on your selections for the Reverse Mode option and the Gang Metering Phase
option, as described later in this table.
l Voltage. Specifies the voltage set point.
l R Dial. Specifies the line-drop compensation R setting in volts.
l X Dial. Specifies the line-drop compensation X setting in volts.
l B.W. Dial. Specifies the bandwidth of the voltage set point. For example, if you have
set the voltage set point to 124 and a bandwidth of 2, then voltage range will be from
123 to 125.

Editing a Model
The voltage base (100V or 120V) for the voltage and LDC settings is set as the “PT Secondary”
option on the Units tab of the Preferences editor. For more information, see "Unit
Reverse mode
Mode that governs the behavior of the transformer’s regulator LTC component while
experiencing reverse power flow. The following choices are available:
l No Reverse Mode. The transformer responds to voltage at terminals with no regard
for power flow direction.
l Locked Forward. The transformer operates normally when power flow direction is
forward. Any reverse power flow causes regulator to lock at last tap.
l Locked Reverse. The transformer operates in reverse when power flow direction is
reverse. Any forward power flow causes regulator to lock at last tap.
l Reverse Idle. This mode is the same as the Locked Forward mode, except that
reverse power flow has no effect when the transformer current is below the Threshold
Percent. This mode allows small (typically 2 to 5%) reverse flow current.
l Bi-Directional. Forward or reverse power flow through the transformer with a current
magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the regulator. Otherwise, forward
power flow puts the transformer into forward operation and reverse power flow puts the
transformer into reverse operation.
l Neutral Idle. Forward or reverse power flow through the transformer with a current
magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the transformer. Forward current
above the threshold allows the transformer to operate normally. Reverse current above
the threshold causes the transformer to park (move to neutral).
l Co-Generational. Forward or reverse power flow through the transformer with a
current magnitude less than the Threshold Percent locks the transformer. Otherwise,
the transformer operates normally except that reverse LDC values are used with
reverse power flow.
Tap control
l Automatic. Synergi is permitted to change tap positions during analysis in response to
system conditions, simulating the actual behavior of the regulator component.
l Manual. The specified taps are maintained.
Taps
Specifies the initial tap settings for analysis. These taps will be maintained unless you set the
Tap Control to Automatic.
Settings tab – Transformer editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Settings tab of the Transformer
First house
When enabled, these values specify first house protection for upper and lower voltage limits

Editing a Model
at the transformer output terminals.

Tap limits
When enabled, these options specify high and low limits of tap movement during regulation.
The value can be positive, negative, or zero. The numerical absolute value cannot be greater
than half the number of taps specified in the transformer equipment type. For more
information on transformer types, see "Editing a transformer type" on page 481.
Tapping delay
Specifies a pause issued between tap changes while the transformer remains out of
bandwidth.
Time delay
This value is used when the transformer control is out of bandwidth. When this occurs, the
transformer will wait for the specified number of seconds before operating.
If the transformer moves into bandwidth, then the time delay is reset.
Tertiary tab – Transformer editor

Synergi supports transformer tertiary windings. Note that the tertiary winding must be
enabled at the equipment data level; that is, the selected transformer type in the Transformer
tab must have the tertiary enabled. If the tertiary is not enabled in the transformer type, the
settings in this tab will be disabled. For more information, see "Editing a transformer type" on
page 481.
For more information on modeling tertiaries, see "Editing a transformer type" on page 481.
Net Protector tab – Transformer editor

A network protector isolates the network from primary feeder fault and can be included in the
Synergi enhanced transformer model. Network protectors in Synergi are discussed in detail in
"Network protectors" on page 480.
To enable a network protector for a transformer
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you
want to edit.
2. In the Transformer editor, select the Net Protector tab.
3. Select the Has Network Protector check box to enable the network protector.
4. Under Operation Mode, specify whether the network protector operates automatically
or manually.
l Automatic. Under Automatic operation, Synergi will automatically connect the
associated transformer to the network under positive power flow conditions, and
disconnect the transformer from the network under reverse power flow
conditions.
l Manual. Under Manual operation, the network protector will open and close like a
normal switch. The network protector will not react to reverse power flow
conditions.

Editing a Model
5. Under Status, specify whether the network protector is Open or Closed.

Rates tab – Transformer editor

The following table lists the tasks you can perform from the Rates tab of the Transformer
AMS link
Energize and Retire
Failure rates
Location link
Editing loads
with a variety of different options. In addition, Synergi can apply distributed loads throughout
your model automatically, using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and
load allocation analysis.
Setting up loads
Loads in Synergi are represented by the standard real and reactive components, kW and kvar,
at the section level. Once properly set up, load handling is generally straightforward and
intuitive.
However, setting up loads can be a detailed process, especially depending on how accurate
and complex you wish to be. There is no single method or solution for all models. Setting up
loads can be a multi-step and ongoing process, one that requires careful thought and good
engineering decisions.

Editing a Model
Load types
In general, Synergi identifies five types of load models. In many cases, these different
models have a strong overlap in analytical effect and are distinguished largely by how you
create and interact with them.
l Distributed loads. Distributed load is the “normal,” non-itemized load on your
system. Distributed load data is normally calculated for you by load allocation analysis,
often using transformer connected kVA. Usually, distributed load in a model represents
a good averaging of system loading, but the accuracy may vary according to your
allocation method and supporting data.
l Spot loads. Spot loads are special, stable loads that you assign in addition to
distributed load. A spot load often represents a predictable and substantial large load,
such as an industrial customer, that you have accurate information about and would not
be properly represented by distributed load. Spot loads can be assigned and turned on
and off individually, by section.
l Projects. Projects are a means of placing multiple, itemized spot loads on a single
section. Analytically, they behave similarly to spot loads, but they provide a variety of
features for more comprehensive management. For more information, see "Projects
(Load)" on page 493.
l Large customers. Large customers are also similar to spot loads, except that they can
also model a scheduled, distributed load component. Unlike most other load models,
large customers are handled similar to devices, with map symbols and independent
editors. As such, you can leverage Synergi’s search, zoom, and explorer features to
manage them. For more information, see "Large customers" on page 428.
l Areas of interest. An area of interest provides a means of applying a simple, spatial
load to the model and assigning it to a section. Analytically, areas of interest load
behaves identically to a spot load. For more information, see "Areas of interest" on
page 119.
In summary, all loads generally have a similar, if not identical, analytical effect, with respect
to their locations on sections. The differences primarily involve how the loads are applied to
the model and how the data is managed afterward.
Getting started with load modeling

Spot load modeling is frequently a manual process, where you have metered data that you
can calculate and apply directly to the applicable sections. Distributed loads, however, are a
much different situation. Most users do not have metered data readily available that can be
easily associated with sections in the model. Therefore, for distributed loads, generally the
first step to setting up loads is providing some preliminary data to Synergi, and allowing load
allocation to generate the kW and kvar components. This information usually includes:
l Feeder and subtran demands, by means of meter devices modeled downstream from
the sources

Editing a Model
l Distribution transformer connected kVA, by section

l Other metered data, if available, by means of meter devices
With this information, load allocation can produce a functional model, capable of reliable
analysis. In many cases, the resulting model may be sufficient for your needs. However, load
allocation is limited to certain basic assumptions and while the model can produce useful
results, there are many more ways to improve the accuracy of your model. These include the
following:
l Load I,Z,PQ. One of the easier means of improving load accuracy is to adjust your load
constant %I, %Z, and %PQ. No load is ever truly 100% of any component, and Synergi
provides a variety of tools for determining and settings these values within your model.
For more information, see "Load %I, %Z, %PQ" below.
l Customer load curves. In Synergi, you can implement 24-hour daily load curves to
conduct very precise, off-peak analyses. For more information, see "Customer load
l Load growth and growth curves. To simulate a future increase (or decrease) in
load, you can use growth factors as simple multipliers against current load. For more
information, see "Load growth" on page 286.
l Capacity factors. Capacity factors can be specified at the section level to indicate the
percent effect of the specified load. Capacity factors can be useful for compensating for
oversized/under-utilized transformers, which caused load allocation to allocate an
excessive amount of load, compared to the real values that are known to you. For more
information, see "Capacity factors" on the next page.
In general, all load modeling methods and tools can be combined in a variety of ways to
achieve your desired result. It is up to you to evaluate your needs, versus the data available
to you, to determine a workflow appropriate for your situation.
Load %I, %Z, %PQ

All loads within a distribution system are comprised of a constant current (%I), constant
impedance (%Z), and constant power (%PQ) component. The ratio of these components can
vary widely depending on the type of load, and very rarely is a load a full 100% of any single
component. Because the makeup of loads has an impact on power flow throughout a system,
Synergi allows precise modeling of loads, based on I,Z,PQ composition.
Synergi provides a special tool to help you determine I,Z,PQ values, called I,Z,PQ Calibration.
The tool can be found with the Power Tools applications. For more information, see "I,Z,PQ
Calibration power tool" on page 712.
For more detailed information on these three components and the Synergi load model, see the
To assign I, Z, PQ percentages to loads
There are two places that you can assign I, Z, PQ percentages:

Editing a Model
l Sections. In the Section editor, you can assign percentages directly in the Load - Dist
and Load - Spot tabs. Percentages assigned to sections only apply to those respective
sections. For more information, see "Load Dist tab – Section editor" on page 352 and
"Load Spot tab – Section editor" on page 355.
Section editor, specifying Synergi to use %I, %Z, %PQ from the assigned customer
class
l Customer classes. In the Customer Class editor, you can assign I, Z, PQ values to the
class. A section uses these values instead of its own if the section uses that customer
class, via its customer zone, and the option to use values from the customer class is
checked in the Section editor, in the Load - Dist tab and/or Load - Spot tab.
Customer Class editor, %I, %Z, %PQ values
To assign I, Z, PQ values to customer classes, you must use the Customer Class editor.
However, with sections, you have the option of using the Multiple Editor to assign values to
large areas at once. For more information on using the Multiple Editor, see "Using the Multiple
Editor" on page 253.
For more information on editing a customer class, see "Editing a customer class" on page 299.
Capacity factors
For distributed loads and spot loads, you can specify a capacity factor, which allows you to
simulate under-utilized transformers in your system. The factor, which can be from 0 (0%) to
1 (100%) or greater, is applied as a flat multiplier to connected kVA on all phases during load
allocation. If you know that certain transformers are consistently under-utilized, capacity

Editing a Model
factors can help you achieve a more accurate representation of actual load following
allocation.
The basic by-phase equation used during load allocation is as follows, where kcapacity is the
capacity factor:
Equation 3-8.
Capacity factors are intended to alleviate the manual process of adjusting connected kVA
before load allocation, especially if your connected kVA information is imported and
periodically overwritten from another data source. You could also establish a process that
imports capacity factors themselves, perhaps through a MiddleLink data import. For more
information on MiddleLink data import, see "Importing GIS data using MiddleLink" on
page 174.
Capacity factors apply to load allocation by connected kVA only. All other analyses use the
allocated kW and kvar load components as specified. In addition, the global usage of capacity
factors during load allocation is optional, as controlled in your load allocation options. For
more information on setting load allocation options, see "Setting up a load allocation analysis"
on page 583.
Projects (Load)
Projects are a means of itemizing multiple spot loads on a single section, versus the
traditional method of a single by-phase spot load. Projects include the following features:
l Selective enabling and disabling of individual loads, on a single section
l Separate yearly energizing and retiring of individual loads, for multi-year modeling
l A special view of all projects in the model for overview, management, and calculations
Projects can be an important tool for load projection and planning. Their use is optional, and
they can be used in conjunction with traditional spot loads.
Effect of projects on the model

At the most basic level, projects are collections of itemized spot loads that are summed and
applied to respective sections during analysis. Any project that is enabled and energized for
the currently selected year is added to the respective section’s spot load value.
Because of their intrinsic relationship to traditional spot loads, projects share many of the
same settings of the traditional spot loads, including:
l On/off status
l Customer load curves

Editing a Model
l I,Z,PQ
For example, if you turn off a section’s spot load, you also turn off any projects assigned to
the section. Or, if you change a spot load’s I,Z,PQ values, you are also affecting project
I,Z,PQ, because they are using the same setting.
Adding, editing, and managing projects

You can access projects in three different places:
l Projects worksheet. The Project worksheet allows you to view and edit all projects in
the currently selected feeders.
l Section editor. The Load - Proj tab in the Section editor allows you to view and edit
projects for a specific section.
l Model explorer. The model explorer contains a list of projects for viewing and
navigation purposes.
Normally, the Projects View is used to add and edit projects, because it provides an overall
view of the entire model. However, you can use the Section editor to perform the same tasks
if you want to work on a section-by-section basis.
For more information on editing projects using the Projects worksheet and the Section editor,
see "Load Proj tab – Section editor" on page 357.
Scale Manager
The Scale Manager is a Synergi tool that you can use to make temporary global changes to
loads and generation. The Scale Manager includes a number of slider bars for load categories
such as distributed loads, spot loads, large customers, and generators. Adjust a slider bar to
the right to increase the loads for the selected category; adjust the slider bar to the left to
decrease the loads for the selected category.
The temporary load changes will be in effect as long as the Scale Manager is open. Once you
close the Scale Manager, the loads will revert to their original values. No permanent model
changes are made at any time.
The purpose of the Scale Manager is to allow you to quickly and easily see the effect of
increased and decreased loads in your model. For example, models that will not convert
typically will converge if the load is drastically reduced. With a reduced load, you can explore
voltage drops and overloads to try and find bottlenecks. The Scale Manager makes this type of
work extremely easy. You simply reduce the sliders and then run or re-run your analysis as
appropriate.
Another use of the Scale Manager is for photovoltaics intermittence. The “Irradiance” slider
can be used to increase or decrease the irradiance. This will help you find overvoltage
problems and also see where overloads might occur with the sudden loss of substantial PV.
Refer to the following topic for more information on using the Scale Manager.

Editing a Model
Using the Scale Manager

2. In the Settings group, click Scale Manager.
3. In the Scale Manager, adjust a slider bar to the right to increase the loads for the
selected category. Adjust the slider bar to the left to decrease the loads for the selected
category. The temporary load changes will be in effect as long as the Scale Manager is
open.
4. If desired, click the Re-run button to repeat the most recent analysis. You can use this
button to see the impact that adjusted loads will have on your model.
5. Click Hide or press F4 to close the Scale Manager.

Analyzing a Model
ANALYZING A MODEL
Synergi supports a wide range of powerful analyses that you can use to evaluate and optimize
your system with accuracy and precision. With a variety of options and settings available, you
can customize Synergi to analyze in a manner that best suits your needs.
Before you analyze a model

Before you perform any analysis, you may need to perform tasks to set up your modeling
environment. This includes setting the analysis year, selecting an analysis section, and setting
model and analysis options.
Setting a section for analysis

Some analysis types require that you specify an analysis section before you can perform the
analysis. For example, the fault flow analysis simulates a fault on one section and then
calculates current flow throughout the rest of the model. Therefore, Synergi needs to know
which section you want to be faulted.
To set a section for analysis
l In the Synergi map display or model explorer, locate the section that you want to set for
analysis.
l Right-click on the section and select Set for Analysis.
The section that is set for analysis appears highlighted on the map, using a color that
you can specify in the Color tab in the Map Settings editor.
To zoom to the analysis section

2. In the Analysis Section group, click Zoom.
To edit the analysis section

2. In the Analysis Section group, click Edit.
To set the color for the analysis section
2. Select the Color tab.
3. Edit the “General: Selected” color to change the color that is used to highlight the
analysis section in the Synergi map display. (Note that this color is also used to
highlight selected sections in the Synergi map display.)
To clear the analysis section
l In the Synergi ribbon, select the Navigate tab. Then, in the Analysis Section group,

Analyzing a Model
click Clear.
—or—
l Locate the analysis section in the Synergi map display or model explorer. Then, right-
click on the section and select Unset for Analysis.
Setting model and analysis options

Synergi provides a large number of options that control how Synergi treats the model during
an analysis. These settings are saved with Synergi; they are not associated with any
particular model.
To set model and analysis options

3. Use the tabs on the left side of the Model and Analysis Options editor to access the
model and analysis options. Refer to the following topics for more information.
l "Exceptions (Loading) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" below
l "Exceptions (Other) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on the next page
l "Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 499
l "Start options tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 501
l "Analysis tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 503
l "Warnings tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 504
l "Fixes tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 504
l "Multi-Year tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 504
l "Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 505
Exceptions (Loading) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Exceptions - Loading tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to define exception
loading limits for both continuous and emergency loads. Synergi highlights exceptions in
places like analysis reports and the device editor’s Results tab, according to the ranges you
specify here. Values that exceed the exception limits are typically highlighted in red in the
Results tab and in the reports.
The following list describes the options you can edit from this tab. For instructions on opening
the editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" above.
Exception loading limits
Sets the continuous and emergency loading limits that will trigger an exception. Each
exception category can be individually enabled or disabled. The exception loading limits do
not change unless they are edited using the Model and Analysis Options editor.

Analyzing a Model
Continuous and emergency loading limits are set as a percentage of the continuous and
emergency ratings of the device. The values used for these limits should be based on
engineering criteria and operational policy for acceptable loading of the device or conductor
type.
Warnings are reported when the loading of a section or device (expressed as a percentage of
the rated current) is greater than the loading limit. This allows you to quickly identify the
stressed points on the network model.
For example, if a 125A device is loaded to 165A, it will be loaded to 132%. You will see a
warning if the continuous exception loading limit is set below 132%. You will see an
emergency exception if the emergency limit is set below 132%.
If you routinely operate a device at a percent load above 100% of its rating, then you should
enter the higher percent value as the continuous loading limit and expect to see the device
loaded in Synergi, with no indications of loading problems when it is loaded above its
continuous rating but below the continuous loading limit.
Limits for breakers and reclosers
Set the limiting rating for breakers and reclosers as either the Breaker/Recloser rating or the
lesser of the Breaker/Recloser rating or pickup.
Limits reserve amps
Select any of these check boxes to limit reserve amps in switching and contingency analyses
to the exceptions. Note that reserve amps will be disabled if the exception loading limit for the
device type is also disabled.
Exceptions (Other) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Exceptions - Other tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to define exception
loading limits your model. Synergi highlights exceptions in places like analysis reports and the
device editor’s Results tab, according to the ranges you specify here. Values that exceed the
exception limits are typically highlighted in red in the Results tab and in the reports.
the editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" on the previous page.
Imbalance
Set imbalance limits for continuous and emergency voltage and also continuous and
emergency amps. You can also set an exception on the loading threshold for lines ("Line imb
ldg thrshld"), which will limit the exception evaluation to more heavily loaded lines.
Reverse flow
Set the exception limits for reverse flow through tap changers and voltage regulators as a
percentage of the feeder rating. Separate values are assigned to tap changers and regulators
set on non-reverse flow.
Voltage exceptions
Set the exception values for voltage, including imbalance and maximum PV saturation.

Analyzing a Model
Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Model tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to define the model configuration
options.
the editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" on page 497.
Average (balance) loads
Select this check box to balance by-phase loads across the connected phases on a section
during analysis using the average value of the by-phase loads on each phase.
Default global customer zones
Specifies default customer zones that will be applied at all sections in your model where the
“Use customer zone” check box is selected for either distributed loads or spot loads but a
specific customer zone name is not selected. This corresponds to the “Use customer zone”
setting on the Load - Dist and Load - Spot tabs of the Section editor.
Exclude spot loads
Select this check box to ignore spot loads during analysis.
Generation
Select any of the check boxes to disable PV generation modeled as generators and large
customers and also as included with sections.
Note that these options are only applicable to the current session. Each time you start
Synergi, the disable PV generation check boxes will be cleared.
Ignore line capacitance
Select this check box to ignore line charging requirements of overhead lines during analysis.
Ignore motor loads
Select this check box to ignore running motors during load-flow analysis.
Include secondary modeling
Select this check box to include analysis of the secondary system (DTrans and services). The
results of the analysis are presented in two additional report chapters: “Secondary - Details”
and “Secondary - Dtrans”.
Light load factors
The “Light load factors” option allows you to enable light load multipliers for several different
load types at both summer and winter months. Some Synergi applications include a light load
run in the analysis. For example, the PV Impact analysis uses these settings to evaluate PV
performance when the system is under light loading.
Note that the values you enter are saved with Synergi, but the Activate status is not. Each
time you start Synergi, the light loads option will be disabled.
No capacitor low volt exception
Select this check box to suppress low voltage exceptions on capacitors. This option will apply
to capacitors having nominal voltage specified in their editors. It examines the capacitor’s

Analyzing a Model
rated kV against the operating voltage on a feeder and keeps exceptions from being
generated when the rated kV is too high.
Operating frequency
Select this check box to set the operating frequency which can vary from the nominal
frequency within the operating bandwidth of +/-10%:
l 50 Hz – bandwidth 45 to 55 Hz
l 60 Hz – bandwidth 44 to 66 Hz
Overhead conductor resistance
Select one of the following options to set the temperature setting for overhead conductor
resistance:
l Nameplate resistance. Select this option to calculate impedances at nameplate
resistance. This is the default and negates the use of temperatures.
l Calculate at [value] C. Select this option to specify the temperature for conductor
resistance.
l Use [value] C over ambient. Select this option to specify the temperature over
ambient. If this option is selected, the temperature in the Weather tab of the Time and
Weather Options editor needs to be enabled. For more information, see "Modeling
Seasonal ratings
Sets whether summer rating values or winter rating values will be used as the ratings for
exceptions on conductors, regulators, and transformers. Winter and summer ratings are only
used if weather modeling is turned on.
For more information on seasonal modeling, see "Configuring seasonal weather modeling" on
page 267.
Source impedance
system equipment will not have time to respond, so this option is used to account for the drop.
Feeders and substations have a minimum and maximum impedance values that represent the
range on the transmission system. These are configured on the Volts/Ohms tab of the
respective feeder and subtran editors. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, the "Source
impedance" option allows you to select whether the Minimum or Maximum impedance for the
feeders and subtrans are used. The third option, “Source selection,” leaves the selection of
minimum or maximum impedance up to the settings on the individual feeder and substation
editors.
Tran. taps affect nominal volts
Select this check box to set the nominal voltage to be divided by transformer taps during the
outward propagation. This has a significant impact on loads, fault values, and so on (loads

Analyzing a Model
only operate at rated kW/kvar when the voltage is nominal). However, the impact may be
subtle on reports since the voltages are listed on a user base rather than in kV.
Underground cable resistance
Select one of the following options to set the temperature for cable impedance calculations:
l Nameplate resistance. Select this option to calculate impedances at nameplate
resistance. Temperature adjustments will not be used. This is the default.
l Calculate at [value] C. Select this option to specify the temperature for cable
resistance. Cable resistance will be adjusted from the specified “Nameplate” resistance
value at the specified “Calculate” temperature value.
Start options tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Start options tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to set the control and start
options for capacitors, batteries, and regulators.
Battery start options
Select one of the following options to specify the starting charge for any batteries in your
model:
l Fully charged. Batteries start at 100% charge.
l Define charge. Batteries start at a user-specified charge percentage.
l Discharged. Batteries start at 0% charge.
Regulator options
Select one of the following options. Note that these options apply to regulator devices only,
and not the active LTC components of transformers.
l Controlled by Synergi. Select this option to adjust regulator taps as needed during
analysis, simulating actual behavior under changing conditions.
l Hold current taps. Select this option to hold all regulators at their pre-analysis taps
during analysis.
l Max taps. Select this option to hold all regulators at their maximum taps during
analysis.
l Min taps. Select this option to hold all regulators at their minimum taps during
analysis.
l Neutral taps. Select this option to hold all regulators at their neutral taps during
analysis.
Regulator start options
Select one of the following options. Note that these options apply to regulator devices only,
and not the active LTC components of transformers.

Analyzing a Model
l Leave at current tap. Select this option to set all regulators to remain at their current
tap prior to starting an analysis. During analysis, regulator behavior is controlled
according to the Regulator Options described above.
l Move to minimum tap. Select this option to move all regulators to their minimum
taps prior to starting an analysis. During analysis, regulator behavior is controlled
l Move to maximum tap. Select this option to move all regulators to their maximum
taps prior to starting an analysis. During analysis, regulator behavior is controlled
l Move to neutral. Select this option to move all regulators to their neutral taps prior to
starting an analysis. During analysis, regulator behavior is controlled according to the
Regulator Options described above.
Switched capacitor options
Select one of the following options:
l Controlled by Synergi. Select this option to control the closed/tripped state of
capacitors during analysis, using the trip parameters assigned in the individual
capacitor records.
l Hold current state. Select this option to hold all switched capacitors in their current
closed/tripped state during analysis, as determined by system conditions just prior to
the analysis.
l Hold "normal" state. Select this option to hold all switched capacitors in their
"normal" position, where specified. (Switched capacitors can be set as normally open by
selecting the "Nm/O" check boxes on the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor.) Any
switched capacitors where this check box is not selected will be controlled by Synergi,
as described above.
l All on (closed). Select this option to hold all switched capacitors as closed during
analysis.
l All off (tripped). Select this option to hold all switched capacitors as tripped during
analysis.
Switched capacitor start options
l Leave in current state. Select this option to set all switched capacitors to remain in
their pre-analysis tripped/closed state. During analysis, capacitor behavior is controlled
according to the Switched Capacitor Options described above.
l Close. Select this option to close all active switched capacitor modules prior to starting
an analysis. During analysis, capacitor behavior is controlled according to the Switched
Capacitor Options described above.
l Trip. Select this option to trip all active switched capacitor modules prior to starting an
analysis. During analysis, capacitor behavior is controlled according to the Switched
Capacitor Options described above.

Analyzing a Model
Analysis tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Analysis tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to set options that include the
iteration limit, convergence tolerance, and voltage mismatch. The analysis will end when
many of these limits are exceeded, with the exception of the locking regulators and switched
capacitors options.
Convergence tolerance
Tolerance used by various analyses to determine completion. The parameters to which this
tolerance applies vary among the applications. The valid range is from 0.01 to 10.
Similar to the iteration limit described above, the convergence tolerance should initially be set
to a lower value. You can then increase the tolerance if necessary to give the model a better
chance of converging.
Earth resistivity
Measures the resistivity of earth (or ground) connections with respect to safety aspects of
power distribution and use. The default setting is 100 and can be set as high as 5000 Ohm-
meters.
Iteration limit
Maximum number of iterations Synergi uses to reach convergence during analysis. DNV GL
recommends you set this value in the range of 10 to 30 iterations. Good models will normally
converge within this range.
Synergi will provide an early warning for models that have difficulty converging, thus avoiding
longer wait time for the higher number of iterations to complete. If your model does have
difficulty converging, you can increase the number of iterations and also change the
convergence tolerance, as described below.
Models that require a high number of iterations to converge often have data quality problems
or struggle to maintain the network within the operational limits.
Lock regulators after
Specifies after how many iterations you want the regulators to lock. The analysis will continue
even if the regulators are locked.
Lock switched capacitors after
Specifies after how many interactions you want the switched capacitors to lock. The analysis
will continue even if the capacitors are locked.
Voltage mismatch tolerance
Maximum difference in nominal voltage and rated voltage that Synergi allows between
adjacent devices. The valid range is between 0.1% and 80%. The default value is 10%.

Analyzing a Model
Warnings tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Warnings tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to suppress selected warning
types from your analysis reports.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. For instructions on opening the Model
and Analysis Options editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" on page 497.
To suppress report warnings
1. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Warnings tab.
2. Select the check box for each warning type that you want to disable in your analysis
reports.
You can also use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select a range or items, or click the Select
All button to select all items in the list. When multiple items are selected, you can click
the Select, Clear, and Toggle buttons to change the status of the selected items.
Fixes tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Use the Fixes tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to enable automatic corrections
that you want to be made to your model during analysis runs. The selected options will make
permanent edits to common data issues that could be present in your model.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. For instructions on opening the Model
and Analysis Options editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" on page 497.
To enable automatic fixes during an analysis
1. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Fixes tab.
2. Select the check box for each automatic correction that you want to enable during your
analysis runs.
You can also use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select a range or items, or click the Select
All button to select all items in the list. When multiple items are selected, you can click
the Select, Clear, and Toggle buttons to change the status of the selected items.
Multi-Year tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

When you use multi-year modeling, you can use the Multi-year tab in the Model and Analysis
Options editor to control how edits made to loads and other values in one year are applied to
other years in the model. For example, you can apply the edits to the current year only, or to
the current year plus all future years. You can also apply the same increment or proportion of
the current year’s edit to all future years.

Analyzing a Model
the editor, see "Setting model and analysis options" on page 497. For more information on
multi-year modeling in Synergi, see "Multi-year modeling" on page 73.
All years
The new value is applied to all years.
Copy forward
The new value is applied to the current year and copied ahead to all future years. The values
for previous years are not changed.
Current year only
The new value is applied to only the current year.
Increment forward
The new value is applied to the current year. The delta between the new value and the old
value is added to the value for each successive year.
Proportion forward
The new value is applied to the current year. The new value is divided by the old and that
result is multiplied to the value on each successive year.
Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor

Some Synergi analyses, such as planning design, performance comparison, and reliability,
include a financial evaluation component. To perform these financial evaluations, Synergi
requires cost data. This data is specified a number of ways, with some cost data directly input
in the analysis settings and some loaded in cost data files.
The Costs tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor is used to specify the following:
l The name and path of a Middlelink file containing formatted costs for conductors used in
analysis such as Conductor Selection.
l Power and energy costs to be used for losses evaluation.
l Factors used for cost evaluation, including the light run factor, average load factor, and
secondary loss factor.
l The approach used for evaluating energy cost (daily load curves, light run factors, or
peak/minimum loads).
Detailed cost list
Specifies the name and path of a MiddleLink-formatted cost file that contains the cost data
pertinent to the analysis you intend to run. You can click the Browse button to select a
specific cost file to use in your Synergi analyses, and click the Edit button to edit the cost file
directly in Synergi.
For more information, see "Using cost data" on page 509.
Factors for calculating energy
Edit the following settings:

Analyzing a Model
l Light run factor. Multiplier used for the peak load to simulate a minimum load
condition for the “light” load-flow run. For more information on this factor, see
"Performance comparison" on page 692.
l Average load factor. Multiplier used to determine the average load, for cost
calculations. For more information on this factor, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
l Secondary loss factor. Multiplier used to determine the percentage of total loss
represented by secondary loss. For more information on this factor, see the Synergi
Power and energy costs
Edit the following settings:
l Utility kWh cost. Cost to the utility per kWh delivered. This value is ultimately used to
determine the cost of losses.
l Peak charge. Peak charge to the utility per kW purchased, generally during a time of
peak demand.
Preferred approach for energy & min load
l Every day and hour using daily load curves
l Peak and min using light run factor
l Peak and min using daily load curves
Daily load curves are also known as customer zones. For more information, see "Customer
zones" on page 305.
Editing time of day settings

Use the Hour/Day tab in the Time and Weather Options editor to edit time-of-day settings for
your model.
To open the Time and Weather Options editor (Hour/Day tab)

3. In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Hour/Day tab.
The following list describes the tasks that you can perform from the Hour/Day tab of the Time
and Weather Options editor.
To specify the time of day adjustment
In the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, under Time of day
adjustment, select one of the following options:
l Do not adjust for time of day. Select this option to ignore the time of day. Customer
load curves are not used. Section load is determined from 100% of the load values

Analyzing a Model
(along with growth rates). You should use this option for standard “peak day” analysis.
l Peak load. Select this option to have Synergi automatically find and use a peak load
point for a selected time period. Available choices (Overall, Summer, Winter, Month, or
Day) are described below.
l Minimum daytime load (MDL). Select this option to have Synergi automatically find
and use a minimum daytime load point for a selected time period. Available choices
(Overall, Summer, Winter, Month, or Day) are described below.
l Minimum load. Select this option to have Synergi automatically find and use a
minimum load point for a selected time period. Available choices (Overall, Summer,
Winter, Month, or Day) are described below.
l Specified time. Select this option to use a specific month, hour, and type of day
(weekday, weekend, minday, or peakday) as the time of day. Optionally, you can select
to always use the current system time, specified in terms of month, time, and day type
(weekday or weekend).
To specify the peak or minimum time period
If you select “Peak load”, "Minimum daytime load", or “Minimum load” as the “Time of day
adjustment” option, use the “Peak/Minimum” area to select the time period that will be
considered for determining the peak or minimum load. The following options are available:
l Overall. Synergi will use the yearly peak or minimum load point.
l Summer. Synergi will use the peak or minimum load point from summer months.
Summer months are defined by the “Summer” Start and End months in the Hour/Day
tab.
l Winter. Synergi will use the peak or minimum load point from winter months. Winter
months are any months that are not defined as “Summer” months in the Hour/Day tab.
l Month. Synergi will use the peak or minimum load point for one specific month. When
you select this option, the Month option in the “Specified time” area of the Hour/Day tab
will become enabled, allowing you to select the month that you want to use.
l Day. Synergi will use the peak or minimum load point for one specific day. When you
select this option, the Month and Day type options in the “Specified time” area of the
Hour/Day tab will become enabled, allowing you to select the month that you want to
use.
To select peak and minimum calculation options
If you select either “Peak load” or “Minimum load” as the “Time of day adjustment” option,
use the “Peak Calculation” area to select how peak or minimum loads will be calculated by
Synergi. The following options are available:
l Coincident. Synergi will find peaks and minimums for the entire model.
l Non-coincident zone peaks. Synergi will find peaks and minimums from zones only.
l Non-coincident class peaks. Synergi will find peaks and minimums from classes
only.

Analyzing a Model
You can also select the Include peak days option to have Synergi consider peak days, in
addition to weekdays and weekends. If the option is cleared, only weekdays and weekends
will be considered.
To specify minimum daytime load
Minimum daytime load is the time frame during the day, typically in the mid-afternoon,
when the lowest total feeder load is calculated and when PV generation is typically at its
highest. This value is used in several approaches for the PV Hosting analysis, including the
Feeder rating approach and the Feeder maximum demand approach.
To define summer and winter months
Under Summer, use the Start and End options to define the beginning month and the ending
month for the summer season. Those months will be treated as the Summer months in your
model and the remaining months will be treated as the Winter months in your model.
Selecting a time range for time-based analyses

Some time-based analyses in Synergi require a user-specified range of hours or months in
order to run the analysis. The single-year analysis, for example, analyzes the Synergi model
over a range of months for the specified analysis year, while the time-dependent analysis
analyzes switch plans over a user-specified range of hours for a specified analysis day.
The ranges of hours and months used in these analyses are specified in the Time Range tab of
the Time and Weather Options editor.
To set up time ranges for time-based analyses

3. In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Time Range tab.
4. Use the settings in the Time Range tab to specify the range of months and hours that
will be used by certain time-based analyses. To change the range for either option, click
the top-most selection and drag it to the new starting position, and then do the same to
set the new ending position.
Setting analysis output options

The settings in Synergi’s Output Options editor control how results are handled after an
analysis is run. For example, you can specify whether reports will be generated after an
analysis is complete, and whether coloring and annotation results will be updated in the
Synergi map display. You can also select which attributes are shown in the device editor
Results tabs, and which are shown in the Results Viewer. You can also set options regarding
how reports are generated.

Analyzing a Model
To set analysis output options

2. In the Settings group, click Output.
3. On the left side of the Output Options editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available analysis output options. The following topics describe the different
tasks that you can perform:
l "Using the Results Viewer" on page 515
l "Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab" below
l "Generating analysis reports" on page 521
l "Adding notes to reports" on page 522
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab

Use the Editor Results tab in the Output Options editor to select which attributes are shown in
the Results tab of the section, feeder, and device editors. You can show and hide individual
result types, such as Amps Into and Volts Out, and you can also show and hide entire result
categories, such as Fault results, Capacity results, and Reliability results. In addition, you can
select which power units are used to display the results.
For more information on the Results tab, see "Viewing results in the Synergi editor" on
page 247.
To select which attributes are available in the Results tab

3. In the Output Options editor, select the Editor Results tab. Use the check boxes to
select which attributes will be displayed in the Results tab of the section, node, and
device editors. Selected (checked) result types and result categories will be visible in
the Results tab, and cleared result types and result categories will be hidden.
4. Under Show by category, select the check box for each result category that you want
to show. Clear the check box for each result category that you want to hide.
Note that even though you select a result category to show, individual result types
within that category must still be selected in the result types list in order to be shown in
the Results tab.
5. Under Power Units, select the power unit type that you want to use in the Results tab.
Using cost data

Some Synergi analyses, including planning design, performance comparison, and reliability,
include a financial evaluation component. To perform these financial evaluations, Synergi

Analyzing a Model
requires cost data. This data can be specified in a number of ways, with some cost data
directly specified in the Synergi analysis settings and other data loaded in cost data files.
The cost data types include the following:
l A cost data Middlelink file containing material, installation, annual, and recovery costs
for conductors. The name and path for the file is specified in Costs tab of the Model and
Analysis Options editor, as described in "Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor"
on page 505.
l Utility costs, run factor, load factor, and loss factor for cost evaluation. These values
are specified in the Costs tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, as described in
"Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 505.
l Costs for devices and conductor groupings including equipment, install, annual,
recovery, and move costs. These values are specified in the Costs tab of the
Performance and Analysis settings editor, as described in "Costs tab – Performance
Comparison editor" on page 693.
l Maintenance costs for feeders and substations and cost multipliers for fuses,
equipment, and customers. These costs are specified through cost zones in your
equipment warehouse, as described in "Managing cost zones" on page 704. These costs
can then be assigned to sections for use in Economic Analysis studies.
l Repair, fixed, and yearly costs associated with reliability exposure and mitigation
actions. These costs are specified in exposure zones and mitigation zones, as described
in "Editing an exposure zone" on page 678 and "Editing a mitigation zone" on page 680.
They are then used in a Reliability Analysis.
Cost file format

Cost files are CSV text files created in the MiddleLink format. A cost file typically contains
MiddleLink records in the 7000 range, which is reserved for cost data.
The following example is a sample record from a MiddleLink cost file:
7001, 1/0 ACSR, , 3, 300, 60, 0.0, 0.0
A 7001 record specifies the costs associated with a new line of a certain conductor type. The
sample record above indicates that the installation of a 1/0 ACSR three-phase line costs
$300,000 per mile for materials, and $60,000 per mile for installation costs, assuming English
units. No data is specified for recovery or maintenance costs. You can view the full Middlelink
schema for cost files from the Support tab of the Synergi ribbon, as described in the
procedure below.
Note that the monetary figures are in kilodollars-per-length units. The length component is
represented by a Synergi “long unit of length (LUL),” which is a mile in English units and a
kilometer in metric. Therefore, if your interface is set to metric units, your cost data should
also reflect metric units. Although dollar amount will always be labeled as “dollars” in the
interface, you could use any currency that fits your needs, provided that it is used consistently
throughout all of your cost data.

Analyzing a Model
To view the cost file schema

2. In the Tools group, click Schemas and then select Supporting Data > Cost.
Editing a cost file

Because cost files use a CSV file format, you can edit them in any text editor or spreadsheet
application. However, you may find it more convenient to edit these cost files in Synergi.
Once you have created the CSV file to save your cost data, refer to the following procedure for
information on editing cost file data using Synergi.
To edit a cost file

3. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab.
4. Under Detailed cost list, if the cost file that you want to edit is not already shown,
click the Browse button to locate the file. Note that the file you select will be set as the
active cost file for the model.
5. When the correct cost file is listed in the Detailed cost list, click Edit.
6. Use the Synergi Script Editor to modify the sample cost file that was created by
Synergi. For more information on using the Script Editor, see the Synergi Electric Script
Guide.
Using What-Ifs
Synergi’s What-If feature allows you to set up and evaluate proposed changes to your model.
Unlike other Synergi features, What-Ifs make no permanent changes to the model. What-if
scenarios are only applied at the time an analysis is run, and then undone as soon as the
analysis is complete. Enabled What-If commands are summarized in the What-Ifs chapter of
the Run Summary report.
What-If scenarios can be used to open and close switches, turn PV generators on and off, and
set regulator taps. These actions can be applied to all applicable devices, single-phase or
three-phase devices only, or individual devices only.
What-If scenarios are created in that What-Ifs editor, and can be enabled from the editor or
from the Synergi status bar.
Enabling What-Ifs for individual devices

To control individual device operations in a What-If scenario, you must provide a What-If
name in the device editor for the applicable device. The device-specific What-If name will
then be available for selection in the What-Ifs editor.

Analyzing a Model
To enable What-Ifs for individual devices
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click on the device that you want
to edit.
2. In the device editor, look for the What-Ifs option. This will typically be located on the
first tab for the device editor. (For example, the What-Ifs option is located on the
Switch tab of the Switch editor.).
3. Next to What-Ifs, type a name to represent the switch in the What-Ifs editor. If you
use the same name in different device editors, those devices can be controlled together
as a single group.
NOTE: You can also use the Multiple Editor to apply a What-If name to other devices
in the model.
4. Click the + button to add the What-If name to the device. You can also click the X button
to remove the What-If name, if desired.
Creating What-If scenarios

What-If scenarios are created in the What-Ifs editor. Refer to the following procedure for
more information.
To create What-If scenarios
1. Open the What-Ifs editor.

a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.
b. In the Settings group, click What-If.
2. Create a new What-If scenario.
a. On the left side of the What-Ifs editor, under Available What-Ifs, click the Add
button.
b. You can also click the Remove button to delete a selected What-If scenario.
NOTES: In the Available What-Ifs area, the What-If scenario that is highlighted is
the scenario that you can edit in the What-Ifs editor. The What-If scenario whose
check box is selected is the scenario that is enabled for analysis.
3. Edit the What-If scenario.
a. On the left side of the What-Ifs editor, under Available What-Ifs, select
(highlight) the name scenario that you want to edit.
b. Use the Description text box to edit the name of the What-If scenario.
c. Use the Tag and Actions columns to add individual What-If actions to the
scenario. This is described in more detail in the next step of this procedure.
d. In the Items area, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the
order of selected What-If actions. Use the Delete button to delete a selected
What-If action.

Analyzing a Model
4. Add What-If actions to the scenario.

a. On the left side of the What-Ifs editor, under Available What-Ifs, select
(highlight) the name scenario that you want to edit.
b. Under Tag, select the model scope that you want the What-If action to apply to.
For example, if you want to control actions for the entire model, select _Global.
If you want to control actions for single-phase or three-phase switches only,
select _1Ph Only or _3Ph Only.
If you configured individual device with a What-if name, as described in "Enabling
What-Ifs for individual devices" on page 511, those What-If names will appear in
the Tag list as well. Select that name to apply a What-If action to the related
devices only.
c. Under Actions, select the action that you want to perform on the selected scope.
d. Click Add Item.
Enabling What-If scenarios

By default, the “No What-If” scenario will be applied each time you start Synergi. Other what-
If scenarios can be enabled from the What-Ifs editor or from the Synergi status bar. Refer to
the following procedures for more information.
To enable a What-If scenario from the status bar
In the lower-right corner of the status bar, use the What-Ifs list to select a What-if scenario to
apply to your model. You can also click the > button to open the What-Ifs editor and edit the
currently selected scenario.
To enable a What-If scenario from the What-Ifs editor

2. In the Settings group, click What-If.
3. On the left side of the What-Ifs editor, under Available What-Ifs, select the check box
for the scenario that you want to apply to your model. The change will be applied
immediately, as reflected in the Synergi status bar; you do not need to click the Apply
button.
For further information on editing a What-If scenario, see "Creating What-If scenarios"
After you analyze a model

The topics in this section describe tasks that you will typically perform after viewing an
analysis. For example, even though your analysis will often produce an analysis report
Synergi provides many other ways to view the analysis results for your model. You may also
want to easily repeat your most recently run analysis.

Analyzing a Model
Re-running an analysis
Synergi allows you to re-run the most recently performed analysis. The subsequent analysis
run uses the current feeder/section selection and analysis options and generates a new
report, if enabled.
To re-run an analysis

2. In the Operations group, click Re-Run.
NOTE: You can also press F12 to re-run the last analysis.
Viewing analysis results

Synergi provides a number of methods to present analysis results. These include the
following:
l Reports. Synergi’s reports provide comprehensive analysis reports in a format that is
easy to read and navigate. For more information, see "Synergi reports" on page 520.
l Results tabs. All Synergi device editors include a Results tab that displays analysis
results for that specific device. For more information on the Results tab, see "Viewing
results in the Synergi editor" on page 247.
l Results Viewer. The Results Viewer is a stand-alone Synergi window that displays
analysis results for any section or device that you hover the mouse over. For more
information, see "Using the Results Viewer" on the facing page.
l Results box. The Results box is a stand-alone Synergi window that displays analysis
results for a selected section or device. For more information, see "Using the Results
Viewer" on the facing page.
l Broadcaster. The Broadcaster is a stand-alone Synergi window that shows results for all
objects in a selected category type—such as Feeders, Large Customers, or Meters—and
a selected results type—such as Volts Into, Volts Out, or Pct Pf. For more information,
see "Using the Broadcaster" on page 516.
l Map annotation. Analysis results can be viewed as annotation in the Synergi map
display. For more information, see "Text map settings" on page 105.
l Map coloring. Analysis results can be used to apply different colors to the sections in the
Synergi map display, providing a convenient method to see an overall view of model
conditions. Map coloring can also help present technical results to a non-technical
audience. For more information, see "Theme map settings" on page 98.
l Results import/export. Synergi provides a comprehensive results export feature, so
that you can use your analysis data in other software applications. For more
information, see "Importing and exporting analysis results" on page 517.

Analyzing a Model
Using the Results Viewer

The Results Viewer is a useful tool to see fundamental results for sections, equipment, and
facilities as you hover the mouse over different devices in Synergi. The Results Viewer
responds to both the Synergi map display and to Synergi reports. The attributes that are
displayed in the Results Viewer can be configured in the Results Viewer tab of the Output
Options editor.
To open the Results Viewer

2. In the Browsers group, click Results Viewer.
TIP: You can also press F4 to open the Results Viewer.
To select which attributes are available in the Results Viewer

3. In the Output Options editor, select the Results Viewer tab. Use the check boxes to
select which items you want to include and exclude from the Results Viewer. Selected
(checked) attributes will be visible in the viewer, and cleared attributes will be hidden.
Using the Results box

The Results box is a free-floating window that displays analysis results for a selected section
or device. You can open as many Results boxes as needed, allowing you to view results for
multiple sections and devices at the same time.
Results box
To use the Results box
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section or device for which you want to
view results.
2. Select Results Box.

Analyzing a Model
3. Use the buttons in the Results box to perform the following tasks:
l Change which category of results you are viewing in the Results box.
l Change all open Results boxes to show the same category of results.
l Zoom to the section or device in the current Results box.
l Open the Synergi editor for the section or device in the current Results box.
l Close all Results boxes.
Using the Broadcaster

The Broadcaster is a stand-alone Synergi window that shows analysis results for all facilities
of a selected type, such as feeders, large customers, or meters. Other options are available
from the Broadcaster window to zoom to and edit selected facilities.
To use the Broadcaster

2. In the Browsers group, click Broadcaster.
3. Use the options list in the upper-left side of the Broadcaster window to select the
category type that you want to view—for example, Feeders, Large Customers, or
Meters. Then, use the options list on the right side of the window to select the result
type that you want to view—for example, Volts Into, Volts Out, or Pct Pf.
NOTES: The “Broadcast Sections” category will show results for any sections where
you have selected the “Broadcast” check box in the Section tab of the Section editor.
For more information on the Broadcast check box, see "Section tab – Section editor"
on page 348.
The “Tagged Sections” category will show results for any sections where you have
enabled the “Tag” option right-clicking on the section in the Synergi map display. For
more information on the tag option, see "Tagging sections and devices" on page 248.
4. The following list describes additional options that are available in the Broadcaster
window.
l Just items in map view. Select this check box to only list facilities that are
visible in the map display. The list of facilities in the Broadcaster will update
automatically as you zoom and pan in the map display.
l Show circles. Select this check box to highlight facilities that are listed in the
Broadcaster with circles in the map display.
l Edit. Click to edit the selected facility.
l Zoom. Click to zoom to the selected facility.
l Auto. Select this check box to automatically zoom to each facility as you select it
in the Broadcaster.
5. Click Hide or press F4 to close the Broadcaster window.

Analyzing a Model
Using the Voltage Plot

The Voltage Plot is a stand-alone window that shows voltage data from the source to a
selected section. You can use the Voltage Plot window to view the voltage, voltage imbalance,
cumulative volt drop, the current imbalance, and the percent loading.
To use the Voltage Plot window
1. Run a load-flow analysis on your model.

3. In the Browsers group, click Voltage Plot.
4. In the map display, select different sections to view voltage data related to that section.
Use the option list at the top of the Voltage Plot window to select the specific data you
want to plot, such as voltage, voltage imbalance, or cumulative voltage drop.
5. Click Hide or press F4 to close the Voltage Plot window.
Importing and exporting analysis results

Synergi provides import and export tools that you can use to import and export analysis
results to and from any supported database format, including enterprise databases. This
feature allows you to perform activities such as:
l Transport analysis results to another application, such as drafting software, for viewing.
l Collect results for custom queries, forms, and reporting.
l Import results from another application or source into Synergi, perhaps to leverage
Synergi’s flexible coloring and annotation features for viewing.
How results are handled by Synergi

In Synergi, results are stored in binary files in your Output folder. Results are categorized by
set, with each set containing relevant results parameters. In the Output folder, each results
set has an associated BRF file, with the same name as the set.
As an example, LFlow_Balanced is a default load-flow results set that contains items such as
Amps_In and Volts_Out. If you wanted to display results as annotation in your map display,
you would select from items such as “LFlow_Balanced: Amps_In” and “LFlow_Balanced:
Volts_Out” in the Theme tab of the Map Settings editor. The same set names are used when
you export results data from Synergi.
Creating DSAs for results import and export

Synergi uses DSAs to import and export results data to and from external database files. The
type of DSA differs between exporting and importing, as follows:
l Exporting results data. To export results, you must configure a “Results” type DSA. The
Results DSA specifies the DSA name, database format, and “Results” as the content
type.

Analyzing a Model
l Importing results data. To import results, you must have a “Custom” type DSA. A
custom data source can be any database that has a table with a SectionId column. The
custom DSA specifies the DSA name, database format, “Custom” as the content type,
and the specific table from which you plan to import results.
TIPS: The database table name is important. When you import results with the DSA,
you cannot select a different table from the database. All results must come from
this table for this particular DSA.
Also, remember that a DSA can have multiple content types. For example, you could
create a single DSA to a certain database called “MyResults.mdb” and specify its
contents as both Results and Custom.
For general information on DSAs, including information on how to create them, see "Managing
Importing results from a database
To import results from a database

2. In the Tools group, click Results and then select Import Results Set.
3. Use the Import Data editor to configure the import settings. The options that you can
edit are described at the end of this procedure.
4. Click Finish to import the results.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Import Data editor.
Data source to import from
Select the DSA for the source file that contains the results. Only “Custom” DSAs will be
included in this list. For more information, see "Creating DSAs for results import and export"
Target results set
Select the results set that you want to import. Upon import, Synergi will create a BRF file in
your Output folder where the results set will be saved. The results contained in the BRF file
will then be available for use with Synergi.
Exporting results to a database

Perform the following procedure to export a selected analysis table or results set to a
database file. The database file must first be configured as a Results DSA, as described in
"Creating DSAs for results import and export" on the previous page, before you can perform
this procedure.

Analyzing a Model
To export results to a database

2. In the Tools group, click Results and then select either Export Analysis Tables or
Export Results Set.
3. Use the Export Results editor to configure the export settings. The options that you can
4. Click Finish to export the results.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Export Results editor.
Data source to export into
Select the DSA for the target file where the results will be written. Only “Results” DSAs will be
included in this list. For more information, see "Creating DSAs for results import and export"
on page 517.
Results set to export
Select the specific set of results to export. If you do not see the desired set in the list, you
may need to run the applicable analysis first to produce some results.
TIP: The items in this list reflect the BRF files found in your Output folder. For more
information on BRF files, see "How results are handled by Synergi" on page 517.
Target table
Select the database table within the target file to receive the results.
Writing options
Select from one of the following options to specify how to handle the results table:
l Append to table. Append exported results to the end of the target table. If a section
ID within the exported data matches a section ID already in the table, the data is
replaced, rather than appended.
l Empty table if it exists. Remove any previous Synergi results before writing the new
results. However, this option will not remove any other data, such as custom fields and
columns you might have in the table.
l Replace table. Replace the target table entirely with the new data. This option will
also delete any customized data you might have in the target table.
Exporting results to Excel
To export results to Excel
1. Make sure that you have run an analysis, so that results data is available in Synergi.
3. In the Tools group, select Results > Export to Excel.
NOTE: You can also open this dialog box by clicking the “Open in Excel” button in the
Theme tab of the Map Settings editor.

Analyzing a Model
4. Use the Results Set and Analysis Tables to Excel dialog box to select the results
set and results fields that you want to export.
5. Click Export. The data you selected is opened in Excel.
NOTE: If you want to save the results, use Excel to save the exported data. However,
do not save the file in the default folder that will be presented by Excel, which is the
Output folder in your Synergi documents directory. Synergi automatically deletes files
from this directory each time you start the application, so your file will be lost if you
save it there.
Generating result set reports

As described in "How results are handled by Synergi" on page 517, results are stored in
various binary files in your Output folder and only retrieved when they are needed by Synergi.
However, Synergi includes a reporting mechanism that you can use to display a selected
results set in the standard Synergi report format.
To generate a result set report

2. In the Tools group, click Results and then select Report Results Set.
3. Use the Report Results editor to select the result set that you want to view in the report.
4. Click Finish to close the editor and view the report.
Synergi reports
Synergi’s analysis reports are generally provided in two formats: a static HTML report style
and a more interactive grid-style report. The Output Options editor in Synergi provides you
with several options to control how the reports are generated.
l Grid-style reports. Grid-style reports provide a variety of options to customize the
appearance and content of the report. Most notably, you can control where in Synergi
the report will appear—either docked on a specific side of the Synergi display, or free-
floating in a window independent of Synergi, or in a tabbed window in the Synergi
environment. You can select which data columns are shown in the report and you can
use filtering tools to control what data is shown in the report. Grid-style reports can be
saved to HTML, CSV, or Excel, or database formats, where further data manipulation
can be done for a truly powerful reporting package.
l HTML reports. HTML reports can only be displayed in a tabbed Synergi window. HTML
reports can also be generated with or without frames. Frame reports are generally
better for online navigation, while non-frame reports are better for printing and
archiving. Although these reports are static and cannot be modified from within Synergi,
they can be viewed in any web browser and can easily be copied to other file locations
without the need to perform a specific save as or export operation.
Many Synergi analysis reports include charts embedded in the chapters of the report. For
example, Synergi’s time-based analyses, including the Summer and Winter Ratings analysis

Analyzing a Model
and the Single-Year analysis, use charts instead of tables to show the results of the analysis.
These report-based charts use the same charting software as the stand-alone chart types that
are discussed in "Synergi charts" on page 542.
As each report is generated, the report data is saved in your Output folder, which by default is
a subfolder in your Synergi documents folder. It is important to note that all existing files are
automatically deleted from the Output folder each time you start Synergi. If you want to save
a report of any type, use the Save and Export options that are available in Synergi when you
are viewing the report. As long as you do not save the report in the Output folder, the report
will be available for future use outside of Synergi.
Generating analysis reports

Analysis reports can be enabled and disabled from the Output tab in the Output Options editor.
You can also enable and disable analysis reports by clicking on the “light bulb” indicator at the
top of the Synergi model explorer. When the light bulb is “on” (yellow), reports will be
generated. When the light bulb is “off” (white), reports will not be generated.
Naturally, you should take care when deciding whether or not to disable analysis reports.
Analysis results can be displayed in many places in Synergi, as discussed in "Viewing analysis
results" on page 514. However, some analyses, including the contingency analysis, have no
value without the report.
You can also use the Output tab in the Output Options editor to specify in which format the
reports are generated (HTML style, grid-style, or “dockable” reports) and whether annotation
and coloring in the map display will be updated automatically.
To select the analysis report format

3. In the Output Options editor, select the Output tab. The options that you can set are
The following list describes the options that you can edit from the Output tab of the Output
Options editor.
Dockable report windows
Select this option to generate analysis reports in Synergi’s dockable window format. Dockable
reports are only available when the “Prefer Grid Style” option has been selected.
For more information, see "Dockable reports" on page 524.
Generate report
Select this option to generate a report for all analysis types. If this option is not selected, no
analysis reports will be produced at all.
You can also toggle the Generate report option by clicking on the “light bulb” indicator at the
top of the Synergi model explorer. When the light bulb is “on” (yellow), reports will be
generated. When the light bulb is “off” (white), reports will not be generated.

Analyzing a Model
HTML with frames

Select this option to generate reports in an HTML format that uses framed windows. For more
information, see "HTML reports" on page 541.
HTML without frames
Select this option to generate reports in an HTML format that does not use framed windows.
For more information, see "HTML reports" on page 541.
Only show items with exceptions
Select this option to only show records in analysis reports that include exceptions.
When this option is selected, Synergi grid-style reports will include the phrase “Showing
chapters with exceptions” above the report’s table of contents. Although HTML-style reports
will not include this phrase, they will show the same exceptions-only data as the grid-style
reports.
When this option is not selected, you can still toggle individual grid-style reports to show
exception data only. For more information, see "Customizing the content of a grid-style
report" on page 534.
Prefer grid style (if available)
Select this option to generate analysis reports in an interactive, grid-style format. This format
is available for most report types. If it is not available, an “HTML with Frames” report will be
generated.
For more information, see "Grid-style reports" on page 532.
Report field precision
Use this area to control the precision in reports for fields such as amps, kvar, and kW. You can
change a precision value by double-clicking it and typing the new value.
Show reports in the default internet browser
Select this option to generate Synergi HTML reports in an external window using your default
Internet browser.
This option does not apply to grid-style reports.
Update coloring and annotation results
Select this option to have Synergi update the map display after an analysis is complete.
Adding notes to reports

Use the Notes tab in the Output Options editor to create messages that will appear in the last
line of the Run Summary section for each analysis report. You can set a default note that will
be used automatically, or you can have Synergi prompt you to create or modify the note with
each analysis run.
To add notes to reports


Analyzing a Model
3. In the Output Options editor, select the Notes tab.

4. To add a default note to each Synergi report:
a. Click the Show notes check box.
b. Use the text area to type the note that you want to include with each analysis
report.
5. To prompt the user to create or modify the note for each Synergi report:
a. Click the Show notes check box and also click the Prompt for notes before
each analysis check box.
b. If desired, use the text area to type “default” text for your analysis report notes.
You will be given the opportunity to modify this text when you start an analysis.
Printing reports
To print a report for tabbed-window reports, click on the Pole icon at the left end of the ribbon
and select the Print option.
To print a report for dockable reports, click the Printer icon in the report toolbar and select the
appropriate option.
Printed reports may not always appear exactly as they do on the screen or as they do during a
print preview. This may occur for several reasons, including the differences between printers
and configurations.
For more information on printing in Synergi, see "Printing" on page 81.
Options, errors, and warnings in reports

At the beginning of HTML and grid-style reports, Synergi normally lists:
l Errors, warnings, and messages
l Pertinent options affecting the analysis
This information can be useful for tracking down problems. It can also help you remember the
conditions under which an analysis was performed, especially if you are viewing the report
again at a later date.

Analyzing a Model
Figure 4-1. Top portion of a report, showing warnings and messages
Use the Warnings tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to suppress selected warning
types from your analysis reports. For more information, see "Warnings tab – Model and
Analysis Options editor" on page 504.
Dockable reports
Synergi’s dockable reports allow you to anchor grid-style reports inside the Synergi
environment in any location that you prefer—at the top of the application window, or the
bottom, or the left side or the right side, or in any combination of these positions when you
are viewing multiple reports. Dockable reports can also be moved into an undocked, free-
floating position. This position is ideal if you want to use multiple monitors, allowing you to
view Synergi on one monitor and reports on another.
The following figure shows a sample dockable report configuration, where two reports have
been docked on the right-side of the Synergi window and the Synergi map display is shown on
the left. Dockable reports allow you to see both report content and the map display at the
same time. You can move the borders of the docked windows to resize and reposition the
report areas, the map display area, and the model explorer to best suit your personal
preferences.

Analyzing a Model
Synergi dockable reports
Enabling dockable reports
To enable dockable analysis reports

3. In the Output Options editor, select the Output tab.
4. Select Generate report, and then Prefer grid style, and then Dockable report
windows.
Docking analysis reports

Perform the following procedure to dock an analysis report, or to change the docking position
of an analysis report. Note that Synergi remembers your docking position as you generate
and close reports, and close and restart Synergi. Once you have docked a report in a

Analyzing a Model
preferred location, additional reports will be generated in that same location using multiple
report window tabs.
To dock an analysis report
1. Generate the report that you want to dock.
2. Click and hold the title bar of the report, or the report’s tab name if you have multiple
reports generated and you only want to move one report. Anchor position symbols will
appear in the Synergi application, indicating the various positions where you can dock
the report. This is shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2. Anchor positions for a dockable report
3. Drag the report on top of one of the anchor positions and release the mouse button.
4. Any additional reports are generated in the same area where you last docked a report,
with each report separated by tabs. You can move any report at any time to any docking
position, or move the report to a free floating window. Figure 4-3, for example, shows
the anchor positions when one report has already been docked in the right-side of
Synergi and a second report is being dragged to a new location.

Analyzing a Model
Figure 4-3. Anchor positions for a second dockable report
Note in Figure 4-3 that there are four external anchoring positions located around the
edges of the screen, as well as a single anchor control in the middle of the existing
report area. The four external positions are used to anchor the report relative to the
entire Synergi window. Figure 4-4 shows the result when the second report is docked
using the single anchor control at the bottom of the screen, where the report spans the
entire bottom of the entire application.

Analyzing a Model
Figure 4-4. Multiple Docked Reports Example 1
By comparison, Figure 4-5 shows the result when the second report is anchored using
the bottom position in the center anchor control. In this case, the second report is
docked immediately below the first report, but not below the map window.

Analyzing a Model
Figure 4-5. Multiple Docked Reports Example 2
Using the auto-hide feature

The auto-hide feature for dockable reports allows you to expand and collapse the reports by
hovering the mouse over the report name. When the report is expanded, you can work in the
report just like you would with any other grid-style dockable report. When the report is
collapsed, you have the benefit of using the Synergi map display and other “traditional”
tabbed windows within the full available space of the Synergi application.
To auto-hide a docked report
1. On the right end of the title bar for a docked report, click the pin button, as shown
below.

Analyzing a Model
Pin button, dockable report window
2. When in “pin” mode, the report will automatically collapse against the appropriate side
of the Synergi window, as shown below. To expand the report, move the mouse cursor
over top of the report name. Once expanded, you can work in the report as you
normally would. The report will collapse when you click anywhere outside of the report
area.

Analyzing a Model
Report tab name for collapsed dockable report
3. To exit auto-hide mode, expand the report and click the pin icon.
Using the auto-zoom feature

When the auto-zoom features is enabled, you can double-click on certain facility names in a
dockable report and have Synergi zoom to the related object in the Synergi map display.
Linked facility names appear as blue text with a white background in the report window.
Note that the Synergi editor will also open when you click on these linked objects in the
dockable report window.
To enable auto-zoom for dockable reports
1. From a dockable Synergi report window, click the General Report Operations toolbar
button.

Analyzing a Model
General Report Operations toolbar button
2. Select Auto Zoom to enable the auto-zoom feature.
Grid-style reports
Grid-style reports provide a comprehensive, interactive format for you to view the results of
your analyses. Using grid style reports, you can:
l Sort and filter the data in the report, and hide unwanted columns from view
l Save the reports data to HTML, CSV, and XLS (Microsoft Excel) formats
l Customize the physical appearance of the reports by editing fonts and colors
l Open device editors and zoom to device locations, and even open and close switches, by
clicking on the device names in the report
Editing the appearance of a grid-style report

You can customize many aspects of a report’s physical appearance, including its colors, fonts,
and line styles, using the report’s Chapter Properties editor. These settings are saved in
report template files. Each chapter of each report has an individual template file, and a
master template also exists that can be applied to any chapter report.
In the Chapter Properties editor, you select whether you want to apply the master template or
the chapter template to the report. You can then use the Chapter Properties editor to
customize the appearance of the report, but whether those settings get saved with the
template depend on which of the templates you are editing.

Analyzing a Model
l Master template. If you apply the master template to a report and then edit settings for
that report, the new settings are applied to the current report. But they are not saved
automatically to the master template, nor are they applied automatically to other report
chapters that also reference the master template. You must specifically save the
settings to the master template file and then regenerate the report window before you
see your changes take effect. If you do not save the master template, the modified
settings will be lost when you close the report window.
The master template is saved by default as an XML file in your Settings file directory.
The name of the master template file is Default_ReportSet.xml.
l Chapter template. If you apply the chapter template to a report and then edit settings
for that report, the new settings are applied to the current report only. The modified
settings are saved to the chapter template file as soon as you close the report window,
and they are reapplied to that report chapter as long as the “Use Chapter Template”
option is selected in the Chapter Properties editor.
The chapter template is saved by default as an XML file in your Settings file directory.
Each report chapter has a 5-digit number that is associated with the report; that number
can be seen in the upper-right corner of the report that you are viewing. The name of
the chapter template file is 12345_ReportSet.xml, where “12345” is the 5-digit number
that is associated with each report chapter.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see "Paths preferences" on
page 39.
You should note that some chapter reports have subchapters, and that subchapters do not
have their own template files. For example, the load-flow report includes a Balanced Results
chapter, and the Balanced Results chapter includes different subchapters for each analyzed
feeder. In this case, all subchapters use the same report settings as the main chapter
template. You can see this because each subchapter has the same 5-digit number associated
with it—42000. Thus, if you modify the settings for one subchapter, you are actually modifying
the settings for all subchapters. However, keep in mind that the chapter template is not saved
until you close the report window. Therefore, even though you may edit the settings for one of
these subchapters, you will not see those changes take effect for the other subchapters until
you close and regenerate the report window.
To edit and save a chapter report template
1. Display the report and report section that you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Chapter Properties editor, select Use Chapter Template.
4. Use the Fonts, Colors, and Miscellaneous tabs in the Chapter Properties editor to
edit the color properties, font properties, and line settings for the report chapter that
you are viewing. The options that you can edit are self-explanatory and thus not
repeated here. The preview display in the Chapter Properties editor shows the change
that each edit will make to the report.

Analyzing a Model
6. Close the report window. Note that the changes you made to the report chapter will not
be saved to the template until you close the report window.
To edit and save a master report template
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Chapter Properties editor, select Use Master Template.
4. Use the Fonts, Colors, and Miscellaneous tabs in the Chapter Properties editor to
edit the color properties, font properties, and line settings for the report chapter that
you are viewing. The options that you can edit are self-explanatory and thus not
repeated here. The preview display in the Chapter Properties editor shows the change
that each edit will make to the report.
6. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Controls tab.
7. In the Master Template group, click Save.
TIP: You can also right-click in the report window of the desired report chapter and
select Save to Master Template.
Note that the changes will not be reflected in other report chapters until you close and
regenerate the report window. Only those chapters that are assigned to use the master
template (in the Chapter Properties editor) will be updated to use the new master
template edits. Reports that are assigned to use the chapter report template will still
use the chapter-specific settings.
To restore a chapter report template to the master template defaults
The chapter report template is saved by default as an XML file in your Settings file directory.
Each report chapter has a 5-digit number that is associated with the report; that number can
be seen in the upper-right corner of the report that you are viewing. The name of the chapter
template file is 12345_ReportSet.xml, where “12345” is the 5-digit number that is associated
with each report chapter.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see "Paths preferences" on
page 39.
To restore a chapter report template to its original settings, you can locate the XML file for the
report chapter template and delete it from your Settings directory. When you next view the
report, Synergi will apply the master template settings, since no chapter template can be
found.
To restore the master report template to the original Synergi defaults
2. Right-click and select Master Template > Reset.
Customizing the content of a grid-style report

Synergi provides a number of options that you can use to customize the content in a grid-style
report. For example, you can:

Analyzing a Model
l Customize which data columns are displayed in the report

l Filter the data that is included in the report
l Add your own content to the report, including mathematical expressions
The following procedures describe tasks you can perform while viewing a grid-style report.
To hide and restore data columns
Right click on any column heading, and then select the names of the columns you want to view
and hide.
To resize a data column
Click the border between two column headings and drag the border to resize the columns.
To filter data
Click in the filter area and type the text to filter for, and then click the Filter button. Delete the
text you typed and click the Filter button again to remove the filter. The filter field is not case-
sensitive.
l * is a wildcard filter that will filter for results that contain the given syntax anywhere in
its name or value.
To sort data
Double-click on the column heading for the data you want to sort. Double-click again to
reverse the sort order.
To add a custom row
Right-click in the report where you want to add the row, and then select Insert Row.
Note that custom rows are not saved, and will be lost when you close the report.
To open and close switches
Right-click on the name of the section that contains the switch, and then select Open Switch
or Close Switch, as appropriate.
To only view exception data
From a tabbed Synergi report window:
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the EDIT tab.

2. In the Format group, click Only Show Exceptions.
From a dockable Synergi report window:

Analyzing a Model
1. Click the General Report Operations toolbar button.
General Report Operations toolbar button
2. Select Only Show Exceptions.
You can also use the Output Options editor to generate reports that show exception data only.
The phrase “Showing chapters with exceptions” will appear above the report’s table of
contents when this global option is selected. Take note that when you generate a report in this
manner, toggling the “Only Show Exceptions” option described here in this table row will have
no effect on the report, since only exception data was generated in the first place.
For more information on setting the global “Only Show Items with Exceptions” option, see
"Generating analysis reports" on page 521.
Highlighting report data in the Synergi map display

From a grid-style report, you can right-click on a selected group of cells in a column and
select Map Selected Cells. This option will apply color to those sections and devices in the
Synergi map display, based on the values in those cells. For example, if you select a group of
cells in the “Amps (Bal)” column of a load-flow report, any sections applicable to those
selected values will be automatically colored according to those values.
When you use this feature, Synergi creates a results set from the selected values and changes
your map settings to “Color By Results.” Synergi also sets up and applies color ranges based
on the selected values. Any sections not included in the selection set will receive the “Out Of
Range” color. If you have cells in multiple columns selected, Synergi creates a results set for
each affected column, and applies coloring based on the first (left-most) column.

Analyzing a Model
To highlight report data in the Synergi map display
1. Run the analysis that generates the grid-style report that you want to view, and then
select the name of the report chapter that you want to view.
2. From the report window, use the mouse to select the data cells that you want to view in
the map display.
3. Right-click and select Map Selected Cells.
Charting report data

You can generate scatter-plot graphs from the content of a grid-style report. The resulting
graph depends somewhat on the nature of the selected cells. If a single column is selected,
the values of the column are plotted on the Y axis, with row numbers on the X axis. If multiple
columns are selected, Synergi generates a composite graph that incorporates all ranges of
selected values, and provides a legend to help you see what the plots represent. Composite
graphs are generally useful for simple trend visualization, rather than a detailed view of the
results.
Graphs cannot be saved. To preserve a graph image, use the print screen feature on your
computer to capture an image of the graph and paste it in a graphics editor.
To create a scatter-plot graph from a grid-style report
1. Run the analysis that generates the grid-style report that you want to view, and then
select the name of the report chapter that you want to view.
2. From the report window, select the data cells that you want to graph.
3. Right-click and select Graph Selected Cells.
Saving a grid-style report

To preserve report data for later use, you can save the report to HTML or CSV file format.
To save a grid-style report
1. Perform the following steps to open the Report Export editor:

a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Controls tab.
b. In the File group, click Export.

Analyzing a Model
a. Click the Open and Export Reports toolbar button.
Open and Export Reports toolbar button
b. Select Export.
2. In the Report Export editor, use the list area to select the report chapters that you want
to export. The report chapter that you were viewing when you clicked the Export button
will be automatically selected.
3. You can save the report to HTML format, CSV format, or both HTML and CSV formats at
the same time.
To save the report to HTML format:
a. Select the HTML check box.
b. Select the Use Frames check box if you want to save the HTML files using the
HTML frames concept.
c. If you are not saving a frame-style HTML report, select the Include Table of
Contents check box if you want to add an HTML table of contents to the saved
HTML file.
d. Use the Path text box to specify the location and file name of the saved HTML file.
To save the report to CSV format:
a. Select the CSV check box.
b. Use the Path text box to specify the location and file name of the saved CSV file.
4. Click Finish to export the report to the specified file formats.

Analyzing a Model
Exporting a grid-style report to Microsoft Excel

Perform the following procedure to export a grid-style report directly to Microsoft Excel.
Synergi will create an XLS file in your Output file directory with a default file name. In Excel,
you can perform a “Save As” action to rename the file and move it to a new folder location.
Only the active report chapter can be exported to Excel in this manner. If you want to export
multiple report chapters to Excel at one time, you can export them to CSV format as described
in "Saving a grid-style report" on page 537 and then opening the resulting CSV files in Excel.
To export a grid-style report to Microsoft Excel
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Controls tab.

2. In the File group, click Open in Excel.
1. Click the Open and Export Reports toolbar button.
2. Select Open in Excel.
Exporting report data to a database

Grid-based report chapters can be exported directly to a database. This gives you the ability
to manipulate data within the database environment and allows you to use and share the

Analyzing a Model
database table for other tasks.

You must have a DSA configured as a “Results” data source to export the report data to a
database. For more information, see "Managing data sources" on page 58.
To export to a database
1. Perform the following steps to open the Report Export editor:

b. In the File group, click Export to Database.
a. Click the Open and Export Reports toolbar button.
b. Select Export to Database.

2. In the Export Report editor, select the DSA that you want to use to export the data. If
desired, you can click the ... button to specify a new database file. Synergi will prompt
you to create a DSA if you select this option.
3. Under Writing options, select from one of the following:
l Append to table. Select this option to append new data to the end of an existing
table in the database.
l Empty table. Select this option to add the new data into an empty table if there
is one available.
l Replace table. Select this option to replace an existing table with the new data.

Analyzing a Model
4. Use the Target Table text box to specify the name of the database table that you want
to append, create, or replace.
5. Click Finish to export the data to the specified database.
Working with sections and devices in grid-style reports

Many fields in the grid-style reports offer shortcuts for editing, navigating to, and interacting
with sections and devices in your model. To access these shortcuts, right-click on any section
or device name in a report. The available shortcuts will vary according to where you
performed the right-click.
The following list provides some of the options that are available from the right-click menu of
a grid-style report.
l Find. Search for other occurrences in the report of the selected text (that is, the text
where you right-clicked). Note that this option does not provide access to the Synergi
search tool; it only allows you to search within the report window.
l Copy. Copy the selected text in a report and add it to the clipboard.
l Edit. Open the editor for the selected section or device.
l Zoom. Switch to the map display window and zoom to the location of the selected
section or the parent section of the selected device.
l Add to Query. Add the selected section to the query list.
l Zoom Feeder. Switch to the map display window and zoom to the boundary of the
feeder that contains the selected section or device.
l Add {section or device} to TCC. Add the conductor damage curve (or device
protective curve) to the TCC window. If the TCC window is not currently open, Synergi
will create a new one.
HTML reports
HTML reports are always generated for some Synergi reports, and can optionally be
generated for most other Synergi reports. When used, HTML reports are stored in your Output
folder, which by default is a subfolder of your Synergi documents folder. The HTML files can
easily be copied to other file locations and can be viewed in any web browser, independent of
Synergi. Old reports are deleted the next time you start Synergi.
You can also specify whether Synergi will generate HTML reports with or without frames.
Frames allow multiple panels within a single window, with individual contents in each frame.
Frame reports are generally better for online navigation, but non-frame reports are better for
printing and archiving.
Whether you view the HTML report with or without frames, keep in mind you are viewing a
static HTML window, no different than if you are viewing an HTML page in a web browser.
Therefore, the HTML reports do not offer any of the customization options that are available
with the grid-style reports.

Analyzing a Model
To enable HTML reports

3. In the Output Options editor, select the Output tab.
4. Select Generate report, and then either HTML with frames or HTML without
frames.
Synergi charts
Synergi’s custom chart feature can be used to create charts showing data from any results set
or any results type that is available in the Synergi editor. You can customize a wide variety of
chart features, from the title name to the font sizes to the use of color and axis lines.
Many Synergi analysis reports also include charts embedded in the chapters of the report. For
example, Synergi’s time-based analyses, including the Summer and Winter Ratings analysis
and the Single-Year analysis, use charts to show the results of the analysis. These report-
based charts use the same charting software as the stand-alone chart types and can be
modified, exported, and printed following the same instructions discussed in the topics listed
below.
Creating custom charts

Custom charts allow you to create bar, pie, line, and scatter charts that show data from any
results set or any results type that is available in the Synergi editor. Custom charts can be
saved as XML files in your Settings file directory, organized by a user-specified group
category and then by chart name. The file name format for the custom chart file is
<groupname>__<chartname>__ChartSet.xml. For information on locating and editing your
Settings file directory, see "Paths preferences" on page 39.
To create or edit a custom chart

2. In the Views group, select Views > Chart.
3. If you are editing an existing chart, use the Groups and Charts fields in the upper-left
corner of the chart window to select and load the chart you want to edit. For more
information, see "To load a custom chart" below.
4. Use the fields on the left side of the Chart window to configure the custom chart. The
following table describes the process for setting up each custom chart type.
Bar Chart a. Select the Bar Chart icon.

b. Under Category, select the results type or device
type that you want to view in the custom chart.

Analyzing a Model
c. Under Data, select the data type that you want to

view in the custom chart.
d. If desired, use the Min and Max range to customize
the range of data for each bar within the bar chart.
By default, the Min and Max range will be pre-
populated with an even distribution of values ranging
from the minimum to maximum value for the
selected data type.
Pie Chart a. Select the Pie Chart icon.

c. Under Data, select the data type that you want to
view in the custom chart.
d. If desired, use the Min and Max range to customize
the range of data for each wedge within the pie chart.
By default, the Min and Max range will be pre-
populated with an even distribution of values ranging
from the minimum to maximum value for the
selected data type.
Line Chart a. Under Type, select the Line Chart icon.

c. Under X Axis and Y Axis, select the data type that
you want to view on the X-axis and Y-axis of the
custom chart.
Scatter Chart a. Under Type, select the Scatter Chart icon.

c. Under X Axis and Y Axis, select the data type that
you want to view on the X-axis and Y-axis of the
custom chart.
5. If you are creating a new chart, click New. A new chart window will open showing the
edits you have made.
—or—
If you are updating an existing chart, click Update. The current chart window will be
updated to reflect the edits you have made.
To save a custom chart

Analyzing a Model

3. Use the fields on the left side of the chart window to create a custom chart. See "To
create or edit a custom chart" above for more information.
4. In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of an
existing group if you want to save the custom chart to that group, or type the name of a
new group if you want to save the custom chart to a new group. (The group is a simple
way to help you organize your saved charts.)
5. Next to Charts, type the name of the chart you want to save, or select an existing
saved chart if you want to replace that chart.
6. Click Save. If you are replacing a saved chart, click Yes to confirm the action.
To load a custom chart

3. In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of the
group that includes the saved chart that you want to load. (The group is a simple way to
help you organize your saved charts.)
4. Next to Charts, select the name of the chart that you want to load.
5. Click Load. The saved chart will load in a new chart window, identified by the tab name
on the right side of the chart.
To delete a custom chart

3. In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of the
group that includes the saved chart that you want to delete.
4. Next to Charts, select the name of the chart that you want to delete.
5. Click Delete, and then click Yes to confirm the deletion. If you delete the last chart in a
group, the group will be deleted as well.
Modifying a chart
Synergi’s charting windows allows for a variety of ways that you can modify a chart. Some of
these options are available from the Controls tab in the Synergi ribbon, while a larger number
of options are accessible through the right-click menu on the Chart window, or the chart
Properties editor.
This User Guide does not attempt to document all of the options that are available, nor all of
the ways you can set them. Most of the options are self-explanatory. For example, the Font
Size option can be used to change the size of all fonts in the current Chart view. The Font Size
option is available in the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the in the chart window right-
click menu, and in the General tab of the chart Properties editor. Other charting options allow
you to modify the chart’s title, colors, and axis settings.

Analyzing a Model
Exporting a chart image

Perform the following procedure to export an image of the current Synergi chart. You can
export the chart to a file (using the EMF, WMF, BMP, JPG, or PNG file formats) or to the
clipboard.
To export a chart image
1. While viewing the chart window, perform the following steps to open the chart export
editor:
b. In the Appearance group, click Properties.
c. In the Properties editor, click Export.
2. In the Export editor, under Export, select the file format for the data that you want to
export. Other options in the editor will change based on the file type that you select.
3. Under Export Destination, select either Clipboard or File. If you select File, click the
Browse button to specify the name and location of the file you want to save.
4. Under Export Size, specify the size of the file that you are exporting. The units of
measurement are based on the file type that you have selected to export.
5. Click Export.
Printing a chart
Perform the following procedure to print the current Synergi chart.
To print a chart image
1. On the right-side of the Synergi chart window, select the tab for the chart that you want
to print.
2. Perform the following steps to open the chart Export editor:
b. In the Appearance group, click Properties.
c. In the Properties editor, click Export.
3. In the Export editor, under Export Destination, select Printer.
4. Under Export Size, specify the size of the file that you are exporting. You can specify
measurement units in Millimeters, Inches, or Points.
5. Click Print.
6. In the Print editor, select the printer where you want to send the chart. You can also edit
the Printing Style and the DPI setting from this editor. If desired, you can also click
Setup to access your printer settings editor.
7. When your printer settings are ready, click OK. Synergi sends the chart to the selected
printer.

Analyzing a Model
Common Synergi analysis types

Load-flow analysis
In general, if you can maintain a radial model with isolated loops, it is preferable to use radial
analyses and avoid network analyses designed for densely meshed models. For Synergi to
consider loops and/or wandering laterals, you must have your Synergi preferences set to
allow loop creation, as described in "Synergi preferences" on page 31.
Balanced and by-phase load-flow analyses calculate current flows, voltage drops, losses, and
loading of lines, equipment, switches, and protective devices. To choose balanced or by-phase
loading for the analysis, see "Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 499.
You can perform either type of load-flow analysis for any combination of selected substations
or feeders. If a substation is selected, all feeders of the substation are analyzed, as well as
the substation transformers, buses, equipment, and switches.
There are no limits on the number of sections that can be included in a load-flow analysis. The
calculated results for each section or substation bus can be exported to a database, or a
detailed report can be produced.
To perform a load-flow analysis

2. In the Fundamentals group, click the Load-Flow icon.
Network analysis
Network analyses are preferred for densely meshed and transmission models. In this case,
loads have to be placed on nodes and device models are simplified.
The network analysis application contains three powerful methods for analyzing and fixing
power transmission, faults, and outages. Network load-flow, network fault, and network
contingency analysis comprise a series of reports that simulate network events.
Network load-flow analysis

The network load-flow analysis facilitates the detailed by-phase modeling of distribution
systems and their equipment. Synergi focuses on modeling devices rather than on matrix-
based modeling limitations. When the network load-flow analysis is run, it sees distribution
power system devices with interconnected terminals rather than lines, regulators, and
capacitors. When the load-flow applies voltages or demand current to a device like a
regulator, that device handles its own internal workings.
In addition to using a by-phase network model, network load flow analysis can also be run
using a single phase equivalent model.
The network load-flow report details lines, power flow, bus flows (except when a single-phase
equivalent is selected), buses, loads, voltage drop, regulators, and transformers. It also

Analyzing a Model
contains summary and topology chapters. Feeder amps and voltage are updated on the
distribution model following a network load-flow analysis.
The following list provides some additional notes in regard to the network load-flow analysis.
l Generators in network load-flow. Generators are considered as negative constant power
loads by network load-flow analysis, regardless of how they are set up. That is, even if
they are modeled as synchronous or induction machines, they are still viewed as PQ
machines by network load-flow. The generators are modeled at the center of the section
with an artificial bus.
l Switches and network load-flow. In the fundamental distribution model, loads are
placed inside of all devices. The network model places loads at the nodes. When an
open switch is put into a network, amp and power flow values may look peculiar if the
section also has load. The peculiarities come from translating network results into the
radial distribution context. The network load-flow should properly represent the model
and its results. As such, it is recommended that loads not be placed on sections with
open switches.
l Radial/looped flow versus network load-flow. If the Synergi radial or looped analysis
engine were analyzing the exact same model as the Synergi network engine, the results
would match. The models that are analyzed by each engine differ based on the
strengths and weaknesses of the fundamental mathematics behind each approach.
Radial and looped models are analyzed by trace methods. This allows very robust and
detailed models for power system devices like regulators and capacitors. For a
discussion of loops in an otherwise radial model, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on
page 343. On the other hand, network analysis handles densely meshed networks. In
this case, loads have to be placed on nodes and device models are simplified.
Perform the following procedures to set up and run a network load-flow analysis on your
model.
To set up a network load-flow analysis
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Networks tab.

2. In the Analysis group, click the text label Network Load-Flow. Select Single-phase
equivalent if you are running the analysis on a single phase equivalent model.
Otherwise, leave the option cleared if you are running the analysis on a by-phase
network model.
To perform a network load-flow analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click the Network Load-Flow icon.
Network fault analysis

Network fault analysis places a fault on each queried section of the model, one by one, and
then computes the fault current in amps for the load end of each section. The fault values
include minimum and maximum line-ground, phase-phase, and three-phase faults.

Analyzing a Model
The network fault report focuses on buses providing the equivalent sequence impedances, and
symmetrical fault current values for each bus.
To perform a network fault analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click the Network Fault icon.
Network contingency analysis

The network contingency analysis is designed to take each feeder out, one at a time. The
report results summarize transformer loading, feeder amps, low volts, and maximum loading
with each feeder out of service. If the network protector opens, the transformer loading
chapter indicates it is open.
To perform a network contingency analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click the Network Contingency icon.
Time-based analyses
Time-series analysis
The time-series analysis is capable of analyzing the behavior and performance of the
distribution system model down to 1-second intervals over a period of time, up to 24 hours.
This type of analysis is crucial for understanding the impacts of PV and other renewable
generation on the model.
The time-series analysis moves a model sequentially from one time point to another while
modeling the transitions in load, weather conditions, and generator output. A load-flow
analysis is performed for each time interval in the period of study. The analysis calculates the
transitions in feeder demand, loading, renewable generator output, voltage conditions, losses,
and tap positions on transformer tap changers and voltage regulators. Another industry term
for this type of analysis is “quasi-steady state analysis”.
A time-series analysis is not a dynamic analysis because it is not integrating the response of
equipment that might be represented with differential equations. Dynamic analysis is used for
power system stability studies or other studies dealing with the transient nature of rotating
machines or solid-state devices.
Synergi provides two ways to run the analysis:
l You can run the analysis using weather data from an external spreadsheet.
l Or, you can run the analysis using Synergi weather modeling and cloud modeling
features to drive the volatility of the model.
While the time-series analysis can be run for an entire day, it is recommended that you select
a specific starting and ending hour for the analysis. The analysis generates a lot of results and
it is best to focus on useful times for running it.

Analyzing a Model
The internal load, weather, and generation profiles used for the time-series analysis will be
based on the month and day-type derived by the current set values from the Hour/Day tab
and the Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. When an external driver
spreadsheet is used for the weather data, this will be used in place of the internal weather
profiles included in the spreadsheet.
Configuring an external data file for a time-series analysis

If you have recorded or obtained irradiance data for your PV models, you can store the data in
either an Excel file or a CSV file and tie it to generators in the model. The Excel file format is
limited to 255 columns of data entry, so you will need to save your data to the CSV file format
if you require additional data columns, as described below.
The data needs to be configured according to the following specifications:
l The first, left-most column is populated with simulation seconds. When supplying data
in this column, take note of the following:
o The time must be provided as seconds after midnight. However, the simulation
will start at 1:00 a.m. at the earliest. This is done to align the spreadsheet-driven
time-series analysis with the diurnal curves throughout the model that always
begin at 1:00 a.m. Therefore, all rows with second values less than 3600 will be
ignored in the time-series analysis.
o The interval between the time points does not need to be regular; in fact, time
intervals can be skipped. However, Synergi’s time-series analysis generates most
of its output in chart form, so more regular time intervals will result in better
charts.
o Simulation seconds and time on the analysis reports do not reflect real time
unless the time points are set to coincide with the actual recorded time. For
example, a period commencing at 6:00 am requires the first time point in the data
file to be set to 21600 seconds (60 x 60 x 6 seconds).
l The remaining columns of the data file provide input values and output values. These
values are identified through unique column headings, as described below.
After the first column, the remaining column headings in the Excel spreadsheet or CSV file use
uniquely formatted text to identify the data in each column. In the Excel format, the full text
string, including the comma delimiters, are entered each the single spreadsheet cell at the
head of the column. (In the CSV format, the same approach is used; Synergi will properly
recognize where comma delimiters are used within each data column heading.) The format
for each column heading is as follows:
Functional code, Object name or ID, User text or comments
The three values that you specify in each column heading are as follows:
l The first value in the column heading is a unique code that identifies either the data that
is being inputted to the analysis, or the data that is being outputted to the analysis
report. Several examples of these codes are shown below, and a full list of available
codes is provided in "Input and output codes for the Excel data format" on page 558. A
sample Excel file, named PV_SampleDb.xls, is also provided with your Synergi

Analyzing a Model
installation, in the Sample Data folder of your Documents directory.

l The second value in the column heading is the name or ID of a facility or zone in the
model. For input codes for a time-series analysis, this is the weather zone to which the
data is to be applied. For output codes, this is the facility or zone for which the data
value is to be outputted in the analysis report.
l The third and final value in the column heading is an optional text field that has no
impact on the analysis. You can use this field to enter a comment or other text to help
identify the data in each column, or you can simply not use the field, if desired.
The following is an example of an input code that could be used in a column heading. This
heading indicates that the column contains irradiance values for a weather zone named “West
Mountain” (which is a weather zone in the sample model that is provided with Synergi). The
third value in the column heading, which is the comment field, is being used to identify the
unit of measurement for the user’s benefit. Because this is an input column, each row in the
data file will contain the irradiance value for the weather zone “West Mountain” for each
specific time interval that is being run in the time-series analysis.
IN_WTZ_IRRAD, West Mountain, W/M^2
The following is an example of an output code that can be used in a column heading. This
heading indicates that the analysis report will include the lowest voltage for any section in the
feeder “Ship - West Martin”. Because this is an output value, each row in the data file only
needs a value of “1” for this column.
OUT_SRC_LOWVOLTS, Ship - West Martin, Feeder demand
Setting up a time-series analysis

Perform the following procedure to set up a time-series analysis.
To set up a time-series analysis

2. In the Time group, select Time Series Analysis > Settings.
3. At the top of the editor, select one of the following two options to specify where the data
can be found that is being used for the analysis:
l Drive analysis with external spreadsheet. Select this option if you want to
use data from an external Excel spreadsheet or CSV file to run the analysis. To be
available for use with a time-series analysis, the spreadsheet must be configured
as an "Excel" DSA, while the CSV file must be configured as a "Text (csv)" DSA. In
addition, the DSA must be configured as a "Time series" type. The required data
format for both the Excel file and CSV file is described in "Configuring an external
data file for a time-series analysis" on the previous page.
If you do not have a DSA configured for the spreadsheet you want to use, click the
Browse button and then navigate to the Excel or CSV file you want to use. Synergi

Analyzing a Model
will prompt you to create a DSA for the file, and then it will be added to the list of
available DSAs in the Time Series Analysis Options editor.
You can also click the “Open in Excel” button to open the spreadsheet that is
associated with the selected DSA.
When you select this option, you also have the option to override the start and
stop hours for the analysis. This option is recommended because the analysis
generates a lot of results and it is best to focus on useful times for running it.
If the time period covered by the data points in the spreadsheet is shorter than
the Time Range set for the time-series analysis in the Time and Weather Options
editor, then the study will not produce results unless the “Override start and stop
with time range setting” check box is cleared.
Also, if you have used output codes to reduce the range of results produced by the
analysis, then the output check boxes on the right side of the editor should be
cleared.
l Only internal profiles. Select this option if you want to use the data from the
weather modeling and cloud modeling features that are already in your model.
When you select this option, you must also specify the step size for the analysis.
Also, Synergi provides the option to account for cyclic loads in the analysis.
You can also use the output check boxes on the right-side of the editor to control
the amount of data that is included in the analysis report.
The start hour and end hour for the analysis is specified on the Time Range tab of
the Time and Weather Options editor. For more information, see "Selecting a time
range for time-based analyses" on page 508.
Performing a time-series analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a time-series analysis. When the analysis is complete,
the analysis report will display.
To perform a time-series analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Time Series Analysis Options editor to
configure options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a time-
series analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Time group, click the Time Series Analysis icon.
Single-day analysis
The single-day analysis runs over a 24-hour period for a single day, which is the day specified
in the Time and Weather Options editor. The analysis results include the following data:

Analyzing a Model
l For the total system:

o Total demand
o Loads by type
o Total PV
o PV Impact on demand (demand with and without PV)
o PV percent
o Power factor
o kW loss
l For each sub or unfed feeder:
o Demand
o Max line loading
o Losses (total and percent)
o PV percent (saturation)
o Volts (low, avg, high)
o Cap kvar
Selecting the analysis day for a single-day analysis

The specific day that is analyzed during a single-day analysis is the “Specified day” that is
configured on the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. The following
procedure describes how to select an analysis day in this editor.
To select the analysis day for a single-day analysis

3. In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Hour/Day tab.
4. Under “Time of day adjustment”, select Specified time.
5. In the “Specified time” area, select the first option to configure a specific month, type of
day (weekday, weekend, peak day, or min day), and time of day as the analysis day for
a single-day analysis. Or, you can also select the second option to always use the
current system time, specified in terms of month and day type (weekday or weekend).
Performing a single-day analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a single-day analysis. When the analysis is complete,

Analyzing a Model
To perform a single-day analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Time and Weather Options editor to select the
day that will be analyzed. For more information, see "Selecting the analysis day for a
single-day analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Time group, click the Single-Day icon.
Single-year analysis
A single-year analysis runs over a user-specified range of months and provides data that
includes loading, generation, and PV penetration.
Setting up a single-year analysis

The range of months that are analyzed during a single-year analysis is set in the Time Range
tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. See "Selecting a time range for time-based
analyses" on page 508 for more information.
Performing a single-year analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a single-year analysis. When the analysis is complete,
To perform a single-year analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Single-Year Analysis Options editor to specify
the range of months and hours that will be analyzed. For more information, see "Setting
up a single-year analysis" above.
3. In the Time group, click the Single-Year icon.
Full-year (8760) analysis

The 8760 analysis runs a Synergi model over every hour of the year for the current model
year. The analysis report includes the following data, with each chapter being generated in
chart form:
l Total demand
l Regulator tap positions
l Transformer tap positions
If the transformer demands are setup from AMI data then the 8760 analysis is a run through
the actual recorded demands of the customers over the given year.
As a result of the analysis, 8760 data points are generated, hence the name of the analysis
type. While the analysis reports only plot 1/4th of the data points, all 8760 data points are
generated by Synergi and can be exported to a text file or Excel for further evaluation. Export
options are available from the context (right-click) menu for each chart.

Analyzing a Model
To set up a full-year (8760) analysis
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

2. In the Time group, click the text label 8760 and select Settings.
3. Select the Use CMM dtran hourly demands check box if you want to use distribution
transformer demands for each hour and each transformer from a specified data source
(identified as a CMM DSA), data set, and year.
To run a full-year (8760) analysis
1. From the Synergi ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

2. In the Time group, click 8760.
Multi-year analysis
The multi-year analysis can be used to run common analysis types for any number of model
years. The analysis reports are condensed versions of their single-year counterparts, but the
data is presented in a way that makes it easy for you to compare results across different
analysis years. As such, multi-year analysis reports can be extremely helpful in comparing
overall construction and performance over the modeled years.
The analysis types that you can run in a multi-year analysis include the following:
l Load-flow
l Fault
l Load allocation
l Reliability
l Contingency
l Check data
l Generate maps
l Cleanup script
You can also run the check data report as well as selected cleanup scripts, and generate map
displays of each analysis years to include in the report. Both the check data and cleanup
scripts are targeted at loop identification and correction in future years.
Setting up a multi-year analysis

Before you run a multi-year analysis, you need to select which model years you want to
analyze, which analysis types you want to run, and what output type you want to generate
(charts or reports). Optionally, you may also want to select which cleanup scripts you want to
run at the end of the analysis. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
To set up a multi-year analysis

2. In the Time group, select Multi-Year > Settings.

Analyzing a Model
3. Use the Multi-Year Analysis editor to set up the multi-year analysis. The options that
you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Multi-Year Analysis editor.
Applications to run
Select the check box for each analysis type that you want to include in the multi-year
analysis.
Cleanup scripts
Select the check box for each cleanup script that you want to run at the end of the multi-year
analysis. You must first select the “Cleanup Script” check box under “Applications to run” to
enable this area of the editor.
For more information on model cleanup scripts, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.
Output type
Select whether you want to view the analysis results in Synergi’s chart-based report format or
table-based report format.
For more information on Synergi reports, see "Synergi reports" on page 520.
Years to analyze
Select the check box for each model year that you want to analyze in the multi-year analysis.
Performing a multi-year analysis
To perform a multi-year analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Multi-Year Analysis editor to set up options
related to the multi-year analysis, including selecting which analysis types you want to
run, which model years you want to analyze, and what output type to view the results.
For more information, see "Setting up a multi-year analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Time group, click the Multi-Year icon.
Summer and Winter analysis

Synergi’s Summer and Winter analysis runs your model at summer and winter peaks
conditions. The analysis provides important information about how the system varies between
summer and winter months.
There are no settings required to set up the analysis. The resulting analysis report will show
values in your model for summer and winter conditions for results such as feeder demand,
feeder loading, and pickup capacity. The reports will also show the difference as a percentage
value between the summer and winter values.
Take note that load values will be different at those peaks if the client has diurnal modeling in
place.

Analyzing a Model
To perform a Summer and Winter analysis

2. In the Time group, click the Summer and Winter button.
Batch analysis
The batch analysis can be used to run different analysis types, including load flow, load
allocation, and reliability, over multiple analysis runs, or cases. The batch analysis allows you
to change different input parameters for each analysis case. You can even specify which
analysis types are run for each analysis case.
These values are specified in an Excel spreadsheet that you configure in Synergi as an Excel
DSA. This feature makes the batch analysis useful for quickly modeling different load and
demand conditions.
Configuring an Excel file for a batch analysis

Data for the batch analysis must be configured in an Excel file that follows a very specific
format. In Synergi, an Excel DSA is then used to make the Excel file available for a batch
analysis.
l The first column in the Excel spreadsheet identifies the name of the analysis “case”. The
name does not have any impact on the analysis, but it is used to show the results for
each case in the analysis report.
l The second column lists the applications that are to be run for each case in the batch
analysis. You can run multiple applications for each case. In the Excel spreadsheet, use
the following abbreviations for the second column, with each analysis type separated by
a comma in the same data cell.
o Alloc – Run a Load Allocation analysis.
o GenOff – Turn all stand-alone generators off.
o GenOn – Turn all stand-alone generators on.
o Loadflow – Run a Load Flow analysis.
o Partial {full path} – Load a partial (MiddleLink) file and update the model.
o Reliability – Run a Reliability analysis.
l The remaining columns of the spreadsheet provide input and/or output values, which
are identified through unique column headings, as described below.
After the first two columns, the column headings in the Excel spreadsheet use uniquely
formatted text to identify the data in each column. The full text string including the comma
delimiters are entered into the single spreadsheet cell at the head of the column. The format
for each column heading is as follows:
Functional code, Facility name or ID, User text or comments
The three values that you specify in each column heading are as follows:

Analyzing a Model
l The first value in the column heading is a unique code that identifies either the data that
is being inputted to the analysis, or the data that is being outputted to the analysis
report. Several examples of these codes are shown below, and a full list of available
codes is provided in "Input and output codes for the Excel data format" on the next
page.
l The second value in the column heading is the name or ID of a facility or feeder in the
model. For input codes, this is the facility or feeder to which the data is to be applied.
For output codes, this is the facility or feeder for which the data value is to be outputted
in the analysis report.
l The third and final value in the column heading is a text field that has no impact on the
analysis. You can use this field to enter a comment or other text to help identify the data
in each column, or you can simply not use the field, if desired.
The following is an example of an input code that can be used in a column heading. This
heading indicates that the column contains voltage values for the feeder “Ship - West Martin”.
The third value in the column heading, the comment field, is not being used in this example.
Because this is an input column, each row in the spreadsheet will contain the voltage to be
used at the feeder “Ship - West Martin” for each specific case that is being run in the batch
analysis.
IN_SRC_VOLTS, Ship - West Martin
The following is an example of an output code that can be used in a column heading. This
heading indicates that the analysis report will include the lowest voltage for any section in the
feeder “Ship - West Martin”. Because this is an output value, each row in the spreadsheet only
needs a value of “1” for this column.
OUT_SRC_LOWVOLTS, Ship - West Martin
A complete list of supported input and output codes is provided in "Input and output codes for
the Excel data format" on the next page.
The Excel spreadsheet must be identified through an Excel DSA before it can be used with the
batch analysis. For more information on Synergi DSAs, see "Managing data sources" on
page 58.
Setting up a batch analysis

Perform the following procedure to set up a batch analysis.
To set up a batch analysis

2. In the Automation group, select Batch Analysis > Settings.
3. Use the Batch Analysis Options editor to select the DSA that identifies the Excel file that
contains the data for your analysis. The spreadsheet must be configured as an Excel
DSA and "Batch Analysis" DSA type in order to be available for selection in the Batch
Analysis Options editor. The required data format for the Excel file is described in

Analyzing a Model
"Configuring an Excel file for a batch analysis" on page 556.

If you do not have a DSA configured for the spreadsheet you want to use, click the
Browse button and then navigate to the Excel file you want to use. Synergi will prompt
you to create a DSA for the spreadsheet, and then it will be added to the list of available
DSAs in the Batch Analysis Options editor.
You can also click the “Open in Excel” button to open the spreadsheet that is associated
with the selected DSA.
Performing a batch analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a batch analysis. When the analysis is complete, the
analysis report will display.
To perform a batch analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Batch Analysis Options editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a batch analysis"
3. In the Automation group, click the Batch Analysis icon.
Input and output codes for the Excel data format

Several Synergi analysis types, including the time-series analysis and the batch analysis, use
Excel spreadsheets to provide input data for the respective analysis, and also to specify
output data that will be included in the analysis reports. The Excel spreadsheet format
includes specific codes to identity these input and output values.
The subsections below list the input and output codes that are used with Synergi’s Excel data
format. Since the Excel files are configured slightly different for each analysis type, detailed
information on the Excel file format is provided in the following sections:
l "Configuring an external data file for a time-series analysis" on page 549
l "Configuring an Excel file for a batch analysis" on page 556
Input codes
Code Description
IN_GEN_KW Generator instance kW is specified in the column.
IN_GEN_RATKW Set kW rating for an existing generator.
IN_GLOBAL_IRRAD Irradiance for all PV generation

Analyzing a Model
Code Description
IN_MTRDMD_KVAR_ Meter demand phase kvar (for example, IN_MTRDMD_KVAR_

{A,B,C} A).
IN_MTRDMD_KW_ Meter demand phase kW (for example, IN_MTRDMD_KW_A).

{A,B,C}
IN_SPOT_KVAR_ Spot load reactive power (for example, IN_SPOT_KVAR_A).

{A,B,C}
IN_SPOT_KW_ Spot load real power (for example, IN_SPOT_KW_A).

{A,B,C}
IN_SRC_VOLTS Feeder or substation voltage is specified. Values are in volts.
IN_WTZ_IRRAD Column lists irradiance values in W/M^2 for the particular

weather zone. Any generators tied to the specified weather
zone will be driven with the irradiance values.
Output codes
Code Description
OUT_BATT_KWHR Energy stored in the battery in kWHr.
OUT_BATT_KWOUT Kw Output for a battery.
OUT_CAP_KVAR Output kvar from a capacitor.
OUT_GEN_KWOUT Generator output.
OUT_LTC_TAPPOS Primary transformer LTC tap position.
OUT_REG_OUTVOLTS Regulator output volts.
OUT_REG_TAPPOS Current tap (at time point) for a regulator.
OUT_REG_TAPTOT Total number of tap changes made by a regulator or

transformer.
OUT_SCT_AMPS Amps into section.
OUT_SCT_IMBAL % imbalance of demand out of section.
OUT_SCT_IRRAD Irradiance on a section.

Analyzing a Model
Code Description
OUT_SCT_KVA kVA into section.
OUT_SCT_KVAR kvar into section.
OUT_SCT_KW kW into section.
OUT_SCT_LDG % loading of section.
OUT_SCT_PCTSAT % saturation of generation and demand into section.
OUT_SCT_PF %pf into section.
OUT_SCT_PVKW Generation into section.
OUT_SCT_VOLTS Voltage on section.
OUT_SRC_DMDKW Source demand kW.
OUT_SRC_ Highest voltage on a section in the feeder or substation.

HIGHVOLTS
OUT_SRC_LD_KWH Total load kWh on a feeder or substation.
OUT_SRC_LOSS_KWH Total kWh losses for a feeder or substation.
OUT_SRC_LOSSKW Total losses for a substation or feeder.
OUT_SRC_LOWVOLTS Lowest voltage on a section in the feeder or substation.
OUT_SRC_MAIFI Feeder or subtran MAIFI value.
OUT_SRC_ Percent loading of feeder or substation.

PCTCNTLDG
OUT_SRC_PV_KW Total kW generation from PV sources.
OUT_SRC_PV_KWH Total kWh of PV generation.
OUT_SRC_SAIDI Feeder or subtran SAIDI value.
OUT_SRC_SAIFI Feeder or subtran SAIFI value.
OUT_SRC_SATPCT PV saturation on the feeder.
OUT_SRC_TOT_KW Total kW load on a feeder or substation.
OUT_TRAN_MVAR_ Total reactive power into transformer.

Analyzing a Model
Code Description
INTO
OUT_TRAN_MW_INTO Total power into transformer.
OUT_TRAN_ Transformer output volts.

OUTVOLTS
OUT_TRAN_PCTLDG Transformer loading percent.
OUT_TRAN_TAPTOT Transformer LTC cumulative tap changes.
Locked rotor analysis

Starting large motors can cause severe disturbances to the motor, nearby loads, and loads
throughout the feeder. Synergi's locked rotor analysis is designed to evaluate the effects of
starting large motors on distribution systems. It enables you to examine voltage drop at the
feeder, service, and terminals of the motor after it is switched onto the system and
throughout its start. The analysis is a dynamic analysis resulting in time-domain based
results.
Motor start analysis permits you to determine and analyze the following:
l Motor speed and torque vs. acceleration time
l Motor terminal voltage and current draw versus time
l KW and kvar into service versus time
l Service drop versus time
l Effects of various types of starters
The speed-torque/accelerating time study can help to verify that starting times are within
acceptable limits. It can also help determine the best sequence for starting motors and the
minimum delay required between the successive starting of multiple motors.
Perform the following procedure to run a locked rotor analysis. Detailed information on the
locked rotor analysis can be found in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
To perform a locked rotor analysis

2. In the Applications group, click the Locked Rotor icon.
Capacity
Synergi provides a variety of analysis tools to help you make sound engineering decisions.
These tools support:

Analyzing a Model
l Assessing operational capacity

l Optimizing your system configuration
l Developing plans for response to operational events
Switching
Throw-over analysis
The throw-over analysis analyzes the effects of feeder outages and the resulting automatic
pickup in capacity available from adjacent feeders. The analysis only evaluates feeders with
one or more co-ordinated pairs of auto-transfer switches (throw-over switches) that will
transfer sections of load from the feeder that is disconnected during the outage to an adjacent
feeder.
During the analysis, each applicable feeder is taken out of service one at a time. The throw-
over switches will transfer load from the out-of-service feeder to the adjacent feeders where
auto-transfer switch pairs are available. The resulting transfers and loading levels are
summarized in the throw-over analysis report.
The State Master window will also appear after the throw-over analysis is complete. The State
Master allows you to temporarily apply the results of each feeder outage to the model. You
can then carry out a load flow analysis to see the power flows and voltage conditions for the
new network configuration. The results can be viewed in the results reports,
section/equipment editors, and results viewer and can also be displayed in the Synergi map
display. You must restore the model to its original condition before you can close the State
Master.
For more information on using the State Master, see "State Master" on page 222.
To perform a throw-over analysis
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Capacity tab.

2. In the Switching group, click Throw-Over.
To apply changes to the model and carry out a load flow
1. In the State Master, select the state you want to apply. In the model, transferrable
sections will then be fed from the adjacent feeder and the disconnected feeder will be
shown in the map-display as unfed.
2. To perform a load flow analysis, do the following:
a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
b. In the Fundamentals group, click the Load-Flow icon.
This will report the power flows and voltage conditions following the load transfer.

Analyzing a Model
Optimal switching analysis

Synergi’s optimal switching analysis helps you find the best operating state for feeder
switches that meet the objective set. After a base load flow analysis is performed,
sequentially open and closed switch pairs available for the analysis are operated and another
load-flow analysis is performed. Synergi evaluates whether set constraints (low voltages and
loading) are violated and then classifies the switching case as ‘constraint violation’,
‘contender’ or ‘selection’. The selected switch operation is retained and the process is then
repeated until the set number of switching operations is reached.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on setting up and performing an optimal
switching analysis. Additional information about the analysis is provided in the Synergi
Setting up an optimal switching analysis

Use the Switching Options editor to select an objective for an optional switching analysis and
to specify analysis constraints.
To open the Switching Options editor

2. In the Switching group, select Optimal > Settings
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Switching Options editor.
Constraints
Specify the constraints that will be used to disallow switching operations during the analysis:
l Voltage. Minimum voltage constraint.

l Loading. Maximum percentage of continuous rating as a loading constraint.
l Operation Limit. Maximum number of switching operations that are allowed during
the analysis.
Optimal switching runs a preliminary load-flow on the model before attempting any switching
actions. If current model conditions already violate the constraints, you will have the option of
resetting those constraints to current model conditions. This constraint adjustment is
temporary for the current analysis and does not affect your stored analysis options.
Objective
Select an objective that you want to achieve in the optimal switching analysis. These
objectives are evaluated for all selected feeders.
l Improve losses. Switches are toggled to reduce the total kW loss for all selected
feeders.
l Improve lowest voltage. Switches are toggled to achieve the highest minimum
voltage value for all sections in all feeders being analyzed. The section with the lowest
voltage may change from the base case run.

Analyzing a Model
l Minimize number of exceptions. Loading and voltage exception counts are

minimized through switching operations. The total count from all feeders being analyzed
is considered.
l Minimize feeder demand. The lowest total kVA demand for all feeders being
analyzed is found. Since the total for all feeders is considered, the demand for
particular feeders could conceivably increase and be offset by a reduction in the
demand on other feeders.
l Minimize feeder kVA imbalance. Percent kVA imbalance calculations are made for
each feeder. Switching operations are performed to reduce the average of all feeder
imbalance values.
l Minimize substation transformer loading. Switching operations are made to
reduce the total loading on all substation transformers. If no substation transformers
are in the selected feeders, loading on all primary transformers is considered.
l Equate loading. Switches are toggled to move load so that the total load is distributed
more evenly among the feeders.
Take note that the analysis results table lists values for all of these options, regardless of
which objective was selected for optimization.
Performing an optimal switching analysis

Perform the following procedure to run an optimal switching analysis.
To perform an optimal switching analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Switching Options editor to select the analysis
objective and set analysis constraints. For more information, see "Setting up an optimal
switching analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Switching group, click the Optimal icon.
4. When the analysis is complete, select whether you want to apply the changes to the
model or only view a report of the proposed changes. (The report will display not matter
which option you choose.)
The analysis report produces before and after images of the map display, a detailed
load-flow report, and a switch summary. You can use the report to review the
improvements made by the switching operations, as well as the performance of other
items like total loading, exceptions, low voltage, and transformer loading.
Optimal switching report—switch plan section

Analyzing a Model
Switch plan analysis

The switch plan analysis runs all the switch plans available on the feeders in memory. The
analysis will apply each switch action and carry out a load flow analysis. The resulting report
provides details of the load changes, customers affected, and exceptions after each step of
the switching sequence is completed.
The State Master window will also appear after the switch plan analysis is complete. The State
Master allows you to temporarily apply the results of each switch plan to the model. You can
then carry out a load flow analysis to see how the power flows and voltage conditions for the
new network configuration. The results can be viewed in the results reports,
section/equipment editors, results viewer and can be displayed in the Synergi map display.
You must restore the model to its original condition before you can close the State Master. For
more information on using the State Master, see "State Master" on page 222.
Switch plans can be created manually or generated by Synergi. They can also be created
through Model Forge processes. For more information on creating switch plans, see "Switch
plans" on page 471.
To perform a switch plan analysis
1. 1. In the Synergi ribbon, click the Capacity tab.

2. 2. In the Switching group, click Switch Plan.
Load transfer analysis

The load transfer analysis presents a list of load transfers that can be made between feeders.
Each transfer switching pair is listed along with the following information:
l kVA to be transferred.
l kVA loading of each feeder before and after the operation.
l Voltage and loading limits before and after the operation.
l Imbalance before and after the operation.
l Voltage and loading limits before and after the operation.
l Imbalance before and after the operation.
To perform a switch plan analysis

2. 2. In the Switching group, click Load Transfer.
Switchable load analysis

The switchable load analysis looks at each device that has another downstream device that
can be closed to pick up the disconnected load. The resulting report provides the number of
customers and load MVA that is supplied by the device and a schedule of all devices that can
be closed to pick up the load. The schedule lists the Reserve MVA for the device and its

Analyzing a Model
percentage value of the load disconnected. The distance from the feeder source is provided
for each device to assist in logistical planning of switching activities.
To perform a switchable load analysis

2. 2. In the Switching group, click Switchable Load.
Auto-transfer switch analysis

The auto-transfer switch analysis allows you to see the impact that the toggling of auto-
transfer switches will have on your system. Essentially, it analyzes a set of feeders tied to
critical loads through auto-transfer switches.
The resulting report provides a feeder-level and switch-level review of the impact of auto-
transfer switches on feeder loading. The main report chapters are as follows:
l Feeder Loading Summary. The Feeder Loading Summary chapter presents the feeder
loading, low voltage, and maximum loading of all feeders affected by auto-transfer
switches under normal conditions (“Normal”), then with all auto-transfer loads
connected (“Minimum”), and finally with all loads disconnected (“Maximum”).
Feeder Loading Summary chapter of the Auto-Transfer Analysis report
l ATS Summary. The ATS Summary chapter lists each auto-transfer switch pair. The
load, low voltage, and maximum loading on the feeders associated with each switch are
given for the normal switch positions and the toggled switch positions.

Analyzing a Model
ATS Summary chapter of the Auto-Transfer Analysis report
The auto-transfer analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For
more information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
To perform an auto-transfer analysis
1. In the Synergi ribbon, click the Capacity tab.

2. In the Switching group, click Auto-Transfer.
Automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis

The automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis evaluates the ability of surrounding feeders to
automatically pick up load that was isolated due to a feeder outage. This analysis only
operates on switch groups with switchable devices that are automatic, which includes the
following:
l Switches that have been configured as automatic switches
l Reclosers that have been configured as mid-point reclosers
l Reclosers that have been configured as tie reclosers
During the analysis, Synergi will find all of the automatic switches and reclosers for each
feeder and transfer their load to adjoining feeders. The transfer is evaluated for individual and
group violations and the resulting analysis report will include details of demand that can be:
l Transferred in full
l Partially transferred where the demand value exceeds the reserve capacity
l Demand downstream of an AFS switch that does not have a pickup device.
The goal of the analysis is to determine if there is adequate capacity on the surrounding
feeders to pick up all automatic transfers.
For more detailed information on the AFS analysis, see the Synergi Electric Engineering
Handbook.
To perform an automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis

2. In the Switching group, click the text label AFS and then select from the following
options:

Analyzing a Model
l Show State Master

l Setup Missing Groups
3. Click the AFS icon to perform the analysis.
Substation bus transfer analysis

The substation bus transfer analysis evaluates load transfers between transformers in the
same substation. The analysis report includes the following information:
l Pre-transfer loading levels on the transformer
l Post-transfer parameters on the pickup transformer
l Percentage of a substation transformer’s demand that can be picked up by an adjoining
substation transformer.
To perform a substation transfer analysis

2. In the Switching group, click Substation Bus Transfer.
Time-dependent switching analysis

The time-dependent switching analysis will run switch plans over a user-specified time
interval on a selected day. The analysis report will show data such as the minimum and
maximum volts, maximum loading, and reserve amps for each plan and each hour. This data
can be used to find switching hours that might be problematic in your model.
The range of hours that are analyzed during a time-dependent switching analysis is set in the
Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. See "Selecting a time range for time-
based analyses" on page 508 for more information.
Perform the following procedure to run a time-dependent switching analysis.
To perform a time-dependent switching analysis
1. In the Synergi ribbon, click the Capacity tab.

2. In the Switching group, click Time Dependent Switching.
Contingency analysis
Contingency analysis simulates the loss or fault of a section(s) or a bus and then searches for
a switching recovery plan. Recovery plans are presented with comprehensive reports, which
include step-by-step switching recommendations and often include images of the original
model, outaged model, and recovered model.
The contingency analysis provides for several different approaches, including the Fast Pickup
method, the Optimized Pickup method, and the Load Transfer method. You can select the
approach type in the Contingency Analysis Options editor, as described in "Selecting the
contingency analysis method" on the facing page.

Analyzing a Model
l Fast Pickup method. The Fast Pickup method uses a “switch path reduced model” for
picking up outage. If desired, the resulting output can be sent to the Switch Plan
Manager.
l Load Transfer method. The primary goal of the Load Transfer method is to switch
large portions of load from the outage area to adjacent feeders, while also isolating the
outage area. It is most useful for determining whether adjacent circuits will be able to
handle contingency situations and also determining where problems may exist.
l Optimized Pickup method. The Optimized Pickup method is a detailed, objective-
based process of determining an optimal recovery plan for outage situations. It has a
variety of options that allow you to create contingency plans for different types of
outages that suit your particular system and protocol. Compared with the Load Transfer
method, The Optimized Pickup method is more of a planning tool, whereas the Load
Transfer method focuses more on current performance and safety.
These methods may provide different solutions to the same problem. However, keep in mind
that each method solves for a different purpose and the results should be used accordingly.
Any given distribution system may have numerous solutions to a particular problem, and
Synergi is attempting to find the best one according to the settings and data provided.
Regardless of methodology, you should always use sound engineering judgment while
evaluating Synergi results, with consideration of the unique characteristics of the actual
system under study.
Selecting the contingency analysis method

Use the Approach tab in the Contingency Analysis Options editor to select the contingency
analysis method and edit options related to all contingency analysis methods.
To open the Contingency Analysis Options editor

2. In the Analysis group, select Contingency > Settings.
3. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab. The options that
The following list describes the options you can edit on the Approach tab of the Contingency
Analysis Options editor.
Analysis approach
Use the “Analysis Approach” area to select the analysis approach that you want to use.
l Fast pickup method
l Transfer method
l Optimized pickup method
For more information, see "Fast pickup contingency analysis" below, "Load Transfer
contingency analysis" on page 572, and "Optimized Pickup contingency analysis" on page 574.

Analyzing a Model
Contingency
Use the “Contingency” area to select the type of analysis that you want to run. Available
choices for Fast pickup and Transfer methods are:
l Batch run. A batch run launches an individual contingency analysis one at a time for
each selected feeder (“Feeder”), each selected substation (“Sub”), or each section that
is set as either Contingency sections, Critical sections, or both.
l Single run. A single run launches an individual analysis on a feeder (“Feeder”) or
substation (“Sub”) if a downstream section is set for analysis, or for an outage from the
upstream isolating point for a section that is set for analysis (“Section itself”).
The type of analysis for the Optimized method is set on the Optimize tab. The Contingency
setting on the Approach tab is not used when determining the type of analysis for this method.
For more information, see "Optimized Pickup contingency analysis" on page 574.
Exception limits
Click the “Exception limits” button to open the Exceptions tab in the Model and Analysis
Options editor, where you can define exception loading limits. The exception loading limits for
emergency exceptions and emergency reserve amps are used during the Contingency
analysis to find allowable switching operations.
For more information, see "Exceptions (Loading) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on
page 497.
Recommended plans
Use this option to specify the maximum number of transfer pairs that will be studied per
switching plan during the analysis.
Fast pickup contingency analysis

The fast pickup method uses a “switch path reduced model” for picking up outage. If desired,
the resulting output can be sent to the Switch Plan Manager.
To set up a Fast Pickup contingency analysis

3. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab. Under Analysis
Approach, make sure that Fast pickup method is selected.
4. Select the Fast tab. Use the options in the Fast tab to set up the Fast pickup contingency
analysis. The options that you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit on the Fast tab of the Contingency
Allow fuses to be used for switching
Select this check box to allow operation of fuses on the switching paths to help restore

Analyzing a Model
outaged customers.
Allow reclosers to be used for switching
Select this check box to allow operation of reclosers on the switching paths to help restore
outaged customers.
Bring up Switch Plan Manager
Select this check box if you want to open the Switch Plan Manager at the completion of the
Fast Pickup contingency analysis. For more information on the Switch Plan Manager, see
"Using the Switch Plan Manager" on page 473.
Generate switch plans
Select this check box if you want to generate switch plans as a part of the Fast Pickup
contingency analysis.
Limit results
Select this check box to limit the results of the Fast Pickup contingency analysis to a specified
number of plans. The analysis will stop when the first limit is reached, but report all plans that
were calculated up until that point. For example, if you specify limits of 10 good plans, 10
close plans, and 100 poor plans, the results could be 5 good plans and 10 close plans, or 10
good plans and 5 close plans, simply depending on which plan limit Synergi reaches first.
Only use automatic switches
Select this option to only consider auto switches when performing a Fast Pickup contingency
analysis.
Plans that are “close”
Enter a value here to specify which plans will be determined “close” and which will be
determined to be “poor”, based on a percentage of the emergency exception loading limit, as
specified in the Exceptions tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor.
l “Good” plans are those that do not exceed 100% of the emergency exception loading
limit.
l “Close” plans are those that fall between 100% of the emergency exception loading limit
and the percentage value specified here in the “% of emergency rating” text box.
l “Poor” plans are those where the emergency exception loading limit is greater than the
percentage value specified here in the “% of emergency rating” text box.
Show poor plans
Select this check box to send any “poor” plans from the Contingency Analysis to the Switch
Plan manager. Doing so will make it easier to implement the switch plan, run a load-flow
analysis, and review the details.
Poor plans are defined later in this table, with the “Plans that are close” option.
Substation outages
l Switch only in substations. Synergi will only utilize switchable devices fed from SubTran
source sections (which are typically substations) when an outage is taken to a subtran.

Analyzing a Model
l Allow field switching. Synergi will use switchable devices out on the Feeders, as well as
those fed from SubTran source sections, when an outage is taken to a subtran.
Use non-selected feeders and subs to pickup
Select this option to use non-selected feeders and subtransformers to pick up contingency
outages. Note that while this option is selected, only selected feeders or subs will be
processed as outage events but non-selected feeders and subs can be used for pickup.
Note also that this feature is designed to be used in an automated fashion with reports. If you
wish to use the switch plan manager to work through contingency results, it is strongly
recommended that you do not select this check box.
Load Transfer contingency analysis

The Load Transfer method of contingency analysis is designed to provide a larger view of
system performance and safety in consideration of outage restoration. The Load Transfer
method is focused on transferring larger areas of load from an outage area to another feeder.
In doing so, it operates much more quickly and provides a better view of overall reserve
capacity than the Optimized Pickup method. For example, you can do a batch analysis of all
selected feeders, one at a time, and see where problems may arise system-wide as feeder
sources are outaged. It allows you to see how capable adjacent feeders will be to handle the
additional load imposed by an outage restoration process.
During a Load Transfer contingency analysis, Synergi looks for switch pairs to toggle in
pursuit of load pickup, without any preliminary opening of switches like the Optimized Pickup
method. In the end, the Load Transfer method produces a switching scenario for pickup as
well, but it may be less detailed and effective as a plan from the Optimized Pickup method.
Therefore, the Load Transfer method may be a better means of determining the preparedness
of your system to handle contingencies, rather than producing precise contingency switching
plans.
To set up a Load Transfer contingency analysis

3. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab. under Analysis
Approach, make sure that Transfer method is selected.
4. Select the Transfer tab. Use the options in the Transfer tab to set up the Load transfer
contingency analysis. The options that you can edit are described at the end of this
procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit on the Transfer tab of the Contingency
Analysis time tuning
Use the options in this area to set the following options:

Analyzing a Model
l Time limit. Use this option to set the amount of time that should be spent in finding a
solution for a single event. The evaluation of an event will be terminated when this time
limit is reached.
l Max event overload evals and Max event underload evals. Use these two options
to set the maximum number of transfer evaluations completed for an event where
section currents exceed (overload) or are less than (underload) the emergency rating
for any section in the feeders. The default values are 150 and 175.
NOTE: Since the minimum value for these two options is 1, the actual number of
evaluations allowed is N+1. For example, if you use the default values of 150 and
175, then 151 and 176 evaluations will be completed.
l Max step overload evals and Max step underload evals. Use these two options to
set the maximum number of open switch transfer evaluations that are completed for a
particular closed switch. The default values are 25 and 30.
NOTE: Since the minimum value for these two options is 1, the actual number of
evaluations allowed is N+1. For example, if you use the default values of 25 and 30,
then 26 and 31 evaluations will be completed.
Constraints
Use the options in this area to specify system constraints that may limit switching operations.
l Emer low volts. Use this option to set the analysis to use a low voltage setting instead
of the value set in the exceptions limits.
l Use relay trip points. Select this option to allow the analysis to consider using relay
trip points as a possible limiting factor during switching.
l Use invalid cases if necessary. Select this check box to display invalid plans in the
Valid plans chapter of the Contingency Output report.
Constraints for considering a transfer
Use the options in this area to set for a switch pair the ratio of load through the closed switch
over the reserve amps for the open switch.
l • Increasing the Min ratio value results in less switch pair options meeting the criteria.
More load will need to be transferred in the switch pairs that meet the criteria.
l • Decreasing the Max ratio value results in fewer switching pairs meeting the criteria.
More switching pairs will be needed to transfer the load.
Output options
Use the options in this area to set the options that are related to the reports that are produced
at the end of the analysis. The following options are available:
l Limit reports to X failed plans. Use this option to set a limit on the number of failed
reports. The default value is 25.

Analyzing a Model
l Generate maps. Select this check box to have the Contingency Analysis generate
maps along with the reports. The maps will be included as report chapters and show the
original base model and also the outaged model.
l Show auto-transfer operations. Select this check box to show auto-transfer
switching operations in the report plans. Auto-transfers happen automatically at the
onset of the contingency, so you may choose not to show these operations.
l Switch identification. Use this option to specify how switches are identified in the
report—by section ID or by name.
Recommended plans
Use the options in this area to set the minimum number of valid switching plans that will be
generated by the Load Transfer contingency analysis and reported in the analysis report.
Switching
Use the options in this area to set the following options:
l Use fuses. Select this check box to allow operation of fuses on the switching paths to
help restore outaged customers.
l Use breakers and reclosers. Select this check box to allow operation of breakers
and reclosers on the switching paths to help restore outaged customers.
Optimized Pickup contingency analysis

The Optimized Pickup method of contingency analysis is designed primarily as a planning tool
for developing contingency switching plans. It performs a detailed, granular analysis to
restore as much of an outage as possible, according to the specified objective. The Optimized
Pickup method does consider constraints and performance during the analysis, but it is mostly
focused on producing a realistic and achievable switching plan in the event of an outage.
One of the notable aspects of the Optimized Pickup method is that it opens all switches in the
outage area first and then begins to form the most optimal switching plan for maximum
pickup. This approach allows the analysis to find recovery solutions in an incremental fashion
that helps prevent overload disqualifications early in the process.
A number of switching options are available at each iteration. A switch is selected if:
l It is an automatic switch and preference is given to automatic switches.

l The switch was closed in the pre-outage model and “minimize switch operations” was
selected.
l It produces the maximum progress towards the selected objective.
The following process is used during an Optimized Pickup method analysis:
1. Contingency runs a preliminary load-flow on the model before attempting any switching
actions. If current model conditions already violate the defined constraints, you will
have the option of resetting those constraints to current model conditions. This
constraint adjustment is temporary for the current analysis and does not affect your
stored analysis options.

Analyzing a Model
2. Create an outage with a contingency or multiple contingencies, according to the analysis

options. The newly outaged sections are referred to as the “outage set.”
3. Isolate the contingency, if specified in the analysis options. This simulates a “fault type”
outage, in which the original conditions that produced the outage are considered to still
exist.
4. Open all closed switches in the outage set. This action allows smaller increments of load
to be picked up when switch closing is begun. Without this action, many switch closings
to pick up unfed sections would result in overloading, and possibly models with
infeasible load-flow solutions.
5. Close switches to pick up the outage, according to the specified objective. The objective
has a significant impact on the recommended switching sequence.
The application only considers contingencies within the selected feeders, but uses adjacent
non-selected feeders in the analysis for a switching recovery plan. Any switch in an adjacent
feeder may be used to pick up unfed sections.
In addition, you can have the contingency simulated as a fault, in which case Synergi first
isolates the contingency area by opening all necessary switches. In this case, the switching
recovery plan will not include the closure of any switches that would feed power to the
contingency area. If Synergi is unable to isolate the fault, the analysis stops and produces an
error message.
Prior to performing an Optimized Pickup contingency analysis, you must identify the sections
that will be analyzed. You can set the sections for analysis using two methods:
l Set one or more sections for contingency, using the Section tab of the Section editor (as
described in "Section tab – Section editor" on page 348).
l Set a section for analysis, as described in "Setting a section for analysis" on page 496.
Perform the following procedure to set up a contingency analysis to use the Optimized Pickup
method.
To set up an Optimized Pickup contingency analysis

3. In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab. Under Analysis
Approach, make sure that Optimized Pickup method is selected.
4. Select the Optimize tab. Use the options in the Optimize tab to set up the Optimized
pickup contingency analysis. The options that you can edit are described at the end of
this procedure.
The following list describes the options you can edit on the Optimize tab of the Contingency
Constraints
Specify system constraints that would prohibit any switching operation which would cause any

Analyzing a Model
of the following situations:

l Voltage. A voltage that is below the specified minimum value
l Loading. A section, transformer, or regulator loading that is above the specified
maximum value
l Prot. Dev. A fuse or protective device loading that is above the specified maximum
value
Contingency
Select the type of contingency situation that you want to analyze. The following options are
available:
l All together. All sections marked as contingency sections are “taken out” at once, and
a switching recovery plan is sought.
l One at a time. Sections marked as contingency sections are taken out one at a time.
With each outage, contingency analysis looks for a separate switching plan. All
contingencies are summarized in a single report.
l Analysis section only. Only the section that is set for analysis is outaged. Sections
marked as contingency sections are treated normally.
Isolate outage
Select this check box to have Synergi open switches around the outage as necessary to isolate
it, and hold them open through the analysis. This allows you to develop a contingency
switching plan for a fault-related outage, in which the fault condition is still present and
requires isolation.
Min switch changes
Select this check box to have Synergi try to find the solutions that have the fewest switch
state changes from the base case.
Outage type
Select the type of outage you want to result when the contingency section(s) is taken out.
l Node (bus) type. The bus or source node of the contingency section is considered out.
Any other sections fed by that node are also considered out.
l Branch type. The contingency section is considered out, but the source node remains
fed.
Pickup order
Select the pickup objective to be considered in the switching recovery plan. The following
options are available:
l Minimal exceptions. Switches are selected so that closing them results in a feasible
model with the least total number of exceptions.
l Most sections. Switches are selected so that closing them results in a feasible model
with the most sections being fed.

Analyzing a Model
l Most load. Switches are selected so that closing them results in a feasible model with
the most kVA load being fed.
l Most customers. Switches are selected so that closing them results in a feasible
model with the most customers being fed. This option requires customer information in
the section records.
l Losses. Switches are selected so that overall losses are kept as low as possible during
pickup.
l Low voltage. Switches are selected so that the lowest voltage of a previously outaged
section is as high as possible.
Prefer auto switches
Select this check box to have Synergi close automatic switches before regular switches, even
if other switching operations may have resulted in a larger pickup. If multiple automatic
switches can be operated, the specified objective is used to select among them.
Likewise, auto-transfer switches are toggled to pick up respective load at the earliest
opportunity during contingency analysis. Auto-transfer switches are evaluated after each
contingency selection to determine if their unfed load can be switched to another feeder.
For more information on automatic and auto-transfer switches, see "Special switch types and
functions" on page 464.
Switch limit
Sets a maximum number of switching operations to achieve the desired objective. This setting
is for reporting purposes only. If the analysis reaches the limit, it continues to search for
qualified switching operations as usual; however, any operations that exceed the limit are
flagged in the analysis report.
Switch prot. devices
Contingency analysis can operate fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers, and breakers as switchable
devices. Select this check box to have Synergi to consider the switching of protective devices
while developing a recovery plan.
These devices, and also switches, can be individually excluded from consideration during
contingency analysis by selecting the “Don’t allow operation from analysis” check box on the
respective device editor. Or, you can globally exclude all protective devices from analysis by
selecting this option.
Whether used for switching or not, protective devices are evaluated for emergency loading
constraints during switching operations. Device loading exceeding the load limit in the
analysis will disallow a switching operation.
Performing a contingency analysis

The contingency analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected, and may
include adjacent feeders in the switching recovery plan.
In some cases when the analysis is complete, the Switch Plan Manager will appear. You can
use the Switch Plan Manager to select the switch plan that is most appropriate for your model

Analyzing a Model
and then save that plan as a part of the model. For more information on using the Switch Plan
Manager, see "Using the Switch Plan Manager" on page 473.
To perform a contingency analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Contingency Analysis Options editor to select
the contingency analysis method and set other options related to the analysis. For more
information, see "Selecting the contingency analysis method" on page 569.
3. In the Analysis group, click the Contingency icon.
Isolating sections
Within contingency, you can isolate the section with the nearest upstream switchable device
and transfer load downstream from the selected section to neighboring areas. This gives you
the ability to evaluate switching options in Synergi.
To isolate a section
Right click on a section and select Isolate. Use Undo to remove the isolation.
Incremental load analysis

The incremental load analysis increases the amount of load on sections in the model at user-
specified intervals, from an initial load size to a maximum load size. You can evaluate all
sections or only sections with existing loads or dtrans. The analysis will determine at what
level a loading or low voltage exception occurs, or whether each section can accommodate
the maximum load size.
Once this analysis has been run, you can apply the “IncLoadCap: Max_MVA_Load” coloring
scheme to the map display to see what levels of load can be supported in your model.
To set up an incremental load analysis

2. In the Analysis group, select Incremental Load > Settings.
3. Use the Incremental Load Analysis Options editor to configure the analysis settings. The
options that you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
To run an incremental load analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click Incremental load.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Incremental Load Analysis Options
editor.
Maximum load
Maximum additional load that can be connected to any section.

Analyzing a Model
Load power factor

Percent power factor of the additional connected load.
Starting load size
Percent of reserve capacity to be used as the starting additional load to be connected to a
section.
Maximum starting load
Maximum kVA value to be used as a starting additional load.
Increment size
Incremental kVA value to be used to increase the additional connected load.
Only evaluate sections with load or dtrans
Select this check box to only evaluate sections with existing loads or dtrans. Otherwise, all
sections that are currently selected will be evaluated in the analysis.
Use time range
Select this check box to run the analysis over the hours and months that are specified on the
Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor (as described in "Selecting a time
range for time-based analyses" on page 508).
Just profile peaks/mins
Select this check box to only analyze hours that have a peak or minimum for any customer
class curve, customer zone curve, demand curve, irradiance curve, or weather curve. This
option is designed to reduce the analysis time by only performing calculations for hours where
a minimum or maximum may occur.
Peakday/minday and Weekday/weekend
Use these options to select the day type for which the analysis will be run.
Load at Risk analysis

The Load At Risk analysis focuses on the first-level switching operations that can transfer load
from a feeder to its neighboring feeders. The analysis report lists feeder demand and the
switching operations that can be used to transfer load. The first part of the report lists MVA
remaining after each switching operation, and the second part of the report lists the switching
operations and the load and customers that are transferred.
There are no configuration options for this analysis.
To perform a Load at Risk analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click Load At Risk.
Feeder Tie Path analysis

The Feeder Tie Path analysis takes the switches on that feeder that provide tie paths with
adjacent feeders and reports the continuous and emergency reserve values in amps for each

Analyzing a Model
switch under normal operating conditions. It will then look at each switch on the adjacent
feeder that can be used to transfer load to the feeder being analyzed and calculates the load
that would be transferred in amps. You can then assess the switch pairs that offer a transfer
within the reserve capacity available from the switch.
The Feeder Tie Path report lists data for the switching summary, transfer path, and conductor
paths for the feeder.
There are no configuration options for this analysis.
To view the Feeder Tie Path report

2. In the Reports group, click Feeder Tie Path.
Planning
Loading analyses
Load allocation analysis

Load allocation is used to distribute load throughout a model, based on demands specified in
meter devices throughout your model, often at your feeder or subtransformer sources.
Optionally, spot loads and loads at large customers can be updated as well. To accomplish
this, Synergi adjusts all distributed loads so that the total load into sections (downstream
from a meter) after a balanced or by-phase analysis matches the specified demands. The
value of these distributed loads is determined by running a load-flow analysis and then
looking at the differences between the specified demand values and the actual power into the
sections, with the resulting mismatch divided among sections and phases as appropriate.
The following items should be noted:
l By default, load allocation applies to section distributed loads only. Unless specifically
enabled, spot loads and large customer loads are not affected, since they are known
loads at specific points and typically do not need allocation.
l Sections without kVA values (or kWh, if you select allocation based on kWh) do not
receive portions of the allocated loads.
l Losses are included in the allocation since load-flow analysis is used during each
iteration of the allocation.
l Capacitors and generators increase the amount of load that is allocated, since they
supply real and reactive values of power to the feeder.
l Following convergence and allocation completion, you have the option of making the
loads permanent. If you choose not to, a report is still generated, but no changes are
made to the model. If you choose to make loads permanent, all kW and kvar
information in the selected feeders will be replaced.
l In some cases, particularly after a model build, a meter might be placed with no
downstream allocation parameters. When this occurs, these meters will be temporarily

Analyzing a Model
disabled so that the load allocation can run. The Summary chapter in the load allocation
report will show which meters were disabled. Also, the Warnings section of the Run
Summary chapter will explain the problems with these meters.
When to run load allocation

As with most aspects of load modeling, the proper frequency of allocation varies with
individual organizations and users. Generally, allocation should be kept to a logical minimum,
to promote stability and consistency in your models. Some users only allocate once or twice a
year, perhaps when some major update is made to the model. Other users, whose models
may receive daily updates to metered demands, might allocate daily. As a general rule,
remember that allocation makes changes to your models and should be performed only when
you have a justifiable need.
About load allocation demands and meters

In a Synergi model, all demands are specified using meter devices. For load allocation
purposes, you may find it most suitable to model meters directly downstream from your
feeder and subtran sources, because it is common to have metered source demand data for
these locations. In this document, demands are generally treated with an implied assumption
that they are source demands. However, you may put meters anywhere in your model.
For any given section, when load allocation runs, it considers the nearest upstream active
meter as the data source for calculating distributed load, regardless of the meter’s proximity
to the source. In essence, any given meter “owns” the sections downstream from it, until the
topological end or another active meter is encountered. Any section that has no active meter
upstream receives no distributed load during allocation. If a meter’s kW or amp values are set
to zero, then the load allocation analysis will issue a warning. If kW and amp values in all
meters are set to zero, an error will be issued and the analysis will not run.
In the Load Allocation Options editor, you can choose whether to allocate by feeder demands
or by substation transformers. This “Scope for Allocation” option refers to any meters located
directly downstream from the respective sources, which are essentially considered to be
source demands. If you select “Allocate by Feeders,” this has the same effect as turning off
any subtran demand meters, in which case any meters on subtran sections are ignored. On
the other hand, if you select “Allocate by Substation Transformers” and you wish for feeder
demands to be ignored, you must select the “Overridden by upstream meters” option in the
Demands tab of the Meter editor for the feeder demands.
For any given meter, you can also select the “Lock downstream loads” check box in the
Demands tab of the Meter editor. When this check box is selected, Synergi will prevent the
updating of any downstream loads during a load allocation analysis.
If you model both a meter and a primary transformer directly downstream from a subtran
source, the demand data should reflect the metered demands on the secondary of the
transformer. From a topology standpoint, a transformer is always considered closer to a node
than a meter. If you model a subtran meter without the transformer instance, demands
should still represent the secondary, unless the transformer is actually modeled further
downstream.
For more information on modeling meters, see "Meters" on page 433.

Analyzing a Model
Suggested approaches to load allocation

There are many approaches to allocating load. It is recommended that you try various
settings and run different allocations first without making the loads permanent. This way, you
can look at the resulting reports and find an approach to allocation that produces the most
reasonable numbers based on your system and experience.
The following are some suggested approaches.
Scenario Recommendation
You have total values for metered Use balanced allocation.

demands but your section by-phase
information is unreliable.
You have a total values for metered Use by-phase allocation with total demand.
demands and your section phasing is
accurate.
You have by-phase metered demands Use by-phase allocation with by-phase
and accurate section phasing. demands.
You have a total value for metered Use by-phase allocation with by-phase
demands, accurate section phasing, and demands. In your meters, you should
a fairly balanced loading. specify your total demands averaged across
the applicable phases.
Demands format for load allocation

In meter devices, you can specify demands in the following formats:
l Amps/pf
l kVA/pf
For more information on meters, see "Meters" on page 433.
Regulator and capacitor options during load allocation

The handling of switched capacitors and regulators can be set up before starting the allocation
process. The following options are available for each type of device.
l Regulators:
o Maximum tap
o Minimum tap
o Neutral tap
o Controlled by Synergi load-flow
o Hold current tap

Analyzing a Model
l Capacitors:
o Trip modules
o Close modules
o Controlled by Synergi load-flow
o Hold current switch state
Only regulators in automatic mode and switched portions of capacitor installations in

automatic mode are affected by these selections. Synergi never adjusts manual mode
regulators or capacitors.
Regulator and capacitor start options are specified in the Model tab of the Model and Analysis
Options editor. For more information, see "Setting model and analysis options" on page 497.
Load allocation calculations with customer load curves

Time-sensitive load allocation can produce significantly different results than traditional peak
load allocation. These results, in turn, are only useful within an environment of applied load
curves. For more information on load curves, time-of-day, and load allocation, see "Load
curves and load allocation" on page 295.
Other load allocation considerations

The following list describes some additional issues to consider while allocating loads.
l Substation transformers. When allocating with subtrans, the specified demands are
recognized as occurring on the primary of the transformer. If you do not have these
values, you should place a metering point on the section directly following the
transformer, using the known secondary demands.
l Load I,Z,PQ. Section I,Z,PQ values are used during load allocation and can have a
noticeable impact on the results. For more information on I,Z,PQ, see "Load %I, %Z,
%PQ" on page 491.
l Load growth. Load allocation does not consider any kind of load growth, including
growth curves.
l Loops. Load allocation only handles radial models. If tie switches are modeled, they are
treated as open switches during allocation. For more information on loops and loop tie
switches, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on page 343.
l Generators. Synchronous and induction generators are reverted to their corresponding
constant power (PQ) model during allocation. They produce their specified output power
(scheduled percent times rated power) at rated power factor.
Setting up a load allocation analysis
To set load allocation options
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Planning tab.

2. In the Loading group, select Load Allocation > Settings.

Analyzing a Model
3. Use the Load Allocation Options editor to set up the load allocation analysis. The options
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Load Allocation Options editor.
Assignment
Select one of the following load assignment options:
l Ask Before Assigning Loads. Select this option to have Synergi prompt you before
assigning loads to the model. If you select No at the prompt, Synergi will report the
calculation results and not assign any loads.
Note that assigned loads are not permanent until you save the model data.
l Report Only (No Assignment). Select this option to report the calculation results
only and not assign any loads.
Load allocation method
Select one of the following load allocation methods:
l Connected Customers. Select this method to allocate load based on the ratio of a
section’s by-phase connected customers to the by-phase total for upstream metered
demands. For this method, you must have customer values entered.
l Connected kVA. Select this method to allocate load based on the ratio of a section’s
by-phase connected kVA to the by-phase total for upstream metered demands. For this
method, you must have connected kVA values entered in the section records. During the
analysis, Synergi calculates the kW and kvar loads for each section.
l Existing kVA. Select this method to allocate load based on the ratio of a section’s by-
phase existing kVA to the by-phase total for upstream metered demands. For this
method, you must have existing kVA values entered in the section records.
l Existing kW. Select this method to allocate load based on the ratio of a section’s by-
phase existing kW to the by-phase total for upstream metered demands. For this
method, you must have existing kW values entered in the section records.
l KWH. Select this method to allocate load based on the ratio of a section’s by-phase
KWH values to the by-phase total. For this method, you must have KWH values entered
in the section records.
l RUS method. Select this method to allocate loads using the RUS method of allocation
(RUS Bulletin 45-1 and 45-2). This method uses the same iterative process except that
the kW load is calculated by using Factor A and Factor B. Both KWH and customer
values must exist in the section records.
In addition, the following check boxes are available in the Load allocation method section:
Do not update AMI loads
Select this check box to ignore distributed loads on sections where the “Set with AMI” check
box is selected. Synergi will set the “Set with AMI” status automatically when AMI loads are
imported and processed using CMM and Synergi’s AMI Processor tool. The “Set with AMI”
check box can also be selected and cleared by the user.

Analyzing a Model
For more information on AMI load processing, see "Loading AMI data" on page 332.
Update large customer loads
Select this option to allocate kW and kvar load values for large customers during a load
allocation analysis. The large customer load needs to have values for kVA, kWh, or
customers, or existing kW and kvar values. During load allocation, load is distributed to large
customers based on the proportion of these allocation factors to the factors for distributed
loads and spot loads, if enabled.
Update spot loads
Select this option to allocate kW and kvar load values for spot loads during a load allocation
analysis. The spot load needs to have values for kVA, kWh, or customers, or existing kW and
kvar values. During load allocation, load is distributed to the spot loads based on the
proportion of these allocation factors to the factors for distributed loads and large customer
loads, if enabled.
Use capacity factor values
Select this check box to have Synergi use capacity factors during load allocation. For more
information, see "Capacity factors" on page 492.
Scale demands
Use the “Scale demands” area to adjust meter demands toward minimum or maximum
values, which are specified on the Demands tab of the Meter editor for each meter. This
demand scaling feature can be used to run different load allocation analyses within the range
of demands that you would expect to see at the meters.
For more information on setting the minimum and maximum “Allocation scaling” values for a
meter, see "Demands tab – Meter editor" on page 435.
Load power factor
Select the Warn if limits violated check box to have the load allocation analysis generate a
warning if the power factor of a distributed load is outside the specified range. After the
warning is displayed, you will have the option of making the newly allocated loads permanent
or canceling the results. A report will be generated regardless of which option you choose.
A warning will not display if you have the “Report only” option selected as the Assignment
type.
Zero distributed loads
Click the “Zero Dist Loads” button to set the distributed load kW and kvar to zero for the
current year. This can be a useful way to focus on loads from other load types.
Model options
Click the Model Options button to open the Model and Analysis Options editor.
Scope for allocation
Select whether to allocate loads based on feeder demands or subtran demands. Feeder and
subtran demands are specified using meter devices directly downstream from the respective
sources. For more information on how source meters are handled according this setting, see
"About load allocation demands and meters" on page 581.

Analyzing a Model
If you allocate based on subtran demands, you can also choose to Reset Downstream Meters.
If this check box is selected, Synergi automatically updates any downstream meters that are
specified to be “overridden” with new demand information derived through the analysis.
If you allocate based on subtran demands and no substation transformers are selected or
exist in the model, Synergi will allocate by feeder demands instead.
Type of allocation
Select one of the following allocation types:
l By-phase allocation using by-phase demands. Using a by-phase load-flow,
Synergi allocates loads by phase and uses the by-phase demands to proportion values.
l By-phase allocation using total demands. Using a by-phase load-flow, by-phase
loads are determined from the ratio of by-phase information to by-phase upstream
demands. Upstream demands are shifted to be proportional to the total by-phase
allocation parameters such as KWH or kVA.
l Balanced allocation. Using a balanced load-flow, Synergi allocates evenly across all
phases of a line. It also totals specified upstream demands, per meter device.
In addition, select the Maintain load power factor check box to hold the power factor for
allocated loads at the pre-allocation levels.
Capacitor start options
Select the Close switch capacitors at startup check box to close (turn on) any switched
capacitors before the load allocation analysis begins.
Loop options
Select the Disable meters along loop paths check box to disable meters operating within
loops. Meters within loops might cause unexpected allocation results. These meters will
govern some, but possibly not all, of the load allocation within the group.
Distributed generation
Select the Allocate section dist gen values check box to allocate distributed generation
values from a meter to downstream sections. The Default distributed generator type
option specifies the generator type that will be used when performing this allocation.
This option requires that the distributed generation values be specified on the Dist Gen tab of
the Meter editor. When these meter-based values are active and the “Allocate section dist gen
values” option is selected, the Load Allocation analysis will spread the distributed generation
values downstream from the meter. The Load Allocation analysis will set up section
distributed generation in proportion to the c.kVA on the section. A meter will only allocate
distributed generation on the sections between it and the next downstream meter that is set
up for distributed generation.
Performing a load allocation analysis

During allocation, Synergi performs multiple iterations of the following steps:
1. Remove all distributed loads from sections.

2. Run balanced or by-phase load-flow.

Analyzing a Model
3. Calculate .
4. Add to distributed loads.
5. If , repeat starting at step 2.
If balanced allocation is selected, balanced analysis is used. Otherwise, by-phase analysis is

used. The distribution of among sections is dependent on allocation factors for each
section.
To perform a load allocation analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Load Allocation Options editor to select the
configure options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a load
allocation analysis" on page 583.
3. In the Loading group, click the Load Allocation icon.
Forecasting analysis
Synergi’s forecasting analysis can help you determine if your system has the capacity to
provide or buy and deliver the power and energy that customers will be demanding in future
years. Transmission infrastructure must be built to support future demands. Contracts need to
be put into place for future bulk load transfers. Finally, regulating bodies need to be informed
about your plans to support your customers in upcoming years.
Forecasting is important to help evaluate future revenue to ensure the solvency of your
company and financial performance to its stake or stock holders. Investor-owned utilities may
look for ways to attract load. If forecasts look bad then the utility may more aggressively look
for new load. If load projections are not showing adequate growth then the utility may need to
reduce planned expenses.
In addition, planning engineers must ensure that the distribution infrastructure can support
future load. For them, the loading along critical paths during the upcoming years is important.
Forecasting individual load growth within an engineering model is important to doing this.
Engineering analysis is needed to evaluate the ability of the distribution system to deal with
future loads.
To set up your model for forecasting analysis, you must do the following:
1. Create areas of interest for your model. Areas of interest are two-dimensional
geographic entities that you can draw on the Synergi map display to specify anticipated
future distribution load and spot load for your system. For more information, see "Areas
of interest" on page 119.
2. Configure the forecasting analysis options. The Forecast Options editor allows you to
configure a number of settings for the forecasting analysis, including the type of
forecasting agents that you want to run. For more information on setting these options,
see "Setting up a forecasting analysis" on the next page and "Selecting a forecasting
agent" on page 591.

Analyzing a Model
Once these tasks have been performed, you are ready to perform a forecasting analysis on
your model. For more information, see "Performing a forecasting analysis" on page 592.
Additional information on Synergi forecasting is provided in the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Setting up a forecasting analysis

Before a forecasting analysis can be run, you must configure options that control the analysis.
These include selecting a forecasting method, forecast period, and forecast agents, as well as
configuring multi-year modeling options. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
To set forecasting options

2. In the Loading group, select Forecasting > Settings.
3. In the Forecast Options editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes
the options you can edit.
Forecast period Use the “Forecast period” area to select the Start/base
year and the Final year for the forecasting analysis.
Agents The forecasting agent is used to represent the load

growth or decline expectations for a spatially or logically
selected set of sections. Use the “Agents” area to select
one or more forecasting agents for the analysis. A
description of each option is provided in "Selecting a
forecasting agent" on page 591.
Multi-year options Select from the following options:
l Hit growth targets. Select this option if you want

to make sure the growth targets are hit, taking into
account loads that may have already been set up
for future years.
l No reduction in existing loads. Select this
option if you do not want the loads that were
already set to be adjusted by growth. This feature
is particularly useful if you know future load for
certain years or already have estimated load set
for particular years.
Forecast method Select one of the following options:
l One year to next. Select this option to grow

forward year by year in a linear method. For

Analyzing a Model
example, if the base year has 2% growth and the

next year has 3% growth, the 3% growth is added
to the base amount, but not to the base amount
plus the 2% growth amount from the previous
year.
l From base year. Select this option to grow the
load yearly, with loads adding each year. For
example, if the base year has 2% growth and the
next year adds 3% growth, the 3% growth is added
to the base amount plus the 2%.
l Forecast last year and interpolate. Select this
option to forecast the final year growth and
estimate the intermediate years.
Load initialization Use the “Load initialization” area to set load initialization
for each of the following load categories:
l Distributed Loads
l Spot Loads
l Large Customers
l Projects
l Areas of Interest
Initializing loads by copying values forward eliminates

any load change data beyond the base year. This may be
desired for some categories of loads and not desired by
others.
Meters Select one of the following options to specify how meters

are handled during the forecasting analysis.
l Ignore meters. Select this option to ignore

meters when determining growth.
l Create meter agents to allocate load. Select
this option to allocate meter growth during the
analysis.
l Reset meter demand after forecast. Select
this option to reset the meter demand when the
forecast is done.
4. Select the Options tab. The following table describes the options you can edit.

Analyzing a Model
Loads are Use the “Loads are” area to specify when loads are
assumed. All loads are represented at the same point in
the year. The following options are available:
l Beginning of year
l Mid-year
l End of year
Resolve new load Use the “Resolve new load agents” area to specify how a
agents forecasting analysis will prioritize new load versus the
particular growth agent. The following options are
available:
l Before growth agents

l After growth agents
l With growth agents
Spread loads Use the “Spread loads” area to specify how load growth
will be distributed across the area of interest. The
following options are available:
l Proportional to existing load

l Evenly
l Proportional to section length
Update Use the “Update distributed connected loads” area to set

distributed the type of connected loads that you want to update during
connected loads the analysis. The following options are available:
l Connected kVA
l Connected kWh
l Connected customers
5. Select the Script tab. Use the options on the Script tab to create Forecasting scripts
that can be run during the analysis. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To ... Do This ...
Enable forecast Select the Use forecasting script check box.

scripting
Create a forecast a. In the text box located above the New button, type

Analyzing a Model
To ... Do This ...
script the name of the script that you want to create.

b. Click New.
c. Use the Notepad window to type the script. When you
are finished, close Notepad and return to Synergi.
Edit a forecast a. In the list of scripts, select the name of the script
script that you want to edit.
b. Click Edit.
c. Use the Notepad window to edit the script. When you
are finished, close Notepad and return to Synergi.
Delete a forecast a. In the list of scripts, select the name of the script
script that you want to delete.
b. Click Delete.
c. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Selecting a forecasting agent

An agent is used to represent the load growth or decline expectations for a spatially or
logically selected set of sections. Forecasts are achieved by managing growth. Loads are
grouped by location, feed, or characteristics. These groups are managed by an entity called
an agent.
An agent includes a set of specific growth objectives. During the forecasting process, the
agent adjusts loads on the loads within its group until the objectives are met. Loads may be
within the groups of several agents. A load adjusted by one agent may impact the loading in
another group. Agents operate in an iterative process to meet their constraints.
Agents are created for the various areas where the engineer expects to see load growing over
time. For example, if a system is predicted to have 5% overall load growth and 8% growth on
spot loads in one of the feeders, then two agents would be created. The first agent would
manage the overall system growth. The second agent would focus on the spot load growth for
the given feeder. During the forecast, the engineer would see the desired system growth as
well as the expected spot load growth on the feeder.
Forecasting agents are selected in the Settings tab of the Forecasting Options editor, as
described in "Setting up a forecasting analysis" on page 588. The following types of
forecasting agents are available:
l Growth areas. The Growth areas agent manages sections lying within a polygon region
on the map. The agent focuses on growth for everything in the area, based on the
growth settings in the Area of Interest editor. The area of interest type (in the Area of
Interest tab of the Area of Interest editor) must be set to Growth Area.

Analyzing a Model
l Section curves. The Section curves agent manages section load growth curve. The agent
uses the growth curve that is specified in the Zones tab of the Section editor.
l Feeder growth. The Feeder growth agent manages feeder load growth. The agent uses
the growth curve that is specified in the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor.
l Meter growth. The Meter growth agent manages meter load growth. The agent uses the
growth curve that is managed in the Demands tab of the Meter editor.
l Customer zone. The Customer zone agent manages customer zone growth. A section
can be assigned to a customer zone, which is typically assigned spatially or logically
downstream from certain points. The customer zone contains weighted references to up
to three customer class daily load curves. The zone itself can also have growth
information. The agent uses the growth curve set in the customer zone and customer
class editors.
l Substation growth. The Substation growth agent manages substation load growth. The
agent uses the growth curve set in the substation editor.
l Regional total. The Regional total agent manages load according to a selected growth
curve for the entire region (all five load types). The growth curve is selected in the
Settings tab of the Forecast Options editor.
l Regional distrib. The Regional distribution agent manages load according to a selected
growth curve for distributed load across the region. The growth curve is selected in the
Settings tab of the Forecast Options editor, and the distributed loads are set in the Dist.
Growth tab of the Area of Interest editor.
l Regional spot. The Regional spot agent manages the load according to a selected growth
curve for spot loads across the region. The growth curve is selected in the Settings tab
of the Forecast Options editor, and the spot loads are set in the Spot Growth tab of the
Area of Interest editor.
Performing a forecasting analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a Forecasting analysis on your model.
To perform a Forecasting analysis

2. In the Loading group, click the Forecasting icon.
3. When the Forecasting analysis is complete, the Forecast Complete dialog box appears.
Click Yes to make the new loads and demands permanent in the model, or click No to
generate a report of the results only, without committing the analysis results to the
model.
Dtran processing analysis

The DTran processing analysis can be configured to perform the following tasks:
l Calculate distributed load parameters
l Set dtran transformer types

Analyzing a Model
l Report on dtrans and distributed loads

l Generate dtrans from distributed loads
Setting up a dtran processing analysis
To set up a dtran processing analysis

2. In the Loading group, select DTran Processing > Settings.
3. Use the DTran Processing Options editor to set up the analysis. The options that you can
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the DTran Processing Options
editor.
Calculate distributed load parameters
Select this option to sum up distribution transformer values and assign them to the section
distributed load. With this option, Synergi will combine the distribution transformers on a
section and take the total load, customer count, kWh, and so on and apply them to the section
distributed load.
Generate dtrans from distributed loads
Select this option to generate distribution transformers to approximate the total distributed
load on a section. The last option is primarily for internal testing but it can be used to get an
idea of how distribution modeling will work on a system and how applications can be
leveraged. It can also be used to generate distribution transformers for a quick estimate of
secondary losses or min/max customer voltage.
Report on dtrans and distributed loads
Select this option to generate a report that compares DTran totals to values for the respective
distributed loads. The report includes a feeder-by-feeder comparison of values such as c.kVA,
and kW, and number of customers.
Set DTran transformer types
Select this option to have Synergi attempt to find transformers from the equipment
warehouse that match the cKva on the distribution transformer. When matches are found,
Synergi will set the DTran types if no other type is specified.
Performing a dtran processing analysis
To perform a dtran processing analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the DTran Processing Options editor to select the
type of analysis that you want to perform. For more information, see "Setting up a dtran
processing analysis" above.
3. In the Loading group, click the DTran Processing icon.

Analyzing a Model
Design analyses
Capacitor Placement analysis

Synergi’s Capacitor Placement tool helps identify locations to place new capacitors in your
model. The tool can operate under a variety of placement objectives and provides results on a
feeder-by-feeder basis in a clear and concise manner.
Capacitor Placement finds the best sections to place capacitors in a selected feeder, based on
objectives that you specify in the Placement Settings editor. You can temporarily “place” any
recommended capacitor in the model and then re-evaluate the model to determine additional
locations to further improve performance. You can continue placing capacitors and re-
evaluating the model until one of the following occurs:
l The application cannot improve system performance with another capacitor.
l The application has placed the maximum number of capacitors, based on your capacitor
placement analysis settings.
Capacitor Placement always tries to place the largest-size capacitor first, based on the sizes
you selected in the Placement Settings editor. The application then moves sequentially
through the sizes until it reaches the smallest one, or until the maximum number of capacitors
has been placed.
Capacitor Placement only places capacitors that have fixed kvar values. If Synergi places a
new capacitor on a section that already has a capacitor, then the kvar values of the new
capacitor are added to the fixed kvar values of the existing capacitor. Adding kvar in this
manner is necessary because Synergi only allows one capacitor per line section.
Once finished, the list of recommendations is presented in the Synergi Placement Tool editor,
in order of increasing performance, as they were found by Synergi. At this point, Capacitor
Placement has made no changes to your model. Synergi is only presenting its
recommendations, and you may choose to implement them as desired. A separate action is
required to make each temporary placement be a permanent change in your model.
Setting up a Capacitor Placement analysis
To set up a Capacitor Placement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Capacitor Placement.
3. In the Synergi Placement Tool editor, click Settings.
4. Use the Capacitor Placement Settings editor to set up the capacitor placement analysis.
The options that you can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Capacitor Placement Settings
editor.
Add to existing banks only
Select this check box to restrict the Capacitor Placement analysis to only consider sections

Analyzing a Model
that already have capacitors modeled. Selecting this option will temporarily turn off all
existing capacitors before the analysis, and restores the original settings when the analysis is
complete. When a capacitor is already modeled, the kvar of the placed capacitor is added to
the kvar of the existing capacitor.
Limits for placement
Specify length and distance constraints to limit which sections will qualify for placement.
These options may be useful for “stub” or “dummy” sections.
Maximum device power factor
Specify the maximum power factor you want Synergi to accept at the capacitor being placed.
For example, -80% indicates that you are willing to accept a leading power factor of 0.8 or
80%.
Maximum feeder/subtran power factor
Specify the maximum power factor you want Synergi to accept at the feeder or subtran after
a capacitor is placed. For example, -80% indicates that you are willing to accept a leading
power factor of 0.8 or 80%.
Placement sections
Select the phase line type that you want the Capacitor Placement analysis to consider.
Available choices are as follows:
l Only single-phase lines
l Only three-phase lines
l Single or three-phase lines
You can also select the Allow placement on cables check box to consider cables during the
Capacitor Placement analysis.
Sizes
Select the capacitor sizes that you want the Capacitor Placement analysis to consider. The
analysis begins with the largest enabled size and works in a cumulative fashion towards the
smallest, improving the base case further with each placement.
Performing a Capacitor Placement analysis

The following procedure presents how a typical Synergi user might use the Capacitor
Placement tool. Your actions may vary from the steps that are presented here, but the
Synergi Placement Tool editor is flexible enough that it can work in different ways to suit your
particular needs.
Take note that the Capacitor Placement tool by itself never makes permanent changes to a
model. It only makes recommendations, and it is up to you whether to make these
recommendations a permanent change in your model. In your actual system, it will often be
infeasible or impractical to implement all the suggestions that Synergi will make. As such, the
recommendations are provided so that you can make an educated judgment about how many
of the changes should be made.
The Capacitor Placement analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected.
For more information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.

Analyzing a Model
To perform a Capacitor Placement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Capacitor Placement.
3. If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Capacitor Placement analysis
settings. For more information on these settings, see "Setting up a Capacitor Placement
4. In the options list at the top of the Synergi Placement Tool editor, select the feeder that
you want to analyze. The feeder that is associated with the section that is currently set
for analysis is listed by default. Any capacitors that already exist in the selected feeder
will be shown in the In Place list.
If desired, you can also click the Only place downstream from check box to only
recommend capacitor locations that are downstream from the section that is currently
set for analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder selection options list will be
disabled and Synergi will automatically select the feeder that is associated with the
section that is set for analysis.
5. Click Update Recommended List. Synergi will provide a list of suggested sections
where a capacitor may be useful. From the Recommended list, you can do any of the
following:
l Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
l Click Zoom to zoom to the location of a selected section.
l Click the Circles button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended
capacitor locations in the Synergi map display. Recommended capacitor locations
are circled in red, while the capacitor location that is currently selected in the
Recommendations list is circled in green.
You can also use the Percentage text box to specify the percentage of
recommended capacitor locations that you want to show using circles. For
example, if you specify 25% as the percentage, only the top 25% of
recommended capacitor locations will be shown in the map display using circles,
based on the sort order of the Recommendations list. The capacitor locations that
are identified using circles in the map display will update automatically each time
you re-sort the list.
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of suggested
capacitors.
6. In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose capacitor you want to
temporarily add to the model. Click Place.
7. Next to the In Place list, click Refresh to recalculate load flow results based on the
temporary inclusion of the new capacitors. From the In Place list, you can also do any of
the following:
l Click On/Off to turn the capacitor for the selected section on and off.

Analyzing a Model
l Click Edit to open the capacitor editor for a selected section.

l Select Permanent to make the temporary capacitor on a selected section a
permanent part of the model.
l Click Remove to remove a selected section from the In Place list.
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of placed
capacitors.
8. Next to the Recommendations list, click Update Recommended List. Synergi will
provide a new list of suggested sections where a capacitor may be useful, taking into
account the temporary and permanent capacitors that are included in the In Place list.
9. Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional recommended capacitors to the
model, either temporarily or permanently, as required.
10. Take note that Synergi retains the temporary capacitors even when the Placement
analysis is not running. However, they will not be included in the model when a non-
Placement tool is run, such as load flow. You can make a temporary capacitor
permanent to evaluate it with a Synergi application, and then easily remove it again
with the Placement analysis.
Phase Balancing and Load Balancing Improvement

Imbalance in loading leads to imbalance in current flow, which results in higher losses,
overloading, reduced capacity, and voltage problems. To this end, Synergi provides a balance
improvement tool to help identify loads or laterals that can be rephased to achieve the
greatest benefit for a predefined objective. The following balance improvement applications
are available:
l Phase Balancing. Phase Balancing looks for single- and two-phase laterals which can
be rephased to improve feeder balance.
l Load Balancing. Load Balancing looks for spot and/or distributed loads that can be
reconnected to improve feeder balance.
With each successive step during a balance improvement, Synergi focuses on the change that
results in the greatest benefit. Like optimal switching and contingency analysis, balance
improvement relies on an optimization routine that results in a local optimum. The application
only suggests changes that improve the performance of the feeder with respect to the
selected objective.
Phase Balancing Improvement Analysis

During a phase balancing improvement analysis, Synergi suggests single- and two-phase
laterals that can be rephased. The point to be rephased is always the point at which the lateral
connects to its trunk. In your analysis options, you can specify whether you would like Synergi
to consider single-phase laterals, two-phase laterals, or both.
Lateral Option Laterals to Consider
Single-phase laterals l 1-phase laterals fed from 2-phase trunk

Analyzing a Model
Lateral Option Laterals to Consider
l 1-phase laterals fed from 3-phase trunk
Two-phase laterals 2-phase laterals fed from 3-phase trunk
Setting up a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis
To set up a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Phase Balancing.
4. Use the Phase Balancing Settings editor to set up the phase balancing improvement
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Phase Balancing Settings editor.
Keep phases separate
Select this check box to have the analysis keep single-phase laterals separate when
considering balancing options. This option only applies to sections that feed multiple single-
phase laterals of distinct phases.
Laterals
Select the type (phasing) of laterals on which to attempt balancing. Available choices are
Single Phase Only, Two Phase Only, or Both.
Minimum amps
Specify the minimum number of amps for a section to be considered for phase balancing
improvement.
Performing a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis
The following procedure presents how a typical Synergi user might use the Phase Balance
application. Your actions may vary from the steps that are presented here, but the Synergi
Placement Tool editor is flexible enough that it can work in different ways to suit your
particular needs.
Take note that the Phase Balance application never makes permanent changes to a model. It
only makes recommendations, and it is up to you whether to make these recommendations a
permanent change in your model. In your actual system, it will often be infeasible or
impractical to implement all the suggestions that Synergi will make. As such, the
The Phase Balancing Improvement analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently
selected. For more information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.

Analyzing a Model
To perform a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Phase Balancing.
3. If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Phase Balance analysis
settings. For more information on these options, see "Setting up a Phase Balancing
Improvement analysis" on the previous page.
for analysis is listed by default.
If desired, you can also click the Only balance downstream from check box to only
perform the phase balancing improvement for locations that are downstream from the
section that is currently set for analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder
selection options list will be disabled and Synergi will automatically select the feeder
that is associated with the section that is set for analysis.
where a phasing improvement may be useful. The recommended phasing change is
provided in the first column of the list.
From the Recommended list, you can do any of the following:
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of recommended
sections.
l Click the Circle button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended
sections in the Synergi map display. Recommended sections are circled in red,
while the section that is currently selected in the Recommendations list is circled
in green.
recommended sections that you want to show using circles. The Percentage is
based on the sort order in the Recommendations list. For example, if you specify
25% as the percentage, only the top 25% of recommended sections will be shown
using circles, based on the sort order of the Recommendations list. The sections
that are identified using circles in the map display will update automatically each
time you re-sort the list.
6. In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose phasing you temporarily
want to change. Click Place.
temporary phasing changes that have already been placed. From the In Place list, you
can also do any of the following:

Analyzing a Model
l Select Permanent to make the temporary phasing change on a selected section a

permanent change in the model.
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of sections
included in the In Place list.
provide a new list of suggested sections where a phasing improvement may be useful,
taking into account the temporary and permanent changes that are already included in
the In Place list.
9. Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional phasing changes to the model,
either temporarily or permanently, as required.
Load balancing improvement

A load balancing improvement looks for spot and/or distributed loads that can be reconnected
to improve feeder balance. The following options are available for a load balance run:
l Consider distributed and/or spot loads
l Consider one-phase, three-phase, or all spot loads
Setting up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis
Perform the following procedure to set up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis.
To set up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Load Balancing.
4. Use the Load Balancing Settings editor to set up the load balancing improvement
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Load Balancing Settings editor.
Load kVA imbalance > X %
Specify the minimum %kVA imbalance threshold for a section to be considered for load
balancing improvement. Enter a value from 10 to 100%.
Load phasing
Select the load phase for which you want to perform the balancing improvement. Available
choices are Single Phase Only, Three Phase Only, or All Loads.
Load types
Select the type of loads that you want to balance. Available choices are Spot Loads Only,
Distributed Loads Only, or Spot and Distributed Loads.

Analyzing a Model
Minimum kVA
Specify the minimum kVA for a section to be considered for load balancing improvement.
Performing a Load Balancing Improvement analysis
The following procedure presents how a typical Synergi user might use the Load Balance
application. Your actions may vary from the steps that are presented here, but the Synergi
Placement Tool editor is flexible enough that it can work in different ways to suit your
particular needs.
Take note that the Load Balance application never makes permanent changes to a model. It
only makes recommendations, and it is up to you whether to make these recommendations a
permanent change in your model. In your actual system, it will often be infeasible or
impractical to implement all the suggestions that Synergi will make. As such, the
The Load Balancing Improvement analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently
selected. For more information on feeder selection, see"Selecting feeders" on page 68 .
To perform a Load Balancing Improvement analysis

2. In the Design group, click Load Balancing.
3. If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Load Balance analysis
settings. For more information on these options, see "Setting up a Load Balancing
Improvement analysis" on the previous page.
for analysis is listed by default.
If desired, you can also click the Only balance downstream from check box to only
perform the load balancing improvement for locations that are downstream from the
section that is currently set for analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder
selection options list will be disabled and Synergi will automatically select the feeder
that is associated with the section that is set for analysis.
5. For information on setting a section for analysis, see "Setting a section for analysis" on
page 496.
where a load improvement may be useful. From the Recommended list, you can do any
of the following:
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of recommended
sections.
l Click Edit to open the Synergi editor for a selected section.

Analyzing a Model
l Click the Circle button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended
in green.
25% as the percentage, only the top 25% of recommended sections will be shown
using circles, based on the sort order of the Recommendations list. The sections
that are identified using circles in the map display will update automatically each
time you re-sort the list.
7. In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose loading you temporarily
want to change. Click Place.
temporary changes in section loading. From the In Place list, you can also do any of the
following:
l Click Edit to open the Synergi editor for a selected section.
l Select Permanent to make the temporary loading change on a selected section a
permanent change in the model.
l Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of sections
included in the In Place list.
provide a new list of suggested sections where a load improvement may be useful,
taking into account the temporary and permanent changes that are already included in
the In Place list.
10. Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional load changes to the model, either
temporarily or permanently, as required.
Evaluation analyses
Model feeder analysis

The model feeder analysis compares the feeders in your model to a set of defined baseline
values. The goal is to find which actual values in your model exceed the baseline values.
The baseline values are divided into several different categories. For example, the
construction settings define a total length of the feeder, a maximum feeder complexity value,
and a total length of the overhead portion of the feeder. The analysis reports will compare
these baseline values against the actual values that exist in your feeders. Any actual values
that exceed the baseline values will be highlighted in the report.

Analyzing a Model
To set up a model feeder analysis

2. In the Evaluation group, select Model Feeder > Settings.
3. In the Model Feeder Options editor, use the Groups list to define different settings
groups for running model feeder analyses. The group that is selected with a check box
will be the group that is applied when you run the analysis. The group that is selected by
highlighting the group name is the current group whose settings you can view and edit in
the editor.
4. Perform the following tasks to add and delete analysis groups:
a. To add a group to the list, click the + button.
b. To remove a group from the list, select the group (by highlighting the group
name) and click the - button.
5. Use the Model Feeder Options editor to edit the following fields. These values will serve
as a baseline to compare against the actual values that exist in your feeders, with the
goal of finding actual values in your model that exceed the baseline values.
Construction l Total length – Total length of the entire feeder.

l Max complexity – Maximum feeder complexity factor.
l Overhead line – Total length of overhead portion of
the feeder.
Protection l Main length – Length of line having only feeder

breaker protection.
l Fused line – Length of line fed by a fuse.
Capacity l Rated MVA – Rating from the feeder or nearby

breaker.
l Demand – Feeder demand from load-flow analysis.
Switching l Sector load – Maximum load in a switchable sector.

l Sector customers – Maximum number of customers in
a sector.
l Orphan customers – Maximum number of customers
on a lateral with no pickup.
Customers l Total customers – Total customers on the feeder.

l Overhead lateral – Total customers on an overhead
lateral.
l Underground lateral – Total customers on an
underground lateral.

Analyzing a Model
To perform a model feeder analysis

2. In the Evaluation group, click the Model Feeder icon.
Circuit screener analysis

The circuit screener analysis runs over a user-specified hourly time range over a user-
specified range of months. Load-flow results are gathered for this hour-by-hour analysis, and
the analysis finds time points where loading and/or voltage violations occur. The analysis
report includes the number of hours where violations occurred, along with the overall
minimum and/or maximum values.
Setting up a circuit screener analysis

The circuit screener analysis does not have a dedicated editor where you can edit the analysis
settings. Circuit screener analysis settings are controlled through the Time and Weather
Options editor and the Model Settings editor, as described below.
l To specify the hourly range and the month range, use the Time Range tab of the Time
and Analysis Options editor. For more information, see "Selecting a time range for
time-based analyses" on page 508.
l To specify the model exception values for which the analysis will screen for, use the
Exceptions tab of the Model Settings editor. For more information, see "Exceptions
(Loading) tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 497 and "Exceptions (Other)
tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 498.
Performing a circuit screener analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a circuit screener analysis.
To perform a circuit screener analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Time and Weather Options editor and the Model
Settings editor to set parameters for the circuit screener analysis. For more
information, see "Performing a circuit screener analysis" above.
3. In the Evaluation group, click the Circuit Screener icon.
Renewables
Synergi Electric includes several analyses and tools to help you determine the impact of PV on
your model. These include the following:
l PV Analysis. Determine what types of voltage and demand variations occur as random
PV generator outputs change.

Analyzing a Model
l PV Saturation Analysis. Analyzes the impact when PV generation is gradually added to

the model, up to a user-specified saturation level (from 30% to 500%).
l PV Impact Analysis. Analyzes how individual PV generators affect the entire system.
l PV Screener Analysis. Shows when loading and other limits are exceeded on the
analysis section due to the addition of a new PV generator.
l PV Hosting Analysis. Provides several different analysis approaches to help you
determine how much PV capacity you can support at the feeders and subtrans in your
model.
l PV Studies. Compares differences in PV performance when variations are made to the
PV amount, Pct pf, or controller types.
l PV Placement. Helps to determine the best locations for placing PV generators.
l PV Worksheet. Allows you to view all PV devices in one location.
PV Analysis
During a PV analysis, Synergi randomly turns generators on and off and varies their output
during a specified number of analysis cases, to simulate fluctuations in PV generation. For
each case, the analysis evaluates voltages, kW flow, and loading on subs, feeders, and the
distribution system. The minimum, maximum, and average voltage and power flow is tracked
and reported for each applicable facility. The analysis is run for the active time of day, which
is specified in the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.
To set up a PV analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, select Analysis > Settings.
3. Use the PV Analysis Options editor to set up the PV analysis. The options that you can
To perform a PV analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click the Analysis icon.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the PV Analysis Options editor.
Chance generator is on
Percentage of generators that will operate during each trial run in the analysis. The default
value is 80%.
Minimum output and Maximum output
Operating range for the generators that operate during each case in the analysis. The default
range is 40% to 90%.

Analyzing a Model
For example, if you run a PV analysis using the default values of 40% minimum output, 90%
maximum output, and a 20% chance the generators are on, then 20% of the generators will
run for each trial and operate at 40% to 90% of their respective ratings.
Number of trials
Number of analysis cases that Synergi will run. The valid range is from 50 to 1000, with a
default value of 200.
PV Saturation analysis
The PV Saturation analysis removes all PV generation from the model and then gradually adds
back a uniform amount of PV until a user-specified saturation level has been reached (from
30% to 500%). Only specified sections will be considered as potential PV locations for the
purpose of this analysis. (This is set by selecting the “Can host PV” check box on the Section
tab of the Section editor.)
The analysis results show the maximum, average, and minimum levels for key parameters
including section voltage, feeder loading, and line loading. The analysis runs over a range of
hours and days that you select in the Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor.
To set up a PV Saturation analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, select Saturation > Settings.
3. Use the PV Saturation Options editor to set up the PV Saturation analysis. The options
The PV Saturation Options editor also shows the range of hours that will be analyzed.
This range is edited in the Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor. For
more information, see "Selecting a time range for time-based analyses" on page 508.
To perform a PV Saturation analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click the Saturation icon.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the PV Saturation Options editor.
Maximum saturation
Specify the maximum saturation amount to be used in the analysis. The minimum saturation
is fixed at 0%, and the maximum saturation can be between 30% and 500%.
Output type
Select whether you want to view the analysis results in Synergi's grid-style report format or
chart-style report format.
Use distributed load locations
Add PV back into the model at all sections that have distributed loads (since these are

Analyzing a Model
locations where customers likely exist in your model).

Use existing PV locations
Add PV back into the model but only at locations where PV values are currently defined.
PV Impact analysis
The PV Impact analysis shows the impact of PV generators on voltage, loading, taps, and
other performance indicators. The system is first analyzed with a load-flow analysis. Then,
the on/off state of each PV generator is toggled under different scenarios to analyze the
impact on the model. The analysis report shows results for the following conditions for both
normal and light load conditions:
l All PV generators suddenly on and off
l All PV generators gradually on and off (at 20% increments)
l Individual PV generators suddenly on and off
l Individual PV generators gradually on and off (at 20% increments)
Light load conditions are defined in the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor. For
more information, see "Model tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 499.
To perform a PV Impact analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click Impact.
PV Screener analysis
The PV Screener analysis shows at what level, if any, that loading and other limits are
exceeded on a selected section due to the addition of a potential new PV generator. The
analysis runs on the section that is set for analysis for a weekday and weekend over the range
of months and hours that are specified in your Time and Weather Options (as described in
"Selecting a time range for time-based analyses" on page 508).
PV Screener results are presented in both report and chart form. The analysis report
highlights limits that are exceeded in orange (warnings) and red (failures), while the analysis
charts show peak times for various metrics, including maximum and minimum volts and the
maximum conductor, feeder, and transformer loading.
To set up a PV Screener analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, select Screener > Settings.
3. Use the PV Screener Options editor to set up the PV Screener analysis. The options that

Analyzing a Model
To perform a PV Screener analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click the Screener icon.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the PV Screener Options editor.
Hours before failure and Hours before warning
Number of hours where violations can occur over the course of the analysis before a result is
flagged as a failure (red) or a warning (orange) in the analysis report. The total hours with
violations is shown as the “FailHrs” value in the PV Screener report.
For example, if the PV Screener is analyzing more than 1500 hours of data, you may not be
concerned with one or two violations. Larger number of violations, however, likely indicate
real-world problems that you will want to be flagged for your attention.
Maximum LTC deviation
Maximum LTC deviation for the potential new PV generator.
Maximum LTC tap
Maximum LTC tap for the potential new PV generator.
PV MW
Maximum output in MW for the potential new PV generator.
PV Hosting analysis
The PV Hosting analysis provides several different analysis approaches to help you determine
how much PV capacity you can support at the feeders and subtrans in your model. These
approaches are listed below.
l Stochastic analysis. This approach will clear out all PV generation in the model and then
randomly place small and large PV devices back into the model, building over a series
of steps until a user-specified maximum PV generation level is achieved. Only specified
sections will be considered as potential PV locations for the purpose of this analysis.
(This is set by selecting the “Can host PV” check box on the Section tab of the Section
editor.) The process will then start over and repeat itself for a user-specified number of
runs, or profiles.
l Feeder rating. This approach will calculate the hosting capacity of your selected
feeders, based on the feeder rating and minimum daytime load. Before you perform the
analysis, you have the option of updating feeders and subtrans with the calculated
hosting capacity values. These values are on the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor and the
Source tab of the Subtran editor.
l Feeder maximum demand. This approach will calculate the hosting capacity based on
the feeder maximum demand and minimum daytime load. As with the Feeder rating
approach, before you perform the analysis, you have the option of updating feeders and
subtrans with the calculated hosting capacity values.

Analyzing a Model
l Grow PV on each feeder to exception. This approach will gradually add PV generation to
your selected feeders until a voltage or loading exception is reached.
l Section incremental capacity. This approach increases the amount of PV in the model,
based on user-specified values for the initial size, maximum size, and step size. Only
specified sections will be considered as potential PV locations for the purpose of this
analysis. (This is set by selecting the “Can host PV” check box on the Section tab of the
Section editor.) The analysis will determine at what level a loading or voltage exception
occurs, or whether the section can accommodate the maximum PV size.
Once this approach has been run, you can apply the “PV_IncHost: PV_Max_MW” coloring
scheme to the map display to see what levels of PV can be supported in your model.

To set up a PV Hosting analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, select Hosting > Settings.
3. Use the PV Hosting Options editor to set up the PV Hosting analysis. The options that you
can edit are described at the end of this procedure.
To perform a PV Hosting analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click the Hosting icon.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the PV Hosting Options editor.
Approach
Select from one of the following analysis types. Each approach is described in the beginning of
this help topic.
l Stochastic analysis
l Feeder rating
l Feeder maximum demand
l Grow PV on each feeder to exception
l Section incremental capacity
Section incremental capacity settings
Initial PV size, maximum PV size, and increment amount, used for the section incremental
capacity approach.
l Max size as % min upstream rating. Maximum size of PV on a section, limited to a
percentage of the minimum upstream rating and a fixed value entered into the Abs
max size (kW) field.

Analyzing a Model
l Step size as % of initial size. Specifies how much the PV generator will increase in
size for each trial. The step size is based on the initial size of the unit.
l Copy downstream. During the analysis, Synergi will copy a calculated incremental
hosting value to downstream sections that are less than the two specified distances The
first value addresses sections that are rated below a specified amp level, while the
second value addresses sections that are above that specified level.
l Use time range. Select this check box to run the analysis over the hours and months
that are specified on the Time Range tab of the Time and Weather Options editor (as
described in "Selecting a time range for time-based analyses" on page 508). If the
analysis is run from the Synergi ribbon, then the lowest hosting level will be reported. If
the analysis is run from the EA Automation wizard, then the levels for each hour will be
written to a database.
l Just profile peaks/mins. Select this check box to only analyze hours that have a
peak or minimum for any customer class curve, customer zone curve, demand curve,
irradiance curve, or weather curve. This option is designed to reduce the analysis time
by only performing calculations for hours where a minimum or maximum may occur.
l Allocate each hour. Select this option to perform the load allocation for each hour.
This option will consume extra time and should only be used if meter demand profiles
are in place.
l Use DER profile. Select this option to use a DER profile when performing the analysis.
DER profiles are used to calculate a rating for the DER device based on the incremental
capacity and the profile level at a time point. For more information, see "DER profiles"
on page 309.
l Peakday/minday and Weekday/weekend. Use these options to select the day type
for which the analysis will be run.
Stochastic analysis settings
l Percent of units that are smaller DGen type. Percentage chance that a small PV
unit will be selected versus a large PV unit for random placement in the model during
each step of the Stochastic analysis.
The actual size of the small or large unit that is placed is selected based on the
percentages you specify in the “Small Units” and “Large Units” columns.
l PV units per step. Number of PV units (both small and large) that will be randomly
placed in the model for each step of a Stochastic analysis. If you set a value of 5, for
example, then 5 units will be placed in the first step, and 5 additional units will be
placed in the second step, for a total of 10 units, and so on. When the maximum PV
generation level is achieved, the profile ends.
l Number of profiles. Number of times the Stochastic analysis will repeat, placing a
random number of small and large PV units in the model per step for each run.
l PV pnetration per feeder. Llevel of PV that will be added to the feeder to complete a
profile. After a profile is analyzed, the PV is removed and the process begins again.
Update feeder/sub hosting capacity values
For the “Feeder rating” and “Feeder maximum demand” analysis approaches, select this

Analyzing a Model
check box to update feeders and subtrans with calculated hosting capacity values. These
values are on the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor and the Source tab of the Subtran editor.
Use inverter
for the PV generators that will be randomly placed into the model during a Stochastic analysis.
Inverters provide a convenient way to re-use common generator settings in your model.
PV Studies analysis
The PV Studies analysis allows you to compare performance differences when changes are
made to PV input values, including the amount of PV, pct pf and the use of different inverters.
You can configure up to four different cases for the selected input type. The analysis report
will compare the current model settings with the configured analysis cases for each selected
feeder in the model.
To set up a PV Studies analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, select Studies > Settings.
3. Select either PV multiplier, Pct pf, or Inverter and then use the corresponding text
boxes to set up variations that you want to compare in the analysis.
4. Next to the Case names, select the check box for each case that you want to compare in
the analysis.
To perform a PV Studies analysis

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click the Studies icon.
PV Placement
Synergi’s PV Placement tool helps identify locations to place new PV generators in your
model. The tool can operate under a variety of placement objectives and provides results on a
feeder-by-feeder basis in a clear and concise manner.
PV Placement finds the best sections to place PV generators in a selected feeder, based on
objectives that you specify in the Placement Settings editor. You can temporarily “place” any
recommended PV generator in the model and then re-evaluate the model to determine
additional locations to further improve performance. You can continue placing PV generators
and re-evaluating the model until one of the following occurs:
l The application cannot improve system performance with another PV generator.
l The application has placed the maximum number of PV generators, based on your PV
placement settings.

Analyzing a Model
PV Placement always tries to place the largest-size PV generator first, based on the sizes you
selected in the Placement Settings editor. The application then moves sequentially through the
sizes until it reaches the smallest one, or until the maximum number of PV generators has
been placed.
Take note that as you “place” PV generators using the PV Placement tool, you are not making
permanent changes to your model. You are only evaluating Synergi’s recommendations. In
your actual system, it will often be infeasible or impractical to implement all the suggestions
that Synergi will make. Therefore, the recommendations are provided so that you can make
an educated judgment about how many of the changes should be made. Temporary changes
can be removed easily from the “in place” list, and a separate action is required to make each
temporary placement be a permanent change in your model.
Setting up a PV Placement analysis
To set up a PV Placement analysis

2. In the Design group, click PV Placement.
4. Use the PV Placement Settings editor to set up the PV Placement analysis. The options
The following list describes the options you can edit in the PV Placement Settings editor.
Limits for placement
Specify length and distance constraints to limit which sections will qualify for placement.
These options may be useful for “stub” or “dummy” sections.
Maximum feeder saturation pct
Specify the maximum feeder saturation percentage that you want Synergi to accept at the PV
being placed. For example, -80% indicates that you are willing to accept a maximum feeder
saturation percentage of 80%. The default value is 60%.
Maximum section saturation pct
Specify the maximum section saturation percentage that you want Synergi to accept at the PV
being placed. For example, -80% indicates that you are willing to accept a maximum section
saturation percentage of 80%. The default value is 40%.
Placement sections
Select the phase line type that you want the PV Placement analysis to consider. Available
choices are Only single-phase lines, Only three-phase lines, and Single or three-
phase lines.
You can also select the Allow placement on cables check box to consider cables during the
PV Placement analysis.
Sizes
Select the device sizes that you want the PV Placement analysis to consider. The analysis

Analyzing a Model
begins with the largest enabled size and works in a cumulative fashion towards the smallest,
improving the base case further with each placement.
Performing a PV Placement analysis
To perform a PV Placement analysis

2. In the Design group, click PV Placement.
3. If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the PV Placement analysis
settings. For more information on these settings, see "Setting up a Capacitor Placement
for analysis is listed by default. Any PV generation devices that already exist in the
selected feeder will be shown in the In Place list.
If desired, you can also click the Only place downstream from check box to only
recommend PV locations that are downstream from the section that is currently set for
analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder selection options list will be disabled
and Synergi will automatically select the feeder that is associated with the section that
is set for analysis.
For information on setting a section for analysis, see "Setting a section for analysis" on
page 496.
where a PV generator may be useful. Note that the PV Placement Tool only recommends
the placement of stand-alone PV generators; it does not recommend the placement of
section PV generators or large customer PV generators.
From the Recommended list, you can do any of the following:
a. Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
b. Click Zoom to zoom to the location of a selected section.
c. Click the Circles button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended
in green.
25% as the percentage, only the top 25% of recommended PV locations will be
shown in the map display using circles, based on the sort order of the
Recommendations list. The PV locations that are identified using circles in the
map display will update automatically each time you re-sort the list.
6. In the Recommended list, select the name of a section where you want to add a
temporary PV generator to the model. Click Place.

Analyzing a Model
temporary inclusion of the new PV generator. From the In Place list, you can also do any
of the following:
l Click On/Off to turn the PV generator for the selected section on and off.
l Select Permanent to make the temporary PV generator on a selected section a
permanent part of the model.
provide a new list of suggested sections where a PV generator may be useful, taking
into account the temporary and permanent PV generators that are included in the In
Place list.
9. Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional recommended PV generators to the
model, either temporarily or permanently, as required.
Take note that Synergi retains the temporary PV generators even when the Placement
analysis is not running. However, they will not be included in the model when a non-
Placement tool is run, such as load flow. You can make a temporary PV generator
permanent to evaluate it with a Synergi application, and then easily remove it again
with the Placement analysis.
PV worksheet
The PV worksheet is a special Synergi window that lists PV devices in one location. The
worksheet shows basic data for each device, including the phasing, kW output, and on/off
status. The worksheet will also show the total kW value for all devices and individually for
section generators, large customer generators, and generator instances. You can perform a
number of simple tasks from the PV worksheet, including zooming to the location of PV
devices and turning the devices on and off.
To open the PV worksheet

2. In the Distributed Energy Resources group, click Worksheet.
The following list describes the options that are available in the PV worksheet.
Auto
Automatically zoom to each device as you select it in the worksheet list.

Edit
Open the device editor for the device that is selected in the worksheet list.
Just items in map view
Only include items that are currently visible in the Synergi map display.

Analyzing a Model
Open in Excel
Send the list of devices from the worksheet to Excel.

Refresh
Refresh the list of devices. Note that the worksheet will update automatically as you edit
devices and run an analysis. However, you may need to click the Refresh button from time to
time to update the data in the worksheet.
Turn on/Turn off
Turn on or off the device that is selected in the worksheet list.

Zoom
Zoom to the device that is selected in the worksheet list.
Protection
Protective devices
Synergi Electric supports detailed device models for fuses, reclosers, breakers, and
sectionalizers. These devices are supported entirely with instance data; that is, they have no
associated equipment types in the equipment database. If you are licensed to use Synergi
Protection, you also received a separate protection database. This database contains time vs.
current characteristics for over 10,000 devices, used with the Time vs. Current Coordination
(TCC) features of Synergi Protection.
Detailed information on Synergi’s protective devices is provided in the following sections:
l "Breakers" on page 399
l "Fuses" on page 415
l "Reclosers" on page 447
l "Sectionalizers" on page 459
Older Synergi models and some GIS systems may still include “classic” protective devices,
which preceded the detailed device models that were introduced for fuses, reclosers,
breakers, and sectionalizers. Although the classic protective device is still supported in
Synergi, it is strongly recommended that you only use the newer protective devices. The
classic protective devices are general in nature and lack the detailed settings associated with
specific protective devices, which are necessary for coordination analysis and the TCC view.
Also, they are not fully supported by all Synergi applications, particularly in the area of
exception reporting.
The model cleanup application provides commands specifically for protective device
conversion. For more information on model cleanup, see the Synergi Electric Script Guide.

Analyzing a Model
Editing a classic protective device type

the devices in your model. The protective device type defines a number of key options for the
protective devices in your model, such as the voltage rating and phasing.
Like other equipment types, protective device types are used to add new protective devices to
your model. However, as discussed in "Protective devices" on the previous page, it is strongly
recommended that you use the newer protective device types that are available in Synergi,
and not add classic protective devices to your model.
To open the classic protective device type editor

2. Expand Prot Device Types and then double-click the name of the protective device
type that you want to edit.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a classic protective device type.
Current rating
Amperage ratings for the device.
Device kind
Type of device.
Energize and Retire
Minimum pickup
Current rating required to trip the device, and a multiplier if desired.
Phasing
Device phasing.
Voltage rating
Device voltage rating.
Editing a classic protective device

Use the Protective Device editor to edit an existing classic protective device in your model.
To edit a classic protective device
1. In the Synergi map display or model explorer, double-click the protective device that
you want to edit.
2. On the left side of the Protective Device editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available settings for the protective device. The following topics describe the
different tasks that you can perform:

Analyzing a Model
l "Prot Dev tab – Protective Device editor" below

l "Results tab – Protective Device editor" below
Prot Dev tab – Protective Device editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Prot Dev tab of the Protective
Device editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Editing a classic protective device"
Energize and Retire
Location description
Optional descriptive information on the device, for informational purposes only.
Name
Protective device name or ID.
Phasing
Device phasing.
Protective device
Device type. The list contains all protective device types found in your equipment data source,
managed using the Warehouse tab of the model explorer.
Setting
Number that changes the device’s minimum pickup multiplier; then the new multiplier is
applied to minimum pickup, continuous current, and interrupting current for the equipment
specified. A value of 0.000 or 1.000 represents a standard piece of equipment and causes no
change.
Results tab – Protective Device editor

The Results tab in the Protective Device editor provides analysis results for the protective
device. The Results tab can be very helpful if you are running multiple analyses and focusing
on a particular device. Since the settings update automatically with each analysis, you can run
an analysis and watch the results change in real time.
Note that you can configure which results categories are shown by clicking the “R” button in
the top of the editor. Select the check box for each category that you want to view, and clear
the check box for each category that you want to hide. The selections you make here will
apply to all Results tabs in Synergi.
You can also configure the available results categories, and even specific result types, by
using the Editor Results tab in the Output Options editor. The Output Options editor is
described in more detail in "Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab" on
page 509.

Analyzing a Model
For instructions on opening the Protective Device editor, see "Editing a classic protective
device" on page 616.
Check coordination analysis

Synergi’s protection coordination analysis application evaluates the characteristics of fuses,
reclosers, breakers, and sectionalizers, and examines the coordination of these devices
throughout your system. The analysis uses a large rule base to evaluate these devices
independently and relatively. If you want, you can selectively enable and disable individual
rules for analysis. For more information on enabling and disabling rules and the rule base, see
"Setting up a check coordination analysis" on the facing page.
Check coordination analysis verifies overcurrent coordination among protective devices as
well as the protection of transformers. This analysis is performed by breaking a feeder up into
protective device pairs and verifying the proper coordination of each pair. Each protective
device pair is developed from a combination of the following protective device types:
l Expulsion fuse
l Current limiting fuse
l Hydraulic recloser
l Electronic recloser
l Electromechanical relay
l Electronic relay
The application also considers:

l Transformer inrush curves
l Transformer damage curves
For more information on protective device models, see "Protective devices" on page 615.
Please note that the application does not evaluate “classic” protective devices since they lack
detailed time-current characteristics.
This application is designed to provide useful engineering information about coordination
problems or settings problems that may exist among the protective devices in a model.
However, a successful, violation-free run of the application is not a guarantee of proper
system coordination. Check coordination analysis is limited to evaluations based on an
internal rule-base, and cannot account for nuances which may be unique to your system. The
information provided by the analysis is valuable; however, you should use analysis results in
conjunction with your own engineering experience and knowledge of your particular system.
General check coordination operation

The operation of check coordination analysis is simple and direct. The application uses the
following steps:
1. Determine all coordination pairs from the set of protective devices to be analyzed. For
more information on how the analysis set is determined, see "Protection pairs and
check coordinations" on page 638.

Analyzing a Model
2. Find applicable rules for each type of pair.

TIP: You can selectively enable and/or disable individual rules within the rule-base,
using your analysis options. For more information on setting check coordination
options, see "Setting up a check coordination analysis" below.
3. Check each rule from an internal rule-base.
4. Mark each check as a “pass” or “fail.”
5. Generate a report.
The coordination rule-base is extensive and DNV GL welcomes your ideas for expansion for
upcoming releases. For more information on the current rule-base, see "Selecting
coordination rules for a check coordination analysis" on page 622.
Setting up a check coordination analysis
To set up a check coordination analysis

2. In the Analysis group, select Check Coordination > Settings.
3. On the left side of the Check Coordination Settings editor, select from the different tab
names to access the available settings. The following topics describe the different tasks
that you can perform:
l "Editing analysis settings for a check coordination analysis" below
l "Setting time and percentage margins for a check coordination analysis" on
page 621
l "Selecting coordination rules for a check coordination analysis" on page 622
Editing analysis settings for a check coordination analysis
To open the Check Coordination Options editor

3. In the Check Coordination Options editor, select the Settings tab.
Use the Settings tab in the Check Coordination Options editor to select an objective for the
analysis and specify analysis constraints. The following list describes the options you can edit.
Coordinate electronic recloser lockout with relays
Select this check box to coordinate the lockout curve of electronic reclosers with breaker
relays. Clear the check box if you do not want this to occur.
This option must be selected for check coordination rules 23-03, 23-04, and 23-06 to be
applied.
Ignore fuses below X amps
Select this check box to ignore any fuses that are less than a specified Amp rating.

Analyzing a Model
Ignore load calculations

Sets Synergi to ignore coordination rules relating to load current on phase and ground,
including rules 10-01, 10-04, 30-05, 30-06, 60-01, 60-02, and others relating to load. For
more information on coordination rules, see "Selecting coordination rules for a check
coordination analysis" on page 622.
Minimum fault values
When Synergi evaluates the coordination of two devices, it uses a coordination range. This
range extends through the possible fault levels seen at the protecting (downstream) device.
Synergi can calculate the maximum fault level of the range using fault analysis, based on
sequence domain fault models. Or, if the feeder lacks data to run a valid fault calculation,
user-defined fault levels or cutoff amps can be typed into each protective device editor.
Within the analysis settings editor, you can choose whether to have calculated fault amps or
cutoff amps used.
The minimum of the coordination range is the minimum fault current expected at the
protecting device. There are four options for handling minimum fault current:
l Use Percentage of Bolted Fault Amps. Fault analysis is run. Using no fault
impedance, phase and ground faults are evaluated. All devices fed by the protecting
device and no other downstream protective devices are evaluated. The fault current
from each device is propagated and possibly reflected through transformers to the
protecting device. The smallest calculated fault current is multiplied by this percentage
to obtain the range minimum. For the ground range minimum, the maximum ground
current is used because of the bolted fault condition. The phase range minimum uses
the smallest phase fault current.
l Use Percentage of Load Amps. The load current through the protecting device is
multiplied by this percentage value to obtain the range minimum. The phase range
minimum uses phase current and the ground range minimum uses the neutral current.
l Use Fixed Amp Value. A user-defined fixed current is used for both the phase and
ground range minimum. The same minimum is used for all protective device pairs
regardless of the nominal voltage level.
l Use Line-Ground Minimum. Synergi uses the fault impedance specified in the fault
analysis settings or the feeder record to calculate minimum line-ground fault currents.
All devices fed by the protecting device and no other downstream protective devices are
evaluated. The fault current from each device is propagated and possibly reflected
through transformers to the protecting device. The smallest calculated line-ground fault
current is selected for both the phase and ground range minimum.
Report failed tests only
Limits the analysis report to failed tests only.
Use K-shifted curves
Sets Synergi to shift curves based on fuse heating and K-factor shifting.
Use user-defined cutoffs
Sets Synergi to use cutoff values specified in the device editors.

Analyzing a Model
Setting time and percentage margins for a check coordination analysis

In the Margins tab of the Check Coordination Options editor, you can set the time and
percentage margins for each type of protection pair. To change a margin value, double-click
the number and type a new value. For more information on the various types of pair
combinations, see "Protection pairs and check coordinations" on page 638. Default margins
are described after the procedure below.
Margin settings do not change between Synergi sessions. Once you have them properly
configured, you should be able to run continuous analyses without having to adjust them
again, unless you purposefully need to make a change.
To set time and percentage margins for a check coordination analysis

3. In the Check Coordination Options editor, select the Margins tab.
4. Use the table in the Margins tab to set the time and percentage margins for each type of
protection pair. To change a margin value, double-click the number and type a new
value.
TIP: Click the column heading for “Margin” or “Value” to sort the margin list.
Check coordination margins

Coordination time margins can be specified for the types of devices in a device pair. Usually,
the margins are in a “percent” format. In some cases, the margin is specified in seconds.
Some pairs, like relay-fuse pairs, have margins specified in seconds and percent. Fuse
minimum fault pickup is specified in amps.
Your copy of Synergi included default values for each of these margins, as shown below. You
can edit these at any time, within the analysis settings editor. For more information on
changing these margins, see "Setting up a check coordination analysis" on page 619.
Devices Default Time Margins Rule

Group
Percent Seconds
Fuse minimum fault pickup (amps) 220% --- 10-
Fuse maximum load margin 90% --- 10-
Fuse protecting fuse 75% --- 11-
Fuse protecting recloser 95% --- 12-

Analyzing a Model
Devices Default Time Margins Rule

Group
Percent Seconds
Fuse protecting relay -- 0.3 Sec 13-
Fuse protecting transformer 75% --- 15-
Recloser protecting fuse 90% --- 21-
Recloser protecting recloser 75% --- 22-
Recloser protecting relay 75% --- 23-
Recloser protecting transformer 75% --- 25-
Relay protecting fuse 50% 0.3 Sec 31-
Relay protecting recloser 75% --- 32-
Relay protecting relay 75% 2.0 Sec 33-
Relay protecting transformer 75% --- 35-
Transformer inrush/fuse 75% --- 51-
Transformer inrush/recloser 75% --- 52-
Transformer inrush/relay 75% --- 53-
Selecting coordination rules for a check coordination analysis

In the Rules tab of the Check Coordination Options editor, you can select which coordination
rules you want Synergi to check during analysis, and also set the priority for each enabled
rule: high, medium, or low. Refer to the following procedure for more information. A
description of each coordination rule follows the procedure.
To select coordination rules for a check coordination analysis

3. In the Check Coordination Options editor, select the Rules tab.
4. Use the check boxes in the Rules tab to select each check coordination rule that you
want to enable.
Check coordination rules

Analyzing a Model
The table below describes the rule base that is used by the Check Coordination Analysis. Each
rule uses a prefix based on the type(s) of devices that make up the pair. For more information
on protection pairs and rule prefixes, see "Protection pairs and check coordinations" on
page 638.
Rule Protecting Protected Margin Description
10-01 Fuse --- --- Check load current. Fuse should

not blow under possible load
current. Fuse rating must be
greater than maximum
continuous load current.
10-02 Fuse --- C% Pickup phase faults. Fuse should

(220%) detect phase fault current in its
zone. Minimum phase fault
current seen by the fuse should
be greater than C% of fuse amp
rating.
10-03 Fuse --- C% Pickup ground faults. Fuse should

(220%) detect ground fault current in its
zone. Minimum ground fault
current seen by fuse should be
greater than C% of fuse amp
rating.
10-04 Fuse --- T% (90%) No damage from load current.

Fuse link should not be pre-
damaged by load current. The
fuse link should not experience
load current within T% of its
minimum melt curve.
10-05 Fuse --- --- Check for valid curves. Fuse

should have minimum melt and
maximum clear curves.
11-01 Fuse Fuse T% (75%) Protected link not damaged by

phase faults. Protecting link will
interrupt and clear fault before
protected link is damaged.
Maximum clearing time of
protecting link should not exceed
T% of the minimum melting time
of the protected link. This rule
generally accounts for the effects

Analyzing a Model
of temperature variation, TCC

tolerances, pre-loading, and pre-
damage.
11-02 Fuse Fuse T% (75%) Protected link not damaged by

ground faults. Same as rule 11-
01. Checks coordination for
ground fault range.
11-03 Fuse Fuse --- Use 1^2*t curves for

coordinating current limiting
fuses. I2t curves should be used
to coordinate current-limiting
protecting current-limiting fuse
pairs below 0.01 seconds.
12-01 Fuse Recloser T% (95%) Fuse melt above recloser fast

phase. Protecting fuse minimum
melt curve should lie above the
recloser fast curve by a margin
of T%.
12-02 Fuse Recloser T% (95%) Fuse melt above recloser fast

ground. Rule 12-01 applied to
ground faults.
12-03 Fuse Recloser T% (95%) Fuse melt below recloser slow

phase. Protecting fuse maximum
clear curve should lie below the
recloser slow curve by a margin
of T%.
12-04 Fuse Recloser T% (95%) Fuse melt below recloser slow

ground. Rule 12-03 applied to
ground faults
13-01 Fuse Relay S (0.3 Sec) Fuse below relay phase.

Protecting fuse should blow on
downstream faults. Fuse
maximum-clear curve should lie
below the relay curve over the
coordination interval with a
margin of S seconds. This rule
will fail if the fuse curve crosses
the relay curve in the protection

Analyzing a Model
interval.
13-02 Fuse Relay S (0.3 Sec) Fuse below relay ground. Rule
13-01 applied to ground faults.
This rule will fail if the fuse curve
crosses the relay curve in the
protection interval.
13-03 Fuse Relay T% (75%) Fuse below relay phase.

Protecting fuse should blow on
downstream faults. Fuse
maximum-clear curve should lie
below the relay curve over the
coordination interval with a
margin of T%.
13-04 Fuse Relay T% (75%) Fuse below relay ground. Rule

15-01 Fuse Tran T% (75%) Protecting fuse link will not allow
transformer to be damaged.
Transformer damage curve
should lie above protecting fuse
maximum clear curve by a
margin of T%.
15-02 Fuse Tran T% (75%) Rule 15-01 applied to ground

faults.
20-01 Recloser --- --- Interrupt phase faults. Reclosers

should not experience fault
levels beyond their interrupt
rating.
20-02 Recloser --- --- Interrupt ground faults. Rule 20-

01 applied to ground faults.
20-03 Recloser --- --- Pickup phase faults. Minimum

fault level seen by a recloser
should exceed its minimum
pickup. Minimum fault current
must be greater than the
recloser minimum pickup.
20-04 Recloser --- --- Pickup ground faults. Rule 20-03

Analyzing a Model
applied to ground faults.
20-05 Recloser --- --- Fast phase below slow. Fast

curve should lie below slow
curve. A faster curve should be
selected for the fast operation
than for the slow operation. This
check is made for phase and
ground curves.
20-06 Recloser --- --- At least one phase operation. A

recloser should have at least one
fast or one time-delay operation
selected.
20-07 Recloser --- --- Curves exceed min phase fault.

Largest amp value on recloser
phase operation curve should
exceed minimum fault current.
20-08 Recloser --- --- Curves exceed min ground fault.

Rule 20-08 applied to ground
curves.
20-09 Recloser --- --- Pickup below minimum phase

fault. Recloser fast or slow phase
operation curves should pick up
below maximum fault amps.
20-10 Recloser --- --- Pickup below minimum ground

fault. Rule 20-08 applied to
ground curves.
20-11 Recloser --- --- Phase fault within curves.

Maximum fault current must not
exceed the recloser phase
operation curves.
20-12 Recloser --- --- Ground fault within curves. Rule

20-11 applied to ground curves.
20-13 Recloser --- --- Recloser should have phase or

ground curves.

Analyzing a Model
21-01 Recloser Fuse T% (90%) Fuse above full sequence.

Protected fuse should not be
damaged throughout the entire
operating sequence of the
recloser. Fuse minimum-melt
curve should lie above the K-
shifted recloser curve by a
margin of T%. If the “Use K-
shifted curves” isn’t checked in
the Settings, then this rule will
analyze the cumulative curves
(sum of curve operations)
instead. In the case of hydraulic
reclosers, coordination is only
checked within the capabilities of
the recloser curves. Fault levels
past the recloser curves are not
considered.
21-02 Recloser Fuse T% (90%) Fuse above full sequence. Rule

22-01 Recloser Recloser — Fast protecting operations match

protected. The number of fast
operations of the protecting
recloser should be the same or
greater than the protected
recloser.
22-02 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Time delayed phase curves

should coordinate. The protecting
recloser should operate its slow
curve without the protected
recloser tripping on its slow
curve. The protecting recloser’s
slow curve should lie below the
protected recloser’s slow curve
by a margin of T%.
22-03 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Time delayed ground curves

should coordinate. Rule 22-02
applied to ground curves.
22-04 Recloser Recloser S (0.3 Sec) Time delayed phase curves

Analyzing a Model
should coordinate. The protecting

recloser tripping on its slow
curve. The protecting recloser’s
slow curve should lie below the
protected recloser’s slow curve
by a margin of S seconds.
22-05 Recloser Recloser S (0.3 Sec) Time delayed ground curves

should coordinate. Rule 22-04
applied to ground curves.
22-06 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Phase lockout curves should

coordinate. The protecting
recloser should operate to
lockout without the protected
recloser tripping on its lockout
curve (that is, it looks at the
cumulative curve). The
protecting recloser’s total clear
curve should lie below the
protected recloser’s total
response time by a margin of
T%.
22-07 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Ground lockout curves should

coordinate. Rule 22-06 applied to
ground curves.
22-08 Recloser Recloser S (0.3 Sec) Phase lockout curves should

recloser should operate to
lockout without the protected
recloser tripping on its lockout
curve (that is, it looks at the
cumulative curve). The
protecting recloser’s total clear
protected recloser’s total
response time by a margin of S
seconds.
22-09 Recloser Recloser S (0.3 Sec) Ground lockout curves should

coordinate. Rule 22-08 applied to

Analyzing a Model
ground curves.
22-10 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Ground lockout curves should

phase curve without the
protected recloser tripping on its
fast or slow ground curve. The
protecting recloser’s slow phase
protected recloser’s fast or slow
ground curve by a margin of T%.
The 22-10 rule will not be used if
the upstream or downstream
ground is disabled (respective to
the particular rule) on the
recloser.
22-11 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Delayed ground curves and

upstream phase. The protecting
ground curve without the
protecting recloser’s slow ground
ground curve by a margin of T%.
recloser.
22-12 Recloser Recloser S (0.3 Sec) Ground lockout curves should

phase curve without the
protecting recloser’s slow phase
ground curve by a margin of S.

Analyzing a Model

recloser.
22-13 Recloser Recloser S (75%) Delayed ground curves and

upstream phase. The protecting
ground curve without the
protecting recloser’s slow ground
ground curve by a margin of S.
recloser.
22-14 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Fast phase with upstream fast

phase. The protecting recloser
should operate its fast phase
recloser tripping on its fast
ground curve. The protecting
recloser’s fast phase curve
should lie below the protected
recloser’s fast ground curve by a
margin of T%. The 22-14 rule
will not be used if the upstream
or downstream ground is
disabled (respective to the
particular rule) on the recloser.
22-15 Recloser Recloser T% (75%) Fast ground with upstream fast

ground. The protecting recloser
should operate its fast ground
recloser tripping on its fast
ground curve. The protecting
recloser’s fast ground curve

Analyzing a Model

recloser’s fast ground curve by a
margin of T%. The 22-15 rule
will not be used if the upstream
or downstream ground is
disabled (respective to the
particular rule) on the recloser.
23-01 Recloser Relay T% (75%) Slow recloser operation. The

protecting recloser should
operate to lockout without
tripping the protected relay. The
protecting recloser t.d. curve
relay curve by a margin of T%.
23-02 Recloser Relay T% (75%) Slow recloser ground operation.

curves.
23-03 Recloser Relay — Phase lockout below protected

phase. Protecting recloser should
operate to lockout without
tripping the protected relay.
Note that the “Coordinate
electronic recloser lockout with
relays” option must be selected
in the Settings tab of the Check
Coordination Options editor in
order for this rule to be applied.
23-04 Recloser Relay — Ground lockout below protected

ground. Similar to 23-03 except
with the ground capabilities of
both devices.
23-05 Recloser Relay — TD operation below relay ground.

Protecting recloser should

Analyzing a Model
operate its slow phase curve

without tripping the ground curve
of the protected relay.
23-06 Recloser Relay — Lockout operation below relay

ground. Protecting recloser
should operate its cumulative
phase curve without tripping the
ground curve of the protected
relay.
23-07 Recloser Relay S Fast ground below relay ground.

(0.05 Sec) Recloser fast ground curve
should lie below the fastest relay
ground curve by a margin of S
seconds.
23-08 Recloser Relay S Fast phase below relay ground.

(0.05 Sec) Recloser fast phase curve should
lie below the fastest relay ground
curve by a margin of S seconds.
23-09 Recloser Relay S Fast ground below relay phase.

(0.05 Sec) Recloser fast phase curve should
lie below the fastest relay phase
curve by a margin of S seconds.
25-01 Recloser Tran T% (75%) Slow phase below frequent fault.

Protecting recloser phase curve
will not allow transformer to be
damaged. Transformer damage
curve should lie above protecting
recloser phase curve by a margin
of T%.
25-02 Recloser Tran T% (75%) Slow ground below frequent

fault. Rule 25-01 applied to
ground faults.

Analyzing a Model
30-01 Relay — — Interrupt phase faults. Breakers

should not experience fault
levels beyond their interrupt
rating. Maximum fault current
must not exceed the breaker
interrupt rating.
30-02 Relay — — Interrupt ground faults. Rule

30-03 Relay — — Pickup minimum phase faults.

Minimum fault level seen by
phase relay should exceed its
minimum pickup.
Minimum pickup value is
determined from all phase /
ground relays; reclosing or not.
If the breaker lacks a valid non-
reclosing curve, the rule is
marked as an invalid check and
will not be listed.
30-04 Relay — — Pickup minimum ground faults.

faults.
30-05 Relay — — Load amps below pickup. Phase

relay should not trip under load
current.
This min pickup is used against
available load current at the
protective device. If the breaker
lacks a valid non-reclosing
curve, the rule is marked as an
invalid check and will not be
listed.
30-06 Relay — — Neutral amps below pickup.

Ground relay should not trip
under neutral load current.

Analyzing a Model

This min pickup is used against
available load current at the
protective device. If the breaker
lacks a valid non-reclosing
curve, the rule is marked as an
invalid check and will not be
listed.
30-07 Relay — — Relay settings within range.

Relay time dial or time multiplier
setting must be within the range
dictated by available curves.
Synergi should find a matching
curve or should be able to
interpolate between two curves
to generate the relay
characteristic curve.
30-08 Relay — — Relay settings within range. Rule

30-07 applied to ground relays.
30-09 Relay — — Breaker has phase or ground

relay. Breaker should have
phase or ground relay curves.
31-01 Relay Fuse T% (50%) Fuse below relay phase.

damaged by faults beyond the
relay. To coordinate, the fuse
minimum-melt curve should lie
above the relay curve by a
margin of T% over the
coordination interval.
31-02 Relay Fuse T% (50%) Fuse below relay ground. Rule

31-03 Relay Fuse S (0.3 Sec) Fuse below relay phase.

damaged by faults beyond the
relay. To coordinate, the fuse
minimum-melt curve should lie

Analyzing a Model
above the relay curve by a

margin of S seconds over the
coordination interval.
31-04 Relay Fuse S (0.3 Sec) Fuse below relay ground. Rule
32-01 Relay Recloser T% (75%) Phase below recloser lockout.

The protecting relay should trip
before the protected recloser
operates to lockout. The relay
phase curve should lie below the
recloser total clear curve by a
margin of T%.
32-02 Relay Recloser T% (75%) Ground below recloser lockout.

faults.
33-01 Relay Relay T% (75%) Protecting phase below

protected. Protecting relay will
trip and clear fault before
protected relay trips. Protecting
relay curve should not exceed
the protected relay curve by a
margin of T%.
33-02 Relay Relay T% (75%) Protecting ground below

protected. Rule 33-01 applied to
ground faults.
33-03 Relay Relay S (2.0 Sec) Protecting phase below

protected. Protecting relay will
trip and clear fault before
protected relay trips. Protecting
and protected relays should
maintain an S second margin.
33-04 Relay Relay S (2.0 Sec) Protected ground below

protected. Rule 33-03 applied to
ground faults
35-01 Relay Tran T% (75%) Freq. fault above phase relay.

Protecting relay phase curve will
not allow transformer to be

Analyzing a Model
damaged. Transformer
infrequent fault damage curve
should lie above protecting relay
phase curve by a margin of T%.
35-02 Relay Tran T% (75%) Freq. fault above ground relay.

faults.
40-01 Sctnlzr — — Sectionalizer has recloser. A

sectionalizer should have an
upstream recloser. Sectionalizer
should have recloser along feed
path.
51-01 Tran Fuse T% (75%) Inrush does not damage fuse.

Feeding fuse link will not be
damaged by transformer inrush
current. Transformer inrush
feeding fuse minimum-melt
curve by a margin of T%.
51-02 Tran Fuse T% (75%) Clear curve below damage.

Feeding fuse link should protect
the transformer. Fuse max clear
transformer damage curve by a
margin of T%.
52-01 Tran Recloser T% (75%) Inrush does not lockout recloser.

Feeding recloser will not operate
to lockout by transformer inrush
current. Transformer inrush
recloser t.d. curve by a margin
of T%.
52-02 Tran Recloser T% (75%) Inrush does not trip fast curve.
Feeding recloser fast operation
will not occur from transformer
inrush current. Transformer
inrush curve should lie below the
recloser fast curve by a margin
of T%.

Analyzing a Model
52-03 Tran Recloser T% (75%) Lockout below damage curve.

Feeding recloser should protect
the transformer. Recloser phase
lockout curve should lie below
the transformer damage curve
by a margin of T%.
53-01 Tran Relay T% (75%) Inrush does not trip breaker

relay. Feeding relay will not trip
from transformer inrush current.
Transformer inrush curve should
lie below the relay phase curve
by a margin of T%.
53-02 Tran Relay T% (75%) Phase relay below damage.

Feeding breaker should protect
the transformer. Phase relay
transformer damage curve by a
margin of T%.
60-01 Any — — Detectable phase fault zones.

Zone fault at a protective device
should be detectable. The load
current through a protective
device should not exceed the
minimum fault current of any
device fed by that protective
device. If this rule is not met, a
downstream protective device
may be necessary to reduce the
zone.
60-02 Any — — Detectable ground fault zones.

Zone fault at a protective device
should be detectable. The neutral
load current through a protective
device should not exceed the
minimum ground fault current of
any device fed by that protective
device. If this rule is not met, a
downstream protective device
may be necessary to reduce the
zone.

Analyzing a Model
Protection pairs and check coordinations

Synergi uses a concept of protective device pairs when performing coordination checks. An
upstream (protected) device will form coordination pairs with any and all downstream
devices. Synergi evaluates each pair and reports on the coordination results.
Sample feeder and pairs—Check coordination example

As an example, consider the following feeder.
4 5
F 1 2 3
6
Feeder serving a load through a transformer
The following coordination pairs are generated.
Pair Protecting Protected

device device
A 2 protecting 1
B 3 protecting 2
C 3 protecting 1
D 6 protecting 3
E 6 protecting 2
F 6 protecting 1
G 4 protecting 3
H 4 protecting 2
I 4 protecting 1
J 5 protecting 4
K 5 protecting 3
L 5 protecting 2
M 5 protecting 1
All pairs look past sectionalizers when considering the fault zone. Sectionalizers are not
interrupting devices and should not affect the fault zone of an upstream device. The minimum
fault current for a protective device is found from the minimum fault current of all

Analyzing a Model
downstream sections (propagated through necessary transformers) that are not fed by other
downstream protective devices, unless those downstream protective devices are electrically
at the given device.
Pair types and rule prefixes—Check coordination

Coordination rules use a numbering scheme help manage the wide variety of pair
combinations and relate them to the particular margins and rules used in the application.
These numbers, as shown below, are combined into prefixes based on the pair type. Each rule
uses one of these prefixes for organization.
1 Fuse
2 Recloser
3 Relay
4 Sectionalizer
5 Transformer
6 General
For example, rules and margins for a fuse protecting a recloser would use the prefix “12-” (1-
fuse, 2-recloser). In general, the numbers in the prefixes are in the order of
protecting/protected. If a rule pertains to a particular isolated device, the “protected” value
would be zero. For example, a rule for an isolated fuse would be prefixed with “10-”.
There are general and specific rules that are applied to the different combination of devices
making up a coordination pair. The coordination pairs recognized by Synergi are as follows.
Protected device Protecting device
All Fuse Recloser Relay Sctzlr Trans
None 60- 10- 20- 30- 40- X
Fuse X 11- 21- 31- X 51-
Recloser X 12- 22- 32- X 52-
Relay X 13- 23- 33- X 53-
Sectionalizer X X X X X X
Transformer X 15- 25- 35- X X

Analyzing a Model
Running check coordination analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a check coordination analysis. Note that check
coordination analysis can be run from the map display or from a TCC view with or without
devices selected. The protective devices to be included in the analysis are determined as
follows:
l Map display. All protective devices on the map are considered. All observable
combinations of protective devices are evaluated.
l TCC view with no devices selected. All protective devices belonging to the selected
feeders are considered. All observable combinations of protective devices are
evaluated.
l TCC view with devices selected. Only combinations of the selected devices are
evaluated. Coordination between selected devices and other devices on the model is not
evaluated.
To run a check coordination analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Check Coordination Settings editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a check
coordination analysis" on page 619.
3. In the Analysis group, click the Check Coordination icon.
Coordination range of fault levels—Check coordination

When Synergi evaluates the coordination of two devices, it uses a coordination range. This
range extends through the possible fault levels seen at the protecting (downstream) device.
Synergi can calculate the maximum fault level of the range using fault analysis, based on
sequence domain fault models. Or, if the feeder lacks data to run a valid fault calculation,
user-defined fault levels or cutoff amps can be typed into each protective device editor.
Within the analysis settings editor, you can choose whether to have calculated fault amps or
cutoff amps used.
The minimum of the coordination range is the minimum fault current expected at the
protecting device. There are four options for handling minimum fault current. For more
information on setting this option, see "Setting up a check coordination analysis" on page 619.
l Line-ground minimum fault current. Synergi uses the fault impedance specified in
the fault analysis settings or the feeder record to calculate minimum line-ground fault
currents. All devices fed by the protecting device and no other downstream protective
devices are evaluated. The fault current from each device is propagated and possibly
reflected through transformers to the protecting device. The smallest calculated line-
ground fault current is selected for both the phase and ground range minimum.
l Percentage of bolted fault. Fault analysis is run. Using no fault impedance, phase
and ground faults are evaluated. All devices fed by the protecting device and no other
downstream protective devices are evaluated. The fault current from each device is

Analyzing a Model
propagated and possibly reflected through transformers to the protecting device. The
smallest calculated fault current is multiplied by this percentage to obtain the range
minimum. For the ground range minimum, the maximum ground current is used
because of the bolted fault condition. The phase range minimum uses the smallest
phase fault current.
l Percentage of load current. The load current through the protecting device is
multiplied by this percentage value to obtain the range minimum. The phase range
minimum uses phase current and the ground range minimum uses the neutral current.
l Use fixed current. A user-defined fixed current is used for both the phase and ground
range minimum. The same minimum is used for all protective device pairs regardless of
the nominal voltage level.
Cases not checked—Check coordination

This section lists known cases that are not checked by Synergi. Many of these cases require
additional data that is not handled by Synergi.
The computer analysis relies solely on the rule-base in the previous section. If you find a need
for an expansion of those rules, please contact DNV GL with your suggestions or concerns.
Keep in mind that protective device coordination is complex and in many cases requires
human judgment. You should always couple analysis results with your own knowledge and
experience.
Ground curve tripping from the inrush of a single- phase transformer

Single-phase transformers have inrush currents that look like a line-ground fault to upstream
protective devices. Reclosers and relays equipped with ground units may trip on a real feeder
with sufficient transformer inrush. Synergi does not check the coordination of protective
device ground curves with transformer inrush curves.
Curve shifting through transformers

For detailed information on curve shifting through transformers, see the Synergi Electric
Coordination over non-overlapped ranges

In some cases, the coordination range of a device pair may correspond to an amp range in
which the devices do not overlap. In the following example, an S&C 65A-Slow SMU-20 fuse
serves a transformer and a low side Kearney 65A T-Link fuse. The source, transformer, and
line impedances are such that the maximum fault current seen by the secondary fuse is about
1800A. The following is the TCC shown with L-G fault shifting to the secondary fuse.

Analyzing a Model

Analyzing a Model

Analyzing a Model
Fuse curves on secondary side
You can see that there is no overlap in the amp ranges of either curve. Synergi treats this as a
mis-coordination.
Protection evaluation analysis

The protection evaluation analysis is similar to the check coordination analysis but focuses
more on interrupting capacity, fault duty, and interrupting time. It has less focus on the
relationship between coordinating devices.
To perform a protection evaluation analysis

2. In the Analysis group, click Protection Evaluation.
Arc flashover
Arc flashover deals with the energy produced from a fault and its upstream coordination of
protecting equipment. Synergi’s arc flashover application analyzes the safe working
distances, estimated arc fault amps, incident energy, and recommended PPE for clothing.
Synergi’s will make suggestions for safety clothing to wear during maintenance, and can also
produce printable safety labels with safe working distance values, to be placed on equipment.
Arc flashover can be run on selected feeders, a query set, or a selected section with a device.
Arc flashover values can also be calculated and drawn on the TCC graph, as described in
"Adding notes to the TCC" on page 666.
Additional information on arc flashover is provided in the Arc Flashover chapter of the Synergi
Arc flashover overview

Arc flashover is the passage of current between two electrodes through ionized gases and
vapors. The electrical energy supplied to the arc is converted into other forms of energy and
results in intense heat. The extremely high temperatures of these arcs can cause fatal burns
at about 5 feet and major burns at up to a 10-foot distance from the arc. The intensity of an
arc depends on voltage, fault current, clearing time of protective device, enclosure space, and
so on. Arc flashover is primarily found in circuits with an operating voltage of 208V and higher
in commercial and industrial facilities.
Electric arc burns make up a major portion of injuries related to electric malfunctions. Arc
flashover standards by IEEE and National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) are a result of the
industry efforts to protect employees from arc flashover hazards. Most of the incidents could
be prevented or their intensity significantly reduced if the employees wore the proper type of
clothing or were forewarned of safety hazards. IEEE and NFPA standards now require
switchboards, panel boards, and motor control centers to be individually field-marked with
arc flashover warning labels that also specify the protective clothing and the arc flashover
boundary distance.

Analyzing a Model
Arc flashover calculations form the basis to develop strategies to minimize burn injuries.
These strategies can include specifying the rating of personal protective equipment (PPE),
working de-energized, using arc-resistant switchgear, or applying other engineering
techniques and work practices.
The calculation for the arc flashover analysis in Synergi is based on IEEE standard 1584-2002.
Arc fault calculations are performed for all sections and devices in the selection set. Labels
can be generated for the devices right from Synergi.
IEEE and NFPA standards specify that flash-protection boundary, working distance, and
incident energy should be prominently displayed on every piece of electrical equipment where
an arc flashover hazard exists.
Disclaimer
The data and the information are believed to be correct in the program and the
documentation. However, any and all liability, for the content and any omissions including any
inaccuracies, errors, or misstatements in data, calculations, or information is expressly
disclaimed. DNV GL disclaims any liability for the use of software, calculations, or other
information.
Exceptions
IEEE standards do not cover single-phase ac systems, but Synergi’s arc flashover analysis
covers fault on three-phase lines and sections.
For a three-phase line, only three-phase faults are considered for arc flashover calculations
since the severity of three-phase faults is the highest (according to the IEEE standards).
Model requirements
Arc flashover analysis requires similar model data requirements as the load flow and fault
analysis. Source resistance and reactance should be accurately specified in the source, line
impedances and lengths should be correctly modeled, and protective devices (fuses,
reclosers, breakers, and sectionalizers) should be correctly modeled with the necessary
settings. Once this is done, as would normally be done for running load flow and check
coordination analysis, you are ready to configure the arc flashover analysis options and then
run the analysis.
Setting up an arc flashover analysis

Options that control the arc flashover analysis are configured in the Arc Flashover Options
editor. These include basic settings for the analysis, the specification of working distances,
and custom text that is added to the optional arch flashover label.

Analyzing a Model
Configuring settings for an arc flashover analysis
To open the Arc Flashover Options editor

2. In the Safety group, select Arc Flashover > Settings.
3. In the Arc Flashover Options editor, select the Settings tab.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Settings tab of the Arc Flashover
Options editor.
Arc-flash analysis
Specifies the goal of the arc flashover analysis. Select from one of the following options:
l Find safe working distances for each category of PPE
l Calculate energy and PPE from equipment working distance
l Calculate energy and PPE at this [user-specified] working distance
Fault clearing
Specifies the minimum, maximum, and unprotected fault clear times (in ms). Also allows you
to specify a fault clear time.
Other settings
Specifies a percentage for a reduced arc level. Also allows you to choose the Lee Method for
any voltage.
Risk categories
Specifies the PPE grade. Use these fields to manually set the PPE grade for safety clothing.
See "Selection of PPE rating for clothing" below for more information.
Selection of PPE rating for clothing
Arc flashover analysis suggests a rating of personal protective equipment (PPE) that can be
used to develop safe working conditions for the utility workers. Arc flashover uses the
calculated incident energy at the working distance to create the PPE suggestion. PPE for an arc
flashover hazard is the last line of defense against injury and is intended to mitigate the
damage from an arc flashover impact on the individual. The selection of PPE should provide
enough protection to prevent a second degree burn, yet avoid clothing that may cause heat
stress, poor visibility and limited body movement.
IEEE standard emphasizes that it is not intended to imply that workers be allowed to perform
work on exposed energized equipment or circuit parts.
Editing working distances

Working distance is defined as the sum of the distance between the worker (standing in front
of the equipment) to the equipment, and from the front of the equipment to the potential arc
source inside the equipment. Arc flashover protection is always based on the incident energy
level on the person’s face and body at the working distance, and not the incident energy on
the hands or arms. Since the head and body are the largest-percentage of the total skin

Analyzing a Model
surface area, injuries to the head and body are much more life threatening than burns on
hands or arms.
Typical values of working distances are given in the IEEE standard. The working distances can
be edited in the Equipment tab of the Arc Flashover Options editor, so that working distances
for different voltages can be changed from the IEEE standard. Working distance may vary not
only with the voltage, but also with the class of equipment (such as switchgear, motor control
centers, or cable) and on a case-to-case basis. It is very important that you choose working
distance carefully and consider the equipment you are studying in the arc flashover analysis.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on editing working distances.
To edit working distances for PPE

3. In the Arc Flashover Options editor, select the Equipment tab.
4. In the Equipment table, select the facility category that you want to edit and then use
the settings below the table to set the following options:
a. Working distance
b. Bus gap distance (gap between flashover points)
c. Distance factor
In addition, select the Report check box if you want to report on the equipment
category.
Creating an arc flashover label

The Label tab in the Arc Flashover Options editor can be used to customize a printable label
that can be used to identify equipment that is vulnerable to arc flashover, or to record the
repair work that was done. You can include as much or as little information as you need.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on creating the arc flashover label. The
label can be printed after performing the arc flashover analysis, as described in "Performing
an arc flashover analysis" on the next page.
To create an arc flashover label

3. In the Arc Flashover Options editor, select the Label tab.
4. Make sure that the Generate label(s) for analysis section check box is selected.
5. Use the Comment to place on label area to type the custom text that you want to
appear on the label.

Analyzing a Model
Performing an arc flashover analysis

Perform the following procedure to run an arc flashover analysis on your model. When the
analysis is complete, the Arc Flashover Analysis report will display. The report includes
details such as suggestions for PPE, suggested working distances, incident energy, clear time,
and arc flashover amps. If you selected to generate a label in the Label tab of the Arc
Flashover Options editor, a label will be generated for you to print.
To perform an arc flashover analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Arc Flashover Analysis Options editor to
configure options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up an arc
flashover analysis" on page 645.
3. In the Safety group, click the Arc Flashover icon.
Protection curves
The protection curve editor is a Synergi tool that allows you to access the protection database.
Aesthetically similar to the TCC graph, the protection curve editor controls manufacturers with
existing curve data. These curves can be edited, deleted, or created through the protection
curve editor.
The protection curve editor contains two tabs. The Browse tab allows you to load a warehouse
of existing curves from different manufacturers. The curves can be edited, if necessary, and
then saved. The Import/Export tab can be used to read a *.CSV file and save the curves to
Synergi’s protection database. It can also read all user-defined curves and export them to a
*.CSV file. The import option will prompt you to load curves from a file and then save to a
database. The export option will prompt you to load curves from a database and then save to
a file. In both instances, the curves can be edited using the procedures that follow.
To open the protection curve editor

2. In the Protection Curves group, click Editor.
To edit a protection curve
1. In the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, select the Edit Curve Points check box.
—or—
Right-click in the graph and select Edit. The curve points will appear on each curve.
2. Click and drag a point to move it and edit the curve.
To edit a protection curve point
1. Double-click the protection curve in the graph. The point editor will appear.
2. Select and double-click on an amp or time point in the editor.

Analyzing a Model
To add a protection curve point
—or—
2. In the Controls tab, click the Add button.
—or—
Right-click in the graph and select Add Points.
3. Select an empty place on the curve and click to add a point.
To delete a protection curve point
—or—
2. In the Controls tab, click the Delete button.
—or—
Right-click in the graph and select Delete Points.
3. Select a point on the curve and click to delete it.
4. Click Save.
To redraw a curve point
1. Use the tree view to navigate to the point you wish to redraw.
2. Right click on the curve in the menu and select Redraw. All curves will be removed
from the graph.
3. Click and drag in the graph to draw a new curve.
To add a new curve
1. In the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, click Create New Curve. The Create
Protection Curve wizard appears.
2. On the first page of the Create Protection Curve editor, select the type of device for
which you want to create a curve. Click Next to continue.
3. On the second page of the wizard, select the Curve Type and Device Type. Click
Next to continue.
4. On the third page of the wizard, select a Manufacturer or type the name of a new one.
5. On the fourth page of the wizard, select a Model or type the name of a new one. Click
Next to continue.
6. On the fifth page of the wizard, select a Rating or type the name of a new one. Click
Next to continue.

Analyzing a Model
7. On the sixth and final page of the wizard, select a Curve Name or type the name of a
new one. Click Finish.
MiddleLink and the protection curve editor

MiddleLink records can be used to support the protection curve editor. The Import tab can be
used to read a MiddleLink file with 18001, 18002, 18003, and 18020 records. All 18020 records
related to an 18001, 18002, or 18003 record must come immediately after that record or they
will not be read in correctly.
The file can be loaded by selecting the path and then clicking Load. For more information on
MiddleLink files, see "Importing GIS data using MiddleLink" on page 174.
Protection tools
Device Lab
Synergi’s Device Lab (formerly called the Protection Lab and also the Protective Device
Viewer) provides a graphically oriented view of the curves and coordination sets of devices.
These devices are not in the model. You can specify the parameters of each device (such as
relay pickup, time-dial, and so on), and the resulting curves are drawn on the screen along
with the corresponding operating times.
The Device Lab provides a user friendly interface, since there is no electrical network model
to build. Relays, fuses, and reclosers can be easily added to a study and “cases”
(combinations of devices comprising a particular coordination) may be saved and recalled at
any time. Since the Device Lab is independent from the TCC, fault analysis and check
coordination analysis does not apply.
Creating a Device Lab display

Perform the following procedure to create a new Device Lab display. Device Lab displays are
saved independently and are not associated with any particular model. Therefore, when you
create a Device Lab display, you are creating it on your hard drive and not as a part of the
model that currently is loaded. The default location for Device Lab files is your Device Lab file
directory. You can edit this location from the Paths tab of the Preferences editor, as described
in "Paths preferences" on page 39.
To create a Device Lab display
1. Perform the following steps to access the Device Lab tool:

a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Protection tab.
b. In the Tools group, click Device Lab.
2. On the left side of the Device Lab window, select the Devices tab. Use the check boxes
in the Devices list to add or remove devices from the Device Lab display.
3. In the Device Lab display, double-click in the shaded area that represents the device
that you added. The device editor will appear. Use the device editor to edit the settings

Analyzing a Model
for the device as appropriate. Click Apply to apply the settings to the Device Lab
display, and then click X to close the editor.
4. In the Device Lab display, double-click in an empty space to access the Device Lab
Properties editor. Use this editor to edit settings related to curve, graph, grid, and
printing options. Click Apply to apply the settings to the Device Lab display, and then
click X to close the editor.
Note that the settings in the Device Lab Properties editor are virtually identical to the
settings in the TCC Properties editor. However, not all of the settings apply to Device
Lab displays, including all of the settings on the Reference tab. These settings will still
be enabled but they will not have any effect on the Device Lab display that you are
viewing.
For more information on these settings, see "Changing TCC view display properties" on
page 667.
5. On the left side of the Device Lab window, select the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists any
Device Lab displays that you have already created and saved.
6. Click New. Synergi saves your Device Lab display.
Editing a Device Lab display

There are numerous ways that you can edit a Device Lab display. You can add and remove
devices from the display, and you can edit the settings for any of the devices in the display.
You can also edit the display itself, including settings related to the Device Lab curves, graph,
and grid. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
To edit a Device Lab display
1. Perform the following steps to access the Device Lab window:

c. In the Device Lab window, click the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists the Device Lab
displays that you have already created and saved.
2. On the left side of the I/O tab, double-click the name of the Device Lab display that you
want to copy. The selected Device Lab display will appear on the right side of the Device
Lab window.
3. Use the instructions in the following list to edit the Device Lab display.
l To add or remove devices from the Device Lab
On the left side of the Device Lab window, select the Devices tab. Use the check
boxes in the Devices list to add or remove devices from the Device Lab, as
described in "Creating a Device Lab display" on the previous page. When you are
finished, return to the I/O tab where you can further edit the Device Lab display.
Remember that, as described below, you must save your changes manually, or
create a new Device Lab display with the new edits, before you close the Device
Lab window, or else your changes will be lost.

Analyzing a Model
l To edit a device in the Device Lab

In the Device Lab display, double-click in the shaded area that represents the
device that you want to edit. The device editor will appear. Use the device editor
to edit the settings for the device as appropriate. Click Apply to apply the settings
to the Device Lab display, and then click X to close the editor.
For more information on editing devices in Synergi, see the respective section in
the User Guide for the device that you want to edit.
l To edit the Device Lab display
In the Device Lab display, double-click in an empty space to access the Device
Lab Properties editor. Use the Device Lab Properties editor to edit settings related
to curve, graph, grid, and printing options. Click Apply to apply the settings to the
Device Lab display, and then click X to close the editor.
Note that the settings in the Device Lab Properties editor are virtually identical to
the settings in the TCC Properties editor. However, not all of the settings apply to
Device Lab displays, including all of the settings on the Reference tab. These
settings will still be enabled but they will not have any effect on the Device Lab
display that you are viewing.
For more information on these settings, see "Changing TCC view display
properties" on page 667.
4. Click Save to save the changes you have made. If you close the Device Lab window
without saving the changes, the changes will be lost.
Copying a Device Lab display

Perform the following procedure to create a duplicate copy of a Device Lab display. This
procedure will also create a duplicate copy of the Device Lab files, which are saved on your
computer. The default location for Device Lab files is your ProtectionLab file directory. You
can edit this location from the Paths tab of the Preferences editor, as described in "Paths
To copy a Device Lab display

2. On the left side of the I/O tab, double-click the name of the Device Lab display that you
want to copy. The selected Device Lab display will appear on the right side of the Device
Lab window.
3. Click New. A new copy of the Device Lab display is created with an automatically
generated name. See "Editing a Device Lab display" on the previous page and
"Renaming a Device Lab display" on the facing page for information on editing and
renaming the new Device Lab display.

Analyzing a Model
Renaming a Device Lab display

Device Lab displays are created using an automatically generated naming sequence that
includes the date and time that the Device Lab display was created. If desired, you can
perform the following table to rename a Device Lab display. This procedure will rename the
Device Lab display as you see it in the I/O tab of the Device Lab window, and also rename the
Device Lab files that are saved on your computer. The default location for Device Lab files is
your Device Lab file directory. You can edit this location from the Paths tab of the Preferences
editor, as described in "Paths preferences" on page 39.
To rename a Device Lab display

2. On the left side of the I/O tab, select the Device Lab display that you want to rename.
3. Click Rename.
4. Type the new name for the Device Lab display and then press Enter.
Deleting a Device Lab display

Perform the following procedure to delete a Device Lab display. Remember that Device Lab
displays are saved independently and are not associated with any particular model.
Therefore, when you delete a Device Lab display, you are deleting it from your hard drive and
not from the model that currently is loaded. The default location for Device Lab files is the
Device Lab folder in your Synergi Documents folder. You can edit this location from the Paths
tab of the Preferences editor, as described in "Paths preferences" on page 39.
Also note that when you delete a Device Lab display, you are deleting the Device Lab display
that is selected (highlighted) in the list of Device Lab displays on the left side of the I/O tab in
the Device Lab window. This may or may not be the same Device Lab display that you are
viewing at the time. Take care to ensure that you have selected the correct Device Lab display
to delete.
To delete a Device Lab display

2. On the left side of the I/O tab, select the Device Lab display that you want to delete.

Analyzing a Model
3. Click Delete.
Protection Scheme Report

The Protection Scheme Report provides information about the protection scheme for the
currently selected subtrans and feeders. The report includes the following sections:
l Run Summary. The Run Summary section provides a brief overview of the time and
conditions that are being analyzed in the report.
l Structure. The Structure section shows the sections that include protective devices for
the selected subtrans and feeders in the model. The section name is provided along with
the protective device type, its amp rating, and its customer count. The report also
identifies which zone includes each protective device.
l Exposure. The Exposure section shows the exposure of a protective device directly
downstream, including miles, configuration, and conductor.
l Breaker Zone 1. The Breaker Zone 1 section provides details on any devices that are
within the first zone of a breaker. These “zone 1” devices have their name & section,
voltage, load current, impedance values, and fault levels listed.
Refer to the following procedure for information on viewing the Protection Scheme report.
To view the Protection Scheme report

2. In the Tools group, click the Scheme Report icon.
3. If prompted, click Yes to perform a load-flow analysis and a fault analysis before
viewing the report. Or, click No to view the report without running new analyses. In this
case the report will show the most recently available results.
Min/max source Z analysis

The min/max source Z analysis runs a fault analysis on your model with minimum and then
with maximum source impedances. The analysis report lists fault levels at minimum and
maximum source impedance along with the percentage difference between the two.
Minimum and maximum source impedance values can be specified on the Volts/Ohms tab of
the feeder and subtran editors.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on performing a min/max source Z
analysis.
To perform a min/max source Z analysis

2. In the Tools group, click Min/Max Source Z.

Analyzing a Model
Fault applications
Fault analysis
Synergi fault analysis determines the balanced or by-phase fault currents flowing to and into a
fault. It can also determine the balanced or by-phase fault voltages. Synergi supports three
types of fault analysis: basic fault, fault flow, and fault voltage.
Fault analysis types

Synergi supports three types of fault analysis: basic fault, fault flow, and fault voltage. The
analysis type that will be performed is selected from the Protection tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Fault analysis
Fault analysis places a fault on each section of the model, one by one, and then computes the
fault current in amps for the load end of each section. The fault values include minimum and
maximum line-ground, phase-phase, and three-phase faults. The distances from the
substation and the positive and zero sequence impedance are accumulated along the feeder.
The analysis checks the minimum fault current from the selected protective device down-line
to the next section with a protective device. Fault analysis is available for substation models
and in feeders or substations with looped configurations.
Fault values are calculated using the symmetrical components method of solution. If a system
has loops or active generators, the impedance seen by the fault is calculated in the phase
domain and then transformed to the sequence domain model. For more information on this
classical method, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Pre-fault load current and fault analysis

Fault analysis determines the fault current into the fault. Synergi lists the results for all
sections in a feeder by faulting the lines one at a time. Including the pre-fault load current into
these results does not affect the current into the fault. It only affects the current into the
faulted section and the fault current on other sections.
Fault flow analysis
Fault flow analysis places a fault at one location in the distribution system model and
calculates the flows throughout. By-phase models of regulators, transformers, loads, and
other devices are utilized. The analysis results in a report listing the by-phase or maximum
current flows on each section for line-ground, line-line, and three-phase faults at the given
fault location. A bolted maximum line-ground fault and a minimum line-ground fault through a
fault impedance are used. If the faulted section has a neutral, a line-line-ground fault type is
used. Otherwise, a line-line type is used.
Fault flow analysis requires that you first set a particular section for analysis, which becomes
the fault location. For more information on setting a section for analysis, see "Setting a
section for analysis" on page 496.
Pre-fault load current and fault flow analysis

Analyzing a Model
Pre-fault load current can be included in the results for fault flow analysis. In this case, a
load-flow is run before the fault analysis and the flows are stored. After the fault flow analysis
is completed, the pre-fault flows are combined with the fault flows as follows:
| I Total | = | I From Fault | + | I Prefault |
Equation 4-1.
The values of | I Total | for affected lines are listed in the fault flow analysis report.
Fault voltage analysis
Fault voltage analysis calculates voltages throughout a system due to a fault at a single
location. This application combines the Synergi fault current calculations, fault flow analysis,
and the load-flow calculations to simulate worst-case voltage conditions near the time of the
fault. The calculations are performed in the following order:
1. Fault flow analysis is used to determine fault current into the fault, any generators, and
through tie switches for each type of fault.
2. A load-flow analysis is used to calculate load currents and the source voltage behind the
feeder or substation source impedance.
3. For each fault type, the fault currents and the load currents are accumulated.
4. For each fault type, voltage drops are calculated throughout the feeder.
The fault voltage analysis report lists balanced or by-phase voltages and current flows for
each section and for each fault type. The report also lists the percent dip, fault impedance,
and percent loading of conductors and other devices. The kVA flow is also given.
Fault voltage analysis requires that you first set a particular section for analysis, which
becomes the fault location. For more information on setting a section for analysis, see
"Setting a section for analysis" on page 496.
Including generators during fault analysis

During a fault, active synchronous and induction generators behave like a voltage source
behind a subtransient reactance tied to their grounding impedance. Since they are effectively
a source, generators contribute to the system of equations used to handle loops. The rank of
the Tie/Fault impedance matrix is adjusted according to the characteristics of each generator
included in the analysis. Flows out of the generator during a fault are handled with the
Tie/Fault and Red matrices discussed above. For more information on generators, see
"Generators" on page 420.
Setting up a fault analysis

All three fault analysis types—fault, fault flow, and fault voltage—are configured from the
same editor. Refer to the following procedure for more information.

Analyzing a Model
To set up a fault analysis
1. Perform the following steps open the Fault Analysis Options editor:
b. In the Fault Applications group, click the text label for any of the three fault
analysis types—Fault, Flow, or Voltage—and then select Settings.
2. In the Fault Analysis Options editor, use the Shared Settings section to configure options
that apply to all three analysis types. Refer to the following table for more information.
Use calculated Select this check box to have Synergi perform an initial
pre-fault voltage load-flow analysis to determine the section voltage at the
moment before the fault. For more information on pre-
fault voltage, see the Synergi Electric Technical
Reference.
Use maximum Select this check box to use the maximum LLG values to
(instead of calculate fault values.
average) LLG
values
Set min L-G equal Select this check box to set the minimum L-G fault values
to 1/X max L-G to 1/ an optional denominator between 1 and 9.9. The
default value, as shown in the text box, is 1/3.0.
If you select this option, the “Fault resistance for min L-G
fault” option will be disabled.
Fault resistance Specify the minimum resistance seen by a line to ground

for min L-G fault fault. If this value is 0.0, Synergi uses the minimum
resistance assigned at individual feeders, thereby
allowing you to use different fault Z values for different
parts of your system. See "Feeder tab – Feeder editor"
on page 335 for information on setting the minimum
resistance at feeders.
This option will be disabled if you have selected the “Set

min L-G equal to 1/” check box.
Include Select this check box to enable PV generator fault

PV generator fault contribution. The following options are available:
contribution
l Include PV load-flow output. Select this check
box to include pre-fault load flow amps in the fault.
If the option is not selected, then the excess over
the load-flow amps will be used.
l PV fault contribution multiplier. Use this

Analyzing a Model
multiplier as a scaler to increase or decrease the

fault contribution for all PV generators.
l Calculate as a % of output factor in
warehouse type. Select this check box to
calculate the fault amps from the load-flow amps.
If the option is not selected, then a fault voltage
analysis will be run for every fault location so that
the output amps can be determined from the PV
capability curve. The analysis run-time will be
much longer when you use this method (that is,
when the check box is not selected).
3. Use the Section by Section Fault Analysis Settings area to configure options that apply
to the fault analysis type only. Refer to the following table for more information.
Fast wandering Select this option to have Synergi perform a fault

laterals and skip analysis that quickly analyzes wandering lateral areas,
loop areas by essentially ignoring the variance in source impedance
due to paths of the wandering part of the lateral. Synergi
will also skip and not analyze areas in loops or areas fed
by loops.
Update feeder with Select this check box to have Synergi automatically
calculated source update feeder records with calculated source impedance
Z values, as propagated from the respective substation
transformers. This option is only applicable if you have
substations modeled and selected.
Analyze sources Select this option to limit the analysis to feeders,

and queried subtrans, and sections in the query set only. For more
sections only information, see "Using the query set" on page 249.
Asynchronous fault Specify the number of cycles past the fault instance to
cycle establish the point in time for the analysis.
Current Options Select the type of current to be considered for the fault
analysis. Available choices are:
l Symmetrical – AC component
l Asymmetrical – DC component
l Both – the sum of both
4. Use the Fault Flow/Fault Voltage Analysis Settings section to configure options that
apply to both the fault flow and fault voltage analysis types. Refer to the following table

Analyzing a Model
Add in pre-fault Select this check box to have Synergi consider pre-fault
load amps load current based on a preliminary load flow analysis. For
more information, see "Fault flow analysis" on page 655.
Performing a fault analysis

The fault analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more
information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
Perform the following procedure to run a fault analysis on your model.
To perform a fault analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Fault Analysis Options editor to select the
analysis type and configure other analysis-related options as desired. For more
information, see "Setting up a fault analysis" on page 656.
3. In the Fault Applications group, click the icon that corresponds to the fault analysis type
that you want to run.
l Click the Fault icon to run a fault analysis.
l Click the Flow icon to run a fault flow analysis.
l Click the Voltage icon to run a fault voltage analysis.
Fault analysis with wandering laterals

In a radial distribution model, wandering laterals can be created directly by allowing loop
creation (in the Synergi tab of the Preferences editor) or indirectly by using wandering lateral
tie switches. During the analysis, any tie switches are treated as if they were closed. For
more information on wandering lateral tie switches, see "Loops and wandering laterals" on
page 343.
Consider the following model, with two wandering laterals, using tie switches:
1000.6
1000.3
1000.2 500.1
500.2
1000.9 1000.7 500.0 500.0
500.1 500.1 500.1 500.1 500.1
F
500.0 500.0
500.0 500.0
500.0 500.0
500.2 500.1
500.1 500.1 500.1
Feeder with two wandering laterals

Analyzing a Model
The feeder serves a 500kW load on the upper wandering lateral and a three-phase 1500kW
load at the end of the feeder. The map shows the kW flows from the feeder and along the
laterals and back to the main line to serve the three-phase load.
Fault, fault flow, and fault voltage can be run on this feeder. If fault analysis is run, fault
impedances are found using looped fault analysis. Fault currents and flows are found from the
fault impedances. Fault flow and fault voltage analysis use their load-flow based engine that is
fully compatible with wandering laterals.
Fault sequence analysis

The fault sequence analysis is designed to help you better understand the switching sequences
of protective devices and automated switches. This protection application allows you to
specify fault values at specific locations and estimate the operation of relays, reclosers,
fuses, and auto-transfer switches in response to the fault. Synergi’s simulation of these
devices is an accurate estimate of real-world behavior. All protective devices are treated as
three-phase devices when they operate.
Setting up a fault sequence analysis

For the fault sequence analysis, you are able to specify fault values at a specific location, the
fault current, fast and slow reclosing times and an auto-transfer switch delay. You can also
add fault current to the existing load current or indicate that the fault values entered already
include load current.
To set up a fault sequence analysis

2. In the Fault Applications group, select Sequence > Settings.
3. Use the Fault Sequence Analysis editor to configure the analysis settings.
Performing a fault sequence analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a fault sequence analysis.
To perform a fault sequence analysis

2. In the Fault Applications group, click the Sequence icon.
3. When the analysis is complete, the fault sequence analysis report displays. The report
contains three main chapters:
l Switching. The Switching chapter of the fault sequence analysis report contains
information about the type of device that responded to a fault, and the section on
which it lies. This chapter also contains buttons for you to click to go to any
switching state seen in the analysis.

Analyzing a Model
l Section Amp Summary. The Section Amp Summary chapter of the Fault
Responses Analysis report contains information about each section’s current
levels on each phase both before and after a fault. This data can be exported to
Excel by selecting File > Open in Excel.
l Events. The Events chapter in the fault sequence analysis report can be viewed
two different ways: all at once, or separated out by section. The All chapter is
sorted by the amount of time that passes after a fault occurs, and the events
which occurred at those times, involving specific devices on a section. It also lists
the next event after the initial fault reaction by the device.
The chapters that are separated out by section contain the same information as
the All chapter. The difference is that only one section, and the device on that
section that reacted to the fault, is listed in each chapter.
Fault location analysis

Synergi’s fault location analysis finds probable fault locations when the magnitude of fault
current is known for a specific location. If you have gathered fault values from electronic
relay readings, fault meter values, or other sources, then Synergi can help track down the
location of the fault, sometimes within a section if the best match is between the inward and
outward nodes. Synergi will estimate the location and output it as a percentage distance away
from the inward node.
Synergi’s fault location analysis considers the following types of faults:
l Bolted phase to ground
l Phase to ground through fault resistance
l Phase to phase
l Phase to phase to bolted ground
l Three-phase
Fault events
Fault events allow you to import fault data recorded in a SCADA database into Synergi, for use
with a fault location analysis. In most cases, you will want to import this data using a
messaging script. You can then set up the fault location analysis to analyze one fault event or
all fault events, as described in "Setting up a fault location analysis" on page 663. However,
Synergi also allows you to manually create, edit, and delete fault events, if desired.
Adding a fault event
To add a fault event
1. In the Synergi map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the fault
event.
2. Select Add Item > Fault Event.

Analyzing a Model
3. Use the Fault Event record to edit details for the fault event. For more information, see
"Editing a fault event" below.
Editing a fault event
Use the Fault Event editor to edit details for the fault event.
To open the Fault Event editor
1. In the Model tab of the Synergi model explorer, expand Locations/Groups and select
Fault Events.
2. In the lower-half of the model explorer, double-click the name of the fault event that
you want to edit.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Fault Event editor.
Description
Description of the fault event. By default, this field is assigned the name of the section where
the fault event occurred. It is strongly recommended that you change the description to a
unique value. Fault locations are identified by description in the Fault Location Analysis
settings editor. If you have multiple fault events on the same section that all have the same
description, then obviously it will be very difficult to select the proper event to analyze.
Fault level information
If the fault level is known for specific phases, select the Fault values are known by-phase
check box. Then, select the check boxes for the appropriate phase(s) and enter the fault level
value(s).
Fault measured at
Name of the section where the fault has been recorded. This is a read-only field that cannot be
edited.
Protection equipment
If a protective device operated downstream after a fault occurred, select the A downstream
protected device operated check box and then select the device type. This will help
Synergi narrow the fault location.
You must select the “Metered fault amps” option, as described above, to enable the protection
equipment settings.
Deleting a fault event
To delete a fault event
1. In the Model tab of the Synergi model explorer, expand Locations/Groups and select
Fault Events.
2. In the lower-half of the model explorer, select the name of the fault event that you want
to delete.

Analyzing a Model

Setting up a fault location analysis

Use the Fault Location Analysis editor to configure the fault location analysis settings.
To open the Fault Location Analysis editor

2. In the Fault Applications group, select Fault Location > Settings.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Fault Location Analysis editor.
Fault amps into section
l Metered fault amps. Select this option to specify fault-level information with known
fault values on a known phase. Selecting this option will enable the “Fault level
information” and “Protection event” options in the editor.
l Use a Fault Event record. Select this option to select a specific fault event to
analyze. Use the Fault Event field to select the event to analyze.
l Analyze all Fault Event records. Select this option to analyze all fault events.
For more information on fault events, see "Fault events" on page 661.
Fault level information
If the fault level is known for specific phases, select the Fault values are known by-phase
check box. Then, select the check boxes for the appropriate phase(s) and enter the fault level
value(s).
These options are enabled when you select the “Metered fault amps” option, as described
above. If you are analyzing a fault event, these options are set on the fault event itself.
Fault R Ohms
Use the appropriate check boxes to specify fault resistance values for line-gnd faults.
Faults to consider
Select from the appropriate check boxes to narrow the fault location by phase. This option can
be helpful if you know the phase type where the fault occurred.
Options
l Add in pre-fault load current. Select this check box to consider pre-fault load
current based on a preliminary load flow analysis.
l Use calculated pre-fault voltage. Select this check box to perform an initial load-
flow analysis to determine the section voltage at the moment before the fault.
Protection equipment
If a protective device operated downstream after a fault occurred, select the A downstream
protected device operated check box and then select the device type. This will help

Analyzing a Model
Synergi narrow the fault location.

These options are enabled when you select the “Metered fault amps” option, as described
above. If you are analyzing a fault event, these options are set on the fault event itself.
Report up to
Groups are divided equally and create ranges based on the percentage match of the
recommended fault locations. Group 1 will yield results that most closely match the
information configured in the setup, while Group 4 will yield results from all four groups, even
though the percentage of accuracy decreases slightly with each group. It is recommended that
you include all four groups in your analysis for a larger comparison base.
Performing a fault location analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a fault location analysis. When the analysis is
complete, the fault location report will display. This report shows the fault current through the
metered section. Some faults can be line-to-line, and others are line-to-line-to-ground. The
“Pct Match” column in the report shows the calculated likelihood of the fault flow through the
section listed. The Pct Match value can be plotted on the map display to highlight the most
likely location of the fault. If a fault can be located within a section (and it sometimes may
not), you will see a Location chapter on the report.
To perform a fault location analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Fault Location Analysis editor to configure
analysis-related options as desired. For more information, see "Setting up a fault
location analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Fault Applications group, click the Location icon.
Time versus current coordination (TCC) graph

The Synergi time versus current coordination (TCC) graph is a powerful tool for plotting
protective device curves and evaluating protection coordination. The TCC environment
operates around your Synergi model. All devices plotted on the graph come directly from the
model instead of an external repository. Therefore, you can use the same model for both
planning and protection studies.
The TCC provides a number of useful features. For example, you can:
l Plot as many curves as you want.
l Create as many different graphs as you want.
l Copy, print, and save graphs.
l Perform precise measurements on the graph.

Analyzing a Model
Opening the TCC view
To open the TCC view

2. In the Views group, select Views > TCC.
TIP: You can also create a new TCC by right-clicking on a protective device in the
map display and selecting Add to TCC. If a TCC is already open, the protective
device is added to the existing graph instead of creating a new one.
Using the TCC explorer

The TCC explorer is conceptually similar to the model explorer in the Synergi map display.
You can use the TCC explorer to create and maintain graphs and also manage the protective
devices that appear on the graphs. The TCC explorer includes the following tabs:
l Facilities. The Facilities tab lists each facilities that is included in the current TCC view.
l Pairs. The Pairs tab lists pairs of protected and protecting devices, based on the
topology of the selected feeders.
l Check.
l Tree. The Tree tab lists protection devices for the selected feeders in a topological tree
relationship.
l Sets List. The Sets List tab lists any TCC sets that are loaded into memory. For more
information on TCC sets, see "Saving a TCC view as a TCC set" on page 672.
l TCC Items. The TCC Items tab lists each individual element in the current TCC view,
including devices, labels, and notes.
From any tab in the TCC explorer, you can do any of the following:
l Drag any device or device pair onto the graph to plot the curve(s). For more information
on plotting curves, see "Plotting curves on the TCC" below.
l Double-click on the device name to open the Synergi editor for that device.
l Right-click on a device name to open a context menu with a number of useful shortcuts,
such as adding and removing devices from the TCC display.
Plotting curves on the TCC

To plot a curve on the TCC, drag the device or device pair from the TCC explorer and drop it
on the graph area. While plotting curves, take note of the following:
l You must have the protection database loaded in memory for curves to appear. For
more information on loading the protection database, see "Protection data" on
page 172.

Analyzing a Model
l Curves are colored according to settings in the individual device editors. To change a
curve color, open the device editor for the associated device. You can open device
editors directly from the TCC view by double-clicking on the respective curve.
l The TCC explorer only displays devices in the selected feeders/subtrans. See "Selecting
feeders" on page 68 for information on selecting different feeders.
You can also plot a curve by right-clicking on the device in the map display or a report and
selecting Add to TCC. Device editors also have an Add to TCC button.
Adding notes to the TCC

Refer to the following procedures for information on adding notes to the TCC window.
To open the TCC window

2. In the Views group, select Views > TCC.
To add a note to the TCC
1. Open the TCC window.

2. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Add Note.
3. Double-click the new note in the TCC view. Use the TCC inspector to edit up to five lines
of note text, as well as to change the font, text color, and note background color.
NOTE: Make sure to select the check box for each note line that you want to display
in the TCC.
4. Click Update to update the TCC window with your edits. Click Hide or press F4 to close
the TCC inspector.
To move a note in the TCC
Select the note in the TCC display and drag it to its new location.
Working with breakers and relays in the TCC

Within any given breaker, Synergi can manage up to six independent curves, depending on
the types of relays that you configure. The six possible curves are generated from the
following supported relay types, each of which can operate in a non-reclosing (slow) or
reclosing (fast) “mode”:
l Phase
l Ground
l High impedance earth return (HIER)
For example, a non-reclosing phase relay (or set of relays) would generate a curve
independently of a reclosing phase relay. Likewise, when you plot a breaker on the TCC, you
only see curves applicable to the configured relays, not necessarily six curves every time. For
example, if you have no emergency relays configured, no emergency curves appear on the
TCC.

Analyzing a Model
In the case of multiple relays and/or stages, a TCC relay curve actually represents the
composite of all applicable curve data, with non-applicable sections automatically hidden. In
essence, each point on the plotted curve represents the lowest point at which one relay stage
will operate. If any stage would operate above that point, the curve data is not shown,
because it is largely non-applicable. Therefore, a relay curve on the TCC represents the
overall behavior of the device as seen by the load current, but for any given point, you may
not know the precise stage that would operate.
Because of this flexibility, TCC work with breakers may require more consideration than other
protective devices. If you have multiple relays configured, your breaker curves could
potentially be a complex mix of different device behaviors, perhaps from different
manufacturers. Always pay close attention to the active relay group and the different relays
and stages you may have modeled, and keep in mind that your curves may represent the
composite behavior of many different devices.
Changing TCC view display properties

The TCC view has its own set of display properties. You can change many aspects of the
display to suit your preferences.
To edit the TCC display properties

2. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Properties. You
can also double-click in any empty space in the TCC window.
3. Use the TCC Properties editor to edit the display settings for the TCC. The following
topics describe the different tasks that you can perform.
l "Editing curves in the TCC display" below
l "Editing reference shifting in the TCC display" on page 669
l "Editing the graph in the TCC display" on page 669
l "Editing the grid in the TCC display" on page 670
l "Editing print settings for the TCC display" on page 670
4. If desired, select Save As Defaults to save the current settings as the default values
for new TCC views. If this option is not selected, any changes you make to the display
properties will only apply to the current TCC view.
Editing curves in the TCC display

Use the Curves tab in the TCC Properties editor to provide settings for curve shifting through
transformers. These settings are only applicable if there are devices on the graph that are on
opposite sides of a transformer.

Analyzing a Model
To edit curves in the TCC display

2. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Properties.
3. In the TCC Properties editor, select the Curves tab. The options that you can set are
described at the end of this help topic.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the TCC Properties editor.
Breakers and electronic reclosers
Select an option to control curve visibility for breakers. Available choices are Response
curve, Control curve, or Response and control curves.
This option can also be set from the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Curves to display
Select an option corresponding to which curves you want to display. Available choices are
Phase and ground, Phase only, and Ground only.
Cutoff amps
l No cutoff values. Select this option if you do not want to apply curve cutoff values.
l User-specified fault values. Select this option to use cutoff values that are specified
directly in the individual device editors.
l Calculated fault values. Select this option to calculate cutoff values as the result of a
fault analysis or check coordination analysis. Phase curves are usually cut off by three-
phase faults, and ground curves are usually cut off from line-ground faults. This may
vary, especially on single- and two-phase lines.
l Cutoff at X amps. Select this option to apply a global cutoff value to all curves on the
TCC graph, regardless of device or properties.
Note that when applying cutoff values, Synergi uses average load current (vector average)
through a protective device. Current on a particular phase may exceed this value. If desired,
you may select the Show cutoff or Show load current check boxes to display tick marks or
lines to make these values easier to visualize. Note that the color of a tick mark or line
matches its parent curve.
Recloser curves
Select an option to control curve visibility for reclosers. Available choices are Fastand slow
curves, K-Factor shifted fast and slow curves, and Fast, slow, and cumulative
curves.
Save as defaults
Select this check box if you want to save the current settings as the default choices for future

Analyzing a Model
TCC views. If this check box is not selected, any changes you make to the display properties
will only apply to the current TCC view.
Transformer colors and Conductor colors
Select colors to represent transformer and conductor damage curves in the TCC display.
Transformer damage curves
l Don’t display. Select this option if you do not want to display transformer damage
curves.
l Frequent fault curves. Select this option to show transformer damage curves for
Type II, III, and IV transformers. Type II transformers start at 70% of the maximum
fault current and extend to the 100% fault value. Type III and IV transformers start at
50% and extend to 100% of the maximum fault current. The curve has the same slope
as the infrequent fault withstand curve but is offset by a factor K (t = K/ (If / Ibase)^2).
This factor K is determined for maximum fault current at two seconds on the secondary
windings.
l Frequent and infrequent fault curves. Select this option to display a fault curve
that runs from the end of the through fault curve at 50 seconds to 2 seconds for Type II,
III, and IV transformers. It runs to 0.5 seconds for Type I transformers.
l Inrush curves. Select this option to show charging current versus time for the
transformer during power up.
Editing reference shifting in the TCC display

Use the Reference tab in the TCC Properties editor to provide settings for curve shifting
through transformers. This option can also be set from the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon.
These settings are only applicable if there are devices on the graph that are on opposite sides
of a transformer.
The voltage change across a transformer causes the need to shift curves appropriately if the
transformer lies between two devices. Otherwise, the curves may not align properly with
respect to the voltage change, and coordination may be mismatched. In the Reference tab,
Synergi allows you to shift curves depending on the type of fault you are studying, as well as
select the device to use as the reference curve. When curves are shifted, it is done based on
the voltage at the reference device. The reference device, therefore, does not shift.
For detailed information on curve shifting through transformers, see the Synergi Electric
Editing the graph in the TCC display
To edit the graph in the TCC display

2. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Properties.
3. In the TCC Properties editor, select the Graph tab. The options that you can edit are

Analyzing a Model

The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Graph tab of the TCC Properties
editor.
Axis labels
Click the Font button to specify the font type, style, and size for x- and y-axis labels.
Device curve legend
Select the appropriate check boxes to display device descriptions and feed sequence diagrams
in the TCC legend. You can also click the Font button to specify the font type, style, and size.
Display notes labels
Select this check box to display notes labels in the TCC display. You can also click the Font
button to specify the font type, style, and size.
Editing the grid in the TCC display

Use the Grid tab of the TCC Properties editor to customize aspects of the grid itself. Some of
these options can also be set from the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon.
Editing print settings for the TCC display

Use the Printing tab of the TCC Properties editor to enter up to five lines of text that is only
printed with the TCC.
Plotting conductor damage curves on the TCC

Synergi supports conductor damage curves on the TCC graph. For information on conductor
damage curve calculations, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
To plot a conductor damage curve
From the map display or a report, right-click on the section with the desired conductor and
select Add To TCC.
Using other TCC functions and features

The TCC provides a number of miscellaneous features to facilitate your coordination studies.
To use TCC editing and zooming shortcuts
In the TCC view, you can right-click on a device ID in the explorer, a device curve on the
graph, or a device number in the legend to produce a context menu with a variety of useful
shortcuts, including the following:
l Edit. Produces the editor for the device.
l Remove. Removes the curve from the graph.

Analyzing a Model
l Zoom. Provides TCC graph zooming tools.

l Map Zoom. Zooms the map display to the device’s parent section.
l Map Pan. Pans the map display to the device’s parent section.
l Map Feeder Zoom. Zooms the map display to the device’s parent feeder.
l Device Settings. Produces a settings report for all devices on the graph. The report is
essentially a collection of “rap sheets.” For more information on rap sheets, see "Rap
Sheets" on page 314.
l Rap Sheet. Produces a “rap sheet” for the individual device.
l Link. Allows you to open a file or location link associated with the device, if one exists.
For more information on file and location links, see "Location links" on page 126.
l Add Note. Produces the TCC Notes Label editor with which you can apply a note and/or
amp/time lines. For more information on notes and amp/time lines, see "Adding notes
to the TCC" on page 666.
To remove a device curve from the graph
Right-click on the curve and select Remove.
TIP: You can also right-click on the device ID in the model explorer or on the device
number in the TCC explorer and select Remove.
To close a TCC graph
1. Make sure the graph that you want to delete is displayed.

2. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Remove Grid Tab.
To use TCC graph measuring tools
1. Right-click in the TCC view and select Add Measure.

2. A red vertical line is added to the TCC view. Drag the line left and right and observe the
measurements in the labels that are associated with the measure.
3. Right-click on the measure line and select Remove Measure to remove it.
To pan in the TCC graph
Click on the TCC graph and drag it to the desired location.
To zoom in the TCC graph
From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the Zoom group, click In, Out, and Previous,
as appropriate. You can also use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out of the TCC graph, or
click and hold the Ctrl key as you drag the mouse over the area where you want to zoom.
To return the view to the original zoom
From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the Zoom group, click K & E.
To refresh the TCC view
From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Refresh.

Analyzing a Model
Saving TCC views

TCC views can be saved through several different formats, each with unique advantages.
Saving a TCC view as a TCC set

TCC sets are a part of your model data and therefore are included any time you save the
model. At a data level, a TCC set contains the IDs of devices on the graph, and the plot
sequence. Unlike the SPV format, however, TCC sets do not contain any display settings.
To create a TCC set
1. After plotting the desired devices, right-click on the TCC graph and select Create TCC
Set.
2. Save your model as normal. The TCC set will automatically be included with your model
data file.
To open (redisplay) a TCC set
From the Sets List tab of the TCC explorer, drag the desired set onto the TCC graph.
To rename a TCC set
In the Sets List tab of the TCC explorer, right-click on the desired set and select Rename
TCC Set.
To delete a TCC set

2. Expand Locations/Groups and select TCC Sets.
3. Select the TCC set that you want to delete, and then right-click and select Delete.
Saving a TCC view as an external file

You can save any TCC view to a proprietary Synergi file format, with an SPV file extension,
and then reload it later in Synergi. The SPV file saves the curve’s display settings as well as
information to identify which devices were present on the graph.
When you load the SPV file, Synergi reads the device IDs and regenerates the TCC using data
currently in memory. Therefore, you should take note that the graph may look different when
you reload it into Synergi, if the current model conditions do not match the model conditions
when you first saved the file. If a device in the SPV file does not exist in the model in
memory, Synergi will produce a warning and not plot the curve for that device.
To save a TCC view
From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the File group, click Save As.
To load a TCC view
From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the File group, click Open.

Analyzing a Model
Saving a TCC view as a JPEG or BMP image

You can save a TCC view as a JPEG or BMP image for use with other applications, such as
Microsoft Word or Excel. Once saved, the image is static and cannot be reloaded into Synergi
or further manipulated.
To save a TCC view as a JPEG or BMP image
1. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the File group, click Save As.
2. In the TCC to Save editor, next to Save as type, select either JPEG Files (*.jpg) or
Bitmap files (*.bmp).
3. Next to File Name, type the name for the file you want to save.
4. Click Save.
Copying a TCC view

The copy command allows you to copy an image of the current TCC to the Windows Clipboard.
Once on the Clipboard, you can paste it into any application that supports image pasting, such
as Microsoft Word, Excel, or Paint.
To copy a TCC view
1. From the Controls tab of the Synergi ribbon, in the TCC group, click Copy.
2. Paste the view in the application where you want to use it, such as Microsoft Word,
Excel, or Paint.
Reliability
Synergi aids in the simulation and analysis of distribution system reliability. Synergi’s
comprehensive reliability tools can help you investigate root cause and configuration effects
on system-level and customer-level reliability.
Reliability is discussed extensively in the Synergi Electric Technical Reference and the Synergi
Electric Handbook. This User Guide will focus on the tasks related to setting up and
performing a reliability analysis.
Setting up a reliability analysis

To set reliability analysis options
1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Reliability tab.

2. In the Analysis group, select Reliability > Settings.
3. On the left side of the Reliability Analysis Options editor, select from the different tab
names to access the available reliability analysis options. The following sections
describe the different tasks that you can perform:

Analyzing a Model
l "Setup tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor" below

l "Settings tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor" on the facing page
l "Scalars tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor" on page 677
Setup tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor

The following list describes the options that you can edit from the Setup tab of the Reliability
Analysis Options editor. For information on opening the editor, see "Setting up a reliability
analysis" on the previous page.
Analysis
Select the type of reliability analysis to run. Available choices are:
l Reliability analysis
l Report failure rates and repair times
l Calibrate exposure factors
If you choose to calibrate exposure factors, exposure zone calibration and creation can then
be specified in the Settings tab of the Reliability Analysis Options editor. For more
information, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Auto-transfer switches
l Use crew operation time on switch. Select this option to use the crew operation
times assigned to individual auto-transfer switches. This option will essentially allow
you to disable auto-transfer switches in your model, depending on the crew operation
times you have established for them.
l Use X minutes. Select this option to use a global operation time, specified here, for
auto-transfer switches. This option essentially simulates true auto-transfer switches,
since auto-transfer switches should by nature have no crew operation time.
For more information on auto-transfer switches, see "Special switch types and functions" on
page 464.
Automatic switches
l Use crew operation time on switch. Select this option to use the crew operation
times assigned to individual automatic switches. This option will essentially allow you to
disable automatic switches in your model, depending on the crew operation times you
have established for them.
l Use X minutes. Select this option to use a global operation time, specified here, for
automatic switches. This option essentially simulates true automatic switches, since
auto-transfer switches should by nature have no crew operation time.
For more information on automatic switches, see "Special switch types and functions" on
page 464.

Analyzing a Model
Calculations
l Use mitigation. Globally enable any mitigation that is applied to the model in the form
of mitigation zones. For more information, see "Mitigation zones" on page 679.
l Calculate confidence interval values. Enable confidence interval calculations. Take
note that the analysis will take longer when this option is selected.
Composite index
Use the composite index fields to specify weighting factors for SAIFI, SAIDI, and MAIFI. The
sum of all three values must be 1.0.
The composite index represents an engineering attempt to quantify service improvement for
all customers. Weighting factors are used to represent the particular wants of customers. For
example, for some customers, less frequent outages (SAIFI) would be the best improvement,
while for other customers, fewer hours out of service (SAIDI) would be better.
For more information on the composite index values and calculations, see the Synergi Electric
Feeder behavior
l Allow feeder reclosing. Causes momentary faults fed directly by the feeder to result
in momentary interruptions for all customers on the feeder. If the option is not selected,
unprotected momentary faults result in an outage for all feeder customers. Some
customers will be picked up with adjacent feeders if possible.
l Allow by-phase feeder operation. Allows feeders to reclose in a by-phase manner
on momentary faults.
Pickup model
Select how customers are picked up by adjacent feeders or adjacent feeds during an outage,
with regards to constraints. Available choices are:
l Non-constrained pickup. Always allow pickup with or without protective devices.
l No pickup. Never allow pickup.
l Constrained pickup. Allow pickup within a specified percentage of emergency loading
If you choose either of the pickup options, the following options are also available:
l Allow pickup with protective devices.
l Full pickup when tie not loaded or not selected.
System targets
Specify system targets for SAIFI, SAIDI, and MAIFI. Each value must be between 0 and 10.
Settings tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor

The following list describes the options that you can edit from the Settings tab of the
Reliability Analysis Options editor. For information on opening the editor, see "Setting up a
reliability analysis" on page 673.

Analyzing a Model
Calibration and zone creation

Creates exposure zones based on one of the following criteria: feeder type, conductor type,
source distance, or configuration. Synergi will then use this input to adjust exposure factors to
achieve the SAIFI, SAIDI, and MAIFI values specified in the meters.
Exposure factors are used to adjust each section’s individual failure rates. These are multi-
year enabled to allow modeling of declining or improving prospects for reliability-related
events.
Failures that are single phase
Percentage of faults to be treated as single-phase faults. Since most faults are single-phase,
this setting allows the analysis to be more precisely configured to the actual conditions of your
system. Keep in mind that reclosers and feeders with by-phase operation capabilities can
isolate single-phase faults with fewer customers experiencing an outage.
Fuse/recloser coordination
Select from one of the following options to determine whether fuse saving and fuse closing
actions will be controlled globally or on a case-by-case basis, as determined by settings at
each individual fuse.
l Global fuse saving. An event downstream from a fuse will result in the operation of
the nearest upstream recloser. If a recloser or reclosing breaker or feeder does not
exist upstream, then the fuse will blow.
l Global fuse blowing. A fuse will always blow for an event directly downstream
despite any upstream reclosing capabilities.
l Use each fuse’s setting. The saving or blowing of fuses will be determined on a case-
by-case basis, based on whether the “Fuse saving scheme” check box is selected on the
Fuse tab of the Fuse editor at each individual fuse. If the check box is selected on a Fuse
editor, the “fuse saving” action will occur for that fuse. If the check box is cleared on a
Fuse editor, the “fuse blowing” action will occur for that fuse.
For more information on the fuse editor’s “Fuse saving scheme” check box, see "Fuse
tab – Fuse editor" on page 417.
Generate subcategory results
Shows more comprehensive data for certain reliability results.
Maximum time for outage events
Sets the amount of time allowed for outage.
l Disregarded event. If the outage event is longer than the Disregarded event value,
the event is not considered during the Reliability analysis.
l Momentary event. If the event duration is less than the Momentary event value but
greater than the Disregarded event value, then the event will only impact MAIFI results
during the Reliability analysis.
SAIDI
Units for reported SAIDI values. Select either hours or minutes.

Analyzing a Model
Suppress feeder breaker events

Causes Synergi to disallow the operation of feeder breakers and reclosers. In Synergi, a
device must be modeled directly after the feeder source to be considered a feeder device.
Uncleared temporary failures
Sets the percentage of permanent outage time for each cause. Outage times for temporary
faults that are not cleared with upstream reclosing equipment are also supported.
Scalars tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor

Use the Scalars tab in the Reliability Analysis Options editor to enable scalars and
suppressions for a reliability analysis. The following list describes the tasks that you can
perform. For information on opening the editor, see "Setting up a reliability analysis" on
page 673.
To apply scalars to the analysis
Select the Use scalars check box. The Multiplier and Adder fields represent the effects of
the weather or time of year. These values can be applied to the permanent and temporary
failure rates, as well as to the repair time of any section with an exposure zone that contains
the same category and subcategory of event.
To set percentages of suppression for the effects of various root causes
Select the Use suppression check box. The suppression works much like the percentages
specified in mitigation zones, except that the effects are global. Suppression only applies to
root causes found in applied exposure zones. The suppression of a root cause not applied to
the model will have no effect.
Performing a reliability analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a reliability analysis. Keep in mind that full reliability
analysis requires a license. You can operate reliability analysis without one; however, your
results will be restricted to the global level and the advanced by-phase and by-device
capabilities will not be available.
To perform a reliability analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Reliability Analysis Options editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a reliability
3. In the Analysis group, click the Reliability icon.
Exposure zones
Exposure zones are used to group sections with similar failure causes, geography, foliage,
age, and construction. The values in an exposure zone are itemized by cause category and
subcategory and grouped according to single-phase and two/three-phase lines.
Sections that are assigned to an exposure zone share common values for the following:

Analyzing a Model
l Sustained failure rate per set length of line

l Repair time for a sustained failure
l Repair cost for a sustained failure
l Temporary failure rate per set length of line
Stored as equipment data, each exposure zone can be individually enabled or disabled and
can be configured to apply to sections based on logical as well as spatial relationships. For
example, an exposure zone can be configured to apply to all sections, or only to sections
where the zone has been specified in the Section editor, or only to sections that have no zone
specified. An exposure zone can also be applied on the basis of overhead/underground,
nominal kV, conductor ID, configuration, and lateral build. These capabilities make it easy to
create a zone with a full set of causes to represent outages by line type, voltage level, and so
on.
Creating an exposure zone
To create an exposure zone

2. Right-click and select New Device > Exposure Zone.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new exposure zone and then click
OK.
4. Use the Exposure Zone editor to edit the settings for the exposure zone. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing an exposure zone" below.
Editing an exposure zone

To edit an exposure zone, double-click the exposure zone name in the Warehouse tab of the
button that is located next to the name of the selected exposure zone.
The following list describes the options you can edit for an exposure zone.
Cause details
Perform the following steps to set up root causes for an exposure zone:
1. In the list of root causes on the left side of the editor, select the root cause that you
want to configure for the exposure zone. (Bold is used to indicate causes that have
already been enabled for the zone.)
2. Select Enabled.
3. Use the Sustained Faults and Temporary Faults areas to specify failure rates,
repair times, and repair costs for the selected root cause.
4. Repeat these steps to enable other root causes for the exposure zone.
Description
Name of the exposure zone. The description has no impact on data storage or model topology.
It does not need to be unique.

Analyzing a Model
Zone application
Select the applicable check boxes to configure how the zone is used in your model.
Zone color
Color that will be used in the Synergi map display for the Exposure Zones color by option.
Assigning an exposure zone to a section

Exposure zones are assigned to sections using the Section editor. Refer to the following
Exposure factors can also be configured in the Section editor, as well as the Meter editor and
Reliability Analysis Options editor. Exposure factors are used to scale the permanent and
temporary failure rates and repair times of a section’s exposure zone. From this, you can
correlate a wide range of events to generate statistically relevant exposure zones. For
example, exposure factors are enabled for multi-year analysis so that you can model
declining or improving prospects for reliability-related events. For more information on
exposure factors, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference. For more information on
multi-year analysis, see "Multi-year modeling" on page 73.
To assign an exposure zone to a section
to edit.
3. Next to Exposure zone, select the name of the exposure zone that you want to assign
to the section. You can also edit the relevant exposure factors, if required.
Deleting an exposure zone
To delete an exposure zone

2. Expand Zones - Exposure and then select the name of the exposure zone that you
want to delete.
Mitigation zones
From a data perspective, mitigation zones are similar to exposure zones. A mitigation zone is
a collection of all the root causes in your system with a percentage of mitigation effectiveness
assigned to each. When you assign a mitigation zone to a section, root causes are considered
mitigated according to the respective percentages. Mitigation zones also contain fixed and
annual cost data that is used by the reliability analysis for costs calculations, including those
based on initial costs versus cost savings due to effective mitigation.

Analyzing a Model
Keep in mind that root cause failure data is controlled by exposure zones, and mitigation
against a particular root cause is meaningless if that cause was not active to begin with. For
example, you may assign a mitigation zone to a section that specifies a 50% mitigation
effectiveness against the root cause of “Trees,” perhaps through some sort of tree-trimming.
However, if the exposure zone assigned to the same section does not list failure data for
trees, the mitigation data is unused.
For any given mitigation zone, it is likely that mitigation will be zero for most root causes
since your mitigation efforts are probably focused by region. However, keep in mind that
some mitigation efforts can affect multiple causes. For example, squirrels, birds, trees, and
other causes may all be partially mitigated through tree trimming.
To consider mitigation in your model during a reliability analysis, you must have your analysis
options set up as such. For more information on globally enabling mitigation in your analysis
options, see "Setup tab – Reliability Analysis Options editor" on page 674.
Creating a mitigation zone
To create a mitigation zone

2. Right-click and select New Device > Mitigation Zone.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new mitigation zone and then
click OK.
4. Use the Mitigation Zone editor to edit the settings for the mitigation zone. For more
information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a mitigation zone" below.
Editing a mitigation zone

To edit a mitigation zone, double-click the mitigation zone name in the Warehouse tab of the
button that is located next to the name of the selected mitigation zone.
The following list describes the options you can edit for a mitigation zone.
Cause details
Perform the following steps to set up root causes for a mitigation zone:
1. In the list of root causes on the left side of the editor, select the root cause that you
want to add to the exposure zone.
2. Select the Enabled check box. (Enabled root causes will appear in a bold font in the list
of causes.)
3. Use the Mitigation slider bar or the Effect text box to specify a percentage of
effectiveness for the root cause.
4. Repeat these steps to enable other root causes for the mitigation zone.
Description
Name of the mitigation zone. The description has no impact on data storage or model

Analyzing a Model
topology. It does not need to be unique.

Fixed cost and Yearly cost
Fixed and annual mitigation costs, respectively. These values are used by the analysis for
costs calculations, including calculations based on initial costs versus cost savings due to
effective mitigation.
Zone color
Color that will be used in the Synergi map display for the Mitigation Zones color by option.
Assigning a mitigation zone to a section
To apply a mitigation zone to a section
to edit.
3. Under Reliability Zones, select the desired mitigation zone and click Apply.
TIP: If you have multiple sections to assign, you may find it much more convenient
to use the Multiple Editor. For more information on the Multiple Editor, see "Using
the Multiple Editor" on page 253.
Deleting a mitigation zone
To delete a mitigation zone

2. Expand Zones - Mitigation and then select the name of the mitigation zone that you
want to delete.
Harmonic analysis
A harmonic is a component of a periodic wave having a frequency that is an integral multiple
of the fundamental power line frequency of 60Hz. In other words, the 1st harmonic exists with
60Hz, the 2nd with 120Hz, the 3rd with 180Hz, and so on. Total harmonic distortion is the
combination of all the harmonic frequency currents to the fundamental. The characteristic
harmonics are based on the number of rectifiers (pulse numbers) used in a circuit. Synergi
can handle subharmonics, or interharmonics. If a harmonic based on a whole number does
not converge, then Synergi will automatically check at h-0.25 or h+0.25 intervals. For
example, if a harmonic does not converge at 2.0, it will check 1.75 and 2.25. If it still does not
converge, Synergi will expand the check to 1.5 and 2.5.
Harmonics pose a problem because of the loss to customer and utility systems as well as the
extra costs that can be incurred because of damaged equipment, replacements, and repairs.
Current harmonics can distort the voltage waveform and cause voltage harmonics. Voltage

Analyzing a Model
distortion affects sensitive electronic loads, motors, and capacitors. In motors, negative
sequence harmonics produce rotating magnetic fields. These fields rotate in the opposite
direction of the fundamental magnetic field and could cause overheating and mechanical
oscillations. Capacitors do not generate harmonics, but the reactance (impedance) of a
capacitor decreases as the frequency increases. This causes the capacitor to act as a trap for
higher harmonic currents and magnify them. High harmonics can overheat the capacitors.
Harmonic
Electronic loads are sensitive and susceptible to a number of natural and unnatural
disturbances that affect the quality of a load. Circuit breakers trip for unknown reasons,
neutral conductors in balanced circuits overheat from excessive loads, and transformers with
an average load mysteriously overheat. These are symptoms of power quality disturbances,
the cause of which could be any number of problems, including sags, transients, swells,
harmonics, and momentary interruptions.
Power quality disturbances can be broken down into three types:
l RMS variations, including faults, improper wiring, equipment failure, sudden removal of
a large load, and weather.
l Transients, including sub-cycle disturbances, lightning strikes, capacitor switching,
removal of inductive load, and switching operations.
l Waveform distortion or harmonics, most often caused by modern electronics.
Synergi’s Harmonic Analysis application is designed to isolate and simulate harmonic power
quality issues. For more information, see "Harmonic analysis" on the previous page.
Preparing for a harmonic analysis

Before you perform a harmonic analysis, you must create harmonic curves and then assign
those curves to large customers in your model. You must also designate which sections will be
used during the harmonic analysis.
Creating and editing harmonic curves

Harmonic curves, like other devices, are created in the equipment warehouse and can then be
applied to any large customer in your model. When creating a harmonic curve, you will
probably want to have contributions at the 3rd, 9th or 15th harmonic to see a distorted neutral
current. If your model is heavily unbalanced, you will most likely see neutral distortion at
other harmonic values.
When setting up a harmonic curve, you can use the chart view in the Harmonics Curve Type
editor to set odd-numbered harmonics, from 3 to 25, up to 15 percent. In addition, the grid
view in the Harmonic Curve Type editor can be used to configure even-numbered harmonics
and angles from 0 to 100 percent. However, you may not have a need to do this unless you
are pulling raw data out of a BMI/Dranetz meter or harmonic load study.

Analyzing a Model
Creating a harmonic curve
To create a harmonic curve

2. Right-click and select New Device > Harmonic Curve.
3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new harmonic curve and then
click OK.
4. Use the Harmonic Curve Type editor to edit the settings for the harmonic curve. For
more information on the options you can edit, see "Editing a harmonic curve" below.
Editing a harmonic curve
To edit a harmonic curve, double-click the harmonic curve type name in the Warehouse tab of
the Synergi model explorer. From the Load tab of the Large Customer editor, you can also
click the edit button that is located next to the name of the selected harmonic profile.
The following list describes tasks that you can perform for a harmonic curve.
To edit general information for the curve
Edit the following options:
l Description. Type an optional description for the harmonic curve.
l Color. Select a color to represent the harmonic curve.
To edit curve data using the chart view
Click the Toggle button so that the harmonics chart view displays. Using the mouse, drag the
bar for each harmonic to set the desired percentage. The chart view can be used to set odd-
numbered harmonics, from 3 to 25, between 0 and 15 percent. To set even-numbered
harmonics or to set harmonic percentages from 15 to 100 percent, you must use the table
view.

Analyzing a Model
Harmonic Curve Type editor, chart view
To edit curve data using the table view

Click the Toggle button so that the harmonics table view displays.
The table view can be used to set harmonics for both odd- and even-numbered values
between 3 and 25, from 0 to 100 percent. Odd-numbered harmonic values can also be set in
the chart view between 0 and 15 percent.

Analyzing a Model
Harmonic Curve Type editor, table view
Deleting a harmonic curve
To delete a harmonic curve

2. Expand Harmonic Curves and then select the name of the harmonic curve that you
want to delete.

Analyzing a Model
Assigning a harmonic curve to a large customer
To apply a harmonic curve to a large customer

2. Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double-click the name of the
large customer that you want to edit.
3. In the Large Customer editor, select the Load tab.
4. Next to Harmonic profile, select the name of the harmonic curve that you want to
apply to the large customer.
Designating sections for harmonic monitoring
To designate a section for harmonic monitoring
to edit.
2. In the Section editor, select the Section tab.
3. Under Attributes, select the Monitor harmonic check box. Selecting this option will
enable the section for harmonic monitoring.
Configuring options for a harmonic analysis

Use the Harmonic Analysis Options editor to specify whether generators will be included in the
analysis and to set up an impedance trace file. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
To open the Harmonic Analysis Options editor

2. In the Power Quality group, select Harmonic > Settings.
The following list describes the options you can edit in the Harmonic Analysis Options editor.
Impedance trace
Use this text box to specify the file name for an impedance trace file that will be created after
you perform a harmonic impedance along path analysis or a harmonic impedance frequency
scan analysis. When either of those two analysis types has been performed, you can return to
this editor and click the “Open the file in Excel” file to view the impedance trace file in
Microsoft Excel.
The data will be saved automatically as a CSV file in your Output folder, which by default is a
subfolder in your Synergi documents folder. If the specified file name already exists, the
previous file will be replaced automatically by the new file.

Analyzing a Model
Include generators
Select this check box to include section generators in the harmonic analysis.
Harmonic load-flow analysis

The harmonic load-flow report uses information from the harmonic profile of a large customer
and any sections that have been enabled for harmonic monitoring (as described in
"Designating sections for harmonic monitoring" on the previous page). The resulting reports
show harmonic curves and total harmonic distortion (THD) throughout the system.
To perform a harmonic load-flow analysis

2. In the Power Quality group, click the Harmonic Load-Flow icon.
When the analysis is complete, the Harmonic Analysis report will display. See the
following procedure for more information on this report.
To view the harmonic load-flow analysis report
The Harmonic load-flow report includes the following chapters:
l Run Summary. The Run Summary chapter provides a brief overview of the analysis,
including the devices involved in the scan, the analysis year, spot and distributed load,
and warnings and fixes.
l THD Distribution. The THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) Distribution chapter shows a pie
chart that represents the miles of line in each percentage category. The example below
shows that approximately 75% of the line in the model contains less than 0.1% THD.
About 20% of the line in the model contains 2-3% THD.
l Section-based report chapters. The other chapters of the report are based on the
sections that were configured for harmonic monitoring. Each section will appear as a
chapter in the report and may include any of the following sub-reports:

Analyzing a Model
o Amp and Volt Values. The Amp and Volt Values bar chart represents the by-phase
current and voltage contribution as a percentage of the fundamental for each
harmonic order. This takes into account the model’s harmonic curves and load-
flow calculations.
o Volt Chart. The Volt Chart bar chart represents the by-phase voltage contribution
as a percentage of the fundamental for each harmonic order based on the model’s
harmonic curves and load-flow calculations.
o Amp Chart. The Amp Chart bar chart represents the by-phase current percent
contribution as a percentage of the fundamental for each harmonic order based on
the model’s harmonic curves and load-flow calculations.
o Neutral Chart. The Neutral Chart bar chart represents the neutral current
contribution of the fundamental for each harmonic order based on the model’s
harmonic curves and load-flow calculations.
o Volt Cycle. The Volt Cycle graph represents the non-sinusoidal by-phase current
waveform distortion due to harmonic current.
o Amp Cycle. The Amp Cycle graph represents the non-sinusoidal by-phase current
waveform distortion due to harmonic content.
o Neutral Curve. The Neutral Curve graph represents the non-sinusoidal neutral
current waveform distortion due to harmonic content.
Harmonic impedance frequency scan analysis

The impedance frequency scan looks at a particular section (the section that has been “Set for
Analysis”) and presents the driving point impedance as a function of frequency or harmonic
order.
To set up a harmonic impedance frequency scan analysis

2. In the Power Quality group, select Harmonic > Impedance Frequency Scan.
To perform a harmonic impedance frequency scan analysis
1. Make sure you have configured Synergi to run a harmonic impedance frequency scan
analysis. For more information, see "Harmonic impedance along path analysis" on the
facing page.
3. In the Power Quality group, click the Harmonic icon.
When the analysis is complete, the impedance frequency scan report will display. See
the next procedure below for more information.
To view the impedance frequency scan report
The impedance frequency scan is designed to aid in distribution planning by helping you spot
potential problems with resonant frequencies. It performs a full network analysis of the
feeder, including loads, capacitors, generators, transformers, and line models, which
contribute to the harmonic driving point impedance of a section. These devices may be

Analyzing a Model
upstream or downstream from the section being analyzed, and they may be on or off the
feeder path. Harmonic analysis does not model filters, harmonic bus voltages, or harmonic
load currents. The impedance frequency scan report includes the following chapters:
l Positive Sequence Z. This plot represents the positive sequence impedance in ohms as
seen at the load end of the selected section.
l Positive Sequence R, X. This plot represents the positive sequence resistance and
reactance in ohms as seen at the load end of the selected section.
l Phase Z. This plot represents the per-phase impedance (phase domain) in ohms as seen
at the load end of the selected section.
l Phase R. This plot represents the per-phase resistance (phase domain) in ohms as seen
l Phase X. This plot represents the per-phase reactance (phase domain) in ohms as seen
l Sequence Domain Z. This plot represents the positive and zero sequence impedance in
ohms as seen at the load end of the selected section.
l Sequence Domain R, X. This plot represents the positive and zero sequence resistance
and reactance in ohms as seen at the load end of the selected section.
l Impedance values. As an alternative to the plot chapters, this grid-style report contains
harmonic impedance values at increments of 1/4 the fundamental frequency.
Harmonic impedance along path analysis

The Harmonic impedance along path analysis will calculate the harmonic impedance for
sections from the selection point all the way back to the source.
To set up a harmonic impedance along path analysis

2. In the Power Quality group, select Harmonic > Impedance Along Path.
To perform a harmonic impedance along path analysis
1. Make sure you have configured Synergi to run a harmonic impedance along path
analysis. For more information, see the previous procedure.
3. In the Power Quality group, click the Harmonic icon.
When the analysis is complete, the Harmonic Analysis report will display. See"Harmonic
load-flow analysis" on page 687 for more information.
Unfused tap analysis

Synergi’s unfused tap analysis identifies areas in the model where taps lack fusing. Faults on
these sections will result in the operation of main-line protection. An event on a small tap
serving just a few customers could impact hundreds of customers fed off the main.

Analyzing a Model
The report that is generated by this analysis includes a Summary chapter that shows the
number of unfused taps for each feeder, as well as exposure miles (exposed length from the
start of the tap to downstream devices) and exposure customer miles (number of customers
fed from the nearest upstream device) per feeder. Additional report chapters show more
detailed information on each feeder for unfused taps as well as fused taps, and also the
exposed miles by conductor type.
To perform an unfused tap analysis

2. In the Tools group, click Unfused Tap Analysis.
Device risk ranking analysis

Device risk ranking is useful to compare the risk factors of a variety of devices. This gives the
ability to evaluate how a device might affect customer reliability. The risk ranking takes into
account the number of customers the device serves, the failure rate of the device itself, and
the number of repair hours for the device.
First, a consequence value is determined by multiplying the number of customers by the
repair hours. This consequence value is then multiplied by the failure rate of the device. This
result is called the risk factor.
To use this tool, the model must have customer count values populated. It should also have
failure rates and repair times entered for transformers, feeders, breakers, and so on.
The report chapters generated by this application can be opened in Excel. At that point,
various scatter charts, pivot tables, and diagrams can be utilized.
To perform a device risk ranking analysis

2. In the Tools group, click the Device Risk Ranking icon.
Reliability Event Management Wizard

The Reliability Event Management wizard is a powerful tool for handling large sets of outage
event data that comes from your OMS or other system. The wizard consists of three sections
for reliability management: Typical Actions, Maintenance, and Advanced. The selections you
make will be automatically saved as you use the wizard.
To run the Reliability Events Management wizard
1. Use one of the following methods to open the Reliability Event Management wizard:
l In the Synergi ribbon, select the Forge tab. Then, in the Model Forge group, click
Outage Events.
—or—

Analyzing a Model
l In the Synergi ribbon, select the Reliability tab. Then, in the Tools group, click
Outage Events.
2. On the first page of the Reliability Event Management wizard, select from one of the
following actions. It is important to note that in order to use the Reliability Event
Management wizard, a text file containing outage data must already exist in MiddleLink
format.
Category Description
Typical actions to l Import events in data file(s) into a reliability

load outage events data set. Select this option to load outage events in
MiddleLink format from one or more text files and
place them into an Oracle, SQL Server, or Access
data set. Note that the target data set must be
configured as an “Events” DSA in order to be used by
this wizard.
l Create model exposure zones and process
events. Select this option to create zones, correlate
outages, and calculate failure rates with events in a
data set and a model in Synergi.
Maintenance Once outage events are loaded and zones are created, you
can perform maintenance operations on your data sets.
l Report on event data set.

l Create/destroy reliability data sets.
l Merge data sets.
Advanced l Load exposure zones from data set to

Synergi. Select this option to load exposure zones
from the data set into Synergi, remove existing
exposure zones, or use phasing to calculate failure
rates. This applies to the currently loaded model
only.
3. Click Next and follow the prompts throughout the wizard.
Performance
Motor start analysis
Starting large motors can cause severe disturbances to the motor, nearby loads, and loads
throughout the feeder. Synergi’s motor start analysis (MSA) evaluates the effects of starting
large motors on distribution systems. It enables you to examine voltage drop at the feeder,

Analyzing a Model
service, and terminals of the motor after it is switched onto the system and throughout its
start. The analysis is a dynamic analysis resulting in time domain-based results.
By performing a motor start analysis, you can determine and analyze the following:
l Motor speed and torque versus acceleration time
l Motor terminal voltage and current draw versus time
l kW and kvar into service versus time
l Service drop versus time
l Effects of various types of starters
The speed-torque/accelerating time study can help to verify that starting times are within
acceptable limits. It can also help determine the best sequence for starting motors and the
minimum delay required between the successive starting of multiple motors.
To perform a motor start analysis

2. In the Facilities group, click the Motor Studies icon.
Performance comparison
Model performance comparison presents operational and cost comparisons of various
modeling alternatives by comparing the model in memory to variations of that model stored
in the gallery. When run, performance comparison generates a report listing the following
comparisons:
l Low voltage and total kw demand at minimum load
l High voltage and total kw demand peak load
l Losses at peak
l Capital cost difference between base model and gallery model
l Operating cost difference between base model and gallery model
Performance comparison assumes that model loads are allocated at peak demand. To
facilitate these comparisons, it runs two different load-flow analyses:
l A normal load-flow on the model, producing results at peak loading.
l A load-flow after applying a “light run” factor to model loads, simulating a time of
minimum system demands. The light run factor is essentially a multiplier value that you
can assign in the Performance Comparison options editor, as described in "Setting up a
performance comparison analysis" below.
During the “light run,” all loads are multiplied by the same factor to determine minimum
loading conditions. This approach is a very simple means of simulating light-load
modeling, but it should give useful numbers within the context of other assumptions.
Setting up a performance comparison analysis

Perform the following procedure to set up a performance comparison analysis.

Analyzing a Model
To set up a performance comparison analysis

2. In the Performance group, select Performance Comparison > Settings.
3. On the left side of the Performance Comparison editor, select from the different tab
names to access the available performance comparison settings. Refer to the topics
listed below for more information.
l "Models tab – Performance Comparison editor" below
l "Costs tab – Performance Comparison editor" below
l "Analysis tab – Performance Comparison editor" below
Models tab – Performance Comparison editor

Use the Models tab in the Performance Comparison editor to select which models in the
gallery will be compared to the model in memory. Performance comparison can compare a
maximum of five different gallery models.
The lower half of the Performance Comparison editor, under “Models in gallery”, lists models
in the gallery that are available for analysis. The upper half of the editor, under “Compare
model in memory to”, lists models that will be included in the performance comparison
analysis.
l To add a model to the analysis: Select the model that you want to add in the “Models in
gallery” area and then click the Up arrow button.
l To remove a model from the analysis: Select the model that you want to remove in the
“Compare model in memory to” area and click the Down arrow button.
For instructions on opening the Performance Comparison editor, see "Setting up a

performance comparison analysis" on the previous page. For more information on the gallery,
see "Using the gallery" on page 159.
Costs tab – Performance Comparison editor

Use the Costs tab of the Performance Comparison editor to set all of the costs associated with
the installation, maintenance, and removal of system equipment. To edit a value, simply
double-click the current value and then type the new value.
The cost values that you set here are saved from one Synergi session to the next. Once they
are properly set, you should be able to run continuous analyses without having to adjust them
again, unless of course you purposefully need to change them.
For instructions on opening the Performance Comparison editor, see "Setting up a
performance comparison analysis" on the previous page. For more information on how these
costs are used within the analysis, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Analysis tab – Performance Comparison editor

The following list describes the options you can edit from the Analysis tab of the Performance
Comparison editor. For instructions on opening the editor, see "Setting up a performance

Analyzing a Model
comparison analysis" on the previous page.

Add phase factor and Change phase factor
Adding phases and rephasing can have a significant impact on system performance and the
cost of delivering electricity. The 'add phase factor” and “change phase factor” are global
multipliers that are applied against existing line cost parameters for all conductor types.
When a new phase is added or a line is rephased, these factors are multiplied against the
original line costs to derive the phase change costs. For example, if a phase is added to a
single-phase line and the “add phase factor” is 1.5, this operation will cost 1.5 times as much
as adding the original single-phase line, as specified in your cost data.
Average load factor
Multiplier used to determine the average load, for cost calculations. For more information on
this factor, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Light run factor
Multiplier used for the peak load to simulate a minimum load condition for the “light” load-
flow run. For more information on this factor, see "Performance comparison" on page 692.
Peak charge
Peak charge to the utility per kW purchased, generally during a time of peak demand.
Secondary loss factor
Multiplier used to determine the percentage of total loss represented by secondary loss. For
more information on this factor, see the Synergi Electric Technical Reference.
Utility kWh cost
Cost to the utility per kWh delivered. This value is ultimately used to determine the cost of
losses.
Running a performance comparison analysis

Before running a performance comparison analysis, take note of the following:
l Equipment data. When you run performance comparison analysis, Synergi uses the
equipment data that is currently in memory. It does not load or analyze any equipment
data that may be contained in the gallery model files. This setup allows you to make
controlled comparisons between different configurations of equipment data as well as
model data. For example, you could make changes to regulator type ratings and run
different comparisons, to see the effect.
l Multi-year modeling. Like most analyses, performance comparison uses the current
model year to run the analysis. The analysis year is used for both the model in memory
and any models in the gallery to which it is compared. For example, if you have the
interface set to “Year 2” and you run a performance comparison analysis, Synergi will
analyze Year 2 data in both the model in memory and the models in the gallery.
Perform the following procedure to run a performance comparison analysis.

Analyzing a Model
To run a performance comparison analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Performance Comparison editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a performance
comparison analysis" on page 692.
3. In the Performance group, click the Performance Comparison icon.
Voltage optimization analysis

The voltage optimization analysis (formerly known as the CVR analysis or conservation
reduction analysis) analyzes the effect of reducing voltage settings on main-line regulators
and substation transformers. Voltage settings are reduced and the effects on downstream
minimum voltage, loading, regulators, and exceptions are reported. This analysis can help
you determine the minimum safe source voltage, which may help you conserve energy.
To set up a voltage optimization analysis

2. In the Performance group, select Voltage Optimization > Settings.
3. Use the Voltage Optimization Analysis Options editor to set up the voltage range for the
Voltage Optimization analysis and also to set the interval that will be used for stepping
through the analysis. The following list describes the options that you can edit.
l Minimum downstream volts. The minimum downstream volts fields run
against three-phase transformers and voltage regulators. You can specify the
minimum volts for one phase and three phases.
l LTC starting volt setting. The LTC starting voltage setting represents a user-
input high that will be progressively lowered to a setting that will keep the
downstream voltages above a certain value.
To perform a voltage optimization analysis

2. In the Performance group, click the Voltage Optimization icon.
LTC analysis
Synergi’s LTC analysis can be used to perform the following tasks:
l Determine an optional regulator position. The LTC analysis includes a regulator
positioning option that helps you determine the proper location for an existing regulator
in your system. To do this, Synergi simulates the movement of the regulator up and
downstream, section by section, and produces a comparative set of results. After the
analysis, you can look at results for different regulator locations on a section-by-section
basis and determine the optimal location.

Analyzing a Model
l Set regulator R and X values. Using the regulator voltage setting and the minimum
downstream voltage as input, an LTC analysis can attempt to find R and X settings for a
regulator that will keep the lowest voltage downstream above the specified minimum.
Peak load conditions are used to determine the regulator R and X settings, and these
conditions are reported. In addition, minimum load conditions are evaluated and
reported with the regulator set up with the proposed settings.
Determining an optimal regulator position

The LTC analysis includes a regulator positioning option that helps you determine the proper
location for an existing regulator in your system. To do this, Synergi simulates the movement
of the regulator up and downstream, section by section, and produces a comparative set of
results. After the analysis, you can look at results for different regulator locations on a
section-by-section basis and determine the optimal location.
Regulator position processing

Initially, the regulator position analysis moves the regulator under analysis to the logical end
of its feed branch. Then, it steps it back to the feeder source, section by section. For each
section on the way back, the analysis records important load-flow-based results and presents
them in a comparative manner following the analysis run.
In some cases, model topology may limit how far a regulator can be moved. For example,
during the initial movement to the end of the feed branch, the analysis can only move the
regulator as far as it can find a clear, logical electrical path. If it encounters a junction of
three or more sections, the downstream path becomes ambiguous and the movement will
stop there. Also, a change in phasing during the upstream walk may also limit how close the
analysis can bring the regulator to the feeder source.
Regulator position never moves a regulator permanently. After the analysis, the model will
appear exactly as it did beforehand. The analysis only produces analytical results, which you
can then use to manually move the regulator if desired.
Setting up a regulator position analysis

Perform the following procedure to set up a regulator position analysis.
To set up a regulator position analysis
1. Make sure that you have selected the feeder that contains the regulator to be evaluated.
For more information, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
2. If the current feeder selection set has more than one active regulator, locate the section
that holds the desired regulator. Right-click on the section and select Set for Analysis.
4. In the Performance group, select LTC Analysis > Settings.
5. In the Regulator and LTC Setup editor, select Regulator positioning along current
path.

Analyzing a Model
Performing a regulator position analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a regulator position analysis.
To perform a regulator position analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Regulator and LTC Setup editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a regulator
position analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Performance group, click the LTC Analysis icon.
Viewing the results of a regulator position analysis

The charts produced by the regulator position analysis show the trends in voltage, loading,
taps, and other parameters as the regulator is moved from the source to the branch end. The
following figure shows an example of a regulator position chart.
Regulator position chart, showing amps handled by the regulator as it gets farther from
the source
Determining regulator R and X settings

Using the regulator voltage setting and the minimum downstream voltage as input, an LTC
analysis can attempt to find R and X settings for the regulator that will keep the lowest voltage
downstream above the specified minimum.

Analyzing a Model
Peak load conditions are used to determine the regulator R and X settings, and these
conditions are reported. In addition, minimum load conditions are evaluated and reported
with the regulator set up with the proposed settings.
This option for the LTC analysis evaluates one regulator at a time. The regulator must be
connected in a Wye-gnd connection. First house, tap limiter, gang operation, and reverse flow
settings are disabled.
Setting up a regulator R and X settings LTC analysis
To open the Regulator and LTC Setup editor

2. In the Performance group, select LTC Analysis > Settings.
The following list describes the options that you can edit in the Regulator and LTC Setup
editor.
Minimum
Specify the minimum downstream voltage that you want the regulator to allow.
Minimum load
If you do not select the “Use customer load curves” check box, feeder load can be used
directly. In this case, specify a factor (such as 20%) that will be used to multiply the loads to
get minimum loading on the feeder.
Use customer load curves
Select this check box to have Synergi consider load curves as assigned by customer zone.
When this option is selected, the peak and minimum load times are found and used in
Regulator Setting analysis. For more information on customer load curves, see "Customer
load curves/time-of-day analysis" on page 294.
V setting
Specify the regulator set point.
Performing a regulator setting analysis

Perform the following procedure to run a regulator R and X settings LTC analysis. During the
analysis, Synergi will perform the following steps.
1. Determine R/X ratio.

2. At peak load, find R and X values.
3. Evaluate regulator at peak load and minimum load.
The R/X ratio is determined from a weighted average of downstream section impedances, as
follows:

Analyzing a Model
Equation 4-2.
The factor is weighted by the current flow through the downstream line. Long sections are
going to be weighted higher. Sections with a larger current flow are going to be weighted
higher.
The R/X ratio is not listed in the report that is produced by the LTC analysis. However, the
ratio between the R setting and the X setting is the same as the R/X ratio.
To perform a regulator R and X settings LTC analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Regulator and LTC Setup editor to configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a regulator R and
X settings LTC analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Performance group, click the LTC Analysis icon.
Regulator R and X settings LTC analysis examples
Example 1
The following is a report from a sample run:

Analyzing a Model
Regulator setting sample report
The voltage setting, R and X settings, and bandwidth are listed at the top of the report. The
voltage setting is a reflection of the user input. The bandwidth is always 2V. Keep in mind that
the settings are always in volts on a 120V base.
The next section of the report lists the results for the regulator and feeder under peak load
conditions, as follows.
l The expected taps are given. Vrr is the voltage on the regulating relay within the
regulator’s controller.
Equation 4-3.
The voltage of the regulating relay is used to determine if a tap change is needed. If the
voltage is more than one-half the bandwidth away from the voltage setting, a tap

Analyzing a Model
change will occur. The voltage is included on the reports so the effects of the R and X
settings can be seen. For more information on voltage regulators, see "Regulators" on
page 452.
l The minimum and maximum downstream volts are determined by looking at all line
sections downstream from the regulator. Sections fed by the regulator under study and
a second regulator are not considered.
l The regulator output volts and amps are listed to help with the evaluation of first house
settings and tap limiter values.
The same results are then listed for minimum feeder loading.
Example 2
In the previous example, the voltage setting was 120V. If the voltage setting were 122V, you
would expect that the tap positions under peak load would not change because the regulator
needs to be at the same tap to meet the minimum voltage constraint. The following is a report
from another sample run, with the 122V setting:

Analyzing a Model
Sample report, using the 122V voltage setting
The R and X settings are different because the voltage setting is different. Notice that the peak
load tap settings are the same. The minimum and maximum downstream voltages at peak are
also the same.
The minimum load values are very different. The regulator taps are higher and the
downstream voltages are higher with the 122V setting. Comparing the two examples,
therefore, you might decide that the low regulator voltage setting is better. As with this
situation, multiple runs of the regulator settings tool may often be needed to get a good
picture of the possible settings.
Capacitor flicker analysis

The capacitor flicker analysis calculates the momentary voltage effects that discharged
capacitors will have if and when they are switched on. For each capacitor, Synergi sets the
capacitor as “off,” records current voltage levels, and then switches the capacitor on to
evaluate the momentary fluctuation in voltage.
The “Capacitors” chapter in the resulting report shows two percentages for each capacitor.
The first percentage, “Flicker at Cap,” shows the flicker percentage at the capacitor. The
second percentage, “Worst Flicker,” shows the maximum flicker at a section in the parent
feeder. Other report chapters list all sections on a feeder and their flicker due to each
capacitor operation.
To perform a capacitor flicker analysis

2. In the Performance group, click Capacitor Flicker.
Conductor selection analysis

Synergi’s conductor selection analysis can help planners determine the best conductor type(s)
for a group of sections, based on performance and cost. Conductor selection looks at queried
sections and attempts to reconductor them with the most optimal conductor with
consideration of voltage, loading, and cost. After the analysis, you can compare the
construction and performance of the proposed model to the original base model and optionally
have Synergi reconductor the base model automatically.
To use conductor selection effectively, you must have material and installation cost data
available for the conductor types you want to examine. This cost data is specified in the Costs
tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor. For more information, see "Costs tab – Model
and Analysis Options editor" on page 505.
Conductor selection analysis processing

When conductor selection runs, it breaks up the current query set of the base model into
groups, based on:

Analyzing a Model
l Configuration change (including phasing)

l Conductor change
l Line split, including wandering laterals
For each group, Synergi steps through the conductors in the active cost file one at a time,
simulating reconductoring and running load-flow/fault studies. Of the conductors it evaluates,
it chooses a single optimal conductor for the whole group and then moves to the next group.
In areas of lighter loading, Synergi attempts to find a smaller conductor as applicable that
satisfies your constraints. A conductor is only evaluated if it matches the
overhead/underground status of the original conductor.
The most upstream groups are considered first, and no group is analyzed until all applicable
feeding groups have been completed. In this manner, results are cumulative and must be
regarded as a cohesive answer, rather than recommendations for individual groups and
sections.
Setting up a conductor selection analysis

Perform the following steps to set up a conductor selection analysis.
To set up a conductor selection analysis
1. Place the sections that you want to analyze into the query set. For more information,
see "Using the query set" on page 249.
2. Perform the following steps to verify cost data, including the specified costs file, using
the Model and Analysis Options editor.
a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.
b. In the Settings group, click Model.
c. In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab and then verify the
cost data, including the specified costs file. For more information on cost data,
see "Costs tab – Model and Analysis Options editor" on page 505.
3. Perform the following steps to open the Conductor Selection editor:
a. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Performance tab.
b. In the Performance group, select Conductor Select > Settings.
4. In the Conductor Selection editor, edit the following settings as appropriate:
l Max Volt Drop
l Max Line Loading
l Fault Amps (min and max)
l Cumulative ZS (min and max)

Analyzing a Model
Performing a conductor selection analysis

Perform the following procedure to perform a conductor selection analysis. After the analysis
is complete, the Conductor Selection report will provide a comparative view of the different
conductoring scenarios, section-by-section. While studying the results, keep in mind that the
recommendations must be taken as a whole. Any selective application of individual section
results will render the sum of the analysis irrelevant.
The reports include comparative results between the “before and after” models. You can also
review summary information on each conductor that was used and how much.
To perform a conductor selection analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Conductor Selection editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up a conductor selection
analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Performance group, click the Conductor Select icon.
Economic analysis
Synergi’s Economics module focuses on the economics of engineering. This module provides a
venue for many important tools to study distribution systems in light of Smart Grid, Applied
Intelligence, and alternative energy options.
The Economics module focuses on maintenance costs, as opposed to capital costs. The trend
in the electric utility industry seems to be moving toward the operations side as being
responsible for maintenance costs and issues. The Economics module is designed to
determine the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of maintenance on feeders and substations.
To set up your model for economic analysis, you must create cost zones and assign them to
applicable sections in your model. Cost zones define maintenance costs for feeders and
substations, as well as cost multipliers for fuses, equipment, distribution transformers, and
customers. Cost zones are created as individual devices in your equipment warehouse and
then assigned to the sections in your model. For more information, see "Managing cost zones"
below.
Once these tasks have been performed, you are ready to perform an economic analysis on
your model. For more information, see "Performing an economic analysis" on page 706.
Managing cost zones

Cost zones provide maintenance costs for feeders and substations, as well as cost multipliers
for fuses, equipment, distribution transformers, and customers. These values are combined
with performance metrics, such as load factor, utilization, and efficiency, to determine the
cost per MW or MWHr.
To create a cost zone

Analyzing a Model
2. Right-click and select New Device > Cost Zone.

3. In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new cost zone and then click OK.
4. Use the Cost Zone editor to edit the settings for the cost zone. The following procedure
provides information on the options you can edit.
To edit a cost zone

2. Expand Zones - Cost and then double-click the name of the cost zone that you want to
edit.
3. Use the Cost Zone editor to edit the following options:
Line Maintenance Specifies the yearly maintenance costs per mile for
Costs 1 Phase Lines, 2 Phase Lines, and 3 Phase Lines. If
you are performing multi-year modeling, you can also
type a yearly percentage increase in the % Increase
text box.
Maintenance Cost Specifies a cost factor for each of the following

Multipliers equipment types. If you do not want to apply a multiplier,
use 1.0 as the multiplier.
l Fuses
l Equipment
l Dist. Trans.
l Customers
Color Specifies a color that will represent any sections where

this cost zone has been applied, when the Synergi map
display’s color by scheme is set to Cost Zones. The color
is also shown in the list of cost zones in the Model tab of
the model explorer.
For more information on applying color by schemes, see

"Theme map settings" on page 98.
To assign a cost zone to a section
to edit.
3. Next to Cost Zones, select the name of the cost zone that you want to assign to the
section.

Analyzing a Model
To delete a cost zone

2. Expand Zones - Cost and then select the name of the cost zone that you want to delete.
Performing an economic analysis

The economic analysis uses information from the values determined in cost zones (optional),
customer classes, and customer zones indicated in Section editors, as well as the secondary
loss factor in the economic analysis options. These components work in conjunction to
generate the results of the analysis.
When the economic analysis is complete, the analysis results will display. The analysis results
contain factors calculated for each feeder and substation. Each one will contain monthly
determinations of peak demand, utilization, energy loss, load factor, and efficiency. It also
contains hourly determinations for losses, utilization, and load factors. These results can be
interpreted and studied to guide the decision-making process for equipment replacement or
maintenance.
To perform an economic analysis

2. In the Performance group, click the Economic icon.
Model Inspector
The Model Inspector is a collection of reports that are designed to find problems demonstrated
by the model or with model data. The Model Inspector includes the reports listed below. Each
report can be individually enabled or disabled in the Reports tab of the Model Inspection
Options editor. In addition, the asterisk ( * ) character in the report names below denotes a
configurable value in the Settings tab of the Model Inspection Options editor. The values
shown in the report name below are the default values that are set up by the Synergi
installation.
l Check for voltages < 115.0* v
l Show sections with customers but no kW load
l Show nodes that are 50* ft apart (one node fed and one unfed)
l List unfed sections
l List unenergized loads
l List switches where switch rating < section conductor rating
l Protective device coverage report
l Report loading levels: 50* % < loading <= 100* %
l List sections where the phasing specified on the section is different than the phasing that
is propagated through the section from the substation, feeders, and transformers.

Analyzing a Model
Setting up the Model Inspector

Perform the following procedure to select which reports you want to generate when running
the Model Inspector, and also to set up other options that are related to specific reports.
To set up the Model Inspector

2. In the Model QA group, select Model Inspector > Settings.
3. In the Model Inspection Options editor, select the Reports tab. Use the Reports tab to
select which reports you want to generate with the Model Inspector. The following
reports are available. Note that the asterisk ( * ) character in the report names below
denotes a value that can be edited in the Settings tab of the Model Inspection Options
editor, as described in the next step of this procedure. The values shown in the report
name below are the default values that are set up by the Synergi installation.
l Check for voltages < 115.0* v
l Show sections with customers but no kW load
l Show nodes that are 50* ft apart (one node fed and one unfed) *
l List unfed sections
l List unenergized loads
l List switches where switch rating < section conductor rating
l Protective device coverage report
l Report loading levels: 50* % < loading <= 100* %
l Section specified phasing differs from propagated phasing
4. Select the Settings tab. Use the Settings tab to enter values that configure the data
parameters for specific Model Inspector reports. The following list describes the options
that you can edit.
l Distance between ‘close’ nodes. Specify the distance between nodes that will
be reported in the “Show nodes that are X ft. apart” report. The default value is 50
feet.
l Only identify fed/unfed close nodes. Select this check box to only evaluate
fed / unfed node combinations in the “Show nodes that are X ft apart” report. In
other words, if two fed nodes are within X feet apart, they will not be reported;
likewise, if two unfed nodes are within X feet apart, they will also not be reported.
If this check box is cleared, then all nodes and all node combinations will be
considered.
l Loading level range. Specify the loading level range that will be considered in
the “Report loading levels” report. The default range is 50% to 100%.
l Low voltage threshold. Specify the low voltage value that will be evaluated in
the “Check for voltages” report. The default value is 115 v.

Analyzing a Model
Running the Model Inspector

Perform the following procedure to run the Model Inspector.
To run the Model Inspector
1. Before you run the Model Inspector, make sure you have used the Model Inspection
Options editor to select which reports you want the Model Inspector to generate, and
also to configure specific data parameters that will be considered in the report, if
desired. For more information, see "Setting up the Model Inspector" on the previous
page.
3. In the Model QA group, click the Model Inspector icon. Your results will appear in a
new Synergi tab.
System health analysis

The system health analysis (formerly known as the system status analysis) provides a quick
overview of the feeders in your session. The analysis generates results from the load-flow,
fault, and reliability analyses and arranges the results, along with various model trace
parameters, in the analysis report.
To perform a system health analysis

2. In the Model QA group, click the System Health icon.
Line Construction report

The Line Construction report provides detailed information on the various conductor
configurations in your model. Based on the conductors assigned by phase and spacing values
throughout the model, the report evaluates each possible different configuration for
admittance and impedance characteristics. It also reports the total distance of each
configuration, along with how many sections are included and what they are.
To view the Line Construction report

2. In the Model QA group, click Line Construction.
Uncertainty analysis
The uncertainty analysis can be used to test several different components of a system by
placing percentage variations on key parameters. Percentage variations can be based on your
own estimations and hunches, or on arbitrary numbers that you want to test on your model.

Analyzing a Model
The goal of an uncertainty analysis is to determine the confidence intervals, or values or

variance, for several different key components in your model, including distributed load kVA,
spot load kVA, distributed load I, Z, PQ (captures the impact of a load with voltage change),
line length, line height, and conductor spacing. Based on the results, you may decide to make
changes to your plans and/or structure.
The uncertainty analysis uses load-flow to generate the results, which are confidence
intervals broken into the following chapters:
l Summary
l Amps
l Volts
l kW
l kvar
l Z1
l Z0
Setting up an uncertainty analysis

Perform the following procedure to set up an uncertainty analysis.
To set up an Uncertainty Analysis

2. In the Model QA group, select Uncertainty > Settings.
3. In the Parameter Variation section of the Uncertainty Analysis Options editor, enter
percentage values in as many or as few of the parameter variation fields as you choose.
Each parameter variation will affect the percentage variation of its proper components.
4. In the Number of Analysis Runs section, select a small, medium, or large sample size.
The analysis will run 50, 100, or 200 load-flows, respectively.
Performing an uncertainty analysis

Perform the following procedure to run an uncertainty analysis. When the analysis is
complete, the analysis report will display. The uncertainty analysis report uses load-flow to
generate the data within the different report chapters.
The Uncertainty Summary chapter contains the minimum and maximum range for both single
and three-phase sections, as well as an average range.
The Amps, Volts, kW, kvar, Z1, and Z0 chapters display results in bar chart form. The
example chart below reflects the results of a 25% variation entered in Distributed load kVA.
This chart shows that approximately 38% of the model will contain a + or - 20-30% variation
in amps. Approximately 23% of the model will contain a 10-20% variation. If other
parameters are given variations, the results could fluctuate.

Analyzing a Model
Model Interval chart
To perform an uncertainty analysis
1. If you have not already done so, use the Uncertainty Analysis Options editor to
configure options related to the analysis. For more information, see "Setting up an
uncertainty analysis" on the previous page.
3. In the Model QA group, click the Uncertainty icon.
Unit tests
Unit tests can be used to test small models for line calculations and load calculations. The
small models are analyzed by hand, and the expected results are made a part of the
MiddleLink file that is used to describe the system. Synergi will process the MiddleLink unit
test file and generate a report showing which tests passed and which tests failed.
Unit tests help ensure that Synergi’s calculations remain accurate and consistent as future
updates are made to the Synergi application, architecture, and database. Performing unit
tests will reduce costs and improve the time needed to upgrade to new versions of Synergi.
Unit test files must be saved in your Synergi Electric “Unit” folder, which by default is in the
following location (Windows 7), where “[User Name]” is your Windows user name:
C:\Users\[User Name]\Documents\DNVGL\Synergi Electric\6\Unit

Analyzing a Model
The Units folder can be changed from the Paths tab on the Synergi Preferences editor. For
more information, see "Paths preferences" on page 39.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on performing a unit test.
To perform a unit test

2. In the Model QA section, select Unit Tests.
3. In the Unit Test editor, select the check box for each unit test that you want to perform.
4. Click Finish to run the unit test.
Zones report
The Zones report provides a detailed look at zone characteristics and implementation in your
model. The report includes the following items:
l Total distance and makeup of each exposure zone
l Overall root cause contributions
l Total distance of each customer zone
l Total kVA assigned to each customer class
Perform the following procedure to view the Zones report.
To view the Zones report

2. In the Model QA group, click Zones.
Power Tool applications

Synergi includes a series of miscellaneous calculation, analysis, and reporting applications,
known collectively as the “power tools.” These useful tools can help you understand certain
detailed aspects of your model and configure it accurately.
Use the Power Tools Options editor to select the specific power tool that you want to run.
Some power tools contain additional settings, which are enabled when you select the power
tool name. These options are described with the individual power tool sections that are listed
at the end of this topic. Once you have selected a power tool application and set up any
options, if required, you can run the power tool application from the Performance tab in the
Synergi ribbon.
The power tool applications run on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For
more information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
To select a power tool application to run

2. In the Applications group, select Power Tools > Settings.

Analyzing a Model
3. In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select the power tool application that you
want to run. If required, set additional options as described in the sections that are
listed at the end of this topic.
To run a power tool application

2. In the Applications group, click the Power Tools icon.
I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool

Loads in Synergi are modeled with constant impedance, constant current, and constant power
components. As such, I,Z,PQ Calibration is a calculation tool designed to help you find the
appropriate percentages of these components, depending on the load you are modeling.
Realistic percentages of load components contribute to the accuracy of your models and the
reliability of analyses.
The I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool also simplifies the process of modeling complex loads. It
can aid in finding basic values for constant current and constant impedance loads to make the
metered demands versus feeder voltage response more realistic.
Setting up the I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool

Perform the following procedure to set up an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis.
To set up the I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool

3. In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select I,Z,PQ Calibration.
4. Select either or both of the following options as appropriate:
l Do Not Calibrate Spot Loads. Select this option to calibrate distributed loads
only.
l Ignore Customer Class I,Z,PQ. Select this option to disregard I,Z,PQ values
assigned to customer classes. For more information on I,Z,PQ and customer
classes, see "Load %I, %Z, %PQ" on page 491.
Performing an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis

Perform the following procedure to run an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis. The I,Z,PQ Calibration
power tool runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more information
on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.

Analyzing a Model
To perform an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis
1. Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to perform an I,Z,PQ
Calibration analysis, as described in "Setting up the I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool" on
the previous page.
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool

The Ten-Year Growth Report power tool analyzes your model and summarizes the year-by-
year impact of ten years of growth. The analysis results in a report listing demands, low
voltage, and maximum loading values for each feeder over a ten-year period.
Ten year growth study report
The Ten-Year Growth Report power tool uses customer zone or section growth rates, as set up
in the Growth Options editor (as described in "Selecting the active load growth group" on
page 290).
Setting up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool

Perform the following procedure to set up the Ten-Year Growth Report.

Analyzing a Model
To set up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool

3. In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Ten-year Growth Report.
Generating a Ten-Year Growth Report

Perform the following procedure to generate a Ten-Year Growth Report. The Ten-Year Growth
Report power tool runson the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more
information on feeder selection, see "Selecting feeders" on page 68.
To generate a Ten-Year Growth Report
1. Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to generate a Ten-Year Growth
Report, as described in "Setting up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool" on the
previous page.
R&D Analysis
The R&D analysis is an area where special research and development efforts are developed
and tested by DNV GL. These tools, when available, are launched through R&D scripts, which
generally are not provided as a part the Synergi Electric installation. DNV GL’s Technical
Support team will provide you with further instructions if you need to use this area of Synergi.

Ribbon Reference
RIBBON REFERENCE
Synergi Electric uses a ribbon to provide quick and easy access to the many features that are
available with the program. The ribbon replaces the more "traditional" design of menus and
toolbar buttons that are associated with older software programs.
The ribbon gives Synergi a sleek look and modern design, but let's be honest — there are a lot
of options in Synergi! The User Guide that you are now reading provides complete
documentation for all of the functionality available in Synergi, and includes many tools to help
you search for the content you need. The Ribbon Reference is one of these tools. It is a
reference guide that you can use to find the most relevant topic for any button or control in
any Synergi ribbon.
To use the Ribbon Reference, first find the section for the ribbon you want to use. Then, find
the subsection for the group you want to view. There you will find a table for all of the options
in that group. The table will include the option name, a brief description, and most
importantly, a link to where you can find detailed information on that option.
The Ribbon Reference was conceived during a lunch-time discussion with several Synergi
Electric users at DNV GL's 2016 International Software Summit, held in Hershey PA. We
always welcome your thoughts on how to improve our documentation and our software. Use
the contact information provided in "Contacting technical support" on page 28 to let us know
your ideas and suggestions.
For more information on using the Synergi ribbon, see "Ribbon" on page 88.

Ribbon Reference
Model ribbon
The Model ribbon provides tools to load model data, edit model settings, perform other tasks
related to your model data. See the tables below for information on the options that are
available on this ribbon.
Model ribbon
Case
Option Name Brief Description For More Information
Load Case Load the selected case. Loading a case
Save Case Save the selected case. Creating a case
Edit Case Edit the selected case. Editing a case
Delete Case Delete the selected case. Deleting a case
Manage Cases Opens the case manager. Using the case manager
Model
New Load new model data, while "Loading model data" on

also clearing all existing page 142
model data from memory.
Load Load new model data, while "Loading model data" on

also retaining all model data in page 142
memory.
Save Save model data. "Saving model data" on

page 146

Ribbon Reference
Gallery – Load Load a model from the gallery. "Using the gallery" on
page 159
Gallery – Save Save a model to the gallery. "Using the gallery" on

page 159
Gallery – Open the Gallery Manager. "Using the gallery" on

Manage page 159
Warehouse
New Load new warehouse data, "Loading equipment data"

while also clearing all existing on page 145
warehouse data from
memory.
Load Load new warehouse data, "Loading equipment data"

while also retaining all on page 145
warehouse data in memory.
Save Save model data. "Saving equipment data"

on page 148
Tools
Backup Save and/or load a backup of "Backing up model and

your model data. equipment data" on
page 150
Compare Compare model and "Comparing model data

equipment data in memory and equipment data" on
with model and equipment page 149
data in an external data
source (as specified through a
model data DSA).
Check Use the Check and Repair "Updating database

Schema wizard to update your schemas" on page 151
database to the most recent

Ribbon Reference
version of Synergi.
Session Open the Session window to "Viewing session data" on

view summary data about the page 29
current model, warehouse,
and protection database.
Parts
Subsets Load and save subsets of "Using subsets" on

model data. page 153
Partials Load and save partials, which "Partials" on page 170

are subsets of model data
using the MiddleLink format.
Versions Load and save versions, which "Using versions" on

can be used to save the page 157
changes to a base model
without saving the base model
itself.
Select
Select Feeders Open the Select Feeders and "Selecting feeders" on

Substation Transformers page 68
editor.
Select Window Select only the feeders that "Selecting feeders" on

are currently visible in the page 68
Synergi map window.
Select Region Select feeders in the "Selecting feeders" on

displayed region. page 68
Select Adjacents Select non-selected feeders "Selecting feeders" on

with ties to selected feeders. page 68

Ribbon Reference
Toggle Subs Toggle the selection set of "Selecting feeders" on

substation transformers. page 68
Get Last Feeder Revert to the previous set of "Selecting feeders" on

Selection selected feeders. page 68
Select All Select all feeders in the "Selecting feeders" on

model. page 68
Settings
Model Open the Model and Analysis "Setting model and

Options editor. analysis options" on
page 497
Time and Open the Time and Weather "Editing time of day
Weather Options editor. settings" on page 506
"Selecting a time range
for time-based analyses"
on page 508
"Modeling weather
conditions" on page 258
"Adjusting loads based on

weather conditions" on
page 264
Growth Open the Growth Options "Defining load growth

editor. groups" on page 287
What-If Open the What-Ifs editor. "Creating What-If

scenarios" on page 512

Ribbon Reference
Scale Manager Open the Scale Manager. "Scale Manager" on

page 494
Output Open the Output Options "Using the Results

editor. Viewer" on page 515
"Selecting which
attributes are available in
the Results tab" on
page 509
"Generating analysis
reports" on page 521
"Adding notes to reports"

on page 522
Output Toggle the status of Synergi's "Dockable reports" on

> Dockable dockable report functionality. page 524
Reports
Edit
Undo Undo the most recent model "Undoing and redoing

edit. model edits" on page 247
Redo Redo the most recently "Undoing and redoing

undone model edit. model edits" on page 247
Bulk Editor Open the Synergi Bulk Editor "Using the Bulk Editor" on
for a selected facility type. page 254
Defaults Open the Synergi Defaults "Editing default values for

editor for a selected facility model devices" on
type. page 152

Ribbon Reference
Analysis ribbon
The Analysis ribbon provides access to some of the more frequently used analyses and tools
in Synergi, including the Load-Flow analysis, the Fault analysis, and Synergi's time-based
analyses. See the tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Analysis ribbon
Operations
Re-run Re-run the most recently "Re-running an analysis"

performed analysis. on page 514
Fundamentals
Load-Flow Run a load-flow anlaysis. "Load-flow analysis" on

page 546
Fault Set up and perform a fault "Fault analysis" on

analysis, which placess a page 655
fault on each section of the
"Setting up a fault
model, one by one, and then
analysis" on page 656
computes the fault current in
amps for the load end of each "Performing a fault
section. analysis" on page 659
Reliability Set up and perform a "Setting up a reliability

reliability analysis. analysis" on page 673
"Performing a reliability

Ribbon Reference
Check Set up and perform a check "Check coordination

Coordination coordination analysis, which analysis" on page 618
examines the coordination of
fuses, reclosers, breakers,
and sectionalizers throughout
your system.
Locked Rotor Run a locked rotor analysis, "Locked rotor analysis"

which evaluates the effects of on page 561
starting large motors on
distribution systems.
Duct Bank Set up and perform a duct "Duct bank evaluation" on

Studies bank evaluation, which page 284
calculates temperatures at
the core of the hottest cable
for each section and finds
available capacity on each
cable so that a load increase
will not create a thermal
overload.
Time
Time Series Set up and run a time-series "Time-series analysis" on

Analysis analysis, which analyzes the page 548
behavior and performance of
the model down to 1-second
intervals over a period of
time, up to 24 hours.
Single-Day Run a single-day analysis, "Single-day analysis" on

which runs over a 24-hour page 551
period for a single day and
reports on key data for the
total system as well as each
sub or unfed feeder.

Ribbon Reference
Single-Year Run a single-year analysis, "Single-year analysis" on

which runs over a user- page 553
specified range of months and
provides data that includes
loading, generation, and PV
penetration.
8760 Set up and run an 8760 "Full-year (8760)

analysis, which runs a Synergi analysis" on page 553
model over every hour of the
year for the current model
year and provides chart-based
data for total demand,
regulator tap positions, and
transformer tap positions.
Multi-Year Set up and run a multi-year "Multi-year analysis" on

analysis, which can be used to page 554
run common analysis types
for any number of model
years.
Summer and Run the Summer and Winter "Summer and Winter
Winter analysis, which provides analysis" on page 555
important information about
how your system varies
between summer and winter
months.
Automation
Batch Analysis Set up and run the batch "Batch analysis" on

analysis tool, which can be page 556
used to run different analysis
types, including load flow,
load allocation, and
reliability, over multiple
analysis runs.

Ribbon Reference
EA Automation Run the EA (Engineering "Using the EA Automation

Analysis) Automation wizard, wizard" on page 162
which automates the process
of loading model data based
on feeders or planning areas,
and then running multiple
analyses for multiple
analysis years.
Process Manager Open the Synergi process N/A

manager.

Ribbon Reference
Capacity ribbon
The Capacity ribbon provides access to Synergi's capacity-related tools and analyses. See the
tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Capacity ribbon
Switching
Throw-Over Run a throw-over analysis, "Throw-over analysis" on

which analyzes the effects of page 562
feeder outages and the
resulting automatic pickup in
capacity available from
adjacent feeders.
Optimal Set up and run an optimal "Optimal switching

switching analysis, which can analysis" on page 563
help you find the best
operating state for feeder
switches that meet the
selected objective.
Switch Plan Run a switch plan analysis, "Switch plan analysis" on

which runs all the switch plans page 565
available on the feeders in
memory and reports on the
load changes, customers
affected, and exceptions after
each step of the switching
sequence is completed.
Load Transfer Run a load transfer analysis, "Load transfer analysis"

which presents a list of load on page 565
transfers that can be made
between feeders.

Ribbon Reference
Switchable Run a switchable load "Switchable load

Load analysis, which evaluates analysis" on page 565
each device that has another
downstream device that can
be closed to pick up the
disconnected load.
Auto-Transfer Run an auto-transfer switch "Auto-transfer switch

analysis , which shows the analysis" on page 566
impact that the toggling of
auto-transfer switches will
have on your system.
AFS Run an automatic feeder "Automatic feeder

switching (AFS) analysis, switching (AFS) analysis"
which evaluates the ability of on page 567
surrounding feeders to
automatically pick up load
that was isolated due to a
feeder outage.
Substation Bus Run a substation bus transfer "Substation bus transfer

Transfer analysis, which evaluates load analysis" on page 568
transfers between
transformers in the same
substation.
Time Run a time-dependent "Time-dependent

Dependent switching analysis , which switching analysis" on
Switching runs switch plans over a user- page 568
specified time interval on a
selected day.
Analysis
Contingency Set up and run a contingency "Contingency analysis" on

analysis , which simulates the page 568
loss or fault of a section or a
bus and then searches for a
switching recovery plan.

Ribbon Reference
Sector Report Run the sector report. N/A
Incremental Set up and run an incremental "Incremental load

Load load analysis, which increases analysis" on page 578
the amount of load on
sections in the model at user-
specified intervals to
determine at what level a
loading or low voltage
exception occurs, or whether
each section can
accommodate the maximum
load size.
Load At Risk Run a load at risk analysis, "Load at Risk analysis" on

which focuses on the first- page 579
level switching operations
that can transfer load from a
feeder to its neighboring
feeders.
Reports
Feeder Tie Run the Feeder Tie Path "Feeder Tie Path analysis"
Path analysis, which takes the on page 579
switches on the feeder that
provide tie paths with adjacent
feeders and reports the
continuous and emergency
reserve values in amps for
each switch under normal
operating conditions. It will
then look at each switch on the
adjacent feeder that can be
used to transfer load to the
feeder being analyzed and
calculates the load that would
be transferred in amps.

Ribbon Reference
Ducts
Cable Duct Open the Cable Duct Bank "Editing a duct bank using
Bank view, which is a visual tool the Cable Duct Bank view"
that you can use to configure on page 279
duct banks.

Ribbon Reference
Planning ribbon
The Planning ribbon provides access to Synergi's planning-related tools and analyses. See the
Planning ribbon
Loading
Load Allocation Set up and perform a load "Load allocation analysis"

allocation analysis, which is on page 580
used to distribute loads based
on demands specified in
meter devices in your model.
Forecasting Set up and perform a "Forecasting analysis" on

forecasting analysis, which page 587
can help you determine if
your system has the capacity
to provide or buy and deliver
the power and energy that
customers will be demanding
in future years.
DTran Set up and perform a DTran "Dtran processing

Processing processing analysis, which analysis" on page 592
can perform tasks such as
calculating distributed load
parameters, set dtran
transformer types, and
generate dtrans from
distributed loads.

Ribbon Reference
Design
Capacitor Run Synergi’s Capacitor "Capacitor Placement

Placement Placement tool, which can analysis" on page 594
help you identify locations to
place new capacitors in your
model.
Phase Balancing Run a phase balancing "Phase Balancing

improvement analysis, which Improvement Analysis"
suggests single- and two- on page 597
phase laterals that can be
rephased.
Load Balancing Run a load balancing "Load balancing

improvement analysis, which improvement" on
looks for spot and/or page 600
distributed loads that can be
reconnected to improve
feeder balance.
PV Placement Run Synergi’s PV Placement "PV Placement" on

tool, which can help you page 611
identify locations to place
new PV generators in your
model.
Evaluation
Model Feeder Set up and run a model feeder "Model feeder analysis"
analysis , which compare the on page 602
feeders in your model to a set
of defined baseline values to
find values in your model that
exceed the baseline.
Circuit Set up and run a circuit "Circuit screener

Screener screener analysis, which finds analysis" on page 604
time points where loading
and/or voltage violations
occur.

Ribbon Reference
Secondary Run a secondary analysis. N/A
Distributed Energy Resources
Analysis Set up and run a PV analysis, "PV Analysis" on page 605

which randomly turns
generators on and off and
varies their output during a
specified number of analysis
cases, to simulate fluctuations
in PV generation.
Saturation Set up and run a PV saturation "PV Saturation analysis"

analysis, which removes all on page 606
PV generation from the model
and then gradually adds back
a uniform amount of PV until a
user-specified saturation level
has been reached.
Impact Set up and run a PV impact "PV Impact analysis" on

analysis, which shows the page 607
impact of PV generators on
voltage, loading, taps, and
other performance indicators.
Screener Set up and run a PV screener "PV Screener analysis" on

analysis, which shows at what page 607
level loading and other limits
are exceeded on a selected
section due to the addition of
a potential new PV generator.
Hosting Set up and run a PV Hosting "PV Hosting analysis" on

analysis, which provides page 608
several different analysis
approaches to help determine
how much PV capacity can be

Ribbon Reference
supported at the feeders and

subtrans in your model.
Studies Set up and run a PV studies "PV Studies analysis" on

analysis, which allows you to page 611
compare performance
differences when changes are
made to PV input values.
Worksheet Open the PV worksheet, which "PV worksheet" on

is a special Synergi window page 614
that lists PV devices in one
location.
Placement Open the PV Placement tool, "PV Placement" on

which can help identify page 611
locations to place new PV
generators in your model.
Time Series Set up and run a time series "Time-series analysis" on

Analysis analysis, which can analyze page 548
the behavior and performance
of the distribution system
model down to 1-second
intervals over a period of
time, up to 24 hours.

Ribbon Reference
Protection ribbon
The Protection ribbon provides access to Synergi's protection-related tools and analyses. See
the tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Protection ribbon
Analysis
Check Set up and perform a check "Check coordination

Coordination coordination analysis, which analysis" on page 618
examines the coordination of
fuses, reclosers, breakers,
and sectionalizers throughout
your system.
Protection Perform a protection "Protection evaluation

Evaluation evaluation analysis. The analysis" on page 644
protection evaluation analysis
is similar to the check
coordination analysis but
focuses more on interrupting
capacity, fault duty, and
interrupting time.
Safety
Arc Flashover Set up and run the Arc "Arc flashover" on

Flashover analysis, which page 644
deals with the energy
produced from a fault and its
upstream coordination of
protecting equipment.

Ribbon Reference
Protection Curves
Library Load the protection database. "Protection data" on

The protection database page 172
contains the extensive Synergi
protective device curve
library, used for protection
coordination studies.
Editor Open the protection curve "Protection curves" on

editor, which provides access page 648
the protection database.
Tools
New TCC Create a new time versus "Time versus current

current coordination coordination (TCC)
(TCC) graph, which you can graph" on page 664
use to plot protective device
curves and evaluate
protection coordination.
Device Lab Open the device lab, which "Device Lab" on page 650
provides a graphically
oriented view of the curves
and coordination sets of
devices.
Scheme Report Create a protection scheme "Protection Scheme

report, which provides Report" on page 654
information about the
protection scheme for the
currently selected subtrans
and feeders.
Path Summary Run a path length summary N/A

report.

Ribbon Reference
Min/Max Source Run the min/max source Z "Min/max source Z

Z analysis, which runs a fault analysis" on page 654
analysis on your model with
minimum and then with
maximum source
impedances.
Spreadsheet Open the spreadsheet "Spreadsheet Importer"

Importer importer tool, which can be on page 236
used to import curve data
from an Excel file and apply
the resulting curves to the
warehouse or protection
database.
Device Report Run the Protection Device N/A

Report.
Fault Applications
Fault Set up and perform a fault "Fault analysis" on

analysis, which placess a fault page 655
on each section of the model,
"Setting up a fault
one by one, and then
computes the fault current in
amps for the load end of each "Performing a fault
section. analysis" on page 659
Flow Set up and perform a fault "Fault flow analysis" on

flow analysis , which places a page 655
fault at one location in the
"Setting up a fault
distribution system model and
calculates the flows
throughout. "Performing a fault

Ribbon Reference
Voltage Set up and perform a fault "Fault voltage analysis"

voltage analysis, which on page 656
calculates voltages
"Setting up a fault
throughout a system due to a
fault at a single location.
"Performing a fault
Sequence Set up and perform a fault "Fault sequence analysis"

sequence analysis, which can on page 660
help you better understand
the switching sequences of
protective devices and
automated switches.
Location Set up and perform a fault "Fault location analysis"

location analysis, which finds on page 661
probable fault locations when
the magnitude of fault current
is known for a specific
location.

Ribbon Reference
Performance ribbon
The Performance ribbon provides access to Synergi's performance-related tools and analyses.
See the tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Performance ribbon
Facilities
Motor Studies Perform a motor start "Motor start analysis" on

analysis, which evaluates the page 691
effects of starting large
motors on your distribution
system.
Duct Bank Set up and perform a duct "Duct bank evaluation" on

Studies bank evaluation, which page 284
calculates temperatures at the
core of the hottest cable for
each section and finds
available capacity on each
cable so that a load increase
will not create a thermal
overload.
Duct Bank Open the Cable Duct Bank "Editing a duct bank using
View view, which is a visual tool the Cable Duct Bank view"
that you can use to configure on page 279
duct banks.
Performance
Performance Set up and perform a "Performance

Comparison performance comparison comparison" on page 692
analysis, which presents
operational and cost

Ribbon Reference
comparisons of various
modeling alternatives by
comparing the model in
memory to variations of that
model stored in the gallery.
Voltage Set up and perform a voltage "Voltage optimization

Optimization optimization analysis, which analysis" on page 695
analyzes the effect of
reducing voltage settings on
main-line regulators and
substation transformers.
LTC Analysis Set up and perform an "LTC analysis" on

LTC analysis, which can help page 695
you determine optimal
regulator positioning and also
set regulator R and X values.
Capacitor Perform a capacitor flicker "Capacitor flicker

Flicker analysis, which calculates the analysis" on page 702
momentary voltage effects
that discharged capacitors
will have if and when they are
switched on.
Conductor Set up and perform a "Conductor selection

Select conductor selection analysis, analysis" on page 702
which can help you determine
the best conductor type(s) for
a group of sections based on
performance and cost.
Economic Perform an economic "Economic analysis" on

analysis. page 704

Ribbon Reference
Model QA
Model Inspector Generate the Model Inspector "Model Inspector" on

report, which can help you page 706
find certain problems in your
model data.
System Health Perform a system health "System health analysis"

analysis, which provides a on page 708
quick overview of the feeders
in your session.
Line Generate the Line "Line Construction

Construction Construction report, which report" on page 708
provides detailed information
on the various conductor
configurations in your model.
Uncertainty Set up and perform an "Uncertainty analysis" on

uncertainty analysis, which page 708
can be used to test several
different components of a
system by placing percentage
variations on key parameters.
Unit Tests Opens the Unit Tests wizard, "Unit tests" on page 710
which can be used to test
small models for line
calculations and load
calculations.
Regression Open Synergi's Regression "Regression" on page 213

tool, which can be used to
make specific topological and
analytical comparisons
between two models.
Zones Generate the Zones report, "Zones report" on

which provides a detailed look page 711
at zone characteristics and
implementation in your
model.

Ribbon Reference
Calc Spy Open the Calc Spy tool, which "CalcSpy" on page 238
shows internal calculation
values and other internal
information that is generated
during an analysis.
Applications
Power Tools Provides access to Synergi's "Power Tool applications"

Power Tool applications. on page 711
These tools can help you
understand certain detailed
aspects of your model and
configure it accurately.
Controls Provides access to Controls Controls

scripts, which allow complex
control systems to be modeled
in the time or frequency
domain.
Synergi R and Open the R&D Analysis editor, "R&D Analysis" on

D where special research and page 714
development efforts are
developed and tested.
DNV GL’s Technical Support
team will provide you with
instructions if you need to use
this area of Synergi.

Ribbon Reference
Reliability ribbon
The Reliability ribbon provides access to Synergi's reliability analysis types. See the tables
below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Reliability ribbon
Analysis
Reliability Set up and perform a "Setting up a reliability

reliability analysis. analysis" on page 673
"Performing a reliability
Power Quality
Harmonic Set up and perform a "Harmonic analysis" on

harmonic analysis. page 681
"Harmonic impedance
frequency scan analysis"
on page 688
"Harmonic impedance
along path analysis" on
page 689
Harmonic Load Generates the harmonic load- "Harmonic load-flow

Flow flow report, which uses analysis" on page 687
information from the
harmonic profile of a large
customer and any sections
that have been enabled for
harmonic monitoring to show
harmonic curves and total
harmonic distortion (THD)
throughout the system.

Ribbon Reference
Tools
Unfused Tap Perform an unfused tap "Unfused tap analysis" on

Analysis analysis, which identifies page 689
areas in the model where taps
lack fusing.
Device Risk Perform a device risk ranking "Device risk ranking

Ranking analysis, which helps compare analysis" on page 690
the risk factors of a variety of
devices.
Outage Events Opens the Reliability Event "Reliability Event

Management wizard, which Management Wizard" on
helps you manage large sets page 690
of outage event data that
comes from your OMS or
other system.

Ribbon Reference
Networks ribbon
The Networks ribbon provides access to network analysis studies. See the tables below for
information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Networks ribbon
Analysis
Network Load Set up and perform a "Network load-flow

Flow network load flow analysis. analysis" on page 546
Network Fault Set up and perform a "Network fault analysis"

network fault analysis. on page 547
Network Set up and perform a "Network contingency

Contingency network contingency analysis" on page 548
analysis.
Transmission Perform a transmission Synergi Electric Technical

analysis. Reference.

Ribbon Reference
Tools ribbon
The Tools ribbon provides access to specialized tools that support your use of Synergi,
including the Multiyear Editor, PowerCalc tool, and Rap Sheets. See the tables below for
Tools ribbon
Model
Multiyear Open the Multi-Year Editor, "Copying data using the

Editor where you can copy selected Multi-Year Editor" on
categories of data from any page 78
model year to any number of
other model years.
Calculators
Concepts Open the Concepts view. "Concepts view" on

which you can use to page 234
demonstrate fundamental
Synergi modeling
calculations.
PowerCalc Open the PowerCalc tool, "PowerCalc" on page 215

where you can perform a
variety of calculations geared
toward electrical theory.
Financial Open the Financial N/A

Worksheet Worksheet, which is a
general-purpose tool for
certain financial calculations.

Ribbon Reference
Publish
Rap Sheets Open the Rap Sheets window, "Rap Sheets" on page 314
which provides simple
information on specific
devices or sections in the
model.
Publishing Export your model image to "Publishing Export" on

one of several available page 209
vector image format.
"Setting Publishing export
options" on page 210

Ribbon Reference
Forge ribbon
The Forge ribbon provides access to the SQL Dashboard, Model Forge, Modeal Cleanup scripts,
and other tools for working with your database files. See the tables below for information on
the options that are available on this ribbon.
Forge ribbon
Database
SQL Dashboard Open the SQL Dashboard, "SQL Dashboard" on

which you can use to run page 224
queries directly against the
tables in any database
represented by a DSA.
Joiner Open the Joiner, which is a "Joiner" on page 202

database table editor that
you can use to match
external data with current
memory data.
Model Forge
Forge Open the Model Forge Model Forge scripts

wizard, which you can use to
import model data from a
database or text file using a
Model Forge script.
Hammer Open the Data Hammer, "Data Hammer" on

which you can use to page 220
overcome low-level data
problems, such as missing
warehouse equipment types.

Ribbon Reference
Customers and Open the Customer "Using the CMM wizard"

Billing Management Module wizard, on page 320
which is the starting point for
performing customer
management tasks.
AMI Processing Open the AMI Processor, "Loading AMI data" on

which you can use to take page 332
load values based on AMI
reads and apply them to the
distributed loads in your
model.
Outage Events Open the Reliability Event "Reliability Event

Management Wizard, which Management Wizard" on
you can use to handle large page 690
sets of outage event data.
Node Reduction Set up and perform a node "Reducing the number of

reduction. nodes" on page 384
Spreadsheet Open the Import Spreadsheet "Spreadsheet Importer"

Importer wizard, which you can use to on page 236
import curve data from Excel
spreadsheets for use with
Synergi.
Export/Import Open the Export/Import tool, "Using the Export/Import

which you can use to export tool" on page 161
and import model data to or
from several different file
formats.
Model Cleanup
— Model Cleanup Select the model cleanup Model Cleanup scripts

Script script that you want to run or
edit.

Ribbon Reference
Run Run the selected model Writing and Running

cleanup script. Scripts
Edit Edit the selected model Writing and Running

cleanup script. Scripts
Tools
Database Hammer Open the Database "Database Hammer" on

Hammer, which you can use page 221
to run pre-defined queries
on a model database.
DBMS Manager Open the DBMS Login editor "Using an enterprise

to log in to an enterprise database system" on
database system. page 184
Results Open the Export Results "Exporting results to a

editor, where you can database" on page 518
export a selected analysis
table or results set to a
database file.
Model Roll Over Open the Process Data Model Rollover scripts
Import Script editor, which
you can use to create, edit,
run, and delete model
rollover scripts.
Rollover Wizard Create a model rollover Model Rollover scripts

script, which populates
future model years with
specific model features.

Ribbon Reference
Macros ribbon
The Macros ribbon provides access to recipes and other scripts and related tools that you can
use with Synergi. See the tables below for information on the options that are available on
this ribbon.
Macros ribbon
Rerun
Last Recipe Click to re-run the most Running scripts

recently run recipe.
Recipes
— Recipe Select the recipe script that Recipe scripts

(macro) you want to run or edit.
Run Click to run the selected Writing and Running

recipe script. Scripts
Edit Provides access to editing Writing and Running

tools for the selected recipe Scripts
script.
Python
— Script Select the Python script that Python scripts

Ribbon Reference
you want to run or edit.
Run Click to run the selected Writing and Running

Python script. Scripts

tools for the selected Python Scripts
script.
Other Scripts
— Type Select the script type that you Synergi Script Types
want to work with.
— Script Select the script name that Synergi Script Types

you want to run or edit.
Run Click to run the selected script. Writing and Running

Scripts
Wizard Opens the script wizard that is Writing and Running

associated with the selected Scripts
script type.

tools for the selected script. Scripts

Ribbon Reference
Tools
Startup Script Opens the Startup Script Using the Startup Script
wizard, which you can user to Wizard
create and edit startup scripts
in the recipe script format.
Solver Tools Opens the Solver Tools editor, "Running the Solver from
which you can use to launch within Synergi" on
Solver-based applications page 239
from within Synergi.
Script Editor Opens the Script Editor, which Using the Script Editor
you can use to write and edit
Synergi scripts.

Ribbon Reference
Views ribbon
The Views ribbon provides access to tools that offer different ways to view your Synergi data,
including the InfoPanel, the Organizer, and the Broadcaster. See the tables below for
Views ribbon
Views
Full screen View Synergi in full-screen "Synergi windows" on

mode. page 85
InfoPanel View the Synergi InfoPanel "InfoPanel" on page 312

window.
Organizer View the Synergi Organizer "Organizer" on page 310

window.
Views View additional windows "Synergi charts" on

types that are provided with page 542
Synergi, including the Chart
"Synergi reports" on
window, Report window, and
page 520
TCC.
"Time versus current
You can also restore the Map
coordination (TCC) graph"
window from this option, if
on page 664
you accidentally closed it.

Ribbon Reference
Worksheets
Capacitor Open the Capacitor "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet worksheet, which lists all page 255
capacitors in one window.
PV Worksheet Open the PV worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

which lists all PV devices in page 255
one window.
Breaker Open the Breaker worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all breakers in one page 255
window.
Fuse Worksheet Open the Fuse worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

which lists all projects in one page 255
window.
Large Customer Open the Large Customer "Using worksheets" on

large customers in one
window.
Motor Open the Motor worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all motors in one page 255
window.
Recloser Open the Recloser worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all reclosers in one page 255
window.
Regulator Open the Project worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all regulators in page 255
one window.
Switch Open the Switch worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all switches in one page 255
window.
Transformer Open the Transformer "Using worksheets" on

transformers in one window.
Source Open the Source worksheet, "Using worksheets" on

Worksheet which lists all sources in one page 255
window.

Ribbon Reference
Projects Open the Project worksheet, "Editing projects using

which lists all projects in one the Project worksheet" on
window. page 359
DTrans Open the DTran worksheet, "Load DTran tab – Section

which lists all distribution editor" on page 362
transformers in one window.
Reports
Close All Close all open report windows. N/A
Toggle Toggle whether analysis "Generating analysis

reports are generated after reports" on page 521
each analysis.
This is the same option as the
"light bulb" indicator at the top
of the model explorer, and also
the Generate Report option in
the Output tab of the Output
Options editor.
Browsers
Broadcaster Open the Broadcaster "Using the Broadcaster"

window, which shows on page 516
analysis results for all
facilities of a selected type.

Ribbon Reference
Capacitor Opens the Capacitor "Using worksheets" on

capacitor devices in one
window.
Feeder Browser Opens the Feeder Browser, "Feeder Browser" on

which shows selected devices page 317
types for individual feeders in
your model.
Show Manager Opens the Show Manager, "Show Manager" on

which can be used to highlight page 138
certain types of sections and
devices in the map display,
such as photovoltaics or
sections with spot loads.
Voltage Plot Opens the Voltage Plot "Using the Voltage Plot"
window, which shows voltage on page 517
data from the source to a
selected section.
Results Viewer Opens the Results Viewer, "Using the Results

which shows results for Viewer" on page 515
sections and facilities as you
hover the mouse over
different devices in Synergi.
Managers
Switch Plan Opens the Switch Plan "Using the Switch Plan
Manager, where you can view Manager" on page 473
switch plans and perform a
variety of management tasks,
including editing, analyzing,
and deleting individual switch
plans.

Ribbon Reference
Projects Opens the Projects Manager, "Editing projects using the

where you can view and edit Project Manager" on
projects from one single page 361
location.
Sequence Opens the Sequence Viewer, "Performing a fault

Viewer which is used with the Fault sequence analysis" on
Sequence analysis to page 660
temporarily show the results
of the analysis.
State Master Opens the State Master, which "State Master" on

is used by some Synergi page 222
analyses, such as the throw-
over analysis, to temporarily
view the results of different
model states created by the
analysis.

Ribbon Reference
Support ribbon
The Support ribbon provides access to web resources, documentation, and other tools that
support your use of Synergi Electric. See the tables below for information on the options that
are available on this ribbon.
Support ribbon
Help
Email Technical Prepare an email to send to "Contacting technical

Support DNV GL Technical Support. support" on page 28
Technical Support View contact information for "Contacting technical

DNV GL Technical Support. support" on page 28
About Synergi Open the About Synergi "Viewing Synergi version

Electric dialog box. information" on page 29
About Synergi View detailed versions "Viewing Synergi version

> Version information for the information" on page 29
components that are included
in Synergi Electric.
Customer Portal Open the DNV GL Customer N/A

Portal website.
DNV GL Website Open the Synergi Electric N/A

page of the DNV GL corporate
website.

Ribbon Reference
Yammer Open the Synergi Electric "Synergi Electric

Community User Community page on Yammer user
Yammer. community" on page 28
Documents
Online Help Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Online Help, which includes
HTML versions of the User
Guide and Script Guide.
User Guide Open the Synergi Electric N/A

User Guide in PDF format.
An HTML version of the User
Guide is provided as a part of
the Synergi Electric Online
Help.
Technical Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Reference Technical Reference.
Planning Guide Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Planning Guide.
Handbook Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Handbook.
Installation Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Guide Installation Guide.

Ribbon Reference
Review Open PDF versions of N/A

PowerPoint presentations
featuring various Synergi
Electric conceptual topics.
Calculations Open Synergi’s Calculations "Engineering

tool, which uses PTC Mathcad Calculations" on page 238
Prime to show some of the
technical calculations that are
used by Synergi.
Script Guide Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Script Guide in PDF format.
An HTML version of the Script
Guide is provided as a part of
the Synergi Electric Online
Help.
Solver Open documentation N/A

associated with the Electric
Solver, including the User
Guide and Developer
Reference.
Release Notes Open the Synergi Electric N/A

Release Notes.
Media Viewer Open the Synergi Electric "Media Viewer" on

Media Viewer, which allows page 222
you to view documents,
images, and videos from
within Synergi.

Ribbon Reference
Tools
Schemas View schemas for the Synergi Electric Script

different Synergi script types. Guide
Maintenance Open the Synergi Maintenance "Using the Synergi

Wizard Wizard. Maintenance Wizard" on
page 204
Library Open the Synergi Library, "Library" on page 223

which can be used to create
links to external documents.
Get Adobe Open the Adobe website to N/A

Reader download Adobe Reader,
which is required to view the
PDF documents that are
provided with Synergi.
Log View the Synergi log file, "Synergi file summary"

which provides a general log on page 205
of Synergi activity for the
current session.

Ribbon Reference
Display ribbon
The Display ribbon provides tools to help you set up and configure the Synergi map display.
See the tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Display ribbon
Tools
Details Toggle the display of "Toggling map details" on

equipment symbols and other page 96
details in the map display.
Nodes Toggle the display of nodes in "Viewing nodes in the map

the Synergi map display. display" on page 381
Refresh Refresh (redraw) the map "Refreshing the map

display. Normally the map is display" on page 96
refreshed automatically after
most edit actions, but it may
sometimes be necessary to
refresh the map display
manually.
Clear Clear all selected feeders in "Selecting feeders" on

Synergi, which results in the page 68
clearing of the map display.
Press F2 to select new feeders
to view.
Copy Copy the map display view. N/A

You can then paste the copied
image in any desired
application.

Ribbon Reference
Invert Colors Reverse the color list when "Theme map settings" on
viewing a results-based color page 98
by scheme in the Synergi map
display.
Tap Fuse Show or hide any sections that "Style map settings" on
are downstream from a tap page 102
fuse.
Any Fuse Show or hide any sections that "Style map settings" on
are downstream from a fuse of page 102
any type.
Amp Rating Show or hide all sections that "Style map settings" on
are rated below an amp value page 102
that is specified in the Style
tab of the Map Settings editor.
Show
— View Mode Select how feeders and "Theme map settings" on

sections are shown in the page 98
You can also select this option

from the Theme tab in the Map
Settings editor.
— Flow Arrows Select how flow arrows are "Theme map settings" on
shown in the Synergi map page 98
display.

from the Theme tab in the Map
Settings editor.
— Show Only Only display symbols for "Style map settings" on

selected device types in the page 102
map display.
from the Style tab in the Map
Settings editor.

Ribbon Reference
Legend Open the Legend window, "Legend" on page 131

Window which displays the current
map display coloring scheme
in both pie chart and bar chart
form.
Settings
Feeders Apply the Feeders color by "Theme map settings" on

theme. page 98
Results Apply the Results color by "Theme map settings" on

theme. page 98
Exceptions (All) Apply the All Exceptions color "Theme map settings" on
by theme. page 98
Path Types Apply the Path Type color by "Theme map settings" on
theme. page 98
Phases Apply the Phases color by "Theme map settings" on

theme. page 98
Amps Apply the Amps color by "Theme map settings" on

theme. page 98
— Styles Create, delete, and apply map "Theme map settings" on

display styles. page 98
— Color By Select a color by scheme to "Theme map settings" on

apply to the map display. page 98
— Results When coloring by results, "Theme map settings" on

select a results set to apply to page 98
the map display coloring
scheme.
Map Grid Display and hide the map "Background map

grid. settings" on page 117
Allow Node Enable and disable the ability "Disabling node editing"
Selection to double-click on a node to on page 96

Ribbon Reference
open the Node editor.
Drag Panning Enable drag panning mode, "Panning" on page 94

where you can click and hold
in the map display to move
the display view by dragging
the mouse.
Annotation
Toggle Text Toggle text annotation in the "Text map settings" on

map display. page 105
Toggle Results Toggle results annotation in "Text map settings" on

the map display. page 105
Set Slots 1, 2, Set the current result set in N/A

and 3 slot 1, 2, or 3.
Toggle Slots 1, Apply the result set in slot 1, N/A

2, and 3 2, or 3 as map display
annotation.
Geography
Geographic Open Synergi's Geographic "Geographic view" on

View View window. page 134

Ribbon Reference
Sync to Synchronize the Geographic "Viewing a model in the

Geographic View with the map display. Geographic view" on
View page 137
Background
Toggle Display or hide all "Background map

Background background images. settings" on page 117
Add Layer Add an image file as a "Background map

background image. settings" on page 117
Map Properties Open the Map Properties N/A

editor.
Color Change the background color "Style map settings" on

in the Synergi map display. page 102
Black and White Convert the Synergi map "Style map settings" on
Mode display to black-and-white page 102
mode.

Ribbon Reference
Navigate ribbon
The Navigate ribbon provides tools to help you zoom and navigate around the Synergi map
display. See the tables below for information on the options that are available on this ribbon.
Navigate ribbon
Tools
Default Return to the Default N/A

selection mode in the Synergi
map display.
Upstream When a section is open in the N/A

Section editor, open the next
upstream section in the
editor.
Downstream When a section is open in the N/A

Section editor, open the next
downstream section in the
editor.
Next Tag Zoom to the next tagged "Tagging sections and

facilities. devices" on page 248
Remove Tags Clear all tags from the model. "Tagging sections and
devices" on page 248
Zoom
Option Name Brief Description For More

Information
In Zoom in at the location of the "Zooming" on page 93

Ribbon Reference

Information
mouse click.
Out Zoom out at the location of "Zooming" on page 93

the mouse click.
Rectangle Zoom in to the boundaries "Zooming" on page 93

specified by a click-and-drag
action.
Network Bounds Zoom to the extents of the "Zooming" on page 93

entire active model.
Previous Return to the previous view. "Zooming" on page 93
Go To X, Y Zoom to a specified set of X, "Zooming" on page 93

Y coordinates.
Map Bounds Zoom to all active models and "Zooming" on page 93

their borders.
Background Zoom to the extents of the "Zooming" on page 93

Bounds background image.
Item in Editor Zoom to the location of the "Zooming" on page 93

item that is open in the
Synergi editor.
Next Feeder Zoom to the next feeder. "Zooming" on page 93
Magnifier Open a special "magnifying "Zooming" on page 93

glass" tool that you can use to
zoom in the map display.
l Click and drag the

magnifying glass to
move it around the
map.
l Click in the magnifying
glass area and use the
scroll wheel to zoom in
and out of the
magnified area. Click
on the main map and
use the scroll wheel to

Ribbon Reference

Information
zoom in and out of the

main map display.
Clockwise Rotate the map display "Rotating the map" on

clockwise. page 95
Counterclockwise Rotate the map display "Rotating the map" on

counterclockwise. page 95
Pan Centering Enable Pan Centering mode. "Panning" on page 94

The map display will be
centered upon any location
that you click.
Analysis Section
Clear Clear the analysis section. "Setting a section for

Zoom Zoom to the analysis section. "Setting a section for

Edit Open the analysis section in "Setting a section for

the section editor. analysis" on page 496
Favorites
— Views Create, delete, and go to "Views" on page 133

"Views". You can create a View
for any specific area of the
map display, such as an area
that you frequently work with
or where you are interested in
analysis results.
— Feeder Sets Create, delete, and go feeder "Using feeder sets" on

sets. A new feeder set will page 257
include the feeders that you

Ribbon Reference
currently have selected in

memory. You can use feeder
sets as a shortcut to select
frequently used combinations
of feeders, without having to
use the Select Feeders editor.

Ribbon Reference
Build ribbon
The Model ribbon provides tools to help build sections and devices in your model. See the
Build ribbon
General
Default Return to the Default selection N/A

mode in the Synergi map
display.
Map Measure Measure the distance between "Measuring distances" on

different points in the Synergi page 95
map display.
Details Show or hide details in the "Toggling map details" on

Synergi map display, including page 96
equipment symbols and
custom labels.
Nodes Show or hide node symbols in "Viewing nodes in the map

the Synergi map display. display" on page 381
Model
Add Section Create a new section. "Adding a section" on

page 346

Ribbon Reference
Reconnect Connect and disconnect "Connecting and

Section sections from each other. disconnecting sections"
on page 371
Delete Section Delete a section from the "Deleting a section" on

model. page 374
Copy Copy construction data from "Copying construction

Construction one section to another. data from one section to
another" on page 373
Add Node Add a node to a section, "Splitting a section" on

thereby splitting the section page 373
in two.
Move Node Move a node in the model. "Moving a node" on

page 383
Add Graphic Add a graphic point to a "Adding a graphic point"

Point section. on page 393
Delete Graphic Delete a graphic point from a "Deleting a graphic point"

Point section. on page 394
Move Graphic Move a graphic point to a "Moving a graphic point"

Point different position on a on page 394
section.
Devices
Move Move a device from one "Moving a device" on

section to another. page 396
Copy Enter Copy mode, where you "Copying a device" on

page 396

Ribbon Reference
can click on any device in the

map display to copy it. Once
the device is copied, Paste
mode will be enabled
automatically.
Paste Paste a copied device onto any "Copying a device" on

section in the map display. page 396
Paste mode is enabled
automatically after you Copy a
device.
Delete Enter Delete mode, where you "Deleting a device" on

can click on any device in the page 397
map display to delete it.
Node
Feeder Convert a node into a feeder. "Converting a node into a

feeder or a substation
node" on page 333
Substation Convert a node into a "Converting a node into a

substation. feeder or a substation
node" on page 333
Node Convert a feeder into a node. "Converting a node into a

feeder or a substation
node" on page 333
PM Gear Convert a node into a pad- "Converting a node to

mounted switch gear. pad-mounted switch
gear" on page 470
Transmission Convert the node to a N/A

Bus transmission bus.

Ribbon Reference
Query
Query Add sections to the query set "Creating a query set

using spatial query mode. from the Synergi map
display" on page 250
Clear Clear the query set. "Clearing the query set"

on page 253
Generator Create a query set using the "Creating a query set

query generator. using the Query
Generator" on page 251
Move Move sections that are in the "Moving and copying

query set. sections that are in the
query set" on page 252
Copy Copy sections that are in the "Moving and copying

query set. sections that are in the
query set" on page 252
Multiple Editor Open the multiple editor. "Using the Multiple Editor"
on page 253
Build
Substation Add a new substation using "Using the Substation

Wizard the Substation wizard. Wizard" on page 342

Ribbon Reference
Add Switch Plan Add a new switch plan using "Switch plans" on
the Switch Plan editor. page 471

Index
INDEX
8
8760 Analysis 553
A
Access (personal)
about 166
Access (server) data format 167
AFS analysis 567
analyses
automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis 567
R&D analysis 714
analysis 496
adding notes to reports 522
analysis results 514
analysis year, selecting 506
auto-transfer switch analysis 566
balance improvement 597
capacitor placement 594
charts 542
check coordination 618
contingency 568
cost files 509
customer load curves/time-of-day 294
customizing device colors and sizes based on analysis results 108
customizing section colors and sizes based on analysis results 98
economic 704, 706
fault 655
forecasting 587
harmonic 681
load-flow 546
load allocation 580
load balancing improvement 600
locked rotor analysis 561
model and analysis options 497
motor analysis 447
motor start analysis 691
multi-year modeling 73, 554
network 546
node reduction 384
optimal switching 563
output options 508
phase balancing improvement 597

Index
power tools 711

re-running 514
Regulator Setting power tool 697
reliability 673
reports 520
results 514
results annotation, adding 105
setting a section for analysis 496
System Health analysis 708
throw-over analysis 562
time of day, selecting 506
uncertainty analysis 708
Unfused Tap analysis 689
Voltage Optimization 695
analysis results 514
Broadcaster 317, 516
exporting 518
import/export DSAs 517
importing 518
importing and exporting 517
reporting 520
Results box 515
results handling 517
Results Viewer 515
Results Viewer, selecting attributes 515
selecting attributes for the Results tab 509
selecting whether to generate 521
annotation
results annotation, adding 105
Arc Flashover
Analysis Settings 645
Disclaimer 645
Exceptions 645
Overview 644
rap sheet 316
Settings tab 646
Working Distance tab 646
areas of interest 119
associating with a section 125
creating 120
deleting 126
editing 121
moving 124
reshaping 124
auto-transfer switches 468

Index
AutoCAD DXF files

Publishing export 209
B
background images 138
backups 150
balance improvement analysis 597
load balancing 600
phase balancing 597
basemap layer
basemap layer files 136
binary (EDM) data format 167
breakers 399
Breaker editor 399
Breaker tab 400
Relays tab 402
breaker flexibility 404
breaker model 403
editing 399
relay groups 404
relays 403
Bulk Editor 254
C
cable ampacity
about 271
general steps 271
cable conductors
overview 272
cables
cable conductors 272
applying to sections 275
concentric neutral model 273
separate neutral model 273
simple impedance model 272
tape shield model 274
three-core cable model 275
Cable Duct Bank view 279
direct buried cables 282
display properties 282
opening 280
report 283
troubleshooting 283
using 280

Index
zooming 281
duct bank, creating 276
duct banks
Duct Bank editor 277
Duct Bank evaluation 284
editing 276
modeling overview 272
study scripts 275
calculators 209
Capacitor Manager toolbox tool 217
capacitor placement analysis 594
running 595
setting up 594
capacitors 404
Capacitor editor 411
Capacitor tab 411
Settings tab 414
Capacitor Manager toolbox tool 217
controlling switched modules 407
editing 411
editing loads using the Bulk Editor 254
fixed and switched units 405
kV rating 407
line-drop compensator 409
manually turning on a capacitor switched module 410
metering phase 409
motor analysis 415
positioning 406
Synergi capacitor model 405
tripping and closing rules 408
voltage override 410
capacity 561
capacity factors 492
charts 542
custom 542
exporting 545
modifying 544
printing 545
check coordination analysis
about 618
cases not checked 641
coordination range 640
general operation 618
protection pairs 638
rule-base 622
running 640

Index
selecting rules 622

setting margins 621
setting options 619
clearing the Synergi registry 204
CMM 318
automating the CMM process 323
CMM wizard 320
data sets
creating and destroying 329
merging 329
reporting 328
using the model in memory to update connectivity 330
DSAs 319
importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set 320
overview 319
processing CMM data set bills and loads 321
running a script using the CMM wizard 328
schema, viewing 324
script examples 327
SQL Dashboard 331
updating model loads with a CMM data set 322
writing scripts 323
coincidence factors 302
cold load pickup percentages 303
Color By
defining colors 111
columns
editing data in columns 92
command line
opening Synergi from the command line 203
concentric neutral cable conductor model 273
Concepts view 234
conductor damage curves
on the TCC 670
conductor selection analysis 702
processing 702
running 704
setting up 703
conductor spacing
setting spacing preferences 49
conductors 375
cable 272
cable conductors 272
conductor selection analysis 702
conductor types, creating 375
conductor types, deleting 379

Index
conductor types, editing 375

conductor types, sorting 378
configurations 380
equivalent spacing 380
seasonal ratings 267
simple impedance method 379
spacing and configuration options 379
configuration types
about 380
creating 380
editing 380
context menus 91
contingency
contingency analysis
about 568
fast pickup method 570
isolating sections 578
load transfer method 572
method, selecting 569
optimized pickup method 574
running 577
contour points
see graphic points 393
cost files 509
editing 511
format 510
cost zones 704
costs
model costs, setting 505
curves
growth 290
load 294
plotting on TCC 665
custom charts 542
custom keyboard shortcuts 83
customer classes 298
class information, editing 301
coincidence factors, editing 302
cold load pickup percentages, editing 303
creating 298
deleting 304
economic data, editing 304
editing 299
load curves, editing 299
customer load curves/time-of-day analysis 294

Index
Customer Management Module

see CMM 318
customer zones 305
creating 305
deleting 308
editing 306
customers
see CMM 318
D
data 163
comparing 149
data source aliases 58
editing data in columns 92
repairing schemas 151
data formats
about 166
Access (personal) 166
Access (server) 167
binary (EDM) 167
MiddleLink 167
Oracle 168
SQL Server 168
XML 168
Data Hammer 220
data mining
setting preferences 46
data source alias
see DSA 58
data types
about 163
gallery 159
partials 170
protection 172
subsets 153
versions 157
database
Database Hammer 221
DataPrep
see MiddleLink-GIS model builds 174
defaults file 152
design evaluation analysis
optimal regulator position 696
processing 696

Index
running 697
setting up 696
viewing results 697
details
toggling in the map display 96
Device Risk Ranking 690
devices 395
adding to a model 395
breakers 399
capacitors 404
coloring based on analysis results 108
copying 396
creating 395
deleting 397
editing 395-396
fuses 415
generators 420
meters 433
motors 440
moving 396
protective devices 615
reclosers 447
regulators 452
sectionalizers 459
switches 462
transformers 474
display settings 97
adding annotation based on analysis results 98, 105
configuring map display symbols 113
configuring the map display style 102
configuring visibility levels for map display symbols 115
defining Color By colors 111
showing the map display grid 117
distances, measuring in the map 95
distributed generation
see large customers 428
dockable reports 524
docking 525
enabling 525
hiding 529
documentation 25
documents
Library 223

Index
DSA
creating 58
editing 60
saving 67
validating 67
DSAs
about 58
analysis results importing and exporting 517
deleting 68
duct banks
Cable Duct Bank view 279
direct buried cables 282
opening 280
report 283
troubleshooting 283
using 280
zooming 281
creating 276
Duct Bank editor 277
Circuits tab 278
Duct Bank tab 277
Duct Bank evaluation 284
running 285
section derating 286
setting up 284
editing 276
DXF export
layer creation 211
settings 210
DXF files
E
economic analysis 704, 706
cost zones 704
editor
using 241
viewing results 247
elbows 469
energize years
multi-year modeling 81
enterprise databases
about 184
advantages 185

Index
connecting to the server 186

creating a new model 190
deleting models and feeders 192
getting started 186
locks 192
model locks 193
schema 194
using 186
with analysis 194
environment 85
model explorer 85
ribbon 88
status bar 90
Synergi editor 241
equipment
see devices 395
equipment data
loading 145
saving 148
equipment types
about 397
copying 398
creating 397
deleting 398
editing 398
equipment warehouse
fuse types 399, 416
generator types 420
motor curve types 443
motor types 440
recloser types 448
regulator types 453
switch types 465
transformer types 481
equivalent spacing, conductors 380
Excel
exporting data from a grid-style report 539
exception load limits 497-498
explorer
TCC 665
exposure zones 677
assigning to sections 679
creating 678
deleting 679
editing 678

Index
F
facilities
see devices 395
tagging 248
Facilities tab (model explorer) 87
fast pickup method (contingency analysis) 570
fault analysis 655
about 655
fault flow analysis 655
fault voltage analysis 656
generators 656
running 659
setting up 656
types 655
wandering laterals 659
fault events
adding 661
deleting 662
editing 662
fault location analysis 661
fault location analysis 661
fault events 661
running 664
setting up 663
Fault rap sheet 316
feature locks
SQL Dashboard 230
Feeder Overview toolbox tool 217
feeder sets 257
Feeder Tie Path report 579
feeders
converting nodes into feeders 333
editing 334, 338
Feeder editor 334, 338
Feeder tab 335, 338
Node tab 337, 341
Rates tab 337, 341
Volts/Ohms tab 336, 340
Feeder Overview toolbox tool 217
modeling 332
selecting 68
Feeders tab (model explorer) 87
file paths
file types 205

Index
files
cost files 509
find model data 71
force unfed sections 374
forecasting analysis 587
performing 592
selecting a forecasting agent 591
setting up 588
Full-Year Analysis 553
function keys 82
fuse types 399, 416
fuses 415
editing 416
Fuse editor 416
Fuse tab 417
Rates tab 419
VFI tab 419
fuse types 399, 416
G
gallery
about 159
Garage
see Organizer 310
generator types 420
generators 420
distributed generation 428
editing 424
fault analysis 656
Generator editor 424
Generator tab 424
Machine tab 426
generator types 420
Geographic view 134
setting up 136
viewing a model 137
GIS extraction
see MiddleLink-GIS model builds 174
graphic nodes
graphic points
about 393
removing using node reduction 391
graphs
generating from a grid-style report 537

Index
grid
showing 117
grid-style reports 532
appearance, editing 532
applying color to the map display 536
exporting to a database 539
exporting to Excel 539
generating graphs 537
managing content 534
saving 537
shortcuts 541
growth curves 290
applying to a section 292
creating 290
deleting 291
editing 291
single-year environment 294
using 292
H
harmonic analysis 681
designating sections for harmonic monitoring 686
harmonic curves 682
harmonics 682
options 686
running 687
setting up 682
harmonic curves 682
assigning to a large customer 686
creating 683
deleting 685
editing 683
height above ground
HTML reports 541
I
I,Z,PQ - see load I,Z,PQ 491
running 712
settings 712
images
supported image types 138
vector images 140

Index
world files for raster images 139

InfoPanel 312
intermediate points
isolating sections 578
K
keyboard shortcuts
custom 83
function keys 82
KML files
L
labels 128
adding 128
deleting 130
editing 129
moving 130
large customers
about 428
assigning harmonic curves 686
editing 428
editing loads using the Bulk Editor 254
load curves 297
scheduling 433
with load curves 433
layers
creation during Publishing export 211
legend 131
Legend tab (model explorer) 87
Library 223
licensing 44
line-drop compensator
capacitors 409
line construction report 708
links
see location links 126
load-flow analysis 546
network analysis 546
load allocation 583
about 580
calculations with customer load curves 583
capacitor options 582
choosing time to allocate load 296
demands and meters 581

Index
handling the model afterward 297

load I,Z,PQ 583
loops 583
metering points 440
preparing the model for 296
regulator options 582
running 586
setting options 583
substation transformers 583
suggested approaches 582
understanding results 296
use of demands 582
when to run 581
with customer load curves 295
load balancing improvement analysis 600
running 601
setting up 600
load categories
Load Center Manager toolbox tool 218
creating and editing load centers 219
load centers
creating 219
editing 219
load curves 294
customer classes 298
customer zones 305
enabling 295
getting started 294
large customers 297
summary 298
with load allocation 295
load growth 286, 583
enabling 290
growth curves 290
rates, specifying 287
load I,Z,PQ
about 491
load modeling, getting started 490
load transfer method (contingency analysis) 572
loading
TCC files 672
loads
adjusting for weather 264
editing using the Bulk Editor 254
exception load limits, defining 497-498
I,Z,PQ - see load I,Z,PQ 491

Index
Load Center Manager toolbox tool 218

setting up 489
types 490
location links 126
creating 126
launching 127
locked rotor analysis (LRA) 561
locks
enterprise databases 192
loop tie switch
about 343
loop tie switches 344
loops
about 343
analysis considerations 346
modeling 344
LYR files 136
M
Maintenance Wizard 204
manholes
map 92
annotation based on analysis results 105
changing the zoom direction of the map scroll wheel 37
Color By colors, defining 111
display settings 97
display style, configuring 102
Geographic view 134
grid, showing 117
labels 128
legend 131
measuring distances 95
nodes, viewing 381
panning 94
refreshing 96
rotating 95
Show Manager 138
symbol visibility levels, configuring 115
symbols, configuring 113
toggling details 96
using 93
views 133

Index
zooming 93
map settings editor 97
measuring distances in the map display 95
Media Viewer 222
menus
context (right-click) menus 91
meters 433
editing 434
Meter editor 434
Demands tab 435
Dist Gen tab 438
Meter tab 434
Profile tab 437
Reliability tab 439
Zones tab 439
metering points and load application 440
MiddleLink
importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set 320
MiddleLink-GIS model builds 174
benefits 175
general steps 175
running 176
MiddleLink data format
about 167
MiddleLink data type
automating model builds 182
import options 177
node identification 178
source details (new ML) 176
mining
setting data mining preferences 46
SQL Dashboard 229
mitigation zones 679
assigning to a section 681
creating 680
deleting 681
editing 680
model
building a model 241
automatic fixes 504
exception load limits 497-498
general analysis options 503
general model options 499
model costs 505
multi-year analysis options 504
report warnings 523

Index
model costs
setting 505
model data
comparing 149
merging 142
sample database 149
saving 146
model explorer 85
Facilities tab 87
Feeders tab 87
Legend tab 87, 131
Model tab 86
Query tab 87
toolbox 216
Toolbox tab 88
Warehouse tab 86
model reduction 384
Model tab (model explorer) 86
Model Viewer files
Modelpedia
see Organizer 310
models
node reduction 384
performance comparison 692
regression 213
motor types 440
motors 440
editing 443
locked rotor analysis 561
motor analysis types 447
Motor editor 443
Load tab 446
Motor tab 444
Service tab 445
Starter tab 446
motor types 440
mouse
changing the zoom direction of the scroll wheel 37
multi-year analysis
options 504

Index
copying data 78
enabling 73
energize and retire year 81
growth curves 293
multi-year analysis 554
running 555
setting up 554
time spans 73
year names 73
multiple editor 253
N
network analysis 546
network fault analysis 547
network load-flow analysis 546
network outage analysis 548
network protectors 480
sample model 480
tripping and closing 480
node reduction 384, 391
breaking loops with elbows 393
detailed operation 389
eliminating a node completely 388
load handling 393
methodology 387
node elimination rules 389
performing 386
removing nodes 387
replacing a node with a vertex 388
settings 384
nodes
about 381
converting into feeders and subtrans 333
converting to other device types 383
converting to pad-mounted switch gear 470
creating 373
deleting 383
disabling node editing 96
editing 382
moving 383
renaming 382
viewing in the map display 381
notes
adding to reports 522

Index
O
optimal switching analysis 563
running 564
setting options 563
optimized pickup method (contingency analysis) 574
Oracle data format 168
Organizer 310
output options 508
adding notes to reports 522
generating reports 521
P
pad-mounted switch gear 469-470
converting from node 470
editing 471
panning 94
partials
about 170
cautionary note 170
paths
setting file path preferences 39
performance 691
performance comparison 692
running 694
selecting models 693
setting analysis options 693
setting costs 693
settings 692
phase balancing improvement analysis 597
running 598
setting up 598
planning 580
Full-Year (8760) Analysis 553
power tools 711
PowerCalc 215
available functions 216
scripts 216
starting 215
understanding 215
preferences 31
changing the zoom direction of the mouse scroll wheel 37
data mining 46

Index
database 42
feature locks 53
file paths 39
load categories 51
model 31
spacing options 49
units of measurement 34
printing 81
charts 545
reports 523
PRJ files 136
profiles
weather 260
projection files 136
projects
editing using the Project Manager 361
editing using the Projects worksheet 359
editing using the Section editor 358
protection 615
protection coordination analysis
see check coordination analysis 618
protection data
about 172
general information 173
interaction with TCC 173
mechanical response times 174
Protection Lab 650
protection pairs, in check coordination analysis 638
protective device types
editing 616
protective devices 615
analysis results, viewing 617
breakers 399
fuses 415
general data, editing 617
reclosers 447
sectionalizers 459
layer creation 211
running 211
SVG output information 213
PV placement analysis
running 613
setting up 612

Index
Q
queries
running a SQL query in the SQL Dashboard 228
sample SQL queries in the SQL Dashboard 232
writing a SQL query in the SQL Dashboard 226
Query Generator 251
query sets
creating 249
creating from the map display 250
creating using the Query Generator 251
Query tab (model explorer) 87
quick access toolbar 89
R
R&D analysis 714
rap sheets 314
Arc Flashover rap sheet 316
Fault rap sheet 316
raster images 139
ratings, seasonal 267
recipes
running automatically 47
recloser types 448
reclosers 447
editing 448
mechanical response times 452
Recloser editor 448
Alternate tab 451
Primary tab 451
Rates tab 452
Recloser tab 449
Setup tab 450
recloser types 448
redo 247
refreshing the map display 96
Register
see Organizer 310
registry
clearing 204
regression 213
general steps 214
regression files, comparing 214
regression files, creating 214

Index
regression files, deleting 215

examples 699
running 698
settings 698
regulator types 453
regulators 452
editing 455
optimal regulator position evaluation 696
Regulator editor 455
LDC tab 457
Rates tab 459
Regulator tab 455
regulator types 453
reliability analysis 673
additional options, setting 675
basic options, setting 674
exposure zones 677
mitigation zones 679
performing 677
Reliability Event Management wizard 690
scalars, settings up 677
setting up 673
Reliability Event Management wizard 690
reports 520
dockable 524
errors 523
Feeder Tie Path report 579
generating after an analysis 521
grid-style 532
HTML reports 541
including notes 522
line construction 708
options affecting analysis 523
printing 523
Version 29
warnings 523
warnings, suppressing 523
zones 711
results
viewing in the Synergi editor 247
Results box 515
Results tab
selecting attributes 509

Index
Results Viewer 515

selecting attributes for 515
retire year
ribbon 88
right-click menus 91
rotating the map 95
rule-base, check coordination 622
S
sample model database 149
saving
model data 146
TCC as JPEG 673
TCC files 672
scalars
reliability analysis 677
scatter-plot graphs
generating from a grid-style report 537
scenario
see versions 157
schemas
CMM
viewing 324
schemas, repairing 151
scripts
CMM
examples 327
running using the CMM wizard 328
schema, viewing 324
writing 323
PowerCalc 216
running
automatically 47
scroll wheel
changing the zoom direction 37
searching 71
conductors 267
regulators 268
selecting 267
Summer/Winter analysis 555
transformers 268
sectionalizers 459
editing 459

Index
Sectionalizer editor 459

Rates tab 461
Sectionalizer tab 460
sections 346
adding 346
applying growth curves 292
associating with an area of interest 125
cable conductors, applying 275
coloring based on analysis results 98
connecting 371
customer zones, applying 307
deleting 374
designating for harmonic monitoring 686
disconnecting 371
duct banks, applying 283
editing 347
exposure zones, assigning 679
force unfed 374
isolating 578
mitigation zones, assigning 681
moving 370
projects, editing using the Project Manager 361
projects, editing using the Projects worksheet 359
projects, editing using the Section editor 358
reconductoring 372
renaming 371
rephasing 372
Section editor
Construction tab 349
Coordinates tab 370
Gen - Dist tab 367
Load - Dist tab 352
Load - DTrans tab 362
Load - Proj tab 357
Load - Spot tab 355
Properties tab 351
Section tab 348
Zones tab 368
setting for analysis 496
splitting 373
tagging 248
weather zones, assigning 270
selecting
feeders 68
substations 68
separate neutral cable conductor model 273
set points for weather modeling 259

Index
settings file 55
details 57
settings groups 55
managing 55
shortcuts
custom keyboard shortcuts 83
function keys 82
Show Manager 138
simple impedance cable conductor model 272
simple impedance method, conductors 379
Software Version 29
Solver
running from within Synergi 239
sources
editing 334, 338
spacing
SPV files 672
SQL Dashboard 224
CMM 331
feature locks 230
mining 229
opening 224
running a SQL query 228
sample SQL queries 232
selecting a data type and data source 225
showing tables and fields 227
SQL commands 230
SQL queries 226
using 224
SQL Server data format 168
State Master 222
status bar 90
subsets
about 153
types 153
substations
selecting 68
subtrans 68
configuration 342
converting nodes into subtrans 333
editing 334, 338
modeling 332
selecting 68
Subtran editor 334, 338
Node tab 337, 341
Rates tab 337, 341

Index
Subtran tab 335, 338

Volts/Ohms tab 336, 340
summer ratings 267
conductors 267
enabling 267
regulators 268
transformers 268
SVG files
Publishing export information 213
Switch Manager toolbox tool 216
switch plans 471
Switch Plan Manager 473
switch types 465
switched capacitor modules, controlling 407
switches 462
auto-transfer switches 468
connectivity rules 462
converting a node to pad-mounted switch gear 470
editing 466
elbows 469
loop tie 343
pad-mounted switch gear 469-470
pad-mounted switch gear, editing 471
special types 464
Switch editor 466
Rates tab 468
Switch tab 466
Switch Manager toolbox tool 216
switch plans 471
switch types 465
wandering lateral tie 343
symbols
configuring 113
configuring map display symbols 113
configuring visibility levels 115
Synergi
environment 85
launching from the command line 203
starting 24
using Synergi 85
windows 85
Synergi-MiddleLink, detailed processing 178
Synergi documentation 25

Index
Synergi editor 241

selecting attributes for the Results tab 509
viewing results 247
System Health analysis 708
T
tagging sections and facilities 248
tape shield cable conductor model 274
TCC
about 664
conductor damage curves 670
copy 673
creating a new view 665
explorer 665
grid properties 670
labels 666
legend display 669
loading files 672
notes display 669
plotting curves 665
saving as JPEG 673
saving files 672
setting curve visibility 667
TCC sets 672
transformer curves 667
TCC sets 672
Technical Support 28
running 714
settings 713
tertiary windings 475
basic steps for modeling 475
secondary versus tertiary connections 476
setting up for a transformer 488
three-core cable conductor model 275
throw-over analysis 562
time
customer load curves/time-of-day analysis 294
features and tools 286
time spans in multi-year modeling 73
time of day, selecting 506
time versus current coordination
see TCC 664
toggling details in the map display 96

Index
toolbars
quick access toolbar 89
toolbox 216
Capacitor Manager 217
Feeder Overview 217
Load Center Manager 218
Switch Manager 216
Toolbox tab (model explorer) 88
tools 209
transformers 474
connection models 478
curve shifting in the TCC 669
editing 484
network protectors 480
simulating underutilized 492
tertiary windings 475, 488
Transformer editor 484
LTC/LDC tab 486
Net Protector tab 488
Rates tab 489
Transformer tab 484
transformer model 475
U
uncertainty analysis 708
performing 709
setting up 709
undo 247
Unfused Tap analysis 689
Unit test 710
units
using Synergi 85
using the Synergi editor 241
V
vaults
vector images 140
Version 29
Device Risk Ranking 690
versions
about 157

Index
vertex reduction 384

vertices
views 133
Concepts view 234
visibility
configuring visibility levels for map display symbols 115
Voltage Optimization analysis 695
running 695
setting up 695
W
wandering laterals
about 343
analysis considerations 346
with fault analysis 659
warehouse
see equipment types 397
Warehouse tab (model explorer) 86
warnings
report warnings, suppressing 523
weather
adjusting loads 264
weather modeling 258
defining weather conditions 259
overview 258
profiles 260
selecting seasonal rating 267
set points 259
weather profiles 260
applying to a model 263
creating 261
deleting 264
editing 261, 309
weather zones 269
assigning to a section 270
creating 269
deleting 270
editing 269
windows 85
winter ratings 267
conductors 267
enabling 267
regulators 268

Index
transformers 268
worksheets 209
world files for raster images 139
X
XML data format 168
Y
year, selecting for analysis 506
years
year names in multi-year modeling 73
Z
zones
customer 305
exposure 677
mitigation 679
weather 269
zones report 711
zooming 93

www.dnvgl.com/software

Syn EUser Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syn EUser Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

USER GUIDE

SYNERGI ELECTRIC 6.0

SAFER, SMARTER, GREENER

Restricted rights, warranties, and liabilities

600 Bent Creek Blvd., Suite 100

Mechanicsburg, PA 17050 USA

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 3

Editing data for multiple years from the same editor 77

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 4

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 5

Supported data formats 166

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 6

SQL Server connections for Enterprise databases 188

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 7

Database Hammer 221

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 8

Editing a weather profile 261

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 9

Defining load growth groups 287

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 10

Using the CMM wizard 320

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 11

Gen Dist tab – Section editor 367

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 12

Deleting a graphic point 394

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 13

Editing an inverter 423

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 14

Sectionalizer tab – Sectionalizer editor 460

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 15

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 16

Using the auto-zoom feature 531

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 17

Optimal switching analysis 563

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 18

Load balancing improvement 600

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 19

Configuring settings for an arc flashover analysis 646

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 20

Editing print settings for the TCC display 670

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 21

Running a performance comparison analysis 694

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 22

Networks ribbon 743

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 23

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 24

1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Macros tab.

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 25

Using the Online Help

Figure 1-1. Embedded help window within Synergi

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 26

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 27

Contacting technical support

Preparing a technical support email

Synergi Electric Yammer user community

Synergi Electric RSS feed

Synergi Electric 6.0 User Guide 28

Viewing Synergi version information

1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Support tab.

1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Support tab.

Viewing session data

To view session data

1. In the Synergi ribbon, select the Model tab.